i 
 
GIFT OF 
 Dr, Horace Ivie 
 
a 
 
 il.>^ 
 
FIEST BOOK II LATH; 
 
 CONTAINIWQ 
 
 GRAMMAR, exercise's; AlN'^li'VbCAteULAVifi'sV 
 
 ON THE MKTHOD OF 
 
 CONSTANT IMITATION AND REPETITION. 
 
 JOHN M*C L I N T O C K, A.M., 
 
 FBOFESSOR OF LANQUAGES, 
 
 GEORGE R. CROOKS, A.M., 
 
 ADJUNCT PBOFESSOB OF LANGUAGES IN DICKINSON COLLEOS. 
 
 SEVENTH EDITION. 
 
 HARPER & BROTHERS, PUBLISHERS 
 
 82 CLIFF STREET, NEW YORK. 
 
 18 52. 
 
»)I' J 
 
 *..•> 
 
 '» * »^ "'( '1 ,v 
 
 * « • 
 
 
 GIFT OF 
 
 Entered, according to Act of Congress, in the year 1846, 
 
 By Harper 6c Brothers, 
 
 In the Clerk's Office of the Southern District of New York. 
 
 EDUCATION 
 
 DePt. 
 
PREFACE. 
 
 This book is designed, as the title-page states, to 
 contain within itself Grammar, Exercises, Reading- 
 book, and Dictionary; in short, all that the pupil will 
 need before commencing the regular reading of Cae- 
 sar or any other easy Latin author. It has been pre- 
 pared, as far as possible, on the following principles : 
 
 1. The object of studying languages is twofold : (1), 
 the acquisition of the languages themselves ; and (2), 
 the mental discipline gained in acquiring them. 
 
 2. No language can be thoroughly acquired with- 
 out the outlay of much labour and time. All schemes 
 which promise to dispense with such outlay must be 
 pronounced visionary and chimerical. 
 
 3. But labour without fruit does not contribute to 
 mental cultivation. Labour and pain are not neces- 
 sary companions : learning should not be " wrung 
 from poor striplings like blood from the nose, or the 
 plucking of untimely fruit."* 
 
 4. The grammar of a language cannot be understood 
 until the language itself is at least partially acquired. 
 
 5. The vernacular may be learned, so far as its use 
 is concerned, without grammar : a foreign living lan- 
 guage may be so learned, but never so thoroughly, 
 nor even so rapidly, as with grammatical aids. In the 
 study of a dead language grammar is indispensable. 
 
 6. "A grammar intended for beginners should be 
 formed altogether differently from one intended for 
 
 Milton. 
 
 924208 
 
IV . PREFACE. 
 
 the higher classes, both in the distribution of the mat- 
 ter and in the mode of presenting it. Those who think 
 that the pupil should use the same grammar from the 
 beginnmg of his course to the end, are quite in error."* 
 
 7. In elementary books, or in teaching, no etymo- 
 logical form nor grammatical principle should be pre- 
 sented to the pupil without an immediate apphcation 
 thereof to practice, which should be kept up, both 
 orally and in writing, from the very first lesson. 
 
 8. The all-important rule of practice, in the acqui- 
 sition of language, is imitation and repetition. This 
 is no new invention ; all good teachers have known 
 and used it ; but yet it has been but slightly employ- 
 ed in elementary books heretofore. 
 
 9. Models for imitation should be simple at first, 
 and gradually made more complicated ; but they 
 should always be selected from pure authors, say, in 
 Latin, from Cicero and Ceesar. 
 
 10. The pupiFs ear should be trained to correct- 
 ness from the beginning, and the simplest rules of 
 prosody learned and applied as soon as possible. 
 For this purpose, the quantity of all syllables should 
 be marked in elementary books, and attention to it 
 should be strictly enforced by the teacher. 
 
 11. The foreign idiom, both as to the use and ar- 
 rangement of words, should be made familiar to the 
 pupil by constant practice. Nothing can be more 
 hurtful than exercises in which foreign words are used 
 in the idiom, and according to the arrangement of the 
 vernacular. 
 
 How far we have been successful in carrying out 
 these principles, the book itself must show. 
 
 • Kiihner 
 
PREFACE. y 
 
 We have aimed to combine the advantages of con- 
 stant repetition and imitation of Latin sentences from 
 the beginning, with a more thorough drilHng in ety- 
 mological forms than is common. In order to effect 
 this combination, we have necessarily deviated from 
 the ordinary grammatical com-se to some extent ; but 
 we trust that experienced teachers will find, from an 
 examination of the table of contents alone, that our 
 arrangement is not devoid of systematic and even 
 logical order. 
 
 While we have not gone out of our way to bring in 
 novelties, we have yet adopted every new method 
 which we have deemed to be an improvement. None 
 of the class-books of any repute in England or Ger- 
 many have escaped our notice in the preparation of 
 this work ; and we have made free use of them all, 
 without slavish adherence to any. Perhaps the most 
 marked peculiarity of the etymological part of the 
 book will be found to be the doctrine of the genders of 
 nouns of the third declension, which we have reduced, 
 for the first time, to a form at once philosophical, we 
 hope, and practical.* Some steps toward the meth- 
 od here presented have been taken by Madvig, Weis- 
 SENBORN, and others in Germany ; but none of these 
 writers has brought out a clear exposition of the doc- 
 trine, adapted to the actual purposes of instruction. 
 The arrangement, also, of the verbs,t according to 
 the formation of the perfect-stem, founded mainly 
 upon the classification of Grotefend (better set forth 
 by Allen), will be found, we trust, to be an improve- 
 ment upon any yet offered. 
 
 * The summary of rales, with all the exceptions, "vnll be fotind to occa* 
 py two pages only, viz., p. 132, 133. 
 
 ♦ Lessons Ixii.-lxix., and p. 268-279. ^ 
 
 1* 
 
VI PREFACE. 
 
 The Syntax, in its details, generally follows Zumpt, 
 but in the arrangement, especially of Part II., we 
 have approached nearer to the plan of Billroth* 
 The admirable syntax of Becker, adopted by Kuhner 
 in his Greek and Latin Grammars, we deem too dif- 
 ficult for beginners. 
 
 The Exercises are selected, as far as possible, from 
 Caesar's Gallic War. Although we have laboured 
 nard to keep out bad Latin, we do not hope that all 
 our sentences will escape criticism. We have found, 
 from actual experiment in our classes, that the exer- 
 cises to be rendered from English into Latin are 
 within the capacity of any student of ordinary indus- 
 try who studies the book in order ; and we do not 
 know that this can be said of any book of the kind, 
 of equal extent, in use among us. 
 
 A few words as to the use of the book may not be 
 out of place. Our own method has been to employ 
 the lessons, for a considerable time at least, entirely 
 in oral instruction, the teacher pronouncing first the 
 Latin sentences distinctly, and requiring the pupil to 
 give the corresponding English without book ; and 
 then pronouncing the English sentences, and requi- 
 ring the pupil to give the corresponding Latin. At 
 the quantities are marked (in Part I.) in all syllable? 
 except those to which the general rules apply, we 
 require the pupil to observe quantity in his pronun 
 ciation from the very beginning, so that he learns 
 prosody by practice before the rules are given. For 
 the purpose of review, the summary of Etymology 
 (Part III.), which contains, in short compass, all that 
 is necessary to be learned by heart, will be found 
 very convenient. After the student has passed 
 
PREFACE. Vll 
 
 through Parts I. and 11. , he will find little difficulty 
 in committing accurately the Rules of Syntax (Part 
 IV.), with most of which he will be already familiar. 
 The Reading Lessons at the end will give nim easy 
 practice in the syntax and in word-building. For 
 the convenience of those who may need it, we have 
 condensed into a few pages, in Appendix I., all of 
 Prosody that is essential for the understanding of 
 hexameter verse. 
 
 The preparation of this book was originally sug- 
 gested by our sense of the inadequacy of the ordina- 
 ry modes of instruction, and especially by the ad- 
 vantage which we ourselves had derived from the 
 use of Ollendorff's method in the study of the Ger- 
 man language. Finding that Rev. T. K. Arnold 
 had prepared a series of books on the same principle, 
 we used them in our own classes for some time, with 
 a view to revising them for republication. They 
 were found unsuited to our purpose in many respects, 
 and we therefore formed the design of preparing an 
 entirely new series, adapted to the use of American 
 schools. The first of these is now presented to the 
 pubhc. 
 
 Dickinson College, April 7, 1846. 
 
 *^* In Part I. the quantity is marked on all syllables except those to 
 which the general rules apply. At the beginning of Part II. additional 
 rules of quantity are given, and the marks ai"e subsequently omitted on 
 many syllables, in order to afford the pupil exercise upon the rules. In the 
 Syntax and Reading Lessons they are omitted almost entirely. Great pains 
 have been taken to ensure accuracy in tlie marks of quantity, but we can- 
 not hope to have avoided error entirely. 
 
PREFACE TO SECOXD EDITION, 
 
 In this edition, a number of errors in the marks ol 
 qaantity, which had crept into the first, are corrected. 
 We have also placed a series of Examination Ques- 
 tions at the end of the book, which will add. we hope, 
 to its practical value. 
 
 €3tHkie, 
 
TABLE OF CONTENTS. 
 
 INTaODUCTION. 
 
 Pag* 
 
 ^1. Division of the Letters 1 
 
 $ 2. Syllables, duantity, Accent 1 
 
 $ 3. Pronunciation . . . , 3 
 
 i 4. Division of Words • 4 
 
 PART L 
 
 PARTIAL EXHIBITION OF THK PORMS OP WDIUDt. 
 
 Summary of Essential Points 8 
 
 f 5. First Declension of Nouns. — First Conjugation of Verbs. (I. — V.) 10 
 First Declension of Nouns, Nominative, Vocative, and Genitive 
 
 Cases 10 
 
 First Conjugation of Verbs»/n^ra7wi^«re 14 
 
 First Declension of Nouns, Accusative Case. — ^First Conjuga- 
 tion of Verbs, Transitive 17 
 
 First Declension of Nouns, Dative and Ablative Cases . . 19 
 $ 6. Second Declension of Nouns. — Secand Conjugation of Verbs. 
 
 (VI.— Vm.) 22 
 
 Second Declension, Masculine 22 
 
 Second Declension, Neuter. — Second Conjugation of Verbs . 26 
 ^7. Adjectives of First Class, Three Endings. (DC.— X.) . . .28 
 
 Forms of Adjectives in us, a, um 28 
 
 Some forms of 'Esse, to be , ,30 
 
 $ 8. Third and Fourth Conjugations of Verbs. (XL) . . .33 
 
 $ 9. Passive Verbs. (XIL— XIH.) 38 
 
 $ 10. Third Declension cf Nouns, Partial Treatment. (XTV.— XV.) . 40 
 \ 11. Adjectives of Second Class, Two Endings. (XVI.) . . .44 
 $ 12. Adjectives of Third Class, One Ending. (XVTL) . . .46 
 
 ^■[2. Fourth Declension of Nouns. (XVm.) 48 
 
 ^\A. Fifth Declensimi of Nouns. (XIX) 51 
 
 5 15. Pronouns. (XX.— XXXL) ........ 53 
 
 Pronoun, Personal, 1st Person. Verb, 1st Person . . ,53 
 Pronoun, Personal, 2d Person. Verb, 2d Person . . ,5? 
 
 Pronoun, Personal, 3d Person , 61 
 
 Pronouns, Demonstrative . . 63 
 
 Pronoun, Relative , . .68 
 
 Pronoun, Interrogative 7f 
 
X TABLE OF CONTENTS. 
 
 Pronouns, Indefinite .72 
 
 Pronouns, Correlative 74 
 
 ^\Q. Numerals. (XXXIL— XXXm.) . . . . 77 
 
 $ 17. Verbs of Third Conjugation in io. (XXXIV.) . . 81 
 
 ^ 8. Verbs, Deponent. (XXXV.) ...... 83 
 
 \ 19. Adverbs. (XXXVI.) 85 
 
 \ 20. Prepositions. (XXXVII.— XXXVIII.) 88 
 
 \ 21. Analysis of Tense formations. (XXXIX.— XLI.) ... 92 
 
 PART II. 
 
 FULLER EXHIBITION OF THE FORMS OF WOKBS. 
 
 $ 1. Additional Rules of Quantity 99 
 
 $ 2. Tenses of Verbs for Completed Action, Partial Treatment. 
 
 (XLIII.— XLVI.) 102 
 
 Perfect Tenses of E s s e 102 
 
 Perfect Tenses of 1st, 2d, and 4th Conjugations . . . .104 
 
 Perfect Tenses of 3d Conjugation 106 
 
 ^ 3. Third Declension of Nmcns, Fuller Treatment. (XL VII. 
 
 — LVII.) . • 110 
 
 Irregular Nouns 129 
 
 Summary of Rules of Gender, Third Declension .... 132 
 
 $4. Comparison of Adjectives. (LVIII. — LX.) .... 134 
 
 $ 5. Comparison of Adverbs 140 
 
 $6. Supine. (LXI.) 141 
 
 § 7. Tenses of Verbs for Completed Action, Active Voice. Fuller 
 
 Treatment. (LXII.— LXIX.) 144 
 
 Forms of Perfect Stem, 1st Conjugation . . . 141 
 
 Forms of Perfect Stem, 2d Conjugation . . * . . 146 
 
 Forms of Perfect Stem, 3d Conjugation ..... 149 
 
 Forms of Perfect Stem, 4th Conjugation 159 
 
 $8. Tenses for Completed Action, Passive Voice. (LXX.) . .162 
 
 I 9. Participles. (LXXI.— LXXV.) 165 
 
 Present Participle Active 165 
 
 Futm-e Participle Active 168 
 
 Perfect Participle Passive 170 
 
 Ablative Absolute 172 
 
 ^IQ. Infinitive. (LXXVL— LXXIX.) . . . . . . 176 
 
 Forms of Infinitive . 176 
 
 Accusative with Infinitive 178 
 
 $11. Gerund. (LXXX.) 184 
 
 1 12. Gerundive. (LXXXI.— LXXXII.) 187 
 
 Gerundive used for Gerund 187 
 
 Gerundive used to express Duty or Necessity .... 189 
 
 $ 13. Imperative Mood. (LXXXIII.) 192 
 
 $ 14. Sentences 194 
 
 \ 15 Conjunctions. (LXXXIV.— LXXXV.) 195 
 
TABLE OF CONTENTS. 
 
 XI 
 
 Paga 
 
 f 16. Subjunctive Mood. (LXXXVI.— XCm.) 199 
 
 Subjunctive Present 199 
 
 Subjunctive Perfect 202 
 
 Subjunctive Imperfect and Pluperfect. Conditional Sen- 
 tences . . . . 205 
 
 Subjunctive with ut, ne (Pwrpose) 209 
 
 Suh^xmctive with nt {Consequence). Succession of Tenses .212 
 Subjunctive with quin, quo, quominus. Periphrastic Forms 214 
 
 Subjunctive with qunm 217 
 
 Subjunctive in Relative Sentences 220 
 
 $ 17. Oratio Obliqua. (XCIV.) ... .... 223 
 
 \ 18. Impersonal Verbs. (XCV.— XCVI.) 226 
 
 $ 19. Irregular Verbs. (XCVIL— CI.) 230 
 
 Posse 230 
 
 Velle, Nolle, Mails 232 
 
 .234 
 
 236 
 
 .... 238 
 241 
 
 Perre 
 
 Fieri, Edere 
 Ire, duire, Neqnire 
 $ 20. Defective Verbs. (CII.) 
 
 PART in. 
 
 SUMMARY OF ETTMOLOGT. 
 
 91. 
 $2. 
 $3. 
 
 $4. 
 $5. 
 $6. 
 
 1. 
 
 2. 
 
 3. 
 
 4. 
 
 5. 
 
 10. 
 
 Letters, Quantity, S^c, 
 
 Noun , 
 
 Adjective 
 
 Numerals 
 
 Pronoun 
 
 Verb . 
 
 Classes of Verba 
 
 Parts of the Verb 
 
 Conjugation . 
 
 The Auxiliary E B s e, <o ie 
 
 Paradigms of Regular Verbs 
 
 Verbs in io of the 3d Conjugation 
 
 Deponent Verbs . 
 
 Periphrastic Conjugation 
 
 Formation of Perfect Stem 
 
 Lists of Verbs, with various 
 
 First Conjugation 
 
 Second Conjugation 
 
 Third Conjugation 
 
 Fourth Conjugation 
 
 Deponent Verbs 
 
 Inchoative Verbs 
 Irregular Verbs, Paradigmi 
 D'^ferrive Verbs . 
 
 Perfects and Supines 
 
 247 
 248 
 251 
 
 254 
 255 
 258 
 258 
 258 
 259 
 260 
 261 
 266 
 266 
 266 
 267 
 
 271 
 270 
 277 
 279 
 279 
 289 
 
Xll TABLE OF CONTENTS. 
 
 Pac« 
 
 13. Impersonal "Verbs . 283 
 
 $ 7. Adverb 285 
 
 $ 8. Preposition , 288 
 
 $ 9. Conjunction 289 
 
 J 10. Interjection 290 
 
 PART IV. 
 
 SUMMARY OF SYNTAX. 
 FART I. SIMPLE SENTENCE!. 
 
 L Subject and Predicate 293 
 
 II. Use of Cases 295 
 
 Nominative 295 
 
 Genitive 295 
 
 Dative 298 
 
 Accusative • 300 
 
 Ablative ^ 302 
 
 UI. Use of the Indefinite Verb . . '' 306 
 
 Infinitive 306 
 
 Participle 307 
 
 Gerund 308 
 
 Gerundive 308 
 
 Su^ne 309 
 
 PART II. COMPOUND SENTENCES. 
 
 I. CJo-ordinate Sentences . . . 310 
 
 II. Subordinate Sentences . 310 
 
 A. Participial Sentences .311 
 
 B. Accusative with Infinitive 312 
 
 C. Conjunctive Sentences 313 
 
 D. Relative Sentences 316 
 
 E. Interrogative Sentences 318 
 
 Oratio Obliqua . ' 319 
 
 Appendix I. Prosody . .323 
 
 Appendix II. Greek Nonns ..,,,... 326 
 Appendix III. The CaJendar ........ 327 
 
 Appendix IV. Abbreviations 329 
 
 Word-building 333 
 
 Reading Lessons • • . . . 340 
 
 Latin-English Vocabulary , . 355 
 
 BnOLISH-LaTIN V6CABULART .•••••.. 383 
 
INTRODUGT^ION.^ 
 
 ^ 1. DIVISION 0]?^.Tiffi,liETXERSr'.i JA 
 
 (1.) The letters are the same as in English, with 
 the omission of w ; k Is used in but few words, and y 
 and z only in words borrowed from the Greek. 
 
 (2.) Six are vowels j^ viz., a, e, i, o, m, ?/ ; the remaining 
 nineteen are consonants,^ 
 
 1 Sounds formed by an uninterrupted emission of the air from the throat 
 Called voivels (vo c ale s = sounding letters), because capable of being 
 sounded by themselves. 
 
 ' Sounds formed by interTnipting the emission of air from the throat. 
 Called consmianta (con-son are = to sound together), because incaimble 
 of being sounded by themselves. 
 
 (3.) The consonants are divided into 
 (a) Liquids,' Z, m, n, r; 
 (6) Spirants,^ ^, 5, J ; 
 
 (c) Mutes,' i, c, c?,/, g, Tc^ p^ q^ t, v ; 
 
 3 The Liquids are formed by a partial interruption of the voice ; the Spir 
 rants chiefly by the breath ; and the Mutes by a more complete interrup- 
 tion of the passage of the air from the tlu-oat. //is regarded, indeed, sim- 
 ply as an aspiration, though in many words it fills the place of a conso- 
 nant. 
 
 [d) Double consonants,* .r, z. 
 
 * X'ls compounded of c s, g s, and z (occurring only in Greek words) of d s. 
 
 (4.) The union of two vowels into one syllable forms 
 a diphthong. These are^ in Latin, a u, e u, a e, o e (gen- 
 erally written cb, «), and, in a few words, ei, oi, ui. 
 
 § 2. SYLLABLES, QUANTITY, ACCENT. 
 
 (5.) Every word contains as many syllables as vow- 
 els ; e. ^., m i 1 e s, a soldier, is not pronounced in one syl- 
 lable, as the English word miles, hnX in two, mi-les. 
 
 (6.) The quantity of syllables (that is, their length, 
 
 * This Introduction may be omitted by very young pupils in their first 
 Btudy of the work; but the references to it in the subsequent lessooji 
 •hoaJd be carefully attended to. 
 
2 QUANTITY. ACCENT. 
 
 or shortness) depends upon that of the vowels which 
 they contain. The dash ("") placed over a vowel de- 
 notes that it iR Zon^,; .t;J[ie;, semicircle (^), that it is short. 
 A v(?wfc/l that 'jtiEty Vbfe .i^ed either as long or short is 
 marked (p)^ and is Sfti4 tb'he common. 
 •'* ■(7;) 'JFlie 'following' r'ttles for the quantity of sylla- 
 bles must be carefully observed: 
 
 (a) All diphthongs are long ; e. g., mens-£e, tables; 
 au-rum, gold. 
 
 {b) A vowel followed by another vowel is sho7^t ; 
 e. g.9 Deus, God. 
 
 This rule applies, even though h intervene between the two vowels^ as 
 ft is not regarded as a consonant (3, b, n. 3) ; e. g., triho, veho. 
 
 (c) A vowel followed by two consonants, or a doub- 
 le one (3, d)y is long by position ; e. g., in am ant, the 
 a before n t is long by position. 
 
 I^* [Every syllable to which none of these three rules is applicable will b« 
 marked with j.ts proper quantity in the following pages, until other rules are given.] 
 
 (8.) A word of but one syllable is called a Monosyl- 
 lable ; of two, a Dissyllable ; of more than two, a Pol- 
 y syllable. Thus, 1 e x is a monosyllable ; 1 e g i s, a dis- 
 syllable; in col as, a polysyllable. 
 
 (9.) The last syllable of a word is called the ulti- 
 mate ; the next to the last, the penult ; the second from 
 the last, the antepenult. Thus, in the word in col as, 
 the syllable las is the ultimate, c6, the penult, and in 
 the antepenult. 
 
 (10.) The accent of a syllable is a stress or eleva- 
 tion of the voice in pronouncing it. Observe the fol- 
 lowing rules : 
 
 {a) Every dissyllable is accented on the penult ; e, 
 g , bonus, pono. 
 
 (6) Every polysyllable is accented, 
 
 1. On the penultt when the penult is long; e. g,, 
 §,mare. 
 
PRONUNCIATION. 3 
 
 2. On the antepenult, when the penult is short; 
 e.g., animus. 
 
 ^ 3. PRONUNCIATION. 
 
 (11.) [Almost every-modem nation has its own way of pfronouncing Lafc* 
 in. But as the vowels have nearly the same sounds in all the different 
 coimtries of Continental Europe, there is something approaching to uni- 
 formity in their pronunciation; the English, however, give peculiar 
 sounds to some of the vowels, and they pronoimce Latin, therefore, unlike 
 all the rest of the world. In this country two methods prevail, which, for 
 convenience' sake, may be called the Continental and the English. Wa 
 give them both, stating, at the same time, our decided preference for the 
 first, both on the score of consistency and convenience. In both methods 
 tUe consonants are pronounced nearly as in English.] 
 
 (a) The Continental Method. 
 
 Table of Vowel Sounds. 
 
 Short a, as in hat. Long i, as in machine. 
 
 Long a, as in father. Short 5, as in not. 
 
 Short e, as in net. Long 6, as in no. 
 
 Long e, as in there. Short u, as in tub. 
 
 Short I, as in sit. Long u, as in full. 
 
 Diphthongs, 
 
 SB or OB, as e in there. 
 
 au, as ou in our. 
 
 eu, as eu in feud. 
 
 ei (rarely occurring), as i in nice. 
 
 {b) The English Method. 
 The vowels have the English long or short sounds. 
 Exc. A final, in words of more than one syllable, 
 has a broad sound ; as, fama (fame-ah). 
 
 Monosyllables, 
 
 In monosyllables, if the vowel be the last letter, it 
 has the long sound ; as me, do ; if any other letter, the 
 short sound ; as d^ d&. 
 
4 DIVISION or WORDS. 
 
 Dissyllables and Polysyllables. 
 
 (1.) The vowel of an accented penult has the long 
 sound, 
 
 (a) Before another vowel ; as, D e us. 
 
 (b) Before a single consonant; as, J 6 vis. 
 It has the shoi't sound, 
 
 (a) Before two consonants, or a double consonant ; 
 as, mundus, rexit. 
 
 (2.) The vowel of an accented antepenult has the 
 short sound ; as, r e g ibus. 
 
 (3.) An accented vowel before a mute and liquid 
 has usually the long sound ; as, s a era. 
 
 ^ 4. DIVISION OF WORDS. 
 
 (12.) I. Words are divided, according to their 5?^- 
 nijlcation, into eight classes, called Parts of Speech, 
 viz.. Noun, Adjective, Pronoun, Verb, Adverb, Prep- 
 osition, Conjunction, Interjection. 
 
 (13.) The Noun is the name of an object (person, 
 or thing) ; e. g., John, man, house. 
 
 Nouns are divided into, 
 
 (a) 'Proper, denoting individual ob]ects; e.g., John, 
 CcBsar, Rome. 
 
 (6) Common, denoting one or more of a class of 
 objects ; e. g., man^ house, horses. 
 
 (c) Abstract, denoting a quality; e. g., goodness, 
 haste, virtue. 
 
 (14.) The Adjective expresses a quality or property 
 belonging' to an object ; e. g., good, small ; as, a good 
 boy, a small house. 
 
 (15.) The Pronoun is a substitute for the noun; e. 
 g., he, she, it, are substitutes for man, woman, book. 
 
 (16.) The Verb declares something of a person or 
 thing. 
 
DIVISION OF WORDS. % O 
 
 E. g., the boy dances ; the boy sleeps ; the boy is good. (In this 
 
 last case tlie quality " good" is affirmed of " boy," by means of 
 
 the verb is.) 
 
 S 
 ^^ Participles, Gerunds, and Supines are words partaking in the 
 
 meaniyig of the verb, and in ih.e form of the noun. 
 
 (17.) The Adverb qualifies the meaning of a verb, 
 adjective, or other adverb ; e. g., the boy learns rapid- 
 ly ; the boy is remarkably faithful ; the boy learns very 
 rapidly. 
 
 (18.) Prepositions express the relations of objects 
 simply ; e. g.^from me ; in the house. 
 
 (19.) Conjunctions connect words and sentences ; 
 e. g.f Thomas and John went to town ; Thomas went, 
 but John remained. 
 
 (20.) Interjections are merely signs of emotion ; e. 
 g.f alas! 
 
 (21.) 11. Words are divided, according to their 
 form, into, 
 
 (1) Four inflected, viz.. Noun, Adjective, Pronoun, 
 Verb. 
 
 (2) Four uninflectedf viz.. Adverb, Preposition, Con- 
 junction, Interjection. 
 
 Eem. Inflection is the variation of a word to express different rela- 
 tions ; e. g., boy, boys, the boy's hat ; I love, I am \oved, &c. The in- 
 flection of Nouns is called Declension ; of Verbs, Conjugation. The 
 Latin language makes much more use of inflection than the English. 
 
 (22.) III. Words are divided, according to their/or- 
 mation, into, 
 
 (1) Derivative f i. e., derived from other words. 
 
 (2) Primitive^ i. e., not derived from other words. 
 
 E. g., manly, manlwod, are derivatives from the primitive man. 
 
 (3) Compound, i. e., made up by the union of two 
 or more w^ords. 
 
 (4.) Simple, i. e., not so made up. 
 
 E. g., man-kind is a compound, made up of the two simple word* 
 vtan and kind. 
 
 A 2 
 
PARI 1. 
 
 PARTIAL EXHIBITION OF THE FORMS OF WORDS, 
 
 TENSES OF VERBS FOR INCOMPLETE ACTION 
 
SUMMARY. 
 
 r 
 
 [The rules and statements on this page and the following are to be 
 thoroughly learned, as they must be applied constantly.] 
 
 (23.) Of the Letters. 
 
 (1) Six are vowels, a, c, 2, o, «, y ; 
 
 (2) Four liquids, I, m, n, r ; 
 
 (3) Three c-sounds, c, g, q ; 
 
 (4) Two ^-sounds, 6, p ; 
 
 (5) Two ^-sounds, d, t ; 
 
 (6) Two double consonants, .r, z. 
 
 (7) The diphthongs are au, eu, ae,oe (and rarely cf, oi, 
 ui). 
 
 (24.) General Rules of Quantity. 
 
 (1) A vowel before another is sJiort ; e. g., v? a. 
 
 (2) A vowel before two consonants, or a double one, is 
 long hy j)osition ; e. g., am a nt. 
 
 [As a mute followed by a liquid causes some exceptions to this 
 rule, we shall mark the quantity, in that case, doubtful ; thus, 
 I gi-i.] 
 
 (3) All diphthongs are long ; e. g., mens ss, au-rum. 
 
 [In the following pages of Part I., the quantity of all syllables is 
 marked, except those which are covered by the above rules.] 
 
 (25.) 
 
 General Rules of Gender. 
 
 [In English, gender is determined by sex alone ; e. g., man is mas- 
 culine, woman feminine. But in Latin, gender is determined partly by 
 the meaning of nouns, and partly by their endings. The general rules 
 here given from the meanings apply to nouns of all the declensions.] 
 
SUMMARY. 9 
 
 I. Masculines: 'Nn.mes of male beings ; of most rivers^ 
 winds, mountains, months, and nations. 
 
 II. Feminizes: 'Namesof female beings, cities, countries, 
 trees, plants, and islands. 
 
 III. Neuters : All indeclinable words. 
 
 IV. Common : Such as have but one form for masculine 
 
 and feminine; e. g.,exu 1, an exile (male or female). 
 [These four rules are contained in the following verses.] 
 
 (25. a.) Males, rivers, winds, and mountains most we find 
 With months and nations Masculine declined ; 
 "But females, cities, countries, trees we name, 
 As Feminine ; most islands, too, the same. 
 Common are such as both the genders take, 
 And Neuter all words undeclined we make. 
 
 [There are many exceptions from these rules, which must be learned 
 by observation.] 
 
 Explanation of Marks and Abbreviations. 
 The mark ^^ ipdicates a short vowel. 
 " " — indicates a long vowel. 
 " *' = indicates that two words or phrases are equiv- 
 
 alent to each other. 
 " " -\- between two words shows that they are com- 
 pounded together. 
 e. g. means, /or example (exempli gi-atia). 
 Passages in brackets [ J are not meant to be committed to 
 memoiy. 
 
 In the Exercises, words in parentheses ( ) are not meant 
 to be translated. 
 
 The References are made to paragraphs, not to pages. 
 In a reference, R. means Remark ; N. means foot-note. 
 
§ 5. 
 
 FIRST DECLENSION OF NOUNS.— FIRST CON 
 JUGATION OF VERBS. (I.— V.) 
 
 LESSON L ' ^ 
 
 First Declension of Nouns. — Nominative, Vocative, and 
 
 Genitive Cases, 
 
 (26.) Examples. 
 
 {a) Shade or shadow. 
 
 Umbra. 
 
 (&) Of the shade. 
 
 Umbrae. 
 
 (c) The wood, 
 
 Sylva. 
 
 \d) Of the wood. 
 
 Sylva. 
 
 (27.) The Latin has no article. Umbra maybe a 
 shade, or the shade, according to its connection with 
 other words. 
 
 (28.) The words umbra and sylva are names of 
 things belonging to certain classes, and are, therefore, 
 common nouns (13, h), 
 
 (29.) In English, certain words (of, with, by, &c.) 
 are generally placed before nouns, to express their re- 
 lations to other words ; e. g., of the wood, &c. ; but in 
 Latin these relations are commonly indicated by dif- 
 ferent endings of the noun (21, (2),R.) ; e. g., sylv-a, 
 the wood; sylv-se, of the wood. 
 
 (30.) That part of the noun to which the ending is 
 added is called the stem; e. ^., sylv- is the stem of 
 sylv-a; terr- is the stem of terr-a, the earth. 
 
 (31.) There are in Latin six endings, which, added 
 to the stem, form six cases, the Nominative, Genitive, 
 Dative, Accusative, Vocative, Ablative. 
 
 (32.) And as we may speak of objects as one or 
 moret there are two numbers, the singular and plural^ 
 
FIRST DECLENSION. 
 
 11 
 
 distinguished by their endings ; e. g., umbra, the shad' 
 ow ; umbr £§, the shadows. A 
 
 (33.) In this lesson we shall use but three cases, the 
 nominative, vocative, and genitive. 
 
 («) The nominative answers to the question who ? 
 or what ? and gives the simple name of the thing spok- 
 en of. In the example (26, a), umb r a, shade, is in the 
 nominative. 
 
 (6) The same form of the noun, when spoken to, is 
 called the vocative ; e. g., umbra, shade; O shade ! 
 
 (c) The genitive expresses, in general, those rela- 
 tions which are expressed in English by the possessive 
 case, or by the preposition of, and answers to the ques- 
 tion whose? of whom? of v)hat? e. g., umbra, the 
 shade (of what ?), s y 1 v se (of the wood). Here s y 1 v se 
 is in the genitive. 
 
 (34.) There are five declensions of nouns, distin- 
 guished from each other by the endings of the geni- 
 tive singular. In this lesson we shall use only nouns 
 of the 
 
 FIRST DECLENSION. 
 
 Case-Endings and Paradigm. — Nominative and GeU" 
 
 itive. 
 
 ENDINGS. 
 
 (35.) (a) 
 
 (6) By adding these endings to the stem sylv-, we 
 get the following 
 
 PARTIAL PARADIGM. 
 
 Norn, and Voc. 
 Gen. 
 
 Sing. • 
 
 a 
 
 Plur, 
 ffi 
 
 ai-um. 
 
 Nom. and Voc. 
 Gen. 
 
 Sing. 
 
 sylv-a, the wood ; O wood : 
 sylv-a?, of the nood. 
 
 sylv-BB, the woods ; O woods ! 
 sylv-arum, of the woods. 
 
 (36.) (a) Thus, nouns of the first declension have the nom. 
 and voc. ending ft {<ihort), and the gen. ending ae {long^ 24, 3). 
 
12 FIRST DJ3CLENSI0N. 
 
 (6) The penult a of the gen. pi. is long, (c) They are of the 
 feminine gender, except the names of men or male beings, or 
 rivers: thus, sy Iv-a is fern.; but naut-ti, a sailor, poet-a, . 
 npoet, and the like, are masc. 
 
 [A few Greek nouns of this declension end in e fern., and as, es, masc. 
 See Appendix.] 
 
 (37.) EXERCISE. 
 
 [In the Vocabularies, the nom. case is always given, with the genitive 
 endi?ig- subjoined.] " 
 
 I. Vocabulary. 
 
 Queen, reglna, se. 
 Crown, corona, ra. 
 PFiVi"", ala, SB. 
 Dove, columba, bb. 
 Feather, pluma, ae. 
 Daughter, filia, se. 
 A Celt, Celta, ib. 
 Farmer, agricola, eb. (m.) 
 Rose, rosa, ob. 
 Maid-servant, ancilla, ae. 
 
 II. Translate into Latin. 
 
 Of a crown. — Of a queen. — O Galba ! — Of crowns. — Of a 
 feather. — Of eagles. — Of the Celt. — Wings. — Roses. — Of 
 doves. — Of injm-ies. — Of a daughter. — O daughter! — Of tlie 
 province. — Languages. — Provinces. — Belgians. — Of the prov- 
 inces. — Of the maid-servant. — O maid-servant ! — The farmers. 
 — O farmer! — Of memory. — O Belgian! — Of Gaul. — The 
 eagles. y 
 
 III. Answer the questions in the foot-note.* 
 
 [A few questions are subjoine^in tlie foot-notes, merely as specimens to 
 the fii'st lessons.] 
 
 Galba, Galba, 03. (m.) 
 Flight, fi'iga, CB. 
 Province, provincia, ae. 
 Memory, recollection, mSmoriS, 
 Gaul, Gallia, se. 
 Eagle, aquila, se. 
 A Belgian, Belga, ae. 
 Injury, injixiia, ae. 
 Language, lingua, ae. 
 
 LESSON II. 
 First Declension of Nouns. — Nominative, Yocative,an4 
 Genitive Cases. 
 (38.) Exampks. 
 (a) The queen's crown. j CoronS, regina?. 
 
 * What is the quantity of u in umbra ? ($24, 2.) Of as in sylv-te ? (24, .?.) 
 Of u in columba? (-24, 2.) Of the penult (9) in fTha 7 (24, 1.) Ofi in 
 lingTiS? Ofi in ancilla? (24, 2.) 
 
FIRST DECLENSION. 
 
 13 
 
 (a) Rule of Position.— The genitive (when uncmph.itic) 
 stands after the noun on which it depends; e. g., re- 
 gin ee in (a) stands after corona. 
 (6) The ^Mec7i'5 crown (i. e., I Reginss corona. 
 not the king's). j 
 
 (&) Rule of Position. — The genitive (when emphatic) 
 stands before the noun on which it depends ; e. g.^ in {h) 
 r e g i n ae stands before corona. 
 [Words in the exercises considered emphatic are in italics.] 
 
 (39.) EXERCISE. 
 
 I. Translate into English, 
 
 Ala columbsB. 
 Pluma aquilse. 
 O regina (voc). 
 Filia agricolae. 
 Regina filia. 
 Columbee plumd,. 
 
 Rosa ancillse. 
 Galbce f uga. 
 Provincia Gallice. 
 Memoria fugae. 
 6 filia! 
 Aquildrum f uga. 
 
 Fuga Belgarum. 
 Plumae aquilarum. 
 Injuridrum memorid. 
 Lingua Celtariim. 
 Filise reginariira. 
 Lingua Belgarum. 
 
 II. Answer the questions in the foot-note, 
 
 III. Translate into Latin. 
 
 The queen's dove. 
 The dinner's eagle. 
 The flight of doves. 
 The girVs rose. 
 The queen's rose. 
 The flight of the Celts. 
 The winffs of the doves. 
 
 The wings of eagles. 
 
 O eagle. 
 
 Galba's daughter. 
 
 The shades of the woods. 
 
 The memorj' of the queen. 
 
 The girl's dove. 
 
 The lanc^uage of the province. 
 
 The recollection of an injury. O Belgians ! 
 
 O Celts ! The flight of the queen. 
 
 * 1. What is the quantity of the ultimate (9) of a n c i 1 1 re ? Why ? [24, 
 3.) Of its penult? (9.) Why? (24,2.) Of the penult of Gallice ? Why? 
 (24. 1.) 
 
 2. What is the quantity of a in injuri arum? {2G,b.) in memoria? 
 (Stf, a.) 
 
 ?. What is the stem ofcolumba, ala, rosa? &c. (30.) 
 
 4. What is the gender of r o s ft, a 1 a, f u g a ? &c. (36, c.) What is the 
 gender of G alb a, agri col a? (25, a.) 
 
 5. What is the case of rosa, provincioe, iujuriarum, memo- 
 ria? What their number ? 
 
 fi. How many cases have Latin nouns? (31.) What are they? (31.) 
 
 B 
 
14 FIRST DECLENSION. 
 
 LESSON III. 
 First Declension of Nouns. — Nominative and Genitive 
 Cases. — First Conjugation of Verbs. — Intransitives. 
 (40.) Examples. 
 
 To fly, 
 
 To dance., 
 (a) The eagle flies, 
 (6) Tlie girl dances, 
 
 volare. 
 saltarg. 
 aquila voldt. 
 piiella saltat. 
 
 (41.) SUBJECT AND PREDICATE. 
 
 {a.) Every sentence (e. g.y the eagle flies) consists 
 of two parts : 
 
 1. The subject, i. e., that of which something is de- 
 clared (a noun, or some word used instead of a noun) ; 
 e. g., eagle. 
 
 2. The predicate, i. e., that which is declared of 
 the subject (generally a verb) ; e. g., flies. 
 
 Rem. The predicate is frequently an adjective or participle coiinected 
 with the subject by the verb is ; e. g., the rose is sweet. 
 
 (6.) The verb in the predicate agrees with the sub- 
 ject in number and person; e. g.,the eagle flies: here 
 flies is in the third person singular, to agree with eagle. 
 
 (42.) Active Verbs are those which express activi 
 ty ; e. g., the eagle ^ze5, the boy dances. Active verbs 
 are either 
 
 {a) Transitive, i. e., such as require an object to 
 complete their meaning ; e. g., the boy killed (whom ? 
 or what?) the squirrel. Here M/ec? is a transitive verb. 
 
 {b) Intransitive, i. e., such as do not require an ob- 
 ject; e. g., the birds ^y; the boy dances. 
 
 [All the verbs used in this lesson are intransitives.] 
 
 (43.) (a) The infinitive form of a verb expresses 
 its action indefinitely, without reference to person or 
 time ; e. g., to dance, to plough. 
 
FIRST CONJUGATION OF VERBS. 15 
 
 (b) The indicative mood of a verb expresses its 
 action definitely , as a fact or question ; e. g.^ he ploughs. 
 Does he dance? 
 
 [The imperative and subjunctive moods are treated of here- 
 after.] 
 
 (44.) Tenses. 
 
 {a) The present tense expresses incomplete action 
 in present time ; e. g.^ I am ploughing, I plough. 
 
 (6) The imperfect tense expresses incomplete ac- 
 tion in past time ; e. g., I was ploughing, I ploughed, 
 
 (c) The future tense expresses incomplete action in 
 future time ; e. g., I shall be ploughing, I shall plough. 
 
 [Rem. As these three forms all express imperfect or incomplete action, 
 they should be called Present Imperfect, Past Imperfect, Future Im- 
 peifect. But as the present names are fixed by almost universal 
 usage, we retain tliem ; advising the student to fix distinctly in his 
 mind the principle that these forms properly express action as con- 
 tinuing or incomplete. The tense-forms for completed action will be 
 given hereafter.] 
 
 (45.) Conjugations. 
 
 {a) In Latin, the different moods, tenses, numbers, 
 and persons of verbs are expressed by various end- 
 ings ; and the affixing of these to the proper stem of 
 the verb is called conjugation. (21, Rem.) 
 
 (6) There are four conjugations of verbs, distin- 
 guished by their infinitive- endings, 
 
 (c) The infinitive-ending of the j^r5^ conjugation is 
 are (along) ; e.g., v6l-are, to fly ; ar-are, to plough, 
 
 {d) To find the stem of any verb, strike off the in- 
 finitive-ending ; e. g., vol-are, stem vol-; ar-are, 
 stem ar-. To form any mood, tense, &c., of a verb, 
 affix the proper ending to the stem thus found. 
 
16 
 
 FIRST CONJUGATION. mTRANSITIVES. 
 
 (46.) 
 
 SOME ENDINGS OF THE FIRST CONJUGATION. 
 
 1 
 
 INFINITIVE, are. 
 
 i| 
 
 j IKDICATIVE. II 
 
 3d Sing. 
 3d Plural. 
 
 Pre^erit. 
 
 at. 
 ant. 
 
 Imperfect 
 
 abat. 
 abaiit. 
 
 Future. 
 
 abit. . 
 abunt. 
 
 (47.) By affixing these endings to the stem v 6 1- 
 we get the following 
 
 PARTIAL PARADIGM. 
 
 INFINITIVE, vol-are, to fly. 
 
 INDICATIVE. 
 
 3d Sing. 
 3d Plur. 
 
 Present. 
 
 v61-at, he, she, 
 
 it fiies. 
 vol-ant, they 
 
 fiy- 
 
 Iniperfett. 
 
 vol-iibat, he, she, it 
 
 was Jiyin^. 
 vol-abant, tin 
 
 Jlyirii 
 
 hey were 
 
 Future. 
 
 vol- abit, he, she, it 
 
 will fiy. 
 vol-abuiit, they vnll 
 
 fiy- 
 
 Rem. In Latin we need not use the personal pronouns he, she, it, or 
 they, with the verb, as in English, because the person-endings t and 
 n I indicate the person sufficiently.* 
 (48.) EXERCISE. 
 
 I. Vocabulary, 
 
 Girl, puella, oe. 
 Forces, c6pife,t arum (pi.). 
 Sailor, nauta, ts (m.). 
 A Belgian, Belga, ae. 
 To hasten, festln-are. _; 
 To watch, vigil-are. 
 
 Galha, Galba, ae. 
 
 To fiy, vol-are. 
 
 To dance, salt-ar^. 
 
 To cry out, exclam-are. 
 
 To sup, coen-arp. 
 
 To walk, ambul-arft. 
 
 II. Example. 
 
 The eagle fiies. \ A qui la volat. 
 Rule of Position. — The subject nominative generally pre- 
 cedes the verb; e. g., in the above example, aquilS. 
 precedes volat. 
 
 [In the above example, which word is the subject? Why? (41, a, 1.) 
 Which the predicate? Why? (41, a, 2.) How does vulat agree with 
 aquila? Why? {41, b.]] 
 
 III. Translate into English, 
 
 Columbse volant. — Ancilla saltat. — Puellae exclamant. — Re- 
 gina ccenabat. — Puella ambulabat. — Copia? festinant. — \qui- 
 lae volabant. — Galba festinabit. — Regina saltat. — Nautce vigi- 
 labant. — Filia reglnas saltabit. — Belgse festinant. — Filia Gal- 
 
 * But when a new subject is introduced, or emphasis is required, the 
 personal pronoun must be used in Latin. 
 
 t Copia, in the singular, means abundance; in the plural, /orc«» 
 
• FIBST CONJUGATION. TRANSITIVES. 17 
 
 bae exclamat. — Puellae ambulabant. — Copise Belgarfim festina 
 bunt.— Saltabant. — Ambulabant. — Coenabunt. — Nauta ambula-i 
 bit. — Vigilabunt. — Nautse saltant. — Agricola coenabit. 
 
 IV. Answer the questions in the foot-note** 
 
 V. Translate into Latin. 
 
 The dove flies. — The gu-1 walks. — The maid-servant hastens. 
 — The sailors dance. — The queen's maid-servant cries out.— The 
 farmer was supping. — The queen will sup. — The sailor was 
 watching. — The farmer's daughter will dance. — The girl's dove 
 will fly. — The queen's maid-servant will Avalk. — She was hast- 
 ening. — They were watching. — He (or she) was supping. — 
 The eagles were flying. — Galba was hastening. — The forces of 
 the Belgians will hasten. — Eagles will fly. — The sailors were 
 crying out. — The queen was walking. 
 
 LESSON IV. 
 First Declension of Nouns, Accusative Case. — First 
 Conjugation of Verbsj Transitives. 
 (49.) To love, 
 
 Queen, 
 Daughter, 
 (a) The queen loves her 
 dauprhter. 
 
 am-are. 
 
 re gin a. 
 
 filia. 
 
 Regina filiamdm&t. 
 
 The queen her-daughter loves. 
 
 Rem. Tho possessives, his, her, &c., are not expressed in Latin, except 
 for the sake of perspicuity or emphasis. 
 
 (50.) (a) It has been stated (41) that every sentence 
 consists of two parts, subject and predicate; so the 
 Enghsh sentence (49, «) contains the subject, queen,Sind 
 the predicate, loves. But this predicate is limited by 
 
 * What is the quantity of the ultimate of Columbts ? Why ? (24, 3.) Of 
 the penult? Why? (24,2.) Oi' the nhimate a of puella? (36,a.) Of the pe- 
 nult? (24,2.) Why? Of the anteijenult ? Why? (24,1.) What kind of 
 action does volant express ? (44, a.) In what time ? What kind does am- 
 hnldhat ? (44, h.) In what time ? In what tenses may incomplete action 
 be expressed? (Pres., past, and fut.) 'Whtatin the siem of volant? Ofex- 
 cldmant 1 Of cm)iabant 1 [The stem may be found by striking off any 
 tense-ending.] Why can the personal pronoun be omitted in Latin ? (47, 
 Rem.) When must it be used ? (47, Rem., N.) 
 
 B2 
 
18 OBJECT ACCUSATIVE. * 
 
 the Word daughter, which is called the direct object of 
 the verb. So, in the Latin sentence (49, a), we have, 
 
 Subject. Direct object. Predicate. 
 
 Regina. filiam. amat. 
 
 (b) A verb thus taking an object is called a Trans- 
 itive verb (42, a), and its direct object is said to be 
 in the Objective case in English (e. ^., daughter), and 
 in the Accusative case in Latin (e. g., filiam). We 
 have thus the following : 
 (51.) Rules of Syntax, 
 
 (a) The Accusative is the case of the direct object, 
 {b) Transitive verbs govern the accusative. 
 (52.) The accusative-endings of the first declension are, 
 Sing, am; e. g., fili-am, regin-am, daughter, queen, 
 Plur. as ; €. g., fiK-as, regin-as, daughters, queens. 
 
 (53.) EXERCISE. * 
 
 L Vocabulary. 
 
 To take possession of; 1 QccuparS 
 or, to seize, J 
 
 Island, insula, 83. 
 
 To call, vocare. 
 
 To (prep.), ad. (with accus.) 
 
 Poet, poeta, se. 
 
 To praise, laudard. 
 
 To love, amare. 
 
 Earth, terra, ae. 
 
 Moon, luna, 35. 
 
 To delight, delectare. 
 
 Medicine, mediclna, oe. 
 
 To prepare, parare. 
 
 Shadeor)^^.^^^ 
 
 Shadow, > 
 
 To obscure, obscurare. 
 
 To arm, armare. 
 
 Through (prep.), per (with ace). 
 
 II. Example. 
 
 The poet praises the queen, j Poeta reginamlaudat. 
 
 Rule of Position. — The object accusative stands before the 
 ti'ansitive verb ; e. g., in the above example, the object 
 reginam stands before the transitive verb laud at. 
 
 III. Translate into English. 
 
 Luna nautas delectat. — Agricola f ilias amat. — Ancillae medi- 
 cinam parant. — Umbra terree (33, c) lunam obscurat. — Nautas 
 reginam laudant. — Galba copias armabat. — Umbra sylvarum 
 agricolas delectat. — Galba sylvas occiipat. — Copise Belgarum 
 sylvas occupabant. — Columbae per sylvas volabant. — Regin^ 
 ancillas voc^t. — Ancillae reginam amant. — Agricola filiam voca- 
 
WEST DECLENSION. DATIVE AND ABLATIVE. 19 
 
 bat. — Regina poetam laudabit. — Rosae ancillas delectant. — Co- 
 pias armabunt (47, Rem.). — Sylvas occiipabunt (47 Rem.). 
 
 IV. Answer the questions in the foot-note * 
 
 V. Translate into Latin. 
 
 The moon delights the fai-mer. — The /armer's daughter (38, 6) 
 prepares the medicine. — The eagle's feathers delight the queen. 
 • — The Belgians arm (their) forces. — The shade of the wood de- 
 lights the poet. — Galba will take possession of the wood. — 
 (They) walk through the woods. — (They) take possession of the 
 island. — The farmer loves (his) daughter. — The farmer's daugh- 
 ter praises the poet. — The queen will call tlie maid-servants. — ■ 
 The queen loves (her) maid-servants. — The shadow of the 
 earth will obscure the moon. — The poet will praise the sailors. 
 
 LESSON V. 
 
 First Declension. — Dative and Ablative Cases, 
 
 (54.) The dative case of nouns expresses the object 
 
 to or for which any thing is done ; e. g., the man gives 
 
 {to) the hoy a book. Here hoy is in the dative case. 
 
 Rem. The accusative case, hook, is the direct object of the verb gives ; 
 the dative, boy, the remote object. 
 
 (55.) {a) The ablative case of nouns expresses the 
 person or thing with, from, in, or by which any thing 
 is done ; e. g., he filled the cup with wine. Here, with 
 wine would be expressed in Latin by one word, in the 
 ablative. 
 
 {b) The ablative is also governed by prepositions 
 expressing the relations with, from, by, &c. 
 
 (56.) The Dative endings are, Sing, se : Plur. is 
 {long). 
 
 * (1.) What pronouns are not expressed in Latin? (47, R,, 49, R.) Forwhat 
 
 Eurpose are they sometimes used ? (2.) By what is the transitive verb 
 raited ? (By a direct object.) What is the case of the direct object in 
 tatin 1 (51, a.) What is the direct object ofSmat, laad&t? &o. 
 
20 
 
 DATIVE AND ABLATIVE. 
 
 The Ablative endings are, Sing, a (long) . Piu?\ is 
 (long), 
 
 (57.) "FIRST DECLENSION. 
 
 CASE-ENDINGS AND PARADIGM COMPLETE. 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 I'lural. 
 
 Norn. 
 
 a. 
 
 8S. 
 
 Geu. 
 
 SB. 
 
 arum. 
 
 Dat. 
 
 ae. 
 
 Is. 
 
 Ace. 
 
 am. 
 
 as. 
 
 Voc. 
 
 a. 
 
 88. 
 
 Abl. 
 
 a. 
 
 .. »«• 
 
 
 b Singular. 
 
 I'lural. 1 
 
 Nom. 
 
 sylv-a, a wood. 
 
 svlv-re, V!oods. 
 
 Gen. 
 
 sylv-se, of a wood. 
 
 sylv-ariim, of woods. 
 
 Dat. 
 
 svlv-oe, la a wood. 
 
 sylv-is, to woods. 
 
 Ace. 
 
 s\ Iv-am, a toood. 
 
 sylv-as, woods. 
 
 Voc. 
 
 sylv-a, O wood ! 
 
 sylvffi, O woods ! 
 
 Abl. 
 
 sylv-a, 7cith, &c., a wood. 
 
 sylv-ls, ivith, &c., woods. 
 
 Rem. Some nouns of this declension are used only in the plural; 
 viz., d i v i t i SB, Hches ; n u p t i ae, a marriage ; i n s I d i ob, an ambush. 
 
 (58.) 
 
 I. Vocabulary. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 Wai/, via, CB. 
 
 To show, monstrare. 
 
 Ambush, or snares, insTdlae, arum 
 
 (used only in the pi.). 
 JVild lea^t, ferii, ee. 
 To give, dare.* 
 To beseech, obseeriire. 
 Letter, litterae, ai-um.f 
 Friendship, amieitla. 
 
 II. Examples. 
 (a) The farmer shows the 
 way to the girls. 
 
 confimi5r5. 
 
 To establish, 
 
 To streJigthen, 
 
 With (prep.), cum (governing the ab. 
 
 lative case). 
 To aboimd, abundare, (with abl.). 
 Deserter, perfuga, ae. 
 Tear, lacr5iiia, ae. 
 Inliabitaut, incola, ae (25, IV.). 
 
 Agncola puellis viam mon- 
 strat. 
 
 Rule of Position. — The remote object usually precedes 
 the dh-ect ; e. g., in example («), puellis precedes vidm. 
 {h) The queen walks with thelKegmsi ciim ancillis ambii- 
 niaicl-servants. | lat. 
 
 Rule of Position. — The preposition and its noun precede 
 the verb; e. g., in example (6), the words cii7n ancillis 
 precede amhuldt. 
 
 * Dare has a^hort before re. 
 
 t Littfira, si7ig., means a letter (as of the alphabet) ; littfirae, plw., a 
 letter= an epistle. 
 
 4 
 
FIRST DECLENSION. 21 
 
 III. Translate into English. 
 
 Galba insidias parat. — Galba Belgis (54) insidias pS-rdt. — Bel- 
 gje araicltiam confirmant. — Belgse cum regina amici tiara confir- 
 mant. — Insula feris* abundat. — Poeta reginae (dat., 54) rosam 
 dabat. — Copia; per insulam festlnant. — Perfugae reginam obsS- 
 crabant. — Perfiigae cum laciymis reginam obsecrabant. — Per- 
 fiiga reginae (dat., 54) litteras dabat. — Incolae reginam obsS- 
 crabant. 
 
 IV. Translate into Latin. 
 
 The poet praises the queen. — Galba establishes friendship. — 
 Galba establishes friendship with the Belgians. — The Belgians 
 will prepare snares. — The Belgians will prepare snares for the 
 inhabitants (54). — The islands abound (in) herbs (58, III., note). 
 — Poets give roses to queens (54). — The Belgians are beseech- 
 ing Galba. — The Belgians are beseeching Galba with tears. — 
 The queen will establish friendship. — The queen will establish 
 friendship with the Belgians. — The deserters will beseech the 
 queen. — The deserters will beseech the queen with tears. — 
 The Belgians were preparing snares. — The Belgians were 
 preparing snares for the deserters (54). 
 
 * F6ris is the ahl. Rule of Syntax. — The abl. case is used with all 
 ▼erbs and acyectives of abounding and wanting. 
 
§ 6. 
 
 SECOND DECLENSION OF NOUNS.— SECOND 
 CONJUGATION OF VERBS. (VI.— VIII). 
 
 LESSON VL 
 Nouns. — Second Declension^ Masculine, 
 (59.) Examjdes. 
 
 Crassus, 
 Messenger, 
 To hasten, 
 
 The messenger 
 hastens. 
 
 The messeng-ers hasten 
 
 Crass-iis. 
 
 nunti-us. 
 
 festinare. 
 
 of Crass us 
 
 Of Orassus, 
 messengers, 
 
 Crass-i. 
 nunti-i. 
 
 Nunti-us Crass-i festinS,t. 
 
 Nunti-i festinant. 
 
 (60.) The Second Declension comprises all nouns 
 whose gen. sing, ending is i (long). The nom. has 
 two endings, us for masc. gender, and um for the 
 neut. 
 
 (61.) The case-endings for the masculine gender are 
 as follows : 
 
 1 
 
 Sing. 
 
 
 Plur. 
 
 
 Nom. 
 
 US. 
 
 Nom. 
 
 
 
 Gen. 
 
 1. 
 
 Gen. 
 
 orum. 
 
 
 Dat. 
 
 6. 
 
 Dat. 
 
 Is. 
 
 
 Ace. 
 
 fiin. 
 
 Ace. 
 
 OS. 
 
 
 Voc. 
 
 e. 
 
 Voc. 
 
 I. 
 
 
 Abl. 
 
 0. 
 
 Abl. 
 
 Is. 
 
 
 Rem. The nouns in lis of this declension are the only Latin nouns ia 
 which the vocative-ending difters from the nominative. 
 
 (62.) By adding these endings to the stem s e r v- of 
 the noun serv-us (a slave), we get the 
 
 PARADIGM. 
 
 
 Sing. 
 
 Plur. 1 
 
 Nom. 
 
 serv-us, a slave. 
 
 serv-i, slaves. 
 
 Gen. 
 
 serv-I, of a slave. 
 
 serv-orum, of slaves. 
 
 Dat. 
 
 serv-6, to or for a slave. 
 
 serv-ls, to or for slaves. 
 
 Ace. 
 
 serv-i":m, a s^ave. 
 
 serv OS, slaves. 
 
 Voc 
 
 sei-v-e, O slave ! 
 
 serv-I, O slaves ! 
 
 Abl. 
 
 serv-6, with, by, &e,, a slave. 
 
 serv-Is, with, by, &c., slaves. 
 
SECOND DECLENSION. 23 
 
 [Rem. 1. Nearly all nouns in us are masc. ; but the names of trees, plants, 
 &.C., are fern, by the general rule (25, a). The four nouns, alvus, 
 bell^; coluB, distaff; humus, ground; ya.nn us, fan, are alsc 
 fern. Yirus, juice ; pelagus, the sea; vulgus, the common 
 people, are neuter. 
 
 Rem. 2. F i 1 i u s , son, and proper names in i u s , take i for the voc- 
 atiye-ending ; e. g-., fill, O son ! Tulli, O Tulli/ ! 
 
 Rem. 3. D e u s , God, has d e ii s for voc. sing. ; and in the plural N. 
 and V. dii, G. deorum, D. and Abl. diis, Ace. deos.] 
 [For Greek nouns of this declension, see Appendix.] 
 
 (63.) EXERCISE. 
 
 I. Vocabulary. 
 
 Master (of a family or of slaves), do- Captive, captlv-us, i 
 
 min-us, 1. A German, Gennan-us, I 
 
 Slave, serv-us, I. 
 Village, vic-us, i. 
 
 Ambassador, or lieutenant,\^Q^t-\\s, i 
 Garden, hort-us, I. 
 To, ad (prep, with ace). 
 In, in (prep, with abl,). 
 
 To call, vocare. 
 
 To recall, re vocare.* 
 
 To call together, convocare.* 
 
 An ^duan, jEdu-us, i. 
 
 To flog, verberarg. 
 
 To ride (on horseback), Squltarg. 
 
 1^^ He rides to the village, Sd vicilm equitat. When to implies 
 motion, it must be translated by ad with the accusative. 
 
 II. Translate into English. 
 
 Dominus servum vocat. — Serviis domino (54) medicinam par- 
 fi.t. — Grassus vlcum occiipat. — Nuntius Crassi vigilat. — Servi 
 ad vicum festlnant.— Nuntius legato (54) viam monstrat. — Servi 
 dominos laudant. — Agricola ad viciim equitat. — Captivi festina- 
 bunt. — Galba copias (48, I.) Germanoriim convocat.* — Nun- 
 tius captivos revocat. — Servi in horto ambulabunt. — ^dui 
 Crasso (54) insidias parabant. — Nuntius copias ^duorum revo- 
 cabat. — Dominus servos verberat. 
 
 III. Translate into Latin. 
 
 [Recollect that words in parentheses ( ) are not to be translated.] 
 The messengers call-together the iEdua»B.~The slaves pre- 
 pare medicines for (their) master (dat., 54). — The ^Eduans take- 
 possession-of the woods. — The master praises (his) slaves. — The 
 slave is hastening to (ad, with ace.) the w^oods.— The ambassa- 
 dors ride to the village. — Crassus will prepare an ambush for the 
 
 * The prefix con gives the verb the additional meaning of tog-ee^^er; the 
 prefix re of back, as in revocare and convocare. 
 
24 
 
 BECOND DECLENSION. 
 
 iEduans. — The lieutenant calls together the Germans. — The 
 messenger will show the way to tlie captives (54). — The 
 slaves are watching. — The master flogs (his) slave. — Galba will 
 recall the lieutenant. — The Germans were preparing an ambush 
 for Galba (54). — The slave was showing the way to the mes- 
 senger (54). — The messenger was hastening to the village. — 
 The slaves are watching in the garden. 
 
 LESSON VII. 
 Nouns. — Second Declension, Masculines continued, 
 
 (64.) All nouns of the second declension whose 
 stem ends m r reject the ending us in the nom. and e 
 in the voc. ; e. g.y N. and V. ager, j^e/c?, instead of 
 ager-u s, ager-e. Moreover, most of those which have 
 e in the nominative drop it in the obHque* cases ; 
 e, g.f N. age r, G. Sgri instead of ager-i. 
 
 (65.) Learn the following 
 
 
 PARADIGM. 
 
 
 j SINGULAR. Il 
 
 Nom. 
 
 K^ei-.Md (m). 
 
 puer (m.), boy. 
 
 vir, man. 
 
 Ge . 
 
 t-r-\,oftheJ!eld. 
 
 puer-I, of the boy. 
 
 vir-T, of the man. 
 
 Dat. 
 
 a, TO. to or forjield. 
 
 puer-6, to or for. 
 
 vir-o, to or for. 
 
 !acc. 
 
 izr-um, field. 
 
 puer-um, boy. 
 
 vir-uxn, man. 
 
 Voc. 
 
 a-er, OJicld ! 
 
 puer, O bov ! 
 
 vIr, O man ! 
 
 Abl. 
 
 azr 6, 7cith, by, SfC, field. 
 
 puer-6, witk, by, SfC. 
 
 vir-o, with, by, Spc. 
 
 ] 
 
 'LUilAL. 
 
 
 Nom. 
 
 ^gr-lfields. 
 
 puer-i, boys. 
 
 vir-I, men. \ 
 
 Gen. 
 
 agr-orum, of fields. 
 
 puer-crum, of boys. 
 
 vir-orum, of men. 
 
 Dat. 
 
 8.gr-is, to or for fields. 
 
 puer-Is, to or for. 
 
 vir-is, to or for. 
 
 Ace. 
 
 ^^zr -OS, fields. 
 
 pu6r-6s, boys. 
 puer-T, O boys ! 
 
 vir-cs, men. 
 
 Voc. 
 
 a-i--i, O fields ! 
 
 vir-I, O men ! 
 
 Abl. 
 
 figr-!s, with fields. 
 
 puer-Is, with, by, SfC. 
 
 V YAs,vnth,by,SfC. 
 
 Rem. Only the following nouns keep the e in all the cases, viz., adul- 
 ter, adulterer ; puer, boy ; socer, father-in-laio ; gener, son-in-law ; ves- 
 per, evening ; iTberl (used only in plural), children ; with the com- 
 pounds offer and ger ; e. g., Lucifer, Lxicifer ; comiger, horned. 
 
 • The ohliq^ve cases include all the cases except the nominative and 
 vocative. 
 
SF.CONU IJE0I> ENSIGN. 
 
 (QG.) EXERCISE. 
 
 I. Vocabulary, 
 
 Boy, puSr, i. 
 
 Master (of a school), mSg^stgr, tin (64). 
 
 Faiker-in-law, socer, 1 (65, li.). 
 
 Herb, herba, ae. 
 
 Scholar, disclpul-us, i. 
 
 Son, fiU-us, i (62, R. 2). 
 
 II. Example. 
 (a) The wood abounds in 
 
 wild beasts. 
 
 Man, vir, I. 
 Game, lud-us, i. 
 Son-in-law, g€nSr, i (65, R.). 
 Children, llbgri, orum (rarely used in 
 
 singxilar). 
 Field, ag6r, agri (64). 
 
 Sylva fSris ftbundat. 
 
 The wood in - wild - beasts 
 abounds. 
 
 {a) Rule of Syntax. — The ablative case is used with ad- 
 jectives and verbs of abounding and wanting. 
 
 III. Translate into English. 
 
 Pu6r magistrum dmat. — ReginS, soc^riim &mabit. — Pu6ri in 
 &gi*6 ambulabunt. — Agri herbis (abl., 66, II., a) abundant. — Ag- 
 ricola per agros (58, II., b) ^qmtat. — Agncoia s6c6rum voc^t. — 
 Puellae magistrum laudant. — Viri in agris ambulabant. — Liidi 
 pueros delectant. — Regind, generos ftmabit. — Viri ad viciim 
 festinabant. — Agricola Kb6r6s amdt. — Mftgistfir discipulos con- 
 vocat. 
 
 IV. Translate into Latin. 
 
 The girls walk in the fields. — The field abounds in herbs {66^ 
 XL, a). — The sailor calls back the boys. — The queen loves (her) 
 son-in-law.' — The queen gives (her) son-in-law (dat., 54) arose. 
 — The scholars love (their) master. — The fields abound in herbs 
 {66, 11., a). — The farmers were walking through the fields. — 
 The son of the master calls the boys. — The master walks in 
 the garden with (his) sons. — The herbs of the field delight the 
 poet. — Games delight girls. — The farmer shows the way to 
 the boy. — The master will praise (his) scholars. — The master 
 will flog (his) scholars. 
 
 c 
 
26 
 
 SECOND CONJUGATION OF VERBS. 
 
 LESSON VIII. 
 
 Nouns, — Second Declension^ Neuter, — Verbs, Second 
 
 Conjugation. 
 
 (67.) 
 
 1 Slave. 
 
 
 serviis 
 
 (masc). 
 
 
 Cup. 
 To Jill. 
 The slave Jills his master's 
 
 poculum (neut.). 
 implere. 
 Servus p 5 c ii 1 ii m domini 
 
 cup. implet. 
 
 The-slave the-cup of-his-master 
 Jills. 
 (68.) The case-endings of the second declension for 
 
 the neuter gender are, 
 
 
 
 Nona. Ace, Voc. 
 
 Gen. 
 
 Dat., Abl. 
 
 Sing. 
 
 um. 
 
 i. 
 6. 
 
 ^Plur. 
 
 a. 
 
 orum. 
 Is. 
 
 
 JRjem. The endings of the nom., ace, and voc. are always the same in 
 neuter nouns. In this declension, those of dat. and abl. are alike also. 
 
 (69.) By adding these endings to the stem pocul-, 
 we get the 
 
 
 PARA DIG 
 
 M. 
 
 
 Sing. 
 
 ' Plur. 
 
 Nom. 
 
 pocul-iim, a cup. 
 
 p6cul-a, cups. 
 
 Gen. 
 
 p6cul-i, of a cup. 
 
 pocul-orum, of cups. 
 
 Dat. 
 
 p6ci)l-6, to or for a cup. 
 
 pocul-is, to or for cups. 
 
 Ace. 
 
 p6cul-um, a cup. 
 
 p6cul-a, cups. 
 
 Voc. 
 
 p6cul-um, O cup ! 
 
 p6cul-a, O cups ! 
 
 Abl. 
 
 p6cul-5, with, by, Ice, a cup. 
 
 Tpocul-is, with, from, &.C., cups. 
 
 THE SECOND CONJUGATION OF VEUBS. 
 
 (70.) The second conjugation comprises all verbs 
 whose infinitive-ending is ere (e long before re) ; e. g., 
 m on- ere, to advise; doc -ere, to teach. 
 
 (71.) SOME ENDINGS OF THE SECOND CONJUGATION OF VERBS. 
 
 INFINITIVE, ert. 
 
 INDICATIVE. 
 
 3d Sing. 
 3d Plural. 
 
 Present. 
 6t. 
 ent 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 ebat. ' 
 ebant. 
 
 Future. 
 
 cblt. 
 ebunt 
 
SECOND CONJUGATION OP VERBS. 
 
 (72.) By affixing these endings to the stem mon-, we 
 get the following 
 
 PARTIAL PARADIGM. 
 
 ! INFINITIVE, mon-er6, to advise. 1 
 
 INDICATIVE. 
 
 J3d Sing. 
 |3d Plur. 
 
 Present. 
 
 mon-et, lie, she, &.C., 
 
 advises. 
 inon-eut, thei/ advise. 
 
 Imperfect- 
 
 mon-ebat, he, she, &c,, 
 was advising. 
 
 mon-ebant, they were 
 advising. 
 
 Future. 
 
 mon-ebit, he, she, Sec, 
 
 will advise. 
 mon-ebunt, they will 
 
 advise. 
 
 (73.) EXERCISE. 
 
 I. V 
 
 Assistanc 
 To ask, e 
 Camp, ca 
 To move. 
 Cup, poc 
 Witie, vie 
 
 ocahulary, 
 
 e, auxilium, i (68). 
 ntreat, rogarg. 
 stra, orum (pi.) 
 moverg (70). 
 ilum, 1. 
 tum, L 
 
 • 
 
 Tofll, implerg (70). 
 Danger, pgriculum, u 
 To fear, timere (70). 
 Forum, forum, i. 
 Town, oppidum, I. 
 
 II. Translate into English, 
 
 I^egatiis auxilmm rogat. — Galbacopias ad (63, 1., I!£S^) ca.str& 
 revocat. — Serviis pociilum vino (55, a) implet. — Crassiis castr& 
 movet. — Copiae ad oppidiim festinabant. — Xgricol^ oppidum 
 laudat. — Copiae Germanorum ad castra festinabunt. — Nuntiiis 
 periculiim timet. — Pueri p6r forum ambulant. — -German! peri- 
 cula non timent. — Legati per oppidum ambulabunt. — AgricoB. 
 oppida ^diioriim laudabat. — Crassiis oppidum occiipabat. — 
 Servi pocula implebant. 
 
 III. Translate into Latin, 
 
 The ^duans were asking assistance. — The Germans will 
 move (their) camp. — The Germans were praising the town. — 
 The ambassadors of the iEduans hasten to (63, I., I^') the 
 camp. — The forces of the Belgians fear the danger. — The mes- 
 senger will recall the ambassadors to tlie camp. — Galba's mes- 
 senger will recall the Germans to the town. — The ambassadors 
 praise the towns of the Germans. — The farmers were walking 
 through the forum. — The boy walks through the town. — The 
 sailors will not fear the danger. — Crassus will not move (his) 
 camp. — The Germans were-taking-possession-of the town.— - 
 The servant was filling the cup. 
 
§ 7. 
 ADJECTIVES OF FIRST CLASS. (IX.— X.) 
 
 LESSON IX. 
 Adjectives. — Class /, us, ct, um. 
 
 (74.) The Adjective (14), in Latin, agrees with the 
 noun in gender, number, and case, and therefore has 
 endings to distinguish these; e. g., puer bon-us, a 
 good hoy ; pUelld bon-a, a good girl; donum bon- 
 u m, a good gift. 
 
 (75.) We divide adjectives into three classes, ac- 
 cording to their endings. Those of \h& first class have 
 the/e/w. ending of the first decl. of nouns, and the masc, 
 and neut. endings of the second. Thus, 
 
 (76.) 
 
 ENDINGS. 
 
 
 
 PARADIGM. 
 
 
 8INGULAB. 1 
 
 
 M. 
 
 F. 
 
 N. 
 
 M. 
 
 F. 
 
 N. 
 
 N. 
 
 us. 
 
 a. 
 
 um. 
 
 bon-us. 
 
 bon-a. 
 
 bon-iim. 
 
 G. 
 
 i. 
 
 88. 
 
 1. 
 
 bon-i. 
 
 bon-ae. 
 
 bon-i. 
 
 D. 
 
 6. 
 
 IB. 
 
 o. 
 
 bon-o. 
 
 bon-ae. 
 
 bon-o. 
 
 A. 
 
 um. 
 
 am. 
 
 um. 
 
 bon-um. 
 
 b6n-am. 
 
 bon-um. 
 
 V. 
 
 e. 
 
 a. 
 
 um. 
 
 bon-g. 
 
 bon-a. 
 
 bon-um. 
 
 A. 
 
 6. 
 
 a. 
 
 o. 
 
 b6n-5. 
 
 bon-a. 
 
 bon-6. 
 
 PLUBAL. 1 
 
 N. 
 
 i. 
 
 8B. 
 
 a. 
 
 bon-i. 
 
 bon-ae. 
 
 bon-a. 
 
 G. 
 
 5ram. 
 
 arum. 
 
 orum. 
 
 b6n-5rum. 
 
 b on- arum. 
 
 bon-orum. 
 
 D. 
 
 IS. 
 
 IS. 
 
 IS. 
 
 bon-ls. 
 
 bonis. 
 
 bon-is. 
 
 A. 
 
 OS. 
 
 as. 
 
 a. 
 
 bon-oa. 
 
 bon-as. 
 
 bon-i. 
 
 V. 
 
 I. 
 
 OB. 
 
 a. 
 
 bon-i. 
 
 bon-ae. 
 
 bon-a. 
 
 A. 
 
 is. 
 
 IS. 
 
 IS. 
 
 bon-is. 
 
 bon-is. 
 
 bon-is. 
 
 (77.) Adjectives whose stem ends in er do not 
 take the endings u s of the nominative and e of the 
 vocative. 
 
 (a) Most of them drop the 6 in mflection ; e. g,, 
 
 pulcher, pulchr-a, pulchr-um, beautiful; 
 pulchr-T, pulchr-ae, pulchr-i, &c. 
 
ADJECTIVES OF FIRST CLASS. 
 
 29 
 
 (6) Butaspdr, rough; lacer, torn; Mh^T^free; misSr, 
 miserable ; prosper, fortunate ; t e n e r, tender (and the com- 
 pounds of ger and f er; e. g., corniger, flammifer), re- 
 tain it ; e. g.f . 
 
 raiser, miser-a, miser-iim, 
 miser-i, miser-ae, miser-i, &c. 
 
 (78.) 
 
 I. Vocabulary. 
 
 Good, bon-us, a, um. 
 Great, magn-us, a, um. 
 Many, malt-us, a, um. 
 Thick, dens-US, a, um. 
 Broad, icide, lat-us, a, um. 
 Ml/, me-us, a, um. 
 Thy, tu-us, a, um. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 His, hers, its (own), su-us, a, um. 
 
 To see, videre. 
 
 Master (of slaves), herus, L 
 
 To have, habere. 
 
 Example, exemplum, L 
 
 River, fluvius, i. 
 
 To frighten, terrere. 
 
 II. Examples, 
 (a) The slave fills the large 
 cup. 
 
 Servus poculum magnum 
 implet. 
 
 Rule of Position. — (a) The adjective, unless emphatic, fol- 
 lows the noun ; e. g.^ in the above example, magnum 
 follows poculum. 
 
 (6) The slave fills the queen* s 
 large cup. 
 
 Servus magnum rgginae poc- 
 ulum implet. 
 
 Rule of Position. — (&) When the noun governs another in 
 the genitive, the adjective stands first, and the genitive 
 betweenit and its noun ; e. g., in example (6), magnum 
 reginae poculum. 
 
 III. Translate into English. 
 
 Regina f iliam suam ^mat. — Servus poculum meiim impl6t. — 
 Jiervi pociila magna implent. — Pueri magistrum bonum amant. 
 — Belgge vicos multos habent. — Agricola bonus viam monstr^t. — 
 Magister puSros bonos docebit. — Magistii boni exempla bona 
 pueris (54) dant. — Legatus magnam reginae (78, II., b) coronam 
 videt. — Perfugae ad fluvium latum festinant. — Servus magnum 
 pueri (78, II., 6) poculum implebat. — Sylvae densae nuntios tor- 
 rent. — Pueri syMm densam timebunt. — Servus bonus heriim 
 &mat. 
 
 IV. Translate into Latin. 
 
 The .Siduans have many villages. — The queen loves (her) 
 C3 
 
30 SOME FORMS OF ESSE. 
 
 good son. — The farmer shows the thick wood. — Good slaves 
 love (theu-) masters. — Good masters love (theh-) slaves. — The 
 Belgians have many towns. — The broad rivers frighten the de- 
 serters. — The boy sees tlie large town. — Crassus recalls the good 
 lieutenant. — The son praises tJie great queen. — The Germans 
 have large villages. — He praises thy slave. — He loves thy daugh- 
 ter. — He will praise his own daughter. — The deserters were 
 hastening to the broad river. — The slave will fill the large cup 
 of his master (78, II., b). — The lieutenant will see many villages 
 of the Belgians (78, II., b). — The thick wood will frighten the 
 boys. 
 
 LESSON X. 
 Some Forms of E s s e. — Adjectives continued, 
 (79.) Learn the following forms of the irregular 
 verb Esscj to be : 
 
 INFINITIVE, esse, to he. 
 
 INDICATIVE. 
 
 3d Sing. 
 3d Plur. 
 
 Present. 
 
 est, is. 
 sunt, are. 
 
 Imperfect, 
 
 erat, was. 
 erant, were. 
 
 Future. 
 
 6nt, he, she, it will be. 
 erunt, they will be. 
 
 (80.) (a) Indolence is a vice. 1 1^^^^^ ^i^^^"™ est- 
 
 I Indolence a vice is. 
 
 Here inertia is the subject of the sentence ; v i- 
 t i ii m is the predicate ; both in the nominative. 
 
 Rule of Syntax. — {a) The noun in the predicate must be 
 in the same case as the subject, when it denotes the same 
 person or thing. 
 (81.) (6) The rose is teawfi- 1 Rosa pulchra est. 
 ful. I The rose beautiful is. 
 
 Here r 6 s a is the subject^ and pulchra the pred- 
 icate ; both in nom. sing. fem. 
 
 Rule of Syntax. — (&) The adjective in the predicate agrees 
 with the subject in gender, number, and case. 
 [As a general rule, a sentence should not end with a monosyUabU ; but 
 in short passages, such as the above, especially when the word before est 
 ends in a vowel, or m, it is admissiblc.l 
 
ADJECTIVES, CLASS FIRST. 
 
 31 
 
 (82.) EXERCISE. 
 
 [Refer to Rules of Position (78, 11.) and to Rem. on adjectives ending in 
 
 ■ (77).] 
 
 I. Vocabulary. 
 
 Happy, beatus, a, um. 
 
 True, verus, a, um. 
 
 Friendship, amlcitia, oe. 
 
 Everlasting, sempiternus, a, um. 
 
 Labienus, Labienus, i. 
 
 Foolish, stoltus, a, um. 
 
 Tender, tener, a, um (77, b). 
 
 Flame, flamma, ae. 
 
 JRed, ruddy, ruber, a, um (77, a). 
 
 A leaf, folium, u 
 
 Bull, taurus, 1. 
 
 Homed, comiger, 5, um (77, b). 
 
 Lamb, ag^us, L 
 
 Europe, Europa, 89. 
 
 Peninsula, peninsiilS, 09. 
 
 Anger, ira, es. 
 
 Illustrious, clarus, S, vm. 
 
 Crow, corvus, I. 
 
 Black, niger, a, um (77, a). 
 
 Not, non (always placed be&re tiia 
 
 word which it qaaHfies) 
 Always, sempSr (adv.). 
 Cow, vacca, se. 
 Attica, Attica, as. 
 Britain, Britamifii, ». 
 Ireland, Hibemia, oe. 
 
 Miserable, miser, a, nm (77, b). 
 
 Rem. In such phrases as the good, the wise. Sec, the noun (men) is 
 omitted in Latin, as in English ; e. g., good metb = b 6 n I ; fools => 
 Btalti ; the happy == beati. Also, many things = multa (neat); 
 all things = omnia. 
 
 II. Examples. 
 
 The good are always happy. 
 
 True friendships are everlast- 
 ing. 
 
 Labienus was a lieutenant. 
 
 The foolish are not happy. 
 
 Boni semper beati sunt. 
 Yerae ^micitiae sempltems 
 
 sunt. 
 Labieniis l6gatus Sr&t. 
 Stulti non sunt beati. 
 
 III. Translate into English. 
 
 Puella pulchf a est (81, 6). — Herbae &gr6rumtSngrsBSunt(81, 
 h). — Alae aquilarum magnae sunt. — Flamma rubra est. — F6K& 
 rosarum pulchra sunt. — Tauri cornigeri sunt. — Agnl t^neri in 
 &gris sunt. — Rggina pulchr^ in horto ambulabat. — Puer agnos 
 pukhros vid6t. — Vera a,micitia sempiterna est. — Stulti miseri 
 sunt. — EuropS, peninsula (80, a) est. — AtticS, peninsula est. — IxH 
 vitiiim est magnum. — Crassiis legatus Srat. — Labienus leg&tus 
 clarus 6rat. — Corvus plumas nlgras habet. — Stulti non sunt 
 Ifiati. — Bonus sempgr beatus est. 
 
 IV. Translate into Latin. 
 
 The queen was beautiful. — The queen's daughter was beau- 
 
32 ADJECTIVES OF FIRST CLASS. 
 
 tiful. — The beautiful daughter walks in the garden. — The fields 
 abound in tender herbs (66, II., a). — The feathers of doves are 
 beautiful. — The feathers of crows are black. — The flames were 
 ruddy. — The leaves of roses are tender. — Cows are horned. — 
 The queen walks in the garden with {cum) her beautiful daugh- 
 ters (f iliabiis*). — The girl will see the tender lambs in the fields. 
 — The good are not always happy. — Fools are not always mis- 
 erable. — Crassus was a great lieutenant. — Britain is an island. — 
 Ireland is an island. — Geneva is a large town. — Anger is always 
 a vice. — Everlasting friendships are true. — Friendships are not 
 always everlasting. 
 
 * Fllia, daughter, anddea, goddess, have abl. pi. in abus, instead of 
 If, to distinguish them from fill Is, sons, dils, gods. 
 
§8. 
 
 THIRD AND FOURTH CONJUGATIONS OF 
 VERBS. 
 
 LESSON XI. 
 Verbs, — Third and Fourth Conjugations. 
 (83.) The Third Conjugation comprises all verbs 
 whose infinitive ending is ere (e short before r e) ; 
 e. g., scrib-ere, to write, 
 
 (84.) SOME ENDINGS OF THE TklRD CONJUOATION. 
 
 INFINITIVE, fire. 
 
 INDICATIVE. 
 
 Singular. 
 Plural. 
 
 Present. 
 It. 
 
 unt. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 ebat. 
 ebant. 
 
 Future. 
 
 et. 
 eut 
 
 (85.) By affixing these endings to the stem scrib-, 
 we get the following 
 
 PARTIAL PARADIGM. 
 
 INFINITIVE, ficrlb-«re, to write. 
 
 INDICATIVE. 
 
 3d Sing. 
 3d Plur. 
 
 Present. 
 
 scrib-it, he, she, Sec, 
 
 writes. 
 scrib-unt, they "write. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 scrlb-ebat, he, she, 
 &c., was writing. 
 
 scrib- ebant, they were 
 writing: 
 
 Future. 
 
 scrib-6t, he, the, &c., 
 
 will write. ^ 
 
 scrib-ent, they will 
 write. 
 
 THE FOURTH CONJUGATION. 
 
 (86.) The Fourth Conjugation comprises all verbs 
 whose infinitive-ending is ire (i long before re) ; e. g,, 
 aud-ire, to hear, 
 
 (87.) SOME ENDINGS OF THE FOURTH CON.TUGATION. 
 
 INFINITIVE, Ire. 
 
 INDICATIVE. 
 
 3d Sing. 
 3d Plur. 
 
 Present. 
 
 it. 
 
 lunt. 
 
 Imperfect 
 
 iebat. 
 iebant. 
 
 Future. 
 
 iet. 
 ient. 
 
 (88.) By affixing these endings to the stem aud-, 
 we have the following 
 
34 THIRD AND FOURTH CONJUGATIONS OF VERBS. 
 
 PARTIAL PARADIGM. 
 
 INFINITIVE, aud-ire, to hear. 
 
 INDICATIVE. 
 
 3d Sing. 
 3dPlur. 
 
 Present 
 
 aud-it, he, she, &c 
 
 hears. 
 aud-iunt, they hear. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 , a.ud-ieba.t, he, she, &c., 
 
 was hearing. 
 aud-iebant, thei/ were 
 hearing. 
 
 Future. 
 
 aud-iet, he, she, Ac, 
 
 will hear. 
 aud-ient, they will 
 
 hear. 
 
 (89.) I 
 I. Vocabulary, 
 
 To send, mittere (83). 
 In (prep.), in.* 
 To sleep, dormire (86). 
 Bed-chamber, ctibiculum, I. 
 To i-un, curr6r6 (83). 
 To rule, regere (83). 
 
 :x EI 
 
 I CI S E. 
 
 Small, parvus, a, um. 
 To come, venire (86). 
 A Roman, Romanus, T. 
 To lead, ducere (83). 
 World, mundus, i. 
 To conquer, vincere (83). 
 
 A Gaul, GaUiis, I. 
 Tower, castellum, I. 
 
 To fortify, munire (86). 
 Divitiacus, Divitiacus, 1. 
 
 II. Example. 
 
 Crassus comes to the Zar^e I Crassus magniim ad op pi* 
 
 town. I dum venit. 
 
 Rule of Position. — The adjective belonging to a noun gov^ 
 erned by a preposition is frequently placed hefore the 
 preposition, c. ^., rnagniim in the example. 
 
 III. Translate into English, 
 
 Belgae legates mittunt. — Belgae legates ad Crassum mittunt. — 
 Pueri in cubiciilo dormiunt. — Puellse parvo (89,11.) in ciibiculd 
 dormiebant. — Regina magnum ad oppidiim veniet. — Galba c6- 
 pias Romanorum ducit. — Dii (62, R., 3) mundum regunt. — 
 Deiis mundum semper regit. — Roman! Gallos vincebant. — Le- 
 gatiis castella muniebat. — uEdui nuntium ad Labieniim mittunt. 
 — Copise Belgarum ad oppidiim venient. — Di^'itiacus copias 
 iEduoriim ducebat. 
 
 TV. Translate into Latin, 
 
 The horse runs. — The boy sleeps. — The boy was running. — 
 The slave comes. — Crassus fortifies many towers. — The slave 
 was coming to (63, 1., S^") his master. — The beautiful boy will 
 sleep in a little bed-chamber (89, II.). — The gods always govern 
 
 * In, signifying into or unto, governs the accusative ; signifying in ' 
 governs the ablative. 
 
THIRD AND FOURTH CONJUGATIONS OP VERBS. 35 
 
 the world. — The Romans are coming to the large town. — The 
 farmer was sleeping in the field. — Divitiacus was leading the 
 forces of the iEduans. — The Belgians send messengers to Cras- 
 sus. — Crassus sends a messenger to the Belgians. — The girls 
 win sleep in a little bed-chamber. — Crassus will fortify the 
 towers. — The Romans take-possession-of the towers of Gaul. 
 
§ 0, 
 
 PASSIVE VERBS. (XIL— XIII.) 
 
 LESSON XII. 
 
 Verbs. — Passive Voice. — First and Second ConjugU" 
 tions. 
 (90.) The endings of the third persons of verbs, in 
 the tenses for incomplete or continued action (44), are 
 the same in the passive as in the active voice, with 
 the addition of the syllable u r . Thus, we have in the 
 
 (91.) FIRST CONJUGATION. 
 
 3d Sing. 
 3d Plur. 
 
 Active. 
 
 am-ai, he, she, it, loves, 
 dim-ant, they love. 
 
 Passive. 
 
 ain-at-«r, he, slie, it is lovcdJ 
 am-ant-tJr, they are loved. 
 
 IMPERFECT. 
 
 3d Sing. 
 3d Plur. 
 
 tm-dbat, he was loving, 
 aindbant, they were loving. \ 
 
 km-ahht-ur, lie was loved. 
 am-abant-tir, they were loved. 
 
 3d Sing. 
 3d Plur. 
 
 Ava-dbit, he shall or will 
 
 love, 
 ann-dbunt, they shall or 
 
 will love. 
 
 am-ablt-ur, he shall or will be loved. 
 
 am-abunt-ur, they shall or will be 
 loved. 
 
 (92.) 
 
 SECOND CONJUGATION. 
 
 3d Sing. 
 3d Plur. 
 
 Active. 
 
 mon-e^, he advises, 
 mon-ent, they advise. 
 
 Passire. 
 
 mon-et-wr, he is advised. 
 mon-ent-iir, they are advised. 
 
 IMPERFECT. 
 
 3d Sing. 
 3d Plur. 
 
 vabn-ebdt, he was advising, 
 mon-ebant, they were advi- 
 sing: 
 
 m6n-ebat-«7% he was advised. 
 nion-ebant-iir, they were advised. 
 
 3d Sing.' mbn-ebit, he will advise. 
 3d Plur. \m6n-ebunt, they will ad- 
 vise. 
 
 mon-ehit-ftr, he ivill be advised. 
 mon-ebunt-wr, they will be advised 
 
 * The English language has no forms for incomnlete action in the pass- 
 ive voice. He is loved, he teas loved, &c., the house is built, &c., properly 
 •xpress fiction complete. An awkward periplirasis — he is being hved. 
 
Crassus legatiim vdc&t. 
 Lggatiis a Crasso vocatur. 
 
 PASSIVES OF FIRST AND SECOND CONJUGATIONS. 37 
 (93.) EXEECISE. 
 
 I. Vocabulary. 
 
 Game, sport, ludus, I. j To teach, ddcere. 
 
 To delight, delectarS. | Seize, occuparS. 
 
 II. Examples, 
 
 (a) Crassus calls the lieuten- 
 ant. 
 
 (h) The lieutenant is called 
 hy Crassus. 
 
 In these examples, the same action is expressed (viz., the calling of 
 the lieutenant) in (a) by the active form, in (Z>) by the passive. Ev- 
 ery sentence in which a transitive verb occurs may thus be changed 
 into the passive form. The agent (Crassus) is the subject nomina- 
 tive in (a) ; and in {b) is expressed by the ablative (Crasso) with the 
 preposition a, by. 
 
 Rem. If the subject be a thing, not a person, nor considered as a per- 
 son, the preposition is omitted ; e. g., Poculum vino impletur, the 
 cup is filled with wine. (This is the abl. of cccuse or means.) 
 
 III. Translate into English, 
 
 Auxifium a legato rogatur. — Auxilium a legato rogabatiir. — 
 Auxilium a legato rogabitur. — CopisB a Galba revocantiir. — Pocii- 
 liim a servo implebatur. — OppidS. a Crasso occupabantur. — M6- 
 dicina ab ancillis pftrabitur. — Pueri boni a magistro laudantur. 
 — Copiae Germanorum a Labieno rSvocabuntiir. — Pociila vino 
 (93, II., R.) implentur.— PuSri ludis (93, II., R.) delectantiir. 
 
 IV. Translate into Latin. 
 
 The master is loved by (his) scholars. — The master will be 
 loved by (his) good scholars. — The cups will be filled (with) 
 wine (93, II., R.). — The Germans were called together by 
 Crassus. — The villages were seized by the Romans. — The 
 towns will be seized by the ^duans. — Medicines are prepared 
 by the slaves. — Good boys will be praised by their masters. — 
 The good boys will be advised by their masters. — TPie scholars 
 are taught by their master. — The scholar was taught by his 
 
 the house is being built- — is sometimes employed, but is not to be approved. 
 The house is building is a form sanctioned by usage, but in many verbs it 
 v^ould be^Nambiguous. The pupil must remember, then, that in the exer- 
 cises in the First Part, the forms is loved, is advised, was advised, &c., are 
 UBed to express incomplete action. 
 
 D 
 
38 PASSIVES OP THIRD AND FOURTH CONJUGATIONS. 
 
 master. — The girls are delighted with games (93, II., R.). — 
 The slaves will be delighted with games. — The queen is praised 
 by (her) maid-servant. — The queen was praised by (her) mud- 
 Bervant. — The queen will be praised by (her) maid-servant. 
 
 LESSON XIII. 
 
 Verbs, — Passive Voice. — Third and Fourth Conjuga-' 
 
 tions. 
 
 (94.) THIRD CONJUGATION. 
 
 3d Sing. 
 3d Plur. 
 
 reg-ii, he, she, it rules. 
 T^g-unt, they rule. 
 
 Passive. 
 
 r6git-fir, he, she, it is ruled. 
 rggtmt-Mr, they are ruled. 
 
 IMPERFECT. 
 
 3d Sing. 
 3d Plur 
 
 Y^g-ebat, he was ruling. jjr6geb5t-tir, he was ruled. 
 : \t&g-ehant, they were ruling \rege\)Kat-iJLr, they were ruled. 
 
 3d Sing. 
 3d Plur. 
 
 reg-et, he shall or will rule, 
 reg-ent, they shcdl or will 
 rule. 
 
 r6get-Mr, he shall or will be ruled. 
 r6gent-«r, they shall or will be ruled. 
 
 (95.) 
 
 FOURTH CONJUGATION. 
 
 3d Sing. 
 3d Plur. 
 
 Actire. 
 
 aud-Tt, he hears. 
 aud-iunt, they hear. 
 
 Passive. 
 
 audlt-tir, he is heard. 
 audiunt-«r, they are heard. 
 
 IMPERFECT. 
 
 3d Sing. 
 3d Plur. 
 
 aud-iebat, he was hearing. 
 
 aud-iebant, they were hear 
 
 ing. 
 
 audiebat-«r, he was heard. 
 audiebant-tir, they were heard. 
 
 3d Sing. 
 3d Plur. 
 
 aud-igt, he shall or will 
 
 hear. 
 aud-ient, iliey shall or will 
 
 hear. 
 
 aud-iet-iir, he shall or will be heard. 
 audient-tir, they shall or will be heard. 
 
 (96.) 
 
 L Vocabulary. 
 
 X E R C I S E. 
 
 A Gavl, Galliifl, i. 
 To distribute, ? -. . ^ „ 
 arrange, ) 
 
 II. Translate into English. 
 
 Legftti a Belgis mittxmtur. — Mundus & Deo rSgKtur. — C6pi» 
 
 A Roman, Romanus, I. 
 To lay aside, deponerS. 
 Garrison, praesidium, L 
 
PASSIVES OF THIRD AND FOURTH CONJUGATIONS. 39 
 
 Romanorum a Galba ducuntur. — Galli a Romanis vincuntur. — 
 
 Ird a reglna deponitur. — Castelliim a Labieno munitur. — Praesi- 
 
 dia a legato disponuntiir. — Legati ad iEduos mittebantur. — Co- 
 
 _^ pise JEduoriim ad vicujn ducentur. — E pis tola a regina scribitiir. — 
 
 • Oppida Belgarum muniebantiir.— Nuntii ad Crassiim mittentur. 
 
 III. Translate into Latin, 
 
 Galba is conquered by the Belgians. — The camp is fortified 
 by Crassus. — The forces of Crassus ai-e led to the camp. — The 
 forces of the iEdui are sent to the village. — Anger will be laid- 
 aside by the queen. — Galba was conquered by the Gauls. — Let- 
 ters will be written by the queen. — Letters are written to (ad) 
 Crassus. — The garrisons are not distributed by Cmssus. — The 
 towers are not fortified by the Belgians. — The world is always 
 governed by God. — The Germans are ruled by a lieutenant. — 
 A letter will be written by the queen. 
 
§ 10. 
 
 THIRD DECLENSION OF NOUNS.— PARTIAL 
 TREATMENT. (XIV.— XV.) 
 
 LESSON XIV. 
 Nouns. — Third Declension. 
 
 (97.) The Third Declension comprises all nouns 
 whose gen. sing, ends in is. 
 
 Rem. To find the stem of any noun of this declension, strike off is 
 from the gen. sing.; e. g., gen. hominis {of a man), stem homiii. 
 
 (98.) The case-endings are as follows : 
 
 » 
 
 Sinpular. 
 
 
 Plural. 1 
 
 
 M. &r. 
 
 Neut. 
 
 
 M. &F. 
 
 Neut. 
 
 N. 
 
 
 
 N. 
 
 es. 
 
 a (ia). 
 
 G. 
 
 is. 
 
 is. 
 
 G. 
 
 um (ium). 
 
 um (ium). 
 
 D. 
 
 I. 
 
 1 
 
 D. 
 
 ibus. 
 
 ibus. 
 
 A. 
 
 gm (Tm). 
 
 like N. 
 
 A. 
 
 es. 
 
 a(ia). 
 
 V. 
 
 likeN. 
 
 like N. 
 
 V. 
 
 es. 
 
 a (ia). 
 
 A. 
 
 e{i). 
 
 e[l). 
 
 A. 
 
 ibus. 
 
 ibus. 
 
 F' 
 
 Rem. 1. The nom. ending is not given, because of the many forms in 
 which that case occurs. Of the changes to which the stem is sub- 
 ject, see hereafter (Part II.). 
 
 2. Of the endings j m, i (in ace. and abl. sing.), and ia, iiim (plur.), see 
 hereafter (Part II.). 
 
 3. The genders of all nouns of this declension are marked in the vo- 
 cabularies. The general rules of gender (25, a) of course apply to 
 this declension : special rules are given (355). We give here only 
 
 (99.) Partial Rule of Gender. — Most nouns which add 5 to 
 the stem to form the nominative are feminine. 
 
 (100.) PARADIGMS MASCULINE AND FEMININE FORMS. 
 
 Sing. 
 
 Speech (m.). 
 
 Honour (m.). 
 
 City (f.). 
 
 Nation (race), f. 
 
 Law {f.>. 1 
 
 N. and V. 
 
 serm6. 
 
 honor. 
 
 urb-s. 
 
 gens (gents). 
 
 lex (legs). 
 
 Gen. 
 
 sermon-is. 
 
 honor-is. 
 
 urb-is. 
 
 gent-Is. 
 
 leg-is. 
 
 Dat. 
 
 sermon-i. 
 
 honor-i. 
 
 urb-I. 
 
 gent-i. 
 
 leg-T. 
 
 Ace. 
 
 serm6n-6m. 
 
 honor-em. 
 
 urb-6m. 
 
 gent-6m. 
 
 leg -6m. 
 
 Abl. 
 
 serm6n-6. 
 
 honor-e. 
 
 urb-6. 
 
 gent-6. 
 
 leg-e. 
 
 Plur. 
 
 Speeches. 
 
 Honours. 
 
 Cities. 
 
 Races. 
 
 Laws. 
 
 N., A., V. 
 
 sermon-es. 
 
 honor-es. 
 
 urb-es. 
 
 gent-es. 
 
 leg-es. 
 
 Gen. 
 
 sermon-iim. 
 
 honor-um. 
 
 urb-iQm. 
 
 gent-ium. 
 
 leg-um. 
 
 D. and A. 
 
 sermon-ibus. 
 
 honor-ibus. urb-Ibus. 
 
 gent-IbCs. 
 
 leg-ibus. 
 
THIRD DECLENSION OF NOUNS. 41 
 
 Jiem. 1. Observe that d or t in the stem is dropped in the noa. before 
 s; and c or g" combined with s to form x ; e.g., laus = laud-s; 
 arx = arc-s; lex = leg-s; gens = gents. 
 
 2. All the endings are short but i (dat. sing.) and es (N., A., V. plur.). 
 (101.) EXERCISE. 
 
 l. Vocabulary. 
 
 [In the following vocabularies, the stem of every noun of the third ia- 
 clension is placed immediately after the nominative Ibnn, and before 
 the genitive ending.] 
 
 Rock, petra, ve. 
 
 Tree, arbor, (arbor) is, f. 
 
 To build a nest, nidif icarS. 
 
 Ccesar, Caesar, (Caesar) is. 
 
 And, 6t (conj.)- 
 
 Consul, consul, (consul) is, m. 
 
 General, imperator, (imp6rator) is, m. 
 
 A Helvetian, Helvetius, I. 
 
 K'.ng, rex, (reg) is, m. 
 Law, lex, (leg) is, f. 
 To abrogate, abrogare. 
 Just, Justus, a, iim. 
 Worthy, diguus, a, itra. 
 Part, pars, (part) is, f. 
 Common-people, plebs, (pleb) is, f. 
 To leave, reUnquerg. 
 
 II. Translate into Ens:lis1i 
 
 Rex leg-es abrogat. — Copiae ad urb-em festinant. — Leg-es 
 justae sunt. — Pars pleb-is urb-em relinqiiit. — Magn^ pars pleb- 
 is urb-em relinquit. — Aquilse m pStris et arbor-ibus nidificant. — 
 Leg-es a reg-e abrogantiir. — Copiae ad urb-em revocantur. — 
 Helvgtii ad Caesar-em legates mittunt. — Nuntius sermon-em 
 consul-is laudat. — Imj)6rat6r nuntios revocat. — Rex dignis (54, 
 and 82, 1., R.) honor-es dabit. — Copiae Belgariim urb-em relin- 
 quebant. — Caesar ad vicos festinabat. — Legati ad imp6rat6r-em 
 niittuntiir. — Imperator nuntios ad urb-em mittet. — Legatus 
 part-6m copiarum revocabit. 
 
 III. Translate into Latin, 
 
 The laws were just. — The king will revoke the laws. — The 
 general will leave the village. — The consuls send ambassadors. — 
 The consuls recall the ambassadors. — Doves build their nests in 
 gardens and trees. — The consuls are praised. — The city is for- 
 tified. — Honours will be given. — Honours are given to the wor- 
 thy (82, I., R.). — Ambassadors will be sent to the consuls. — 
 Honours are given to Caesar (54). — The speech of the consul 
 is praised. — Honours are given to the general. — A great part 
 of the common-people will leave the city. — The consuls will 
 recall the common-people. — The ambassadors wiU leave the 
 city. — The general will be sent. — Caesar will be recalled.— 
 The laws were unjust. 
 
 D2 
 
43 
 
 THIRD DECLENSION. 
 
 (102.) 
 
 LESSON XV. 
 Nouns. — Third Declension, continued, 
 
 PARADIGMS. NEUTER FORMS. 
 
 S.ng. 
 
 Sea (n.). 
 
 Song (n.). 
 
 Work (n.). 
 
 Animal (n.). 
 
 N., A.. V. 
 
 D. 
 
 Abl. 
 
 mar-e. 
 mar-Is. 
 mar-I. 
 mar-I. 
 
 carmSn. 
 cannin-is. 
 carmin-i. 
 cannin-e. 
 
 optis. 
 6p6r-is. 
 6per-i. 
 opgr-e. 
 
 animal, 
 animal-is. 
 animal-i. 
 animal-i. 
 
 Plur. 
 
 Seas. 
 
 SongB. 
 
 Works. Animals. || 
 
 N.,A.,V. 
 
 G. 
 D., Abl. 
 
 mar-ia. 
 
 mar-ium. 
 
 mar-ibus. 
 
 carmm-a. 
 
 carmin-um. 
 
 carmin-ibus. 
 
 6per-a. 
 
 6per-um. 
 
 oper-ibus. 
 
 animal-la. 
 
 animal-ium. 
 
 animal-ibuff. 
 
 Rem. 1. Neuters whose nom. ends in al, ar, or e, take i for abl. Bing. 
 
 ending; la, nom. plur., and i\im, gen. plur. 
 2. Partial Rule of Gender. — ^Nouna whose stems end in a 1 or a r are 
 
 neuter. 
 
 (103.) 
 
 I. Vocabulary. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 To cure, heal, sanar6. 
 
 To mitigate, mitigare. 
 
 River, flumen, (flumin) is (n.). 
 
 To swim across, transnarS (gov. ace.). 
 
 Work, opus, (oper) is (n.). 
 
 Fish, piscis, (pise) is (m.). 
 
 Tim£, tempus, (tempor) is (n.). 
 
 To change, mutar6. 
 
 Man, homfi, (homin) is (m.). 
 
 Stormy, turbid, turbidus, ft, &n. 
 
 ^ame, nomSn, (nomin) is (n.). 
 
 To enrol, conscriberg. 
 
 Treaty, foediis, (foedfir) is (n.). 
 
 To violate, violare. 
 
 Spoil or booty, praada, as. 
 
 AtHy, Bocius, i. 
 
 Summer, sestas, (eestat) is (f.). 
 
 Cold, frigus, (frigor) is (ru). 
 
 Burden, onus, (oner) is (n.). 
 
 To carry, portar6. 
 
 Wound, vulnus, (vxdner) is (n.). 
 
 II. Translate into English, 
 
 Consul nomina conscribit. — Caesar foedus {ace.) violab&t, 6t 
 prsedam sociis (54) d§,bat. — iEstas frigus {ace.) mitigat. — Per- 
 fugae flumen {ace.) transnabant. — Magnum opus est. — Flum6n 
 piscibus abundat (66, 1., a). — Tempus homines mutat. — Tem- 
 pora mutantur. — Frigus aestate (93, II., R.) mitigabitur. — 
 Copiae Belgarum fluminS, transnabant. — Servus onus {ace.) 
 magnum portat. — Caesar nomina non conscribet. — Onus mag- 
 num est. — Medicine vulniis sanat. — Carmina puellas dslectant. 
 — Nomina, hominiim mtitabuntur. — Maria turbida sunt. — Fla- 
 mSn magnum erat turbidiim. — MagnS, sunt 5n6r& captivorura. 
 
THIRD DECLENSION. 43 
 
 III. Translate into Latin, 
 
 The Germans violate treaties. — The consuls will not enrol 
 the names. — The slaves were carrying great burdens. — The 
 messenger was-swimming-across the river. — The boy swims- 
 across the river. — Great burdens are carried. — The burden vn\\ 
 be carried by the slave. — The rivers abound in fish {QQ, II., a).— 
 The wounds are healed. — The burdens are gi-eat. — The lieu- 
 tenant will not violate the ti'eaty. — The names are enrolled by 
 the consuls (93, II.). — The treaty is violated. — The treaty is 
 violated by Caesar. — The treaty will be violated, and the spoil 
 will be given to the allies (dat.). — The consul enrols the names 
 of the deserters. — The names of the deserters will be enrolled. 
 , The wounds of the prisoners will be healed. 
 
Uh 
 
 § n, 
 
 ADJECTIVES OF THE SECOND CLASS. 
 
 LESSON XVL 
 
 Adjectives. — Second Class. — Two Endings. 
 
 (104.) Adjectives of the Second Class have is in 
 
 the nom. sing, for masc. and fern, endings, and e for 
 
 the neuter. They are dechned throughout Uke the 
 
 third declension of nouns ; e. ^., brevis, short. 
 
 (105.) PARADIGM. ! 
 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 PLURAL. j 
 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fem. 
 
 Neut 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fem. 
 
 Neut 
 
 N.V. 
 
 brev-is. 
 
 brev-is. 
 
 brgv-e. 
 
 brev-es. 
 
 brev-es. 
 
 brgv-Ta. 
 
 a. 
 
 brev-is. 
 
 brev-is. 
 
 brev-Is. 
 
 brev-ium. 
 
 brev-ium. 
 
 brev-ium. 
 
 D. 
 
 brev-i. 
 
 brev-I. 
 
 brev-I. 
 
 brev-ibus. 
 
 brev-ibus. 
 
 brev-ibus. 
 
 Ace. 
 
 brev-em. 
 
 brev-em. 
 
 brev-6. 
 
 brev-es. 
 
 brgv-es. 
 
 brev-ia. 
 
 Abl. 
 
 brev-I. 
 
 br6v-i. 
 
 brev-I. 
 
 brev-ibus. 
 
 brev-ibus. 
 
 brev-ibiis. 
 
 Rem. 1. Twelve adjectives*^ of this class take Sr for the ending of 
 the nom. sing. masc. instead of Is; e. g"., acer, acrls_, acre; cele- 
 ber, celSbris, celdbre. 
 
 Rem. 2. The abl. has e instead of I in jiivenls, a yottth^k^diliB, 
 
 cedile. The gen. pi. has um instead ofiuminceler, swijL^ 
 (106.) EXERCISE. 
 
 L Vocabulary. 
 
 .Uncertain, incertiis, S, um. 
 Useful, utlKs, 6. 
 Iron, ferriSm, I. 
 Gold, aurum, f. 
 Severe, heavy, gravis, S. 
 Life, vita, ae (f). 
 Brave, fortis, 6. 
 Patiently, pitient^r (adv.). 
 Wolf, lupus, i (m.). 
 Lihe, similis, 6, 
 
 A chief, princeps, (princip) is (o., 2\ 
 IV.). 
 
 omnis, 8. 
 
 Father, pSter, (patr) is. 
 
 Noble, nobilis, 6. 
 
 Every, 
 
 All, the whole, 
 
 Sweet, dulcis, 6. 
 
 To demand, poscSre. 
 
 Soldier, miles, (milit) is (m.). 
 
 Study, zeal, stiidium, i. 
 
 iiCtVid, benignus, a. um. 
 
 Dog, cams, (can) is (c, 25, IV.). 
 
 To endure, tolSrarS. 
 
 Hostage, obses, (6bsid)ls (c, 25, IV.) 
 
 Acer, sharp. 
 Alacer, cheerful. 
 Campester, of the plain. 
 C€l<5b6r, /a»u?MS. 
 
 Cel6r, swift. 
 E que s ter, equestrian. 
 Paluster, marshy. 
 Pedest(5r, pedestrian. 
 
 Saluber, salubrious. 
 Sylvester, woody. 
 Terrestgr, terrestrial , 
 Volucer, swift. 
 
ADJECTIVES, SECOND CLASS. '45 
 
 II. Examples. 
 
 Pater filio bgnignus est. 
 Canis liipo simiKs est. 
 
 (a) The father is kind to his 
 
 son. 
 {b) The dog is like {to) the 
 wolf. 
 
 (c) Rule of Syntax. — The dative case is used with all adjec- 
 tives that are followed by the words to or for in Eng- 
 lish : hence with adjectives expressing {a) advantage or 
 disadvantage, {b) likeness or unlikeness. 
 [Adjectives of likeness or unlikeness also take the gen.] 
 
 tIL translate into English. 
 
 Milites omnes periciiliim timent. — Imp^rator fortis milit§s 
 omnes convocat. — Vita brevis est. — Vita est brevis et incerta. — 
 Viniim est dulce. — Principes fortes oppida omnia muniebant. — 
 Caesar obsidgs nobiles poscit. — Tempiis breve est. — Non omnes 
 milites sunt fortes. — Ferriim utile est. — Auriira et ferriim sunt 
 Qtilia hominibus (106, II., c). — Miles vulniis grave patienter 
 tolerat. — Consul fortis perictila non timebit. — Ferriim util6 
 hominibus (106, II., c) est. — Milites fortes vulnSra gravia pS,- 
 tienter tolerabunt. — Studiiim est puSris (106, II., c) utile. — 
 Iraperator militibus (106, II., c) benigniis erat. — C3,nis liipo 
 similis est. 
 
 IV. Translate into Latin. 
 
 The noble queen comes to the city. — The brave lieutenant en- 
 dures patiently (his) severe wound. — All the soldiers hasten to 
 the camp. — The brave chiefs will fortify many towns — Tho 
 noble hostages come to Caesar (63, I., i^"). — The time is un- 
 certain. — Soldiers are not always useful. — Towns are useful 
 for men (106, II., c). — Noble ambassadors are sent. — Many 
 hostages are demanded by the consuls (93, II.).— All the 
 soldiers will be called together. — Not all chiefs are noble. — 
 Wine is sweet and iron is useful. — The dangers are not fear- 
 ed by the brave soldiers (93, II.). — The brave lieutenant 
 praises the noble chief. — Dogs are like wolves (106, II.). — 
 The study of letters (litterariim) is useful for all (106, II.).— 
 The soldiers are kind to the prisoners (106, II.). — Gold is heavy. 
 — Iron is not like gold (106, II.). 
 
 Even in these, the ending is is sometimes foimd in nom. sing. masc. j 
 e. g., tumultus equestris, Liv., xxix., 35. 
 
} 12. 
 
 ADJECTIVES OF THE THIRD CLASS. 
 
 . % 
 
 LESSON XVIL 
 
 Adjectives. — Third Class. — One Ending. 
 
 (107.) Adjectives of the Third Class have but one 
 ending in the nominative for all three genders ; e. g., 
 f e 1 i X (m., f., n.), happy ; a u d a x (m., f., n.), hold : 
 pauper (m., f., n.), poor. 
 
 (108.) PARADIGM. — Felix^ happy. 
 
 1 SINGULAR. 
 
 PLURAI,, i 
 
 1 Masc. 
 
 Fern. 
 
 Neut. 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fem. 
 
 Neut. 
 
 N.V. 
 
 fellx. 
 
 felix. 
 
 felix. 
 
 fellc-es. 
 
 fellc-es. 
 
 felic-Ia. 
 
 G. 
 
 feKc-is. 
 
 fellc-is. 
 
 felic-is. 
 
 felic-ium. 
 
 felic-ium. 
 
 felic-ium. 
 
 D. 
 
 felTc-I. 
 
 felic-1. 
 
 fellc-i. 
 
 fellc-ibus. 
 
 felJc-ibus. 
 
 felic-ibus. 
 
 Aco. 
 
 fellc-em. 
 
 felic-em. 
 
 ftlix. 
 
 felio-es. 
 
 felic-es. 
 
 felic-ia. 
 
 Abi. 
 
 felic-i. 
 
 fellc-I. 
 
 felic-I. 
 
 felic-Ibus. 
 
 felic-ibus. 
 
 felic-ibus. 
 
 [Rem. 1. The abl. has e instead of I (a) in pauper, poor; sen ex, old 
 (gen. senis) ; p r i n c e p s. chief; compos, possessed of, and most end- 
 ing in es; e. g., hospes, guest; pub 6s, grown up, &c. Also in 
 the compounds of corpiis, color, and pes. 
 
 (5) Participles in ns have, as participles, e, but as adjectives i; e. g., 
 florente r6sa, the rose blooming; florenti rosa, in a blooming 
 rose. 
 
 (c) Adjectives used as nouns take e; e. g., sapiens, a wise man, 
 abl. sapiente. 
 
 Rem. 2. The gen. pi. takes u m instead ofiiiminvetus, old (v6tSrQm) ; 
 censors, partaking of; deggnSr, degenerate; divgs, WcA ; 
 I n o p s, helpless ; m e m o r, mindful ; i m m 6 m o r, unmindful ; sup. 
 pi ex, suppliant; ub6r, rich; vigil, watching. Also in all which 
 take € in the abl. ; e. g., princeps, princlpg, princlpitm.] 
 
ADJECTIVES. THIRD CLASS. 47 
 
 (109.) EXERCISE, 
 
 I. Vocabulary, 
 
 War, bellum, i. 
 
 Fierce, Strox, (Stroc) is (107). 
 
 To wage, carry on, gerere. 
 
 Horse-soldier, equ6s, (equit) Is (m.' 
 
 Tenacious, tenax, (tfinac) is (107). 
 
 Wise, sapiens, (sapient) is (107). 
 
 Death, mors, (mort) is (f.). 
 
 To renew, redintSgrare. 
 
 Rich, dives, (divit) is (107). 
 
 To terrify, terrer6. 
 
 II. Example, 
 
 The inhabitants carry on a j Incolae bellum §,trox gerunt 
 
 Stag-, cerviis, L 
 
 Powerful, potens, (potent) U (107). 
 
 Scout, explorator, is (m.). 
 
 To kill, occIdSrg. 
 
 Battle, praelium, 1. 
 
 And, et (conj.). 
 
 Swift, velox, (veloc) is. 
 
 Horse, 6quus, I. 
 
 Citizen, civis, (civ) is (c, 25, IV.). 
 
 fierce war. I [Refer to 78, II., a.] 
 
 III. Translate into English, 
 
 Incolae bella magna et Strocia genmt. — Nmitiiis Telox ad castr^ 
 vgnit. — Eqmtes veloces ad sylvam festinant. — Vir sapiens mor- 
 tem non timet.— Discipiilus memoriam tenaceni habet. — Me- 
 moria in pueris est tSnax. — Imperator nuntium velocem mitt^t. 
 — Principes fortes praelium atrox redintegrabunt. — Cervus ve- 
 lox est. — Equus velox currit. — Canes sunt veloces. — Sapiens 
 (82, I., R.) non semper dives est. — Divites non semper beatJ 
 sunt. — Princeps potens legates mittit. — Principes potentes 
 captivos occidunt. — Imperator principes omnes convocat. 
 
 IV. Translate into Latin, 
 
 The thick woods terrify the swift messenger. — The fierce 
 battle tei-rifies all the inhabitants. — The noble general was prais- 
 ing the swift messenger. — The illustrious consul sends ambas- 
 sadors to (63, I., 1^") the powerful chief. — The powerful 
 chief will kill all the prisoners. — Rich (men) are not always 
 wise. — ^The wise (man) does not fear the fierce battle. — The 
 ^ soldiers praise the rich citizen. — The memory in boys is al- 
 ways tenacious. — Dogs and horses are swift. — The consul 
 will not renew the fierce battle. — The illustrious general will 
 recall the swift horse-soldiers. — Rich citizens fear fierce wars. 
 — The fierce battles were teiTifying all the hostages. — The 
 wise general calls-together all the ambassadors. — The fierce 
 battle will be renewed. — All the prisoners will be killed by the 
 powerful chiefs (93, II.). — The swift messengers are frighten- 
 ed. — Great wars are carried on. — Rich citizens are killed. 
 
§ 13. 
 FOURTH DECLENSION OF NOUNS. 
 
 LESSON XVIIL 
 Nouns. — Fourth Declension. 
 (110.) The Fourth Declension comprises all nouns 
 whose gen. sing, ends in us {long). The nom. ending 
 iov ^masculines is u s, and for neuters u ; e. g., f r u c t- 
 u Sffi-uit, masc. ; c o r n - u, horn, neut. 
 (111.) The case-endings are as follows: 
 
 Sing. 
 
 Ma«c. 
 
 Neut. 
 
 Plur. 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Neut. 
 
 N. and V. 
 
 US. 
 
 U. 
 
 N. and V. 
 
 us. 
 
 ua. 
 
 Gen. 
 
 US. 
 
 US or u. 
 
 Gen. 
 
 Mm. 
 
 uum. 
 
 Dat. 
 
 Ul. 
 
 u. 
 
 Dat. 
 
 Ibus. 
 
 ibus. 
 
 Ace. 
 
 um. 
 
 u. 
 
 Ace. 
 
 us. 
 
 ua. 
 
 Abl. 
 
 u. 
 
 u. 
 
 Abl. 
 
 ibus. 
 
 ibus. 
 
 (112.) By adding these endings to the stems fruct- 
 and corn-, we get the 
 
 PARADIGM.* 
 
 
 Sins-, fruit (m.). 
 
 Plur., fruit. 
 
 
 Sing.,liorn(ii.). 
 
 Plur.. horns. 
 
 N. and V. 
 
 ftuct-us. 
 
 fhict-us. 
 
 
 
 
 Gen. 
 
 fraet-us. 
 
 fruct-uum. 
 
 N., A., V. 
 
 corn-u. 
 
 com-tta. 
 
 Dat. 
 
 fract-ui. 
 
 fruct-Ibus. 
 
 Gen. 
 
 corn-US, or u. 
 
 com-uum. 
 
 Aec. 
 
 fract-um. 
 
 fract-us. 
 
 Dat., Abl. 
 
 com-u. 
 
 corn-ibiis. t 
 
 Abl. 
 
 fruct-u. 
 
 fruct-ibus. 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 [Rem. 1. The following take u b u s in dat. and abl. plur. instead of 
 ibus, viz., acus (f), needle; areus (m.), bow ; artus (m.), joint; 
 fieus (S.), Jig-tree; lacus (m.), lake; partus /m.), birth; portus 
 [m.), harbor ; querevis (S-), oak ; specus (m.), den; tribus (f.), 
 tribe; peeu (n.), cattle; v6ru (n.), a spit^'l 
 
 2. The feminine nouns of this declension are, acQs, needle; anus, 
 
 * The- fourth declension is only a contracted form of the third : thus. 
 ^ N. fruct-us. 
 
 G. fruct-uis, contr. fructus. 
 D. fruct-uT. 
 
 Ace. fruct uim, eontr. fructum, &c. 
 t The following verses embrace these : 
 
 Arcvis, acus, portus, vgru, 
 
 Ficus, lac\is, artus, 
 SpgdJs, querciSs : also, pScu, 
 Tribtis too, and partfif. 
 
NOUNS. FOURTH DECLENSION. 
 
 4d 
 
 old, woman; domus, house; flcus, fig ; mSnus, hand; niirus, 
 daughter-in-lato ; ^ on fi ens, gallery ; tribus, tribe; querctta, 
 oak. Also, Idus, -uum (used only in plural), the Ides.* 
 3. Domus (f.), house, is thus declined : 
 
 r 
 
 ir. 
 
 N., V. • 
 dom-us. 
 
 dbm-us. 
 
 G. 
 
 -us. ? 
 
 -uum. l 
 -orum. ^ 
 
 D. 
 
 -uT. 
 
 -ibus. 
 
 Ace. 
 
 -OS, 
 
 -lis (rarely). 
 
 Abl. 
 -o. 
 
 -ibus. 
 
 4. The gen. domi is used only in the sense of at home; e. g., ddml 
 
 m e oe, a^ my home, at my house. 
 (113.) EXERCISE. 
 
 I. Vocabulary. 
 
 .Grief, luctus, fist (m.). 
 To lay aside, deponerS. 
 Sadness, moeror, orisf (m.). 
 Tempest, procella, 89. 
 To raise, toUere. 
 Wave, fluctus, lis (m.). 
 Star, sidus, (sider) is (n.) (102). 
 Shore, llttus, (iTttor) is (n.) (102). 
 Wind, ventus, i (m.). 
 Roll, volvgrg. 
 
 Boundary, finis, (fin) Ts (m.). 
 2V^e Rhine, Hhenus, L 
 Ship, navis, (nav) is (f.). 
 
 HelvStii partem copiarum 
 Rheuiim transducunt. 
 
 To lead, over, or across, transducers. 
 
 Approach, adventus, us (m.). 
 
 To await, expectare. 
 
 Singing, eantiis, (is (m.). 
 
 Fmit, fructus, us (m.). 
 
 To adorn, omare. 
 
 Four, quattuor (indeclin.). 
 
 To build, aedificarg. 
 
 Horn, comu, us (n.). 
 
 Army, exercltus, iis (m.). 
 
 Harbour, portus, us (m.). 
 
 Enemy, hostls, (host) is (c, 25, IV.). 
 
 Bird, avis, (av) is (f.). 
 
 II. Examples. 
 (a) The Helvetians lead 
 
 'part of their forces across 
 
 the Rhine. 
 (6) Casar leads a great ar- Caesar magniim GermanO- 
 
 my of Germans across the rum exercitum trans 
 
 Rhine. Rhenum ti-ansduclt. 
 
 Rule of Syntax.— {a) Verbs compounded with the prepo- 
 sition trans are generally followed by two accusatives ; e. 
 g-., partem and Rhenum in {a). 
 
 (b) But sometimes the preposition is repeated ; e. g., trans 
 in (6). - 
 
 III. Translate into English. 
 
 Helve til Casdris (38, b) adventum expectabant. — Adventa 
 
 * Acus, manus, tribus, domus, porticus, and Idtts. The rest are fem. by 
 the general rule (25, II.). 
 i Masr6r = silent grief; lucttta = mourning. 
 
 E 
 
50 NOUNS. FOURTH DECLENSION. 
 
 (abl., 55, a) Caesaris hostes terrentur. — Avis puellam cantu (55, 
 a) delectat. — Fiuctus arbores {acc.pl.) ornant. — Fructus terrse 
 agncolam delectant. — Pater domus {ace. pi.) quattuor aedifica- 
 bit. — Naves in portu sunt. — Regina luctum deponit. — Sapientes 
 luctum et mcerorem deponunt. — Procella magnos fiuctus {ace. 
 pi.) toliebat. — Procella fiuctus {ace. pL) ad sidera tollit. — Puer 
 tauriim cornu (abl., 55, a) tenet. — Cornua cervi magna sunt. — 
 Fiuctus magni ventis (55, a) volvuntur. — Legatiis exercitum du- 
 c'it. — Legatiis ab ^duis (from the ^Eduans ; i. e., their country) 
 exercitum ducit. — Agilcola taurum cornibiis (55, a) tenebat. — 
 Adventiis patiis puellam delectabit. — CcBsar exercitum flumen 
 transducit (113, II., a). — Legatiis per fines Helvetiorum exer- 
 citiim diicet. — Ai'iovistiis Germanos ti'ans Rheniim ti'ansdilcit 
 (113, II., b). 
 
 Rem. Home is translated by do mum, the ace. of domus; thus, The 
 sailor leads the hoy home — ^Nauta puerum do mum ducit. 
 
 IV. Translate into Latin. 
 
 My father will build four houses. — The tempest is rolling 
 great waves to the shores (63, 1., 1^^). — Vast waves are raised 
 to the stars by tempests. — The turbid sea is rolling va«t waves 
 to the shores. — The farmer leads the girls home from {ah) the 
 city. — Caesar will lead the army over the turbid river. — Cassius 
 leads the army through the boundaries of the ^duans and 
 Helvetians. — The Helvetians await the coming of Csesai*. — 
 The boy will hold the bull by the horns (55, a). — The farmer 
 is delighted by the fruits (55, a) of the earth. — The king lays 
 aside his griefs and sadness. — The singing of the birds (aviiim) 
 will delight the soldiers. — The ti'ees are adorned by many fruits. 
 — There are many large ships in the harbour. — The winds raise 
 the great waves to the stars. — The lieutenant was leading the 
 army of the ^duans across the Rhine. (Repeat trans (113, 
 II., h) ). — The horns of bulls are large. — The queen will lay 
 aside her grief and sadness. — The master sends his slaves home 
 
§14. 
 FIFTH DECLENSION OF NOUNS. 
 
 LESSON XIX. 
 Nouns. — Fifth Declension. 
 (114.) The J<'ifth Declension comprises all nouns 
 whose gen. ending is e i. The nom. ending is e s. 
 
 (115.) There are but few nouns of this declension, 
 and they are all feminine except dies, day, and me- 
 ridies, mid-day; and even dies is fern, in the sing, 
 when it means a fixed day. 
 
 (116.) The case-endings are as follows: 
 
 Sing. 
 Plur. 
 
 N.V. 
 
 es. 
 
 es. 
 
 G. 
 
 61. 
 erum. 
 
 D. 
 
 ebus. 
 
 Ace. 
 em. 
 
 es. 
 
 Abl. 
 e. 
 
 ebfls. 
 
 Hem. In the gen. and dat. the e in e i is long when a vowel stands be- 
 fore it ; e. g., di-el: short when a consonant stands before it ; e. g., 
 fid-ei. 
 
 (117.) By adding the endings to the stems r- and 
 di-, we get the 
 
 PARADIGMS. 
 
 Thing (f.). 
 Singular. 
 
 N.V. 
 
 G. 
 
 D. 
 
 Ace. 
 
 Abl. 
 
 r-es. 
 
 r-el. 
 
 r-el. 
 
 r-em. 
 
 re. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 r-es. 
 
 r-erum. 
 
 r-ebiis. 
 
 res. 
 
 r-ebus. 
 
 Dayim). 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 di-6s. 
 
 di-el. 
 
 di-el. 
 
 di-gm. 
 
 dT-e. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 dT-es. 
 
 di-erum. 
 
 di-ebiis. 
 
 di-es. 
 
 di-ebus. 
 
 Rem. Only res, dies, sp6cies, have the plur. complete; the gen., 
 dat., and abl. plur. are wanting in all others. 
 
 (118.) EXERCISE. 
 
 I. Vocabulary. 
 
 Hope, spes, 6i. 
 
 Day, dies, el (m.). 
 
 To appoint, constitiierS. 
 
 To lead out, educerg. 
 
 To lead back, reducerS. 
 
 Line of battle, acies, el. 
 
 To draw up, instruere. 
 
 About, circiter {prep, with ace). 
 
 About mid-day, circitfir meridiem. 
 
 Victory, victOrift, ae. 
 
 Mid-day, mgrldies, el (m.). 
 
 Sixth, sextus, a, Qm. 
 
 Reward, praemium, i. 
 
 Sun, sol, (sol) Is (m.). 
 
 Setting, occasus, us. 
 
 Seventh, septimus, a, ilm. 
 
 Out ofeores. {prep, with ablatiro). 
 
 Faith, promise, fides, ei. 
 
 The next, postfirus, &, tlm 
 
 Tojight, pagnarft. 
 
52 NOUNS. riFTH DECLENSION. 
 
 Caesar aciem instriiit. 
 Postero die castra movent. 
 
 II. Examples, 
 {a) Casar draws up the line 
 
 of battle. 
 {h) The next day they move 
 the camp. 
 (c) Rule of Syntax. — The point of time at which any thing 
 
 occm's is expressed by the ablative ; e. g.^ in {b) postero 
 
 die. — At sun-set = solis occasu. 
 
 III. Translate into English. 
 
 Spes victorias milites delectat. — Milites spe (93, II., R.) vie 
 toriae delectantiir. — Dies venit. — Caesar diem constitiiit. — Caesar 
 diem ciim legatis constituit. — Imperator fortis exercitum educit, 
 et aciem instruit. — Circiter meridiem pugnant. — Caesar, circiter 
 meridiem, exercitum in castra reducit. — Sexto die (118, 11. , c) 
 Caesar exercitum ex castris educit. — Spes praemiorum pueros 
 delectat. — Piigri spe praemiorum delectantur. — Soils occasu 
 Helvetii castra movebant. — Septimo die Belgae copias omnes 
 ex castris educebant. — Solis occasu Ariovistiis aciem instruit. 
 — Circiter meridiem proelium redintegrabunt. — Consul clariis 
 diem cum legfitis constituit. — Principes nobiles fidem violant. 
 
 IV. Translate into Latin. 
 
 The hope of victory delights the noble chiefs. — The consul 
 about mid-day leads out the army and renews the fierce battle. 
 — The powerful chiefs, at the-setting of-the-sun (118, II., c), 
 kill all the prisoners. — The day will come. — The consul, at the 
 setting of the sun, will renew the great battle. — At the setting 
 of the sun the great battle will be renewed. — On thfe sixth day 
 all the forces will be led back to the camp. — The Germans ap- 
 point a day with Caesar. — The next day the Germans move 
 (their) camp — Ariovistus, on the next day, draws out the line 
 of battle. — Caesar appoints the mid-day with the ambassadors. — 
 About mid -day the messengers come. — About mid-daj'' the con- 
 sul will come. — Caesar will not violate (his) promise. 
 
§ 15. 
 PRONOUNS. ^XX.— XXXI.) 
 
 LESSON XX. 
 
 Prontuns. — Substantive- Personal and Adjective- 
 Personal. — Verbs, First Person. 
 
 (119.) The three pronouns ego, I; tii, thou; su'i, of 
 himself, herself, itself, are called Substantive, because 
 they are used as substantives, not as adjectives ; and 
 Personal, because they express the person speaking, 
 the person spoken to, and the person spoken of. 
 
 (120.) The Substantive-Personal Pronoun of the 
 first person is thus declined : 
 
 Noin. Gen. 
 
 Dat. 
 
 Ace. 
 
 Ab,. 1 
 
 Sing. 6g6, I. mel, of me. 
 Plur. nos, we. ^o«JrI )^f^ 
 1 nostrum, J 
 
 mlhl, to me. 
 nobis, to us. 
 
 me, me. 
 nos, us. 
 
 me, by me, &c. j 
 nobis, by us, &c.[ 
 
 (121.) Derived from the Substantive-Personal Pro- 
 nouns are the Adjective-Personal or Possessive Pro- 
 nouns ; called Adjective, because they agree with 
 nouns ; and Possessive, because they express possession 
 (my, thy, his, &c.). 
 
 (122.) The Adjective-Personal Pronouns of ihe first 
 person are declined, in both sing, and plur., like adjec- 
 tives of the First Class (76, 77, a). They are, 
 
 (a) Derived from mel, N. m6us, mea, meum, my, rnhie. 
 
 G. mel, meae, mel, of my (voc. masc- ml). 
 
 &c. &c. (like bonus, 76.) 
 
 {b) " from nostrl, N. noster, nostra, nostrum, our, ours, 
 
 G. nostrl, nostroe, nostrl, of our. 
 
 Sec. Sec. (like p u 1 n h 6 r, 77, a). 
 
 (123.) The follow^ing forms of Verbs in the first per 
 son must now be learned : 
 
 E2 
 
M 
 
 PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 
 
 FIRST CONJUGATION : FIRST PERSON ENDINGS. 
 
 INFIN. ACT., are. 
 
 INFIN. PASS., art. j 
 
 
 Indie, present. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 Future. j 
 
 1st Sing. 
 1st Plur. 
 
 Act. Pass. 
 6. or. 
 amiis. amur. 
 
 Aa. 
 abam. 
 abamus. 
 
 Pass. 
 abar. 
 abamiir. 
 
 Act. 
 abo. 
 
 abimus. 
 
 Pass. 
 iibor. 
 ablmur. 
 
 (124.) Thus, from the stem am, of am- a re, to love, 
 we have ; 
 
 INFIN. ACT., dmdre, to love. 
 
 INFIN. PASS., amarl, to be loved. 
 
 Indio. Pre3, 
 
 Inipprfect 
 
 Act. I Pass. Act. 
 
 am-6, am-6r, jam-abam. 
 
 I love. \ I am loved. Vl was loving; 
 am-amiia, : am -am ur, | am-abam us, 
 we love. , we are loved. \ [we were loving. 
 
 am-abar, 
 I was loved. 
 am-abamur. 
 
 A a. 
 am-abd, 
 I shall love. 
 am-abimus. 
 
 we were loved, we shall love. 
 
 Pass. 
 am-abor, 
 / shall be loved. 
 am-abimur, 
 ice shall be loved. 
 
 [Rem. The student will learn the passive endings readily by observing 
 that r is the passive characteristic, which is added to the active ; the con- 
 sonant ending of the active, where it has one, being dropped.] 
 (125.) EXERCISE. 
 
 I. Vocahulary. 
 
 Book, liber, bri (m.), (64). 
 
 Friend, amicus, I (m.). 
 
 Brother, frater, (fratr) is (m.). 
 
 Cicero, Cicevo, (Cic6r6n) is (m.). 
 
 Sister, sorOr, (soror) is (f.). 
 
 With (i. e., at one's house), ftpud 
 
 (prep. ace). 
 Fault, culpa, 85. 
 Yesterday, heri (adv.). 
 
 II. Examples. 
 (a) I have a hook. 
 
 All my (possessions), omnia meft 
 
 (neut. pi.). 
 Five, quinque. 
 Sharply, dcriter. 
 To-morroio, eras (adv.). 
 Very much, greatly, valde (adv.). 
 To blame, vTtuperarS. 
 To si7ig, cantare. 
 Three, tres, tiia (adj. of Class II.). 
 
 Est mlhi liber (i. e., there is 
 a book to me). 
 
 Rule of Syntax. — The dative case is used with est or sunt, 
 to denote the person who has or possesses something.* 
 The thing possessed is nom. to est or sunt. 
 
 Puer meciim in horto heri 
 ambulabat. 
 
 (6) The hoy was walking 
 with we in the garden yes- 
 terday. 
 
 Rule of Position. — The preposition cum is suffixed to the 
 personal pronouns ; e. g., m e c u m, icith me; n o bi s c u m, 
 with us, instead of cum me, ciim nobis. 
 [Recollect that the personal and possessive pronouns are not expressed 
 in Latin, unless emphasis or perspicuity demands it.] 
 
 * This is called the Dative of Possession, and shonld always be referred 
 to as such by the pupiL 
 
PERSONAL PRONOUNS. FIRST PERSON. 55 
 
 III. Translate into English. 
 
 Ego canto, amicus audit. — Ego et frater ambulamus.* — Ego 
 St filius meus festlnamiis. — Sunt mihi tres libri (125, II., a). — 
 Sunt mihi quattuor equi et quinque canes. — In horto ambiila- 
 bam. — A bonis (82, I., R.) amabor. — Cicero a me laudatiir. — 
 Hostes nobiscura (125, II., b) acriter pugnant. — Heri in agris 
 ambiilabamus. — Pater ad nos nuntium raittet.- — Culpa nostra est. 
 — Cras in horto caenabimus. — Delectabamiir. — Pueri in horto 
 noblscum anibulabunt. — Litterariim studiumf (38, h) mihi (106, 
 II.) utile erit. — A magistr5 laudabar. — Omnia mea mecum 
 porto. — Ego a fratre valde amor. — Nos laudamur, puellae vitu- 
 peratitur. — Nos a magistro verberabimur. 
 
 IV. Translate into Latin. 
 
 We praise the beautiful girl. — We have (125, II., a) four large 
 cups — I have (= there are to me) four sons and three daughters 
 (125, II., a). — We shall praise Ceesar's brave soldiers. — I walk, 
 my friend rides. — I and my sister will ride.* — 1 and my brother 
 will walk* in the king's garden.^ — I and my father will sup* in 
 the garden to-morrow. — We shall always ])raise the wise and 
 good. — The works of Cicero will be praised by us (93, II., 6), 
 the works of Caesar by the soldiers. — The fault is mine. — We 
 have many large cups (125, II., a). — I have three beautiful sisters. 
 — I have four brothers. — My father will walk with me in Cae- 
 sar's garden [Cecsdris in horto). t — The study of literature is 
 useful to us (106, II.). — To-day we shall sup with (apud) 
 Crassus. 
 
 LESSON XXI. 
 
 Pronouns, Personal and Possessive, continued. — Verhs^ 
 First Person, continued. 
 (126.) The following are some of the endings for 
 theirs/ person in verbs of the 
 
 * If a predicate have two or more nominatives, connected by a conjunc- 
 tion, it takes generally the plural number ; and if the nominatives be of 
 dilferent persons, the verb takes the first person rather than the second, 
 the second ratlier than the third. 
 
 t Litterarum studium=^Ae pursuit (or study) of literature (letters). 
 
 X In all such cases, put the prep, betiveen the genitive and the nouo 
 governed by the prep. 
 
56 
 
 VERBS. FIRST PER&ON. 
 
 SECOND CONJUGATION. 
 
 
 STEM. 
 
 SIXGULAK ENmNGS. 
 
 PLURAL ENDINGS. |1 
 
 Present. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 Future. 
 
 mon- 
 mon- 
 mon- 
 
 Active. 
 
 e6. 
 
 ebftm. 
 
 ebd. 
 
 Passive. 
 
 eor. 
 
 ebar. 
 
 ebor. 
 
 Active. 
 
 emus. 
 
 ebamus. 
 
 ebimus. 
 
 Pa-HSive. 
 
 emilr. ' 
 ebamur. 
 ebimur. 
 
 [Rem. The student will learn these fonns readily by obseiving that 
 they differ chiefly from those of the Jlrst conjugation in having e be- 
 fore the last syllable instead of a. By adding the endings, as above 
 given, to the stem mon-, w^hich stands at the left hand, he will fonn 
 the paradigm of m one re, to advise] 
 
 (127.) The following are some of the endings for 
 the first person in the third and fourth conjugations. 
 
 THIRD CONJUGATION. 
 
 
 STEM. 
 
 SINGULAR ENDINGS. 
 
 PLURAL 
 
 ENDINGS. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 Future. 
 
 reg- 
 reg- 
 reg- 
 
 Active. 
 
 6. 
 
 ebam. 
 km. 
 
 Passive. 
 
 or. 
 
 ebar. 
 
 ar. 
 
 Active. 
 
 imus. 
 
 ebamus. 
 
 emiis. 
 
 Passive. 
 
 Tmnr. 
 
 ebamur. 
 
 emur. 
 
 [Hem. Compare these with the endings of the 2d conj., and observe 
 that, 
 
 1. In the pres. e is dropped in the sing., and i assumed in the plur. 
 
 2. The imperfect is precisely the same. 
 
 3. But the future is a new form. 
 
 4. By adding the eiidiugs to the stem placed at the left, you form the 
 paradigm of r e g 6 r e, to rule.] 
 
 (128.) 
 
 FOURTH CONJUGATION. 
 
 
 STEM. 
 
 SINGULAB ENDINGS. 
 
 PLURAL ENDINGS. ^ 
 
 Present. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 Future. 
 
 aud- 
 aud- 
 aud- 
 
 Active. 
 
 id. 
 
 iebam. 
 iam. 
 
 Passive. 
 
 ior. 
 
 iebar. 
 
 iar. 
 
 Active. 
 
 Imus. 
 
 iebamus. 
 
 iemiis. 
 
 Passive. 
 
 Imilr. 
 
 iebamur. 
 
 iemur. 
 
 fRem. Observe that the endings of the 4tb conj. differ from those of 
 the 3d simply by prefixing the letter ?. In the 1st plur. the t pre 
 fixed combines with that of the endings imiis, imur, and forms Imua 
 imur.] 
 
 (129.) 
 
 I. Vocabulary. 
 
 Fierce, ferox, (feroc) Is (107). 
 Nothing, nihil (neut. indecl.). 
 To be well, valere. 
 To arrange, disponere. 
 
 II. Example, 
 
 I have nothing to do 
 Antony (125, XL, a). 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 with 
 
 Wicked, improbus, a, xim. 
 Garrison, proesidiiim, L 
 Latin, Latiniis, a, iim. 
 Antony, Anton'iis, i. 
 
 Nihil est mihi cum Antonio 
 (i. c, there is nothing to me 
 with Antony). 
 
VERBS. SECOND PERSON 
 
 67 
 
 III. Translate into English, 
 
 2d Conjugation. — Ego et frater valemiis (125, III.*). — A 
 magistro docebimur. — Linguam Latinam doceo. — A patrn m5- 
 ueor. — A magisti-o bono docemur. — Ab hoste timebar. — Hos- 
 tium adventum non timebo. ScZ Conjugation. — Regebamiir. — 
 Praesidia disponebamus. — A Deo regimiir. — Ego exercitiim 
 ducam. — A filio meo relinquar. — Liipos f^roces occidimus. 
 Ath Conjugation. — Castella muniemus. — Avium cantiim audi- 
 mus. — (h'as ad urbem veniam. — Nihil est mihi cum improbis. 
 — Nihil est nobis cum hostibus. 
 
 IV. Translate into Latin. 
 
 2d Conjugation. — I and my son are well (125, III.*). — 
 We shall see the brave soldiers. — I am taught by good masters. 
 — We were fearing the approach of the enemy. — 1 was teach- 
 ing the Latin language. — We shall be feared by the enemy.— 
 We shall be advised by our father. 3d Conjugation. — We 
 were led by a brave general. — I was killing three wolves. — We 
 are ruled by a good liing. — We shall arrange the garrisons. — 
 I shall bring (dQcere) my daughter from (ab) the city. — We 
 shall lead the forces of the Germans. Ath Conjugation. — We 
 were heard by the master. — We shall sleep in the little town 
 (89,11.). — We shall come to the town to-morrow. — I shall be 
 heard by the girls. — We were fortifying the towns. — We have 
 nothing to do with the foolish (129, II.). — I have nothing to do 
 with Caesar. 
 
 LESSON XXIL 
 Pronouns. — Substantive- Personal and Adjective-Per- 
 sonal. — Verbs, Second Person. 
 (130.) The Substantive-Personal Pronoun of the 
 second person is thus declined : 
 
 I Nom. 
 
 Sing, tu, thov. 
 jPlur. vos, you 
 
 Gen. 
 
 I) at. 
 
 tuT, nf thee. itibl, to thee. 
 vesti-L } of -, - , 
 
 te, tJiee. 
 vos, you. 
 
 V-l: 
 
 tii, tJio^i 
 vos, you. 
 
 te, by. 
 vobis, by. 
 
 (131.) The following are some of the endings of tho 
 second person of verbs of the 
 
68 
 
 PERSONAL PRONOUN. SECOND PERSON. 
 
 
 
 FIRST 
 
 CONJUGATION. 
 
 
 1 
 
 STEM. 
 
 SINGULAR ENDINGS. [ 
 
 PLURAL ENDINGS. j 
 
 Pres. 
 Imp. 
 Fut. 
 
 am- 
 am- 
 am- 
 
 Acl. 
 
 as. 
 
 abas, 
 abls. 
 
 I'ass. 1 
 
 aris. 1 
 
 abarls. 
 
 aberis. 
 
 Act. 
 
 utIs. 
 
 abatis. 
 
 abitls. 
 
 Pass. 
 
 ammT. 
 
 abamini. 
 
 abiniinl. 
 
 (132.) EXERCISE. 
 
 I. Vocabulary, 
 
 Yesterday, hCrl. (adv.). j To wound, \'xilnerare. 
 
 To-day, hodie (adv.). I Tojight, pugnarS. 
 
 II. Translate into English. 
 
 Cras mecura coenabis. — Tu me amas, Sgo te arao. — VOa 
 v5biscum pugnatis. — Tu cantas, nos audimiis. — In hortd ambu- 
 labatis. — Tu a patre valde amaiis. — Vos vituperamini, nos lau- 
 damur. — Nihil est tibi ciim Csesare. — Cras vobiscum ccEnabo. 
 — Nos laudabimur, vos vituperabimini. — Nihil vobJs est ciim bo- 
 nis. — Heri ambulabatis. — Hodie pugnabitis. — Laudabamini.^ — 
 Vulnerabimini. — Vocatis. — Vocamini. — Amatis. — Aruamini. 
 — Cantabatis. — Vocabamini. 
 
 III. Translate into Latin. 
 
 To-day ye were supping with us (125, II., h). — Ye love us, 
 we love you. — Ye were singing, we were heai'ing. — Ye have 
 nothing to do with the king (129, II.). — Thou wast greatly 
 loved by Caesar. — Ye shall be praised by our master. — Ye shall 
 oe blamed by the good (82, 1., R.). — Ye are called by the mes- 
 senger. — Thou fightest with thyself* (125, II., 6).— Ye shall, 
 sup with us to-morrow. — Thou wilt fight to-morrow. — Thou 
 wast loving. — Thou wast loved. — Thou wnlt blame. — Thou 
 wilt be blamed. — Ye are praising. — Ye are praised. — Thou 
 woundest. — Thou art wounded. 
 
 LESSON XXIII. 
 
 Pronouns, Personal and Possessive, continued. — Verbs, 
 Second Person, Second Conjugatio)i. 
 (133.) The following are some of the endings for 
 the second p erson, in verbs of the 
 
 * Tecilm. 
 
VERBS. SECOND PERSON. 
 
 59 
 
 SECOND CONJUGATION. 
 
 1! 
 
 STEM. 
 
 SINGULAR ENDINGS. 
 
 PLURAL ENDINGS. 
 
 11 
 
 
 Act. 
 
 Pa.ss. 
 
 Act. 
 
 FiWS. 
 
 Pres. 
 
 mon- 
 
 es. 
 
 ens. 
 
 etis. 
 
 emini. 
 
 Imp. 
 
 moii- 
 
 ebas. 
 
 ebarls. 
 
 ebatis. 
 
 ebaiuTnT. 
 
 1 Put. 
 
 mon- 
 
 ebis. 
 
 eberls. 
 
 ebitis. 
 
 ebiminl. 
 
 (134.) The Adjective-Personal (or Possessive) Pro- 
 nouns of the Second Person are, tuus, a, um, thy ; 
 and V e s t e r, V e s t r a, V e s t r ii. m, your. 
 
 N. tuiis, a, um, thy, thine. 
 
 G. tui, ae, i, of thy, &cc. 
 
 N. vester, vestrS,, vesti-iim, your. 
 
 G. vestri, vestrae, vestri, of your, 
 
 (135.) EXERCISE. 
 
 1. Vocabulary. 
 
 (a) Derived from tui, 
 
 (b) Derived from vestri. 
 
 Thou art, es-(2d. person sing. ind. 
 
 pres. of esse). 
 Ye are, estis (2d person pi. of do.). 
 / was, 6rSm (1st imperf. do.). 
 Cause, ) causa. 
 
 For the sake of, ) causa (abl). 
 To learn, discgre. 
 
 II. Examples, 
 
 (a) N e is an interrogative particle used in asking questions. 
 It is annexed to the vs^ord to which it especially refers ; c. g.^ 
 
 Of, concerning, de (prep. abl.). 
 To laugh, riderS. 
 To rejoice, gauderg. 
 Safety, salus, (salut) Is (f.). 
 Leader, guide, dux, (due) is (m.). 
 Why, cur (adv.). 
 Because, that, quod (conj.). 
 
 (1 ) Do you teach the boy ? 
 
 (2) Do you teach the boy ? 
 
 (3) Do you teach the 602/ .^ 
 
 T u n 6 puerum d6c6s ? 
 D 6 c e s n 6 puerum ? 
 Puerumn6 doces ? 
 In (1) tu has the emphasis; in (2) doces; and in (3) 
 puerum. 
 (6) Ye are warned, /or i/ze I Ves tree s^lutis causa 
 sake of your (own) safety. \ monemini. 
 Rule of Position. — C a u s a, for the sake of (the abl. of 
 causa, a cause), is always placed after the genitive which 
 depends on it. 
 (c) I was. your leader. jDux ego vester dram. 
 
 III. Translate into English. 
 
 Videsne sei-vum meum? (135, XL, 2). — Tua3 salutis causa 
 (135, II., h) moneris. — Cur ridetis ? — Vestrge salutis causa 
 mbnBminl. — GaudeS qu6d tii 6t patfir tutis valetis (125, III., *). 
 
60 
 
 VERBS. SECOND PERSON. 
 
 — Videbasng milites ? — De culpa tua monebans. — Cur rideba- 
 tis. — Hostium adventum non timebis. — Tuae salutis causa mfin- 
 ebeiis. — Nos discemus, vos docebimini. — Timetisne CsBsaris 
 adventum? — Esne tu beatus ? — ^Culpa tua est {the fault is thine). 
 •^— Pueri in horto vobisciim ambiilabant. — Mdgister ego vester 
 eram (135, II., c). 
 
 IV. Translate into Latin* 
 
 [The emphatic words are in italics.] 
 Did you see your master ? — Do you fear the approach of 
 Caesar? — Are you happy? — You were warned (advised) for 
 the sake of your own safety. — Are you and your father well ? 
 (125, III., *). — The fault was yours. — You shall see the ene- 
 my, but (sed) shall not fear (them). — I am your friend. — I was 
 your friend. — You teach, but we learn. — You shall teach, but 
 we shall learn. — ^Why do you not (non) fear the master ? — You 
 were warned of (d e) your fault. — Do you see your slaves ? — 
 Are you Csesar ? — Why do you fear the master ?— You shall 
 see gi'eat cities and many men. — We shall sup with you to-mor- 
 row. — You shall be warned, for the sake of your own safety. — 
 We rejoice that you and your daughter are well (125, III., *). 
 
 LESSON XXIV. 
 Verbs, Second Person, Third and Fourth Conjugations, 
 (136.) The following are some of the endings of 
 the second person in verbs of the 
 
 THIRD CONJUGATION. 
 
 
 STEM. 
 
 ACTIVE ENDINGS. 
 
 PASSIVE ENDINGS. | 
 
 
 
 •2d Sing. 
 
 2d Plur. 
 
 2a Sing. 
 
 2d Plur. 
 
 Pres. 
 
 reg- 
 
 is. 
 
 itis. 
 
 eris. 
 
 Tmini. 
 
 Imper. 
 
 reg- 
 
 ebas. 
 
 ebitls. 
 
 ebaris. 
 
 ebiimim. 
 
 Fut. 
 
 reg- 
 
 es. 
 
 etis. 
 
 erls. 
 
 eminl. 
 
 (137.) The following are some of the endings of 
 the second person in verbs of the 
 
 FOURTH CONJUGATION. 
 
 
 STEM. 
 
 ACTIVE ENDINGS. 
 
 PASSIVE ENDINGS. j] 
 
 Pres. 
 Imp. 
 
 aud- 
 aud- 
 aud- 
 
 2d Sing. 
 
 is. 
 
 iebas. 
 
 ies. 
 
 2d Piur. 
 
 itis. 
 
 iebatis. 
 
 ietTs. 
 
 2d Siug. 
 
 iris. 
 
 iebaris. 
 
 ierls. 
 
 2d Plur. I| 
 
 imini. 1 
 iebamini. \\ 
 iemini. |{ 
 
 * When 3/0M, 1/our, occnr, translate them both in sing, and plur., for 
 the sake of practice. 
 
PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 61 
 
 (138.) Observe, 
 (o) That the present ending-s of the 3d and 4th conjugations are nearly 
 
 alike, the vowel (i) oi the fourth being long (i). 
 (h) That the imperfect and future endings of the fourth conjugation 
 
 differ from those of the third by prefixing the letter i. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 (139.) Vocabulary. 
 
 Plant, planta, oe. 
 
 To soio, to plant, ser6r6. 
 
 To find, invenire. 
 
 Orator, orator, (orator) Is (m,). 
 
 Voice, vox, (voc) Ts (f.). 
 
 To read, legerg. 
 
 Wlience, und6 (adv.). 
 Long, longe (adv.). 
 Badly, mal6. 
 To punish, piinlrS. 
 So, tarn (adv.). 
 Bird, avis, (av) Is (f.) 
 
 (140.) Translate into English. 
 
 2d Conjugation. — Cur non scribis. — Arbores et plantas s6r6- 
 batis. — Hodle ad Csesarem mitteris. — Curtain male scribis? — 
 Ad castra reduce mini. — Legis-ne Ciceronis opera ? — Scribis- 
 ne epistolam ad Csesarem? Ath Conjugation. — Unde venis? 
 — Cur tam longe dormis ? — Magistrum boniim invenies. — Audis- 
 -ne magistri vocem? — Cur non venietis? — A Csesare audiris. 
 — A magistrO puniemini. — Orat5rem audietis.— In horto dor- 
 miebatis. — Cantum avium auditis. 
 
 (141.) Translate into Latin. [Refer to 135,11.] 
 
 3d Conjugation. — Are you writing a letter ? — Thou wast 
 planting a tree to-day. — Were (you) reading the works of Cicero ? 
 — Why do you read »o badly ? — Are you writing a letter to the 
 messenger? — Thou wilt read Caesar to-day. — Thou art sent 
 to the camp. — Thou wilt be led by the ambassadors. 4th Con- 
 jugation. — Why do you not come ? — Ye shall hear the voice of 
 Caesar. — Thou wilt sleep in the camp. — Ye shall be heard by 
 the master. — Thou shalt be punished. — Ye are heard. — Thou 
 shalt hear the singing of the birds. 
 
 LESSON XXV. 
 Pronouns. — Substantive- Personal and Adjective-Per 
 sonal, Third Person. 
 (142.) The Substantive Pronoun of the third per- 
 son IS thus decHned : 
 
 F 
 
62 
 
 PERSONAL PRONOUN.- — THIRD PERSON. 
 
 Sing. 
 Plur. 
 
 suT, of himself , 
 herself, itself 
 
 sui, of them- 
 selves. 
 
 slbl, to him- \se, himself, &.c.se, by himself, \ 
 
 self, &.C. j (Sec. j 
 
 sibi, to them- se, themselves. \se, hy thefmA 
 
 selves. selves, Sec. 
 
 (143.) The Adjective Pronoun of the third person 
 
 is decUned Uke an adjective of the first class : thus, 
 
 Derived from sui, I N/ suus, a, um, his, hers, its, his own. 
 
 I G. siii, ae, i, of his, hers, its, &c. 
 
 Rem. Observe that siil is not a regular pronoun of the third person, 
 like the English lie, she, it, but reflexive ; e. g., puer se laudat, tin 
 boy praises himself. It therefore has no no'm. ease. [The nom. 
 pronouns he, she, it, are not often expressed in Latin ; but when 
 they must be, a demonstrative pix»noun, generally hie, is, or ills, 'is 
 employed.] 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 (144.) Vocabulary. 
 
 Among, intSr (prep.). 
 
 Com, fnimentum, I. 
 
 From (prep.) a or ab.t 
 
 A legion, legid, (legion) Is (f ). 
 
 To rule, command, iniper-arg (with 
 
 dat. of person). 
 
 To send away, ) , . 
 
 > dImitt-erS. 
 
 Hand, manus, us (f.) (112, 2). 
 To love {with esteem), dilig-6rg. 
 IZ'o live, vlv-6r6. 
 To contend, contend-er6. 
 To defend, defend-erg. 
 To burn, inceud-ere. 
 Townsman, oppTdanus, 1. 
 A Sequanian, Sequanus, i. 
 
 (145.) Examples. 
 
 (a) Casar calls i)iyi^iacMS I Caesar Divitiaciim ad s6 v6c3,t. 
 
 to himself. 
 (&) The girl writes the Ze^- Puella gpist6ia,m mS,nu suS. 
 
 ter with her oivn hand. I scribit. 
 
 [Rem. Se is often doubled, for the sake of emphasis.] 
 
 (c) Men ahvays love them- 
 selves. 
 
 {d) The good live not for 
 themselves, but for all. 
 
 Homines semper sese dili- 
 
 gunt. 
 Boni non sibi, sed omnibus 
 
 vivunt. 
 
 (146.) Translate into English. 
 
 Hostes inter se contendunt. — Oppidani se sudque ab hostJ- 
 biis defendebant. — Helvetii oppida sua omnia incendunt. — CfB- 
 sar tres legiones secum liabet. — Consul legates ab se dimittet. 
 • — Sapiens omnia sua* seciim portat. — Helvetii et Sequani ob- 
 
 * Omnia sua= all his [projxTty) ; the noun being understood. 
 
 t A is used before consonants only ; fib before either vowels or consonants 
 
DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 63 
 
 sides inter sgse dabant. — Boni sese non diligunt.— HelvStii 
 frumentiim orane* secum portabant. — Improbi sibi semper vi- 
 vunt. — Sapiens sibi semper imperat (147). 
 
 (147.) Rule of Syntax. — The Dative is used with some 
 verbs signifying to command, to rule, to obey. 
 
 (148.) Translate into Latin. 
 
 Good men do not praise themseh'es. — The townsmen were 
 fighting with each other (inter s e). — The wise man always 
 carries all his (property) with him. — Bad men ahvays love them- 
 selves. — The general has three legions with him. — The towns- 
 men will carry all their corn with them. — Bad men do not rule 
 themselves (147). — The iEduans will defend themselves and 
 their (property) from the soldiers. — Caesar was dismissing the 
 messenger from him self. — The Germans will burn their villages 
 
 LESSON XXVI. 
 Demonstrative Pronouns. 
 (149.) The Demonstrative Pronouns are so called 
 because they are used to point out an object ; e. g.^ 
 this, that, these, those. 
 
 (150.) Is, that (often used for he, she, it (143, R.), 
 is thus declined; also idem, the very same, com- 
 pounded of i s and d e m . 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Sinfrular. 
 
 Plural. 1 
 
 N. 
 
 Is, ea, id. 
 
 il, eoe, ea. 
 
 Idem, eadem. 
 Idem. 
 
 iidem, eoedem, 
 
 eaJem. 
 
 G. 
 
 ejtts. 
 
 eorOm, earum, 
 eorum. 
 
 ejugdem. 
 
 eorundem, ea- 
 rundem, eo- 
 rundem. 
 
 D. 
 
 ex. 
 
 us, or eis. 
 
 eldem. 
 
 ilsdem. 
 
 Ace. 
 
 eum, gam, Td. 
 
 eos, eas, ea. 
 
 gundem, ean- 
 dem, Idem. 
 
 eosdem, e5s- 
 dem, eadem. 
 
 Abl. 
 
 eo, ea, eo. 
 
 us, or eis. 
 
 eodem, eadem, 
 
 ilsdem. 
 
 
 
 
 eodem. 
 
 
 (151.) The following forms of the verb esse, to be, 
 must now be learned. 
 
 * F r urn entiim onmd =» all their com. 
 
64 
 
 DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 TENSES. 
 
 SINGULAR. 1 
 
 Present. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 Future. 
 
 1st. 
 
 sum, I am. 
 eram, was. 
 ero, shall or will be. 
 
 2d. 
 
 es, thou art. 
 
 eras. 
 
 ens. 
 
 3d. 
 
 est, he, she, &.c.,is. 
 
 erat. 
 
 grit. 
 
 
 PLURAL. 1 
 
 Present. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 Future. 
 
 l8t. 
 
 sumus, we are. 
 eramus, were. 
 erimus. 
 
 2d. 
 
 estis, ye are. 
 
 eratis. 
 
 gritis. 
 
 3d. 
 
 sunt, the^ are. 
 
 grant. 
 
 erunt. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 prohibere. 
 
 (152.) Vocabulary. 
 
 To keep off, 
 
 To prevent. 
 
 To refrain, temperarg. 
 
 Merchant, mercator, (mercator) is 
 
 (m.). 
 Colour, color, (color) is (m.). 
 Arid, atqu6 (conj.), 
 Plato, Plato, (Platon) is. 
 
 (153.) Examples. 
 
 p,) The Helvetians contend 
 
 with the Germans, and 
 
 keep them off from their 
 
 boundaries, 
 {b) The father calls his {own) 
 
 son to hv[n{self). 
 (c) The father calls his 
 
 daughter and her son to 
 
 him{self). 
 
 !^" Observe carefully, that if his, hers, its, refers to the principal sub- 
 ject of the sentence, it is expressed by the possessive (suus., a, um); but 
 if not, by the genitive (ejus) of the demonstrative (is, ea, id). 
 
 (154.) Translate into English. 
 
 (1) is, ea, id, used for he, she, it (personal). 
 
 li ab injiiria temperant. — Is est in provincia tua. — Merqa- 
 tores ad eos ssepe veniunt. — Ab lis multa (82, I., R.) poscimiis. 
 — BelgsB cum ^duis contendunt, eosqiie suis finibiis (153, a) 
 prohibent. 
 
 (2) I s, used as demonstrative, this, that ; also, i d e m, as the same 
 
 * Suisjinibus is in the ablative. All verbs of separating, depriving. Sec . 
 may take a noun in the ablative, with the direct object in the accusative* 
 
 Elegant, elegans, (elegant) is. 
 Gladly, willi7igly, libenter (adv.). 
 Way, journey, ItSr, (itin6r) is (n.). 
 Kingdom, regmlm, i. 
 Flower, flos, (flor) is (m.). 
 Writer, scriptor, (scriptor) is (m.) 
 Never, nunquam (adv.). 
 
 Helve til cum Germanis con- 
 tendunt, eosqiie suis flni- 
 biis prohibent.* 
 
 PatSr f ilium suum ad se v6- 
 
 cat. 
 PatSr filiam suam gt f iliiim 
 
 ejiis ad se vocat. 
 
DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 65 
 
 In eo itinere Caesar Grassura videt. — Dumnorix, ed teniporS 
 (118, ii., c) regaum tenebat.— Non semper idem floribus (125, 
 II., a) est color. — In ea provincia sunt quattuor legiones. 
 
 (3) Distinction between ejus and suus, a, um. 
 
 Cicero est scriptor clarus ; ejus libros libenter legimus. — 
 Caesar ad se Dumnorigem atque filiiim ejus vocabit. — Plato est 
 scriptor elegans ; ejus opera libenter lego. 
 
 Dux ego vester eram. — £s-ne tu Socrates ? — Estisn6 beati? 
 — Caesar dux vester erat. 
 
 (155.) Translate into Latin. 
 
 They were walking in the garden yesterday. — The king 
 will give them (dat., 54) rewards. — They are in Gaul. — Mer- 
 chants never come to them. — We were demanding rewards of 
 (ab) them. — In that province Caesar finds many deserters. — In 
 that province there are three legions. — At that time (abl., 118, 
 II., c) Caesar was leading the army. — Horses (125, II., a) have 
 not always the same colour. — Caesar calls Divitiacus and his 
 brothers to him (self). — Caesar is an elegant writer ; we read his 
 works with pleasure. — I am your leader. — You shall be our 
 leader. — Caesar was our leader. — The iEduans contend with 
 the Helvetians, and keep them oflf their boundaries. 
 
 ^ LESSON XXVII. 
 
 Demonstrative Pronouns^ continued. 
 (156.) The Demonstrative hie, haec, h5c, this, 
 points out an object which is present to the speaker, 
 and is called demonstrative of the^r^^ person; e. g., 
 this hook {of mine) , h i c 1 1 b e r. 
 
 
 Nom. 
 
 Gen. 
 
 Dat. 
 
 Ace. 
 
 Abl. 
 
 Sing. 
 Plur. 
 
 hie, haec, hoc. 
 hi, hae, hsDC. 
 
 hujus. 
 
 horum, hariim, 
 horiim. 
 
 huic. 
 his. 
 
 hunc, hanc, 
 
 hoc. 
 hos, has, 
 
 h^c. 
 
 hoc, hac, hoc. 
 his. 
 
 Rem. Hic is used also (as was stated 143, R.) for he, she, it ; e. g., hi o 
 dicit, he (this man) speaks. 
 
 (157.) Iste, ista, istud, this, that, points out an 
 F 2 
 
66 
 
 DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 object which is present to the person spoken to, and is 
 called the demonstrative of the second person ; e. g.j 
 that hook {of yours), iste liber. 
 
 
 Nom. 
 
 Gen. 
 
 Dat. 
 
 Ace. 1 Abl. 
 
 Sing. 
 
 iste, ista, 
 
 istius. 
 
 istl. 
 
 istum, istam, ista, ista, isto. 
 
 
 istud. 
 
 
 
 istud. 
 
 
 Plur. 
 
 isti, istae, 
 
 istorum, aruin, 
 
 istls. 
 
 istos, istas, 
 
 istls. 
 
 
 ista. 
 
 orum. 
 
 
 ista. 
 
 
 Rem. Ist6 is often used to denote contempt; e. g., iste-ne dicit? 
 Does thatfelloxo speak 1 
 
 (158.) II le, ilia, illiid, points out an object re- 
 mote from the speaker {that, the former, opposed to 
 hie), and is called the demonstrative of the third per- 
 son. It is used often for the personal pronoun he, she, 
 U (143, R.). 
 
 E^^ It is declined throughout like istd, ista, istiid. 
 
 Rem. In the genitives, istius, illlus, ipslus, the penult T is long, 
 contrary to the general rule (24, 1) that a vowel before another is 
 short. 
 
 (159.) Ipse, ipsa, ipsum, is properly an adjunc- 
 tive pronoun, as it is added to other pronouns ; e. g., 
 
 I (and not another) praise myself. I £go me ipse laudd. 
 J praise myself (and not another). | JEgo me ipsiim laudd. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 (160.) Vocabulary. 
 
 opinion, sententia, oe. 
 To please, placere. 
 To displease, displicere. 
 Soul, animtis. i. 
 Proverb, proverbiiim, i. 
 Lazy, ignavus, a, um. 
 Excellent, 
 
 Celebrated, 
 
 praeclarus, a, um. 
 
 Animal, animal, (animal) is (neut.). 
 Pleasing, agreeable, gratus, a, tlm. 
 Base, turpis, e (104). 
 Friend, amicus, i. 
 To boast, prsedicare. 
 To obey, pavere (vpith dat., 147). 
 Old, vetus, (veter) is (108, R., 2). 
 Song, carmen, (cannin) is (n.). 
 Precept, praeceptum, I. 
 
 Reason, ratid, (ration) is (f.). 
 
 (161.) Examples. 
 
 {a) ^\ns opinion pleases me, \'H.?RC sententia mihi pldcSt 
 XhBX displeases {me). | ilia displicdt. 
 
DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 67 
 
 Rule of Syntax. — Verbs of pleasing, obeying, persuading, 
 commanding, favouring, and the reverse,ta\ie the Dative 
 case. 
 
 Iste tuus amicus vir clariis 
 
 est. 
 Animus ipse se movet. 
 
 Turpe est de seipso prs3- 
 dicare. 
 
 . (6) That friend of yours is 
 an illustrious man. 
 
 (c) The soul itself moves it- 
 self. 
 
 (d) It is base to boast of one'' s 
 self. 
 
 Mule of Syntax. — The infinitive is used as the subject of 
 a verb, and is then regarded as a noun in the neuter gen- 
 der; e. ^., prgedicare (to boast), in (d), is nom. to est, 
 and turpe (base) agrees with it in the neuter. 
 
 (162.) Translate into English. 
 
 (a) Hi pueri magisti-o parent. — Hae littSrae valde me delec- 
 tant. — Ciceronis libri valde mihi placent : eos libenter lego. — 
 Hoc bellum grave est. — Hie puer bonus est, ill6 ignavus. 
 
 (b) Ista tua filia pulchra est. — Istud tuum carmen mihi (106, 
 II., c) gi'atum est. — Praeclara sunt ista tua praecepta. — Vetiia 
 
 .illiid proverbiiim mihi placet. 
 
 (c) Omne animal seipsiim diligit. — Impgrator ipsS militibus 
 (147) imperat. — Ego me ipse non laudabam. — Tii teipsum laud- 
 abis. — Sapiens sib! ipsi imperat. 
 
 {d) Jucundiim est amare. 
 
 (163.) Translate into Latin. 
 
 (a) That illustrious precept was-pleasing-to (placebat) Cato. 
 — That brave general will command the soldiers. — The soldiers 
 willingly obey this brave general. — This precept pleases me, 
 that displeases (me). — The works of Caesar please me very 
 much; I read them gladly (libenter). 
 
 {b) That horse of yours is a beautiful animal. — I keep in 
 memory (memoria teneo) that excellent precept of ycurs. — 
 Those songs of yours are pleasing (giata) to me. — That letter 
 of yours was delighting me very much. 
 
 (c) The soul rules itself (161, c) by reason (ra,ti5ne, 55, a). — 
 The poet himself praises himself (159). — Ccesar himself wiU 
 command the legions (161, c). — The soldiers willingly (libenter) 
 
68 
 
 RELATIVE PRONOUN. 
 
 obey Caesar himself. — Do you (135, II., 1) praise yourself?-— 
 Wise men themselves always rule themselves (147). 
 
 {d) It is pleasant to love (one's) friends. — It is base to boast 
 of (one's) friends. — It is agrepable to please (one's) father. 
 
 LESSON XXVIII. 
 (164.) The Relative Pronoun (whoy which), qu 
 q u se, quod, is thus declined : 
 
 1 
 
 Nom. 
 
 Gen. 
 
 Dat. 
 
 Ace. 
 
 Abl. 1 
 
 Sing. 
 
 Plur. 
 
 • 
 
 qui, quae, 
 quod. 
 
 qui, quae, 
 quae. 
 
 cujus. ' 
 
 quorum, quarum, 
 quonim. 
 
 cui. 
 quibus. 
 
 quem, quam, 
 
 quod, 
 quos, quas, quae. 
 
 quo, qua, quo.l 
 qmbus. 
 
 Rem. Ci,uicunqu6, quoecunqug, quodcuuque {whosoever, which- 
 soever, whatsoever) is declined like qui, quae, quod; cuuque be- 
 ing simply annexed to the different cases. 
 
 (165.) The Relative commonly refers to some preceding 
 word, which is therefore called the antecedent ; e. g.. The man, 
 who lives well, is happy. Here 7nan is the antecedent; who, 
 the relative. The sentence in which the relative occurs is call- 
 ed the relative sentence ; the other the principal or antecedent 
 sentence ; e. g. (above), the man is happy, is the principal sen- 
 tence : who lives well, the relative sentence. 
 .EXERCISE. 
 
 (166.) Vocabulary. 
 
 Poor, egens, (egent) is (108). 
 
 Enough, satis (adv.). 
 
 Nearest to, neighbours to, proximus, 
 
 a, ilm. 
 To dwell, incolere {intrans). 
 To inhabit, incolere [trans). 
 Blood, sanguis, (sanguin) Is (m.). 
 Also, etiani (conj.). 
 Heart, coi; (cord) is (n.). 
 To despise, contemnere. 
 Magnanirtious, magnanimus, a, iam. 
 Honest, Iwiidurahle, honestus, a, iim. 
 
 Fountain, fons, (font) is (m.). 
 
 Water, aqua, se. 
 
 Winter-quarters, hibema, drum (pl.)t 
 
 To winter, hifimarS. 
 
 Arethusa, Arethusa, ae. 
 
 To return, restore, reddere. 
 
 Virtue, virtiis, (virtut) is (f.). 
 
 To repel, propulsare. 
 
 To vaunt, ostentare. 
 
 Fame, famu, ae. 
 
 To do, to %iake, fScgrg. 
 
 One, unus, a, um. 
 
 (167.) Examples. 
 (a) The boy, who reads, 
 learns. 
 
 P u 6 r, qui ISgit, disdt. 
 
il^^£ 
 
 RELATIVE PRONOUN. 
 
 The girl, who readsy learns, 
 {b) The boy, whom we see, 
 
 is handsome. 
 The girl, whom we see, is 
 
 handsome. 
 
 Puella, quae legit, discit. 
 P u e r, quern videmus, est 
 
 pulcher. 
 Puella, quam videmus, est 
 
 pulchra. 
 
 Rule of Syntax. — The Relative Pronoun must agree witli 
 its antecedent in gender and number (as in («) ), but its 
 case is fixed by the construction of the relative sentence 
 (e. g., in {a) qui is norain. to legit: in (&) quern is 
 ace, governed by videmus). 
 
 (c) 7 who write. 
 We who write. 
 
 yi) He is poor who has not 
 enough. 
 
 Ego, qui s c r i b 6. 
 
 Nos, qui scribimiis. 
 Rule of Syntax. — The verb in the relative sentence agrees 
 with the relative in number, but takes the person of the 
 antecedent. 
 
 (1) Egens est is, qui non 
 satis habet. 
 
 (2) I s egens est, qui non 
 satis ha,bet. 
 
 (3) Qui non sS,tis hS,bet, is 
 egens est. 
 
 (4) Qui non satfs h&bet, 
 egens est. 
 
 Rule of Position. — The relative generally stands at the be- 
 ginning of its sentence, and (1) as near to its antecedent 
 as possible. (2) Is and qui are made emphatic when 
 is begins the principal sentence and qui the relative 
 sentence ; (3) and still more emphatic when the relative 
 sentence stands first. (4) The antecedent is often 
 omitted entirely. 
 
 (168.) Translate into English. 
 
 {a) Proximi sunt Germanls, qui trans Rheniim incolunt.— " 
 Orane S,nima,l, quod sanguinem habet, habet etiam cor. — Cae- 
 sar, tres legiones, q u sb in provincia hiemabant, ex hibernis edu- 
 cit. — Omnia (82, I., R.) quae pulchra sunt, honestS, sunt. 
 
 (6) Felix est rex, quern omnes cives araant. — In hac insu- 
 la est fons aquae dulcis, cui nom^n est Ar6thus& (125, II., a). 
 
70 INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 — Arjovistiis obsides reddit, quos habet ab ^duis. — Galliaa 
 sunt partes tres, quai'iim unam Belgae incolunt. 
 
 {d) (1) Beat! sunt ii, quorum vita virtute (abl., 55, a) rggi- 
 tiir. — (2) is fortis est, qui injuriara propulsat. — (3) Qui se 
 ostentat, is stultiis dicitiir {is called a fool). — (4) Qui famam 
 bonam contemnit, virtutem contemmt. — Fortis et magnS-nimus 
 est, non qui facit, sed qui propulsat injuriam. 
 
 (169.) Translate into Latin. 
 
 {a) The songs which we hear are pleasant (gi'ata) to us 
 (106, II., c). — The king who rules wisely is happy. — All animals 
 which have blood have also hearts. — Cajsar leads across the 
 Rhine the five legions which were wintering in the province. 
 
 (6) Happy is the teacher whom all (his) scholars love. — In 
 that (ea) island (there) is a city whose name is {to which the 
 name is*^ 125, II., a) Syracuse (Syracusse). — In this (hac) 
 city there is a fountain whose name is Arethusa. — Of Britain 
 (there) are three parts, of which (gen.) the English inhabit 
 one. 
 
 {d) (1) Happy is he whose hfe is ruled by the precepts of 
 vutue. — He is wise who diligently serves (colit) the gods. — 
 (2) They are brave who repel an injury. — (3) They who vaunt 
 themselves are called fools. — (4) Who repels an injury, \a 
 brave and magnanimous. 
 
 LESSON XXIX. 
 Interrogative Pronoun, 
 
 (170.) The Interrogative Pronoun is precisely likfa 
 the Relative in form, excepting that for the nom., sing., 
 and masc., it has qui s, and for the nom. and ace, neut., 
 quid; thus, quis, quae, quid. 
 
 (171.) Quisnam, qusenam, quidnam, express a more 
 emphatic interrogation than the simple q u i s, q u ae, quid, the 
 syllable nam answering to our English " pray ;" e. g.., 
 
 Pray, what are you doing ? | ' Quidnam §,gis ? 
 
 * S u n t, plm-al, because Sjr&ctstB is plural. 
 
INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 71 
 
 (172.) In asking questions, the different cases of quis can be 
 used as substantives or as adjectives, excepting that 
 
 (1) In the nom. sing, masc, quis is used as a substantive. 
 In the nom. sing, masc, qui is used as an adjective. 
 
 (2) In the nom. and accus., neut., quid is used as a sub- 
 
 stantive. 
 In the nom. and accus., neut., quod is used as an ad- 
 jective. 
 
 Quis v6nit ? 
 
 Qui homo venit ? 
 
 Quis homo est ? 
 
 Quid times 1 
 
 Quod periciilum times ? 
 
 (1) Who comes ? 
 What man comes ? 
 Who is the man ? 
 
 (2) What do you fear ? 
 What danger do you 
 
 fear ? 
 
 (173.) The answer yes is given by repeating the verb which 
 isks the question ; no, by repeating the verb with non. Ver8 
 {certainly), added to the verb in an affirmative answer, gives it 
 more emphasis ; e. g., 
 
 Are you writing ? 
 
 I am writing. 
 
 Are you reading ? 
 
 I am noi reading. 
 
 Will you do what I ask ? 
 
 Twill certainly do {it). 
 
 Scribis-ne ? 
 ScribS. 
 Legis-ne ? 
 Non leg6. 
 Fdcies-nS quse* r5g8? 
 Faciam ver6. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 (174.) Vocabulary. 
 
 Neio, novus, 5, um. 
 
 Neios, novl (neut. gen. of novus, used 
 with a neut. adj. or pronoun). 
 
 Nilm, interrogative particle, used 
 when no is expected as the an- 
 swer. 
 
 To do, agSrS. 
 
 To he among, intSressS (inter + 
 esse) ; but quid interest 1 = what 
 is the difference ? 
 
 Between, among, hitSr (prep., ace). 
 
 Beast, brute, bestia, ae. 
 
 An evil, malum, i. 
 
 Without, sing (prep., abl.). 
 
 Figure, iignra, se. 
 
 Mortal, mortalis, S. 
 
 Certainly, verd (affirmative parti 
 
 cle). 
 To carry, vehSrS. 
 Immortal, immortalis,t S. 
 
 * Haec, quae, plural, should be translated this, what, singular, 
 t Observe the force of in prefixed to adjectives. Mortalis = mortal i 
 H 4- tnortalis = immortalxs, immortal. 
 
72 INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 
 
 (175.) Examples. 
 (a) What is the news ? 
 
 (6) Is there anything new 1 
 
 (There is not, is there ?) 
 (c) Why do you laugh 1 
 
 Quid est novi? (=What 
 is there of new 1) 
 
 Niim est quidnam novi? 
 (N u m expects the answer no.),. 
 
 Quidrides? 
 
 (176.) Translate into English. 
 
 Quis nos vocat? — Cujus hie liber est? — Quem vides?— 
 Quid agis. — Quid interest inter hominem et bestiara ? — Quam 
 domum inv^nies sinS mails? — Quid legis? — Epistolam. — Quae 
 anaicitia est inter improbos ? — Num Caesarem times ? — Non ti- 
 rneo. — Qua in urbe (125, IV., N., X) siimus? — Quis h6m6 
 est? — £g6 sum Caesar. — Num animus figur^m habet? — Sunt 
 ne homines mortales ? — Sunt vero. — Quid tames ? Caesarem 
 v6his. 
 
 (177.) Translate into Latin. 
 
 Who calls me ? — Whose are those books ? — ^What men do 
 you see ? — What are you writing ? — A letter. — What book are 
 you reading ? — What is the difference between the good and 
 the wicked ? — Who is the soldier ? — What is the difference be- 
 tween wolves and dogs ? — Do you not fear the enemy ? — I do 
 not fear (them.) — What man will you find without a fault (cul- 
 pa) ? — In what town are we ? — Whose house is this ? — What 
 city will you find without evils? — What is the difference 
 between men and beasts ? — What do you fear ? You are car- 
 rying the king. — Are men immortal (niim) ? — They are not. 
 
 LESSON XXX. 
 Indefinite Pronouns. 
 (178.) 1^ 11^ Indefinite Pronouns denote an object in 
 a general way, without reference to a particular indi- 
 vidual ; e. g.f any one, some one, &c. They are, 
 
 1, duidam, a certain one, &ic., plural, some. . ■ . 
 
 2. duivis, ) , 
 
INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 
 
 73 
 
 3. duisquam, any, any one [e. g., when it is denied that there are any) . 
 [Neut. q u i c q u a m (sziZ»s^.) ; q u o d q u a m {adj) . This pronoun is us ed 
 
 chiefly in negative sentences.] 
 
 4. duispiSm, somebody, some (neut.). 
 
 5. Aliquis, some one, something (neut.); any (adj.). 
 
 . 6. Cluisqu6,eacA,unusquisque,eac/i owe (stronger than quisqu6). 
 7. Ecquis? used interrogatively, (does) any one? anything? 
 B^^ Observe carefully that each of the above takes quid in 
 neuter nom., and ace, when used substantively; and quod 
 when used adjectively. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 (179.) Vocabulary. 
 
 The tenth, d6cimus, S, um, 
 
 A javelin, tragula, oe. 
 
 To see, to notice, conspIcerS. 
 
 Judgment, discretion, consilium, i. 
 
 Eternity, setermtas, (setemitat) is (f.). 
 
 Maker, artificer, fab6r, fabri (m.). 
 
 Fifth, quintus, a, um. 
 
 Youth, juventus, (juventut) is (f.). 
 
 Fortune, fortunfi, oe. 
 
 Forever, in aetemum. 
 
 Belong, pertinerS. 
 
 (180.) Examples, 
 
 Art, ars, (art) is (f.). 
 
 Form, forma, 89. 
 
 To discover, invSnirS. 
 
 For, 6t6nim, conj. (always stands 
 
 first in its clause). 
 Cultivation, humanity, humanitag, 
 
 atis (f.). 
 Commx)n, communis, Is, 6. 
 Bond, vinculum, i. 
 Dignity, dignitas, (dignitat) is (f.)- 
 Body, corpus, (corp6r) is (n.). 
 
 {a) Something new. 
 Each one of us. 
 A certain thing new. 
 Some dignity. 
 
 Aliquid novi. 
 Unusquisque nostrum. 
 Quidddra novi. 
 Aliquid dignitatis. 
 Rule of Syntax. — The indefinite pronouns may be used 
 partitively, and then govern the genitive. 
 
 {b) A certain one of the sol- 
 diers. 
 Some of the soldiers. 
 
 Quid^m {sing.) ex mlliti- 
 
 bus. 
 QuidS.m {plur.) ex militl- 
 
 bus. 
 
 Rem. The ablat. with ex is used instead of the genitive, especially 
 with quidam. 
 
 (181.) Translate into English. 
 
 Quidain ex militibus decimge ISgionis v^nieb&t. — Quinto die 
 (118, II., c) tragiila a quo dam milite conspicitur. — -^^ri, in 
 quibus aliquid consilii (180, a) est, magnanimi simt. — Tempus 
 
 G 
 
74 
 
 CORRELATIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 est pars qusedam seternitatis. — Cuivis (125, II., a) &nimali 
 corpus est. — Quilibet est fab6r fortunae suae. — Unicuique* 
 (125, II., a) nostrum (180, 120) est animus immortalis.— 
 Qui s que nostrum (180) in seterniim vivet. — Animus non habet 
 formam aliquam, nee figuram. — Aliquid novi invenies. — ■ 
 Etenim omnes ai'tes, quae ad humanitat6m pertinent, habent 
 quod dam commune vinculum. 
 
 (182.) Translate into Latin. 
 
 [The pronouns of the lesson are italicized in the exercise.] 
 Some of the soldiers of the fifth legion are wounded (pres.).— 
 On the fifth day (118, II., c) the enemy is noticed by a certain 
 soldier of the tenth legion. — Men, in whom there is some dignity 
 (180), are magnanimous. — To each man (=of men) there is 
 a soul and a body. — I "^ill give the book to any-one-you-please 
 of the scholars. Each one of us shall live forever. — You will 
 discover a certain thing new. — Some of the soldiers are in the 
 city. — For all the arts which belong to cultivation have a certain 
 common bond. — Youth is a certain part of life. — Is not (estne) 
 any man-you-please the maker of his own fortune ? — Has the 
 soul {use num) any form or figure ? 
 
 LESSON XXXI. 
 
 Correlative Pronouns. 
 (183.) Correlative Pronouns are such as answer to 
 each other ; e. g., how great ? so great. How many ? 
 so many, &c. 
 
 [This correlation is often expressed in English by adverbs or conjunc- 
 tions : such a man as : as is the general, so are the troops, &c.] 
 (184.) The Correlative Pronouns are 
 
 D eraonstrative. 
 
 qualiscunqu6, of whatever 
 
 kind. 
 quantuscunquS, however 
 
 great. 
 aliquantus, somewhat great. 
 ^aliquot, some. 
 *quotqu6t, however many. 
 
 talis, such. 
 
 tantfis, so great, so 
 Trnich. 
 
 *t6t, so many. 
 *t6tid6m, just so many. 
 
 quaJis ; as, of what 
 kind. 
 
 qa.axi.tn8, as great. 
 ^qu6t, as many. 
 
 * Unus and quisqnS are both declined in unusquisquS. Unus 
 aas gen. unius, dat. uni. 
 
CORRELATIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 75 
 
 Rem. I. dualis ? of what kind? quantus? how great? qu6t? 
 
 how many ? are also used interrogatively. 
 2. Those marked thus (*) are indecliaable ; the rest are decliuied like 
 
 adjectives. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 (185.) Vocabulary. 
 
 Where, ubi (adv.). 
 
 Toil, opera, ae. 
 
 Pleasure, voluptas, (voluptSt) Is (f.). 
 
 Retoard, praemiiim, L 
 
 Gold, aurum, I. 
 
 Money, pficunia, ae. 
 
 (186.) Examples, 
 {a) So much toil (= of toil). 
 
 How much pleasure ? {= of 
 pleasure 7) 
 
 No reward (= nothing of re- 
 ward). 
 
 Much gold {= of gold). 
 
 A pretty large piece of 
 ground. 
 
 Fear, timSr, (timor) is (m.). 
 
 Or, v6l (conj,). 
 
 Advantages, bona (neut. adj.). 
 
 To afford, praebere. 
 
 To covet, expgtere. [is (f.). 
 
 Liberality, liberalitas, (lib6ralitat) 
 
 Tantiim operas. 
 Quantum voluptatis? 
 
 Nihil praemii. 
 
 Multiim auri. (But, much 
 money = magn& pecuniS,, 
 not multura pecuniae.) 
 
 Aliquantiim agri. 
 
 Rule of Syntax. — ^The neuters, tantiim, quanttim, 
 
 aiiquantiim; also, multiim, nihil, quid, S,liquid, 
 
 and others, are used as neuter nouns, and followed by the 
 
 genitive (Synt., 695, 6., R.). 
 
 Obs. Tantum, quantum in neut., with genitive = so much, so 
 many, how much, how many ; but in masc. and fern., agreeing with 
 the noun, so greats, how great; e. g., Iww many books ? quantum 
 librorum; so great fear, tantus timOr. 
 
 {b) As is the master, so are the 
 scholars. 
 
 Qualis est magister, tales 
 sunt discipuli ; or (with est 
 and sunt omitted), qualis 
 ma^ster, tales discipiili. 
 
 (187.) Translate into English. 
 
 Quales sunt duces, tales sunt milites. — FortiinaB bonS, (82, 
 II.), quantacunque sunt, incerta sunt. — Tantiis timor omnem ex- 
 ercitiim occupabftt. — Ubi tantam virtut^m invSnies? — Quan- 
 tum voluptatis virtiis praebSt! — Fratri est (125, II., a) &liquan- 
 
76 CORRELATIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 tiim pecuniae. — Virtus nihil pvsemii vel pecuniae expert. — P^t6r 
 milii magnam pecuni^m dabit. — Quantum (186, Ob^ librorum 
 habes ? — Quot homines, tot sententise. 
 
 (188.) Translate into Latin, 
 
 As are the generals, so are the soldiers. — As is the king, so 
 are the leaders. — As are the masters (heri), so are the slaves. 
 — As ai'e the fathers, so are the children. — So great an army 
 is coming. — The advantages of the body, however great they 
 may be (sunt), are uncertain. — Where will you find so great 
 Ubei-ality ? — How many (186, Ohs.) rewards does virtue afford ? 
 — Good (men) covet no (186, a) reward. — Will your father 
 give (135, II.) you much money? — Has your brother much 
 gold ? — ^As are the chiefs, so are the citizens. — My father has 
 (125, XL, a) a pretty large piece of ground. 
 
4 § 116. 
 
 NUMERALS. (XXXII.— XXXIII.) 
 
 LESSON XXXIL 
 
 Numerals. — Partial Table, 
 (189.) Numerals are divided into the four classes 
 following, of which the first three are adjectives, the 
 fourth, adverbs. 
 
 
 CAKDINAL. 
 
 OKDINAX. 
 
 DISTRIBUTIVE. 
 
 ADVEHBIAT.. 
 
 
 
 One apiece, one by 
 
 
 
 One, two, &;c. 
 
 First, second, &.C. 
 
 one, one at a time, 
 &c. 
 
 singuU, se, S. 
 
 Once, twice, &c. 
 
 I. 
 
 unus, a, um. 
 
 primus, &, um. 
 
 sSmel. 
 
 II. 
 
 duo, XB, 6. 
 
 secundus,a,um. 
 
 blnl, 86, a. 
 
 bis. 
 
 III. 
 
 tres, es, tril 
 
 teitius, a, um. 
 
 temi, ae, &. 
 
 ten 
 
 IV. 
 
 quattuor. 
 
 quartus, &, uia, 
 
 quatemi, ae, a. 
 
 quatfir. 
 
 V. 
 
 quinque. 
 
 quintus, a, um. 
 
 quini, ae, a. 
 
 qumquiea. 
 
 VI. 
 
 sex. 
 
 sextfis, a, um. 
 
 seni, ae, a. 
 
 sexies. 
 
 VII. 
 
 septSm. 
 
 Septimus, a, iim. 
 
 septeni, ae, &. 
 
 septies. 
 
 VIII. 
 
 octo. 
 
 octavus, a, um. 
 
 octoni, ae, a. 
 
 octies. 
 
 IX. 
 
 n6v6m. 
 
 nonus, a, um. 
 
 noveni, ae, a. 
 
 novies. 
 
 X. 
 
 d6c6m. 
 
 d^cimus, a, iim. 
 
 denl, ae, a. 
 
 decies. 
 
 XL 
 
 undecim. 
 
 undecimus, a, 
 
 undeni, ae, a. 
 
 undgcies. 
 
 xn. 
 
 du6d6cim. 
 
 du6d6cimus, &, 
 
 duodeni, ae, &. 
 
 duodecies. 
 
 
 
 um. 
 
 
 
 Rem. For the declension of uniis and duo, see 194. Tres is declined 
 like a plural adjective of second class, 194. The remaining cardinals 
 are undeclined. The ordinals and distributives are declined like 
 adjectives of the first class. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 (190.) Vocabulary, 
 
 In all, altogether, omnind. 
 Multitude, multatudd, (multltudin) 
 
 is (f.). 
 Hour, hora, 89. 
 To he distant, distarS. 
 Mile, millia,* (miU) ium (pi. n.). 
 Year, annus, T. 
 Month, mensis, (mens) fs (m.). 
 
 Another, altSr, a, tlm (194, R. 1.). 
 Thirty -six, sex et triginta. 
 To levy, conscriberS. 
 Night-watch, vigilia, 83. 
 From, after, de (with abl.). 
 To strive, to hasten, contenders. 
 Italy, Italia, 88. 
 
 * Mi 116, plur. millia 
 = a mik.. 
 
 1000. Millia (passuum, of paces understood) 
 
 G2 
 
78 
 
 NUMERALS. 
 
 (19 J.) Examples, 
 
 (a) They fight four hours. 
 (6) The city is distant five 
 
 mihs. 
 (c) A ditch eleven feet wide. 
 
 Horas qliattuor pugnant. 
 Urbsdistatquinque millia 
 
 Fossa und^cim pedes lata. 
 
 Rule of Syntax. — The accusative answers to the questions 
 how long ? (whether of time or space), how broad 1 how 
 high? &c. ; e. g., in {a) horas; in (6) millia; in (c) 
 p6des. 
 {d) How long ? may also be expressed by a noun in the geni- 
 tive, depending on another noun ; e. g.^ a ditch of ten feett 
 fossa decern pedum. 
 
 (192.) Translate into English. 
 
 Erant omnino itinera duo. — Galliae sunt partes tres, quarum 
 unam incolunt Belgee, alteram Aquitani. — tJnus e multitudmS 
 vulneratur. — Horas sex pugnabant. — Urbs distat decern millia. — 
 In anno duodecim menses sunt. — Caesar duas legiones conscri- 
 bit. — Caesar tres legiones quae in Gallia hiemabant educit. — 
 Caesar tres legiones ex hibernis educit. — Sunt omnino itinerd 
 quattuor.— Caesar de quarta vigilia legiones educit. — Consul 
 legiongm decim^m in castra rSducit. — Caesar ciim quinquS le- 
 gidnibiis in Italiam contendit. — Er^t omnjno in Gallia legiS 
 una. 
 
 (193.) Translate into Latin. 
 
 There are in all three ways. — There are of Gaul three parts, 
 of which the Sequanians inhabit one. — There are of the city 
 five parts. — Four of (= out of) the multitude are wounded. — 
 The soldiers fight seven hours. — In three years are thirty-six 
 months. — The villages are distant nine miles. — The wood is dis- 
 tant four miles. — The consuls will levy six legions. — Caesar will 
 lead out five legions from Italy. — The general was levying two 
 legions in Gaul. — Caesar will lead out the soldiers in the second 
 watch. — The consul, in the third watch leads back the soldier? 
 into the camp. — The tenth legion fights (pugnat). — There aro 
 altogether in Gaul two legions. — Caesar brings back the fifth le- 
 gion. — Caesar brings back the fifth legion after the second w^atch. 
 
NUMERALS. 
 
 79 
 
 LESSON XXXIII. 
 Numerals, continued. 
 (194.) Declension of unus, duo, and tres. 
 
 n 
 
 One, Sing. 
 
 
 Two, Plur. 
 
 Three, Plur. 
 
 N. 
 
 a. 
 
 anus, a, um. 
 unlus, lus, lus. 
 ual, i, i. 
 the rest regular. 
 
 N.V. 
 Gen. 
 D.Ab. 
 Ace. 
 
 duo, duae, duo. 
 duorum, duarum, duorum. 
 duobus, duabus, duobus. 
 duos and duo, duas, duo. 
 
 tres, tres, tria. 
 trium, trium, trium. 
 tribus, tribus, tribiis. 
 tres, tres, tria. 
 
 Rem. (1.) Like unus are declined 
 Alius, 5, lid, anotJier.* 
 AltSr, a, um, the one, the other (of two). 
 Neut6r, trS, tram, neither of the two. 
 Nullus, a, um, no one. 
 Solus, a, um, alone. 
 Totus, ft, um, the whole. 
 
 UUus, a, um, any one. 
 
 UtSr, trS, trum, which of the two. 
 
 UterqnS, traquS, trumque, each of 
 
 the two, both; and other compoundg 
 
 oi liter. 
 
 (2.) Like diid is declined ambo, oe, o, both. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 (195.) Vocabulary. 
 
 JVhat one, quotus, ft, um. 
 
 Most, plerusqu6, ftqu6, umqu6 ; e. g., 
 
 most men, hSmines pleriquS j most 
 
 insa:ts, insectft pl6raqu6. 
 Virgil, VirgUius, L 
 More, iflftgis (adv.). 
 
 [Refer to the column of distributives (189).] 
 
 (196.) Examples. 
 
 A beam, trabs, (trftb) is (f.).' 
 
 Insect, insectum, I. 
 
 Horace, Horatius, T. 
 
 To migrate, migrare. 
 
 Writer, scriptSr, (script6r) is (m.). 
 
 Mother, matSr, (matr) is (f.). 
 
 {a) My father will give us 
 
 two hooks apiece. 
 (&) What hour is it 7 The 
 
 third, 
 (c) He will come for my sake 
 
 alone. 
 {d) Which pleases you ? 
 
 Neither. 
 ie) The beams are three 
 
 feet distant {apart) from 
 
 each other. 
 
 P^tSr nobis binos libros da,- 
 
 bit. 
 Quota hora est? Tertia. 
 
 Me a uniiis causa {ahl.) vS- 
 
 ni6t. 
 titer tibi placet? NeutSr. 
 
 Trabes int6r se distant ternos 
 pedes (191, c). 
 
 When ilias is repeated, it means som£, others. 
 
m 
 
 NUMEUALH. 
 
 (197.) Translate into English. 
 
 Mater nobis quaternos libros dabit. — Nobis sunt (125, II., a) 
 terni equi. — Binse omnibus avibiis alse sunt. — Insecta plerdciue 
 senos, ^lid octonos, pedes habent. — Quota hora est ? Nona. — 
 Milites utriusque exercitus sunt fortes. — Tua unius causa ve- 
 nient. — Virgilius atque Horatius poetae sunt, prseclari ; uter tibi 
 magis placet? (161, a.) Virgilius. — Bis in anno milites veni- 
 unt. — September est noniis anni mensis. — Trabes intSr se dis- 
 tant binos pedes (191, c). 
 
 (198.) Translate into Latin. 
 
 [Some of the words will be found in 194, R. 1.] 
 We have (125, II., a) four dogs apiece (196, a). — The mas- 
 ter gives us five books at a time. — All men have (125, II., a) 
 two eyes apiece. — Most insects have six (senos) feet; some 
 
 (194*) nine, others (194*) ten, others (194*) twelve What 
 
 o'clock (hour) is it ?— The fifth.— The eighth The eleventh. 
 
 — The twelfth. — The generals of each army are brave. — Why 
 do you come? For your sake alone (196, c). — Cicero and 
 CsBsar are excellent writers ; which pleases you ? Neither. 
 — Which pleases you more ? Caesar. — The birds migrate twioft 
 in the year. — The soldiers will come eight times a year. — Oc- 
 tober is the tenth month of the year ; November the eleventh ; 
 December the twelfth. — The beams are four feet distant fi'oni 
 each other. — The beams are seven feet apart from each other 
 
§ 17. 
 V^ERBS OF THE THIRD CONJUaATION IN i5. 
 
 LESSON XXXIV. 
 
 Verbs of the Third Conjugation in to, 
 
 (199.) Some verbs of the third conjugation, instead 
 of taking the simple verb-stem for the tense-stem in 
 the tenses for incomplete action, add i to the verb- 
 stem in these tenses. They form the infinitive, how- 
 ever, in ere, like other verbs of the third. 
 
 (200.) Infin. Active, cap- g re, to ^aAre. 
 
 ! SINGULAR. p 
 
 Present. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 Future. 
 
 cap-i-6. 
 
 cap-i-ebam. 
 
 cap-i-am. 
 
 cap-is, 
 
 cap-i-6bas. 
 
 cap-i-es. 
 
 cap-it 
 
 cap-i-ebat. 
 cap-x-6t. 
 
 PLUHAI,. II 
 
 Present. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 Future. 
 
 cap-i-mus. 
 
 cSp-i-ebamus. 
 
 c^p-i-emus. 
 
 cSp-i-tis. 
 
 cSp-i-ebatis. 
 
 cip-i-etis. 
 
 cap-i-unt. 1 
 
 cap-i-ebant. 
 
 cap-i-ent. 
 
 Infin. Passive, cap-i, to 6e taken. 
 
 \ SINGULAK. 1 
 
 Present. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 Future. 
 
 cap-i-6r. 
 
 cap-i-ebar. 
 
 cap-i-ar. 
 
 cap-6-ris. 
 
 cap-i-ebaris. 
 
 cap-i-eiis. 
 
 cap-i-tiir. 
 
 cap-i-gbatur. 
 
 cap-i-etur. 
 
 PLTJEAL. 1 
 
 Present. 
 Imperfect. 
 Future. , 
 
 cftp-i-mur. 
 
 cap-i-ebamur. 
 
 cap-i-emur. 
 
 cap-I-mmi. 
 
 cap-i-ebamini. 
 
 cap-i-emlni. 
 
 cap-i-untur. 
 
 cap-i-ebantur. 
 
 cap-i-entur. 
 
 
 EXEI 
 
 I C I S E. 
 
 
 (201.) Vocabulary. 
 
 [In all cases, verbs of the class described above will be indicated in 
 the vocabularies by the ending id, after the infinitive form ; e, g., to 
 make, ftlc6r6 (id),] 
 
82 VERBg OF THIRD CONJUGATION IN lO. 
 
 Pardon, favour vfinifi, 09. 
 
 Excuse, excusatiS, (excusation) is 
 
 (f.). 
 To receive, accept, accipgrS (io). 
 Way, road, it6r, (itingr) is (neut.). 
 To undertake, suscipgrg (io). 
 To make, fac6rS (16). 
 
 (202.) Example. 
 Willingly Ccesar gives par- 
 don and receives the excuse. 
 
 And, quS.* 
 
 Ship, navis, (nav) is (fi). 
 
 To repair, to renew, to rebuild, r6fl- 
 
 c6rS (16). 
 Long; longus, a, um. 
 Wall, rauriis, i. 
 Harbour, portus, us (m.). 
 
 Llbenter Caesar dat veni&m, 
 excusati6nemqu6* accipit 
 
 (203.) Translate into English. 
 
 Labieniis multa Germanorum (78, II., b) oppida capiebat. — 
 Helvetii per provinciam nostram iter faciunt. — Vulnera gravid 
 a militibus accipiuntur. — iEdui belliiin magnum suscipiebant. 
 —Llbenter Caesar nuntios accipit, iisque (201, N.) veniam dat. 
 .— Imperator obsides civitatis libenter accipiet. — Nuntium a 
 patrS eras accipies. — Crassiis naves longas, quae in portu sunt, 
 rSficit. — Consul muros urbis reficit. 
 
 (204.) Translate into Latin. 
 
 The enemy were making (their) way through our province. — 
 The Romans were rapidly (c e 1 e r i t e r) making their way through 
 Gaul. — We shall receive a messenger from the city to-day. — 
 The Helvetians were undertaking a severe and great war. — 
 The soldiers receive many and severe wounds. — We shall make 
 (our) way through Britain. — Caesar will willingly receive tlie 
 excuse of the ^duans, and gi-ant them (iisque) favour. — The 
 gifts of a father are gladly (libenter) received. — The long ships 
 are repaired by Caesar. — The general was rebuilding the old 
 (ve teres) ships which were in the harbour. — We shall re- 
 build the old walls. 
 
 (205.) Observe the formation of the following 
 words : 
 
 AccipSrS {to receive), — Sd {to)+c&p&r6 {to take). 
 Suscip^re {to undertake), •=■ sub («7iier)-}-c&perS. 
 R6f ic6r6 {to rebuild), = rS-Hac6r6 (to make again). 
 ^^ In the composition of verbs with prepositions, £1 frequ ontly passei 
 into i, as in these examples. 
 
 * E t joins words or sentences which are considered indej^endent and 
 of equal importance with each other ; qu6 joins a word or sejitence close' 
 ly to another, as an appendage to it 
 
§ 18. 
 DEPONENT VERBS. 
 
 LESSON XXXV. 
 
 Deponent Verbs. 
 
 (206.) Deponent verbs are such as have the pasS' 
 ive form, but an active meaning ; e. ^., hortor, /ea:- 
 hort (not / am exhorted). 
 
 (207.) The forms of deponents in the tenses for 
 incomplete action of the indicative mood are precisely 
 the same as those of passive verbs (Lessons XII., 
 XIII.) ; we therefore need only give the first persons. 
 
 (208.) 
 
 DEPONENT FORMS. 
 
 INDICATIVE. 
 
 let conj. 
 2d conj. 
 3d conj. 
 4th conj. 
 
 hortSr, I exhort. 
 f ateor, I confess. 
 sequor, I follow. 
 metior, I measure. 
 
 hortabar, / was exhorting'. 
 f atehar, I was confessing'. 
 eequCbar, I was fallowing. 
 metieb&r, I was measuring. 
 
 hortabor, I wiU exhort. 
 f atgbor, I will confess. 
 sequar, / roill follow. 
 metiar, I roill measure. 
 
 INFINITIVE. 
 
 1. hort-ari, 
 to exhort. 
 
 2. fat-en, 
 to confess. 
 
 3. sSqu-i, 
 to follow. 
 
 4. mfit-lrl, 
 
 [ t^ In the vocabularies deponent verbs are always given by the in- 
 flnitive forms. Observe that the ending -ari shows that the verb is of 
 the 1st conj.; -eri, the 2d; -i, the 3d; -iri, the 4th.] 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 (209.) Vocabulary. 
 
 [Transitive deponents govern the accusative, unless it is otherwiso 
 mentioned in the vocabularies.] 
 
 To embrace, amplect-i. 
 
 To gain, to possess one's self of, p6t- 
 iri (with gen. or abl. ; general- 
 ly gen. in Cses.). 
 
 To endeavour, con-ari. 
 
 To follow, s6qu-I. 
 
 Asi as if, tanquam (adv.), 
 
 To strive after, pursue, pers8qu-i 
 
 (per + sequi, to follow through). 
 Glory, gloria, ae. 
 All, totiis, a, una (194, R., 1). 
 Bravery, virtue, virtus, (virtut) is (f.). 
 Long, diu (adv.). 
 Sin,fauU, peocatum, i. 
 
84 DEPONENT VERBS. 
 
 Helvetii per provinciam nos- 
 ti*S,mitdrfac6i*e conantur. 
 
 (210.) Example. 
 
 The Helvetians endeavour to 
 
 pass (= tx) make way) 
 
 through our province. 
 
 Rule of Syntax, — The infinitive is used in Latin (as in 
 English) to complete the imperfect ideas expressed by 
 certain verbs ; e. g.y I wish, I can, I hasten, I endeavour^ 
 &c., as facere in the above example.* 
 
 (211.) Translate into English. «, 
 
 Pater filium et filiam amplectitiir. — ImpSrator milites diu hor- 
 tabatur. — Dumnorix totius (194, R. 1) Galliae potitur. — Pecca- 
 t§, mea fatebor. — Principes totius Gallise potiri conabantiir. — 
 Romani per Britanniam iter facere conantur. — Gloria virtutem 
 tanquam umbra sequitur. — Magnos h'omines virtute (55) meti- 
 miir, non fortuna. — Milites semper gloriam persdquuntiir. — 
 Milites ducem libenter sequebantur. 
 
 (212.) Translate into Latin. 
 
 The father will embrace (his) sons and daughters. — The chiefs 
 possess themselves of all the province. — Do you confess (135, 
 II.) your fault? — The Helvetians were endeavouring to pass 
 through Gaul. — Glory will follow bravery as a shadow. — We 
 were exhorting the soldiers yesterday. — We shall gladly follow 
 Caesar. — They are rapidly making their way through oiu- prov- 
 ince. — You measure men by (their) fortune, not by (their) 
 bravery. — The chiefs will endeavour to lead the army across tli& 
 Rhine (113, II., a). — Generals always sti-ive after glory. — Are 
 you exhorting (135, II.) your son? — The Romans always fol- 
 lowed glory. 
 
 * Observe carefully that a purpose is never expressed by the simple 
 infinitive in Latin. It would not be Latin to say discerg ye nit, he comes 
 toleam. 
 
§ 19. 
 ADVERBS. 
 
 LESSON XXXVI. 
 Adverhs. 
 
 [This section need not be learned by heart in the first course but the 
 distinction of primitive and derivative should be acquired ; and the section 
 ■hould be afterward referred to whenever examples occur.] 
 
 (213.) Adverbs (17) are either Primitive or Deriva- 
 tive. 
 
 [We give but a few here ; a fuller Ust will be given hereafter. — See 
 Summary of Etymology, 680.] 
 
 (214.) Primitive Adverbs : 
 
 1. Negative. — ^Non, not; baud, not; ne (interrog. or imper.), not; n6 • 
 quid em (always separated by some word), n^t even. 
 
 2. Of Place.—V hi, where; ibi, there; quo? whither? hue, hither ^ 
 illuc, thither; und6, whence; ind6, thence, &c. 
 
 3. Of Time. — Nunc, wow; tumor tunc, #^fi/i; nu.-p6T, lately ; eras, 
 to-morrow ; hSdie, to-day ; h6ri, yesterday, &c. 
 
 4. Of Quality, &c. — Admodum, very; &n, whether; cur, why [in- 
 terrog.) ; etiam, also; fSre, almost, &c. 
 
 (215.) Derivative Adverbs are nearly all formed 
 from adjectives or participles by adding e or iter to 
 their stems. 
 
 1. Add e to the stem of adjectives of the Jirst class ; e. g., 
 
 Adjectives. 
 Alt-US, high. 
 Jjih&r, free. 
 Clar-us illustrious. 
 &c. 
 
 Adrerba. 
 
 Alt-e, high, 
 liih&r-e, freely . 
 Clar-e, illustriously. 
 &c. 
 Rem. Bonus makes b 6 n 6, well, and m a 1 u s [bad), m a 1 S, badly. All 
 
 others end in a [long). 
 2. («) Add 1 1 6 r to the stem of adjectives of the second and third class- 
 es ; e. g., 
 
 Adjectives. Adverbs. 
 
 C6l6r, swift. Celer-it6r, swiftly. 
 
 BrSv-is, hicf. Brev-iter, briefly, 
 
 {h) But those which end in ns do not take the connecting vowel i- 
 
 H 
 
86 
 
 ADVERBS. 
 
 Prudens, prudent. I Pruden-t6r, prudently. 
 
 Sapiens, wise. j Sapien-t6r, wisely. 
 
 Rem. Audax, hold, makes audac-tSr, boldly. 
 
 3. Some are derived from nouns by adding tus or tim to the stem 
 by means of a connecting vowel, e. g., coel-itus,/rom heaven; fund- 
 itus, /rom tlie ground, totally ; grgg-a-tim, by flocks, &c. 
 
 (216.) Cases of adjectives, especially in the neutei 
 gender, are often used as adverbs ; e. g., dulce, sweet- 
 ly ; primum, j^r5^ ; falso, /aZseZy, &c. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 (217.) Vocabulary, 
 
 Well, b6n5, derived irregularly from 
 
 bonus, good. 
 Bravely, fortitSr, derived regularly 
 
 (215, 2, a) from fortis, brave. 
 Sharply, spiritedly, acritSr, derived 
 
 regularly from acer (acr-is), sharp. 
 Swiftly, celSiiter, derived regularly 
 
 from c6l6r, swift. 
 Happily, beate, derived regularly 
 
 (215, 1) from beatus, happy. 
 Honestly, honeste, derived regularly 
 
 from honestus, honest. 
 
 Almost, f erS, 
 
 Rightly, recte, derived regulariy 
 from rectus, right. 
 
 Impiously, impie, derived regularly 
 from impius, impious. 
 
 In flocks, gregatim. ' 
 
 To labour, laborarfi. 
 
 To blame, to accuse, find fault with, 
 incusarg. 
 
 Socrates, Socrates, (SocrSt) is. 
 
 Not even, nequidem (always separa- 
 ted by one or more words). 
 
 Honeste et recte viverS est 
 ben6 et beate viv6r6. 
 
 (218.) Examples. 
 
 {a) To live honestly and 
 
 rightly is to live well and 
 
 happily. 
 
 Rule of Position. — The adverb is generally placed before the 
 word which it qualifies. 
 
 (6) Almost all men love them- [ Omnes f 6r e homines sese diE- 
 selves. I gunt. 
 
 Fere is generally placed between the adjective and noun. 
 
 (c) He does not praise even 
 Socrates. 
 
 N e S ocrat^m q u i d 6 m laud&t. 
 
 (219.) Translate into English. 
 
 Hostes nobiscum (125, II., b) acrit^r pugnabant.— :::Equi in 
 agris celeriter currebant. — ^Bene viv6r§ est beate viv6r6. — Cer- 
 vi gregatim semper currunt. — Semper sapiens rects vivlt. — Diu 
 
ADVERBS. 87 
 
 et acntSr milites pugnabant. — Omnes fere homines impiS viviint. 
 — Omnes fere aves bis in anno migrant. — Ne CiceronSm qmdSm 
 laudabit. — Ne hoc quidem (not even with this) delectabitur. 
 
 (220.) Translate into Latin. 
 
 The ^duans were fighting long and bravely. — Caesar sharply 
 accuses the Helvetians. — Horses and stags run swiftly. — The 
 farmers were labouring long in the fields. — Almost all men love 
 their (own) children. — Caesai* led almost aJl the Germans across 
 the Rhine (113, II., a). — I waited for you long. — The bad do 
 not live happily. — To live happily is to live rightly. — You will 
 not be delighted even with this. — Not even this wiU delight (my) 
 father. — Not even Caesar will be praised. — Almost all birds fly in 
 flocks. — They do not praise even Virgil. — Almost all wise (men) 
 jive happily. — Almost all men strive-after glory. — To live pru- 
 dently is to live happily. — The. commander will blame the 
 lieutenant shm-ply . 
 
§ 20. 
 
 PREPOSITIONS. (XXXVIL— XXXVI £1.) 
 
 LESSON XXXVII. 
 Prepositions. 
 
 [This section (221) need not be learned by heart in the first course, but 
 Bhould be constantly referred to whenever examples occur.] 
 
 (221.) The following prepositions govern the ac- 
 cusative case : 
 
 Id, to. 
 
 Apud, at. 
 
 Ante, before (of time and place). 
 
 Adversus, adversum, against. 
 
 Cis, citra, on this side. 
 
 Circa and circum, around, about. 
 
 Circit6r, about, towards (indefi- 
 nitely of time or number). 
 
 Contra, against. 
 
 Erga, towards. 
 
 Extra, beyond, without. 
 
 Infra, beneath, below (the contrary 
 of supra). 
 
 Inter, between, among. 
 
 Intra, within (the contrary of ex- 
 tra). 
 
 Juxta, near to, beside. 
 
 O b, on account of. 
 
 Penes, m tJie power of. 
 
 P 6 r, through. 
 
 PonS, behind. 
 
 Post, after (both of time and space). 
 
 ProetSr, beside. 
 
 Props, Tiear. 
 
 Propter, near, on account of. 
 
 Secundum, after, in accordance 
 
 with. 
 Supra, above. 
 Trans, ore the other side. 
 Versus (is put after its noun J, to- 
 
 wards a place. 
 Ultra, beyond, 
 
 (222.) The following govern the' ablative case : 
 
 A, ah, from, by. 
 
 Clam, without tlie knowledge of. 
 
 Coram, in the presence of. 
 
 Cum, with. 
 
 De, down from, concerning. 
 
 % ex (e before consonants only, 
 
 ex before both consonants and 
 
 vowels), out of, from. 
 
 The following lines contain the prepositions governing thcf-aMative, and 
 can be readily learned by heart : 
 
 Absqu6, a, ab, abs, and de, 
 Coram, clam, cum, ex, and e, 
 Tenus, sine, pro, and prae. 
 
 (223.) The following govern the accusative or 
 ablative : 
 
 1. In, (a) witT^Ahe accus., (1) into, on, to (to the question tohither?) (2) 
 against, {b) Wtm the ablative, in, on (to the question where ?) 
 
 2. Siib, («) toithlhe accus., [1] under (to the question whither?) (2) about 
 
 Prae, before, owing to. 
 Pro, before, for. 
 Sin 6, without. 
 
 TSnus (is put after its noun), as fat 
 as, up to. 
 
 0' 
 
PREPOSITIONS. 89 
 
 or towards (indefinitely of time). »(i) With the ablative, ander (to the 
 question where 1) 
 
 3. Sup6r, [a] with the accus., above, over, [h] With tJie ablative, upon, 
 concerning. 
 
 4. SubtSr, under, beneath (but Kttle used). 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 (224.) Vocabulary. 
 
 The Garonne (river), GarumnS, ae. 
 A,n Aquitanian, Aquitanus, I. 
 Aquitania, Aquitanii, 89. 
 The Leman, or Geneva (lalxe), LS- 
 
 mannns, T. 
 Jura (mountain), Jurft, se (m. 25, a). 
 To extend or carry, perduc6r6 (per 
 
 +duc6re). 
 State, civitas, (civitat) is (f.). 
 Royal power (kingdom), regniim, r. 
 
 History, historiS, ae. 
 
 Fable, fabula, 8B. 
 
 To bound (limit), continerS (con+tS- 
 
 ner6). 
 Part or side, pars, (part) is (f.). 
 On one side, xma ex parts. 
 The Rhone (river), Rhodanus, I. 
 To divide, dividere. 
 Lake, lacus, us (m.), (112, R. 1) 
 To remain, minerg. 
 
 Gallos ab Aquitanis Garuni 
 na fltimen dividit. 
 
 (225.) Examples, 
 {a) The river Garonne sepa- 
 rates the Gauls from the 
 Aquitanians. 
 
 Rule of Syntax. — Two nouns expressing the same person 
 or thing take the same case, and are said to be in appo- 
 sition with each other ; e. g., in the above example, G &- 
 rumna flumen. 
 
 Csesarin Galliam contendit. 
 Erat omnin5 In Gallia legiS 
 tinS,. 
 
 (6) Caesar hastens into Gaul. 
 (c) There was altogether in 
 Gaul one legion. 
 
 (226.) Translate into English. 
 
 Caesar a lacu ad montem, murum perducit. — Apud* Herodo- 
 tum, patrem hist6rise, sunt multae fabulse. — Caesar a lacti Le- 
 manno ad montem Juram, murum perducit. — Mercator in urbe 
 mSnet. — PuSri in domo sunt. — Princeps regnum in civitate oc- 
 ciipat. — Consul exercitum in fines Sequanorum ducit. — Hel- 
 v^tii continentur una ex parte (125, IV., N.J) flumine Rheno ; 
 altera ex parte mont^ Jiira, tertia ex parte lacu Lemanno et 
 flumine Rhodano. 
 
 * Apud is used with the names of authors (instead of in, with the name 
 of their works) , e. g., Spud Cicfironem Iggimus, we read in Cicero. 
 
 H2 
 
1^0 PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 (227.) Translate into Latin, 
 
 Caesar was extending walls and ditches (fossasque) from the 
 river to the camp. — The soldiers remain in the camp. — Caesar 
 will seize the royal power in the statei* — The river Rhine sep- 
 arates the Gauls from the Germans. — Caesar hastens into Italy 
 and levies (conscribere) five legions. — The deserters remain in 
 the town. — The general will lead the soldiers into Italy. — Aqui- 
 tania is bounded on one side by the river Garumna ; on another 
 side by mountains ; on the third side by the river Rhone. — 
 You will find (invenies) many fine (praeclara) precepts 
 in (apud) Cicero. — You will find many fables in Herodotus, the 
 father of history. 
 
 LESSON XXXVIII. 
 Prepositions in Composition, 
 
 (228.) Most of the prepositions given in Lesson 
 XXXVII. are used as prefixes in composition with 
 verbs, and modify their signification; e. ^., pone re, 
 to place; post-ponere, to place after, 
 
 (229.) The following prepositions are never used 
 alone, but always as prefixes in composition : 
 
 1. Amb, round, about (from ambo, both) ; ambirfi (from amb-flr6, to 
 go round), to walk round, to canvass for votes. 
 
 2. Con, together (a variation of c a m, with) ;con-jting6rS(co n+j u n- 
 g6r6), to join together, to unite. 
 
 3. Di or dis,osM7i^r (a variation of de,/row); dis-ced6r6 (dis+cS- 
 d6r6, to give place asunder), to depart. 
 
 In, with adjectives, means not; in-doctus, unlearned; with 
 verbs, means in, into; e. g., ir-rump6r6 (in+rump6r6), to 
 burst into. 
 
 4. R e, back, again ; r S - fi c S r 6 (r fi+f ft c 6 r S, to make again), to refit 
 
 5. 86, aside, se-diic6rS (se+duc6rS, to lead astray), to adduce. 
 
PREPOSITIONS. 91 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 Cohort, cohors, (c6hort) is (f.) 
 
 To station, collocare (con+l6car6). 
 
 To distribute, distribufirS (dis+trf- 
 
 bu6re). 
 Africa, Africa, ce. 
 Europe, Europe, as. 
 HorsemaUi 6qu6s, (Squit) & (m.) 
 
 (230.) Vocabulary. 
 
 Again (adv.), rursus. 
 
 To join together, conjungerS. 
 
 To burst into, imimperS. 
 
 To burst into the camp, in castri ir- 
 
 rump6r6. 
 Mediterratiean, MSditerraneus, ft, 
 
 um. 
 To separate, sepgrarS (se+pSrarg). 
 
 (231.) Translate into English. 
 
 Consul rursus legiones in hiberna reducit. — Legatiis quinquS 
 cohortes cum exercitu conjungit. — Milites omnes in oppidiim 
 irrumpunt. — Mare Mediterraneum Africam ab Europa sepa,rat. 
 — Belgae se ciim Germanis conjungebant. — ImpSrator exercitiim 
 in hibernis collocat. — Germani equites in castra (223, 1, a) 
 irrumpere conantur. — Galba exercitum in hibernis coll6cS,t, 
 legionesque in civitates distribuit. 
 
 (232.) Translate into Latin, 
 
 Caesar will lead the cohorts back again into winter-quarters. 
 — ^AJl the Germans were bursting into the camp. — The Belgi- 
 ans will unite themselves with Caesar. — The brave soldiers were 
 trying to burst into the town. — The illustrious general was sta- 
 tioning the soldiers in winter-quarters. — The legions are distrib- 
 uted among (in, with accus.) the states. — The legions are led 
 back into winter-quarters. — The Mediterranean Sea separates 
 Spain (Hispania) from Africa. — Caesar will join all the horsemen 
 with the army. 
 
§ 21. 
 
 ANALYSIS OF TENSE-FORMATIONS. (XXXIX 
 —XL I.) 
 
 LESSON XXXIX. 
 Active Voice, 
 (233.) (a) The student must have observed that in 
 all the tenses for incomplete action in the active voice 
 the person-endings are as follows : 
 
 Sing. I 1st person, o or m. 2d person, s. 3d person, t. 
 
 Plur. f 1st person, 7»ti5. 2d person, ^is. 3d person, tc^ 
 
 (b) He must have observed, also, that these end- 
 ings are added to the proper tense-stem in each tense. 
 We take up the tenses in order. 
 
 (234.) PRESENT TENSE. 
 
 («) Person-endings, o, s, t, m u s, t i s, n t. 
 (6) The Tense-stem is the simple verb-stem. 
 
 (c) To connect the person-endings with the tense- 
 stems, certain connecting vowels are used. In the 
 present tense these are, for 
 
 (1.) First conjugation, a; e.g., km-a-t. 
 
 (2.) Second " e ; e. g., mon-e-^. 
 
 (3.) Third " i ; e. g., veg-i-t. 
 
 (4.) Fourth " i ; e. g., a.ud-i-t.* 
 
 Rem. 1. Observe that in the 1st person of the 1st and 3d conjugalLafls 
 the connecting vowel does not appear ; a m - o, r e g - o (not am-a-o, 
 reg-i-o). 
 
 Rem. 2, In the 3d person plural, the third conjugation uses u instead 
 of i; e. g'., r e g - u - n t ; the fourth inserts u ; e. g., a u d -i - u^n t. 
 
 * Ama, mone, audi, are the proper crude farms of these verbs re- 
 spectively. They are classed together, in a philosophical treatment of the 
 language, as one conjugation oi pure verbs ; while those of the third con 
 jugatiou form the conjugation of consonant verbs. 
 
ANALYSIS OF TENSE-FORMATIONS. 
 
 93 
 
 (235.) 
 
 
 Teuse- 
 Stem. 
 
 Connect. 
 Vowel. 
 
 Person- 
 Endings. 
 
 FORMS COMPI.ETK. 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 1. 
 
 2. 
 
 3. 
 
 4. 
 
 . 1. 
 
 am- 
 
 a. 
 
 0. 
 
 amo (ama-o). 
 
 mone-o. 
 
 reg-o. 
 
 audi-o. 
 
 
 
 
 s. 
 
 ama-s. - 
 
 mone-s. 
 
 reg-is. 
 
 audi-8. 
 
 2. 
 
 mon- 
 
 e. 
 
 t. 
 
 ama-t. 
 
 mone-t. 
 
 reg-i-t 
 
 audi-t. 
 
 3. 
 
 reg- 
 
 i. 
 
 mug. 
 
 ama-mus. 
 
 mone-mus. 
 
 reg-i-mus. 
 
 audl-mus. 
 
 
 
 
 tis. 
 
 g,nia-tis. 
 
 mone-tis. 
 mone-m. 
 
 reg-i-tis. 
 
 audi-tis. 
 
 4. 
 
 aud- 
 
 i(u). 
 
 nt. 
 
 ama-nt. 
 
 reg-u-nt 
 
 audi-u-nt 
 
 Rem. Observe that the vowels are long before the person-endings in 
 1st, 2d, and 4th conjugations, except where they come before o or 
 t. In those before o, the general nde (24, 1) prevails ; and it is also 
 an invariable rule, in Latin, that no vowel in ajlnal syllable can be 
 long before t. 
 
 (236.) 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 [The pupil should hereafter analyze the tense-forms, as they occur, some- 
 what as follows :] 
 
 A mas: verb-stem, am-; pres. tense-stem, ^in-; connecting 
 vowel, a; 2d pers. ending, s. 
 
 Monemiis: verh-stem, mon- ; pres. tense-stem, mo n-; con- 
 necting vowel, e; 1st plur. ending, mus. 
 
 Regitis: verb-stem, reg-; pres. tense-stem, reg-; connect- 
 ing vowel, i ; 2d plur. ending, tis. 
 
 Audiunt: verb-stem, aud-;^re5. tense-stem, aud-; con- 
 necting vowels, i and u ; 3d plur. ending, n t. 
 
 In like manner, analyze 
 Festinas, hS,bet, vidStis, convoco, festinatis, 
 
 Vigilamus, prohibent, legit, habetis, pugnat, 
 
 Vocatis, poscimus, dormimiis, muniunt, laudant, 
 
 R*v6cant, veniunt, auditis, ambulamus, vulnSramug. 
 
 LESSON XL. 
 
 Analysis of Tense-Formations y continued. 
 Active. 
 
 (237.) IMPERFECT TENSE. 
 
 (fl) Person-endingSf m, s, t, mus, tis, nt. 
 (b) The tense-stem, 
 
 (1.) In 1st conj. adds ab to the verb-stem ; c. g., am-ab. 
 
 (2.) In 2d conj. " eb *' e. g., mon-eh. 
 
 (3.) In 3d conj. " eb " c. ^., reg-eb. 
 
 (4.) In 4th conj. " leb " «. ^., aud-ieb. 
 
94 
 
 ANALYSIS OF TENSE-FORMATIONS. 
 
 (c) The connecting vowel a is used to join the tense- 
 stems and person-endings; e. g., amab-a-m. 
 
 
 
 
 Con. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 stem. 
 
 Vow. 
 
 Endings. 
 
 
 FORMS COMPLETE. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1. 
 
 2. 
 
 3. 
 
 4. 
 
 
 
 
 m. 
 
 1 amaba-m. 
 
 m5neba-m. 
 
 regeba-m. 
 
 audieba-m. 
 
 1. 
 
 am-ab- 
 
 
 s. 
 
 ] amaba-s. 
 
 moneba-s. 
 
 regeba-s. 
 
 audieba-s. 
 
 2. 
 
 mon-eb- 
 
 a. 
 
 t. 
 
 Umaba-t. 
 
 moneba-t. 
 
 regeba-t 
 
 audieba-t. 
 
 3. 
 
 reg-eb. 
 
 mus. 
 
 amaba-mus. 
 
 moneba-mus. 
 
 regeba-mus. 
 
 audieba-mus. 
 
 4. 
 
 aud-ieb- 
 
 
 tis. 
 
 amaba-es. 
 
 moneba-tis. 
 
 •regeba-tis. 
 
 audieba-tis. 
 
 — 
 
 
 
 nt 
 
 amaba-nt. 
 
 moneba-nt 
 
 regeba-nt 
 
 audieba-nt 
 
 FUTURE TENSE. 
 
 (238.) I. We treat the 1st ^nd 2d conjugations first. 
 In these, ^ 
 
 {a) ^hQ person-endings are, o, s, t, mus, tis, nt. 
 
 (5) The tense-stemSf precisely like the imperf, in 
 the same conjugations, 
 
 (1.) In 1st conj., add ab to the verb-stem; e. g., ^m-ab. 
 (2.) In 2d conj., " eb " e. ^., mon-eb. 
 
 (c) The connecting vowel i is used to join the tense 
 stems and person-endings; e. ^., amab-i-t ; moneb- 
 i-t. But in the third person plural, u is used instead 
 of i; e. g.i amab-u-nt. 
 
 Rem. In the 1st person the connecting vowel is dropped (as in 234, 
 c, R. 1) ; thus, amab-o (not amab-i-o). 
 
 (239.) 
 
 
 TABLE 
 
 • 
 
 
 1. 
 
 2. 
 
 Tense-Stem. 
 
 Connectiiig 
 Vowel. 
 
 Person- 
 Endings. 
 
 FORMS COMPLETE. jj 
 
 &m-ab- 
 m6n-gb- 
 
 i. 
 u. 
 
 0. 
 
 ) mus. 
 
 I tis. 
 
 nt. 
 
 1. 
 
 amab-o. 
 
 «TYl«bi-S. 
 
 amabi-t. 
 amabi-mus. 
 ftmabi-tis. 
 amabu-nt. 
 
 2. 
 m6neb-o. 
 m6nebi-8. 
 monebi-t. 
 monebi-mus. 
 monebi-tis. 
 monebu-nt. 
 
 (240.) II. The 3d and4th conjugations present some 
 irregularity in the future. 
 
 (a) The person-endings are, m, s, t, mus, tis, nt. 
 
 (b) The tense-stem, 
 
 (1) In the 3d conj., is the simple verb-stem; e. g., rSg. 
 
 (2) In the 4th conj., it adds i to the verb-stem ; c. ^., au d - 1. 
 
ANALYSIS OP TENSE-FORMATIONS. 
 
 95 
 
 (c) The connecting vowel e is used to join the 
 tense-stem and person-endings ; reg-e-miis, aud-i- 
 6-mus. But in the j^rs^ person a is substituted for e 
 in both conjugations; e. g., reg-a-m, aud-i-a-m, 
 not reg-e-m, audi-e-m. 
 
 (241.) TABLE. 
 
 Tense-Stem. 
 
 Con'g. Vowel. 
 
 Pers. Endings. 
 
 FORMS 
 
 COMPLETB. 
 
 
 
 
 3. 
 
 4. 
 
 rfig- 
 
 a. 
 
 m. 
 
 rSga-m. 
 
 atidia-m. 
 
 
 
 (s. 
 
 r6ge-s. 
 
 audie-s. 
 
 
 
 t. 
 
 rggS-t. 
 
 audie-t. 
 
 audi- 
 
 e. 
 
 •i mus. 
 
 r6ge-inus. 
 
 audie-mus. 
 
 
 
 tis. 
 
 r6ge-tis. 
 
 audie-tis. 
 
 
 
 Ut. 
 
 r6ge-at. 
 
 audie-nt. 
 
 (242.) (a) EXAMPLES. 
 
 Amabatis: i?er&-5fe»i, dm-; tense-stem^ amab-; imperf. con 
 roiZJcZ, a; 2d plur. ending, -tis. 
 
 Amabitis: verh-stem, S,m-; tense-stem, ^mah-; fut. con. 
 voweU i ; 2d plur. ending, - ti s. 
 
 Audiemiis: verb-stem, aud-; fut. tense-stem, audi-; con- 
 necting vowel, e; 1st plur. ending, -mus. 
 
 [^^ The pupil should keep up the habit of finding any tense-form 
 which hte may need to use, hy putting together its proper parts; eg., 
 stem, ending, &c., rather than by recurring to the pai*adigms.] 
 
 (b) Analyze the following : 
 
 Laudabam, laudabo, laudabitis, 
 
 Docebamiis, muniebamus, legdm, 
 
 Occidebant, dormiebatis, scribemus, 
 
 DormiSm, audiet, docqbunt, 
 
 &c. &c. &c. 
 
 LESSON XLI. 
 Analysis of Tense-Formations, continued, 
 
 PASSIVE VOICE. 
 
 (243.) The passive-endings are, 
 
 Sing. 1st person, r; 2d person, r i s or r 6 ; 3d person, tur. 
 Plur. 1st person, mur; 2d person, mini; 3d person, n tur. 
 
 (244.) These endings are affixed to the tense-stems, 
 formed as in the active voice, and with the same con- 
 
96 
 
 ANALYSIS OF TENSE-FORMATIONS. 
 
 necting vowels. Only the following apparent irregu- 
 larities are to be noticed. 
 
 (a) In the 1st pers. pres. indie, the ending r is added to the 
 full present active form ; e. ^., amo, amo-r; d6ceo, doceo-r, 
 &c. 
 
 (6) In the 3d conj., 2d pers. sing., pres., e is used for con- 
 necting vowel instead of i; e. g., r6g-e-ris, reg-e-re, in- 
 stead of re g-i-ris, &c. 
 
 (c) In the 1st and 2d conj., future, 2d pers. sing., e is used 
 for connecting vowel instead ofi; e.^., moneb-e-ris, amab- 
 6-ris, instead of amab-i-ris, moneb-i-ris. 
 
 (245). EXERCISE. 
 
 Examples. — D6cent-uy: verb-stem, doc-; pres. tense-stem, 
 
 doc-; connecting vowel, e; 3d plur. pass, ending, -ntiir. 
 Amabamiir: verb-stem, am-; imperf. tense-stem, amab-; 
 
 imperf. conn, vowel, a; 1st plur. pass, ending, -miir. 
 Audientur: verb-stem, aud-;/wi. tense-stem, audi-;/M^ 
 
 conn, vowel, e; ^d plur. pass, ending, -ntur. 
 RSgor: verb-stem, reg-; pres. dct. 1st pers., rego-; Ist 
 
 pers. pass, ending, - r. 
 
 laudantiir, 
 videblmiir, 
 docebuntur, 
 regitiir, 
 dec. 
 
 (246.) Analyze 
 Regebamur, occidemiir, 
 
 Docebimur, audiemini, 
 
 Timebaris, docebSris, 
 
 Docebamini, amatiir, 
 
 Ace. &c. 
 
PART 11. 
 
 FULLER EXHIBITION GF THE FORMS OF WORDS 
 
§1. 
 
 ADDITIONAL RULES OF QUANTITY. 
 
 LESSON XLIL 
 
 [The student should now learn thoroughly the following rules of 
 quantity, most of which he has seen illustrated frequently already.] 
 
 GENERAL RULES. 
 
 (246.) (1) A. vowel before another is short; e. g., vi-a. 
 
 (2) A vowel before two consonants, or a double one, is long 
 by position; e. g., bellum. 
 
 Hem. A mute followed hy a liquid u) the same syllahle renders the 
 preceding short vowel common ui verse; e. g., volfl-cris. _(In 
 prose, the short vowel remains short.) 
 
 (3) All diphthongs and contracted syllables are long ; e, g,^ 
 au-rum, co-go (for co+ago). 
 
 SPECIAL RULES. 
 
 (1.) Final Syllables. 
 1. Monosyllables. 
 (247.) (a) Most monosyllables ending in a vowel are long ; 
 bat the particles qu#, v6, ne, pte, &c., attached to other words, 
 are short. 
 
 (6) Most monosyllables ending in a consonant are long ; but 
 the nouns cor, f e 1, m e 1, v i r, i) s (ossis) ; the pronouns q u i s, 
 quid, quot; and the particles n 6 c, in, an, ad, s 6 d, with 
 all ending in t, are short ; also 6s, 2d person of sum. 
 
 2. Dissyllables and Polysyllables. 
 (A) Final Vowels. 
 
 (248.) a final is short in nouns, except the abl. of the 1st de^ 
 clension ; long in verbs, and in indeclinable words, 
 except 1 1 a, quia, e j &. 
 
 (249.) e final is short in nouns (except 5th declension) and 
 verbs (except imperatives) ; long in adverbs de- 
 rived from adjectives of the first class, with 
 fermg, fere, ohe. 
 
 (260.) t final is Zon^; but mihl, tibl, stb!, ib?, lib!, are 
 common ; nisi, q u a s !, short. 
 
100 ADDITIONAL RULES OF aUANTITY. 
 
 (251.) } final is common ; but long in dat. and abl. cases of 
 nouns and adjs. used as adverbs {e.g., falso» 
 &c.); ego, duo, 6c to, sre short. 
 
 (252.) u final is always long ; e. g., d i u. 
 
 (B) Final Consonants. 
 
 (253.) All final syllables ending in a consonant (except s) are 
 short. 
 
 Rules for s final. 
 
 (254.) Final as, es, os, are generally Zon^ ; e.g., am as, 
 doc e s, equ 6 s. 
 
 Rem. -1. 6 s is sJiart (1) in noons which have short penult in the gen. , 
 
 €. g., mil 6 s (mil i t-is). 
 2. 6 s is sliorl in comp 6 s, imp o s. 
 
 (255.) Final is and us are generally short; e. g., reg-is, 
 lomin- us. 
 
 Rem. Lis is long' (!) in dat, and abl. plural of nouns ; (2) in 2d per- 
 son sing, of verbs of 4th conjugation ; (3) compounds of vis ; e. g., 
 ma v i s, quam vis, &c. 
 
 2. us is long (1) in nouns of 3d decl. which have u long in the penult 
 of gen.; e. g-., virtus (fit Is), pal us (udis); (2) in gen. sing., and 
 N., A., V. plur. of 4th declension. 
 
 (2.) Derivation and Composition. 
 (256.) Derivative and compound words generally retain the 
 quantity of the primitive and simple words ; e. g., a mo, 
 fi, micus ; p 6 no, im p o no. 
 
 (3.) Increase. 
 [A noun is said to increase when it has more syllables in the gen. 
 than in the nom. {e.g., mil-6s, mil- it-is ; here it is the increase); 
 a verb, when it has more syllables than the 2d pers. sing, indie. 
 {e.g., am-as, Sm-at-isJ ; here at is the increase. 1 
 
 (257.) In the increase of nounSi a and o are generally long ; 
 €, i, u, y, short. 
 
 (258.) In the increase of verhs, c, c, and o are generally 
 long ; i, w, short. 
 
 (4.) Penults. 
 (259.) Every perfect tense of two syllables has the first long 
 (as vidi), except bibi, fldi, tuli, d6di, st6ti, and scidi. 
 (260.) Penults of adjectives, (1) Xdus, icus, short; (2) 
 
ADDITIONAL RULES OF aUANTITY. 101 
 
 I n us, douhtful (often Zong) ; (3) i 1 is and b i lis, derived from 
 verbs, short ; from nouns, long. 
 
 [All exceptions to the above rules that are not stated will be marked 
 in the vocabularies.] 
 
 (261.) EXERCISE ON qUANTlTIES. ' 
 
 [Give the quantity of the unmarked syllables of the following words, 
 with the rule for each.] 
 
 1. Final Vowels. 
 
 Ipse, agmine, die, r6g6re, rgge, d6c§b6re, re, mSve, m6v6re, b6ne (adv., 
 from bdnus), Caesire, optime (adv.. from optimus), me, d6mini, vigilia, audi, 
 adventu, ire, hi, consilio, consule, de, tertia, vigflioe, contra, roga. mdneo, 
 ita, fructu, amo. 
 
 2. Final Consonants. 
 
 Obsldes, bonas, vigilias, Smat, miles (militis), milites, r6gav6ras, has, 
 bSnum, lampas (lampadis), pedes (peditis), pgdites, illas, adventus (gen.), 
 r6gis, simul, audis, linter, auditis, vigiliis, eftput, virtua (virtutis), d6minis, 
 mSnus, regitur, rfegitis, munis, munivfiras. 
 
 3. Increase. 
 
 Amatis, militis, audiris, obsidem, mdnemus, monebatis, itineris, rSgabas, 
 mSnebamur, audimus, monebimini, vSluptatis, sermonis, mumiure, p6dites, 
 clamorem, milites, vulturem, amatis, mSnebatis, mOnetote, audite, ifigimua, 
 pedem, sfigetis (from seges). 
 
 4. Penults. 
 
 Maledicus, mirificufl, bgngficus, filcilis (from filcio), pafirilis (from poer)^ 
 imabilis (from ftmo), servilis (from servos). 
 
 pi * *•* 
 
 • ••» » , 
 
§ 2. 
 
 TENSES OF VERBS FOR COMPLETED AC- 
 TION.— PARTIAL STATEMENT. (XLIIL— • 
 XLVL) 
 
 ^LESSON XLIII. 
 Tense Forms for Completed Action. — Indicative, 
 
 (262.) In Part I. we made use only of those tenses 
 of the verb which express action as continuing or 
 incompletCt viz., the present, imperfect, and future. 
 There are three tenses also for completed action, viz., 
 perfect (J have i^jnV^en), pluperfect {I had written), fu- 
 ture perfect {I shall have written). The stem for all 
 these is the same. 
 
 (263.) The endings for these three tenses are. 
 
 
 SINOXJLAK. 
 
 PLURAL. . ll 
 
 Perfect. 
 
 Pluperf. 
 Fut. Perf. 
 
 1st. 
 I. 
 
 6ram. 
 erd. 
 
 2d. 3d. 
 
 isti. it. 
 
 Sras. 6rat. 
 6ris. 6rit. 
 
 Ist 
 
 xmus. 
 
 6rarQus. 
 erimus. 
 
 2d. 
 
 istis. 
 
 gratis, 
 eritis. 
 
 3d. 
 
 ( erunt, or 
 I ere. 
 
 grant. 
 
 grint. 
 
 (264.) By adding these endings to the perfect-stem 
 fu- of the verb esse, to be, we obtain the forms per- 
 .fect.(/ Afl!i>e .t>e^'A)^ pluperfect (I had been), future per- 
 {G^t\I shall' have heen),. . 
 
 u^^P^%^^, .; 
 
 ".. P^fctjCt^ . 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 Future Perfect 
 
 ^yv7^'v' • 
 
 '(\\ ' 
 
 grim. 
 
 erd. 
 
 
 isti. 
 
 gras. 
 
 gris. 
 
 Fu- 
 
 < ^*' 
 
 grat. 
 
 grit. 
 
 \ imus. 
 
 gramus. 
 
 erimus. 
 
 
 j istis. 
 
 gratis. 
 
 Sritis. 
 
 
 V erunt, or ere. 
 
 grant. 
 
 grint. 
 
 (265.) Double use of the Perfect. — It must be carefully ob' 
 served that the Latin perfect has two uses, one answering to 
 the English perfect, and the other to the English imperfect 
 
TBNSEfi FOR COMPLETED ACTION. 
 
 103 
 
 Thus, ful ^aeans not only / have been, but / was. We call 
 the former the perfect present ; the latter the perfect aorist^* 
 which expresses momentary action in past time ; e. g., Crassus 
 w f chief of the embassy — Crassus princeps legationis f u i t. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 (266.) Vocabulary. 
 
 To be over, to preside over, to com- 
 mand, praeessfi (proe+esse, to he 
 before). 
 
 To be wanting, de-ess6 (de-j-ess6, 
 to be from). 
 
 To he in, to be present at, interess6 
 (inter+essS, to be among). 
 
 Sick, aeger, gra, grum (77, a). 
 
 (267.) Examples. 
 
 (a) If we shall hav& been al- 
 ways virtuous in life^ after 
 death also we shall be 
 
 Praise, laus, (laud) is (£). 
 After, post (prep. ace). 
 Before, ante (prep. ace). 
 Because, quia (conj., 248). 
 How long ? quamdiu (adv.). 
 Afterward, postea. 
 Virtuous, probtis, a, mn. 
 
 Si in vita semp6r pr6bi fuSrl- 
 miis, 6ti^m post mortfim 
 beat! 6 rim us. 
 
 Milites Romani pi-aeliis multis 
 interfuerunt. 
 
 (&) The Roman soldiers 
 were present at many bat- 
 tles. 
 
 Rule of Syntax. — The compounds of esse with the prepo- 
 sitions p r ae, i n t e r, b, p r Ord e, take the dative case. 
 
 (268.) Translate into English. 
 
 Thgmist6cles vir magniis 6t clariis fuit. — Cur hSri in schola 
 non fuisti ? — Quia cum patre in horto fui. — Quamdiu in urbS 
 fuistis ? — Sex dies (191, c). — Ant6 bellum in urb6 fueramiis.- 
 — Crassus legatiis (225, a) copiis Romanorum praefuSr^-t. — 
 Nunquam deSrit tibi laus hominiim, si sempSr probiis fueris. 
 — iEgernS (135, II., a) fuisti heri ?— Ant6 Ciceroms aetatgm 
 oratores multi gt clari fuerant, ndc postea defuerunt. — CaBS&r 
 proeliis multis interfuit. 
 
 (269). Translate into Latin. 
 
 [Recollect the double use of the perfect {present and aorist, 265).] 
 Divitiacus commanded (p r ae f u i t) the forces of the iEduans. 
 
 * The aorist use of the perfect is more common in Latin t^an tho 
 pment. 
 
104 
 
 TENSES FOR COMPLETED ACTION. 
 
 — ^If you shall have been always virtuous in life, after death 
 also you shall be ha})py. — If we are always virtuous, the praise 
 of men shall never be wanting to us. — ^We were not in school 
 yesterday, because we had been in the garden with (our) fa- 
 ther. — Had you been (135, II., a) in our garden ? — Have you 
 been sick ? — How long have you been in the city ? Four 
 days (191, c). — The lieutenant had been in the city before the 
 war. — Before the age of Cgesar there had been many and 
 great generals ; nor were they wanting aftei-ward. — Csesar and 
 the Komaa soldiers were present at many battles. 
 
 LESSON XLIV. 
 
 Tenses of Verbs for Completed Action, continued, 
 
 (270.) The tense-stem of the perfect tense is form- 
 ed in most verbs as follows : 
 
 (1) In 1st conj. by adding av to the verb-stem ; e. g.^ am- av. 
 
 (2) In 2d conj. " u " c.^., m6n-ii. 
 (4) In 4th conj. " iv " e.g., aud-iv 
 
 [The third conjttgation is treated in the next lesson.] 
 
 (271.) By adding the perfect-endings (263) to thts 
 tense-stems formed (as in 270), we obtain the follow- 
 ing perfect- tense forms of am are, to love ; monere> 
 to advise; audi re, to hear* 
 
 1st conj. 
 2cl conj. 
 4th conj. 
 
 Smav- 
 monu- 
 audiv- 
 
 /, thou, he, we, ye. 
 
 M, isti, It, 
 
 imus, istis, grant, or 
 6r6, 
 
 have loved, 
 have advised, 
 have Jieard. 
 
 * In the first, second, and fourth conjugations,it is obvious that the per- 
 feet is made up of the crude-form o^ the verb 9.ndfui; e. g.,_ amafui^ 
 Smftvi; mone-fui = monui ; audi- fui ;= audi vi. 
 
PERFECl TENSE. 105 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 (272.) Vocabulary. 
 
 Preceptor, prasceptor, (praeceptor) is 
 
 (m.). 
 Tribune, tribunus, i (m.). 
 Sister, soror, (soror) is (f.). 
 Disgrace, ignomlnia, ae (f.). 
 
 (273.) Examples. 
 
 Pleasant, jucundus, S, um. 
 All night, p6r totSm noct6m. 
 Diligently, diligentSr (215, 2, b). 
 From every side, undiquS (adv.). 
 To excite, excitarg. 
 
 Pu^riim 3.mavi. 
 A puero (i. c, from a hoy) 
 matrem amavi. 
 
 (a) / loved the hoy. 
 (6) From my hoyhood I have 
 loved my mother. 
 
 [Obs. In (a) the perfect aorist is used ; in {b) the perfect present.'} 
 
 (274.) Translate into English. 
 
 Caesar omnes undique mercatores ad se (145, a) convocavit. 
 
 — A pu^ro fratrSm et sororem amavi. — Cur per totam noctein 
 
 vigilavisti ? — Quia pater aeger fuit. — MilTtes diu et acriter pug- 
 
 naverunt. — Hos pueros* magister diligenter docuit linguam 
 
 Latinam.* — Tua ipsius (159) causa (135, II., h) te saepe monul. 
 
 — Timor ignominiae Germanos ad virtutem excitavit. — Jiicun- 
 
 diim avium (78, II., h) cantum audivimus. — Dormivistine ? — 
 
 Non dormivi. — Caesaris adventus oppidanos terruit. 
 
 [Inflect all the verbs in this lesson through the perfect tense, and 
 foi-m the perfect according to (270).] 
 
 (275.) Translate into Latin. 
 
 Caesar called together all the lieutenants from every side to 
 himself (145, a). — From my boyhood I have loved my precep- 
 tors. — The good preceptor taught me* the Greek language. — 
 Caesar caUed-together aU the lieutenants and tribunes (tiibunos- 
 qu6, 202, N.) of the soldiers to himself. — The slaves liave 
 watched all night. — (Your) father has often advised you for 
 your own sake (135, II., b). — The Gauls took-possession-of 
 Rome. — The love of glory has always excited the Romans to 
 braveiy. — We have diligently taught the boys. — Why did you 
 not sleep ? Because my mother was sick. — They have heard 
 the pleasant singing of the birds. — We have fortified all the 
 
 * Verba of teaching take two accusatives, one of the person, the other 
 of the thing. 
 
lot PBtFECT T«NflB. 
 
 towers of Gaul. — The coming of Cassar terrified the ^Eduans 
 and Helvetians. — I have often walked in Caesar's garden, on- 
 the-other-side-of the Tiber (trans Tiberlm). 
 
 LESSON XLV. 
 
 Tenses for Completed Action, continued, — Perfect 
 Tense, Third Conjugation, 
 (276.) The perfect tense-stem of most verbs of the 
 third conjugation is formed by adding 5 to the verb- 
 stem ; e. g., 
 
 Perfect-stem. 
 rSg-gr6, ' to rule^ r6g-s = rex- 
 
 scrib-ere, to write^ scrib-s = scrips- 
 
 lud-er6, to play ^ lud-s = lus- 
 
 (277.) Rules of Euphony. 
 
 (1) A c-sound before s forms x; duc-s = du.x; r$g-8 = 
 rex. 
 
 Rem. c, g, h, gu, qu, are classed among k-sounds. v also (generally) 
 before s fonns x; viv-s = vix. 
 
 (2) b before s is changed into p; €. ^., scrib-s = scrips; 
 nu b-s = nups. 
 
 (3) A t-sound is (generally) dropped before s; lud-s = lus; 
 claud-s = claus. 
 
 Rem. t and d are the t-80tmds. 
 
 (278.) By adding the perfect-endings (263) to the 
 stems of reg-ere, scrib-ere, lud-ere, we obtain 
 the perfect tense-forms {have ruled, have written, have 
 played). 
 
 PEHFECT-STEMS. 
 
 ENDINGS. 
 
 (r6g-s=) rex- 
 (scrib-s = ) scrips- 
 (lad-s = ) lus- 
 
 /, thou, he, we, ye, they, 
 '\ { 1 hriTe rilled. 
 
 > I, isti, Jt, Jmus, istis, ©runt, or { have written. 
 
 > er6. i have played. 
 
PERFECT TENSE. lOt 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 (279.) Vocabulary, 
 
 Snddenly, subiCo. 
 
 To say, dicerS, 
 
 To draw (as a sword), string6r6. 
 
 Sword, gladlus, i. 
 
 Trial, judicium, i. 
 
 To lead together, conducgrS. 
 
 (280.) Examples, 
 {a) Did not Ccesar say these 
 things ? 
 
 To divide, dividers. 
 
 Household, familiS, ae. 
 
 Orgetorix, OrgStorix, (Org^tSrlg) is. 
 
 A dependent, cliens, (client) Is (c). 
 
 Nature, natura, ae. 
 
 Stoic, stoicus, i. 
 
 (6) Did Casar say this {i. «., 
 is it possible that he did) ? 
 
 N o n n 6 Caes&r haec dixit ? 
 (NonnS is used in asking ques- 
 tions when the answer yes is 
 expected.) 
 N u m Caesar hsec dixit ? 
 (N u m is used when the answef 
 no is expected.) 
 
 (281.) Translate into English, 
 
 [Recollect double use of perfect (265).] 
 Caesar duas legiones conscripsit ; tres ex hibernis eduxit. — 
 Principes Germanoriim omnes suas copias Rhenum (113, II., 
 «) transdux6runt. — Consul giadium strinxit. — Nonn6 (280, a) 
 giadios strinxistis? — Niim imp^rator giadiiim strinxit? — Or- 
 getorix ad judicium omnem suam familiam et omnes clientfis 
 conduxit. — Caesar exercitiim in duas partes divisit. — Nonn6 
 epistolam ad pati'6m scripsisti ? — Stoici diviserunt naturam 
 hominis in animura &t corpus. — Multas litt^ras hodie scrip- 
 simiis. 
 
 [What is the force of 6 in eduxit ? of con in conduxit ? of trans in 
 transduxit? Describe the formation of the perfect, and the euphonic 
 changes, in all the verbs of this lesson.] 
 
 (282.) Translate into Latin, 
 
 The soldiers suddenly drew their swords. — Csesar levied five 
 legions in Italy. — Csesar levied six legions in Italy, and led out 
 four from (their) winter-quarters in Gaul. — The iEduans en- 
 deavour to lead (113, II., a) all their forces across the Rhine. 
 —The general divided the army into five parts. — Did C?Esar 
 say these (things) yesterday (280, h) 1 — Did you not write a let- 
 ter to your brother ? — Have you written a letter to the king 
 (280, I) ? — Orgetorix led-together all his household to the trial. 
 
108 
 
 PLUPERFECT AND FUTURE PERFECT. 
 
 — Orgetorix led-together to the trial all his household and a!l 
 (his) dependents. — ^Why have you drawn (your) sword ? — Why 
 have you not written to (your) father ?-^The ^duans levied 
 many soldiers. — We have divided the nature of man into soul 
 and body. 
 
 LESSON XL VI. 
 
 Tenses for Completed Action, continued. — Pluperfect 
 and Future Perfect Tenses. 
 
 (283.) {a) The pluperfect tense simply adds to the perfect 
 tense-stem the imperfect of esse {to he) ; viz., 6 r a ra, 
 fir as, &c. 
 
 {b) The future perfect simply adds to the perfect tense-stem 
 Ihe future of esse; viz., e r 6, 6 ri s, &c. ; but in 3d plural it 
 changes u into i ; viz., 6 r i n t, instead of e r u n t. 
 
 (284.) Thus, from am-are, mon-ere, reg-er6 
 aud-ire, we have, 
 
 PRF.-STEM.I PLUPERFECT-KNDINO. 
 
 
 1. amav- 
 
 2. m6nu- 
 
 3. rex- 
 
 4. audiv- 
 
 /, thou, he, we, ye, they, 
 \ gram, grfts, 6rftt, 6ramus, eratis, grant, < 
 
 had loved, 
 had advised, 
 had ruled, 
 had heard. 
 
 
 FUTURE PERFECT. 
 
 
 1. amav- 
 
 2. monu- 
 
 3. rex- 
 
 1 4. audiv- 
 
 I 6r«, grfs, grit, grimus, gritis, grint, I 
 
 shall have loved, 
 shall have advised, 
 shall have ruled, 
 shall have heard. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 (285.) Vocabulary. 
 
 To attach, oppngnftrg. 
 Near, juxta (prep. ace). 
 Already, jam (adv.). 
 To take by storm, expugnarB 
 
 Defiles, angustiae, arum (pi.). 
 
 To err, errarg. 
 
 To draw, ducgrg. 
 
 A principle, principium, i. 
 
 (286.) Translate into English. 
 
 (a) Pluperfect. — MiKtes diu et acritSr pugnaverant. — PS,t6r 
 filium saepS moniierat. — Duas legiones in Italia conscripsera- 
 in\Ss. — Helv6«:ii JS,m p6r angustias copias suas transduxferant. — 
 
PLUPERFECT AND FUTURE PERFECT. 109 
 
 CsBs^r castella GaUiae munlverat et tres legiones ex hibernis 
 eduxerat. 
 
 (6) Future Perfect. _ " . 
 
 Rem. The future perfect is sometimes used in Latin, when in Eng. 
 
 lish we should use the simple perfect or future ; e. g., 
 When I {shall) have written the I daum epistolam scripserd, adte 
 letter, I shall come to you. \ veniam. 
 
 Quum amicum in hortum duxero, ad te veniam. — Haud 
 erravero, si a Platone principiiim duxero. — Quum hostes cas- 
 tella expugnaverint, urbera ipsam (159) oppugnabunt. — Haud 
 erraveris, si a CicerSne principiS, duxeris. 
 
 (287.) Translate into Latin. 
 
 {a) Pluperfect. — The general had drawn his sword. — Near 
 the city the soldiers had fought long and spiritedly. — Caesar had 
 levied one legion in Italy, and led-out seven from (their) win- 
 ter-quarters in Gaul. — The Helvetians had aheady led their 
 forces across the Rhine (113, H., a), through the boundaries 
 of the Sequanians. — I had often advised you for your own 
 sake (135, H., h). 
 
 (6) Future Perfect (R., 286, I). — When we have written 
 the letters, we shall come to the city. — We shall not have err- 
 ed, if we shall have drawn (ducere) our principles from Plato. 
 — When Caesar shall have taken-by-storm the city, he will at- 
 tack the tower itself (159) . 
 
 K 
 
^ - § 3. 
 
 NOUNS OF THIRD DECLENSION.— FULLER 
 TREATMENT. (X^VII.— LVII ; 
 
 [The third declension contains more nouns than all the others togeth- 
 er. It also involves greater difficulties ; and we therefore give it a 
 full treatment in the following section, which should be carefully 
 studied.] 
 
 LESSON XLVII. 
 
 (288.) The .genitive-ending of the third declension 
 aS is. 
 
 Rem. To find the stem of any noun of this declension, strike off i B 
 from the gen.; e.g., G., n 6m In is {of a name), stem, nomin. 
 
 (289.) ENDINGS FOR ALL THE CASES. 
 
 
 ' SINGULAR. 
 
 
 PLUBAL. ^ 
 
 
 M. and F. 
 
 N. 
 
 
 M. and F. 
 
 N. 
 
 N. 
 
 
 — 
 
 N. 
 
 es. 
 
 a (ift). 
 
 G. 
 
 is. 
 
 is. 
 
 G. 
 
 um (ium). 
 
 flm (ium). 
 
 D. 
 
 I. 
 
 I. 
 
 D. 
 
 ibus. 
 
 ibds. 
 
 A. 
 
 6m (im). 
 
 like Nom. 
 
 A. 
 
 es. 
 
 & (i&). 
 
 V. 
 
 like Nom. 
 
 like Nom. 
 
 V. 
 
 es. 
 
 a (ii). 
 
 A. 
 
 6(i). 
 
 6(i). 
 
 A. 
 
 ibus. 
 
 Ibus. 
 
 (290.) The nom. -ending is not given, because of the many 
 forms in which that case occm's. The most common nom.-end- 
 ing is s ; but the stem itself is often employed as the nom. ; 
 and rs often, again, changed. We make six classes, which 
 must be carefully distinguished, viz. : 
 
 (291.) CLASSES. 
 
 I. Nouns which add s to the stem in the nominative with- 
 out any vowel change. {Feminines.) 
 II. Nouns which insert a connecting vowel (e or i) iTefore 
 adding s. {Feminines.) 
 
 III. Nouns which change the stem-vowel (i into e) before 
 
 adding s. {Masculines,) 
 
 IV. Nouns which add 6 to the stem. (Neuters.) 
 
NOUNS, THIRD DECLENSION, CLASS I. 
 
 Ill 
 
 V". Nouns which* present the unchanged stem in the nom- 
 inative without adding s. {Masculines^ except -al, 
 -ar, -ur, which are Neuter.) 
 VI. Nouns which present the stem changed in the nomina- 
 tive without adding s. {Masculines, Feminines, and 
 Neuters.) 
 
 (292.) [Before entering upon the paradigms, the student should learn 
 thoroughly the following rules of eupiwny, which prevail generally 
 in Latin nouns and verbs.] 
 
 (1) c or g before s unites with it to foi-m x ; e. g*., le g-s is 
 written lex; arc-s = arx; voc-s = vox, &c. 
 
 (2) d or t before s is dropped; e. g., laud-s = laus; 
 quiet-s = quies ; parent-s = parens. 
 
 (293.) Class I. — The Nominative adds s to the 
 Stem, without any Vowel change, {Feminines.) 
 
 Sing. 
 
 City (f.). 
 
 Citadel (C). 
 
 PraUa .((■•)• 
 
 Race (nation), f. 
 
 Quiet (f.). 
 
 N. and V. 
 
 urb-s. 
 
 arx (arc-s). 
 
 laus (laud-s). 
 
 gens(gent-s). 
 
 quies. , 
 
 Gen. 
 
 urb-is. 
 
 arc-is. 
 
 laud-Is. 
 
 gent-is. 
 
 quiet-Ts. 
 
 Dat. 
 
 urb-i. 
 
 arc-I. 
 
 laud-I. 
 
 gent I. 
 
 quiet-i. 
 
 Aoc. 
 
 urb-em. 
 
 arc- em. 
 
 laud-em. 
 
 gent-em. 
 
 quiet-6m. 
 
 Abl. urb-6. 
 
 arc-6. 
 
 laud-e. 
 
 gent-e. 
 
 quiet-e. 
 
 Plur. 
 
 C,t..s. 
 
 C.tiidels. 
 
 Praises. 
 
 Races (n-ations). 
 
 
 N., A., V. 
 
 urb-es. 
 
 arc -63. 
 
 laud-es. 
 
 gent-es. 
 
 quiet-es. 
 
 Gen. 
 
 urb-ium 
 
 arc-ium. 
 
 laud-um. 
 
 gent-ium. 
 
 quiet-um. 
 
 D. and A. 
 
 iirb-ibus. 
 
 arc-Tbus. 
 
 laud-ibus. 
 
 gent-ibus. 
 
 quiet-ibus. 
 
 On this class, observe carefully that, 
 
 (294.) As to the case-endings, i u m is the gen. plur. ending 
 of those nouns whose stems end in tivo consonants ; e. g., urb-s, 
 urb-is, urb-ium; nox, noct-is, noct-ium; cohors, cohort- 
 Js, cohort- iiim. 
 
 (295.) As to gender, they are mostly feminine. Hence, 
 
 Rule of Gender. — Nouns which add s to the stem, without 
 changing the stem-vowel, to form the nom., axe feminine. 
 [Rem. Exceptions. The following are masculines : 
 
 1. dens (dent-is), tooth. 
 
 mons (mont-Ts), mountain. 
 fons {iont-\s),foimtain. 
 pons (pont-is), bridge. 
 rudens (rudent-Is), rope. 
 
 *bldens (bident-fs), hoe. 
 *torrens (ton-ent-is), torrent. 
 *tridens (trident-is), trident. 
 *6i-iens (orient-is), east. 
 *occideus (occident-Ts), west. 
 
 * These nouns in ens are properly adjectives, with a masc noun under- 
 {Stood ; e. g., oriens sol, torrens amnis, &c. 
 
112 
 
 NOUNS, THIRD DECLENSION, CLASS I. 
 
 2. Grex (greg) is, a flock ; also a few noune in ix and ax. 
 
 3. Paries^ (pariet) Is, wall; pes (ped.is),/(?c^; lapis, (lapid) is, stone , 
 viis (vad-is), surety.] 
 
 \^^ The rules of gender should be learned by heart ; the lists of ex- 
 ceptions need not be, unless they are very short. -AH exceptions are 
 marked in the vocabularies ; and the lists should be referred to whenever 
 cases occur.] 
 
 To Class I. belong the nouns of the following endings, of which the 
 pupil has had frequent examples : 
 
 Libertas, libertat-is, liberty; dignitas, dignitat-Ts, dig 
 
 nity ; and, in short, all nouns in as, at i s. 
 Virtus, \\ri\i\.-\s, virtue; and all others in us, utis. 
 P a 1 u s, p a 1 u d -is, swamp ; and others in us, u d i s. 
 
 In the following exercise several of the exceptions will be found. 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 (296.) Vocabulary. 
 
 Highest {iJbe top), summus, a, um. 
 
 Middle, medius, a, um. 
 
 To leave, relinquere (perf.-stem, r5- 
 
 Hqu-). 
 To secede, B&cgd6rg (perf.-stem, se- 
 
 cess-). , 
 
 To take care of, curare. 
 To touch upon, to reach, attingerg. 
 To seek, to aim at, petfire. 
 To cut down, rescindere. 
 
 Romulus, Romulua, T. 
 Hercynian, Hercynius, 5, una. 
 Senate, senatus, us (m.). 
 Agrippa, Agrippa, 38 (m.). 
 W7iere, ubinam ? 
 
 The common people, plebs, (pleb) ta. 
 Patricians (of Rome), patres, (patr) 
 
 um (pi.). 
 An interreign, interregnum, I. 
 Speedy, citus, a, um. 
 
 [The nouns which occur in the preceding lesson are not named in the 
 vocabulary : the learner will find tiiem, and observe their ge7ider.] 
 
 (297.) Examples, 
 {a) On the top of the mount- 
 ain. 
 
 (b) On the tops of the trees. 
 
 (c) In the middle of the city, 
 {d) Where in the world 1 
 
 Insumm5mont6. 
 
 In summis arbSribus. 
 In media urb6. 
 Ubinam gentium? 
 
 (298.) Translate into English. 
 
 Magna pars plebis urbera reliquit, et in montem (295, R. 1) 
 secessit. — Tiimpati-es Agripp§,mad plebemmiserunt(401,3, 6) 
 — Hercynia sylva fines multarum gentium attingit. — Cassius, 
 ISgatus (225, a), tres cohortes in ai-c6m oppidi duxit. — Ubi 
 nSi.m gentium siimus ? — Deiis cur^t gentes. — Aquilse in sum 
 
NOUNS, THIRD PECLENSION, CLASS II. 
 
 113 
 
 mis montibus nidificanl. — Magnus (78, II., h) a,vium grex 
 
 (295, R., 2) sumrnam arcem petunt. — Milites pontem (295, R., 
 
 1) rescindunt. — Leges Romanorum justae fuerunt. — Summus 
 
 mons (295, R., 1) ab hostibua tenetur. — Caesar ad utramque 
 
 (194, R. 1) partem pontis praesidmm reliquit. — Post RomuK 
 
 mortem unius (194) anni inteiTegniim fuit. — Sapientes mortem 
 
 non timent. — Mors cita veni^t. 
 
 [All the nouns should be declined, the rule of gender given, and the ex- 
 ceptions refen-ed to if necessary. The formations of the verbs should be 
 carefully analyzed.] 
 
 (299.) Translate into Latin. 
 
 The laws were just. — The fountain was beautiful. — The 
 Hercynian forest touches the boundaries of five nations. — The 
 common-people left the city, and seceded to tlie mountain. — 
 The doves built- their-nest in the top of the citadel (297, a). — A 
 large flock of birds flew over the city. — The soldiers fought 
 long on the middle of the bridge (297, c). — Then the senate sent 
 an ambassador to the common-people. — God takes caire of cities 
 and nations. — The Belgians inhabit one part of Gaul, the Aqui- 
 tanians another. — -Where in the world (297, d) are we ? in 
 what city do we live ? — Caesar fortified each part of the bridg© 
 
 LESSON XLVIIL 
 
 Nouns. — Third Declension^ continued, 
 (300.) Class IL — The Nominative inserts a Con- 
 necting-vowel (e or i) before adding s to the Stem. 
 (Feminines.) 
 
 1 
 
 e inserted. 
 
 i inserted. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Cloud (1.). 
 
 Ship (f.). 
 
 N. and V. 
 
 nub-<?-sl 
 
 nav-?-s. 
 
 
 Gen. 
 
 nub-is. 
 
 nav-is. 
 
 
 Dat 
 
 nub-I. 
 
 nav-i. 
 
 
 Ace. 
 
 nub-6m. 
 
 nav-em or im. 
 
 
 Abl. 
 
 nub-6. 
 
 nav-6 or I. 
 
 
 I'luraU 
 
 ciouas. 
 
 Si.ips. 
 
 
 N. A. V. 
 
 nflb-es. 
 
 nav-es. 
 
 
 Gen. 
 
 niib-ium. 
 
 nav-ium. 
 
 
 D. and Abl. 
 
 nub-ibus. 
 
 nav-ibus. 
 
 =£± 
 
 K 2 
 
£14 
 
 NOUNS, THIRD DECLENSION, CLASS II. 
 
 On this class, observe carefully, 
 
 (301.) As tb the case-endings: [(1) The acc.-ending Im 
 instead of e m is used : 1. sometimes (but rarely) in the words 
 c la VIS, key; mess is, harvest; navis, ship: 2. commonly 
 in f ebri s, /eijer ; pelvis, basin; puppis, stern; restis, 
 rope; securis, axe; turris, tower: 3. always in araussis, 
 a rule ; s i 1 1 s, thirst ; t u s s i s, cough ; vis, force.] 
 
 [(2) The abl.-ending i instead of & is used (not, however, to 
 the exclusion of e) in all those words which take im in the 
 ace; e.g., turris, turrim, turri: vis, vim, vi (al- 
 ways). Also in i g n i s, ^re ; ci vis, citizen.'] 
 
 (3) The gen. plur. ending iiim instead of iim is used in 
 most nouns which insert e or i before adding s to the stem. 
 [Proles, canis, panis, vates, juvenis have iim.] 
 
 (302.) Rule of Gender. — Nouns which insert a vowel (e or i) 
 before adding s in the nominative are feminines. 
 [Rem. Exceptions: 
 
 Amuis (m.), river. 
 Axis (in.), axle. 
 Callis (m.), path. 
 Caualis (m.), canal. 
 CoUTs (m.), hill. 
 Crinis (m.), hair. 
 Ensis (m.), sword. 
 
 fascTs (m.), bundle. 
 fbllis (m.)-, bellows. 
 funis (m.), rope. 
 fustis (m.), club. 
 ignis {to..), fire. 
 mensis (m.), month. 
 orbis (m.), circle. 
 
 panis (m.), bread. 
 piscis \^),fish. 
 postis (m.), post. 
 sentis (m.), bramble. 
 unguis (m.), fingernail. 
 vectis (m.), lever. 
 vermis (m.), worm.] 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 [In the vocabularies, the Roman numerals I., IL, &c. 
 nouns, refer to the class to which they belong.] 
 
 (303.) Vocabulary, 
 
 To dread, formidarS. 
 
 Pilot, gubemator, is (m.). 
 
 To bring, ag6r6 (perf.-stem, gg-). 
 
 To procure, comparare. 
 
 A Carthaginian, Carthaginiensis, is. 
 
 To raise, to kindle, excitare. 
 
 Power, potestas, (potestat) is (f., I.). 
 
 Barbarian, barbSrus, i. 
 
 Vehemently, greatly, vehfimentfir 
 
 (215, 2, b). 
 To build, oedlf icare. 
 
 placed after 
 
 Afi^, classis, is (f., II.). 
 And, ac. 
 
 Twenty, vlglnti (indecl.). 
 Lofty, altus, fi, iim. 
 Thirteen, tredgcim (indecl.). 
 The Druids, Druides, um (m., pL). 
 Thirst, sitis, (sit) is (f., II.). 
 To relieve, levarS. 
 To dispute, disputarS. 
 To terrify, terrerg (perfect-steto, 
 terre-). 
 
 (304.) Translate into English. 
 Nubes sFBpS lun&m obscurant. — Civ^s classSm host) dm for- 
 
NOUNS, THIRD DECLENSION, CLASS III. 
 
 115 
 
 mid ant. — Caesar naves longas gBdificavit, et nautas giibemato- 
 resque (202, N,) comparavit. — Crassus ad oppidiim tm-res 
 altas egit. — Ve teres Romani vim Carthagimensium non formi- 
 davenmt. — Csesar tmTes tredecim excitavit. — Milites ignea 
 magnos in summo monte (297, a) excitaverunt^ — Druides de 
 deorum immortalium vi ac potestate disputant. — Classis adven- 
 tiis cives terruit. — Aqua sitim (301, 1) levat. — Nova navlum 
 figura vehementer (215, 2, b) bai'baros terruit. 
 
 (305.) Translate into Latin, 
 
 Lofty towers are raised by Csesar. — The general prepared 
 twenty long ships. — The lieutenant brought the towers to the 
 wall of the city. — The power of the Romans terrified the Oauls. 
 — Wine does not relieve thirst. — The sun is often obscured 
 by the clouds. — The approach of the fleet and the soldiers ter- 
 rified the citizens. — A great fire is kindled on the top of the 
 mountain by the ^duans. — The general stationed the ships 
 near the wall of the city. — The clouds are black. — The coming 
 of our fleet and the sti'ange (n 6 v a) figure of the ships terrified 
 all the barbarians. 
 
 LESSON XLIX. 
 Nouns, — Third Declension, continued. 
 (306.) Class III. — The Nominative changes the 
 Stem-vowel (i into e) before adding s to the Stem, 
 
 Vowel i changed into e. ] 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Soldier (m.). 
 
 Book (m.). 
 
 N. and V. 
 Gen. 
 Dat. 
 Ace. 
 Abl. 
 
 mil^-s (milet-s). 
 
 milTt-is. 
 
 milit-i. 
 
 milit-gm. 
 
 milit-6. 
 
 c6d(5x (codecs). 
 
 c6dic-is. 
 
 c6dTc-i. 
 
 codic-em. 
 
 codTc-e. 
 
 Plural. , 
 
 SoWiers. 
 
 Books. 
 
 N. A. V. 
 
 Gen. 
 D. and A. 
 
 milTt-es. 
 
 milit-um. 
 
 millt-ibus. 
 
 c6dic-es. 
 
 c6dic-um. 
 
 codTc-ibus. 
 
 On this class, observe that, 
 
 (307.) As to the case-endings^ they are all regular. 
 
 (308.) As to gender, they are masculine. Hence, 
 
116 
 
 NOUNS, THIRD DECLENSION, CLASS III. 
 
 Rule of Gender. — Nouns which change the stem-vowel 
 i into 6 before adding s in the nominative are masculine, 
 
 Exc. Merges (f.), (mergitis), a sheaf. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 (309.) Vocabulary, 
 
 To double, duplicar6. 
 
 Brutus, Brutus, I. 
 
 Sharp, spirited, acer, acris, acre 
 
 (105, R. 1). 
 Defender, vindex, (vindic) is (m., 
 
 III.). 
 Liberty, libertas, (libertit) Is (f., I.). 
 Foot-soldier, footman, pedSs, (p6dit) 
 ' Is (m., III.). 
 Embark upon, conscendSrS, con-f- 
 
 scandere (perf.-stem, consceud), 
 
 (for upon, iu with the accusative). 
 To depart, discedgrg. 
 / began, coepi. Perfect, defective. 
 To sustain, sustTnere (sub and t6- 
 
 nere), perf.-stem, sustinu. 
 
 At his own expense, sumptu suo 
 
 (abl.). 
 Expense, sumptus, us. 
 To support, alere (perf -stair, alu). 
 Greatness, magnitudd, (magnltudln) 
 
 Is (f ). 
 A Briton, BrTtannus, I. 
 Guest, hospes, (hospit) Is fm. and L, 
 
 25, a). 
 To injure, to maltreat, vi6larg. 
 Companion, c6m6s> (comit) la (no. 
 
 aiid f., 25, a). 
 Narrow, angustus, a, um. 
 Place, lociis, i (nom. pL, I6ci and 
 
 loca). 
 Conspiracy/, conjuratio (nis) (f ). 
 
 (310.) Translate into English. 
 
 Ceesar niimeriim obsidum duplicabit. — Brutus erat ac6r 
 libertatis vindex. — Equites et pedites in naves con- 
 scenderunt. — Dumnorix cum equitibiis discedere coepit. — 
 Dumnorix magnum numeriim equitum suo sumptu aiuit. — 
 M i 1 i t e s omnes magnitudinem sylvariim timuerunt. — Bii- 
 tanni antiqui hospites nunquam violaverunt. — Comites 
 principis angusto in loco equitum nostroriim vim diu 
 sustinnerunt. 
 
 (311.) Translate into Latin. 
 
 The chiefs began to go aw^ay with all the horsemen. — The 
 horse-soldiers and foot-soldiers did not sustain the attack (vim) of 
 the enemy. — The general supported the soldiers at his own 
 expense. — The companions of Dumnorix sustained bravely the 
 attack of our footmen. — The Germans maltreated the ambas- 
 sadors.— The companions of the lieutenant are erabarking-upon 
 the ships. — The greatness of the woods terrifies the horsemen 
 uud the footmen. — Dumnorix always maltreats (his) guests. — 
 The messenger began to depart with all the guests. — ^Bmtus, 
 
NOUNS, THIRD DECLENSIO??, CLASS IV. 
 
 117 
 
 the defender of liberty, made (fecit) a conspiracy.- -The 
 townsmen for a long time supported a large number of footmen 
 at their own expense. — The chie|s doubled the number of 
 horsemen. 
 
 LESSON L. 
 Nouns.- — Third Declension, cenzinuett 
 
 (312.) Class IY. — The Nominjtive adds ^ to the 
 Stem. 
 
 N., A., V. 
 
 Gen. 
 Dat.. Abl. 
 
 Sea (n.). 
 
 mar-6 
 
 mar-is. 
 
 mdr-i. 
 
 niar-Ia. 
 
 mar-ium. 
 
 mlr-ibus. 
 
 ^et (n.). 
 
 ret-e. 
 ret-is, 
 ret-i. 
 
 Nets. 
 
 retHi. 
 ret-i una. 
 ret-Tbus. 
 
 On this class, observe that, 
 
 (313.) As to the case-endings, the abl. is always i, the nwa. 
 plur. ia, and the gen. plur. iiim. 
 
 (314.) As to gender, they ai-e all neuter. Hence, 
 
 Rule of Gender. — Nouns which add e to the stem (instead 
 of s) in the nom. are neuter. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 (315.) Vocabulary. 
 
 By sea and land, terra mSrique, all. 
 (not mari et terra). 
 
 To wash, alluere (ad+luei*e). 
 
 To use, uti (dep. governs abl). 
 
 To be acnistomed, consuescSre {per- 
 fect-stem, consuev). 
 
 Navigation, navigatio, (navigatidn) 
 IS (f.). 
 
 Vast, vastus, ft, um. 
 
 Open, ftpertus, ft, um. 
 
 Ocean, Oceftnus, i. 
 
 The Venetians, V6n6ti, orum (pi.). 
 
 Broad, latus, &. um. 
 
 But, aut6m (not so strongly advers- 
 ative as sM, and always placed af- 
 ter one or more words of the sen- 
 tence). 
 
 Other, different, alius (194, R. 1) 
 
 Bed, cubile, (ciibll) Is (IV.). 
 
 Splendid, splendidiis, ft, um. 
 
 A dock-yard, nftvalg, (naval) is (JiY.\. 
 
 To commit, to join (as battle), corr.- 
 mittere (perf.-stera, commis) 
 
 In the mean time, interim (adv.). 
 
 HnntsTnan, venator (is), m. 
 
 Far, longS (adv.). 
 
118 NOUNS, THIRD DECLENSION, CLASS IV. 
 
 (316.) Examples, 
 {a) For Marseilles is washed 
 ■ on three sides hy the sea. 
 
 Massilia 6nim tribus ex parti 
 bus mari (abl., 93, II., h, 
 R.) alluitiir. 
 
 Nosti-o marl (55) longis navl- 
 bus uti consuevimus. 
 
 (6) In our sea {i. c, the Med- 
 iterranean) we were accus- 
 tomed to use long ships. 
 Rule of Syntax. — The deponent verb uti, to use^ governs 
 the ablative; e. g., navibus, in {b). 
 
 (317.) Translate into English. 
 
 Longe alia navigatio est in angusto mari atquS in vasto 
 atque ^perto oceano. — Longge fuerunt naves quibus (abl., 316, 
 b) nostro mari (55) uti (infin.) consuevimus. — Veneti autem 
 latis navibus uti consueverunt.— Mihi (125, II., a) cubile est 
 terra. — Romanoriim c u b i 1 i a magna fuerunt et splendid^. — 
 Imperator quinque naves ex navali eduxit et prselium com- 
 misit. — Turris erat proxima portui (106, II., c) navalibus- 
 que. — Caesar, interim, omnes naves quae erant in navalibus 
 incendit. — Venator rete dUigenter parabat. — Venatores retia 
 cervis (54) parabant. 
 
 (318.) Translate into Latin. 
 
 The fai'mers were preparing nets for the (54) doves. — Cor 
 inth is washed on two sides by the sea. — The ships which (316, 
 b) the Venetians were accustomed to use in our sea were long. 
 — In the vast and open ocean we use broad ships. — Navigation 
 is far different (1 o n g e a 1 i a) in a narrow river and in the open 
 sea. — I had (125, II., a) a high tree (for my) bed. — Csesar was 
 pmsuing Pompey by sea and land. — The tower was very near 
 to the dockyard. — The general, in the mean time, was rebuild 
 ing all the old ships in the port and dockyards . 
 
N0UN3, THIRD DECLENSION, CLASS V. 
 
 119 
 
 LESSON LI. 
 
 Nouns. — Third Declension, continued. 
 
 (319.) Class V. — The Nominative presents the 
 
 Stem unchanged. 
 
 1. Masculine Forms. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Honour (m.). 
 
 Consul (ra.)- 
 
 Goose (m.). 
 
 Brother (m.). 
 
 N.andV. 
 Gen. 
 Dat. 
 Ace. 
 Abl. 
 
 honor. 
 
 honor-is. 
 
 h6nor-i. 
 
 honor-em. 
 
 honor-g. 
 
 consul. 
 
 consul-is. 
 
 consiil-i. 
 
 consul-6m. 
 
 consul-6. 
 
 anser. 
 
 ans6r-is. 
 
 anser-i. 
 
 ans6i'-6m. 
 
 ans6r-e. 
 
 frater. 
 fratr-is. 
 
 fratr-r. 
 
 fratr-gm. 
 fratr-e. 
 
 Plural. 1 Honours. 
 
 Consuls. 
 
 Geese. 
 
 Brothers. 
 
 N., A., V. honor-es. 
 Gen. honor-um. 
 D. and Abl. honor-ibus. 
 
 consul-es. 
 consul-um. 
 cohsiil-ibus. 
 
 anser-es. 
 
 anser-um. 
 
 anser-ibus. 
 
 fratr-es. 
 
 fi-atr-um. 
 
 fratr-ibus. 
 
 On these, observe, 
 
 (320.) As to case-endings^ they nearly all take the regular 
 endings throughout ; but those whose stem ends in ter or ber 
 drop the e in all cases but the nom. ; e. g., f r a t e r, f r a t r is ; 
 i ra b e r {a shower) i m b r i s. 
 
 Rem. Imbgr, linter, venter, take i urn for gen. pi. ending. 
 (321.) As to gender, 
 
 Rule of Gender. — Nouns which present the unchanged 
 
 stem in the nom. (except those whose stems end in al, 
 
 ar, ur, 6r) are masculine. 
 
 [Exception (1.) In or: arbdr, 6113 {tree), ia feminine; and ad6r, firis, 
 
 {pure wheat), sequor, 6ris {sea), marmSr, 6ris {marble), are neut. (Obs., 
 
 masculines have 6 (long) in the stem ; neuters 6 (short) ). The ending td 
 
 generally belongs to names of male beings (e. ^., consul): if applied to 
 
 females, it may be feminine also (e. g., exul, a female exile). 
 
 Exception (2.) Sr: linter {boat) is masc. or fern. : the following are 
 neuter: cadaver {corpse), uber {teat), ver {the spring), verber {lash) 
 also, all names of plants in er: e. g., piper {pepper), zingiber {ginger), 
 arc] 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 (322.) Vocabulary. 
 
 Noise, clamSr (oris, V., 1). 
 Cassius, Cassius, L 
 Yoke, jugum, 1. 
 Archer, Sagittarius, i. 
 Slinger, funditor (oris, "V., 
 Succour, subsidium, i. 
 Rain, imb6r (is, 320). 
 
 1). 
 
 Continuance, contmiiatifi, (continuft- 
 
 ti6n) is (f.). 
 STcin, tent made ofsktnn, pellls, (pell) 
 
 is (f. n.). 
 Desert, dSsertum, i. 
 Shepherd, pastSr (6ris, V., 1). 
 Hunter, v6nat6r (6ris, V., 1). 
 
 '^ 
 
120 NOUNS, THIRD DECLENSION, CLASS V. 
 
 (323.) Translate into English, 
 
 Imperator ad se mercatores undique convocavit.— 
 Milites omnes magno cum clamore in oppidum irruperunt. 
 — Helvetii Cagsmm consulem occidunt, exercitumque ejus 
 (153, c) sub jiigum* mittunt.-r-Gassar sagittarios et fundi- 
 tores subsidiof (dat.) oppidanisf (dat.) misit. — Miiites con- 
 tinuatione imbrium (320, R.) sub pellibus continentur. — 
 Incolge desertorum sunt pastores, vena tores, et mer- 
 catores. — Divitiae mercatorura sunt incertge. — Caesar 
 ©mnem ^quitatum funditores sagittarios que pontem (113 
 II., a) transduxit et adliostes contendit. 
 
 (324.) Translate into Laiin. 
 
 The Britons slew the general, and sent all the soldiers under 
 the yoke. — The archers and slingers killed the chief. — By the 
 continuance of the rains, the merchants are kept in the town. — 
 The townsmen burst into the tents (pelles) with a great noise. 
 — The archers and the slingers hasten to the town. — The con- 
 sul Cassius led all the slingers over the bridge. — The Britons 
 killed the scouts (exploratores), and sent the archers and sling- 
 ers under the yoke. — The scouts hasten to the consul. — The 
 general sent twenty soldiers for a succourf (dat.) to the mer- 
 chants, f — The inhabitants of the town are merchants. — The 
 riches of merchants, however great (184) they are, are uncer- 
 tain. — The soldiers slew all the inhabitants of the desert. — The 
 illustrious consuls led all the footmen over the bridge (113, 
 II., a). 
 
 * A conquered army was made to march Tinder a sort of yoke or gallows 
 as a mark of disgrace. 
 
 t Rule of Syntax. — Dcnihle Dative. Two datives, one of the person, the 
 other of the thing, may be vised with esse, and with verbs oi giving^ 
 comiyig ^tiding, due. 
 
N0UN3, THIRD DECLENSION, CLASS V. 
 
 121 
 
 LESSON^ LII. 
 
 Nouns. — Third Declension, continued, 
 
 (325.) Class V. — The Nominative presents 
 
 Stem unchanged. 
 
 2. Neuter Forms. 
 
 the 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Animal (n.). 
 
 Spur (n.). 
 
 Lightning (n.). j 
 
 Marble (n.). 1! 
 
 N., A., V. 
 Gen. 
 Dat. 
 Abl. 
 
 animal. ^ 
 Snimal-rs. 
 finimal-i. 
 &nimal-i. 
 
 calcSr. 
 calcar-is. 
 calcar-i. 
 calcar-i. 
 
 III 
 
 marmor. 
 marm6r-is. 
 marm6r-i. 
 marm6r-6. • 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Animals. 
 
 Spurs. 
 
 Lightnings. 
 
 Marbles. 
 
 N., A., V. 
 
 Gen. 
 D. and Abl. 
 
 animal-ia. 
 
 animalium. 
 
 &nimal-ibus. 
 
 calcar-ia. 
 
 calcar-Tiim. 
 
 calcar-ibus. 
 
 fulgiir-a. 
 
 fulgur-um. 
 
 folgiir-ibus. 
 
 marm6r-&. 
 
 marmor-um. 
 
 marmor-ibus. 
 
 On these, observe, 
 
 (326.) (a) As to case-endings, those in al, ar, make abl. i, 
 nom. plur. i a, gen. plur. i ii m. 
 
 (6) As to gender, they are neuter. Hence, 
 
 Rule of Gender. — Nouns which present in the nom. the 
 unchanged stem in al, ar, ur, and or (short), are neuter. 
 
 Exceptions in al: Sftl [salt) is masc. and neut. in the sing., and masc. 
 sales, in plur. L ar, laris [household god), masc. 
 
 Exceptions in ur: Fur [thief), furfur [bran), turtur [turtle-dove)^ 
 vultur [vulture), are masc. 
 
 Exceptions in 6r. (Recollect that 6r, 6rls (with o long), is a masc. 
 ending (321) ; and that ftrbor, oris [tree), is/ew.) 
 Rem. Os, ossis [bone), is neut. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 (327.) Vocabulary. 
 
 Level, plain, planus, a, um. 
 
 A plain, the sea, aequ6r, is (V., 2), 
 
 (derived from sequus, plain: see 
 
 below, 328). 
 Revenue, tax, vectigSl, (vectigal) is 
 
 (V., 2). 
 To create, ere are. 
 Hatred, odium, 6dium, i. 
 Many, very many, complur6s, & or 
 
 ift (gen. um or ium), used only in 
 
 plural. 
 Class, ggnus, (g?n6r) Is, neut. 
 
 Temple, templum, i. 
 
 To place, ponCrg. 
 
 Abode, d6micilium, L 
 
 To goad, concitarS. 
 
 Frugality, parsImoniS, iB. 
 
 Indeed, quidem (adv.). 
 
 Placid, placidus, 8, um. 
 
 A marble temple, a temple of marble, 
 
 templum de marm6r6. • 
 
 Sharp, acutiis, S, um. 
 Glare, splendSr, (splendor) is (V., 1) 
 To farm, rSdimfire (rfidem). 
 
122 NOUNS, THIRD DECLENSION, CLASS V. 
 
 (328.) Example. 
 
 The sea is level, from which 
 
 also the poets call it 
 
 aequor {the sea). 
 
 M3,rS planum est ; ex quo 
 etiam ae, q u o r illiid poetse 
 vocant. 
 
 ^^ Here the antecedent of quo is the sentence m&r6 planum est. 
 
 (329.) Translate into English. 
 
 Magnum hoc fuit vectigal, sed magnum creavit odium. — 
 Dumnorix, complures annos (191, a, Rule) omnia jEdu5rum 
 vectigalia redemerat. — Complura {or compluria) sunt gene- 
 ra animalium. — Teraplum de marmore in fbro ponam. 
 Crassus domum magnum de marmore splendido aedif icavit. 
 — F u 1 g ii r a milites v6h6menter terruerunt. — Ten-a est dom 
 icilium hominiim etanimaliii m. — Milites subit5 gquos c a I- 
 c a r i b ii s (abl., 55, a) concitare coeperunt. — C a 1 c a r i a acut^ 
 smit. 
 
 (330.) Translate into Latin. 
 
 Glory is a great spur to brave men. — The horses fear the 
 sharp spurs. — The glare of the lightnings terrified the horses. 
 — Almost (fere, 218, b) all animals are useful to men. — These 
 were great revenues indeed, but they created great hatreds. — 
 The seas were level and placid. — Frugality is a great revenue. 
 — We shall place a temple of splendid marble in the midst (in 
 medio foro, 297, c) of the forum. — The poets call (mare) the 
 sea aequor, because (quia) it is level. — The woods are the 
 abode of many animals. — Pompey for many years had farmed 
 the revenues of Asia. — The cavahy (equites) began to put 
 spurs to their horses (= to goad the horses with spurs). 
 
NOUNS, THIRD DECLENSION, CLASS VI. 
 
 123 
 
 LESSON LIII. 
 
 Nouns. — Third Declension, continued. 
 
 (331.) Class Y1.— The Nominative pr^esents the 
 
 Stem changed. 
 
 1. Masculine Forms. 
 
 
 (a) u qft/'ia -Stem dropped.] 
 
 [h) r oft/te Sti'm changed to a. 
 
 (c) VerhalsinU, (all fern.). 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Speech (m.)- - | 
 
 r)ust(m.). 
 
 Flower(m.) 
 
 Reason (!'.). 
 
 N.andV. 
 
 senii6. 
 
 pulvis. 
 
 flos. 
 
 ratio. 
 
 Gen. 
 
 sei-mon-is. 
 
 pulv6r-is. 
 
 f!6ris. 
 
 ration-is. 
 
 Dat. 
 
 sermon-i. 
 
 pulver-i. 
 
 flor-L 
 
 ration-i. 
 
 Ace. 
 
 sermou-em. 
 
 pulver-em. 
 
 flor-em. 
 
 ration-em. 
 
 Abl. 
 
 serm6u-e. 
 
 pulv6r-6. 
 
 flor-e. 
 
 ration-e. 
 
 PluraJ. 
 
 Speeches. 1 
 
 
 Flowers. 
 
 Reasons. 
 
 N.,A.,V. 
 
 sermon-es. 
 
 pulv6r-es. 
 
 flor-es. 
 
 . rariou-es. 
 
 Gen. 
 
 sermon-um. 
 
 pulv6r-um. 
 
 flor-um. 
 
 ration-um. 
 
 D.&Abl. 
 
 sennon-ibus. 
 
 pulver-ibus. 
 
 flor-ibus. 
 
 ration-ibus. 
 
 On this class, observe, 
 
 (332.) As to case-endings : 1. Final n of the stem is gener- 
 ally dropped in Latin nouns in the nominative. (In sanguis, 
 sanguin-is {blood) ^ it is changed into s*.) 
 
 2. Final r of the stem is ofte7i changed into s, as in pulvis, 
 flos, mos, &c. 
 
 (333.) Rule of Gender. — Nouns which simply drop n of the 
 stem in the nom. are masculine (except abstract nouns 
 in jo). 
 
 Special Rem. — Abstract nouns in io (6nis) are feminine ; e. g., ratio, 
 reason ; ultio, revenge. (They are a very large class, formed by add- 
 ing io to the supine-stem of verbs.) 
 
 (334.) Rule of Gender. — Nouns which change 6r of the 
 stem into is, or into os, are masculine; e. g., pulvit 
 (pulv6r), flos (flor). 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 (335.) Vocabulary. 
 
 Manner, custom, mos, (mor) is (VT., 
 
 l,i). 
 Robber, la* ' ', (latrdn) is (VI., 1, a). 
 Pirate, praJ<j8, (praedon) is (VI., 1, a). 
 Centurioin^ centurid, (centuridn) is 
 
 (VI., 1, a). 
 Lion, lefi, (leon) is (VI., 1, a). 
 
 Speech, language, sermd, (sermftn) 
 
 is (VI., 1, a). 
 Surreiider, deditiS, (dedition) Ts 
 
 (VI., 1, c). 
 Rebellion, rgbellid, (rgbellidn) Ts 
 
 (VI., 1, C). 
 The Sacred Wav, Via Sacrfi. 
 
124 
 
 NOUNS, THIRD DECLENSION, CLASS VI. 
 
 To day, trucldare. 
 
 Nurse, nutrix, (nutrlc) is (L). 
 
 Devoid of, expers, (expei't) Is (107;. 
 
 To draw, trfihgrg (trax- ; 277, 1). 
 
 Eloquent, disertus, a, um. 
 
 Adorned, omatus, S, um. 
 
 2'o go, ir6. 
 
 By chance, fortS (adv.). 
 
 As, sicut. 
 
 Kind, blaudus, S, iim. 
 
 More latronum. 
 More s u 6. 
 
 Speech (iu the abstract), or an ora- 
 tion, oratio, (oration) is (VI., 1, c). 
 
 Dust, pulvis, (pulv6r) is (VI., 1, b). 
 
 Egyptian, .^Egj'ptius, i. 
 
 Sweet, pleasant,, suavis, is, S. 
 
 To ivander, en-are. 
 
 To employ, uti (with abl., 316, b). . 
 
 To finish, conficer6 (io). 
 
 The rest, the remaining, rfeliquus, ft, 
 um. 
 
 (336.) Examples. 
 
 {a) After the manner of rob- 
 bers. 
 
 (6) After his {her or their) 
 own manner. 
 ■ (c) Devoid of reason. R^tionis expers. 
 
 Rule of Syntax. — ^Adjectives signifying abounding, want, 
 privation, &cc., govern the genitive (sometimes abl.). 
 
 {d) We say, a cloud of dust ; the Latin says, a power of 
 dust — ^vis pulveris. 
 
 (337.) Translate into English. 
 
 1. {Masculines, Class VI., 1, n dropped.) — Centuriones 
 miKtiim Labienum libenter sequebantur. — Legatus sermo- 
 nam longum conficit. — Multi iEdui CEesaris sermoni (da,t., 
 267, b) interfuerunt. — Imperator reliquos latrones prsedo- 
 nesque trucidavit. — Africa nutrix est leonum ferociiim. 
 
 3. {Verbal Nouns in ion, all Feminine.) — Helvetia legates 
 de {concerning) deditione ad Caesarem miserunt. — BarbS,ri 
 rebellionem turpem fecerunt. — Legatus, oratione acri 
 (abl., ^5, a), barbaros addeditionem traxit. — Oratio diserta 
 et ornata omnibus (161, a) placet. — Ferae sunt rationls et 
 orationis expertes. 
 
 3. {Nouns changing er of the Stem into is, or into 5s; all 
 Masculines.) — Pulvis et umbra sumus. — Milites, eodem tem- 
 pore (118, IL, c) magnam vim pulveris videbant. — Ibam 
 forte via sacra (abl., 55, a) siciit meus est mos. — ^gyptii, 
 more prsedonum (336, a), naves incendere (infin., 210) con- 
 sueverunt. — Suaves tui mores mihi (161, a) valde pMcent. — 
 Praedones, more suo, oppida incendere coeperunt. 
 
NOUNS, THIRD DECLENSION, CLASS VI. 
 
 125 
 
 (338.) Translate into Latin. 
 
 1. {Masculines^ Class VI., 1, n dropped.) — Caesar employs 
 kind language* (abl., 316, b), and draws the barbarians to a sur- 
 render. — Many of the Helvetians heard the severe speech (78, 
 II., 6) of Caesar. — The bands of robbers and pirates wander by 
 sea and land. — The general slew all the wicked pirates. — Is 
 (i;35, II., a) Africa the nui-se of lions ? — Is Em-ope (num. 280, 
 b) the nurse of fierce lions ? 
 
 2. {Verbals in io, all Feminine.) — Caesar drew-out from 
 (their) winter-quarters the four legions which he had levied 
 (conscripserat) in Italy. — The eloquent oration pleased all. 
 — The barbarians made a base rebellion after (their) surrender. 
 — Lions are devoid of reason and speech. 
 
 3. {Nouns changing er of the Stem into is, or into 6 s ; Mas- 
 culines.) — The flowers are beautiful. — The customs of j;he 
 Germans were good.— Death turns (vertit) all things into 
 dust. — At the same time (118, II., 6),agreat cloud of dust (336, 
 d) was seen by the soldiers. — I was sleeping in the garden, as 
 is my custom. — The iEduans, after the manner of pirates, slew 
 the ambassadors. 
 
 LESSON LIV. 
 
 Nouns. — Third Declension, continued. 
 
 (339.) Class VI. — The Nominative presents the 
 
 Stem changed. 
 
 2. Feminine Forms. 
 
 * Sermo. 
 
 L2 
 
 n of the Stem dropped, and i changed into 6. \\ 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Image (f.). 
 
 Hail (f.). 
 
 N. and V. 
 Gen. 
 Dat. 
 Ace. 
 Abl. 
 
 unagd. 
 
 Tmagin-Ia. 
 
 imagln-I. 
 
 imagin-6m. 
 
 Imagin-6. 
 
 grandd. 
 
 grandin-is. j 
 grandin-i. 
 grandin-6m. 
 grandin-S. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Images. 
 
 Hail. 
 
 N., A., V. 
 
 Gen. 
 D. and Abl. 
 
 tmagin-es. 
 
 imagin-nm. 
 
 unagin-Ibiis. 
 
 grandin-es. 
 
 grandin-um. 
 
 grandin-ibus. 
 
 
126 
 
 NOUNS, THIRD DECLENSION, CLASS VI. 
 
 On these, pbserve, 
 
 (340.) Rule of Gender. — Nouns which drop n, and change 
 i into o in the nora., are feminine. 
 Exceptions. Ord6 {order), cardd {hinge), turbS (whirlwind), are 
 masculine. Nem6 {nobody), inarg6 {margin), are common 
 (Homo, man, is masc. by the general rule, 25, a) 
 Rem. C«Lr6 {Jiesh) makes gen. carnls, dat. carnl, &c., contracted 
 from carinis, carini, &c. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 (341.) Vocabulary. 
 
 Sleep, somnus, i. 
 
 Sam^, idem, ead6m, Id6m (150), 
 
 Multitude, multitude, (multitudin) is 
 
 (VI., 2). 
 To set forth, exponere. 
 Svmllow, hirundd, (hirundin) Is (VL, 
 
 2). 
 Harbinger, praenuntiS, as. 
 Spring, ver, is (321, exc. 2). 
 Resemblance, similitudS, (simiytii- 
 
 din) is (VI., 2).* 
 To preserve, keep, servar6. 
 To coil {name), appellarS. 
 Council, concilium, i. 
 
 (342.) Translate into English. 
 
 1. Somnus imag5 mortis est. — Legati eMem quae Caesar 
 dixerat multitudini exponunt. — Hirundines praenuntiae 
 veris sunt. — Galli oppidiim ex similitudine floris Liliiira 
 appellabant. — Consiil matriim virginum-que precibus exci- 
 tatur. — Poetae celebrant Romuliim, origin^m gentis. 
 
 2. Principes JEdu5rum magnam mujtitudinem homi- 
 niim ex agris coegerunt. — Milites ordines non servant.— 
 Caesar centiiriones primoriim ordiniim ad concilium convocat. 
 — Cicero in magnis turbinibus navem reipublicae (351, 3) 
 giibemavlt, &t salvam in portu collocavit. 
 
 (343.) Translate into Latin. 
 
 1. Speech (sermo) is the image of the mind. — Sleep is often 
 the harbinger of death. — The soldiers feared the force of the 
 
 Lily, lilium, i. 
 
 Virgin, virg6, (virgin) Is (VI., 2). 
 
 Prayer, prex, nom. not used, (prSc) 
 
 is (I.). 
 To celebrate, to extol, celebrare. 
 Origin, orig6, (origin) is (VI., 2). 
 To collect, cog6r6, c6n+%6r6 (perf.- 
 
 stem, coeg). 
 Order, rank, ord6, (ordin) is (VI., 2) 
 
 (m.). 
 Whirlwind, turbfi, (turbln) Is (VI.. 
 
 2, 340, exc). 
 Safe, salvus, ft, Om. 
 
 Similitude floiis «= rescTublance to ajlower. 
 
NOUNS, THIRD DECLENSION, CLASS VI. 
 
 127 
 
 hail. — The centurions were setting-forth the same (things) 
 whicli the general had commanded. — The brave soldiers are 
 moved by the prayers of the mothers and the virgins. 
 
 2. The consuls collect a great multitude of men from the 
 tov^ns. — Caesar dismisses from (ab) the council the centurions 
 of the first ranks. — The archers and the slingers did not keep 
 their ranks. — Ceesar calls (vocare) to the council the centuri- 
 ons of all the ranks. — The brave consul in the great whirlwinds 
 will govern the ship of state (351, 3). — Caesar will place the 
 ship of state safe in the port. 
 
 LESSON LV. 
 
 Nouns. — Third Declension^ continued, 
 
 (344.) Class VI. — The Nominative presents the 
 
 Stem changed. 
 
 3. Neuter Forms. 
 
 
 (a) Voioel changed 
 
 (b) Vowel and Cons, changed. | 
 
 (c) Cont.changed. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Song (n.). 
 
 strength (n.). 
 
 Work (n.). 
 
 Body (n.). 
 
 Law (n.). 
 
 N.,A.,V. 
 Gen. 
 Dat. 
 Abl. 
 
 carmen, 
 carmin-is. 
 carmin-I. 
 cannin-e. 
 
 robur. 6pus. 
 r6b6r-is. 6p6r-is. 
 rob6r-i. 6p6r-!. 
 robor-e. 6p6r-6. 
 
 corpus. 
 corpor-Is. 
 corpor-i. 
 corp6r-e. 
 
 jur-is. 
 
 jur-i. 
 
 jur-6. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Song8. 
 
 1 Works. - 
 
 Bodies. 
 
 Laws. 
 
 N.,A.,V. 
 
 Gen. 
 D.,Abl. 
 
 carmm-ft. 
 
 carmin-um. 
 
 carmin-ibus. 
 
 robor-a. 
 
 robor-iim. 
 
 robor-ibus. 
 
 op6r-a. 
 
 oper-iim. 
 
 op6r-ibus. 
 
 corp6r-a. 
 
 corp6r-um. 
 
 corpor-ibus. 
 
 jur-ft. 
 jur-iim. 
 jur-Ibus. || 
 
 On this class, observe, 
 
 (345.) As to gender^ they are all neuter. Hence, 
 
 Rule of Gender. — Nouns which, in the nominative, change 
 the stems in into Sn, or into iir, and 6r, 6r, or tir into 
 
 u s, are neuter. 
 
 Exceptions. (1.) In Sn: only pectSn, pectinis (masc), a comb. 
 (2.) or into ur: none. 
 (3.) 6 r into u s : none. 
 
 (4.) or into us : only iSpiis, iSporis (masc), a hare. 
 (5.) ur into us: miis, muris (masc), mouse; tellus. flria 
 (fern.), earth 
 
• 28 
 
 NOUNS. THIRD DECLENSION, CLASS VI. 
 
 (346.) Under this head may be classed the follow- 
 ing nouns of rare endings : 
 
 .1. Poem a, atis {neuter), a poem. Nouns of this foi-m are 
 derived from the Greek, and are all neuters. They prefer the 
 ending is to i b u s in the dat. and abl. plur. 
 
 2. Halec {neuter), halecis, brine, and lac {neuter)^ lactis, 
 milk, are the only Latin nouns ending in c in the nom. 
 
 3. caput, capitis, head, is the only Latin noun ending in 
 t in the nom. It is neuter. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 (347.) Vocabulary. 
 
 ArrogaTice, arrogantia, ee. 
 
 Crime, crimen, (crimin) is (VI., 3, 
 
 a). 
 To want (lack), to be free from, ca- 
 
 rerg (with abl.). 
 FoUy, staltitia. 
 Wonderful, mirif iciis, a, um {mirus 
 
 +facio). 
 Naked, uudus, i, um. 
 Strong, validus, ft, um. 
 The whole qffair, omnis res. 
 
 (348.) Examples, 
 {a) To condemn to death. 
 
 To delay, tardarfi. 
 
 Gift, munus, (mtmer) is (VI., 3, b). 
 
 Quickly, cit6 (adv.). 
 
 Hare, 16piis, (lep6r) is (m., 345, 4). 
 
 Alilk, lac, (lact) is (n., 346, 2). 
 
 Flesh, card, (cam) is (f., 340, R.). 
 
 Young man, juvenis, is (m.) : gen. 
 
 pi., um. 
 Danube, Danubius, i (m.). 
 Jugurtha, JugurthS, ae. 
 if, si (conj.). 
 
 Capitis {or capite) condem- 
 nar6 ( = ^o condemn of the 
 head). 
 
 Rule of Syntax. — With verbs of condemning, the punish- 
 ment {i£ capital) is put in the gen. or abl. 
 
 (6) To he free from a crime. Crimine carere { = to want 
 
 crime). 
 
 Hule of Syntax. — The ablative case is used with verbs (and 
 adjectives) of abounding and wanting. 
 
 (349.) Translate into English. 
 
 Socrates aiTogantise et stultitiae crimine c3,rebat. — Kheniis 
 et Rhodaniis magna sunt flu mi n a. — Magna et mirifica sunt 
 omnia Dei opera. — G alii semper nu do corpore (syiJt.,716, 2) 
 pugnabanti— Corpora Germanoriim valida et mirificS, fuerunt. 
 — Magnitudo operum omnem rem tardibat. — Si munerS 
 
lEEEGULAR N<rtJN«. 129 
 
 tardaa, nihil das ; bis dd,t, qui cito dat, — Venator le pores timi- 
 dos in sylvis persequitiir. — Athenienses Socrat^m capite con 
 demnarunt.* — Cur talem virum c&pitis condejnnastis ?— 
 
 B ritanni 1 a c 1 6 e t came vivunt. 
 
 ' '* 
 
 (350.) Translate into Latin. 
 
 The bodies of the young men were sti-ong. — The man (vii*> 
 was free from the crime of folly. — The Danube and the Rhine 
 are great rivers. — Do the Gauls (num, 280, h) fight with naked 
 body 1- — The works of Cicero are excellent : I read them (eos) 
 \^A\h pleasure (libenter).— The Romans condemned Jugurtha 
 to death (348, a). — Did the Athenians (S80, 6) condemn Socra- 
 tes to death ? — The captives were condemned (imperf. pass.) to 
 death. — The timid hare was wandering in the woods and fields. 
 — Is-it-possible-that (280, h) the Britons live (on) (abl.) milk 
 and flesh? — Your pleasant songs (161, h) delighted (delec- 
 tare) me. 
 
 LESSON LVl. 
 
 Irregular Nouns. 
 
 (351.) We give here the declension of a/ew) irreg- 
 ular nouns. 
 
 
 1. Jupiter. 
 
 Nom. 
 
 Jupiter. 
 
 Gen. 
 
 J6V1S. 
 
 Dat. 
 
 Jovi. 
 
 Ace. 
 
 Jovem. 
 
 Abl. 
 
 J6v6. 
 
 * The perfj and phcp. tenses are often thus contracted: amdrdt for 
 dmdvSrat ; vigilastls for vigUavistu. 
 
ISO 
 
 IRREGULAR NOUNS. 
 
 
 2. 
 
 B 
 
 OS, 
 
 an ox or cow. • 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Nom. 
 
 Bos. 
 
 
 
 Boves. 
 
 Gen. 
 
 Bovis. 
 
 
 
 Bourn. 
 
 Dat. 
 
 Bovi. 
 
 
 
 Bobiis or Bubus. 
 
 Ace. 
 
 Bovem. 
 
 
 
 Boves. 
 
 Voc. 
 
 Bos. 
 
 
 
 Boves. 
 
 Abl. 
 
 Bove. 
 
 
 
 Bobiis or bubiis. 
 
 [In double nouns, each noun is inflected ; e. g.,] 
 
 3 Respublica (res+publica), a republic, state. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Nom. Respublica. 
 
 Gen. Reipublicae. 
 
 Dat. E^ipublicas. 
 
 Ace. RempubKeam. 
 
 Voc. RespubKca. 
 
 Abl. Republica. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Respublicas. 
 
 Rerumpublicarum. 
 
 Rebuspublicis. 
 
 Respublicas. 
 
 RespublicsB. 
 
 RebuspubKcis. 
 
 - 4. Jusjurandum (jus+jurandiim), an oatn. 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 Nom. Jusjurandum. Jurajuranda. 
 
 Gen. Jurisjurandi. 
 
 Dat. Jurijurando. 
 
 Ace. Jusjurandum. Jurajuranda. 
 
 Abl. Jurejurando. 
 
 Rem. The genitive, dative, and ablative plural are not txsed. 
 
 E X ER 
 
 (352,) Vocabulary. 
 
 Faith, promise, fides, ei. 
 
 To bind, obstringerg, (6b+string6rg) 
 (perf.-stem, obstrinx). 
 
 To take care of, curarS. 
 
 Folly, stultitia, 83. 
 
 Tp lose, amitt6rS, (a+mittSrg) (pert- 
 stem, amis). 
 
 To intrust, committ6r6, (con+mit- 
 tSrg) commis (veith dat.). 
 
 EspedaUy, maximS (adv.). 
 
 To worship, c6l6r6 (perf.-stem, c6- 
 lu-). 
 
 CIS E. 
 
 Apis, Apis, is (m.). 
 
 Sacred, sanctus, S, um. 
 
 Formerly, olim. 
 
 Guardian, custos, (custod) Is (m. 
 
 and f.j. 
 Juno, Jun6, (Junon) is (f.). 
 Husband or icife, conjux, (conjQg) 
 
 is (m. and f.). 
 Nation, nati6, (nation) Is (f.). 
 An Egyptian, jEgyptius, I. 
 But especially, maxima autSm. 
 Minerva, MinervS. ao. 
 
 I 
 
lEEEGULAR NOUNS. 131 
 
 (353.) Translate into English. 
 
 Principes inter se fidem et jusjurandum dS,bant. — Ario- 
 vistiis civitatem jurejurando (55) §t obsidibiis obstrinxit. — 
 Apiid Romanos, consules rempublic^m curaverunt. — Multge 
 nationes per stultitiam respublicas suas amiserunt. — Vete- 
 res maxime Jovem coluenmt. — Mgy^lXi. Apim, sanctum 
 bovem (225, a), olim coluerunt. — JupitSr ^st hujus urbia 
 custos. — Juno erat Jovis conjux — Gives iram Jo vis timent. 
 — Cornua boiim sunt magna. 
 
 (354.) Translate into Latin. 
 
 The' robbers will give an oath among themselves. — Csesar 
 binds all the Germans by a promise and an oath. — Csesar bound 
 the chiefs of the state by an oath and by hostages. — The senate 
 intrusts (committit) the whole republic to Cicero. — The 
 consuls will take care of our republic. — The ancients worship- 
 ped many gods, but especially Jupiter. — We have lost the re- 
 public by (per) our own folly. — Jupiter is the guardian of our 
 house. — ^Apis, the sacred ox, is the guardian of this city. — • 
 Minerva was the daughter of Jupiter. — Good men do not fear 
 the anger of Jupiter. 
 
133 RULES OF GENDEK, THIRD DECLENSION. 
 
 (355.) LESSON LVIT. 
 
 Summary of Rules of Gender from the Nominative 
 Formation.* 
 
 I. Masculines either 
 
 1. Add s, and change the stem-Vowel before it; e. g.^ 
 gurges, gurgit-is, whirlpool; miles, milit-is, sol- 
 dier ; codex, c6dic-is, 6oc»^- 
 
 2. Present the stem er, ul, or, without adding s ; e. g.^ 
 anser, anser-is, goose; consul, consul-is, consul; 
 honor, honor-is, Aowowr. 
 
 3. Drop n without adding s; e. g.^ sermo, sermon -is. 
 
 •1 
 
 speech ; car bo, carbon -is, coa 
 4. Change er of the stem, into is, or into 6s; e. g. 
 cinis, cin§r-is, ashes; pulvis, pulver-is, dust 
 flos, flor -IS, flower. 
 
 IL Feminines either 
 
 1. Add s without changing the stem-vowel; e. g., urb-s, 
 urb-is, city; nox (noct-s), noct-is, night; vox 
 (v6c-s), voc-is, voice ; quies, quiet-is, quiet. 
 
 2. Insert a vowel (e or i) before adding s ; e. g-., nu b- e-s. 
 nuh -19, cloud ; nav-i-s, nav-is, "' 
 
 3. Drop n, and change i into o ; e. g.,imSigo, im agin -is. 
 image; grando, grandin-is, hail. 
 
 III. Neuters either 
 
 1. Add e to the stem ; e. g., m^re, mS,r-i8, the sea. 
 
 2. Present the unchanged stem al, ar, ur, or ; e. g., §,ni- 
 mal, animal-is, animal; calcar, calcar-is, spur; 
 fulgiir, fulgiir-is, lightning; aequor, sequor-is, sea. 
 
 3. Change i n of the stem into e n, o r into u r, and e r, 6 r, 
 or ur into us; e.^., carmen, carmin-is, sotj^; Sbiir, 
 6b6r-is, ivory; opus, 6per-is, work; corpus, cor- 
 p6r-is, body ; crus, crur-is, leg. 
 
 * Abundant illustrations of these rules have been given. The student 
 should now learn them thoroughly by heart, and apply them in the sub- 
 se()ueut lessons 
 
EXCEPTIONS. 133 
 
 Exceptions. 
 
 I. 1. Only merges, mergitis {f.)^ sheaf. 
 
 ' e r, feminine : linter, boat. 
 
 e r, neuter : c^davSr, uber, verber, ver, tubSr, spin- 
 ther, with all the names of plants in e r, 
 I. 2. -^ 6 r, feminine : arbor, tree. 
 
 or, neuter: cor, adSr, eequor, marmor. 
 
 Rem. The neuters have 6 (short) in the stem ; the mas- 
 culines, 6 [long). 
 
 r o S The abstract nouns in lo are b31 feminine ; e. g., r3,tio 
 * * \ (f.), rationis, reason. 
 
 I. 4. None. 
 
 Masculines. Viz., fons, mons, pons, dens and its 
 yy ^ \ compounds, torrens, occidens, orlens. 
 
 ' * ^ Grex, Greek nouns in ax, and a few in ix ; Iftpis, 
 
 vas, paries, pes.* 
 Masculines. Latin nouns ending in nis ; e.g., ignts 
 {m.),Jire ; with 
 Piscis, orbis, callis, and canalis ; 
 Unguis, caulis, axis, and annalis ; 
 Fascis, sentis, fustis, canis, ensis ; 
 Vectas, vermis, postis ; also mensis. 
 ,r „ ^ Masculines. Ordo, cardo, homo, turbo. 
 ■ I Common. Nemo, margo. 
 
 II. 2.-^ 
 
 III. 1. None. 
 
 C Sal, masculine and neuter in singular; masculine in 
 TTI. 2. < plural. Lar, laris, masculine. 
 
 ( Fur, furfur, turtiir, vultur, masculine. 
 
 ( Masculine : changing i n into & n, only pecten, comb ; 
 jrj „ I changing or into iis, only lepus, hare ; chang- 
 
 j ing ur into us, only mus, mouse. Feminine : 
 
 \ teUus, earth. 
 
 * There are also a few Greek words that are masculine. , As, assis, 
 coin, is masouline ; vas, vasis, vase, is neuter. 
 
 M 
 
§ 4. 
 
 COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. (LVIII.— LX.) 
 
 (356.) Adjrctives are inflected both in English 
 and Latin to express degrees of quahty.; e. g.^ 
 
 Positive. 
 
 Brave, 
 Fort- IS, 
 
 Comparative. 
 
 braver, 
 fort- i 6 r, 
 
 Superlative 
 
 hravest. 
 fort-is SI mils. 
 
 LESSON LVIII. 
 
 The Comparative ^Degree. 
 
 (357.) The comparative has the ending ior for 
 the masculine, and iiis for neuter. These endings 
 are added directly to the stem of the adjective ; e. g.^ 
 
 Brave, fort-is ; 
 Hard, dur-us ; 
 
 Masculine. 
 
 braver, fort- ior; 
 harder, dur-ior; 
 
 fort- i u s. 
 dur-ius. 
 
 Beautiful, pulch-er > . /. , , , . 
 
 {stem, pulchr-) ; S '^''''^ beautiful, pulchr-ior ; pulchr-ius. 
 
 Rsm. If the stem ends in a vowel, the comparative is fonned by the 
 use of mdgis, more, instead of the ending; e. g., 
 
 pious, pi-US ; more pious, migis pius. 
 
 Jit, idone-us ; more Jit, magis idoneus. 
 
 (358.) 
 
 DECLENSION OF COMPARATIVES. 
 
 1 SINGULAR. 
 
 PLITBAJ,. 1 
 
 
 Masc. and Fern. 
 
 Neut. 
 
 Masc. and Fem. 
 
 Neut. 
 
 N. and V. 
 
 dur-ior. 
 
 dur-ius. 
 
 dur-iores. 
 
 dur-iora. 
 
 Gen. 
 
 dur-iorts. 
 
 dur-ioris. 
 
 dur-iorum. 
 
 dur-iorfim. 
 
 Dat. 
 
 dur-iori. 
 
 dur-iori. 
 
 dur-ioribus. 
 
 dur-ioribils. 
 
 Ace. 
 
 dur-iorem. 
 
 dur-ius. 
 
 dur-iores. 
 
 dur-iora. 
 
 Abl. 
 
 dur-iorS. 
 
 dur-iorg. 
 
 dur-ioribus. 
 
 dur-ioribus. 
 
 Rem. In the later writers, i is used for abl. sing, ending freqaenfcly 
 instead of e. 
 
COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 
 
 135 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 (359.) Vocabulary. 
 
 Like, similar to, siimlis (takes dot., 
 
 sometimes gen., 106, II., c). 
 Amiable, amabilis, is, 6. 
 Eloquent, el6quens. 
 Excellent, praestans. 
 Ignorance, Ignoratio, (ignoration) is. 
 Knowledge, scientia, ae. 
 Silver, argentom, i. 
 VUe, paltry, vilis, is, 6. 
 Jttsiwre, justitia, 85. 
 
 (360.) Examples. 
 (a) A pirate is more liJce a 
 wild beast than a man. 
 
 Deavj precious, cariis, fi, um. 
 Few, pauci, ae, & (used only in pi.). 
 Indeed, quidem (adv. ; always stands 
 
 next after the word to which it 
 
 refers). 
 Stoift, celer (105, R. 1). 
 TAotTt, quam (conj.). 
 To seek, qujererS. 
 Antonine, Antoninus, i. 
 Future, futurus, a, um. 
 
 (5) Nothing is more amiable 
 than virtue. 
 
 Praedo f^rae (106, II., h) est 
 s 1 m i 1 i o r quam homini 
 (dat). 
 Nihil est amabilius quam 
 
 V i r t u s, or 
 (c) Nihil est virtute ama- 
 bilius. 
 
 (c) Rule of Syntax. — The conjunction quam {than) is fre- 
 quently omitted, and then the noun with the compara- 
 tive must be put in the ablative case. 
 
 Cicero was more eloquent 
 than Caesar. 
 
 Cicero fuit Cses&re elo- 
 quent i o r. 
 
 (361.) Translate into English. 
 
 Nihil est virtute prsBstantius. — Virtus est prsestantior 
 quam robur (344). — Ignoratio maiorum utilior est quam sci- 
 entiS,. — Aurura gravius est argents. — Argentum villus est 
 auro, virtutibus aurum. — Liipi ferociores sunt quam 
 c^nes. — TuUus Hostilius ferocior erat Romiilo. — Justitiam 
 quaerimus ; rem (app., with justitiam, 225, a) auro cario- 
 rem. — Panels (dat. gov. bycarior, 106, II., b) carior fides 
 est, quam pecunia. — Mihi (dat.) Amicus fuit me ipso carior. 
 — Omnes suos {i. e., his friends) caros habet {he holds) ; me 
 (ace.) quidem se ipso cariorSm. — Nemo Romanorum {par- 
 titive gen.) eloquentior fuit Cicerone. 
 
 (362.) Translate into Latin. 
 1. With qua m. — The horse is swifter than the dog. — Igiio- 
 
136 COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 
 
 ranee of future evils is better than knowledge (of them). — Lions 
 are fiercer than wolves. — Antonine was more pious (357, R.) 
 than Ca?sar. — The son was more amiable than the father. — A 
 robber is more like a wolf (dat., 106, II., 6) than a man. 
 
 2. Without quam (with ablative). — Justice is a thing more 
 precious than gold. — Gold is more paltry than virtue. — Nothing 
 is more amiable than virtue. — To Crassus his friends were 
 dearer than himself.— He (had) held all his own (friends) 
 dear, but Cicero even dearer than himself. — What (170) is 
 heavier than water ? Gold. — What is more excellent than 
 strength ? Virtue. 
 
 LESSON LIX. 
 
 Superlative Degree, 
 (363.) The superlative ending is i s s i m u s, which 
 is added to the stem of the adjective. 
 
 Positive. Comparative. Superlative. 
 
 Dear, car-us ; clearer, car-ior ; dearest, cBX-'i^simus. 
 
 Brave, fort-is ; braver, fort-ior ; bravest, fort- i s s i m ii s. 
 
 Happy, more happy, most happy, 
 
 felix (felic-s) ; felic-ior ; felic- i s s i m ii s. 
 
 (364.) But adjectives whose stems end in e r add 
 the ending r i m u s. 
 
 Unhappy, miser ; most unhappy, miser- r i m u s. 
 
 Swift, cel6r ; swiftest, cSler- r i m u s. 
 
 Beautiful, pulcher ; most beautiful, pulcher- r i m u s. 
 
 (365.) Several adjectives whose stems end in I add 
 1 T m u s. 
 
 Easy, {a,ci\-is ; easiest, {a,ci\-\im. us. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 (366.) Vocabulary, 
 
 Cyrus, Cyrus, I. 
 
 Hannibal, Hannibal, (Hannibal) is. 
 
 Difficult, difFicilis (di-1-facxlis). 
 
 Moderation, m6dus, i. 
 
 Darius, Darius, i. 
 
 To preserve moderation, m6dum h3 
 
 berS (= to leave moderaiion). 
 Carthage, Carthago, (Carthagm) is 
 Metal, mStallum, I. 
 To stain, macularS. 
 

 COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 13Y 
 
 (367.) Examples. 
 
 (a) Socrates was very wise, i Socrates sapientissimus 
 I fuit. 
 
 A high degree of quality [very good, very wise, &c.) is expressed in 
 
 Latin by the superlative. 
 
 (&) Of all these, the Bel- Horatn omnium fort is si mi 
 
 gians are the bravest. sunt BelgsB. 
 
 Rule of Syntax. — ^The genitive plural is used with the 
 
 superlative degree : the most learned of the Romans ; 
 
 doctissimiis Rpmanorum (partitive gen., synt., 697). 
 
 (c) Among the Helvetians 
 the nohlest was Orgetorix. 
 
 A pud Helvetias no bi- 
 lls simus fuit Orgetorix. 
 
 (368.) Translate into English. 
 
 Urbs SyracussB (app., 225, a) Grsecarum urbium est pul- 
 cherrima. — Prsestantissimi Persarum regfesfuerunt Cyrus et 
 Darius. — Pompeius magnam belli gloriam morte (55, a) tur- 
 pissima maculavit. — Hannibal fortissimus erat omnium 
 Carthaginiensium. — Galiorum omnium fortissimi sunt Bel- 
 gae. — Cicero eloquentissimus fuit Romanorum.— Difficilli- 
 mum est modum haber^ (161, d). — Apud iEduos nobilissi- 
 mus et fortissimus fuit Divitiacus. 
 
 (369.) Translate into Latin, 
 
 Plato was veiy wise (367, a). — Plato was the wisest of all 
 the Greeks (367, h). — The city Rome was the most beautiful 
 of all the Roman cities. — Of all these, the Britons are tlie bra- 
 vest. — The most excellent leaders of the Romans were Caesar 
 and Pompey. — Carthage was a very beautiful city. — Of all 
 things, the most difficult is to preserve 'moderation. — Of all 
 (men), the most happy (beatus) is the wise (man). — The hard- 
 est of all metals is iron. — Among the Greeks Themistocles 
 was the noblest. — Caesar led the bravest soldiers across the 
 veiy broad river. 
 
 M2 
 
 ■^. 
 
138 
 
 IRREGULAR COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 
 
 LESSON LX. 
 Irregular Comparison of Adjectives. 
 (370.) Several adjectives are quite irregular in 
 their comparison. The following are the most im- 
 portant. 
 
 nl 
 
 Comparative. 
 
 Superlatii 
 
 food, bonus. 
 ad, malus. 
 great, magnus. 
 
 much, multiis. 
 
 small, parvus. 
 old, senex. 
 young, juvenis. 
 outward, extfirus. 
 below, inf ems. 
 
 above, sup§rus. 
 
 hind, posterus. 
 
 better, melior. 
 worse, pejor. 
 greater, major. 
 
 ( plus (n. sin?.)- 
 ^^^'Jplures,a(pl-)- 
 less, minor. 
 older, senior. 
 younger, junior» 
 more outward, exterior. 
 lower, inferior. 
 
 higher, supSrIor. 
 
 hinder, post6ri6r. 
 
 best, optimiis. 
 
 vjorst, pessimus. 
 
 greatest, maximus. 
 
 m,ost, ? 1 - " « 
 
 ' > plurmius. 
 
 very many, ^ ^ 
 
 least, minimus. 
 
 wanting. 
 
 outermost, extremus. 
 lowest, infimvls, or 
 
 imvis. 
 highest, supremus, or 
 
 eummus. 
 hindmost, postremus. 
 
 (371.) Several adjectives have no positive, but form 
 the comparative and superlative from a preposition, 
 adverb, or obsolete word. 
 
 
 Comparative. 
 
 Superlative. 
 
 (o?i this side, citra.) 
 {within, intra.) 
 
 {beyond, ultra.) 
 
 {near, prope.) 
 {bad, deter.) 
 
 nearer, exterior. 
 inner, interior. 
 
 fartlier, ulteri6r. 
 
 nearer, pfopior. 
 
 worse, deteriSr. 
 former, prior. 
 
 nearest, citimus. 
 inmost, intimus. 
 
 worst, deterrimus. 
 first, primus. 
 
 Rem. 1. Dives, rich; richer, ditior, divitior; richest, ditissimus, divi- 
 tissTmus. (Cicero uses the longer form, Cassar the shorter.) 
 
 2. Compound adjectives in dicus, ficus, volus, add eiitior for the 
 comp., and entissimus for the super]. ; e. g., ben6-v6lu8 {benevolent), 
 benevol-entior. benevol- entissimus. 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 (372.) Vocabulary, 
 
 Disgraceful, unworthy, indignua, a, 
 
 fim (in+dignus). 
 Infamy, disgraceful crime, flagi- 
 
 tiiSm, T. 
 Whdom, sapientii, oe. 
 
 The Suevians, Suevi, orum. 
 Warlike, bellicosiis, a, um. 
 Condition, conditio, (condition) is. 
 America, America, ro. 
 Empvror, iuipgrator, oris (3*5, 1., 3U 
 
IRREGULAR COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 139 
 
 (373.) Exmnples, ■ 
 (a) It is disgraceful to he 
 
 conquered hy a superior ; 
 
 more disgraceful {to be 
 
 conquered) by one inferior 
 
 and lower. 
 
 Indignum est a s u p e r i 6 r e 
 vinci ; indignius ab inferi- 
 or e atque hiimiliore. 
 
 [Here the infm. pass, vinci is used as a neut. noun, nom. to est, and 
 indignum agrees with it in the predicate.] 
 
 (&) What is better for man 
 than wisdom ? 
 
 Quid est ho mini melius s ^- 
 p i e n t i a (360, c) ? 
 
 [Here honuni is in the dat. (advantage or disadvantage, 106, II., b).] 
 
 (374.) Translate into English. 
 
 Nihil est melius quam (360, b) sapientia. — Hiberni3. 
 minor est qUam Britannia. — Nihil est pejiis flagitio. — Hos- 
 tes celeriter loca (309) siiperiora occupabant. — MaximS, 
 pars Aquitanise obsides ad Cgesarem misit. — Suevorum gens 
 est longe maxima et beilicosissima Germanorum omnium 
 (367, b). — Ariovistus agrum Sequanum, qui optimus 6rat 
 totius GallisB occiipavit. — Infima est conditio et fortune ser- 
 vorum. — Primus et maximus regum Romanorum fuit 
 Romulus. , 
 
 (375.) Translate into Latin. 
 
 It is disgraceful to be conquered by a junior, more disgrace- 
 ful by a senior. — What is better than virtue ? what worse than 
 vice ? — What is better for man than honour ? Wisdom. — Eu- 
 rope is less than Asia; Asia than America — The bravest of 
 the Belgians were seizing the higher grounds (loca). — The 
 greatest part of Gaul made (f e c i t) a surrender. — The first 
 and greatest of the Roman emperors was Caesar. — The poor 
 are often more benevolent (371, R. 2) than (quam) the rich. 
 — The worst (men) are often more-happy than (quam) the 
 best. — Among the Helvetians (by) far the richest and noblest 
 was Orgetorix. 
 
§ 6. 
 
 COMPARISON OF ADVERBS. 
 
 (376.) Adverbs 4erived from adjectives admit of 
 comparison. The comp. is the neuter form of the 
 comparative of the adjective : the superlative substi- 
 tutes e for u s. 
 
 Learnedly, 
 doct- e ; 
 
 Joyfully, 
 Iset- e ; 
 
 Happily, 
 felic-1 ter 
 
 Well, bene ; 
 
 more learnedly, 
 doct- i ii s ; 
 
 more joyfully, 
 Iget- i u s ; 
 
 more happily, 
 felic-ius ; 
 
 better, melius : 
 
 most learnedly, 
 doct- i s s i m e. 
 
 most joyfully, 
 laet-issime. 
 
 most happily, 
 felic- i s s ! m e. 
 
 best, optime. 
 
 (No separate exercise upon these is necessary.] 
 
§ 6. • 
 
 SUPINE. 
 
 (377.) The Supine presents the action of the verb 
 under the form of a noun in two cases, the accusative 
 and ablative. The former supine ends in um, the lat- 
 ter in u ; which endings are added to the supine-stem 
 of the verb. 
 
 LESSON LXI. 
 Supines. 
 (378.) The Supine-stem is formed by adding to 
 the verb-stem, 
 
 (1) In 1st conj., ...... at; e. ^., am-at-. • 
 
 (2) In 2d conj., it; c. g., mon-it-. 
 
 (3) In 3d conj., t; c. ^., reg-t = rect 
 
 (4) In 4th conj., it; c. ^., aud-it-. 
 
 [Rem. Many supines, however, use different connecting vowels, or 
 
 take s (and not t) before um and u. For this reason, therefore, all 
 supine-stems will be given in the following vocabularies. Where 
 no supine-stem is given, it is to be understood that the verb has no 
 supine.] 
 
 (379.) The supine in um is a verbal noun of the accusative 
 case, and is put after verbs of motion to express the design of 
 that motion ; e. g.^ 
 
 Legati M Cses^rem vSniunt 
 
 rogatum* auxiliiim. 
 Ire d o r m i t ii m. 
 
 (a) Ambassadors come to 
 
 Ccesar to ask assistance. 
 (6) To go to sleep {to sleep- 
 ing). 
 
 (380.) The supine in u is a verbal noun of the ablative case, 
 and is used after adjectives signifying good or bad, easy or diji- 
 cult, pleasant or unpleasant, &c. 
 
 * R6gfttam= accus. answering to the question whither 
 
 1 
 
142 
 
 SUPINE. 
 
 Est mirabilg d i c t u. 
 
 (a) It is {a thing) easy td do Est f acil6 f a c t u.* 
 
 (or, to be done), 
 {h) It is {a thing) wonderful 
 
 to tell (or, to he told). 
 (381.) The following are nearly all the supines in u whicn 
 are in use : dictu, audit u, cognitu, factu, invent fl, 
 mSmoratu. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 (382.) Vocabulary. 
 
 To ask, demand, postulate (postu- 
 
 lat). 
 To congratulate, gratulan (gratii- 
 
 lat}, dep. 
 To come together, conv&iirg (con+ 
 
 venlrg, conven-, convent-). 
 To complain, queror (quest). 
 Custom, consuetudd, (consuetudui) 
 
 IS (f., 355, II., 3). 
 To collect com, frumentarl (friimen- 
 
 tat). 
 A Trevirian, Trevir i (65), 
 
 To besiege, oppugnarS (oppugnatj. 
 
 Hand, band of men, raaxius, us. 
 
 Wonderful, mirabilis, e (104). 
 
 Very easy, perfacTlis, 6 (104). 
 
 To do, fac6r6 (fact). 
 
 T-o say, tell, dic6re (diet). 
 
 Best, optimus, a, um (370). 
 
 To find, invenlre (in+vSnirS), ii 
 
 vent. 
 To happen, accxd6r6i 
 To endure, tolfirarg (tolSrat). 
 Senate, sfinatus, us. 
 
 (383.) Example. 
 
 Divitiacus came to Rome 
 to ask assistance. 
 
 Divitiacus R o m a m venit 
 auxilium postiilatum. 
 Rule of Syntax. — The accusative is used with the names 
 of towns and «mall islands, to answer to the question 
 whither ; e. g., in (a) Romam. 
 
 (384.) Translate into English. 
 
 1. Supine in iim. — Principes civitatis ad C3esS,rem gratij 
 latum convenerunt. — Treviri magna manu (55, a) castr^ op 
 pugnatum venerunt. — Legatl ab iEduis venerunt, questiim. 
 — CaesSr ex consuetudine unam 16gi6nem misit frumenta- 
 tum. — Legatl Romam ad senatum venerunt auxilium pos- 
 tiilatum. 
 
 2. Supine in u — Est perfacilS factu. — Est jucundiim au- 
 dita. — Qusedam (178, 1) sunt turpia dictu. — Quod optimum 
 est factu, faciam. — Virtus difficilis est inventu. — Multa 
 accidunt durS, toleratu. 
 
 F a c tu = ablative of respect, wherein. 
 
SUPINE. 143 
 
 (385.) Translate into Latin. 
 
 [Words in Italic to be rendered by supines.] 
 
 1. Supine in um. — The consuls, according to (ex) <;ustom, 
 sent a lai'ge band to collect eorn. — All the chiefs, of the ^duans 
 were coming to Rome to ask assistance. — All the ambassadors, 
 according to custom,* came-together to Caesar to congratulate 
 (him). — The soldiers of the tenth legion came tb the general to 
 complain. — The Germans came (in) a large band to attach the 
 town. 
 
 2. Supine in u. — It is (a thing) wonderful to he heard. — 
 "What (quod) is base to he said, I will not say. — What is diffi- 
 cult to he done, I wiU do. — A true (verus) friend is difficult to 
 be found. — Some-things are ver^r easy to be done. 
 
 • According to custom = ex consuetadra^. 
 
5 7. 
 
 TENSES OF VERBS FOR COMPLETED AC- 
 TION.— PERFECT, PLUPERFECT, AND FU- 
 TURE PERFECT. — FULLER STATEMENT. 
 (LXIL— LXIX.) 
 
 (386.) It has been stated (262) that the tense-stem of the 
 perfect, pluperfect, and future perfect tenses is the same. In 
 Lessons XLIV., XLV. we gave one mode of forming this 
 tense-stem for each conjugation. There are several other 
 modes, which we now proceed to state, taking up the conjuga- 
 tions separately. To make the tables complete, we shall repeat 
 the Jirst method at the head of each. 
 
 LESSON LXII. 
 Forms of Perfect-stem. — First Conjugation, 
 (387.) There are four ways of forming the per- 
 fect-stem in the^rs^ conjugation. 
 
 I. Hy adding a.y to the verb-stem ; am -are, am-av 
 II. " u " son-are, s6n-u 
 
 III. reduplicating* the first con- } , „ „ ,„, 
 
 ^ 'Ti ^ >d-are, ded- 
 
 sonant with e ; > 
 
 IV. lengthening the stem-vowel ; juv-are, juv 
 On this table, observe that Class 
 
 I. contains most of the verbs of the first conjugation. 
 II. contains eleven simple verbs (of which a Ust may be found, 664). 
 
 III. contains but two simple verbs, viz., ddrS, to give, and starg, to 
 
 stand. 
 
 IV. contains but two simple verbs, viz., jiivarg, to assist, and ISvarS. 
 
 to wash. 
 (388.) To form the perfect, pluperfect, or future perfect of a 
 
 * To reduplicate a consonant is to prefix it to a stem with some con- 
 necting-vowel ; thus, mord-, redufjlicate with o, momord; st-fire, re- 
 duplicate with e. stest-, but the second s is dropped, st6t-. 
 
PERFECT-STEM, FIRST CONJUGATION. 
 
 14& 
 
 Ferb of any of the above classes, simply add the endings of those 
 tenses respectively to the perfect-stem ; thus : 
 
 Infinitive. Perfect-stem. Perfect tense. 
 
 'i. 
 
 To forbid, y6t-&r&, v6tu- 
 To give, d-&r6, d6d- 
 To help, jiiv-arS, j u v - 
 
 isti. 
 it. 
 
 imtis. 
 istis. 
 ^erant, or 6re. 
 
 Pluperfect 
 
 6ram. 
 
 6ras. 
 
 6rat. 
 
 Sramds. 
 
 gratis. 
 
 6rant. 
 
 Future Perfect. 
 
 Sr6. 
 
 6ri8. 
 
 6rit. 
 
 erimtis. 
 
 6ritis. 
 
 6rint. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 (389.) [ ^^ Hereafter, in all the vocabularies, the perfect and supine 
 stems of verbs will be given in parentheses, immediately after the infini- 
 tive. When no perfect or supine stem is given, it vrill be understood that 
 those forms of the verb are wanting ; and where two are given, that the 
 verb uses both. Thus : to help, juvarg ( juv-, jut-) ; to glitter, micarS 
 (niicu-) ; to fold, plicare (plicav-, pllcu-, plicat-, plicit-). In these exam 
 pies micar6 has no supine ; plicare has two perfect and two supine forma.] 
 
 (390.) Vocabulary, 
 
 To demand [command), impgrare 
 
 (av-, at-). 
 To give, dare (dSd-, dat-, 387, HI.). 
 Hunger, fames (is), (300). 
 To tame, domare (domu-, dSmit-, 
 
 387, II.). 
 To shine, or flash forth, enucSre 
 
 (gmicu-, e+micare, 387, 11.). 
 To surround, circumstare (stit- and 
 
 stfet-). 
 The sand, dry ground, aridum, i 
 
 (neut. o/aridus, dry). 
 An attack, impetus, us (110). 
 To assist, adjuvarS (juv-, jut-, ad+ 
 
 juvare). 
 
 (391.) Examples, 
 
 (1) Stare = to stand; con-stare, to stand together, to 
 halt ; circum-stare, to stand^uround, to surround. 
 (The compounds of stare, with prepositions oi one sylla- 
 ble, have stit- for perfect-stem ; those with two, st6t-.) 
 
 (2) To resist or withstand Alicui rfisistSre. 
 any one. 
 
 Partial Rule of Syntax. — Many verbs compounded with 
 prepositions govern the dative. 
 
 N 
 
 Door, foris, (ftr) Is (300). 
 
 To creak, cr6par6 (crepu-, creplt-). 
 
 To chide, reprove, incrfipare (in+ 
 
 creparg, crgpu-, erg pit-). 
 A little while, pauUispfir (adv.). 
 To with^and, rSsistfirS (restit-, 
 
 rg+stare). 
 To halt, constarg (constit-,, con-f- 
 
 stare)!' 
 As soon as, simulatque (adv.). 
 To slay, kill, interficgre (interfSc-, 
 
 interfect-). 
 To make, fScgre, id (fgc-, fact-, 
 
 199). 
 
146 FERFECT-STEM, FIRST CONJUGATION. 
 
 Aliquem in fugam d&re 
 
 { = to give unto jiight). 
 Impetum facere. 
 
 (3) 7^0 put any one to Jiight. 
 
 (4) To make an attack. 
 
 [The Latin words in the following exercises which illustrate the fes- 
 sofis are spaced.] 
 
 (392.) Translate into English. 
 
 Oppidani, obsides quos Cgesar imperav-6rat, dSd-erunt. — 
 Venat5res faiTi6 (abl., 55, a) lupoadomu-erunt. — Ex monte 
 subito (adv.) flammsB emicu-erunt. — Imperator oppidanos 
 frumento (55) a d j u v - i t. — Num crepu-erunt fores ? — Cae- 
 sar v^hementer (215, 2, 6) mllites increpu-it. — Hostes 
 nostris paullisper restit-erunt. — Hostes militibus (391, 2) 
 circumstfit-erunt, multosque interfec-erunt. — Nostri in 
 hostes impetum fec-erunt, atque eos (391, 3) in fugam dfed- 
 erunt. — Nostii slmulatque in an do constit-erunt, in hostes 
 impStum fec-erunt atque eos in fugam dSd-erunt. 
 
 (393.) Translate into Latin. 
 
 The flame shone-forth. — From (ex) the-top-of the mountain 
 (297, a) the flame suddenly shone-forth. — ^The huntsman had 
 tamed the wolf.— The townsmen had given the hostages. — 
 The Belgians gave all the hostages that {rel. pron.) Csesar had 
 demanded. — The general had reproved the lieutenant and 
 (que) the soldiers. — Our (men) were-withstanding the enemy 
 (dat.) — Our (men) bravely withstood the enemy, and (que) 
 killed many. — The Belgians surrounded our {men) (dat., 391, 
 2), and killed many. — The Romans often put the Belgians to 
 flight. — Our men halted upon {in) the dry-ground. — As-soon-as 
 our men halted upon dry-ground, they bravely withstood the 
 enemy (391, 2). — Our men put-to-flight the enemy whom 
 (dat., 391, 2) they had bravely withstood. 
 
 LESSON LXIII. 
 Perfect-stem. — Second Conjugation, 
 ■.- (394.) The perfect-stem in second conjugation is 
 formed inj^ue ways. 
 
PEKFECT-STEM, SECOND CONJUGATION. 147 
 
 I. By adding u to the verb-stem ; m 5 n-ere, m 6 n- ii-. 
 II. " ev " del-ere, del-ev-. 
 
 III. " s " man-erg, man-s-. 
 
 IV. reduplicating; the first con- } , _ „ „ , 
 
 ^ ° -^ . > mord-ere, mo-mordi. 
 
 sonant and vowel ; > 
 
 V. lengthening the stem-vowel ; v i d -ere, v i d '. 
 (395.) On this table, observe that Class 
 
 I. contains most of the verbs of the second conjugation.* 
 
 II. contains only f 1 e r S, to weep ; n e r 6, to spin ; d e 1 e r 6, to destroy , 
 
 with the compounds of the obsolete words pi ere, to Jill; 
 6lere,t to grow; suere,t to be accustomed. [For, a list, see 
 665, XL] 
 in. contains many verbs, of which a list may be found (665, III.). 
 The rules of euphony must be applied here, 
 (a) b before s sometimes passes into s. 
 
 Infinitire. Perfect. Snp-ne. 
 
 To command, jub-ere, jub-si=jussi, jussum (jub-sum). 
 ip) t-soxmd before s dropped. 
 
 Infinitive. Perfect. Supine. 
 
 To laugh, rid-ere, rld-si = risT, risum (rid-sum). 
 
 (c) c-sound 4- s = X. Any c-sound before t = c. 
 
 Infinitive. Perfect. Supine. 
 
 To increase, aug-ere, aug-sl = aux-i, auctiim (aug-tum). 
 {d) c-soond after 1 or r dropped before s. 
 
 Infinitive. Perfect. Supine. 
 
 To glitter, fulg-ere, ful-si (ful(g)s-i), ful-sum (ful(g)siim). 
 
 IV. contains /owr simple verbs. See list (665, IV.). 
 
 Infinitive. Perfect. Supine. 
 
 To bite, champ, mord-ere, m6-mord-i, morsum (mord-sum). 
 To vow, promise, s^ondi-ere, sp6-pond-i, sponsum (spond-sum). 
 [The compounds of these verbs drop the reduplication ; e g., 
 
 Infinitive. Perfect. _ Supine. 
 
 To answer, respondere, respond-i, responsum (respond-sum).] 
 V. contains eight simple verbs, for which see list (665, V.). 
 
 Infinitive. Perfect Supine. 
 
 To favour, i2t,y-Qre, fav-i, fautum. 
 
 To move, m6v-Sr6, mov-i, mdtum. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 [Refer to 386 and 389.] 
 
 (396.) Vocabulary. 
 
 Carthage, Carthago, (Carthagin) Is 
 
 (339). 
 To destroy, delerS (dfilev-, delet-, 
 
 395, II.). 
 
 To Jill up, complere (complev-, com' 
 plet-, 395, II.) [con4-plere]. 
 
 Good will, voluntas, (voluntat) ia 
 (293). 
 
 * Many examples of this class have already occurred. 
 
 t Some of these have sco in present indicative : adolesco, consaesco 
 
148 PERFECT-STEM, SECOND CONJUGATION. 
 
 Scipio ) Sclpio, nis. 
 
 {surnamed) > 
 Africanus, ) Africanus, i. ■ 
 Numantia, Numantia, se. 
 A defence, fortification, munitio (nis). 
 
 (f., 333, R.)- 
 Eve7i up to, as far as, usqu6 (adv.)- 
 Great, ingens, (ingent) is (107). 
 Standard, signum, L 
 Tooth, dens, (dent) is, (m., 295, R.). 
 
 To remain, mSnerS (mans-, mans-, 
 
 394, III.). 
 To come, v6nlr6 (ven-, vent-). 
 A slayer, interfector, oris (319). 
 To see, videre (vid-, vis-, 395, V.). 
 To open, aperlre (ap6i-u-, apeit-). 
 Gate, porta, se. 
 
 To flee, frigere (io), (fug-, fugit-). 
 Bit, bridle, fraenum, I (plur. i and a). 
 Saguntum, Saguntum, i. 
 Hill, coUIs, is (m., 302, R.). 
 
 (397.) Example.. 
 
 On the very day of his ar- [Eodem quovenSrat die 
 rival. {=^the very day on which 
 
 1 day he had come). 
 
 (398.) Translate into English. 
 
 Hannibal Saguntum delevit, Scipio Carthaginem. — Scipio 
 Africanus urbes duas potentissimas, Carthaginem et Numan- 
 tiam delevit. — Ctesar has mfinitiones diligenter auxit. — 
 Galli partem coUis, usque ad, murum oppidi, castris (55, a) 
 com pie ver ant. — Advejitiis legati summa spe et voluntate 
 urbem complevit.— Diu barbari in fide manserant. — Ita 
 complures dies (191, a) manserant castra. — Cassar eodem 
 die (118, II., c) in iEduos castra movit. — Imperator, eodem 
 quo venerat die (397) castra movit. — Brutus 0t Cassius, in- 
 terfectores (225, a) Csesaris, bellum ingens move runt.* — 
 Ijegiones, simiilatqiie nostra signa viderunt, portas aperue- 
 runt. — Equus fraenos momordit. — Spopondistine pro am- 
 ico ? Spopondi. 
 
 (399.) Translate into Latin.' 
 
 Scipio destroyed Carthage, a most powerful city. — God has 
 filled the world with all blessings (bona, neuL). — Socrates 
 never laughed. — The forces of the Gauls had filled the whole 
 (o m n e m) place, even-up to the wall of the town. — The Gauls 
 had fiUed-up the higher (superior) part of the hill with 
 (their) very-crowded (d e n s i s s i m u s) camp. — The coming 
 of Csesar filled the army with the highest hope and good-will. 
 For many years the barbarians had remained in friendship and 
 
 * In the sense of excited, stirred up. 
 
PERFECT-STEM, THIRD CONJUGATION* 149 
 
 fidelity (fide que). — CfEsar moved (his) camp into the (terri- 
 tory of the) iEduans on the very day of his arrival. — The ene- 
 my saw our soldiers, and fled. — The hofses were champing the 
 bits. — The wolf bit the dog with hia teeth (55, a). 
 
 LESSON LXIV. 
 
 Pei^fect- stems. — Third Conjugation, 
 
 (400.) The perfect-stem in the third conjugation 8 
 formed in six ways. 
 
 I. By adding s to the verb-stem ; scrib-ere, scTijT-s-. 
 II. *' u *' col-ere, c61-u-. 
 
 III. " V, or Tv ♦' pet-6re, pet-iv-. 
 
 IV. reduplication ; c u r r -ere , c u c u r r -. 
 V. lengthening the stem-vowel ; fu g-ere, f u g-- 
 
 VI. taking the simple verb-stem ; v o 1 v -ere, v o 1 v -. 
 
 We shall take up these separately, treating in this lesson 
 only the first. 
 
 (401.) Class I. — Perfect-stem formed by adding s 
 to the Verb-stem. 
 
 Most verbs of the third conjugation come under this class. 
 It has already been illustrated, but we here give a fuller ac- 
 count of the rules of euphony, in connexion with the various 
 stem-endings. 
 
 1 . b before s or t passes into p. 
 
 Infinitive. Perfect Supme. 
 
 To write, scrib-ere, scrips-i (scrib-s-i), scriptum (scrib-tum). 
 To marry, nub-6r5, nups-i (nub-s-i), nuptum (nub-tum). 
 
 2. A c-sound -f-s = x (c, g, h, v, gu, qu are classed with c-sounde. If a 
 
 stem ends in ct, the t is dropped, and the c unites with % to form 
 x). Any c-sound before t = c. 
 
 Infinitive. Perfect. Siipin«. 
 
 To lead, duc-6r6, dux-I (duc-s-I), dup-tum. 
 
 To cover, t6g-€r6, tex-i (teg-s-i), tec-tum fteg-tum). 
 
 To draw, trfth-6r6, trax-I (trab-s-i), trac-tam (trah-tum). 
 
 N2 
 
150 
 
 PERFECT-STEM, THIRD CONJUGATION. 
 
 InfinitiTC. 
 
 To live, viv-er6, 
 
 Perfect. 
 
 vix-i (viv-s-i), 
 
 Supine, 
 vic-ttun (viv-tum). 
 
 To quench, extmgu-6rS, extdnx-I (extingxi-s-i), ] / ^ ^.^ \ 
 
 To boil, c6qa-6re, cox-I (coqu-s-i), coc-tum (coqu-tum). 
 
 We class here also, 
 
 Infinitive. Perfect. Supine. 
 
 To flow, flu-ere (fluv-), flux-I (fluv-s-i), flux-um (fluv-stun). 
 To build, stru-ere (struc-), strux-i (struc-s-i), struc-tum. 
 
 3. d or t before s either {a) is dropped, or {b) passes into s. 
 
 _ , _ Infinitive. Perfect. Supine. 
 
 (a) To divide, divid-erg, divis-i (divid-s-i), divi-sum (divid-ssc). 
 
 [b) To yield, go, ced-erg, cess-i (ced-s-I), ces-sum (ced-sum). 
 To send, mitt-erS, mis-l (mit-s-I), mis-sum (mit-sum). 
 
 4. (a.) m or r before s sometimes passes into g. 
 
 Infinitive. Perfect. Supine. 
 
 To press, prem-6re, press-i (prem-s-i), pres-sum (prem-sum). 
 To bear, ger-er6, gess-i (ger-s-i), ges-tum (ger-tum). 
 
 (i.) But if m be retained, it assmnes p before it. 
 
 Infinitive. Perfect. Supine. 
 
 To take, sum-$rg, smn-ps-i (sum-s-I), sump-tum (sum-tam). 
 
 5. If the stem ends in rg, the g is dropped before s. 
 
 Infinitive. Perfect. Supine. 
 
 To scatter, sow, sparg-6r6, spars-i (sparg-s-iX spar-sum. 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 (402.) Vocabulary. 
 
 To bind, surround, cing6re (cinx-, 
 
 cinct-, 401, 2), 
 To draw -up, instruere (instrux-, in- 
 struct-, 401, 2),^ ^ 
 To shut, claudfire (claus-, claus-, 
 
 401, 3, a). 
 To retreat, recedere (re+cedSre, 
 
 cess-, cess-, 401, 3, b). 
 To-approach, accedere (ad+cedere, 
 
 cess-, cess-, 401, 3, b). 
 To gra7tt,, conceA^re (con+c§d6re, 
 
 cess-, cess-, 401, 3, b). 
 To bear, carry on, ggrere (401, 4, a). 
 To spend, consumere (con+sumere, 
 
 sumps-, simipt-, 401, 4, b). 
 
 (403.) Examples, 
 {a) In all directions, 
 (h) Upon an expedition. 
 
 Rampart, vallum, i. 
 
 Triple, triplex, (tripHc) is (107). 
 
 Janus, Janus, I. 
 
 Numa, Numa, se. 
 
 Veteran, veteranus, a, um. 
 
 In three divisions, tripartito (adv.). 
 
 Suddenly, repente (adv.). 
 
 By-night, noctu (adv.). 
 
 There, ib! (adv.). 
 
 Dragon, drSco, (drScon) is (333). 
 
 Arms, arma, orum {used only in plu« 
 
 ral). 
 Neighbouring, finitimus, g, um. 
 State, clvitas, (civitat) is (293). 
 
 In oranes partes. 
 In expedition em. 
 
PERFECT-STEM, THIRD CONJUGATION. IM 
 
 (404.) Translate into English, 
 
 In tua epistola nihil mihi scrip sis ti de tms rebus. — ^Bar- 
 bari vallo et fossa (55, a) hiberna cinxerunt. — Caesar ti'ipK- 
 cem aciem instruxit legiomim veteranarum. — Romani tera- 
 plum Jani bis post NumEB regnum clauserunt. — Imperator 
 exercitum in duas partes divisit. — Caesar tripartito milites 
 eqintesque in expSditionem mi sit. — Principes repente ex 
 oppido cum copiis recesserunt. — Milites noctu usque ad 
 castra accesserunt. — C8esS,r obsidibus (54) libertatem con- 
 cessit. — Gefmani cum Helve tiis bellum gesserunt. — Mag- 
 num et grave onus armorum milites press it. — Explorator ad 
 castra hostium access it, atque ibi magnara partem diei con- 
 Bumpsit. — Cadmus dentes draconis spar sit. * 
 
 (405.) Translate into Latin. 
 
 The ambassador wrote nothing concerning his own affairs. — 
 The scout approached even-up to the walls of the town. — The 
 aeutenant sent-away messengers in all directions. — Caesar sent- 
 away the horsemen in three divisions into the neighbouring 
 states. — Cadmus slew (interfecit) the dragon and sowed 
 liis (ejus) teeth. — Caesar drew up the veteran legions in (abl.) 
 a triple line. — The soldiers spent a great part of the day in the 
 camp. — The enemy approached the town by-night. — The 
 townsmen shut the gates. — The Helvetians retreated by night 
 with all (their) forces. — Caesar sent-away the scouts in three 
 divisions upon an expedition. — The general sent-away the mes- 
 sengers by night in all directions. — The soldiers approached 
 even-up-to the rampart, and there spent a grf at part of the day. 
 
 LESSON LXV. 
 Perfect-stem,— Third Conjugation^ continued, 
 (406.) Class II. — Perfect-stem adds H to the Verb' 
 
 stem, 
 (a) Without change of the verb-stem (see list, 666, II., a) ; 
 
 To nourish, maintain, al-6rS, Sl-ii-I, al-tum. 
 
 To hovvur, cultivate, c6l-Sr6, c6]-u-i, cul-tum. 
 
152 
 
 PERFECT-STEM, THIRD CONJUGATION. 
 
 {b) With change of verb-stem (666, II., b). 
 To place, p6n-«r6, p6s-u-I,* pos-Ttum. 
 
 To beget, gign-6rg, gSn-4-I, gen-i-tum. 
 
 Class III. — Perfect-stem adds v or Iv to the Verb" 
 
 stem. 
 (a) Adds V (and lengthens stem-vowel, if short). (List, 666, 
 III., a.) 
 
 [These generally drop n, r, or s c,t or change the order of the letters. 
 They must be carefully observed, as they occur in the vocabularies.] 
 To despise, spem-ere, sprev-I, spre-tum (spem-tum). 
 
 To be accustomed, suesc-6rS, suev-i, sue-tum. 
 
 (6) Adds iv (list^ 666, III., b). 
 To seek, strive ajter^ pSt-€r6, p6t-iv-I, pSt-I-tum. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 (407.) Vocabulary. 
 
 Spaniard, HispSnus, i. 
 
 Command, jussus, us. 
 
 Against, contra (prep., acc.}^. 
 
 People, populus, I. 
 
 Immediately, statim. 
 
 Avienus, Avienus, T. 
 
 To instigate, stir up, instlgSre 
 
 (5v-, at-). 
 To place in, to put into, impongrg 
 
 (in+p6n6re, 406, b). 
 To remove, removerS (rSmov-, rS- 
 
 mot-, re-f-movere). 
 To arrange, distribute, dispongrS 
 
 (dis+p6n6re, 406, b). 
 To relate, conun6m6rarg (av-, at-, 
 
 con-l-m6morar6). 
 
 Property, ftmilia, jb. 
 
 To cross over, transirS (transHhird, 
 
 iv-, it-). 
 To decree, determine, decemSrS 
 
 (decrev-, decret-, de-(-cem6re). 
 To discourse, diss6r6r6 (disseru-, 
 
 dissert-, dis-+s6rer6). 
 To plunder, diripere (ripu-, rept- 
 
 di+rapere).t 
 A beast of burden, jiimentum, i. 
 Sacred rites, sacra, oram (n., pL). 
 Instead of, pro (prep., abl.). 
 Advice, counsel, consilium, I. 
 On account of, 6b (prep., ace). 
 To despise, spemSre (406, III., a). 
 Winter, hiems, (hi6m) is (293). 
 
 (408.) Examples. 
 (a) By the command of C(B- I J u s s u (abl., 55, a) Csesaris. 
 
 *P6nft = p6sino; p6suI = pos-iv-i. 
 
 t In these verbs the n or sc does not properly belong to the root, but is 
 employed simply to strengthen the present indicative and infinitive ; to 
 know, no-ere, strengthened nosc-ere, &c. 
 
 t Observe that the compounds of rap6r6, facgr8, cSp6r6, with prep- 
 esUions, change a into i m the infinitive; diripSrg, confic6r§, accl- 
 p6r6. 
 
PERFECT-STEM, THIRD CONJUGATION. 153 
 
 (6) To place on shipboard. 
 
 In naves impon^re {put 
 
 into ships). 
 Ad exercitum. 
 Ad fines iEduorum. 
 
 (c) With (near) the ariny. 
 On the borders of the 
 JEduans. 
 
 Ad is often used by Cassar in the sense of near or with (i. e., along 
 with). ^ 
 
 (409.) Translate into English. 
 
 Hispani, jussu Caesaris, eos exercltus quos (165) conti'a pop- 
 lilum Romanum multos jam annos (191, a) aluerant, statim 
 diinlseruni.. — Aviene (voc), quod {because) in Italia milites 
 popiili Romani contra rempublicam instig^sti (349, N.) ; et, 
 pro militibus, tuam familiam in naves imposuisti; 6b eas 
 res, ab exercitu meo te removeo. — CaesS,r legiones quas in 
 Italia, hibernorum causa (135, II., 5), disposuerat, ad se 
 revocavit. — Cur consilium meum sprevisti? — Cajsar, his do 
 causis quas commemoravi, Rheuum transire deer eve rat. — 
 Multi salutem sibi (dat.) in fuga petiverunt {or petierunt, 349, 
 N.). — Caesar totam hiemem (191, a) ipse ad exercitum (408, c) 
 manere decrevit. — Caesar duas legiones ad fines jfEduorum 
 posuit. 
 
 (410.) Translate into Latin. 
 
 The Spaniards had maintained an army (for) many years 
 (191, a). — Orgetorix maintained, at-his-o\vn- expense (sumptti 
 suo), a large number of soldiers. — Caesar placed the camp on- 
 the-borders-of (408, c) the Sequanians. — Socrates discoursed 
 concerning (de) the immortality of the soul.— The pirates 
 plundered many towns. — Caesar distributed three legions in 
 Itaiy, for-the-sake-of winter-quarters. — Thou-hast-despised 
 my counsels ; thou-hast-instigated the soldiers against the re- 
 public ; thou hast put beasts-of-burdep instead of soldiers into 
 the ships : on-account-of these things, I remove thee from my 
 army. — The Romans honoured most-religiously (maxima 
 religion e) the sacred-rites of Jupiter. — Caesar, for (de) 
 these reasons, had determined to cross the Rhine. — Many sol 
 diers sought safety for themselves (by) flight. — The inhabitants 
 sought peace from (a) the Romans. 
 
154 
 
 PERFECT-STEM, THIRD CONJUGATION. 
 
 LESSON LXVI. 
 Perfect-stem. — Third Conjugation, continued, 
 
 (411.) Class IV. — Perfect-stem reduplicates the 
 first Consonant. 
 
 [Some of these present vowel-changes, which must be carefully ob- 
 served, {a) When the first vowel is i or u, the first consonant is 
 reduplicated with that vowel ; {b) in other verbs, with e. (c) The 
 compounds of dare, to give, with i.] 
 
 {a) First vowel i, o, or u. 
 
 Infinitive. Perfect. Supine. 
 
 To learn, disc-er6, di-<Hc-i (s d/ropped), (no supine). 
 
 To demand, posc-ere, p6-posc-i, (no supine). 
 
 . To beat, tund-6rg, tu-tud-i, tu-sum (tud-sum). 
 
 (6) Other verbs reduplicate with e (note 
 
 vowel-changes in 
 
 jtems). 
 
 Infinitive. Perfect 
 
 To fall, ciid-gre, cS-cid-I (i short). 
 
 To drive, repd, pell-€r6, pg-pul-i. 
 
 To fell, kill, c8Bd-ere, c6-cld-i (i long). 
 
 Supine. 
 
 ca-sum (cad-sum), 
 pul-sum. 
 
 C8BS-um. 
 
 (c) Compounds of dfi,r6. 
 
 Infinitive. Perfect. 
 
 To add, ad-der6, ad-did-I, 
 
 Supine. 
 
 ad-di-tum. 
 
 To lose, per-der6, per-did-i, 
 
 per-di-tum. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 
 (412.) Vocabulary. 
 
 The whole, universus, a, um. 
 Duty, service, munus, (mungr) is 
 
 (345). 
 Walls, maenia, ium (pi., neut.). 
 Coming together, conflict, congres- 
 
 Eus, us. 
 Seventy, septua^ta (indecL). 
 To touch, tanger6 (tStTg-, tact-, 411, 
 
 b). 
 To spare, parcere (pgperc-, parcit-, 
 
 pars- ; governs dative). 
 
 (413.) Examples. 
 (1) To demand peace of 
 Csesar. 
 
 To surround, cinggre (401, 3). 
 Nobody, nemo, (nemin) is (m. and 
 
 f., 25, a). 
 Woman, mulier, is (f., 25, a). 
 Child, infant, iufans, (infant) is (c. 
 
 25, a). 
 Thirty, triginta. 
 Eighty, octoginta. 
 Immense, immensus, ft, iim. 
 Sum-of-money, pficiinia, ee. 
 To add, addere (411, c). 
 
 '(a) Caesargra pac6m pos 
 c6r6 ; or (6) pacSm a Cj»- 
 s&r6 posc6r6. 
 
PERFECT-STEM, THIHD CONJUGATION. 155 
 
 Rule of Syntax. — Verbs oi demanding {a) govern two ac- 
 cusatives, one of the person, the other of the thing ; 
 but (h) the person may be put in the ablative with the 
 preposition a or ab. 
 
 (2) About twenty. 
 
 (3) To give one's self wholly 
 up. 
 
 (4) The leader spared wom- 
 en. 
 
 C irciter vi ginti. 
 
 T 6 1 u m se dare ( = to give 
 
 one's seZf whole up). 
 Dux mulieribus p6per- 
 cit. 
 
 Rule of Syntax. — Verbs o^ sparing govern the dative. 
 1^^^ Observe, the perfect of cidere, to fall, is c^oidi ; ofcaedSyS, 
 to fell or kill, cecidi. ^ • ' 
 
 (414.) Translate into English, 
 
 Legati ad Caesarem venerunt, eumquo pacem (413, 1, a) 
 poposcerunt. — Hoc a me (413, 1, h) munus imiversa pro- 
 vincia p6 pose it. — Pueri linguam Latinam didic6rant. — A 
 Greecis Galli urbes maenibus cingere didicerunt. — Nostri, in 
 primo congressu, circiter septuaginta o^ciderunt; in his 
 Quintus Fulginius. — Arbor v6tus cecldit, quam (165) ferro 
 (55, a) nemo cecidit. — Legatus, simiilac provinciam 1 6 tig it, 
 inertias (dat.) totura se dedit. — Postquam Caesar vanit, obsides, 
 arma, servos p6 pose it. — Milites non mulieribus, non infanti- 
 bus, pepercerunt. — Caesar legionibus cohortes circiter tri- 
 ginta addtdit. — Mors nuUi (194, R. 1) hominum {partit. gen.) 
 pdpercit (413, 4). 
 
 (415.) Translate into Latin, 
 
 The iEduans demanded peace of Caesar (413, 1, h) The 
 
 whole province demanded peace of the Romans (413, 1, a). — 
 Of-our-men (nostri, nom., pi.) about eighty fell; among 
 them, Labienus. — Have you (135, II., a) learned the Latin 
 language? — The farmer felled very-many (plurimas) trees 
 in the wood. — As soon as the lieutenant touched the province, 
 he plundered many towns. — The general demanded seventy 
 hostages, and an immense sum of money. — The old trees fell. 
 — This service the general demanded of me. — The leader 
 spared all the temples of the gods ; but the soldiers spared not 
 (non) women nor (non) children. — Caesar added to the foot- 
 soldiers about twenty cohorts. — Caesar added to the foot-soldiers 
 thirty horse-soldiers. 
 
156 
 
 PERFECT-STEM, THIRD CONJUGATION. 
 
 LESSON LXVII. 
 Perfect-stem. — Third Conjugation^ continued, 
 
 (416.) Class V. — Perfect-stem lengthens the Stem^ 
 
 vowel of the Verb, 
 {a) Without vowel-change. 
 
 To read, gather, leg- 
 
 Srg, 
 
 leg-V 
 
 lec-tum. 
 
 To conquer, vine 
 
 -SrS, 
 
 vic-i, 
 
 vic-tuna. 
 
 (6) With vowel-change. 
 
 
 
 
 To drive, ' ag-SrS, 
 
 Sg-i, 
 
 ac-tum. 
 
 To break, frang-SrS, 
 
 freg-i. 
 
 frac-tum. 
 
 (c) io verbs (199). 
 
 
 
 
 Tojly, fug-i«, 
 
 fug-6r6, 
 
 ■ fflg-i, 
 
 ftig-Y-tum. 
 
 To take, cap-id, 
 
 cap-grS, 
 
 cep-i, 
 
 cap-turn. 
 
 To cast, jac-i<J, 
 
 jac-grS, 
 
 jec-i, 
 
 jac-tum. 
 
 To dig, f 6d-id, 
 
 f6d-6re, 
 
 fod-i. 
 
 fos-sum. 
 
 To make, do, f Sc-id, 
 
 f4c-6re, 
 
 fec-I, 
 
 fac-tum. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 
 (417.) Vocabulary, 
 
 Remains, remnant, reliquiae, arum 
 
 (pi.) (57, R.). 
 To collect, colligSr6 (leg-, lect-, con-f- 
 
 iSggre). 
 To receive, take hack, rgciperS (cep-, 
 
 cept-, rS-|-caperg). 
 Headlong, prseceps, (praecipit) is 
 
 (adj., 107). 
 To receive, accTpSre (cep-, cept-, ad-|- 
 
 capgre). 
 To bring-together, to compel, coggrS 
 
 (coeg-, coact-, coii-l-&g6r6). 
 To break through, perfringSrS (freg-, 
 
 frac^, per-}-frang6r6). 
 Dart, javelin, telum, I. 
 
 (418.) Examples, 
 [a) To betake one's self back. 
 He went back to his house. 
 {h) Within the memory of our 
 fathers. 
 
 To hurl, conjicSrS (jec-, ject-, con-|- 
 
 jacere). 
 To undertake, suscip6r6 (cep-, cept-, 
 
 sub+capere). 
 To finish, conf ic6rS (fee-, feet-, con-|- 
 
 facer 6). 
 To begin, incipSre (incep-, incept- 
 
 in-l-cap6r6). 
 Safe, tutus, fi, um, 
 Cappadocia, CappSdOcia, se. 
 A district, pagus, i. 
 ^gypt, iEgyptus, i (f.). 
 Easily, facile (adv.). 
 Trial, judicium, i. 
 Family of slaves, f SmTlia, ». 
 
 Se r^cipSrS. 
 Se domum recepit. 
 Patrum nostrorum mft- 
 m6ria (abl., 55, a). 
 
PERFECT-STEM, THIRD CONJUGATION. 157 
 
 (c) Lucius Cassius, the con- L. Cassius, consul. 
 
 sul. 
 The {prcenomen) first name is rarely written out. L . stands for L u c i u s 
 T. for Titus, &c. Consul is in apposition (225, a) with L. Cassius. 
 
 {d) In mid-summer. IMediaajstate (118, II., c). 
 
 (419.) Translate into English. 
 
 Servus mens orationes et historias et carmina legit. — Le- 
 gatus reliquias exercitus co lie git, itineribusque tutis per'Cap- 
 padociam se in Asiam recepit. — Nostri acriter impetum fe- 
 cerunt atque praecipites hostes ggernlit. — Labienus, cum 
 his copiis quas a CaesS,re acceperat, ad fines iEduorum con- 
 tendit. — Pompeius magnara ex Asia et iEgypto classem coe- 
 gerat. — Miiites facile (adv.) hostium aciem perfregerunt 
 atque in eos impetum fecerunt. — Hie pagus unus, patrum 
 nostrorum memoria, L. Cassium consulem (418, c) interfece- 
 rat, et ejus exercitum sub jugum (323, N.) miserat. — Hostes 
 subito tela in nostros conjecerunt. — Pompeius bellum verS 
 {in the spring, 118, II., c) suscepit, media sestat^ confecit. 
 
 (420.) Translate into Latin. 
 
 The general had collected (c o g e r e) great forces. — Pompey 
 brought- together a great army from Asia and Egypt. — Have 
 you read the books of Cicero ? — The general collected the 
 'remnant of his army, and betook himself into Gaul. — Our 
 (men) drove the enemy headlong, and slew many. — Labienus 
 had received four legions from Caesar.-^Labienus, with the 
 legions which he had received from Caesar, hastened to the 
 confines of the iEduans. — Orgetorix brought-together to the 
 trial all his family-of-slaves from every side. — The enemy 
 brought-together all (their) ships into one place. — The Romans 
 easily broke-through the line-of-battle of the iEduans. — Caesar 
 finished the great war in-mid-summer (418, d) which he had 
 begun in-the-spring (118, II., c). 
 
 o 
 
158 
 
 PERFECT-STEM, THIRD CONJUGATION* 
 
 LESSON LXVIII. 
 Perfect-stem Third Conjugation^ concluded. 
 
 (421.) Class VI. — Perfect-stem = simple Verb-stem, 
 
 {a) Stems ending in u or v (list, 666, VI., a). 
 
 To sharpen, acu-6re, icu-T, acu-tum. 
 
 To roll, volv-Sre, volv-i, volu-tum. 
 
 (6) Consonant-Stems (list, 666, VI., b). 
 
 To turii, vert-erS, vert-i, ver-sam. 
 
 (c) Compounds of can do and fendo {ohs.) belong here; 
 I- g'. 
 
 To burn, incend-6rg, incend-i, incen-sum. 
 
 To defend, ward off, defend-6re, ' defend-i, defen-sum. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 (422.) Vocabulary. 
 
 The back, tergum, I. 
 
 To flow together, conflu6re (conflux-, 
 conflux-, con+flu6re, 401, 2). 
 
 Discipline, disciplina, se. 
 
 Austerity, severity, severitas, (seve- 
 ritat) IS (293). 
 
 To dissolve, dissolvSrS (solv-, s6lut-, 
 dis+solvere). 
 
 To return, revertSre (rSvert-, ro- 
 vers-, re-|-vertere). 
 
 (423.) Examples. 
 (a) The general appointed 
 
 a day for the council. 
 (6) What {number of) long 
 
 ships he had. 
 (c) To divide or distribute 
 
 among. 
 
 To appoint, to station, to determine, 
 
 constituerS (stitu-, stitut-, con-f st4- 
 
 taere). 
 To divide, to distribute, distribuSrS 
 
 (bu-, but-, dis+tribuere). 
 Desirous, covetous, cupidus, &, um 
 
 (governs genitive). 
 To knoro, learn, cognosc6r§ (cognoY-, 
 
 cognit-, con-f noscSrS). 
 To turn, vert^re (421, b). 
 
 Imperator diera concilio 
 
 (dat.) constituit. 
 Quidquid navium(180)lon- 
 
 garum habebat. 
 Distribuere (with ace. of 
 
 things and dat. oi person). 
 
 (424.) Translate into English. 
 
 Hostes terga verterunt. — Divitise (57, R.) quae ad Romam 
 confluxerunt, morum disciplinam seveiitatemque dissol- 
 verunt — Caesar diem cum legatis constituit. — Dies, quam 
 CfBsar constitnerat cum leg§tis, venit, et l^gati ad eum 
 
PERFECT-STEM, FOURTH CONJUGATION. 159 
 
 (150) rSverterunt.— Milites sese (145, c) fortiter (215, 2) 
 defend erunt. — Hostes copias suets in tres partes distribu- 
 erant. — Caesar, quidqtiid navium longarum habebat, legatis 
 praefectisquiB (423, c) distribuit. — Procellae fluctus vastos ad 
 littora volverant. — Csesar exercitum flumen (113, II., a) 
 transducere constituit.— Caesar Dumnorigem ^duum se- 
 cum (125, II., b) ducere constituit, quod (conj.) eum cupi- 
 dura imperii (synt., 698, b, 1) cognoverat. — ^dui ex itin^re 
 domum (113, III., R.) reverterunt. 
 
 (425.) Translate into Latin. 
 
 The soldiers defended the city very bravely (376). — The 
 general stationed the foot-soldiers near (ad, 408, c) the wall of 
 the town. — On-the-next-day (118, II., c) Caesar stationed all 
 the horse-soldiers in-front-of (p r o) the camp. — ^The chiefs of 
 the states returned to Caesar.— The day which Ceesar had ap- 
 pointed for the council came, and the chiefs of the states re- 
 turned to him. — Our (men) turned their backs. — The riches 
 of the Romans had dissolved (their) discipline and austerity of 
 manners. — What money (423, b) he had he distributed among 
 (423, c) the lieutenants and. soldiers. — The ^Eduans divided 
 their forces into two parts — The tempests rolled vast waves to 
 the stars. — The general determined to take (ducere) the 
 lieutenant with him. — The seas were rolling great waves to 
 the shores. 
 
 LESSON LXIX. 
 Perfect-stem. — Fourth Conjugation. 
 (426.) The perfect-stem in \\\q fourth conjugation 
 IS formed mfive ways. 
 
 I. By adding iv to verb-stem ; a u d -ire, a u d - i v -. 
 
 II. " u " aper-irS, aper-fl-. 
 
 III. " s " sep-ire, sep-s-. 
 
 IV. lengthening stem-vowel ; v 6 n -ir6, v g n -. 
 
 V. taking simple verb-stem ; c o m p $ r -irS, c o m p 6 r - 
 
160 
 
 PERFECT-STEM, FOURTH CONJUGATION. 
 
 (427.) On this table, observe that Class 
 
 I. contains most of the verbs of the fourth conjugatioc. 
 
 [Numerous examples have already occurred. -Any peculiar supines 
 
 are given in the vocabularies.] 
 II. contains jfottr simple verbs (see list, 667, II.). 
 
 Infinitive. Perfect SupinA 
 
 To open, uncover, aper-ire, apSr-u-J, aper-tum. 
 
 To leap, sal-Ire, sSl-u-I, sal-tum. 
 
 III. contains nine simple verbs (see list, 667, III.). 
 To bind, 
 To think, sent-Ire 
 
 IV. contains but one verb. ■ 
 
 InfinitiTe. Perfect 
 
 To come, , ven-ire, ven-i, 
 
 V. contains two verbs. 
 
 Infinitive. Perfect 
 
 To ascertain, find, comper-ir6, comper-i. 
 To discover, rep6r-ire, reper-i, 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 vinc-ire, 
 
 Perfect Supine. 
 
 vinx-i (vinc-s-i), vinc-tum. 
 
 sens-i (sent-s-i), 
 
 sen-sum 
 (sent-sum). 
 
 supine. 
 
 ven-tum. 
 
 Supine. 
 
 comper-tum. 
 r6per-tum. 
 
 (428.) Vocabulary, 
 
 To leap down, desflire (desflu- and 
 
 desili-, desult-, de-|-salire). 
 To come near, to approach, apprS- 
 
 pinqu&re (jftd + propinquare, av-, 
 
 at-), vfith dat. 
 To agree, cons entire (con+s entire, 
 
 427, TIL). 
 To disagree, dissentire (dis+sentire, 
 
 427, III.). 
 To come to, reach, arrive -at, perve- 
 
 nire (p6r+v6nire, 427, IV.). 
 
 Example. 
 
 {a) In a battle of cavalry, ifiquestri prselio. 
 
 Rule of Syntax. — The ablative is used to express the mau' 
 ner of an action, especially with an adjective. 
 
 . (423.) Translate into English. 
 
 Milites ex navibus desili erunt et hostibus (391. 2) appro- 
 
 pinquarunt (349, N.). — Oppidani portas apgruerunt, et se, 
 
 atque oppidum CaBs&ri dedenint. — Hostes inter se dissensg- 
 
 runt. — Omnes cives una mente (abl., 428, a) consensS- 
 
 J'o come together, assemble, conve- 
 nire (c6n+venire, 427, IV.). 
 
 To find, invSnire O^n-f-venlre, 427, 
 IV.). 
 
 Thither, to that place, eo {adv.). 
 
 To open, aperire (427, II.). 
 
 When, quum. 
 
 Youth, juventus, (jiiventut) is (f.). 
 
 To lay waste, populari, dep. (popu- 
 lat-). 
 
 After that, postquam {adv.). 
 
PERFECT-STEM, FOURTH CONJUGATION. 161 
 
 runt. — Helvgtii jam per angustias copias suas transdux^rant, 
 et in iEduorum fines pervenerant, eorumque agros popiila- 
 bantui". — Caesar cum Labieno Numantiam (713) pervenit, 
 ibique consules invenit. — Quum milites eo convene- 
 runt, naves unum in locum coegerunt. — Eo postquam Cse- 
 8S,r pervenit, obsides et arma poposcit. 
 
 (430.) Translate into Latin. 
 
 After-that the townsmen S9m the standards, they opened the 
 gates, and gave themselves (up) to Caesar. — The Germans, in the 
 cavalry battle (428, a), leaped-down from (their) horses. — The 
 general led the army through the straits, and on the seventh 
 day arrived at the boundaries of the Germans. — The towns- 
 men leaped-down from the wall. — All the soldiers agreed 
 (with) one mind and voice (vox). — When Caesar amved-at the 
 town, the townsmen opened the gates. — ^When the general 
 reached Numantia, he called together the citizens. — When the 
 horsemen reached the town, the townsmen opened the gates. 
 — The lieutenant led-back the soldiers to the town, and there 
 found the general. 
 
 02 
 
§8. 
 
 FORMS OF TENSES FOR COMPLETED AC- 
 TION, PASSIVE. , 
 
 LESSON LXX. 
 
 Tenses of Verbs for Completed Action. — Indicative 
 Passive. 
 
 (43L) The tenses for completed action, passive 
 (perfect, pluperfect, future perfect), are compounded 
 of the perfect participle passive and of the tenses of 
 the verb esse, to be: thus, amatiis sum, I have been 
 loved; amatus es, thou hast been loved, &c. 
 
 (432.) (a) The perfect participle of any verb is the form of 
 which the supine is the accusative, and is inflected (like an ad- 
 jective of three terminations) with the endings us, a, iim; 
 thus : 
 
 ^ Supines. 
 
 Amat-iim, 
 
 Perf. Part. 
 
 amat-us, a, um, 
 
 loved. 
 
 M6nit-um, 
 
 monit-iis, a, iim, 
 
 advised. 
 
 Rect-um. 
 
 rect-iis, a, um, 
 
 ruled. 
 
 Audit-iim, 
 
 audit- lis, a, iim. 
 
 heard. 
 
 (b) The perfect participle, then, of any verb, is formed by 
 adding the inflection-endings iis, &, 6m to the supine-stem. 
 
Perfect forms, passive. 
 
 163 
 
 (433.) 
 
 PARADIGM. 
 
 
 PERFECT PASSIVE. | 
 
 C 
 
 amatiis, a, urn, j 
 
 Singular. 
 
 sum, / have heen^ loved. 
 6s, thou hast been loved. 
 est, he, she, it, has been loved. | 
 
 amati, OB, a, 5 
 
 Plural. 
 
 sumus, we have been loved. 
 estis, ye or you have been loved. 
 smit, they have been loved. 
 
 PLUPEIIFECT. > (1 
 
 Smatus, a, urn, 5 
 
 Singular. 
 
 6ram, I had been loved. 
 eras, thou hadst been loved. 
 grat, he, she, it, had been loved. 
 
 amati, oe, a, 5 
 
 Plural. 
 
 eramus, we had been loved. 
 Gratis, ye or you had been loved. 
 grant, they had been loved. 
 
 i FUTURE PERFECT. j| 
 
 amatus, a, urn, < 
 
 Singular. 
 
 ero, / shall have been loved. 
 6rTs, tho7i wilt have been loved. 
 erit, he, she, it, will have been loved. 
 
 amati, se, a, < 
 
 Plural. ^ 
 
 erimiis, we shall have been loved. 
 eritis, you will have been loved. 
 grunt, they will have been loved. 
 
 (434.) Vocabulary. 
 
 To rout, to d^eat, pellgre (p6pul-, 
 
 puis-, 411, b). 
 To divulge, enuntiare (e+nuntiare, 
 
 av-, at-). 
 Sure, certain, certus, a, um. 
 To drive back, rgpellgre (rgpul-, 
 
 repuls-, rg-|-pellere). 
 Private information, indicium, i. 
 
 (435.) Examples, 
 {a) To inform any one. 
 
 (6) Ccesar was informed* 
 
 (c) All Gaul is divided into 
 three parts. 
 
 Beginning, Tnitium, i. 
 
 Casticus, Casticus, i. 
 
 Conference, colloquium, T. 
 
 To hold, obtinerg (obtinu-, obtent-, 
 
 ob+tenere). 
 Departure, discessiis, us. 
 Nobility, nobilrtas, (nobffitat) ts (f., 
 
 293). 
 
 Aliqugm certi6r6m fa- 
 
 c 6 r e ( = to make any one 
 
 more certain). 
 Caesar certior factus 
 
 est ( = Ceesar was made 
 
 more certain). 
 Gallia estomnisdivlsa 
 
 in partes tr6s. 
 
164 PERFECT FORMS, PASSIVE. 
 
 The perfect passive participle i& sometimes used with est as an ad- 
 jective, and is then to be rendered as a present tense; e. g., in [c), est 
 d i V i s a = is divided. 
 
 (436.) Translate into English. 
 
 Miles vulueratns est. — Bella gesta erant. — Exercitus Cassii 
 ab Helvgtiis pulsus erat, et sub jugum missus ei^at. — Ea 
 res Helvetiis (54) per indicium enuntiata est. — Helvetii de 
 Caesaris adventu certiores facti sunt. — tjhi de Csesaris ad- 
 ventu Helvetii certiores facti sunt, legates ad eum miserunt. 
 — Barbari telis (93, II., h, R.) et munitione repulsi sunt. — 
 initium fugse a Dumnorige et ejus equitibus factum est. — 
 Legati a Divitiaco, iEduo (225, a) ad Caesarem mis si erant. 
 — Pater Castici'regnum in Sequanis multos annos (191, Rule) 
 obtinuerat eta s^natu populi Romani amicus (80, a) appella- 
 tus erat. — Dies coUoquio (54) constitutus est, ex eo die 
 quintus. 
 
 (437.) Translate into Latin. 
 
 The centurions of the first ranks were wounded on the same 
 day (118, II., c).— Cassar was informed (435, a) of (de) the 
 approach of the enemy.— The general had been informed of 
 the departure (d i s c e s s u s) of the Germans. — The beginning 
 of the flight had been made by the soldiers of the tenth legion. 
 — The tenth legion had been defeated by the Germans, and had 
 been sent under the yoke. — The conspiracy of the nobility was 
 divulged to the Helvetians through private-information. — The 
 war had been camed-on (for) many years (191, Rule). — The 
 enemy were driven-back by the darts of the soldiers. — Ambas- 
 sadors were sent by Cassius the consul (225, a) to the chiefs. 
 — The ^duans were called friends (80, a) by the senate of the 
 Roman people. — The townsmen were wounded by the darts 
 of the soldiers. — The horsemen of the enemy were driven-back 
 by the darts of the soldiers. — ^A day had been appointed for the 
 conference. 
 
§9. 
 
 PARTICIPLES. (LXXL— LXXV.) ' 
 
 (438.) The Participle presents the idea of the verb 
 under the form of an adjective : {a) the rising sun ; 
 (6) I saw the boy writing a letter. Sometimes, as 
 in (a), its use is wholly adjective ; again, as in (6), it 
 governs the case of its verb. There are two active 
 participles in Latin, the participle of the present and 
 the participle of i\i& future ; two passive, the pe?'fect 
 and the verbal in dus. 
 
 LESSON LXXL 
 
 Present Participle Active. 
 
 (439.) {a) The endings of the present participle active for 
 
 the four conjugations are, 
 
 1. 2. 3. 4. 
 
 -aijs, -ens, ens, -iens. 
 
 (b) By adding these endings to the stems respectively of the 
 verbs am-are, mon-ere, reg-6re, aud-ire, we obtain the 
 present participle active : 
 
 Lovingj advising, ruling, hearing. 
 
 Am-ans, mon-ens, rSg-ens, aud-iens. 
 (440.) The present participle is declined like an adjective of 
 the third class (108). 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 N. V. Amans. N. V. Amantes, amantia. 
 
 Gen. Amantis. Gen. Araantiiim. 
 
 Dat. Amanti, &c. Dat. Amantibus, &c. 
 
 Rem. The abl. sing, ending is i when the part, is used strictly as aa 
 adj. ; e. g., in florenti TOB&, in a hloominf( rose. 
 
166 
 
 PRESENT PARTICIPLE ACTIVE. 
 
 (a) Observe cai-efully that the Latin present paiticiple ac- 
 tive expresses incomplete or continued action ; the language has 
 no active participle to express complete action. We cannot 
 translate the English having loved by any Latin active parti- 
 ciple. 
 
 (&) But deponent verbs (206) have both participles, the pres- 
 ent and the perfect ; exJwrting, h o r t - a u s ; having exhorted^ 
 hort-atiis. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 (44 L) Vocabulary, 
 
 It-, 
 
 To rise, 6rM {dep., ort-). 
 To desire, cup6r6 (id-, iv- 
 in., h). 
 
 Labour, toil, labor, (labor) is (m., 
 
 319). 
 Watching, watchfulness, vigllantiS, 
 
 86. 
 
 Especially, proesertim (adv.). 
 
 To depart, discedSrS (dis+cedere, 
 
 401, 3, b). 
 To weep, flerg (flev-, flet-, 395, II.). 
 To look upon or at, intueri (dep.). 
 All, the whole, cunctus, a, um. 
 To worship, adore, adorare. 
 Eye, oculus, i. 
 
 A Persian, PersS, se. 
 
 To doubt, dubitare (av-, at-). 
 
 To set out, pr6f icisci {dep., profect-). 
 
 To sit, B&dere (sed-, sess-, 394, Y.). , 
 
 Firmament, heaven, caelum, i. 
 
 To shine, micare (389, E^*). 
 
 The sun, sol, (sol) is (m., 319). 
 
 F^dl, plenus, 8, tim (with gen.). 
 
 To be wanting, de-ess6 (vi^ith dat.). 
 
 Star, Stella, se. 
 
 To set {e. g., as the heavenly bod- 
 ies), occid6re (occid-, occas-, ob+ 
 cad6rS). 
 
 To throw before, projTcerg (jeo, 
 ject-, pro+jacere). 
 
 (442.) (<z) RecoUect that, to form pres. part, act., you add to the stem 
 ans in 1st conj. ; e. g., am-ans : ens in 2d and 3d conjs. ; e. g., 
 mon-ens, dlc-ens : i e n s in 4th conj. ; e. g., aud-iens. Also, add 
 iens in the id verbs (199) of 3d conj.; e. g., ciip-io, cup-iens; 
 fic-io, fac-iens. 
 (jb) In deponent verbs, the same rules apply: hort-§,ri, hort-ans: 
 fir-iri, 6r-iens; intu-eri, intu-ens, &c. The perf act. part 
 in deponents adds us, a, ura to the supine-stem: hort-ari, 
 hortat-us, &c. 
 (c) The participle is used to abridge discourse. 
 
 (1) He heard me when Ij He heard me saying that, 
 said that= ( Me id die en tern audivit. 
 
 (2) God, who governs all ( God, governing all thinga. 
 things= ( Deus, omnia gubernans. 
 
 ^. _ , . , , , . ( (The man) desiring. 
 
 (3) To him that destres= < V, - - /- 
 
 ( Cupienti. 
 
PEESENT PARTICIPLE ACTIVE. 167 
 
 / Tx TT ^1, 1 • ir . ( -^^^ threw himself before Ccesar, at 
 
 (d) He threw himself at l , . . "^ -^ 
 
 Caesar's feet, ) o- n -vj -j- ^ 
 
 \ Se Gossan Sd pedes projccit. 
 
 (e) Can enim, vero, or autem stand first in a clause or sen- 
 tence ? (No.) 
 
 (443.) Translate into English. 
 
 Me id d i c e n t e m aiidi\istine ? — Persae solem 6rien- 
 tem (442, c) adorant. — Labienus, suos {his men) hortatus, 
 cupientibus signum dat. — Non enim labor aut vigiJantia, 
 cupienti praesertim aliquid (178, 5), Cassio deerat (267, b). 
 •^Caesar ab hibemis in Italiam discedens, legates convocat. 
 — Mulieres flentes sese Caesai-i (442, d) ad pedes projece- 
 nint. — Nemo, cunctam i n t u e n s terram, de divina providen- 
 tia diibltabit. — Caesar, in Italiam pro f i c i s € e n s, legates 
 omnes ad se revocavit. — Divitiacus, flens, a Caesare haec 
 {these things) petebat.^^ — Cicero Cat5nera vidit in horto s6- 
 dentem. — Quanta, (184, R. 1) est s^pientia Dei, omm& 
 gubernantis ? 
 
 (444.) Translate into Latin. 
 
 [The words which illustrate the lesson are in Italic] 
 The firmament is full of shining (438, a) stars. — No one, 
 when he looks at ( = looking, 442, c, 1) the firmament and stars, 
 will doubt respecting (d e) the wisdom of God. — Did they hear 
 me (135, II., a) when I said ( = saying) that (id) ? — The bar- 
 bai'ians were-worshipping the setting sun. — Labienus, having 
 exhorted (440, h) his men, made an attack upon the enemy 
 (in hostes). — Caesar willingly gave the signal to the soldiers 
 when they desired it { = desiring). — To him that desires { = de- 
 siring) anything, no labour will-be-wanting (267, h). — Caesar, 
 departing from winter-quarters, gives rewards to the soldiers. 
 — The eye, not seeing itself (se, ace.), sees other-things 
 (alia). — The ^duans, weeping, threw themselves at the feet 
 of Caesar (442, d). — I saw my brother sitting in the garden 
 yesterday. — How-great is the power of God, who governs 
 ( = governing) the world ? 
 
168 PARTICIPLE FUTURE ACTIVE. 
 
 LESSON LXXII. 
 
 Participle Future Active. 
 
 (445.) The ending of the future participle active is 
 
 u i u s, which, added to the supine-stem, forms the 
 
 pai'-iple; e.g., 
 
 Ahonit ^ love, or one who will love, S,mat-urus. 
 
 Abou i ^dvise, or one who will advise, monit-uriis. 
 
 (446.) PERIPHRASTIC CONJUGATION 
 
 The different tenses of e s s e (to &e), joined with the participle 
 future active, form what is called the periphrastic conjugation^ 
 
 C amaturiis sum, I will love, am about to love, intend to love. 
 Pres. \ amaturus 6s, thou, » &c., &c. 
 
 ( So through all the persons. 
 
 C amaturus Sram, / was about to love, intended to love, &c 
 Past. \ ^Unatiirus 6ras, thou, &,c., &c 
 
 (_ So through all the persons. 
 
 C amaturus 6ro, I shall be about to love, shall be on the point aflov- 
 
 Fut. \ *^^' ^^' 
 
 j Smaturus eris, thou, &c., &C. 
 
 t So through all the persons. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 (447.) Vocabulary. 
 
 To call upon, inv6care (in+vocare, 
 
 av-, at-). 
 To collect into a jhoch, congregare 
 
 (av-, at-). 
 Foreign, alienus, a, um. 
 To 'procure, compSrare (av-, at-, con 
 
 4-parare). 
 To last, durare (durav, durat).* 
 To implore, implorare (in+plorare, 
 
 av-, at-). 
 
 Alone, solus, ft, iim (194, 1). 
 
 To cross over, trajTcere (traj§c-, trft- 
 ject-, trans+jacere).t 
 
 Ammon, a surname of Jupiter, Ham< 
 mon, IS. 
 
 To behold, spectare (av-, at). 
 
 To proceed, pergSre (perrex-, per- 
 rect-). 
 
 To consult, consiilSre (consulu-, con- 
 sult-). 
 
 (448.) Example. 
 
 The Athenians sent amhas- j Athenienses legates miserunt, 
 sadors to consult the oracle. \ oraculum consulturos. 
 
 * Durare, transitive, = to harden; intrans., = to become hard, i. e., to 
 last. 
 t Transjtcere, transit, = to convey over ; intrans., = to crost over. 
 
PARTICIPLE FUTURE ACTIVE. 169 
 
 Rule of Syntax. — The future active participle is used after 
 a verb of motion to express the design of that motion. 
 
 (449.) Translate into English, 
 
 1. Aves, in alienas terras migraturaB, congregantur.— 
 Caesar, in Galliam profecturus, centiiriones convocat. — 
 Germani, bellum gesturi, Deos invocaverunt. — Sapiens 
 bona ( neu(, pi.) comparat semper d ti r a t u r S,. 
 
 2. Periphrastic Conjugation — Cgesar de quaita vigilia castra 
 moturus es t. — S cripturuf? sum.— Dumnorix inlpgrium 
 suse civitatis o b t e n t u r u s e. r a t. — ImpSrator, cum sola 
 ddcima legione pr6fecturus erat. — iEdui auxilium a 
 populo Romano imploraturi s u n t. — Germani bellum 
 gesturierant. 
 
 3. Future Participle ttsedto express a purpose (448). — Scipio 
 in Africam trajecit, Carthaginem d e 1 e t u r u s. — Ingens h6m- 
 inura multitudo in urbem congregatur, ludos spectatur ft, — 
 Alexander in Asiam contendit, regnum Persarum occiipa- 
 turus. — Alexander ad Jovem Hammonem pergit, consul- 
 t u r u s de origine sua. 
 
 (450.) Translate into Latin. 
 
 1. The soldiers, when-cmout-to-set-out for (in) Spain, called- 
 upon the gods. — Many (men) have procured possessions 
 (bona) which-will-not-last ( = not about- to-last). — The gen- 
 eral, when-about-to-cross the river, sends-away the horse-sol- 
 diers. — Caesar, intending-to-send a messenger, calls together 
 the centurions. 
 
 3. Periphrastic Conjugation. — Dumnorix vras ahout-to-seiz€- 
 wpon the royal-power. — The genev^ \s ahout-to-set-out iram the 
 camp with five legions.. — The JEduans are ahout-to-carry-on a 
 fierce war. — The hostages were intending-to-implore aid from 
 the general. 
 
 3. Future Participle to express a purpose. — The ^duans 
 sent ambassadors to-implore help from Caesar. — The enemy 
 crossed the river in-order-to-hesiege the town. — The men flock 
 (congregor) from-every-side to the town, to-behold the 
 games. 
 
 P 
 
170 
 
 PERFECT PARTICIPLE PASSIVE. 
 
 LESSON LXXIII. 
 
 Perfect Participle Passive. 
 (451.) («) The perfect passive pai-ticiple is formed (as stated 
 432, h) by adding the adjective-endings us, a, um to the su- 
 pine-stem ; e. g., 
 
 Inf. 
 
 Smarg, 
 
 Supine-stem. 
 
 aoaat-, 
 
 Perf. Part. 
 
 &m&t-us, &, nm, 
 
 loved, or having been loved. 
 C conquered, or having been 
 vinc6r6, vict-, • , vict-us, «, um, J conquered. 
 
 {h) It is declined throughout like an adjective of the first 
 class (76), and must agree with the substantive in gender, num- 
 ber^ und case ; e. g., puer laudatus, puella 1 a u d a t S,. 
 
 (c) The deponent verbs use the perfect participle form ac- 
 tively ; e. g., h o r t a t u s, having exhorted. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 (452.) Vocabulary/. 
 
 Sudden, rfipentTnus, a, um. 
 To alarm, perturbare (5v-, at-). 
 To seize, snatch up, arriperg (arrip- 
 
 io, arripu-, arrept-, ad-|-rap6r6). 
 Auxiliaries, auxilii, orum.* 
 To put-to-Jlight, discomfit, f iigare. 
 To drive-on or together, compellere 
 
 (compul-, compuls-, con+pellere). 
 To induce, adducere (dux-, duct-, 
 
 ad+duc6r6). 
 Influence, auctoritas, (auctoritat) is. 
 To prevail upon, permSverS (mov-, 
 
 mot-, per-|-m6ver6, i. e., to move 
 
 thoroughly/). 
 
 (453.) Examples. 
 
 I A wagon, carrtis, I. 
 To buy up, co6m6r6 (em-, empt-, 
 
 con-f6m6re). 
 Aristides, Aristldes (Aristid) is. 
 Pharsalus, Pharsalus, i (f., 25> a). 
 To depart-out-of, excgderS (excess-, 
 
 excess-, ex-fced6re). 
 Rlietoric, rhetoric^, se. 
 To expel, expell6re (expul-, ex- 
 
 puls-). 
 To stimulate, induoSrS (dux-, duo^). 
 Strong-desire, cupiditas, (tSt) Is 
 
 (293). 
 
 (a) At Corinth, CorinthT. 
 
 At Rome. R o m se. 
 
 At Carthage. , CarthaglnS. 
 
 At Athens. Athenis. 
 
 Rule of Syntax. — The place where is put in the ablative 
 
 Auxiliumin sing. = aid, assistance : in plvr. = auxiliary troops. 
 
PERFECT PARTICIPLE PASSIVE. 
 
 171 
 
 if the name be of the third declension or plural number; 
 otherwise in the genitive. 
 
 (b) From Rome. 
 Froyn Carthage. 
 
 Roma. 
 CarthaginS. 
 Rule of Syntax. — The plac6 whence is put in the ablative* 
 tc) To Rome. R6nii§,m. 
 
 To Athens. Athenas. 
 
 Rule of Syntax. —The place whither is put in the accusa- 
 tive if rt be a town or small island. 
 Rem. With the names of countries or large islands, the prep, in or 
 a d is employ ed : to Italz^, in lta.\ia,Th; to Egi/pt, a.dMgy]?txiia. 
 
 {d) The soldiers, having been 
 defeated, took to flight. 
 (Lat. The soldiers, defeat- 
 ed, threw themselves into 
 flight.) 
 
 {e) The chief, when he was 
 expelled from his country, 
 fled to Rome. 
 
 (/) As large a number as 
 possible. 
 
 (g) A sudden occurrence. 
 
 Milites, pulsi, in fugam se 
 conjecerunt. 
 
 Princeps, patria expulsiis, 
 Romam fugit. 
 
 Quam maximus niimfir- 
 
 US. 
 
 RSpentina res. 
 
 (454.) Translate into English. 
 
 Nostri {our men), repentina re (55, a) perturb ati, armi 
 arripiunt. — Auxilia perturbat^, in fugam se conjecerunt. — 
 Milites hostes f ii g at o s in flumen compulerunt. — Helv6tii, his 
 rebus adducti, legates ad Caesarem de deditione mittunt. — 
 Galli, his rebus adducti, et auctoritatS Orgetorigis per- 
 moti, jumentorum et carrorum quam maximum numfirum 
 coemerunt. — Principes, adventu Romanorum permoti, lega- 
 tes ad Caesarem de deditione mittunt. — Aristides, patria ex- 
 pulsus, LacSdaemonem fugit. — Dionysius, Sj/^ractisis e x p u 1- 
 8 u s, Corinthi pueros docebat.— Principes, oppido e x p u 1 s I, 
 Romam (453, c) venerunt. — Legatus, repentina re pertur- 
 b a t u s, centiiriones convocat. 
 
 (455.) Translate into Latin. 
 
 The Helvetians, prevailed upon by the influence of Caesar, 
 led (their) army across the Rhine. — The chiefs, induced by 
 
172 ABLATIVE ABSOLUTE. 
 
 these coD'Siderations (= things), give hostages and an immense 
 sum-of-money to the lieutenant. — Poinpey, ivhen he had hec-n 
 defeated {■= defeated, 453, d) at Pharsalus, fled to Alexandria 
 — Jugurtha, when he was expelled from Africa, canie to liome 
 — The soldiers, alarmed by the sudden occurrence (453, g) 
 take to flight (453, d). — For (enira) Pompey, although-he-had- 
 been-defeated (= defeated) (in) no (nulio) battle, departed-out- 
 of Italy. — Our (men) drove on tha alarmed and discomfited 
 enemy into the River Rhine. — The Helvetians, induced by 
 these considerations (= things), bought-up as large a number as 
 possible (453,/) of horses and beasts-of-burden. — The orator, 
 havirig-been-expelledfrom Athens, taught rhetoric at Carthage 
 (453, a, R.). — The general, induced by these considerations, 
 gave great rewards to the soldiers. — Orgetorix, stimulated by a 
 strong-desire of royal-power, made a conspiracy of the nobility. 
 
 LESSON LXXIV. 
 Participles. — Ablative Absolute. 
 
 [The ablative absolute is a very important part of Latin construction, 
 and should be thoroughly learned.] 
 
 (456.) The participle is used in the ablative with a 
 noun, when it is independent of the subject and object 
 of the sentence. 
 
 (a) When Tarquin was 
 reigning, Pythagoras 
 came into Italy. 
 
 Pythagoras, Tarquinio 
 regnant e, in Itaiiara ve- 
 nit. 
 
 Here Tarquin is independent of Pythagoras, the subject of the sen- 
 tence. 
 
 (457.) The want of a perfect active participle in 
 Latin is frequently supplied by the ablative absolute 
 with a passive participle. 
 
 (b) Labienus, having <<2- Labienus, mont6 occiipa- 
 ken possession of the \ to, nostros expectabat. 
 mountain, was waiting\ 
 for our men. I 
 
ABLATIVE ABSOLUTE. 173 
 
 Here it v/ould be impossible to say Labienus, occupatas inon- 
 tem, as occupdtus is passive, not active. 
 
 (458.) A noun may be put in the ablative absolute 
 with another noun without a participle. 
 
 (a) In the preetorship of Cce- 
 sar. 
 
 (J) In the consulship of Mar- 
 cus Messala and Marcus 
 Piso. 
 
 Caesare pr8et5r6 (= Caesar 
 
 being praetor). 
 M. Messala et M. Pisonfi 
 
 Gonsiilibus (=Messalaand 
 
 Piso heing consuls). 
 
 [This construction is used mostly to designate the time of an event.] 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 (459.) Vocabulary i 
 
 To avail, vSlerS (valii-). 
 
 Tiberius, Tiberius (i). 
 
 To die, moriri and morl (mortu), dep. 
 
 A pleading, dictio, (diction) is (333). 
 
 Catiline, Catillna, se. 
 
 Christ, Christus, i. 
 
 To Jinish, perflcere (per+facere, 
 perf ec-, perfect-) ; also, conf ic6re 
 (fee-, feet-). 
 
 To reign, regnare (ftv-, at-). 
 
 Night, nox, (noct) is (294). 
 
 Territories, fines (pi. of finis, 300). 
 
 (460.) Translate into English, 
 
 Nihil praecepta v^lent, nisi adjuvante natura (456, a). — 
 Deo juvante, facilis est labor. — Tiberio regnante, Chris- 
 tus mortuus est. — Concilio dim is so, principes ad Caesarem 
 reverterunt. — Die constituta causae dictionis, Orgetorix ad 
 judicium omnem suam familiam, ad hominum millia decern, 
 undique coegit. — Caesar, opere perfecto, praesidia disposuit. 
 —Caesar, host! bus pulsis (457, &) in fines jEduorum perve- 
 nit. — Caesar, duo bus be 11 is confectis, in hiberna exercl- 
 tura duxit. — B e 1 1 6 c o n f e c 1 6, princip6s civltatum ad Caesji- 
 rem, gratulatum (379), conven6runt. — CMlinft, CiceronS 
 consuls (458), conjurationem fecit. — Natura ducS, nun- 
 quam enrabimus. — Orgetorix, Marco Messala et Marc 5 
 PisonS consullbus, conjurationem n5bilitatis fecit. 
 
 (461.) Translate into Latin. 
 
 Our precepts will avail, ivhen nature assists {^= nature assist- 
 ing). — V/hen the sun rises (= the sun rising), the night flees. 
 — When the couficil was dismissed (=the council being dis- 
 missed), the chiefs began to beseech Caesar. — When the coun- 
 cil was dismissed, Caesar called the lieutenants to himself. — 
 P 2 
 
174 ABLATIVE ABSOLUTE. 
 
 Caesar, when the work was finished {=^the work being finished)^ 
 fortified the towers. — Csssar, having defeated Pompey {r=Pom- 
 pey being defeated), returned to Rome. — Caesar, having finish- 
 ed the war, led-back his army into the territories of the ^Edu- 
 ans.^ — In the consulship q/" Cicero, Catiline was expelled from 
 Rome. — When God assists (= God assisting), it is not difficult 
 to labour. — With God for our guide (= God leader), we shall 
 never err. 
 
 LESSON LXXV. 
 
 Ablative Absolute^ continued, 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 (462.) Vocabulary, 
 
 Phalanx, phalanx, (phalang) Is (233^. 
 'To hinder, prohibere (Hbu-, hiblt-. 
 
 pro+habere). 
 Cnasus Pompey, CncBus Pompeius. 
 Of one's own accord, ultro (adv.). 
 To change, commutare (av-, &t-) 
 To be born, nasci (natus), dep. 
 Senate-house, curia, s3. 
 Augustus, Augustus, L 
 
 To abstain from, abstmere (absti- 
 
 nu-, abstent-, abs+tener6), with 
 
 abl. 
 A plan, purpose, consflium, i (not 
 
 concilium). 
 To harass, lacessSre (iv-, it-, 406, 
 
 III., b). 
 From higher ground, e loco supe- 
 
 riorfi. 
 A dart, pilum, i. 
 
 (463.) Translate into English. 
 
 L^bienus, monte occiipato, nostros expectabat, praBlioque 
 abstinebat. — Barbari, consilio coramutato, nostros lacessere 
 coeperunt. — Milltes, e loco siiperiore pilis missis, facile hos- 
 tium phalangem p^rfregerunt (416, b). — Cognito Caesaris ad- 
 ventu, Ariovistus legatos ad eum mittit. — Cnceo Pompeio 
 et Marco Crasso consiilibus, German! flumen Rhenum 
 transiverunt.— Nullo hoste prohibente, Crassus legionem 
 in Helve ties perduxit, ibique hiemavit. — His rebus cognitis, 
 imperator ipse ad exercitum contendit. — Hac audita pugn a, 
 magna pars Aquitaniae obsides ultro misit. — Belgae, omnibus 
 vicis oppidisque incensis, ad castrS Caes^ri.'^ couiond^- 
 runt. — A XI gusto regnant e, Christus natus est. 
 
ABLATIVE ABSOLUTE. 176 
 
 (464.) Translate into Latin. 
 
 The barbarians, having clmnged their plan ( = plan being 
 changed), made an attack upon our men. — The soldiers, hav- 
 ing-hroTcen-through the phalanx, began to harass the enemy. — 
 The Belgians, having heard of this battle, sent ambassadors to 
 Ccesar. — The soldiers, having taken-possession-of the mountain^ 
 easily put the enemy to flight (391, 3).-^Cicero, when he knew 
 of the conspiracy, went to the Senate-hpuse. — As no enemy 
 hindered {=no enemy hindering), the lieutenant led the army 
 across the Rhine. — When this battle was heard {of), the Bel- 
 gians, of-their-own-accord, sent hostages and ambassadors to 
 Caesar. — In the consulship of Cicero and Antony, Augustus 
 was bom. ' 
 
§ 10. 
 INFINITIVE.— (LXXVI.—LXXIX.) 
 
 LESSON LXXVI. 
 
 Infinitive Forms. 
 (465.) The infinitive expresses action as completed 
 or incomplete, but without reference to person or 
 time ; e. g., 
 
 ACTIVE. 
 
 to love, or to be loving, loving^ 
 
 am- are. 
 to have loved, 
 
 a m a V - i s s 6. 
 
 Action Incomplete, 
 (Inf. Pros. Act.) 
 
 Action Completed, 
 (Inf. Perf. Act.) 
 
 Action Incomplete, 
 (Inf. Pres. Pass.) 
 
 Action Completed, 
 (Inf. Perf. Pass.) 
 
 PASSIVE. 
 
 to be loved, 
 
 S, m - a r 1. 
 to have been loved, 
 
 amatiis, a, um, esse orfuisse. 
 
 [Rem. The names present and perfect do not distinguish properly thft 
 two forms of the infiiiitive, but, as they are in universal use, we 
 have to adopt them. The student must remember that the present 
 expresses action mcomplete, and the perfect action complete ; but 
 that the time of tfie action must depend upon the verb with which 
 the infinitive is connected in the sentence.] 
 
 (466.) 
 
 FORMS OF THE INFINITIVE. 
 
 i PRESENT. 
 
 PERFECT. [j 
 
 Active. 
 
 Passive. 
 
 A( tive. 
 
 Passive. 
 
 1. am-ar6. 
 
 2. mon-ere. 
 
 3. rdg-ere. 
 
 4. aad-ir6. 
 
 am-ari. 
 mon-eri. 
 
 ''^/- - 
 aud-iri. 
 
 amav-^ 
 audiv-J 
 
 amatus, &, um, "] 
 auditiis, a, um, j 
 
 Rem. Observe that petf. inf. act. simply adds the ending -IssS to 
 the perf. -stem of the verb ; and perf. inf. pass, is formed by the 
 peif. pass. part, of the verb, combined with ess6 (sometime* 
 fuissS). 
 
INFINJTIVB. 
 
 177 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 (467.) Vocabulary. 
 
 To lay waste, vastare (av-, at-). 
 Ought, debere (deba-, debit-). 
 To be vacant, v&care (intransit.). 
 I am able, possum ; / was able, 
 p6tui. 
 
 (468.) Examples. 
 
 {a) I wish to learn. 
 The enemy began to cross 
 the river. 
 
 Peace, pax, (pac) is (293). 
 A very feio, perpauci, 39, a. 
 Evil deed, mal6f icium, i. 
 To break through, perrumpere (per- 
 rup-, perrupt'). 
 
 Cupio discere. 
 Hostes flumen transire ccb 
 perunt. 
 
 Rule of Syntax. — The infinitive is used, as in English, 
 to complete the imperfect ideas expressed by many- 
 words. 
 
 1^^ Such words are, to wish, to be able, ought, to be accustomed, to 
 Uasten, to determine, &c. ; also, the adjectives diguus, iudignus, 
 
 audax, &c. 
 
 (h) The Helvetians intend. 
 
 Helvetiis est in jlnimo (= it is 
 in mind to the Helvetians). 
 
 Nonnunqu^m i n t e r d i u, sae 
 pius noctu. 
 
 Itinere prohibere (153, a). 
 
 In conspectu. 
 
 (c) Sometimes by day, often- 
 
 er by night. 
 {d) To keep-off-from the road. 
 (e) In sight of. 
 
 (469.) Translate into English. 
 
 Caesar in Gallia hi6mare constituit. — iEdui se suaque ab 
 Helvetiis defendSre non potuerunt. — Agri vastari non 
 debent. — Hostes per munitiones perrumpere conati sunt. 
 — Agri Suevorum v S, c a r e dicuntur. — Milites inc61as expel- 
 1 6 r e non potuerunt. — Multitude puerorum muliSrumque 
 f u g e r e coepit. — Helvetii maximum niimerum jumentorum et 
 carroi-um c o e m 6 r e constituerunt. — Germani copias suas 
 Rhenum transducSre conati sunt. — Helvgtii cum proximis 
 civitatibus pacem et amicitiam confirmare constituerunt. 
 
 (470.) Translate into Latin. 
 
 [Place the infinitive before the verb on which it depends.] 
 Our towns ought not to-be-taken-by-storm. — In sight of our 
 army, the fields ought not to be laid-waste. — The enemy en- 
 deavoured sometimes-during-the-day, oftener by-night, to burst- 
 
]78 ACgUSATIVE WITH INFINITIVE. 
 
 through the fortifications. — The jEduans were not able to expel 
 the enemy from (their) territories (153, a). On one side,* the 
 lands are said to be vacant. — The boys and the women began 
 to fly-in-every-directibn (passim, adv).— The Helvetians intend 
 to make (their) way through our province. — A very few are 
 able to keep-off the Helvetians from the road.^ — The Helvetians 
 ought to cross-over without any (ullo) evil-deed. — The remain- 
 ing multitude of boys and women began to fly in-every-direc- 
 tion. 
 
 LESSON LXXVn. 
 
 Accusative with Infinitive. 
 
 (471.) Verbs signifying to know, to see, to feel, to 
 think, to say, with some others, have frequently a 
 sentence depending on them, the subject of which is 
 in the accusative, and the verb in the infinitive. 
 
 He saw that war was prepa- 
 rins on all 
 
 Undique be Hum p^rari vi- 
 debat. 
 
 Hete bellum, the subject, is accusative before the infinitive parari, 
 after the verb videbat, ^ saw. 
 
 (472.) Many dependent sentences which are introduced in 
 English by the conjunction thaU are expressed in Latin by the 
 accusative and infinitive. To translate such sentences into 
 Latin, observe the following method: 
 
 1. Omit the word that. 
 
 2. Change the nominative following that into the Latin 
 accusative. 
 
 3. Change the English verb into the Latin infinitive. 
 
 Nuntius dicit, ^quites tela 
 conjic^re. 
 
 The messenger says that 
 the horsemen are hurling 
 darts. 
 
 (473.) If the predicate of the sentence containing the accu- 
 sative and infinitive be an adjective, it must agree with the 
 accusative subject in gender, number, and case. 
 
 Unft ex parts. 
 
ACCUSATIVE WITH INFINITIVE. 
 
 179 
 
 He knows that Cicero is elo- 
 -%. quent. 
 I perceive that the water is 
 cold. 
 
 Scit Cicgronem ess6 616- 
 
 quentem. 
 Sentio &quam frigldam 
 
 esse. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 (474.) Vocabulary. 
 
 To think, existlmare (ftv-, at-). 
 
 To encamp, considfire (conaed-, con- 
 
 sess-, con+sidere). 
 To knmo, scire (sciv-, scit-). 
 Stone, lapis, (lapid) is (m.). 
 Nearer, prSpius (adv., 376). 
 
 (475.) Examples. 
 
 {a) The messenger says that 
 the horsemen ar e hurl- 
 in g darts. 
 
 (6) The messenger said that 
 the horsemen icere hurl- 
 ing darts. 
 
 (c) The messenger said that 
 the horsemen had hurl- 
 ed darts. 
 
 id) Word is brought to Cce- 
 sar. 
 
 (e) To have ah out himself. 
 
 (476.) Translate into English. 
 
 Helvetii existimant, Romanos disced^ re. — Explorator 
 
 dixit, hostes consediss e. — Ceesar scit, Dumnorigem 
 
 f&vere HelvStiis. — Helvetii dicunt, se omnem sSna- 
 
 tum a m 1 s i s 8 e. — Caesari nuntiatum est, m i 1 1 1 e s magnitu- 
 
 diaem sylvarum timere. — Nuntius dixit, gquites tela 
 
 conjicfire. — Galba certior factus est, Gallos omnes dis- 
 
 cessisse. — Exploratores dicunt, oppidum ab hostibus 
 
 t e n S r i. — Dum ha;c in coUoquio geruntm*, CsBsari nmitiatum 
 
 est, gquites Ariovisti propius accedere, et lapides telaque 
 
 in nostros conjicere. 
 
 [Be careful, in translating the following English into Latin, to write 
 first the leading sentence, and after it the accusative and the infin- 
 itive, observing the rules in (472), and following the order of word* 
 in the examples given above.] 
 
 To favour, favere (fiv-, faut-, 395, 
 
 v.), (governs dat.). 
 While, dum (adv.). 
 To lose, amittfire (a+mittere, 401, 
 
 3. i). 
 
 Nuntius d i i t gquites tSlS, 
 conj icfire. 
 
 Nuntius dixit equites t6l&' 
 conjice re. 
 
 Nuntius dixit Equites tel4 
 conj ecisse. 
 
 Caesari nuntiatum est {==it is 
 
 told to Ccesar). 
 Circum se habere. 
 
180 ACCUSATIVE WITH INFIIVITIVE. 
 
 (477.) Translate into Latin. 
 
 Caesar knows that this (thing) is true (473). — The scouts 
 say that the horsemen of Ariovistus are approaching (475, a;. 
 — The ambassadors said that the Helvetians had lost all their 
 cavahy and all their senate. — Word Avas brought to Caesar 
 that the horsemen of Ariovistus loere hurling stones against 
 (in, iciih accus.) our (men). — Word-was-brought to Caesar 
 that Ariovistus had-departed from the camp. — rCsssar was in- 
 formed by the scouts that the enemy had encamped under 
 (s ii b, with all.) the mountain. — The lieutenant says that the 
 mountain is held by the enemy. — The general thinks that our 
 plans are told to the enemy. — Word was brought to the gen- 
 eral that all the Gauls had departed by night. — The chiefs say 
 that Divitiacus always has a gi-eat number of horse-soldiers 
 about himself. 
 
 LESSON LXXVIII. 
 Accusative with Injinitim.— Perfect Infinitive Passive. 
 
 (478.) It has been stated (466, R.) that the perfect infinitive 
 passive is formed by the perfect participle passive, combined 
 with esse (sometimes fnisse). 
 
 When the accusative is used with this infinitive, the participle 
 must agree with the accusative in gender, number, and case ; 
 
 Nuntius dicit, iEduos victoa 
 esse. 
 
 ia) The messenger says that 
 
 the JEduans have been 
 
 conquered. 
 (6) Ariovistus said that all 
 
 the forces had been routed 
 
 in one battle. 
 (c) The horsemen brought- 
 
 back-word that the town 
 
 had been talcen-by-storm. 
 ^^' Observe that in (a) the part, victos agrees with the accus. iE duos 
 in {b), f u s a s with c 6 p i a s ; in (c), expugnatum with o p p i d u m- 
 
 Ariovistus dixit, o m n e s c 6 - 
 pias uno praelio fu saw 
 
 ' esse. 
 
 Equites renuntiaverunt, op- 
 pidum expugnatum 
 
ACCUSATIVE WITH INFINITIVE. 181 
 
 EXERCISE 
 
 (479.) Vocabulary, 
 
 To find-out, reperire (427, V.). 
 
 To frighten complelely, pertertere 
 (perterru-, pertemt-, pei- + ter- 
 rere). 
 
 Tributary, stlpendiarius, a, um. 
 
 To bring back word, renuntiai'e (av-, 
 fit-). 
 
 3'o rout, fundere (fud-, fus-, 416, a) 
 To overco'me, superare (av-, at-). 
 Bond, chain, vinculum, i. 
 To hold in memory, to rem,ember, 
 
 memoria tSnere. 
 To put (or cast) in chains, in viucu- 
 
 la conjicere. 
 
 (480.) Translate into English. 
 
 Caesar reperiebat initium fugae a Dumnorige factum esse. 
 — Impgrator dixit, eqmtatum esse perterritu m. — Caesar 
 mSmoria t^nebat, L. Cassium consuiem occisum esse ab 
 Helvetiis. — Ariovistus dicit, ^Eduos slbi (54), stipendiaries 
 esse factos. — Caesar certior factus est, legates in vincula 
 conjectos esse. — Equites renuntiavenint, castra-esse 
 munita. — Dixit bella gesta esse. — Reperiebat etiam Cae- 
 sar, initium fiigse a Dmnnorige atque ejus equitibus factum 
 esse; eoruraque fuga (55, a) reliquum eqmtatum perter- 
 ritum esse. — Ariovistus dixit omiies Gallorum copias uno 
 a se praelio (55, a), fusas ac super atas esse. 
 
 (481.) Translate into Latin. 
 
 Caesar found-out that the cavahy had been completely-fright- 
 ened by the flight of Dumnorix. — The JEduans say that they 
 (s e) have been routed by the Germans. — Caesar remembered 
 (—held in memory) that the consul's army had been defeated 
 by the Helvetians. — Caesar remembered that the consul had 
 been slain, and his (ejus) army sent ujader the yoke (323, N.). 
 — Caesar was informed by the chiefs that hostages had been 
 given. — The lieutenant said that the ambassador had been cast 
 into chains. — Ariovistus said that all the forces had been over- 
 come by himself. — Ariovistus said that the Gauls had been 
 overcome by himself in one battle. — The JEduans say that they 
 (s e) have been made tributary to Ariovistus {dat.). 
 
 Q 
 
182 
 
 INFINITIVE FUTURE. 
 
 LESSON LXXIX. 
 Infinitive Future Active and Passive. 
 
 (482.) By the combination of the future participle 
 active with esse (or fuisse), an infinitive future 
 active is formed ; e. g., 
 
 6 m a t u r ii s, a, u m, e s s 6, to he about to love, to intend loving. 
 „ „ ^ (to have been about to love, to 
 
 Smaturus, S, um,fuis9«, | have intended l<mng. 
 
 (483.) Finally, by combining the supine with the 
 verb ir i,* we form the infinitive future passive ; e.g., 
 a m a t u m 1 r 1, to be about to be loved. 
 doctumiri, to be about to be taught. 
 
 Rem. 1. This form, being derived from the supine, is appKed, alike to 
 
 nouns of all genders and of both numbers. 
 2. As there is no future infinitive in English, we must translate the 
 
 Latin ytt^Mre infinitive by a periphrasis, as above. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 (484.) Vocabulary. 
 
 To perstcade, persuadere (per-J-sua- 
 dere, sues-, suas-) ; governs dat. 
 
 To refrain, tempgrftre (av-, at-, fol- 
 lowed by ab with abl.). 
 
 To neglect, nSgligere (n§glex-, neg- 
 lect-, ngc+l6g6re). 
 
 'To compel, cdg6re (co6g-, coact-, 
 
 To restore, reddere (reddid-, reddit-, 
 
 r6+dare, 411, c). 
 Unfriendly, inimicus, a, um (In+ 
 
 amicus). 
 To demand-bach, rSpgtgre (repfiliv-. 
 
 r6p6tit-, rg-{-p6t6re). 
 To refuse, rScusare (av-, at-). 
 
 c6n-fag6re). 
 
 (484, a.) Example. 
 
 The general said that he I Irap^rator dixit s e cum sSlft 
 would come loith the tenth d^cima Iggione venturum. 
 legion alone. J 
 
 Rem. The e s s S in the future infinitive is frequently omitted ; e. g., 
 in the above, venturum. 
 
 I r i is the infinitive passive form of the verb i r 6, ^ go. It is not in 
 CMC except in combination as above. 
 
INFINITIVE FUTURE. ^ 183 
 
 (485.) Translate into English. 
 
 Future Infinitive Active. 
 
 Dumnorix existimat se regnum obtenturum esse. — 
 Helvetii existimabant se finitimis {dat.) persuasuros. — 
 Caesar existimabat, finitimos temperatures ab injuria. — 
 Ceesar dicit, se jEduorum injurias non n e glee tu rum. — 
 Helvetii existimabant, se iEduos vi (301) coacturos. 
 — Ariovistns dixit, jEduis (54) se obsides redditurum 
 ess e. — CcBsar dicit se, proxima nocte (118, II., c), de quarta 
 vigilia, castra moturum. — Imperator, homines inimico ^nimo 
 (428, a) tempdraturos ab injuria et mal6ficio, non existi- 
 mabat. 
 
 (486.) Translate into Latin. 
 
 Future Infinitive Active. 
 
 Ccesar said that he would move his camp. — Dumnorix thought 
 that he w^ould-hold the military-command of his own state. — 
 The general says that he is-about-to-demand-back the host- 
 ages. — The ^Eduans say that they-are-about-to-implore assist- 
 ance from (a) the Roman people. — Dumnorix assures (them) 
 tliat he is-about-to-seize the royal- power with his own (suo) 
 army. — Ariovistus said that he would not restore the hostages. 
 — Caesar did not think that the allies would-refrain from injury. 
 — Caesar thought that he would-compel the Germans by force. 
 — Ariovistus said that he would-refuse the friendship of the 
 Roman people. 
 
§ 11. 
 
 THE GERUND. 
 
 LESSON LXXX. 
 
 (487.) («) The gerund expresses the action of the 
 verb under the form of a noun of the second declen- 
 sion, in the genitive, dative, accusative , and ablative 
 cases (i, 6, urn, 6). 
 
 (6) The gerund-stem is formed by adding to the 
 verb-stem, 
 
 In the 1st conjugation, -and; e.g., am- and-. 
 " 2d " -end; e. g., m 6 n - e n d -. 
 
 " 3d '* -end; e. g.^ reg-end~. 
 
 " 4th , " -iend;*e. ^., aud-iend-. 
 
 (c) The gerund of any case is formed by annexing the case- 
 ending to the gerund-stem ; e. g., gen., 8, ra a n d - i ; dat., 
 a m a n d - 6 ; ace, amand-um; ahl., a m a n d - o. 
 
 (488.) As the infinitive is used as a verbal noun in the noini- 
 native anad accusative cases, so the gerund is used in the re- 
 maining cases ; e. g., 
 
 Nom. Scribere, writing. 
 Gen. Scribendi, of writing. 
 Dat. Scribendo, to or for writing. 
 
 (Scribere, ) 
 
 Ace. < „ •- 1_ 1 - / writms^. 
 (Scribendum, j '=' 
 
 Abl. Scribend5, with ivriting. 
 
 (489.) The rules for the use of the cases of nouns apply also 
 to the cases of the infinitive and gerund ; e, g., • 
 Nom. Writing is useful, s c r i b d ;• e est utile. 
 
 ,, rrn ^ j- '.- - ri ( Bl'S S C T 1 b O U d i OSt utf- 
 
 (jren. The art ofvmting is useful, I 
 
 * Also in the io verbs ("199) ; e. g., cap-io, cap-iendT. 
 
t^ 
 
 THE GERUND. 
 
 Dat. Paper is useful for writing, } 
 
 Ace. 
 
 / learn writing, 
 
 I learn during writing, 
 
 Abl. We learn hy writing. 
 
 185 
 
 eliarta scribendo est 
 
 utilis. 
 scribe re disco, 
 inter scribenduiu 
 
 disco, 
 scribendo discimus. 
 
 Rem. "With a preposition, the accusative gerund must be used, and 
 not the infinitive ; a d (inter, ob) scrxbendum, not a d (inter, ob) 
 scribere. 
 
 (490.) The gerund governs the same case as the verb from 
 which it is derived \ e. g., 
 
 The art of training hoys is | Ars pueros ediicandi 
 difficult. j diffictlis est. 
 
 v . - - ~ 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 (491.) Vocabulary. 
 
 To make war, bellare (av-, at-). 
 
 To plunder, to obtain-booty, praedari 
 
 (prasdat-), dep. 
 Wearied, defessus, a, um. 
 Sufficiently, sitis. 
 To think, cogitare. 
 Opportrmity, time for, spatium, i. 
 
 (492.) Examples. 
 
 (a) Time was given for 
 (= opportunity w-^as given 
 of) taking-up arms. 
 
 {b) For the sake of collect- 
 ing-corn. 
 
 To deliberate, dellberftre (ftv-, at-). 
 To take, sumere (sumps-, sumpt-). 
 Agriculture, agricultura, ae. , 
 Desire, stadium, i. 
 Life, age, aetas, (ajtat) is (293). 
 Mind, mens, (ment) is (355, IL, 1,) 
 
 SpS.tium armS, 
 datum est. 
 
 c&pi end 
 
 {ah- 
 
 Frumentandi ca 
 
 lat.). 
 
 (493.) Translate into English. 
 
 Spes praedandi homines ab agricultfira rgvocabat. — Spa- 
 tium defessis ex pugna excedendi non datum est. — BrSve 
 tempus aetatis satis est longum ad bene beateque vivendum. 
 — Hdminis mens d i s c e n d 5 ^litur. — Pars eqmtatus, p r ae - 
 cl a n d i causa, missa est. — Nox f inem oppugnandi fecit. — 
 Magna pars equitatiis, frumentandi causa, missa ^rat.— :^ 
 Cognovdrat enim Caesar, magnam partem Squitatus, praedandi 
 frumentandi que causa, trans Rh6num missara fuisse (471). 
 Q 2 
 
186 GERUNDS. 
 
 — Imperator diem ad deliberandum sumit. — Imp6rator 
 dixit, se diem ad deliberandum sumpturum (484, a). — 
 Spes praedandi, stiidiumque bellandi incolas ab figricul- 
 cura et labore revocabat. — D 6 c e n d 6 docemur. 
 
 (494.) Translate into Latin. 
 
 The desire of plundering and making-war has recalled the 
 farmers from (their) fields. — Time for (492, a) hurling the 
 darts was not given to the soldiers. — Time for (of) fighting 
 was not given to the horsemen. — The horsemen were sent into 
 the territories of the ^duans for the sake of-collecting-corn. — 
 The mind of man is nourished hy thinJcing. — Time for depart- 
 ing-out-of the tbwn was not- given to the wearied citizens. — 
 The citizens ask time for (of) deliberating. — Wisdom is the 
 art of living well. — Caesar recalled the tenth legion into Gaul, 
 for-the-sake-of wintering. — We learn hy teaching. — Oppor- 
 tunity of attacking the town was not given to the soldiery 
 though they desired it (= desiring it). 
 
§ 12. 
 
 THE GERUNDIVE, OR VERBAL ADJECTIVE 
 IN DIJS, DA, DtJM. 
 
 (495.) {a) The gerundive expresses the action of 
 the verb (generally with the additional idea of ne- 
 cessity or continuance) under the form of an adjec- 
 tive of the ^rs^ class (76). 
 
 (6) The %erundive-stem is precisely the same as 
 
 the gerund-stem. The cases are formed by adding 
 
 the endings of the adjective ; e. g., 
 
 N. am and -us, a, urn. 
 G. S,mand-i, ae, i, &c., 
 
 and so through all cases and both numbers. 
 
 LESSON LXXXI. 
 The Gerundive used instead of the Gerund. 
 (496.) The gerundive is used (to express contin- 
 ued action) as a verbal adjective, agreeing vfiih. the 
 noun, instead of the gerund governing the noun ; e. g.^ 
 
 Gen. Of writing a letter. 
 
 Dat. To or for writing let- 
 ters. 
 
 Ace. To write a letter. 
 
 Abl. By writing a letter. 
 
 Scribendse Spistolae, in- 
 stead ofscribendi Spis 
 tolam. 
 
 Scribendisgpietolis, in- 
 stead ofscribendo 6pi»- 
 tolas. 
 
 Ad scribendam 6pist6- 
 1am, instead of ad scri- 
 bendum 6pist61am, 
 
 Scribenda 6pist61a, in- 
 steadof scribendo fipis- 
 tdlam. 
 
188 
 
 GERU.\D1VE. 
 
 Rem. The gerundive must be used for the dative or accusative of the 
 gerund when it has an active government. It may be used for it 
 in any otlier case, unless the object of the gerund is a neuter ad- 
 jective or pronoun ; e. g., of learning the true = vera discendi, 
 not veroi-um disceridorum ; of hearing this, hoc audiendi, not 
 kujus audiendi. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 (497.) Vocabulary. 
 
 2'o choose, deligSre (delcg-, delect-, 
 
 de+l6gere). 
 7'o pursue, conseqm (cons5cut), dep. 
 To fail, to be insufficient, def ic6re 
 
 (defec-, defect-, de-ff acere). 
 To form a design, consilium capfire 
 
 (io). 
 Space-of two-years, biennium, I. 
 
 (498.) Examples. 
 
 (a) The Helvetians reckoned 
 
 that the space-of -two-years 
 
 was enough for themselves. 
 (&) The space of three-days. 
 
 (c) The house was given to 
 the rohhers to plunder. 
 
 The farmer' gave his house 
 io the rohhers to plunder. 
 
 S^^ After verbs of giving ^ going, sending, receiving, and the 
 like, the gerundive expresses b. purpose or object. 
 
 (d) For- completing {=fin- ] Ad eas res c o n f i c i e n d a s. 
 ishing) these things. \ 
 
 (499.) Translate into English. 
 
 CJrbs a diice militibus diripienda data est. — Urbem dux 
 militibus diripiendam dedit. — Subito Galli consilium belli 
 gerendi ceperunt. — Subito Galli legionis oppugnandae 
 consilium ceperant. — Ad eas res couficiendas Orgetorix 
 deKgitur. — Helvetii, ad eas res conficiendas, bienniunl sibi 
 satis esse duxerunt. — Crassus legates tribunosque militum in 
 finitimas civitates frumenti petendi causa dimisit. — Plato 
 Romam (453, c)ad cognoscendas NumaB leges contendit. 
 — Tn voluptate spernenda virtus maxime cernitur. — Multi. 
 
 To reckon, deem, duc6re (dux-, 
 
 duct-). 
 To discern, cemfire (406, CI. III., a). 
 Care, cura, oe. 
 To apply, adhiibere (adhibu-, adhib- 
 
 It-). 
 Negligent, negUgens, (negligent) is 
 
 (107). 
 
 Helvetii biennium sibi 
 satis esse duxerunt. 
 
 Tridui spatium. 
 Doraus latronibus diripien- 
 
 d a data est. 
 Agi'icola domum latronibus 
 
 diripiendam dedit. 
 
GERUNDIVE. 189 
 
 in equis parandis, adlilbent curam, sed in amiois dSli- 
 gendis negllgentes sunt. — Miiites, ad urbem expugnan- 
 dam, trldui spatium sibi sS,tis esse duxerunt. 
 
 (500.) Translate into Latin. 
 
 For completing these things (498, d) Caesar gave to the 
 Gauls the space of three days. — The ^duans had suddenly 
 formed the design of besieging the town. — Crassus is chosen 
 for canying-on the war (498, cO^). — Pythagoras went to Spai-ta 
 (453, c) to learn (498, EF") the laws of Lycurgus. — Caesar 
 reckoned that the space of two years was enough for himself^ 
 for overcoming the Gauls and finishing the war. — The general 
 sent all the cavalry across the Rhine, for the sake of seeking 
 corn. — ^Ariovistus hastened (contendere), with all his forces, 
 to attack the town (498, E^"). — The Britons sent ambassadors 
 to Caesar, in-order-(ad)-to-seek (408, ^^) peace. 
 
 LESSON LXXXII. 
 The Gerundive used to express Necessity, ^c, 
 
 THE GERUNDIVE AS SUBJECT. 
 
 (501.) (a) The genindive in the nominative neuter (diim) 
 is used with esse to express necessity or duty. If the person 
 be expressed, it must be put in the dative. 
 
 One must write. 
 I must write. 
 
 Sciibendiim est. 
 Sci-ibendum est mihi. 
 
 ^^ Here the gerundive is the subject of the sentence 
 {the duty of writing is to me). 
 
 (6) This neuter nominative may be combined with all the 
 tense's of e?se ; e. g., 
 
 Scribendum est mihi, Imustivrite. 
 
 Scribendum erat mihi, / had to write. 
 
 Scribendum erit, I must write hereafter, 
 &c., &c. 
 
190 
 
 GERUNDIVE. 
 
 (c) This neuter nominative may govern the case of its verb ; 
 e.g.* 
 
 We must help the citizens. 
 One must use reason. 
 
 Civibus {dat.) subvSniendum 
 
 est. 
 Ratione utendum est. 
 
 THE GERUNDIVE AS PREDICATE. 
 
 (502.) The gerundive is also used with esse, in ail cases anil 
 genders, as a verbal adjective, agreeing with the noun, to ex- 
 press necessity or worthiness ; e. g., I am to he loved, amandus 
 sum ; thou art to be loved, amandus es, &c. The person, if 
 specified, is put in the dative. 
 
 Tullia mihi ftmanda est. 
 
 I must love Tullia {= Tul- 
 
 lia is to he lo^ed hy me.) 
 All things had to he done 
 
 hy Caesar {=iC(Esar had 
 
 to do all things). 
 \^ Here the gerundive is the predicate 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 Omnia Caesari 6rant Agenda. 
 
 (503.) Vocabulary. 
 
 Flag, vexillum, i. 
 
 To set-up, proponere (pr64-pon6re, 
 
 p6su-. p6sit-, 406, b). 
 To ^o-forward, pr6ced6re (pr6+ce- 
 
 dere, 401, 3, b). 
 A little too far, patdlo longius 
 
 {adv.). 
 To think, putare (av-, at-). 
 
 (504.) Examples. 
 
 (a) Ccesar causes a hridge to 
 
 he made {= takes care that 
 
 a hridge should he made). 
 I must hear. 
 
 Est is often omitted with the 
 (5) The centurions thought 
 
 that nothing should be 
 
 done rashly. 
 
 To send for, arcessfire (arcessIV', 
 
 arcessit-). 
 7^61 understand, perceive, intelligfire 
 
 (intellex-. intellect-). 
 To determine, statuere (statu-, st5- 
 
 tfit-). 
 In vain, frustra. 
 Moi-e widely, latius [adv., 376). 
 
 Caesar pontem faciendum 
 (esse) curat. 
 
 Mihi audiendum. 
 gerundive, as in {a). 
 Centuriones nihil temere 
 
 ft g e n d u m (esse) existima- 
 
 bant. 
 
 * The accusative is hardly ever used after the neut. gerundive. 
 
GERUNDIVE. 191 
 
 (505.) Translate into English, 
 
 (1.) Gerundive in the nominative neuter (dttm). 
 
 Militibus de navibus 6rat desiliendum. — Militibua 
 simul et de navibus (erat) desiliendum, et cum hostibus 
 eratpugnandum. 
 
 (2.) Gerundive as a verbal adjective, agreeing with the noun. 
 
 Csesari omnia uno tempore (118, II., c) grant agenda; 
 vexillum propone ndum; revocandi mllites ; qui pauUo 
 longius processerant a r c e s s e n d i ; acies instruenda; mi- 
 lites hortandi; signum dandum. — Prohibenda est 
 Tra. — Bellum nobis est susci pi endu m. — Caesar sibi latius 
 distribuendum exercitum piitat. — Imperator dicit, jam 
 sibi legatos a u d i e n d o s.— CaesS-r iibi intellexit frustra tan- 
 tum laborem sumi (471), statuit expectandara classem. — 
 Caesar pontem faciendum curat atque it^ exercttum trS.- 
 ducit. 
 
 (506.) Translate into Latin, . - "^^ 
 
 (1.) Gerundive in nominative, neuter (d u m). ' 
 
 We micst leap-down from the ships. — We must read. — You 
 must hear. — You must fight for liberty (pro libertate).— ^Zi 
 must hear ; we must read. — -With whom (quibuscum) must I 
 fight ? — We must leap down from the walls and fight with the 
 horsemen. 
 
 (2.) Gerundive as a verbal adjective. 
 I must do all things at once (=: all things 7nust he done by me 
 at one time). — You must give the signal. — ^We had to set up 
 the flag. — Ccssar must send ambassadors. — The soldiers must 
 fortify the camp. — The general must encourage the soldiers. — 
 The Helvetians cause bridges to he made over the river. — Cae- 
 sar thought that the army must be led-over, — Caesar thought 
 that the army must be divided by him (sibi), and distributed 
 more-widely. — The general says that he must wait-for the 
 fleet. — Divitiacus says that this-thing (hoc) must be done by all 
 the Gauls. 
 
§ 13. 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 LESSON LXXXIII. 
 
 .(507.) The imperative mood expresses the £Ction 
 of the verb as a command, wish, entreaty, &c. ; e. g., 
 Love thou ! Hear thy parents. 
 
 (508.) 
 
 FORMS or THE IMPERATIVE. 
 
 \ 
 
 
 ACTIVE. 
 
 
 
 i2d Sin','. 
 
 3d Sing. 
 
 i2d Phir. 
 
 3il Plur. 
 
 am- 
 
 a or&to. 
 
 ato. 
 
 ate or atotd. 
 
 anto. 
 
 m5n- 
 
 e oY eto. 
 
 eto. 
 
 ere or ^tote. 
 
 eitto. 
 
 rea:- 
 
 6 or Ito. 
 
 Tto. 
 
 ite or Ttote. 
 
 unto. 
 
 aud- 
 
 1 or Ito. 
 
 Ito. 
 
 ite or itote. 
 
 mnto. 
 
 passive/ j 
 
 am- 
 
 are or ator. 
 
 ator. 
 
 aminl or aminor. 
 
 antor. I 
 
 moa- 
 
 ere or etor. 
 
 efcor. 
 
 emiiii or eminor. 
 
 entor. 
 
 reg- 
 
 ere or itor. 
 
 Itor. 
 
 imini or Iminor. 
 
 tintor. 
 
 aud- 
 
 ire or itor. 
 
 itor. 
 
 imini or iminor. 
 
 iuntdr. 
 
 Rem. 1. Observe that the 2d per s. sing. act. can be obtained from any 
 verb by striking off r 6 from the infinitive ; e. gr., inf., a m ft r 6 ; 
 tmper., am ft; and that the 'Hd pers. sing. pass, is the infinitive 
 form precisely. 
 
 2. The longer forms of the 2d person are used especially in reference 
 to future time ; e. g., in laws, statutes, and the like. 
 
 3. The io verbs of 3d conj. take the imperative endings of the 4th in 
 the 3d pers. plur. : thus, c a p i u n t o, let them, take ; capiuntor, 
 let them be taken. F a c i o has 2d pers. sing, f & c. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 (509.) Vocabulary. 
 
 [Deponents take, of course, the passive endings.] 
 
 Enmily, inimicitia. ffi. 
 
 To despise, contemnSre (con+tem- 
 
 n6r6, temps-, tempt-). 
 Fleeting, fugax, (fugac) Is (107). 
 
 To pursue, follow, pers6qm (persS- 
 
 cut-), dep. 
 Association, fellowship socidtfts (fttis, 
 
 293). 
 
IMPERATIVE MOOD. 1V)3 
 
 Slunv, spficiSs, sp^ciei (117). 
 
 7'o trust, credSre {cr€did-, credit-, 
 
 411, c) ; governs dat. 
 Admire, admirari (at-), d^. 
 
 Ns audL 
 
 Ne cred6 c6l6ri. 
 
 Frail, perishable, cSduciis, 5, Qm 
 
 (from cddirS, to fall). 
 To shun, avoid, vitarS (av-, at-). 
 Judge, judex, ( judic) is (306). 
 To reverCj vtofirari (v6n6rat-), dep, 
 
 (510.) Examples, 
 {a) Do not hear. 
 Do not trust appearance 
 
 (colour). 
 
 Rule. — ^With imperatives, n6 must be used for not, 
 (Non would be veiy bad Latin.) 
 {b) Let the judge neither give I Judex prsemia n© d&tS nSvft 
 
 nor take rewards. j c a p 1 1 o. 
 
 Neither — nor = n6— rueve. 
 (c) Instead of parents = |Parentuml6co (abl.) 
 
 (511.) Translate into English. , * 
 Pueri (roc), pS,rentes am ate. — Magistri pueros linguS,m 
 LS-tinam d 6 c e n t o. — Magna vis est in virtutibus ; Sas ( 150 ) 
 e X c 1 1 a, si forte dormiunt. — AbstinetotS omni injuria 
 {ahl.) atque inimicitiis. — I m p 6 r a irae ( 147 ). — Ne p e r s 6- 
 q u 6 r e omnia, quee speciem glorise habent.— Hsec omnia, quae 
 habent speciem gloriae c o n t em n 6 : brevid, f ugacia, cadGcfi. 
 exist! ma. — Ne credite omnibus. — Judices praemium nS 
 cftpiunto, neve danto. — V i t a sScietatem improborum. — 
 Venerar§ Deum, ven^rarS p&rentes, et quos p§,rentum 
 loco (55, a) tibi (54) natura dedit. — Pueri praBC=ept5res, a qui- 
 bus docti sunt, amanto etv6nerant6r. 
 
 (512.) Translate into Latin, 
 
 Boys, revere (your) parents. — Let the master teach the boya 
 the Greek language. — Do not rouse-up (your) vices : rouse-up 
 (your) virtues, if perchance they sleep. — Abstain ye from {abl.) 
 all vices and enmities.— My son, rule (your) anger {dat.^ 147). 
 — Do not admire all things which have the show of glory. — 
 Do not ye fear death. — Do not trust to the show of glory. — 
 Love those whom Nature has given to you in place of parents. 
 — Do not seek the association of the wicked.- — Neither take 
 (cdp^re) nor give a reward. — Hear the wise and good, 
 
 a 
 
§ 14. 
 SENTENCES. 
 
 [The student should now be made to understand something of sente»' 
 ces. The following simple statements can readUy be imderstood.] 
 
 (513.) (a) The sentence, '■'■ the messenger Jied" is a simple 
 sentence, as it contains but one subject and predicate. 
 
 (6) The sentence, " the messenger, who saw me, jied,''^ is a 
 compound sentence, as it contains more than one subject and 
 predicate. 
 
 (c) In the last example, ^'- the messenger jied" is called the 
 pRiNciPAii SENTENCE ; and " who saw me,'''' the subordinate 
 sentence. 
 
 (514.) The following are some of the classes of subordinate 
 sentences : 
 
 (a) The accusative ivith the infinitive ; e. g., Nuntiiis dixit, 
 equites tela conjicere (The messenger said that the 
 horsemen were hurling darts). Here equites tel^ conji- 
 cere {that the horsemen were hurling darts) is the subordinate 
 sentence ; nuntius dixit, the principal sentence. 
 
 (b) Conjunctive sentences, i. e., such as are introduced by a 
 conjunction or adverb of time ; e. g., Ccesar, when he had 
 crossed the river, drew up his army. Here, Ccesar drew 
 up his army is Xh& principal sentence; when he had crossed 
 the river, the subordinate sentence. 
 
 (c) Relative sentences; e. g., Nuntius, qui missus est, 
 dixit {The messenger, who was sent, said). Here nun- 
 tius dixit is the principal sentence ; qui missus est, 
 the relative subordinate sentence. 
 
 {d) Interrogative sentences {i. e.), such as are introduced by 
 an interrogative word ; e. g., Tell me what you are doing ? 
 Here what you are doing is a subordinate interrogative sen- 
 tence. 
 
§ 15. 
 CONJUNCTIONS.— (LXXXIV.—LXXXy.) 
 
 LESSON LXXXIV. 
 
 Copulatwe Conjunctions, ' .' ', 
 (515.) Copulative conjunctions unite WOfds or 
 •sentences together. They are, 
 
 And. 
 
 
 Et, qug, ac, atquS. 
 
 Neither, nor. 
 
 
 N6c, nSqug. 
 
 Also. 
 
 
 Etiam, necnon, qu6qug, itfim, 
 itidgm. 
 
 
 EX ER 
 
 C I s E. 
 
 (516.) Vocabulary. 
 
 Only, solum ; not only, nou solGm. 
 A debtor, obeeratua, I. 
 Formerly, at one time, quondam. 
 Jiich, opulens, (Spulent) is (107). 
 To hasten, to march rapidly, pr6p6- 
 
 rar6 (av-, at-). 
 To give largess, to hril>e, largiri 
 
 (largit-), dep. 
 Once and again, sSm6l atquS ItS- 
 
 rum. 
 Estate, rgs f Smiliai-is, e (104). 
 A wheel, rota, ae. 
 
 (517.) Examples, 
 (a) Darius equipped a fleet, 
 ' and placed over it Datis and 
 Artaphernes. 
 
 (a) E t comiects independent words and sentences ; q u 6 joins one 
 word or sentence to another rather as an a.ppendage. Thus, in (a), & t 
 
 Some [some persons), nonnulli, w,. S 
 
 (ndn+nullfis). 
 Javelin, tragula, ee. 
 To hurl under, subjicgrS (jec-, ject-, 
 
 sub+jacSre). 
 I profit, benefit, prosum* (pr5+stim) ; 
 
 governs dat. 
 To the same place, eOdfim (adv.). 
 Too much, nimius, ft, iim. 
 Top, summit, culmfin, (culmin) !l 
 
 (345). 
 To pray, 6rare (av-, at-). 
 
 Darius classem comp&ravit, 
 e i q u 6 Datim prsef ?cit 6 1 
 Artaphernem. 
 
 * Prosdm is inflected like sum, but inserts d before the vowoU' 
 fc.g'., prod-ess e, prod-Ss, prod-est (not pro-es, pro-est). 
 
196 COPULATIVE CONJUNCTIONS. 
 
 joins Datim and Artaphernem; and qa6 joins the sentence. 
 ^placed veer it," &c., as an Appendage to tiie equipment of the fleet . 
 
 Homines £6ri ac barbari in 
 provinciam veniebant a t q u 6 
 in Italiam contendebant. 
 
 (6) Fierce bjA barbarous men 
 were coming into the prov- 
 ince^ and were hastening 
 into Italy. 
 
 (5) Ac is used before consonants, but not before vowels or h. Atqufl 
 may be used before either vowels or consonants. 
 
 (c) CcBsar both had induU 
 ged and was greatly con- 
 fident in the tenth legion. 
 .(c) E t followed by anotJuer 6 1 means botli — and. 
 
 Deciraae legioni Caesar 6t in- 
 dulserat e t conf idebat max- 
 
 {d) (1) Again and again. 
 
 (2) And again. 
 
 (3) Not only — but also. 
 
 E t i a m a t q u 6 e t i S, m. 
 
 E t etiam. 
 
 N o n s o 1 ii m — s 6 d 6 1 i a m 
 
 , (51%) . Translate into English, 
 Org6t9rix ad judicium omnem suam familiara coegit, 6 t 
 omnesclientesobaeratosque eodeiii {adv.) conduxit. — Carthago 
 6t Corinthiis atque Nuraantia, opulentissimae quondam et 
 vSJidissimse civitates, deletse sunt, a Romanis. — Cassar finem 
 properandi (489) f acit, pontem q u e ad flumen Rhenum ponit. 
 — Discipuli e t audiunt e t amaut praecept5res. — Romani n o n 
 solum itinerura causa (135, II., R.) s6d Stiam possessionis, 
 culminS, montium occupaverunt. — Non sjoium vires {plural 
 of \is) sgd etiam tela nostris {dat.) deficiebant. — His rebus 
 Dumnorix e t suam r6m f amiliarem auxerat e t facultates ad 
 largiendiim magnas comparav^rat. — Hostes 6 1 e loco superiore 
 in jjiostros tela conjiciebant e t nonnulii inter carros rotas q u 6 
 tragiilas subjiciebant, nostros que vulnerabant. — Contemnuntiir 
 ii qui nee sibi nee alteri (194, R. 1) prosunt. — Nee melidr 
 virfuit Scipione (360, c) quisquam, nee clarior. — Mdxn nSquS 
 obsides r6petiverunt n 6 q u e auxilium imploraverunt. — Sapi 
 entem neque paupertas neque mors neque vinciila tei 
 rent. — Nimiussomnus neque corpori neque ammo {dat., 516) 
 prodest. — Rogo te, et oro ; etiam atque etiam te rogo. — 
 ^dui sem^l atque iterum ciim Germanis contenderant. — 
 Milites ex castris grupgrunt (er umpire) atqufi omnem 
 spdm sfiJutis in virtute posuerunt. 
 
DISJUNCTIVE A>'D ADVERSATIVE CONJUNCTIONS. 197 
 
 LESSON LXXXV. - 
 
 Disjunctive and Adversative Conjunctions. 
 
 ^519.) I. The disjunctive conjunctions (meaning 
 
 or) are aut, vel, ve, and sive or seu. 
 
 Rem. 1. Aut indicates a real difference of object; e. g.. 
 
 Here, soldiers, we must conquer or j Hie vincendum aut mdriendum, mi- 
 die ! I lites ! 
 
 "When a u t is used, but one of the conditions can be fulfilled, 
 as in the above example. 
 
 Rem. 2. V 6 1 (derived from velle) means if you wish, oi 
 rather. (Hence it is used for even.) 
 
 The nobles can either corrupt or Virl nobiles v6l corrarap6r6 more* 
 correct the morals of the state civitatis, v 6 1 corng6r6 possunt. 
 {i. e., they can do whiclicver 
 they please). 
 
 Rem. 3. Ve is alwrays affixed to another word; duo, tresv* 
 = two or three. 
 
 Rem. 4. These conjunctions are frequently repeated. 
 c aut — aut. 
 Either — or, }\^\ — v61. 
 
 (siy6 — siv6. 
 Whether — or, | seu — seu. 
 
 (520.) 11. The adversative conjunctions express 
 opposition {but). 
 
 The most important are, 
 
 l.t, atqui, autem, csetgriim, s^d, v6rum {hut). 
 T S. m § n {however) ; v e r 5 {truly) . 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 (521.) Vocabulary. 
 
 To run up, accurrfirS (accurr- and 
 accucurr-, accurs-, ad+currSre). 
 
 Very rich, perdives, (divit) is (per+ 
 dlv6s), 107. 
 
 Chance, cftaiis, us. By cJiance, casu 
 (abl.). 
 
 Goodness, bSnTtas (Stis). 
 
 To pay up, persolvgre (solv-, s6- 
 
 lut-). 
 To suffer full punishment, poau&s 
 
 persolv6rS. 
 Handsome, formflaus, ft, iim. 
 Eloquent, facundiis, ft, um. 
 Ulysses, Ulysses, (Ulyss) ia. 
 
 R2 
 
198 
 
 CONJUNCTIOJJS. 
 
 To possess, possJdgrfi (possSd-^ 
 
 Bess-). 
 Weeping, fletus, us.' 
 Effect, eSectus, us. 
 Sorrow, sadness, tristitia, ea. 
 Generally, plerumqu6 (adv.). 
 Joy, gaudiam, I. 
 
 pos- 
 
 Daily, quStidiftniis, &, um. 
 
 A living being, animans, (animantl 
 
 is (107). 
 Motion, motus, us. 
 Various, diversus, a, um. 
 To swim, natarfi (av-, at-). 
 Sometimes, interdum. 
 
 Fortes sunt h&bendi, non qui 
 f aciunt, s e d qui propulsant 
 injuriam^ 
 
 Gyges a nullo videbatur, ips6 
 a u 1 6 m omnia videbat. 
 
 {522,) Examples. 
 (a) Those are to he esteemed 
 brave, not who do, hut who 
 ward off injury. 
 {b) Gyges was seen by no- 
 body, but he himself saw 
 all things. 
 
 (a) S 6 d indicates a strong opposition ; it always stands first 
 in its clause, as in (a). 
 
 (6) AutSm expresses a weaker opposition than s6d. Au- 
 t6m and vero never stand first in a sentence, but always after 
 one or more words. 
 
 (523.) Translate into English. 
 
 Nostii celSriter accurrerunt; &t Germani fortater impgtum 
 giadidrum exceperunt. — Amici regis duo tresve (519, R. 3) per- 
 divites sunt. — Siv6 casu (55, a) sive consilio deorum immorta,- 
 lium, pcEnas persolverunt. — NonnuUi, sive felicitate {ahl.) 
 quadam, sivS bonitate naturae, rectam vitsB secuti sunt viam. — 
 Fortes et magnS,nimi sunt hS,bendi, non qui f aciunt s 6 d qui 
 propulsant injuriam. — N5n formosus erat, sed drat facundus 
 Ulysses. — Avarus non possidet divitias (57, R.) sed divitise 
 possident eum. — Fletus plerumque est efFectiis tristitise ; inter- 
 diim vero etiam {even) gaudii. — Helvetii fere quotidianis 
 prgeliis (55, a) ciim Germanis contendunt, quum aut suis fini- 
 bus e5s prohibent, aut ipsi in eorum f inibus bellum gSrunt. — 
 Animantium motus diversus est; v61 ambulant et currunt, 
 v61 volant, vdl natant. — Corpus moritur {dcp.), veriim &m- 
 mus nunquam morietur. — Milites nostri fortes f uer«nt, s 6 d 
 avari. 
 
§ 16. 
 i30i>5VNGTIVE MOOD.— (LXXXVL— XCII.) 
 
 (524,) The subjunctive mood expresses affirma- 
 fc'i'n doubtfully f indefinitely, or as conceived by the 
 mind; e. g., / may write; I might write; I might 
 have written ; if I should write ; if I had written. 
 
 Rem. — The subjunctiv© hcs no future tense-form. 
 
 LESSON LXXXVL 
 Subjunctive Present. 
 {5251) Forais of e s s e (i{o Oc) in subjunctive present. 
 
 Pres. 
 
 sun, 
 / may he. 
 
 SIS, Bit, 
 
 thou mayAhe, she, it 
 est be. may be. 
 
 sirnus, 
 we may he. 
 
 sitis, 
 ye may be. 
 
 smt, 
 they may 
 
 (526.) Forms of regular verbs. 
 ia) The subjunctive present adds the person-endings 
 m, s, t, mus, tis, nt, for the active, and 
 r, ris or re, tilr, mur, mini, ntur, for \h.Q passive, 
 to the verb-stem by means of the following connecting vowels, viz., 
 
 Active. Passive. 
 
 1st conj., e ; e. g., 4m-6-m, am-S-r. 
 
 2d conj., £a ; e. g', mdn-e^-b^ iu5n-e&-r. 
 
 3d conj., a ; e. g., rSg-a-m, rSg-fi-r. 
 
 4th conj., ia ; e. g., aud-Ia-m, aud-Ja-r. 
 
 (6) PARADIGM. SUBJUNCTIVE PIU^iSENT. 
 
 Active. — I may love, advise, rule, hear. | 
 
 Stem. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Plural. 1 
 
 am- 
 mon- 
 r6g- 
 aud- 
 
 em. 
 Mm. 
 
 am. 
 
 iSm. 
 
 6s. 
 
 6as. 
 as. 
 
 las. 
 
 6t. 
 6it. 
 
 at. 
 
 iat. 
 
 emus, 
 eamus. 
 amus. 
 lamtls. 
 
 §tis. 
 6atis. 
 &tis. 
 jatis. 
 
 ent. 
 
 eant. 
 
 ant. 
 
 iant. 
 
 
 I 
 
 *ASsrvE. — I may I 
 
 e loved, advised, ruled, heard. 
 
 
 Steni. 
 
 Singular. | 
 
 PluraL 11 
 
 am- 
 
 m6n- 
 aud- 
 
 6r. 
 6ar. 
 ftr. 
 Kr. 
 
 ens m- ere. 
 6aris or ar6. 
 aris or ar6. 
 laris or jire. 
 
 etur. 
 6atur. 
 
 atur. 
 iatTjr. 
 
 emur. 
 6amur. 
 amur. 
 iamiir. 
 
 eminl. 
 6amini. 
 amini. 
 iaminl. 
 
 entur. 
 6antur. 
 antur. 
 iantur. 
 
200 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE PRESENT. 
 
 E3tERCI3E. 
 
 (527.) Vocabulary^ 
 
 Value, pretiam, I. 
 
 To obey, p4rer6 (paru-) ; governs dat. 
 
 To despair, desperare (av-, at-). 
 
 Otherwise, ftlit6r {adv.). 
 
 To hinder, impfidire (iy-, It-). 
 
 Carefully, studiose [adv.). 
 
 To exercise, exerc6re (exercii-, ex- 
 
 ercit-). 
 To grieve, dolere (d6lu-, dolit-). 
 Would that, utinam (conj.). 
 To fear, metuere (mStii-). 
 J7icredible, incredibilis, e (104). 
 Mind {talent), ingfinium, L^ 
 
 (528.) Examples. - ' '-■" 
 
 [The principal use of the subjunctive in Latin is in dependent sen- 
 tences ; but in this lesson we show its usca in jyrindpal sentences, ia 
 which it occurs orJy when something is said without dejiniieness or ccT' 
 tainty.] 
 
 (a) 1. No sane man can doubt 
 about the value of virtue. 
 2. May I be snfa ! 
 
 To be ignorant, igiiorare (§v-, at-). 
 To deny, n6gare (av-, at-). 
 To know, noscSrS (nov-, n6t-). 
 To afford, proebere (pra?bu-, prsebit-). 
 To make one's self'a judge, sS jddl- 
 
 cSm prseberS. 
 To apply, to employ, adhlberS (\i-. 
 
 It-). 
 Cautious, cautus, 5, um. 
 Rashly, temSrS {adv.). 
 Ever, unquSm {adv.). 
 Truly, obviously, prorsus {adv.'^ 
 Finally, denlqu^ {adv.). 
 
 3. / hope you are icell 
 (==raay you be safe). 
 
 4. May I not he safe, if 
 I write otherwise than 
 Ithink. 
 
 6. / hope viy father is 
 alive { = would . that 
 my father may be 
 alive). 
 
 6. I wish he would come. 
 
 Nemo sanus de virtutis pr6tio 
 
 d u b i t e t. 
 Sim salvus ! 
 Sulviis sis! - 
 
 Ne Sim salvus, si ilKtfir sciibo 
 ac sentio. 
 
 Utanam p^ter v i v a t. 
 
 Utanam v d n i S. t. 
 
 (a) The subjunctive present is used for the English poten- 
 tial, may, can. Sec-, and also to express a'wish, when the thing 
 wished is possible. A negative wish is expressed by n e pre- 
 fixed, as m (4). 
 
 (6) 1. Let us believe. 
 
 2. Let us obey virtue. 
 
 3. Do not despair. 
 
 Credamus. 
 
 Virtiiti pareftmus. 
 
 Ne despSres. 
 
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 201 
 
 (6) The subjunctive present is used, instead of the impera 
 tive, to soften a comniand. N e is used for prohibition. 
 
 (c) Who would not love vir- 
 tue ? 
 What can I do 1 
 Who is ignorant 1 
 Who can doubt 1 
 
 Quis virtutem non & m e t ? 
 
 Quid faciarii ? 
 
 Quis ignoret? 
 
 Quis diibitet? 
 
 (c) The subjunctive present is used in direct questions when 
 any doubt is implied. (In English,, we generally use can, wilU 
 would, &c., in such questions.) 
 
 (529.) Translate into English. 
 
 {a) Use of subjunctive as potential, or to express a wish (the latter 
 indicated by ! ). 
 
 Tempus v 6 n i a t. ^— Salvus sis! amic6. — F a v e a t for- 
 tune ! — Utinam hoc veriim sit ! — Diu vivas ! — Nemo bonus 
 de Providentia Dei diibite t. — M 6 r i a r, si alitor scribo ac 
 sentio. — Utinam nemo te i m p § d i a t !— Utinam domum meam 
 veris amicis (55, a) i m p 1 e a m ! 
 (J) Use of subjunctive as imperative. 
 
 Se quisque studiose ex ere eat. — Naturam, optimam ducem, 
 sequamur, cique pare am us. — A mem us pStriam, parea- 
 mus senatui, consulamus bonis. — Suum quisqud noscat 
 ing^nium, Scremqu^ se et bonorum et vitiorum suoriim judi- 
 c6m prasbeat. — Ne ametis improbos. — ^Prudentiam adhib- 
 eamus. — Cautiorem adhibeamus prudentiam. — In rebus 
 gravioribus cautiorem adhibeamus prudentiam, s6d n6c in 
 Ifivioribus t6m6r6 unquam agamus. — Ne dole as. 
 (c) Use of subjunctive in direct questions. 
 
 Quis hoc credat ? — Quis fabiilas istas c red at ? — Quis im- 
 probos ac stultos diligat ? — Quis eiim diligat qu6m mStuit? 
 — Quis credat illud quod prorsiis incredibil6 est? — Quis dS 
 virtutis pr^tio dubitet ? — Quid faciamus ? — Qms nSget 
 omnes 16ves, omnes avaros, omnes denique imprSbos essA 
 Bervos ? 
 
 (530.) Translate into Latin. 
 
 {a) No wrise (man) can doubt concerning the benevolence of 
 God. — My friends, I hope you are well (= may you be safe). 
 
202 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 ^^l-hope)~thsit{iUinam) the commander is alive (= may live). — 
 I hope our friends may come ! — May these things be true ! — 
 May the citizens be wise. 
 
 (&) Let us not believe this. — Do not believe these fables.— 
 Let us exercise ourselves diligently. — Let us love our friends, 
 let us obey our parents, let us worship God. — Know your (own) 
 mind. — Let the soldiers take-po!*aession-of the mountain. — Let 
 us not love the wicked. 
 
 (c) Who can say this ? — Who can love a fool ? — Who would 
 obey a wicked king ? — What good (man) can doubt concerning 
 the value of virtue ? — Who can deny that all avaricious men 
 are slaves ? 
 
 LESSON LXXXYJL 
 Suhjunciive Perfect. 
 (53 K) Form of esse (to be) in subjunctive perfect. 
 
 fueriin, fu6ris, 
 
 / may havathou mayest 
 
 been. have been. 
 
 fu^rit, jj fugrlmtis, I fufirftis, 
 he, she, it}%oemayhave\yeina 
 may have\ been. | been, 
 
 been. 
 
 (532.) Forms of regular verbs. 
 
 1. The subjunctive perfect active adds the endings 
 
 6rim, 6ris, 6rit, 6r!mus, 6r!tis, 6rint, 
 to the indie, perf. stem of the verb; e. g., amav-erlra, &c. 
 
 2. The subjunctive perfect passive is formed by combining 
 the perfect participle with the subj unctive present of e s s e : 
 c. ^., & m a t u s s i m, &c. 
 
 [ 0^^ Deponents, of course, are formed like passives.] 
 
 3. PARADIGM, SUBJUNCTIVE PERFECT. 
 
 Active. — I may have loved, advised, nded, heard. 
 
 fimav- 
 m6nu- 
 rex- 
 
 audiv- 
 
 Srim, 
 
 gris. 
 
 6nt. 
 
 grfnaus. 
 
 6r!tis. 
 
 firint. 
 
 Passive. — I may have been loved, advised, ruled, heard. 
 
 ( amatus, a, um, ^^^^ 
 b;,,., J mbnitus, a, um, I .^ 
 ^"^S- i rectus, a, um, ^ «'«• 
 
 i^ auditus, a, um, 
 
 sit. 
 
 ramati 8e,a \ ^^^^^ 
 I auditi, ae, a, j 
 
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 EX £RCISE« 
 
 (533.) Vocabulary, 
 
 htialth,\&\etnd6, (vaktudin) is (339), 
 So, thus, ita [adv.) 
 Kindness, pardon, vfinia, ae. 
 To take captive, cap6r5 (io, c6p-, 
 capt-, 199). 
 
 Patience, patientia, oe. 
 
 To slay, cut to pieces, c»d6rS (c6- 
 
 cld-, cass-, 413, ^^). 
 It makes no difference, it matters 
 
 not, nihii refert. , 
 
 mF* Form the subjunctive perfect active and pass- 
 ive of the following verbs : 
 
 Absttm, to be absent (no passive). 
 Prosum, to projit (do.). 
 
 Desum, to be wanting (do.). 
 V6carS, to caU. 
 Confirm&r6, to assert. 
 DicSrS, to say (dix-, diet-). 
 TradSrS, to assert, deliver (tradid-, 
 
 tradit-). 
 Laudare, to praise. 
 Videre, to see, 
 
 (534.) Examples, 
 
 {a) Do not do it, | N e f e c 6 r i s. 
 
 (a) The subjunctive perfect (as well as the present) may be 
 used in prohibitions, with n e, or nihil, instead of the imper- 
 ative. 
 
 Inv^nire, to find (invSn-, invezit^). 'v 
 Scrib6r6, to write. 
 FSc^rS (io-, fee-, fact-), to do, 
 Xoqui (locut-), to speak [dep.). 
 Censer6 (eensu-, cans-), to think. 
 Opprim<SrS (press-, press-), to re- 
 press, crush. 
 Constita6re (stitii-, stitut-), to place. 
 OppugnarS, to assaiUt. 
 E/6v6car6, to recaU, restore. 
 
 {h) By your leave I would 
 
 say. 
 Epicurus may have said. 
 Perchance some one mziy say. 
 
 Pac6 tua dixfirim ; or, Vdnia 
 
 tua dixdrim. 
 Dixerit Epicurus. 
 Forsit8,n fi,Kquis d i x 6 r 1 1. 
 
 (6) The subjunctive perfect may be used with or without an 
 adverb, to express a supposed case (that may t)e true). 
 
 (c) I think I can assert this. Hoc confirmaverim. 
 You will scarcely find a man Vix uUius gentis hominem irK- 
 of any nation. veneris. 
 
 (c) The subjunctive perfect (as well as present) is used to 
 soften an assertion. (Such phrases as. Probably I mighty 1 
 think I can, I would, perhaps, &c., can be expressed in Latin 
 by one word in the perfect subjunctive, as above.) 
 
204 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD, 
 
 Cur rides ? 
 
 Die* mihi cur rid efts. 
 
 UWfuisti? 
 Nescio iibi fu6ris? 
 
 {d) (1) Why do you laugh? 
 (2) Tell me why you 
 laugh. 
 
 (1) Where have you been ? 
 
 (2) I do not know where 
 you have been. 
 
 The sentences marked (1) are direct interro^tive sentences, 
 and take the indicative mood ; those marked (2) are indirect (or 
 subordinate) interrogative sentences, and take the subjunctive. 
 Hence, 
 
 {e)Rule of Syntax. — The subjunctive mood is used in all in- 
 direct interrogative sentences. 
 Rem. Such sentences are introduced by the interrogative pronoons 
 quis, qui, quantus, qaalis, uter, &c., or the adverbs ubi, unde, quan* 
 do, quo, cur, num, utrum, an, &c. 
 
 (535.) Translate into English. 
 
 (a) Quod diibitas, ne feceris. — Id ne dix8ris.— Nihil in 
 commodo {to the injury) v^letudinis tuaB f e c e r i s. — Cum ira- 
 probis ac stultis ne locutus sis. 
 
 (6) F&ciat hoc aliquis. — Fecerit hoc aliquis. — Dix^rit 
 Epicurus, Deum esse nullum. — Forsitan eiim amaveris. — 
 Forsitan itS, censu^ris. — Puerum magistri monuerint. — 
 Urbem hostes oppugnavSrint. 
 
 (c) Frater {voc), bona tua venia dixSrim, meS, sententii 
 melior est. — Patientiam laudaverim boum (351, 2) atque 
 6qu6rum. — IngeniS, studiaque oppresseris facilius (376) 
 quam r 6 V 6 c a v 6 r i s. 
 
 {d) Nescio cur rideas. — Die, cHr ad me non veneris. 
 — ^Helvfttii ibi Srunt, iibi eos Caesar constituerit. — Magno 
 eiim pericul5 (89, II.) id fecit. — Intelligit, quan to cum peri- 
 ciilo id fec§rit. — Multi in prgelio esesi sunt. — Multi in prselio 
 eapti sunt. — Ubi (when) victoria amissa est {is lost) nihil refert, 
 quot in prselio esesi aut in fugS eapti sint. — Die mihi 
 ubi fufiris. 
 
 (536.) Translate into Latin. 
 
 {a) Do not love the wicked. — Do not hear the foolish. 
 
 * The imperative of dIc6rS is die, not dicS. 
 
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOO. 
 
 205 
 
 (b) Some philosophers may-have-denied the soul to be im- 
 mortal. — Perhaps-you-have- advised the young-man. 
 
 (c) I think-I-can-advise the young man. — You may easily 
 fepress the minds of young men. — You cannot easily recall the 
 industiy (studium) of men. 
 
 {d) The mind itself knows-not what (quails) the mind is. — 
 Tell me where you ivere. — I-do-not-know why you did not comt 
 to me. — Tell (me), were you (fuerisne) in school yesterday? — 
 It makes no diiference how many are taJcen-captive. — -The boy 
 will remain (erit) there, where the master may appoint him. — 
 I will tell you what I have seen. — I will tell you what I have 
 heard. — Tell me what y&ii have done. 
 
 LESSON LXXXVIII. 
 
 Subjunctive Imperfect and Pluperfect. — Conditional 
 Conjunctions and Sentences. 
 
 (537.) The subjunctive imperfect simply adds the 
 person-endings, 
 
 m, s, t, m u s, t i s, n t, for the active^ 
 
 r, ris (re), tur, mur, mini, ntur, for the passive^ 
 to the present infinitive form of the verb. Thus, 
 
 Inf. Pres. 
 
 esse, to he. 
 SmarS, to love. 
 r6gSr6, to rule. 
 
 Imperf. Subj. Act. 
 
 ess em, I migJU he. 
 
 ftmare-m. 
 
 rggfire-m. 
 
 Imperf. Subj. Paj 
 
 Jimare-r. 
 rSgSre-r. 
 
 (538.) 
 
 PARADIGM. SUBJUNCTIVE IMPERFECT. 
 
 1. EssSm; — I might, could, would, or should be. 
 
 ess6m. 
 
 ess6t. 
 
 essemus. | essetis. | essent. 
 
 2. Active. — I might, could, would, fy;., love, advise, rule, hear. 
 
 amar- 
 mSner- 
 rgggr- 
 audir- 
 
 6t. 
 
 emus. 
 
 6r. 
 
 €ns or erg. 
 
 j 3. Passive. — I might, could, would, 6fc., be loved, advised, ruled, heard. 
 j Smar- 
 I monSr- 
 ■j r6g6r- 
 audlr- 
 
 6tur. 
 
 6mur. 
 
 emJnl. 
 
 entur. 
 
206 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 Rem. — ^The vo\*'el e of the euding is long, except where it comes before 
 m or t final, when it is short of necessity. 
 
 (539.) (a) The subjunctive pluperfect aciiue simply 
 adds the person-endings, 
 
 m, s, t, m u s, t i s, n t, 
 to the past infinitive form of the verb. Thus, 
 
 Pluperfect Subjunctive. 
 
 faiss6-m, / might havehitti: 
 fim a V i s s S -m, / might have loved, 
 
 (b) The subjunctive pluperfect passive is formed 
 by combining the perfect participle with the subjunct- 
 ive imperfect of e s s e ; 
 
 E.g., ^matiis essSm (sometimes with the subjunctive 
 pluperfect of e s s d ; e. g.j a m a t ii s f u i s s e m, &c.). 
 
 (c) PARADIGM. SUBJUNCTIVE PLUPERFECT. 
 
 Past Infinitive. 
 
 f u i s s e, to have been. 
 fimavisse, to have loved. 
 
 I might, could, would, should have been, SfC. 
 
 fuiss6m. 
 
 fuisses. I fuisset. || fuissemus. | fuissetis. | fuissgnt. 
 
 2. Active. — I might, could, 6fC., have loved, advised, ruled, heard. 
 
 amav- 
 monu- 
 rex- 
 audiv- 
 
 issSm. 
 
 isset. 
 
 issSnt. 
 
 3. Passive. — I might,%ould, ifc., have been loved, advised, ruled, heard. 
 
 C amati, w, &, i . ^ 
 J,. ) mSnitI, oe, &, ( ^ssemus. 
 
 ^^^'')rectr,k^ ( e St ' 
 f oiiriTH » s 1 essent. 
 
 Sing. 
 
 amatus, a, um, 
 monitus, a, um, 
 rectus, i, um, 
 auditus, 1 um. 
 
 essem. 
 esses. 
 
 Conditional Conjunctions and Sentences, 
 
 (640.) (a) The conditional conjunctions are si, if; si'n, but 
 if; nisi, or ni, if not, unless. 
 
 (&) A conditional sentence is one which is introduced by a 
 conditional conjunction; e. g., if men were good, they would be 
 happy. 
 
 Rem. The sentence introduced by if is called the conditional sen- 
 tence ; the other, the consequent sentence : if men were good is the 
 conditional ; they would be happy, the consequent. 
 
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 207 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 (541.) Vocabulary, 
 
 To diminish, mlau6re (miiju-, mi- 
 nut-). 
 To cross over, transirg (irreg.). 
 The world, orbis terrariim. 
 
 To subdue, subiggrS (subeg , subact> 
 
 sub+ag6re). 
 Longer, diutius {adv., compar.). 
 I wish that, utinam (conj.). 
 
 (542.) Examples and Rules. 
 
 {a) Would that my father 
 
 were alive ! 
 I wish he could come ! 
 
 Utinam p&ter vivdret! 
 Utaoam v 6 n i r e t ! 
 
 E^ In these examples (which refer to present time), the thing wished 
 Is supposed to be impossible (the wish is vain). 
 
 I wish he had lived ! Utinam v i x i s s e t ! 
 
 Ivmh he had come ! • Utinam v e n i s s e t ! 
 
 J^^ In these examples (which refer to past time), the thing wished i» 
 supposed to be impossible (the wish is vain). 
 
 (a) Rule of Syntax. — The imperfect and pluperfect sub- 
 junctive are used to express an impossible supposition, or 
 a vain wish ; the imperfect, with reference to present or 
 future time ; the pluperfect, with reference to past time. 
 
 {h) Conditional Sentences. 
 
 (1) If he has {any) money, Si pecuniam hftbet, d&t. 
 he gives (it). 
 
 Here the man is supposed to have money; the condition expressed by 
 "if" is therefore real. 
 
 (2) If he has {any) money, 
 he will give (it). 
 
 Si pecuniam 
 d&bit. 
 
 h & b e a t, 
 
 Here the condition is possible, if not real. The man may have money. 
 
 (3) If he had any money, he 
 would give it. 
 
 Si pecuniam haberet, 
 d d,ret. 
 
 Here the man is supposed to have no money : the condition is unreaL 
 (Observe that it refers to present or future time.) 
 
 {i) If helmdhsid any money,] Si pecuniam h3.buisset, 
 he would have given it. \ d e d i s s e t. 
 
 Here the man is supposed not to have had any money ; the condition i» 
 therefore unreal (referring to past time). Hence, 
 
 (fc) Ride o/* <%tttex.— In conditionai sentenees (l)i a real 
 
'^08 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOI>. 
 
 condition is expressed by the indicative ; (2) a possible 
 condition by the present or perfect subjunctive ; (3) an 
 unreal or impossible condition in present time by the im- 
 perfect subjunctive ; and (4) an unreal or impossible con- 
 dition in past time by the pluperfect subjunctive. 
 
 Rem. I. In cases (3) and (4), the subjunctive mast be used in the 
 consequent as well as in the conditional sentence. 
 
 2. It follows that the perfect or pluperfect indicative can never be 
 used with si. If he had oome = sivenisset, not si venerftt. 
 
 (543.) Translate into English, 
 
 Utanam salvus esse s.— S i hoc d i c i s, en-as. — S i h 6 c 
 d i c a s, erres. — -^ i hoc diceres, errares.^ — S i hoc d i x - 
 isses, erravisse s. — Si venisses ad exercitum, ab impera- 
 tore visus esse s. — Frater mihi narrabat quid amicus tuus 
 fecisset (534, d). — Memoria minuitur, nisx eS,m exer- 
 c e a s. — Si HelvStii flumen transire conentur, Csesar eos 
 prohibebit. — Si Helvetii flumen transire conarentur, Caesar 
 eos prohibere t.— Si Helvetii flumen transire conati 
 essent, Csesar eos prohibuisset. — Si obsides ab Helvetiis 
 Caesari (54) dentur, cum iis pacem faciet. — Si obsides ab 
 Helvetiis Caesari d'arentur cum iis pacem face ret. — Si 
 obsides ab Helvetiis Caesari dati essent, ciim iis pacem 
 f e c is s e t. — Non s u p e r a r e m u r, cives {voc.) s i nostri fortgs 
 essent. — Non superati essemus, cives, si fortiores 
 milites nobis {dat.^ 125, H., a) fuissent. — Alexander totum 
 fer6 orbgm terrarum subegit. — Alexander, si diutius vixis 
 set, totum orbem terrarum siibegisset. 
 
 (544.) Translate into Latin, 
 
 I ivish my father had lived longer. — / wish you had come 
 
 Wbuld-that the soldiers had been braver — If you-would-read 
 this book (542, &, 2), I would give (it) to you. — I unsh the gen- 
 eral had led the army across the Rhine. — If you had any thing 
 (quid), you would willingly give (it). — If they had had the 
 money, they would willingly have given . it. — If-you-had-loved 
 the boy, you-would-have advised him. — If you-love the boy, 
 you-will-advise him. — If the soldiers would come to the army, 
 ihey~would-be-praised by the general. — 7)^ the Germans had-led 
 (their) army across the Rhine, Caesai' would-have-made an at- 
 tack upon (in) them. — Ifwe-are brave, we shall not be overcom« 
 
SUBJUNCTIVE WITH UT, NE. 
 
 209 
 
 LESSON LXXXIX. 
 
 Subordinate Sentences expressing a Purpose. — tit 
 and Ne. 
 (545.) The subjunctive forms of the verb poss6, 
 to he able, are the following : 
 
 [Observe that p o s s 6 is compounded of p 6 1 -, the stem of p 6 1 i s, able, 
 
 and e s s 6 ; thus, p 6 1 - e s s 6, contracted, p o s s S. 
 are contracted, and the t changed into s before s.] 
 
 So all similar forms 
 
 Subj. Pres. 
 pos- Bim. 
 
 (Potis sim = pot-sim = possim.) 
 SIS. sit. slmus. sTtis. 
 
 iSubj. Imperf. (Potis essem = potessem = possem.) 
 pos- sfem. ses. set. semus. setis. 
 
 sent. 
 
 Suhj. Perf. (Potis faerim = pot-fuerim = potuerim.) 
 
 potu- Srim. eris. erit. erimus. eritis. erint. 
 
 Subj. Plup. (Potis fuissem = pot-fuissem = potuissem.) 
 
 p6tu- Iss6m, Issfcs. issSt. issemus. issetis. Issent. 
 
 (546.) 'VhQ final conjunctions (i. e., such as denote & purpose 
 aim, OT result) are ut (or uti), ne, quin, quo, quominiis 
 Ut, or iiti, that, so that, in order 
 
 that. 
 N6, that not, so that not, lest. 
 
 Cluin, but that. 
 
 duo, in order that, to the end that. 
 Q,u6minus, tliat (after verbs of hin- 
 dering). 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 (547.) Vocabulary. 
 
 To eat, gderS (601). 
 
 A Rauracian, Rauracus, i. 
 
 A Tulingian, Tulingus, i. 
 
 To burn up, exurSre (exuss-, ex- 
 
 ust-). 
 Together, una [adv.). 
 Basely, turpiter (215, 2). 
 To surround, circumvgnliS (vgn-, 
 
 vent-). 
 
 To resist, resistSrg (restit-, restit-). 
 To fix, hence to decide, statuSra 
 
 (statu-, statu-). 
 To decide on something quite se 
 
 vere, aliquid gravius statuerg. 
 To enjoin, praecipere (io, praecep- 
 
 cept-), prae+cSLpere). 
 To join battle, praelium committ6re 
 End, finis, is (m., 355, Ex. II., 2). 
 
 Subordinate Sentences expressing a Purpose, End, or Object. 
 
 (548.) Examples and Rules. 
 (a) I beseech you that you " 
 
 do this 
 
 I beseech you to do this. 
 
 >T^ obsScro, lit h6c fftcii 
 
 S2 
 
210 UT, NE, EXPRESSING PURPOSE. 
 
 Dux impgravit, ut miKtes 
 sta,tiones suas servarent 
 
 The general commanded that ' 
 the soldiers should keep 
 their stations ; 
 or, 
 
 The general commanded the 
 soldiers to keejp tJieir sta- 
 tions. J 
 
 (b) I beseech you tfiat you J 
 
 do not do this ; \ m, 
 
 ^^ >Te obsecro ne n6c f&cias. 
 
 I beseech you not to do this, j 
 The general commanded that ") 
 
 the soldiers should not 
 
 desert their stations ; 
 or^ 
 The general commanded ^^e 
 
 soldiers not to desert their 
 
 stations. 
 
 Dux impgravit n6 milites 
 st^tiones su§,s d6sdr- 
 e r e n t. 
 
 (a) These examples show that a purpose or aim may be ex- 
 pressed in English by that, in order that, or (especially after 
 verbs of asking and commanding) by the infinitive. In Latin, 
 such sentences are expressed by u t, with the suhjunctive.* 
 
 (6) An object to be provided against is introduced in English 
 by that not, in order that not, or by not, with the infinitive. In 
 Latin, such sentences are always expressed by n e, with the 
 subjunctive. 
 
 (549.) Translate into English, 
 
 1. Ut. 
 
 Edimus ut vivamus, non vivimus ut 6 damns. — Vfinio 
 u t d i s c a m. — Veni ut discerem. — Orgetorix persuaddt 
 Castico (dat.) ut regnum occupet. — In e5 itinere, persuasit 
 Castico, cujus pater regnum in civitate sua multos annos (191, a) 
 obtanuSrat, u t regnum in civitate sua occupare t. — Orget- 
 orix persuadet Dumnorigi ut idem (150) conetur. — Orget- 
 orix persuasit Dumnorigi iit idem conaretur. — HelvStii 
 persuadent Rauracis, iiti cum iis proficiscantur. — Helvg- 
 tii persuadent Rauracis St Tulingis, ii t i, oppidis suis vicisque 
 
 * Jubiri takes accusative with infinitive. 
 
UT, NE, EXPRESSING PURPOSE. 211 
 
 exustis (457), una ciim ils proficiscantur. — C3Bs§,r casteM 
 communit, ut Helvetios prohibere possit. — CsBsar castella 
 communivit u t Helvetios prohibere posset. — Caesar rogat 
 Divitiacum ut f inem orandi faciat. — Csesar rogavit Divitia- 
 cum lit finem oraiidi faceret. — Helvetiis (147) Caesar im- 
 pgrat uti perfugas r6 due ant. — Helvetiis Caesar impgravit 
 u 1 1 perfugas reduc^re nt. 
 
 2. Ne. ' 
 
 Te obsecravi ne h5c faceres. — Pater f Ilium obs^crat nS 
 quid turpiter f a c e r e t. — Milites, n e ab hoste circumven- 
 irentur, audaciiis (376) resistere ac fortius pugnare coepe- 
 mnt. — Divitiacus Caesarem obsecrat, ne quid gravius in fra- 
 trem statu at. — Divitiacus, multis cum laciymis (89, H.) 
 Caesarem obsecrare coepit, n e quid gi-avius in fratrem stS, tu- 
 rret. — Praeceptum est (perf. pres., it has heen enjoined to or 
 upon) Labieno, ne praelium committat, nisi Caes^ris copiae 
 visae sint (542, 6, 2). — Praeceptum erat Labieno, ne praelium 
 committeret, nisi Caesaris copiae visae essent. 
 
 [Recollect that a purpose or aim is often expressed in English by the 
 infinitive; but in Latin never — always by ut with the subjunctive for a 
 positive axm, by n e with the subjunctive for a negative aim.] 
 
 (550.) Translate into Latin. 
 
 The general commands the lieutenant (147) not to do (= that 
 he may not do) this. — The general exhorted the soldiers to make 
 (= that they should make) the attack sharply. — The father be- 
 seeches his daughter to make an end of praying. — Some-men 
 (quidam) live to eat, not eat to live. — He comes to see the gen- 
 eral. — He came to see the general. — The Helvetians persuade 
 the Tulingians to set out together with them. — The captive 
 beseeches the general not to decide-on any-thing at-all-severe 
 against (in) him (se). — Caesar commands the Gauls (147) to 
 hring back {=that they should bring back) the deserters. — 
 The Romans, that they might not be surrounded by the Gauls, 
 began to fight more bravely. — The commander enjoins-it-upon 
 the lieutenant not to join battle. — The commander enjoined it 
 upon thfl lieutenant not to join battle. 
 
212 
 
 SUCCESSION OF TENSES. 
 
 LESSON XC. 
 
 Succession of Tenses. — tit expressing a Result 
 
 (551.) (1.) "We cannot say in English, " iJe comes, that he 
 might see the general ,•" or, "iJe came, that he may see the gen- 
 eral ;" but we must say, •' He comes, that he may see the gen- 
 eral," and, "He came, that he might see the general." It is 
 obvious that this tense of the verb in the subordinate sentence 
 depends upon that of the principal sentence ; and this depend- 
 ence is called the succession of tenses. 
 
 2. The tenses of the Latin verb are divided into primary 
 and historical. 
 
 (i) Historical, < , 
 
 Present 
 
 Future. 
 
 Pres. Perf. 
 
 imftt, 
 
 amabit, 
 
 amavit, 
 
 he loves. 
 
 he will love. 
 
 he has loved. 
 
 Imperfect 
 
 Pluperfect 
 
 Perf. Aorist 
 
 Imabat, 
 
 fimav6rat, 
 
 amavit, 
 
 le was loving. 
 
 he had loved. 
 
 he loved. 
 
 3. The Rule for the succession of tenses then is : If there be 
 a primary tense in the principal sentence, there must be a pri- 
 mary tense in the subordinate sentence ; if a historical tense in 
 the principal, a historical tense in the subordinate. 
 
 [The examples in the preceding lesson illustrate this rale, and those in 
 the present lesson wiU farther confirm it.] 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 (552.) Vocabulary. 
 
 To strive, contend, iiiti (nis- and 
 nix-), dep. 
 
 Despair, desperatiS, (desperation) 
 IS (333, R.). 
 
 To run together, concoirere (con- 
 cnrr- and concucurr-, concurs-). 
 
 Storm, tempestas, (tempestat) is 
 (293). 
 
 To vise (as a storm), cooriri (cooi-t-, 
 con-1-orIri). 
 
 Palisade {rampart of stakes) val- 
 lum, i. 
 
 To cut or tear down, scindSrS (sold-, 
 
 sciss-). 
 To begin, incTpgre (inc6p-, incept-, 
 
 in+cap6r6). 
 To afford means or facilities, dSrS 
 
 fftcultatem. 
 Deceit, dolus, i. 
 Rather, mSgis. 
 Integrity, probftfts, (prObltftt) U 
 
 (293). 
 Course, cursQs, us. 
 Change, commOtfttio (onis, 333, R.). 
 
UT WITH THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 213 
 
 Subordinate Sentences expressing a Result 
 (553.) Examples and Rules. 
 
 Tanta vis probitatis est, dt 
 
 earn v61 in hoste diligS 
 
 mus. 
 Helvetii ita a p§,tribus suis 
 
 didicerunt, ii t mdgis virtfite 
 
 quam dolo nitantur. 
 
 So great is the power of in- 
 tegrity, that we esteem it 
 even in an entmy. 
 The Helvetians have been so 
 taught by {=have so learn- 
 ed from) their fathers, that 
 they contend (or, as to con- 
 tend) rather with valour 
 than deceit. 
 
 («) These examples show that a result (especially after the 
 words such, so, so great, &c.) is expressed in English by' that 
 with the indicative, or, as to with the infinitive ; in Latin, by ii t 
 with the subjunctive. 
 
 (6) Rule of Syntax. — Ut, signifying that, and introducing 
 
 a result, governs the subjunctive. 
 Rem. U t, expressing a result, generally follows the correlative words 
 talis, tantus {such, so great); &d6o, sic, ita {so); and verbs 
 signifying to accomplish, to briiig to pass, &c. 
 
 (554.) Translate into English. 
 
 Imperator perficit, uti SequS-ni dent obsidSs. — Dumnorix 
 perficit, uti Sequani dent obsides, ne itinere (153, a) Hel- 
 vetios prohibeant (548, b) — Imperator tanta vi (55, a) oppi- 
 dum oppugnat, ii t desperatio ^nimos oppidanorum o c c ii p e t 
 (551, 3). — Imperator tanta vi oppidum oppugnavit ii t desper- 
 fitio animos oppidanorum occupare t. — T a n t u s timor om- 
 nem exercitum occupavit, ii t omniiim animos perturbaret. 
 — Tanta tempestas siibito coorta est {perf aor.) ii t naves 
 cursum tenere non p o s s e n t. — Imperator t a n t a m sibi (54) 
 jam in Gallia auctoritatem comparaverat, iit undique ad eum 
 legationes concurrerent (551, 3). — Galli vallum scindunt. — 
 Galli vallum scindere et fossam complere incipiunt. — Galli sic 
 nosti-os contemnunt, iit vallum scindere et fossam complere 
 in ci pi ant. — Oppidum natura (55, a) loci sic muniebatur, 
 ii t magnam ad ducendum (496) bellum d S, r e t f ^cultatem. — 
 Auxiliorum adventu (55) magn^ rerum commutatio facta est. 
 
214 auo, auiN, auoMiNus, with subjunctive. 
 
 — Horum adventu t a n t a rerum commutatio facta eat, ti t is- 
 tri fortius pugnarent atque hostes rSpellSrent. 
 
 (555.) Translate into Latin. 
 
 [Recollect that as to with the English infinitive must be transla'^jd by 
 ut with subjunctive.] 
 
 The commander hrought-it-to pass that the Sequanians gave 
 hostages. — The Sequanians gave hostages that they would 
 not prohibit the Helvetians from (their) journey (153, a). — So- 
 great-a fear suddenly seizes the whole army, that it alarms the 
 minds of all. — So great a tempest suddenly arises^ that the 
 ships can not hold their course. — The commander procures for 
 himself 50 great authority in Italy, that even the senators run- 
 together to him. — The Helvetians begin to cut-down the bridge. 
 — The Helvetians so despised our men, that they began to cut 
 down the bridge. — By the approach of the iEduans, so great a 
 change was made that the Helvetians began to fight more 
 bravely. — The Helvetians had so learned from their fathers, 
 as to contend rather with valour than deceit. 
 
 LESSON XCI. 
 
 Periphrastic Conjugation, Subjunctive. — Use of quo, 
 quln, quomtnus, with the Subjunctive. 
 (556.) The want of a future subjunctive is supplied to some 
 extent by the periphrastic conjugation, formed by combining 
 the participles in riis and diis with the subjunctive tenses of 
 esse, to be. 
 
 ACTIVE. 
 
 Pres. 
 Imperf. 
 Perf. 
 Pluperf. 
 
 ftmaturus sim, / may be about to love. 
 amaturas essem, / migkt be about to love. 
 toiaturus fu6rim, / may have been about to love. 
 ftmaturus fuiss6m, / misrht have been about to love. 
 
 Pres. 
 Imperf. 
 Perf. 
 Pluperf. 
 
 amandus sim, / may be to be loved [one must love me) 
 
 fimandus ess6m, / misrht be to be loved. 
 
 amandus fuerim, / may have been to be loved. 
 
 amandus fiiissem, / might have been to be loved. 
 
 Esse (to be). 
 
 Pres. 
 Imperf. 
 
 f fltttrus sim, 
 f uturus essem, 
 
 / Ttiay be about to be. 
 I might be about to be. 
 
auo, auiN, auoMiNus, with subjunctive. 215 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 (557.) Vocabulary. 
 
 To hold hack, restrain, retinere (re- 
 
 tinu-, rgtent-, re+t6nere). 
 To stand in the way, prevent, ob- 
 
 stare (obstit-, obstat-, ob+stare). 
 To sustain, sustiiiere (tinu-, teut-, 
 
 Bub+tenere). 
 Novelty, ^ovitas, (novitat) is (293). 
 To decree, consciscere (consciv-, con- 
 
 scit-). 
 To commit suicide, sTb! mortem cob- 
 
 scisc6re {= to decree death to 
 
 one's self). 
 
 Cowardice, ignavia, se. 
 
 To take away from, erip6r6 (lo-^ 
 eripu-, crept-) ; governs ace. and 
 abl. 
 
 To train, educate, educarS (av-, at-). 
 
 To deceive, fallere (ffifeU-, fals-). 
 
 It was Caesar's fault, Per Caesi- 
 rem stetit (=it stood through Cae- 
 sar). 
 
 To finish, perficgre (perfec-, per- 
 fect-). 
 
 Suspicion, suspicio, 6ms (333, B,.). 
 
 (558.) Examples and Rules. 
 
 {a) CsBsar erects forts, that 
 he may the more easily 
 keep off the Helvetians. 
 
 Caesar castella communit, quo 
 f a c i 1 i u s Helvetios prohib- 
 ere p o s s i t. 
 
 (a) Quo is used to express a purpose (instead of ii t), espe- 
 cially when a comparative enters the sentence. 
 
 Caesar castella communit ut possit {that he may, &c.). 
 Caesar castellfi communit quo facilius possit {that he may tnort 
 easily, &c.). 
 
 (6) (1) There is no one but 
 thinks ; 
 or, 
 There is no one who does 
 not thinJc. 
 
 (2) There is no one so 
 brave as not to be con- 
 founded. 
 
 (3) It is not doubtful but 
 that the soldiers will 
 
 fight bravely. 
 
 (4) I did not doubt that 
 the soldiers would fight 
 bravely. 
 
 (5) They could not be 
 restrained from hurl- 
 ing darts (= but that 
 they should hurl darts). 
 
 Nemo est q u i n p u t e t. 
 
 Nemo est tam fortis qu!n 
 perturbetur. 
 
 Non dubium est q u i n milites 
 fortiter pugnatiiri sint. 
 
 Non diibitabam quin milites 
 fortiter pugnatiiri es- 
 sent. 
 
 Non poterant rfitineri quin 
 tel& coniic^rent. 
 
Nihil impSdit, quominus 
 hoc fftciat. 
 
 216 dUO, QUIN, aUOMINUS, WITH SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 (6) Qui n is used in the sense of " but,'' or " as not,'' after 
 negative sentences ; and in the sense of " that not," and " that,'* 
 after non dubito, non dubium est, &c. ; in the sense of 
 *'-from" (.— but that) after verbs of restraining, &c. 
 
 (c) (1) What stands in the Quid obstat quominus Ju- 
 way of Julius being lius sit beatus? 
 happy {= what stands 
 in the way in order 
 that Julius may not be 
 happy)? 
 (2) Nothing hinders him 
 from doing this (= no- 
 thing impedes, in order 
 that he may not). 
 (c) Qudminus is used (in preference to ne) after verbs 
 of hindering, preventing, standing in the way of, &c. (It can 
 generally be rendered into English by of, or from, with a parti- 
 ciple, as above.) 
 
 ■ (559.) Translate into English. 
 
 (a) duo (= in order that, used instead of fi t, with comparatives). 
 
 Caesar milites hortatus est ut fortes essent.— Caesar milites 
 hortatus est quo fortiores essent. — Eo opere perfecto 
 (456) Caesar praesidia disponit, castella communit, quo facil- 
 ius, si Helvetii ti-ansire conentur (542, b, 2) prohibere possit. 
 — Scrips!, ut auctoiitatem haberem. — Scripsi quo in suadendo 
 (488) plas auctoiitatis (186, a) haberem. — Auxilium rogant, 
 lit hostiiim copias sustineant. — Subsidium rogant, quo fS,- 
 cilius hostium copias sustineant. 
 {b) auln {= but that). 
 
 Nemo est tam fortis quin rei novitate (55, a) perturbetur. 
 — Orgetorix mortuus est, neque abest suspicio quin ipse sib! 
 mortem consciv6rit. — Helvetii non diibitantquin Romani 
 ^duis {abl., verb of depriving) libertatem ereptiiri sint. — 
 Non dubium est quin cives, iibi {when) patriS, in periciilo 
 futura sit (534, e), fortiter pugnaturi sint. — Non dubito 
 quin puerumbene educaturus sis. — Turpe estfalli. — Tur- 
 pius est fallere. — Non dubium est quin turpius sit failure 
 quam falli. — Gennani retineri non pot^rant quin in nostros 
 tela conjicfirent. 
 
aUUM WITH SUBJUNCTIVE. 317 
 
 (c) Q, u 6 m i n u s (= iri order that not). 
 Per Labienum stetit quominus RomanI oppidum occupa- 
 rent Nostrorum ignavia obstabat quominus hostes super- 
 
 arentur. — Non me impedies quominus id f aciam. — Sen- 
 ectus non impedit quominus litterarum studia tenearaus. 
 
 (560.) Translate into Latin. 
 
 [Remember the rule for the Succession of Tenses (551, 3).] 
 (a) duo. 
 Caesar, having finished the work (= the work being finished), 
 exhorted the soldiers to he of a braver spirit (fortiore animo). — 
 I ask your assistance, that I may do this the more easily. 
 {b) auin. 
 There is no one who does not think that the wise are always 
 happy. — It is not doubtful that Caesar will cross the Rhine. — I 
 do not doubt that my father will come. — I was not doubting that 
 you had educated the boys well. 
 (c) duominus. 
 Nothing hinders me from being happy. — It was the fault of 
 the commander that the soldiers did not fight bravely. — The 
 cowardice of the commander stood in the way of our taking- 
 po8session-of the town. 
 
 LESSON XCII. 
 
 Use of Qutim, with the Subjunctive. 
 
 (561.) The conjunction quum (sometimes written cum) 
 has two uses : (1) to denote time simply {when, while) ; (2) to 
 denote a cause, or reason {since). The former is called quum 
 temporal, the latter quum causal. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 (562.) Vocabulary. 
 
 To contemplate, contemplari (at-), 
 
 dep. 
 To perceive, anTmadvert6rS (vert-, 
 
 vers-, animum-f ad+vertere). 
 To delay, tardarg (av-, at-). 
 
 To get sight of, conspfcgre (spex-, 
 
 spect-). 
 Incessant, conti.vuous, continens, 
 
 (nent) is (107). 
 Of right. jusHt/, iixr& [abl. of jus). 
 
 T 
 
ai8 
 
 aUUM WITH SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 To order, jubere, does not take ut \ Destruction, interitus, fls. 
 
 with subj., but ace. with inf. ; he 
 ordered them to await = jussit eos 
 expectarg. 
 
 To make-haste, matuitire (av^, at-) 
 To announce, uuntiarg (av-, at-). 
 To meet, conv6nire (ven-, vent-). 
 
 Quuni ccelum contempla- 
 mur, Dei magnitudinem 
 admiramur. 
 
 (563.) Examples and Rules, 
 {a) When we contemplate the 
 
 firmament, we wonder at 
 
 the greatness of God. 
 
 {a) Rule of Syntax. — Quum, when used simply to express 
 the time (especially with the primary tenses), is followed 
 by the indicative. 
 
 (6) Ccesar^ when he had con- Caesar, quum Pompeium vi 
 quered ( = having con- cisset, in Asiam trajecit. 
 quered) Pompey, crossed 
 over into Asia. 
 
 {b) Rule of Syntax. — Quum temporal is followed by the 
 imperfect or pluperfect subjunctive, if the events de- 
 scribed depend on each other, and especially when the 
 aorist perfect is used in the principal sentence. 
 
 [In the above example, the verb trajecit, of the principal sentence, 
 is in the aorist perfect. In all such cases, the subordinate sentence with 
 quum can be rendered by the English participle, as in the example 
 above, and in the two following.] 
 
 The preetor, having come 
 (=when he had come) 
 into the forum, perceived. 
 
 The commander, having got 
 sight of the enemy, or- 
 dered. 
 
 (c) Since these things are so. 
 
 Since they cannot defend 
 themselves. 
 
 Although the soldiers were 
 retarded by rains, yet they 
 overcame all (obstacles). 
 
 Praetor, quum in forum v© - 
 nisset, animadvertit(perf.). 
 
 ImpSrator, quum hostes con 
 spexissit, jussit. 
 
 Quse q u u m ita s i n t. 
 
 Quum se defendere non 
 possint. 
 
 Milites, quum imbribus tar- 
 da r e n t u r, t&men omnift 
 superaverunt. 
 
 (c) Rule of Syntax. — Q u u m causal (signifying since, or 
 although) is always followed by the subjunctive. 
 
aUUM WITH SUBJUNCTIVE. 219 
 
 (564.) Translate into English. 
 
 1. duum temporal, with subjnnctive (563, b). 
 
 Caesar, quum id nuntiatum esset, matruravit ab urbe 
 proficisci. — Quum legio decima constitisset, omnes hnstes 
 ad eiim locum contenderunt. — Quum legatus ad oppidum a c - 
 cessisset, pueri mulieresque pacem ab Romanis petiverunt. 
 — Quum Caesar ad oppidum accessisset, oppidam pacem 
 ab eo petierunt. — Quum imperator signum d e d i s s e t, milites 
 in hostes impetum fecerunt. — Csesar, quum Gallos vicisset, 
 in Italiam contendit {per/.). — Quum legati Caesarera in itinera 
 convenissent, eos suum adventum expectare jussit. 
 
 2. duum causal {since, or although), with subjunctive (563, c). 
 Milites, quum frigore et imbribus tardarentur, tamen 
 
 continent! labore (55, a) omnia superaverunt. — Cicero jur6 
 pater p§,triae dictus est, quum urbem ab interitu servasset.* 
 — iEdui, quum se suaque ab Helve tiis defendere non pbs- 
 s i n t, legates ad Caesarem mittunt, rogatum (379) auxilium. — 
 Quum omnes honunes mortales s i n t, dtiam tu morieris. 
 
 (565.) Translate into Latin. 
 
 1. duum temporal, with subjunctive (563, b). 
 
 The ambassadors having asked (= when the ambassadors had 
 asked) peace of Caesar, he ordered them to await his coming. — 
 Caesar having ordered th'em {= when Ccesar had ordered them) 
 to await his coming, (they) obeyed. — The lieutenant, when that 
 was (=had been) announced, returned to the citadel. — The 
 fifth legion having halted, the enemy made an attack upon 
 them. — The praetor, having come into the forum, saw the cap- 
 tives. — The boy, having approached the wood, heard a voice. 
 
 2. duum causal, with subjunctive (563, c). 
 
 Since these things are so, let us believe (528, 6, 1). — Nations, 
 when they cannot defend themselves, ask assistance. — The 
 scout, though he was delayed by the cold, came to the camp.— 
 Since Caesar took- away (eripere) liberty from the iEduans, 
 they rightly feared. 
 
 • Contracted from serv avis set. 
 
S20 
 
 RELATIVE SENTENCEa. 
 
 LESSON XCIII. 
 
 Use of the Subjunctive in Relative Sentences. 
 
 (566.) The relative pronoun often takes the place of a con- 
 junction in introducing a sentence, and is therefore followed by 
 the subjunctive. The following examples illustrate some of 
 these uses. 
 
 You err who think. 
 
 They sent men who should seek for 
 
 peace. 
 I am not he who can be delighted 
 with vices. 
 
 (a) You eiT because you think = 
 
 (b) They sent men to seek for 
 peace = 
 
 (c) I am not such a man as to be 
 delighted with vices = 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 (567.) Vocabulary. 
 
 A herald, a proclaimer, praeco, (prae 
 
 con) is (333). 
 A Nervian, Nervius, i. 
 It pleased, plScuit (with dat.). 
 At length, demum. 
 Affection, affectio, (tion) is (333, R.) 
 To hurt, nocere (with dat.). 
 
 To be present, adess6 (ad+esse). 
 To bear, ferre [irreg.). 
 Fortunate, fortunatus, fi, tlm. 
 A youth, adolescens, (cent) is (m. 
 
 and f., 25, a). 
 Innocence, innbcentia, sb. 
 Fit far, xdoneus, a, um (with dot.). 
 
 (568.) Examples and Rule, 
 
 (a) Hannibal did wrong in 
 wintering {= because he 
 wintered) at Capua. 
 
 Male fecit Hannibal, qui Ca- 
 pusB hiemaverit {=■ whx) 
 wintered at Capua). 
 
 Here qui introduces the ground or cause of the judgment that Hanni- 
 bal erred. 
 
 (6) They send ambassadors Legates mittunt, qui dicant. 
 
 to say {=who may say). 
 They sent ambassadors to 
 
 say {=:who might say). 
 Here qui (=ut ii) introduces a. purpose. 
 
 Legates miserunt, qui dicS- 
 rent. 
 
 (c) You are not the man to 
 be ignorant. 
 
 He ordered all (those) who 
 could bear arms to be 
 present. 
 
 Non is Ss, qui nescias 
 
 (= you are not he who can 
 
 be ignorant). 
 Omnes (eos understood) qui 
 
 arma feiTe p o s s e n t, adessS 
 
 jussit. 
 
RELATIVE SENTENCES. 221 
 
 In these examples, qui introduces a nearer definition of the demon- 
 strative, which is expressed or implied. 
 
 (d) Rule of Syntax. — The subjunctive is used in a relative 
 sentence to express a ground, a purpose, or to give a 
 nearer definition of a demonstrative expressed or implied. 
 
 Rem.l. Talis, tarn, tantus, it a, &c., maybe these demonstra. 
 
 tives, aa well as is, ea, id. 
 2. The relative to express a purpose is very common, especially in 
 
 Caesar, and should be thoroughly studied and practised. 
 
 (569.) Translate into English, 
 
 [Remember the Tnile for the Succession of Tenses (551, 3).] 
 (a) dui, ground, cause, or reason. 
 
 Erras qui censeas Deum esse injustura. — - Fortunatiis 
 fuit Alexander, qui virtutis suae Homerum prseconem (225, a) 
 invenerit. — O fortunate adolescens, qui tuae virtutis H6- 
 merum prseconem i n v e n e r i s. — Nervii incusaverunt reliquos 
 Belgas q u i se popiilo Romano (54) dedidissent. 
 {b) dui, purpose. 
 
 Eripiunt aliis (153, a) quod aliis (54) largiantiir. — 
 liCgatos ad Romanes miserunt, qui peterent pacem. — Caesar 
 equitatum praemittit, qui* videant quas in partes hostes itSr 
 faciant (534, d). — ImpSrator misit exploratores, qui cognos- 
 cerent qualis esset (534, d) natura mentis. — Caesar copiaa 
 suas in proximum collem subduxit, equitatumque, qui s u s - 
 tineret hostium imp^tum, misit. — Ariovistus omnes copias, 
 qufe nostros perterrerent, et munitione (153, a) pr6- 
 hiberent, misit. — Placuit Caesari iit ad Ariovistum legatoar 
 mitteret (548, a). — Placuit Caesari iit ad Ariovistum legates 
 mitteret, qui a,be6 postiilarent, ut aiiquem locum collo- 
 quio (54) diceret (548, a). — Tiim demum Ariovistus partem 
 suarum copiarum q u ae castra oppugnarent misit. 
 (c) dui, defining a demonstrative [express or implied). 
 
 Imp^rator omnes cives qui arma ferre p o s s e n t adesse 
 jussit. — Legatus poposcit (411, a) obsides, arma, servos, qui ad 
 Helvetios perfugissent. — Milites ea quae imperarentut 
 
 * Equitatum [cavalry) being a noun of multitude, the relative qui 
 may be in the pluraL 
 
 T2 
 
222 RELATIVE SENTENCES. 
 
 Kbenter f ecerunt. — Non talis siim qui te fa 11a m. — Inno- 
 centia est afFectio talis animi, quae noceat nemini (54). 
 
 (570.) Translate into Latin. 
 
 (a) Caesar did badly in-crossing {who crossed, perf. subj.) the 
 Khine. — They err who think that the soul is not immortal. — 
 The father censured his son for setting-out* (= who had set out, 
 plup. subj.) from the city. 
 
 (b) Caesar sends forward scouts, to choose {= who may choose) 
 a place fit for the camp. — Caesar sent ambassadors to Ariovistus 
 to defnand {=who should demand). — The general brings back 
 his forces to the hill, and sends forward the cavalry to sustain 
 {= who may sustain) the attack. 
 
 • Proficiscor. 
 
§ 17. 
 ORATIO OBLIQUA. (XCIV.) 
 
 LESSON XCIV. 
 Or alio Ohliqua {Oblique Narration). 
 
 (571.) In relating the words of another, we may either, (1) 
 represent him as speaking in the first person, and give his words 
 precisely as they were uttered ; e. g., " He said, '■I will come ;' " 
 or, (2) we may state what he said in a narrative form ; e. g.^ 
 •'He said that he would come.^^ The former is called Oratio 
 recta {direct narration) ', the latter, Oratio obliqua {ob- 
 lique narration). 
 
 ^^ The example above given shows that the moods must be different 
 in the two modes of narration. 
 
 (572.) The sentences introduced in the oratio obliqua 
 are ei^er principal or subordinate ; e. g., 
 
 Ariovistus said that he would not wage war upon the 
 ^duans, if they paid the tribute yearly. 
 
 In this example, the sentence in spaced printing is the 
 principal sentence ; the sentence in italic the subordinate 
 sentence. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 (573.) Vocabulary. 
 
 To bring upon, to wage, inferre (il- 
 
 lat-). irreg. 
 Tribute, stipendium, i. 
 Yearly, quotannis (used as adv.). 
 To pay, pend6r6 (pep end-, pens-). 
 To show, point oict, ostendere (os- 
 
 tend-, ostens-, and ostent-). 
 To excel, praestarS (praestit-, praes- 
 
 tit-, and praestat-). 
 Because, /pro^t&reA qpJod. 
 
 To get, to gain for another, concfl- 
 
 iar6 (av-, at-). 
 To get possession of, potiri, (pfttit) 
 
 dep. (governs gen. or abl.). 
 Very easy, perfScilis, e (with dot.). 
 AffirrHj confirmare (av-, at-). 
 I^^ The Helvetians intend, Hel- 
 
 vetils est m Snimo (= it is in 
 
 mind to the Helvetians). 
 
2S4 ORATIO OBLiaUA. 
 
 (574.) Examples and Rules. 
 
 {a) Ariovistus said that he 
 would not wage war upon 
 the jEduans. 
 
 Ariovistus dixit, se ^duis 
 bellum non illaturum 
 esse. 
 
 {a) Rule of Syntax. — In principal sentences in oratio 
 o b 1 i q u a, the accusative with Hie infinitive is used. 
 Kem. When they express a command or wish, the subj. is used. 
 {h) Ariovistus said that he ^ Ariovistus dixit, s e iE d u i s 
 would not wage war upon \ bellum non esse illa- 
 the JEduans, if they paid \ t u r u m, 5I stipendium quot- 
 the tribute yearly. j annis penderent. 
 
 {b) In subordinate sentences in oratio obliqua, the sub- 
 junctive is alv^rays used {e. g.., p e n d e r e n t). 
 
 (c) The lieutenant denied 
 that he had crossed the 
 Wiine. 
 
 He denies that he can give. 
 
 Legatus negavit se Rhenum 
 transisse.* 
 
 Negat seposs6dare. 
 
 (575.) Ti^anslate into English. 
 
 Caesar dixit se, postquam hostes fusi essent, castra 
 muniturum esse. — De decima legione Caesar non dubitabat. 
 — Caesar dixit, se de decima legione ijon dubitare. — 
 Caesar dixit, se cum sola decima legione esse ittirum.f 
 — Caesar dixit se cum sola decima legione, de qua non diibi- 
 taret, esse iturum. — Imperator dixit, maximas nationes 
 pulsas superatasque esse. — Helve tiis (54) perfacile erat 
 totius Galliae imperio {dbl.) potiri. — Dumnorix ostendit, Hel- 
 vetiis perfacile esse, quum virtute (55, a) omnibus 
 {dat.) praestarent, totius Galliae imperio potiri. — Dumnorix 
 ipse Castico (54) regnum conciliaturus erat. — Dumnorix con- 
 firmat se Castico regnum conciliatiirum esse. — Hel- 
 vetiis est in animo iter per provinciam f acere ; aliud iter 
 habent nullum. — Sibi esse in animo (573, i^"),dicunt Hel- 
 v^tii, sine ullo maleficio iter per provinciam f acere, prop- 
 terea quod aliiid iter habeant nullum. — Imperator non 
 potest iter Helvetiis (54) per provinciam dare. — Imperator 
 
 * Past infill, of transirg. t Fut. infin of !r6, to go. 
 
ORATIO OBLiaUA. 225 
 
 nggat se, morS ^t exemplo popiili Romani, posse iter Hel- 
 vetiis per provinciam dare. 
 
 (576.) Translate into Latin, 
 
 Caesar said that he, after Pompey was conquered, would 
 cross-over into Asia. — Caesar had full confidence in 
 {==did not doubt concerning) the fourth legion. — Caesar said 
 that he .would attack the town with the fourth legion 
 alone, in which he had full confidence. — Cicero said that the 
 greatest cities had he en attacJce d. — The lieutenant 
 affirms that he will lead the army across the 
 Rhine, if the enemy attempt to hinder (them) (prohibere). — 
 The Helvetians say that they intend (573, ^^) to seek 
 peace of Ctesar. 
 
§ 18 
 IMPERSONAL VERBS. (XCV.— XCVI.) 
 
 LESSON XCV. 
 Impersonals. — Pudet, Piget, TcEdet, SfC. 
 
 (577.) Impersonal verbs are those which have no subject, 
 and take the pronoun it before them in English; e. g., pluit, 
 it rains. 
 
 (578.) (a) Some impersonals are never used in the personal 
 form; e.g., piget, it grieves, &c.; {b) others are simply the third 
 person of personal verbs : e. g., placet, it pleases (placeo, I 
 please), (c) Again, the third person singular of many intran- 
 sitive verbs is used impersonally in the passive : c u r r 1 1 ii r, 
 they run (it is run) ; I am envied, invideturmihi; nun- 
 ciatiim est, it was told. 
 
 (579.) {a) The following impersonals (which express certain 
 feelings) take the accusative of the person and genitive of the 
 cause of the feeling. 
 
 Piggt, piguit, it grieves, 
 
 it shames, 
 
 Pude t, pudult, . , 
 
 i one IS ashamed. 
 
 Pcenitet, poBnituit, it repents. 
 
 Tasdet, pertJBSum est, it wearies, disgusts. 
 
 M i s 6 r 6 1, one pities. 
 
 Your foUy grieves m£. [Me pig6t stultitiae tuts (= it 
 
 grieves vie of your folly). 
 
 (6) Sometimes the cause or object of the feeling is expressed 
 by the infinitive, or a sentence with quod. 
 
 / am not ashamed of having done 
 this. 
 
 I repent of offending you. 
 
 Non pudet mfi hoc f e c i s s g (= zi 
 does not shame me to have done 
 this). 
 
 Pcenitet mo quod te offendl 
 {i=.it repents me that I have qf. 
 fended yo%i). 
 
IMPERSONAL VERBS. 227 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 (580.) Vocabulary. 
 
 Indolent, ignav-us, a, um. 
 Folly, ineptiae, arum (57, R.). 
 To sin, peccare (av-, at-). 
 Business, ii6gotium, i. 
 Undertaken, susceptus, a, um (part, 
 of suscipere). 
 
 To confess, fateri (fass-), dep. 
 Because, since, quoniftm [conj.). 
 Almost, paene [adv.). 
 Some day, aliquand6 {adv^. 
 Innocent, imiocens, (irmocent) is 
 Lot, sors, (sort) is (293). [(107). 
 
 (581.) Translate into English. 
 
 {a) Ignavum poenitebit aliquando ignaviae. — Non poeni- 
 tet me hujus consiliT. — Tui* me miseret. — Eos inep- 
 t i a r u m poenitebat. — Pcenitebat me peccat i. — Miseret t e 
 aliorum, tui* nee miseret, nee piidet. — Nos miseret ca- 
 lamitatis tuae. — Nunquam Csesarem suscepti negotii 
 pertaesum est. — Me civitatis morum piget, taedetque. 
 
 (6) Ilium poenitet quod me offenderit. — Socratem 
 non piiduit fateri se multas res nescire. — T e id piiduit 
 face re. — N5n poenitet me vixisse, quoniam non frustra 
 vixi. — Q u e m poenitet peccasse, psene est innocens. 
 
 (582.) Translate into Latin. 
 
 {a) Thou wilt repent of thy folly. — He will be ashamed of 
 his indolence. — We shall be ashamed of thee. — "We pitied 
 them. — He was ashamed of us. — We shall never repent of our 
 industry. — The boy will some-day be ashamed of his indolence. 
 — Thou wilt some-day repent of thy folly. — We are weary of 
 life. — He was ashamed of the citizens. — I am ashamed of you 
 and your ignorance. — Many are grieved (at) their lot {gen.) 
 (= It grieves many of their lot). — I am not only grieved at, but 
 also (sed etiam) ashamed of, my folly (=It not only grieves, 
 but also shames me of my folly). 
 
 (&) I repent of having-sinned. — I am ashamed of doing this. 
 — A wise man is not ashamed to confess that he is ignorant-of 
 many things. — I am weary of living (vivere) . — I repent of hav- 
 ing lived in- vain. — The boy repents of having offended (quod, 
 with perf. suhj.) the master. — The young man is ashamed of 
 having lived in- vain. — The general repented of having moved 
 (inf.) the camp. — The Helvetians repented of having crossed 
 (inf.) the river. — The barbarians repented of having approached 
 {inf.) the rampart (use ad before the accusative). 
 
 * Gen-oitn. 
 
228 
 
 IMPERSONAL VERB3 
 
 LESSON XCVI. 
 Impersonal Verbs, continued, 
 (583.) Vocabulary. 
 
 Ought, it behooves, oportet, 6bat, 
 uit, &c. (with ace. and inf.). 
 
 It is hecomi7ig, dScet (with ace. and 
 inf.). 
 
 It pleases, placet, placuit, &c. (with 
 dat). 
 
 It is of importance, it interests, in- 
 terest (with gen.). 
 
 It concerns, it matters, refert (with 
 
 It is agreeable, libet, or lubet (with 
 
 dat.). 
 
 It is allowed, lawful [one must), li- 
 cet (licuit and licitum est), dat. 
 
 It happens, contingit [dot.). AccidFt 
 (used rather of evil accidents). 
 
 It is expedient, expedit {dot.). 
 
 With my pei-mission, mea voluntata 
 {abl., 55, a). 
 
 gen.). 
 
 (584.) Examples and Rules, 
 
 Pueros oportet diligentes 
 esse {=.it behooves boys to 
 be diligent). 
 D 6 c e t verecundum essS 
 &d61escentem. 
 
 (a) (3 p o r t e t and d e c e t are followed by the accusative 
 and infinitive. 
 
 [H^* Oportet is also followed by the subjunctive.] 
 
 (a) Boys ought to be dili- 
 gent. 
 
 It becomes a young man to 
 be modest. 
 
 Majori parti placuit castrii 
 
 defendere. 
 Placuit Caesari iit S,d Ario- 
 
 vistum legates mitteret. 
 
 (b) (1) It pleased the major- 
 ity to defend the camp. 
 (2) Ccesar determined 
 {==it pleased Ccesar) to 
 send ambassadors to 
 Ariovistus. 
 
 {h) Placet (expressing a purpose) may be followed by tlio 
 dative, with (1) the infinitive, or (2) the subjunctive with iit. 
 
 (c) I may go (= it is allowed 
 
 to me to go). 
 You may go. 
 I might have gone (= it was 
 
 allowed to me to go). 
 I may be idle. 
 I do not choose {=it is not 
 
 agreeable to me). 
 
 Mihi ire licet. 
 
 Tibi ire licet. 
 Mihi ire licuit. 
 
 Mihi otioso esse 1 i c e ti 
 Non libet mihi. 
 
IMPERSONAL VERBS, 229 
 
 (c) Licet, lib St, and, in short, all impersonals which admit 
 to or for after them in English, are followed by the dative. 
 
 (d) It concerns all (=:it is 
 
 the interest of all). 
 It concerns me. 
 It is your concern. 
 It is my business. 
 
 Interest omnium. 
 
 Mea interest. 
 Tua refert. 
 Mea refert. 
 
 (d) Interest governs the genitive ; but when a personal 
 pronoun is to be used, the possessive ablative (mea, tua, &c.) 
 is used instead of the genitive (mei, tui, &c.). Refert is 
 rarely used except with these ablative forms. 
 
 (585.) Translate into English. 
 
 Omnium interest vera {accus.pl.) dicere. — Interest 
 mea recte facere. — Non libet mihi praelium committere. — 
 Caesari non placuit praelium committere. — Interest mea 
 hoc (accus.) scribere. — Legatus petebat, ut sibi discedere 
 liceret. — Expedit reipublicsB (Ja^,584, c). — Tibi licet 
 id facere. — Mea voluntate tibi id facere licet. — Helvetii 
 rogant ut (548, a) Caesaris voluntate id facere lie eat. — CaesS,- 
 rem oportet ad Ariovistum venire. — Ariovistus dixit; CaesS,- 
 rem oportere (574, a) ad se venire. — Placuit Caesari ut 
 dScimam legionem mitteret. — Amicitiam immortalem esse 
 oportet. — Mihi negligenti esse non licet. — Nobis venire 
 licuit. — Liberorum (65, R.) interest parentes vivere et 
 salvos esse. — Tibi ignavo esse non licet. — Peccare nemini 
 lice t. — D e c e t te esse diligentem. 
 
 (586.) Translate into Latin. 
 
 Boys ought to be modest (584, a). — You ought to do this. — 
 You ought to have done this (oportuit, with pres. inf.^ 
 f&cere). — It becomes us to follow nature. — It becomes a 
 young man to love his parents. — The general determined (= it 
 pleased the general) to make the attack. — The Helvetians de 
 termined to send ambassadors to Caesar. — You may do this 
 (584, c). — You may not do this. — I do not choose (=it is not 
 agreeable to me) to ride-on-horseback. — I do not choose to come 
 to the city. — It is every-body's interest (= it interests all) to do 
 rightly (584, d). — It is my business to keep (my) word (fides). 
 — You are not allowed to come. — We ought to praise the brave. 
 
 u 
 
§ 19. 
 IRREGULAR VERBS. (XCVII.— CII.) 
 
 LESSON XCVIL 
 
 Possum f Posset Pot-ui, to he able, (can), 
 
 (587.) Pos-sum is compounded of pot-is, able, and the 
 verb sum. The t before s is changed to s ; e. g., pot-siim, 
 pos-siim; pot-sunt, pos-sunt. 
 
 INDICATIVE. 
 
 Pres. Ipos-siim. | p6t-es. |p6t-est. Ipos-sumus. Ipot-estis. [pos-sunt. 
 
 Imp., p6t-6ram; Perf., p6t-ui; Plup., p6t-ueram; Fut, p6t-er6; Put. 
 Per/., p6t-u6r6 ; all regular. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 Pres. Ipos-sim. pos-sls. 
 ImpeTf.\pos-a&m. posses. 
 
 pos-sit. 
 pos-set. 
 
 pos-simus. 
 semus. 
 
 pos-sitis. possint, 
 
 pos-setis 
 
 Perf., p6t-u6rim ; Plup., p6t-uiss6m : regular 
 
 pos-sent. 
 
 Injin. Pres., pos-s6 ; Perf., p6t-uiss6 ; Part., pot-ens (used only as an 
 adjective). 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 (588.) Vocabulary, 
 
 Laughter, risus, us, m. 
 
 To sow, sfirSrS (sev-, sat-). 
 
 Good deed, act of kindness, b6n6f i- 
 
 cium, i. 
 Reap, mgtfirS (messu-, mess-). 
 To do good to, to benefit, pr6dess6 
 
 (prof U-, prd+sum) ; governs dat. 
 Hang over, impendere. 
 
 (589.) Examples, 
 {a) To be very powerful. 
 
 (&) Of the whole of Gaul, the 
 Helvetians are the most 
 poiperful. 
 
 red' 
 
 To render, reddfire (reddid-, 
 
 dit-). 
 Influence, gi-atia, ve. 
 Fraud, fraus, (fraud) is (293). 
 Restrain, retinere (r^tinu-, rStent-. 
 
 re+t6nere). 
 With equanimity, aequo Snimo {all. 
 
 ■=■ with equable mind). 
 
 Plurimum posse (= to be very 
 
 much able). 
 Totius Galliae plurimum Hal- 
 vetii possunt. 
 
(c) A very few can keep 
 
 #(many). 
 {d) In the rest of Gaul. 
 
 POSSE, TO BE ABLE. 231 
 
 Perpauci prohibere possunt. 
 
 In reliqua Gallia. 
 
 [What is the rule for the Succession of Tenses ? 551, 3.1 
 [What case do the compounds of sum (prosum, desum, &c.) govern ? 
 267, b.] 
 
 (590.) Translate into English. 
 
 Beatus esse sine virtute nemo potest. — Per risum multum 
 poteris cognoscere stultum. — Sere {imperative) beneficia, ut 
 p o s s i 8 (548, a) metere fructum. — Viri boni sumus, si (iis) 
 prosiimus, quibus p o s s u m u s. — Semper ita vivamus (528, b) 
 ut rationem reddere possimus (553, b). — Mons altissimus 
 impendet ut fS,cile perpauci prohibere possint (553, b). — 
 Mons altissimus impendebat ut facile perpauci prohibere pos- 
 se n t. — Sine agricultura homines vivere non p o s s u n t. — Nostri 
 hostes consequi non potuerunt, quod equites insiilam capers 
 non potuerant. — Divitiacus plurimum domi {at home) atque 
 in reliqua Gallia poterat (589, a). — Fraus est accipere quod 
 non poteris reddere. — Non est dubium quin totius Galliae 
 plurimum Helv6tii possint (558, b). — Geraiani rStineri non 
 poterant quin in nostros tela conjicerent (558, &, 6). — Ceesar 
 potest iter Helvetiis (54) dare. — Caesar negat se posse iter 
 Helvetiis dare. — Caesar negat se, more et exemplo (55, a) populi 
 Romani, posse iter ulli (194, R.) per provinciam d&re. 
 
 (591.) Translate into Latin. 
 
 Men cannot be happy without virtue. — ^Without arts we can- 
 not live. — Let us always so live (528, b) that (553, b) we may 
 be able to die with equanimity. — Let us sow good-deeds, that 
 we may be able to reap fruit. — The chief was very powerful, 
 not only (non solum) at home, but also (sed etiam) in the 
 rest of Gaul. — Caesar denies that (574, c) he is able to give a 
 passage to the ambassadors through the province. — Caesar finds- 
 out (r^perit) that the chief is very powerful {accus. with inf.). 
 — Caesar finds out that the chief is very powerful, not only at 
 home, but also among the neighbouring states. — The enemy 
 cannot be restrained from (quin) hurling darts against our 
 soldiers. 
 
232 
 
 VELLE, NOLLE, MALLE. 
 
 LESSON XCVIII. 
 
 Velle, to be willing. — Nolle, to be unwilling, — MalU, 
 to be more willing, to prefer, 
 (592.) Nolo = non volo ; malo = magis volo. 
 
 (a) INDICATIVK. 
 
 Pres. 5 
 
 v6l6. 
 nold. 
 maid. 
 
 VIS. 
 
 nonvis. 
 mavis. 
 
 vult. 
 
 nonvult. 
 
 mavult. 
 
 voliimus. 
 nolumus. 
 malumus. 
 
 valtis. 
 
 nonvultis. 
 
 mavaltis. 
 
 vfilTint. 
 nolunt. 
 inalunt. 
 
 Rem. The following tenses are regular: Imperf., vole bam, nolQ- 
 bam, malebam; Perf., volui, nolul, malui; Fut, vol&m, 
 nolam, malam; Fut. Per/,, vdluero, ndluerd, malu6rd. 
 
 V 
 
 
 (6) SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 
 
 
 " [ 
 
 v6l- 
 nol- 
 mal- 
 
 > Tm. 
 
 is. 
 
 It. 
 
 imus. 
 
 itis. 
 
 int. 
 
 Imperf:). 
 
 vell- 
 noU- 
 mall- 
 
 > 6m. 
 
 es. 
 
 St. 
 
 emus. 
 
 6tis. 
 
 ent. 
 
 Rem. 1. Regular are, Perf., volu6rIm, nolufirim, mftlu6riin ; Pluperf, 
 voluissem, noluiss^m, maluissem. 
 
 2. Imperative, noli, nolitd ; ndlite, nolitote, nSluntfi. (Imperative of 
 v615 and mal8 wanting.) 
 
 3. Participles, vol-ens, nol-ens. 
 
 4. Infinitives : Pres., vell6, nollS, mallg ; Past, v6luissS, n6luiss6, 
 maloissS. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 (593.) Vocabulary. 
 
 To he empty, unoccupied, vacar6 
 
 (av-, at-), intrans. 
 Neighbour, finitimus, ft, um (with 
 
 dat.). 
 Attentive, attentus, a, um. 
 Attentively, attente {adv.). 
 Grant, concession, concessiis, us. 
 Content, contentus, fi, fim (with 
 
 abl). 
 
 (594.) Examples, 
 {a) If ihey wish anything. 
 (a) The verbs velle, noil 
 govern the accusative. 
 
 To seem, viderl {pass, of viderfi). 
 To return, to come bach, rSverti 
 
 (revers-), dep. 
 Old man, senex, (sen) is (108, R. 1). 
 On the Ides of April, ad Idus Apri 
 
 lis (the 13th of April). 
 April, Aprllls, is, m. (25, a). 
 Docile, ddcilis, 6 (104), 
 
 Si quid velint. 
 e, ma lie, as transitive verbs, 
 
VELLE, NOLLE, MALLE. 233 
 
 (&) He is loilling to hear. \ Vult audire. 
 (6) The verbs velle, nolle, malle, take the infinitive 
 after them, as the complementary object (210). 
 
 (c) Caesar is not willing that Non vult Caesar eum locum 
 that country should remain v a c a r e. 
 unoccu^pied. 
 (c) The verbs V e 1 1 e, nolle, malle, admit the accusative 
 with the infinitive after them. 
 
 [What is the rule for principal sentences in oratio obliqua ? (574, a.) 
 For subordinate sentences ? (574, b).] 
 
 (595.) Translate into English, 
 Ego non eadem volo, senex (225, a) quae volui adolescens. 
 
 — Si vis amari, ama {imperative). — Non vult Caesar eum 
 locum vacare. — Noluit Caesar eum locum, unde Helvetii 
 discesserant, vacare ; ne Germani f initimi Galliae (54) essent 
 (548, h). — Boni homines, miseri quam improbi esse, malunt. 
 
 — F6re libenter homines id quod volunt, credunt. — Idem 
 velle 6t idem nolle, ea* firma amicitia est. — Docilis est qui 
 attente vult audire. — Quem docilem velis f^cere, simul 
 attentum facias oportet (584, a, |^^). — Nisi Caesar Romanis 
 (147) soliis imperare voluisset (542, &), a Bruto et Cassio non 
 interfectus esset. — Ariovistus dixit se regnum malle (574, a) 
 Caesaris concessu (55, a) quam jEduorum ben^ficio habere. — 
 Maliimus, ciim virtu te, paucis (55, a) content! esse, quam 
 Bine virtute multa habere. — Aristides bonus esse m a 1 e b a t 
 quam videri. — Habet iracundia hoc mali (186, a, R.) ; non vult 
 regi. — Caesar legatis respondet (574, a) diem se ad deliberan- 
 dum (489) sumpturum (esse); si quid velint (542, 6, 2) ad 
 idiis Aprilis revertantur (574, h). — Tam6n Caesar, ut spatium 
 intercedere posset (548, a) dum milites convenirent, legatis 
 respondit, diem se ad deliberandum sumpturum ; si quid v e 1 - 
 lent, ad Idus Aprilis reverterentur. — Caesar ab Helvetiis dis- 
 
 cedere n 5 1 e b a t. — Omnia Srunt f ^cilia si v6 1 e s (542, h) 
 
 Ariovistus respondet ; si quid Caesar a se v e 1 i t, ilium ad se 
 venire oportere. — Ariovistus respondit, si quid Caesar a s6 vel- 
 le t, ilium ad s6 venire oportere. 
 
 • Efi is in apposition with the clause idem velle et idem nolle, 
 
 U2 
 
II: FERRE, TO BEAR, BRING. 
 
 LESSON XCIX. 
 F e r o, F e r r e, T u 1 i, Latum, to hear, bring, 
 
 (596.) (a) PARADIGM OF IRREGULAR TORMS. 
 
 Pres. Act. f er6. 
 Pres. Pass. f6r6r. 
 
 fers. 
 feiTis. 
 
 fert. 
 fertur. 
 
 ferimus. fertis. fgrurit. 
 
 ferimur. ferimlni. feruntur. 
 
 INFINITIVE. 
 
 Act. 
 Pass. 
 
 Pres., ferr6, to bear. 
 Pres., ferri, to be borne. 
 
 Per/., tulisse, to have 
 
 borne. 
 Perf., latus essS, to 
 
 have been borne. 
 
 Fut., laturiis ess6. 
 Flit., ferendum esse. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 Imperf. Act. ferr- 6m. 6s. 6t. emiis. etis. ent. 
 
 Imperf. Pass, ferr- 6r, eris (e). etur. emur. emmi. entur. 
 
 IMPERATIVE. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Active. 2. f6r, ferto. 3. ferto. 
 
 Passive. 2. ferrg, fertSr. 3. fertor. 
 
 2. ferte, fertotg. 3. f gruntd. 
 2. feriminl. 3. fferuutor. 
 
 (6) The remaining tenses are formed regularly from fer-, 
 the present stem; tul-, the perfect stem; and lat-, the supine 
 stem. 
 
 1. From fdr-, 
 
 Imperfect active and passive, f 6r6bam, f ereba,r. 
 Future active and passive, f eram, es ; f erar, eris. 
 Participle active and passive, ferens, f erendus. Gerund, 
 f erendi, &c. 
 
 2. From tul-, 
 
 Indicative perfect, tuli ; pluperfect, ttilSr&m ; future per- 
 fect, tiilero. 
 Subjunctive perfect, tiilftrim ; pluperfect, tulissSm. 
 
 3. From lat-. 
 
 Participle passive, latiis : hence all the passive forms, latiis 
 
 sum, eram, ero, sim, essem, &c. ; laturus sum, sim, &c. 
 
 (c) The compounds are inflected in the same way ; e. g,, 
 
 inferre, to bring against ; intuli, illatum ;* inf ero, infers, in- 
 
 fert, &c. 
 
 {d) ToUo, tollere, to raise, to take away, forms its perfect 
 and supine from tiili, latum, viz., sustiili, sublatiim. 
 
 • in + lfttuin=illatum, n being changed into 1 before L 
 
FERRE, TO BEAR, BRING. 
 
 235 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 (597.) Vocabulary. 
 
 Frequent, creber, brft, brum (77, a). 
 Rumour, riimor, (nimor) is (319). 
 To bring to, bring, afferr6 (attul-, 
 
 allat-, ad+ferre). 
 To bring together, conferre (contul-, 
 
 coUat-, con+ferrS) ; to betake one's 
 
 self, se conferre. 
 Poor, helpless, inops, (inop) is (in+ 
 
 ops), adj., 107. 
 To prefer, praefen-g (tul-, lat-, pr{B+ , 
 
 ferre) ; governs ace. and dat. 
 Mean, sordid, sordldus, S, tim. 
 
 (598.) Examples, 
 
 {a) It is the part, 
 It is the duty, 
 It is the mark, 
 It is the characteristic, 
 of a loise man. 
 (6) The poets say. 
 
 They say. 
 Ferunt is used for they say. 
 with the infinitive. 
 
 To bring against, inferrS (tul-, lat-) , 
 
 governs ace. and dat. 
 To make war upon one, bellum ali- 
 
 cui inferrS. 
 Especially, pi-sesertim. 
 Giani, gigas, (gigant) is, m. (N. on 
 
 p. 133). 
 To conspire, plot, conjurftre (av-, at-). 
 Impediment, impedimentum, i. 
 Baggage, impedimenta, orum {pi.). 
 Whatever, quicquid (n. of quisquis), 
 
 Est s&pientis {=itisofa 
 loise man). 
 
 Poetse fSrunt. 
 
 F6runt. 
 
 and followed by the accusative 
 
 (599.) Translate into English. 
 
 Eas res Caesar gr^-viter fert. — Caesar dicit, eas res se gravi- 
 ter ferr§. — Sapiens bona suS, sectim (125, II., b) fert. — 
 Terra circa solem ita fertur iit circa earn simul luna fera- 
 tur. — Crebri rum5res ad Caesarem afferebantur, omnes 
 Belgas contra popiilum Rdmanum conjurare, obsides que inter 
 se dare. — Helvetii nostrorum impetus {ace. pi.) sustinere non 
 }X)Ssunt. — Diutius quum Helvetii nostrorum impetus sustinere 
 non possent (563, b) alter! se in montem receperunt, alteri ad 
 impedimenta et caiTos se contiilerunt. — Helvetii in iinum 
 locum impedimenta contiilerunt. — Ferte misero (54) atque 
 inopi (54) auxilium. — Est sapientis (598, a) injurias aequo ani- 
 mo ferre. — Est boni (598, a), miseris atque inopibus auxilium 
 ferre. — Quid quaeque (178, 6) nox aut dies ferat, incertum 
 
239 FIERI, EDERE. 
 
 est. — PScuniam praeferre ftmicitiae sordidum est. — Amlciti- 
 am praeferre pecuniae honestura est. — Ariovistus populo Ro- 
 mano bellum intiilit. — Caesari'nunciatum est (578, c) Ariovis- 
 tum populo Romano bellum intulisse. — Mqnb animo fera- 
 m u s quicquid not)is accidat. — F erenda est fortuna, prse- 
 sertim quae abest a culpa. — ImprobI ad voluptatem feruntur. 
 — Poetae ferunt (598, &), gigantes bellum diis (62, R. 3) in- 
 tulisse. — Demeti'ius, quum pati'ia pulsus esset (563, b) ad 
 Ptolemaeum regem se contulit. — Catilinae socii arma contra 
 patriam fere bant. — Domos suas Helvetii reliquerunt, ut 
 toti (194, R. 1) Galliae bellum inferrent (548, a). 
 
 LESSON C. 
 
 YierU to become, to be done, to happen. — E d e r e, or 
 Esse, to eat, 
 
 1. Fieri. 
 (600.) Fieri forms the passive of f a c S r e, to maKe^ to do. 
 The tenses are formed regularly with the endings of the 4th 
 conjugation, except the infinitive and the imperfect subjunctive. 
 
 INDICATIVE. 
 
 Pres., fi-o, fl-s, fi-t, &c. Imperf., fiebftm, has, &:c. 
 
 Fvt., fiam, fies, &c. -Pfi?/'! factus sum, es, est, &c. 
 
 Plvperf., factus eritn, eras, &c. Fut. Perf., factus ero, eris, &c. 
 
 SUBJtmCTIVE. 
 
 Pres., fislm, fias, &c. Imperf., fierem, fieres, &c. 
 
 INFINITIVE. 
 
 Pres., fieri ; Perf., factus, a, um, esse ; Fut., factum iri, or futurum 
 esse, or f6r6. 
 
 PAKTICIPLES. 
 
 I^res. wan tiDg ; Per/., factus ; Fut., f aciendus. 
 
 Rem. Observe that in all the forms of this verb except fieri and 
 f ierem, rSs, &c., the i is long, contrary to the general rule that a 
 vowel before another is short. 
 
 2. E d e r e (esse). 
 (601.) E d e r e (or esse), to eat, forms all the tenses regu- 
 larly with the endings of the third conjugation ; but it has, in 
 
FIERI, EDERE. 
 
 237 
 
 addition, a few forms similar to those of esse, to be, which 
 are shown in the following table : 
 
 c 
 
 
 edis 
 
 edit 
 
 
 editis 
 
 
 Indic. Pres. ■? 
 
 edo. 
 
 or 
 
 es. 
 
 or 
 
 est. 
 
 edimus. 
 
 or 
 
 estis. 
 
 edunt. 
 
 
 6d6rem 
 
 ederes 
 
 edergt 
 
 ederemus 
 
 edgretis 
 
 edSrent 
 
 SuBJ. Imperf. ) 
 
 or 
 
 or 
 
 or 
 
 or 
 
 or 
 
 or 
 
 i 
 
 essem. 
 
 esses. 
 
 esset. 
 
 essemus. 
 
 essetis. 
 
 essent. 
 
 C 
 
 ed6 
 
 edito 
 
 
 6dite 
 
 editotS 
 
 
 Imperative. } 
 
 or 
 
 or 
 
 
 or 
 
 or 
 
 edunta. 
 
 I 
 
 es. 
 
 esto. 
 
 
 este. 
 
 estotg. 
 
 
 Rem. E s, from esse, to be, k short ; from esse, to eat, it is long (e s). 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 (602.) Vocabulary. 
 
 Sickness, oegritudo, (aegritudin) ts 
 
 (340). 
 To eat up, corrode, ex6d6re (ex+ 
 
 6d6r6). 
 Faie, fatiim, I. 
 Perpetual, perpetuus, ft, um. 
 Poor, pauper, (paup6r) is (107). 
 To dnnJc, blbere (bib-, bibit-). 
 
 To wander, vftgart [dep.). 
 Fewness, small number, paucitas, 
 
 (paucitat) is (293). 
 To be born, nasci (nat-), dep. 
 To admonish, admonere (ad+mp- 
 
 nere, monu-, mdnit-). 
 Among, apud {prep., ace). 
 According to, secundum {prep., ace). 
 Less, minus {adv.). 
 
 (603.) Examples, 
 {a) It happens (it is brought 
 
 to pass) that they wander 
 
 less widely. 
 
 Ut with subjunctive, expressing a consequence, frequently 
 follows f i t. 
 
 (6) He was informed (= he 
 
 Fit, lit ramus late vagen- 
 tur. 
 
 Certior factus est (may be 
 followed by ace. with infin.). 
 Cicero consul factus est. 
 
 was made more certain), 
 (c) Cicero was made consul. 
 The verb fieri admits vl predicate-nominative after it. 
 {d) Nothing could he done. \ Nihil fieri poterat. 
 
 [Repeat the rule for the Succession of Tenses (551, 3).] 
 
 (604.) Translate into English. 
 
 His rebus fit, ut Helvetii minus late vagentur (603, a). — 
 His rebus f i e b a t, ut Helvetii minus late vagarentur. — His 
 rebus f it ut Helvetii minus facile finitimis bellum inferrS pos- 
 sint. — ^De Csesaris adventu iEdui certiores facti sunt.— Cae- 
 
1238 
 
 IRE, aUIRE, NEaUIRE. 
 
 sar, litteris (55, a) Labieni certior fie bat, omnes Belgas con 
 tra populum Romanum conjurare, obsidesque inter se dare.— 
 Imperator dixit, id fieri posse. — Nostrorum propter paucita 
 tern nihil f i e r i poterat. — Labienus praelium commisit, ut un- 
 dique uno tempore (118, II., c) in hostes impetus fie ret. — 
 Nemo fit casu (55, a) boniis. — Poeta nascitur, non fit. — Si 
 fato (55, a) omnia fiunt (542, 6, 1), nihil nos admonere potest 
 ut cautiores f i a m u s. — Contra vim sine vi nihil f i e r i potest. 
 ■ — Diligentia (55, a) omnia fi un t facilia (603, c). — Apud vete- 
 res Romanes, ex agricolis interdimi fie bant consules ; ita 
 Cincinnatus consul (603, c) fact us est. — Omnia quge se- 
 cundum naturam f i u n t, habenda sunt (502) in bonis.* — 
 Saepe qui ex pauperibus divites fiunt, divitiis {ahl., 316, b) 
 uti nesciimt. — Vivimus ut e d a m u s ; non e d i m n s ut vi- 
 vamus.^ — Edere oportet u-t vivamus, non vivere ut 6 dam us. 
 — E s s 6 (601) oportet ut vivas, non vivere ut 6das. — Perpetua 
 cura animum avari exes t. — Bib6, e s. — Bibite, e s 1 6 — 
 ^grittido animum e x e s t. 
 
 LESSON CI. 
 I r e, to go. — Q u i r e, to be able (can). — N e q u i r e, ^o 
 be unable (cannot). 
 (605.) Eo, ire, ivi, itiim, to go, mostly follows the 4th conju- 
 gation ; but is irregular in the present tense, gerund, and su- 
 pine, as appears by the following 
 
 PARADIGM. 
 
 TENSES. 
 
 INDICATIVE. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 Pres. 
 
 e6, is, it, imus, itis, eunt 
 
 earn, eas, eat, eamus, eatis, 6ant. 
 
 Imperf. 
 
 ibam, ibas, ibat, &c. 
 
 ir6m, ires, iret, &c. 
 
 Put. 
 
 ibo, ibis. &c ibunt. 
 
 itnrus, sim, sis, sit, &c. 
 
 Peri. 
 
 ivi or ii, ivisti, ivit or'iit, &c. 
 
 iv6rim, iveris, iv6rit. «5cc. 
 
 Pluperf. 
 
 iveram, iveras, &c. 
 
 ivissem, ivisses, ivisset, 6cc. 
 
 Put. Perf. 
 
 iver6, iveris, &c. 
 
 1 
 
 ,IMPER. jl INFINITIVE. 
 
 SUPINE. 
 
 PARTICIPLE. 
 
 GERUND. 
 
 i, ItO, ltd. 
 
 Pres., ire. 
 
 Itum. 
 
 Pres., iens (euntis). 
 
 eundi. 
 
 it6, itote. 
 
 Perf., ivissS or 
 
 
 
 
 
 isse. 
 
 itu. 
 
 Put., iturus, a, um. 
 
 eundo, &c. 
 
 etlntd. 
 
 Put., ituriim 
 ess6. 
 
 
 Verbal, eundiis, a, um. 
 
 
 Habenda sunt in bonis = should be reckoned among blessings. 
 
IRE, aUIRE, NEaUIRE. 239 
 
 Rem. 1. In the same manner the compounds ai'e formed ; e. g., exirg, 
 
 abire, &c. ; but they generally drop the v in the perfect-stem ; thus, 
 
 ab-ii, ab-isti, ab-iit, abisse, abissem, &c. 
 2. Some of the compounds obtain a transitive force, and then take a 
 
 passive form like other transitive verbs ; e. g., praeterire, to pass 
 
 by ; prsetereSr, I am passed by, &c. 
 
 (606.) Queo, I can, I am, able ; nequeo, I cannot, I am un- 
 able, are conjugated like eo, I go ; but they rsirely occur except 
 in the present tense. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 (607.) Vocabulary. ^ 
 
 By what route? qu6 itiner6 {aht, 
 
 55, a). 
 To perish, p6rir6 (per+ir6). 
 Manfully, viriliter (215, 2). 
 Tell m£, die {imperat. of dicerS). 
 Whether — or, utrum — an. 
 Taken away, s'ublatus, fi, um {part. 
 
 pass, o/'tollerg) (596, d). 
 Of Zurich, Tigurinus, a, um. 
 To suffer, allow, pati (pass-), dep. 
 To fight, decertare (av-, at-). 
 To be sick, aegrotare (av-, at-). 
 Light, lux, (luc) IS (293). 
 
 To go out, exire (ex+ire). Takes 
 abl., with or withotU prep. de. 
 
 To return, rSdlre (re+Ire ; d insert- 
 ed for euphony). 
 
 To undergo, subire (sub+ir6) ; gov- 
 erns accus. 
 
 A return^ returning, reditio, (rSdi- 
 tion) is (333, B.). 
 
 Ready, prepared, piratfis, a, um 
 {part, of pararg). 
 
 To pass over, transirS (trans+irS). 
 
 Before, prse, adv. {or prep, with abl.]. 
 
 Of Cannes. Cannensis, 6 (104). 
 
 Whither, quo, adv. 
 
 ^^ BecoUect, they went = iveruntorierunt. 
 
 he departed =^3.^ lit, rather than Sbivlt; and so of 
 other compounds. 
 [Give the Rule for u t {purpose), 548, a). 
 
 (608.) Translate into English. 
 
 Helvgtii de f inibus suis e x e u n t. — OrgStorix Helvetiis (dat.) 
 persuadet, ut de finibus suis ex e ant. — Orgetorix Helvetiis 
 persuasit, ut d§ finibus suis cum omnibus copiis {property) 
 exirent. — Domum (113, III., R.) redeunt. — Omnia peri- 
 ciilS, subeunt. — Helvetii, domiim reditionis spe sublata 
 (456), pS,rati6res ad omnia peiicula siibeunda (496) erant. 
 — Caesar in Asiam transiit. — Pompeius in Asiam trans- 
 it rat. — Domo (abl.) exirS possunt. — ^Erant omnino itinera 
 duo, quibus itineribus domo exire possent. — ^dui per fines 
 8U6s Helvetios ir6 patiuntur. — Pagus Tigurinus domo exi- 
 
240 IRE, aUIRE, NEaUIRE. 
 
 erat. — Hie pagus unus, quum domo exisset, L. Cassium, 
 consulem, interfecerat, et ejus exercitum siib jugum miserat. 
 — Helve til in earn partem ibunt, ubi Csesar constituent. — 
 Qu6 itinere (55, a) hostes i e r u n t ?-^rE6dem itinere, quo hos- 
 tes ierant, Caesar ad eos contendit, equitatumque omnem 
 ante se mittit. — I bam forte Via Sacra (55, a) sicut meus est 
 mos. — i prae, ego sequar. — Ex pugna Cannensi admodum pauci 
 Romani domum redierunt. — I, quo tefortuna vocet (534, d). 
 — Quicquid transiit temporis {186, a^ Rule) peril t. — Quidam 
 ferro (55, a) decertare acerrime possunt, segrotare viriliter non 
 queunt. — Sine luce colores esse nequeunt. — Pompeius 
 periit. — Die utrum queas an nequeas mecum ire. — 
 Risus interdura ita repente erumpit, ut earn ciipientes (442, c) 
 ttnerS nequeamus (553, 6, R.). 
 
 ..A>..?i*T.v 
 
§ 20. 
 DEFECTIVE VERBS. 
 
 LESSON CII. 
 Aio, Inquanif Novi, Memini, Caspi, Odi. 
 (609.) Ai o, I say, say yes, affirm, is used in very few tenses. 
 
 Ind. Pres. 
 Ind. Imperf. 
 Subj. Pres. 
 Part. Pres. 
 
 aio. ais. 1 ait. 
 
 aiebS,m. -bas. -bat. -bamus. 
 
 aias. j ault. | 
 
 aiens (aientis) used orrly as adjec. 
 
 batis. 
 
 aiunt. 
 bant, 
 aiant. 
 
 (610.) Inquam, I say, is used between the words of a quo- 
 tation. 
 
 Ind. Pres. 
 Ind. Imperf. 
 
 Ind. Fut. 
 Ind. Perf. 
 Subj. Pres. 
 
 inquam. mquis 
 
 mquiam. 
 
 inquiSs. 
 inquisti. 
 as. 
 
 inquit. 
 
 inquimus 
 
 inquiebit 
 
 
 or 
 
 
 inquibat. 
 
 
 inquiet. 
 
 
 inquit. 
 
 
 at. 
 
 atis. 
 
 inquiunt. 
 inquiebant. 
 
 (611.) No VI, I know; mSmlni, I remember ; coepi, / 
 have begun, I began ; 5 d i, J hate, are perfect forms with 
 present meanings. All the tenses made on the perfect stem 
 exist, regularly formed. 
 
 rNFINITIVE. 
 
 ndvissg, 
 to know. 
 
 meminissg, 
 to remember. 
 
 coepissS, odissg, 
 
 to have besrun. to haie. 
 
 INDICATIVE AND SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 . (I, isti. it, &c. 
 
 ^' grim, 6rls, 6rit, &c. 
 
 l^issfim, isses, iss6t, &c. 
 
 6d- 
 
 Ind. Pres., / kyiow. 
 Ind. Past, I remembered. 
 Ind. Fut., / shall begin. 
 Subj. Pres., / may know. 
 Subj. Past, / might hate. 
 
 Imperative, m6ment6, mementotfi (the others wanting). 
 
 ^p* Recollect, ■a.bvi-=il know [not I have known); noveram, I knew 
 (not I had known), &c. ; and so of the others. But c cb p i, n 6 v i, Ac, 
 may be used as Jierf. pres., = / Jtave known, I have begun^ &,<:. 
 
 X 
 
242 
 
 AIO, INaUAM, NOVI, ETC. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 (612.) Vocabulary. 
 
 To fall back, to give way, pedem 
 
 rSferrS (= to draw back the foot). 
 Young, raw, inexperienced, tiro, (ti- 
 
 ron) 13 (107). 
 Surly, fgroculiis, a, um. 
 Lucius Varius, L. Varius, T. 
 Forgetful, immemor, (immemor) is 
 
 (107) ; governs genit. 
 Calmly, quietly, tranquillitSr (ti-an- 
 
 quill-us, 215, 2, a). 
 
 (613.) Examples. 
 
 {a) He exhorts Oieni to re- 
 
 member, 
 (b) ArisUdes, when asJoed 
 
 what icas just, replied, 
 
 •' Not to covet what belongs 
 
 to others.'^ 
 
 Cruelty, soevitia, m. 
 
 Demonax, Deraouax, (act) is (a phi- 
 losopher of Hadrian's time). 
 
 To pkilosophizf , pliil6s6phari {dep.). 
 
 In no way, by liO means, nullo modo 
 [ahl). 
 
 Conscious, conscivLS, a, iim (with dat. 
 of person, gen. of diing). 
 
 Livy, Livius, i. 
 
 Hortatur eos ut mSrainS- 
 
 rin £. 
 Aristides inten-ogatus quid 
 justum esset ? " Aliena," 
 in quit, "non concupiscSre'* 
 (— " Not to covet," said he, 
 "what," &c.). 
 
 t^ I n q u a m is used in quoting the very words of another 
 (oratio recta), and is always placed among the words quoted 
 (as " said he'"' in English). A i t is used generally in quoting 
 the sense^ not the exact words of another (oratio obliqua). 
 
 (c) He began to build the 
 
 city. 
 The city began to be built. 
 
 Urb6m sedificare c oe p i t. 
 Urbs sedificari coepti est. 
 
 t^^ If a passive infinitive is used with the word begin, you 
 must employ the passive form, coeptus sum, instead of c oe p i ; 
 coeptiis eram, instead of cceperam, &c. 
 
 (614.) Translate into English. 
 
 MDites, vulngribus defessi, pedem r^ferre coeperunt. — 
 "Quid tu," in quit Labienus, "miles tiro {voc.) tam f Srocu- 
 lus es?" Turn miles: "Non sum," in quit, "tiro, Labiene, 
 s6d de dgcima 16gion6 vSteranus." — Helvetii nostros lacessSre 
 coeperunt. — Hostes, qui in montem sese r^cepdrant, praelium 
 redintegiare coep6runt. — Caesar dicit (574, a), id fieri posse, 
 si iEdui finitimorum Sgros popular! coepfirint (574, b). — 
 
AlO, IXaUAM, NOVI, MEMINI, ETC. 243 
 
 Milites in murum lapides jacoro coeperunt. — Undique in 
 murum lapides jaci (613, c, t^") coepti sunt. — Dux milites 
 hortatur ut veteris glorice merainerint. — Legati dixerunt se 
 portus {accus. pi.) insulasque n o v i s s e. — Multi te o d e r u n t, 
 si te solum amas. — Germani superbiam L. Varii et saevitiam 
 odisse coeperant. — Omnes immemorem beneficii 6 d e - 
 runt. — TuUus Hostilius, ut Livius ait, f erocior etiam Romulo 
 (360, c) fuit. — S6crS,tes interrogatus quinam hSmines tranquil- 
 liter viverent (534, e)1 "Qui," in quit, "nuUius turpitudi- 
 nis sibi conscii sunt." — Demonax inten-ogatus, quando coepisset 
 (534, e) philosophari ? " Tum," in quit, "cum cognoscSre 
 meipsum (159) ccEpi." — Hannibal Romanos sic ode rat, ut 
 in gratiam cum illis redire null5 modo (55, a) posset (553, &, R.). 
 — Is miser est, quem omnes boni oderunt. — ^^Novimus 
 Aristidis justitiam, n o v i m u s Socratis sapientiam. — Non 
 Smabimus bonos m5res, si non oderiraus malos. 
 
■]:r''-' 
 
PART III. 
 
 SUMMARY OF ETYMOLOQt. 
 
T T 
 
SUMMARY OF ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 § 1. LETTERS, QUANTITY, &c. 
 
 (615.) 1. The letters are the same as in English, with the omission of w. 
 
 2. Six are vowels, a, e, i, o. u, y : the remaining nineteen are consoiiants. 
 
 3. The consonants are divided into 
 
 (a) Liquids, 1, ni, n, r ; ^ 
 
 (b) Spirants, h, b, j ; 
 
 (c) Mutes ; the remaining consonants, among which there are 
 
 (1) c-sounds, c, g (eh) ; q ; 
 
 (2) p-sonnds, b, p (ph) ; 
 
 (3) t-sounds, d, t (th) ; 
 
 (4) Double consonants, x, z. 
 
 4. The diphthongs are, au, eu, ae, oe (rare, ei, oi, ui), 
 
 (file.) GENERAL RULES OF QUANTITY. 
 
 (1) A vowel before another is sJiort ; e. g., via. 
 
 (2) A vowel before two consonants, or a doable one, is long by post- 
 tio7t ; e. g., am ant. 
 
 f As a mute followed by a liquid causes some exceptions to this role, 
 we shall mark the quantity, in that case, doubtful ; thus, ftgri.] 
 
 ^3) All diphthongs are Isng ; e. g., mens », aii-rum. 
 (4) Contracted syllables are lo7ig ; e. g., edge (coago). 
 
§ 2. NOUN. 
 
 (617.) 1. The "noun is the name of any object (person or thing). Nouns 
 are proper (13, a), common (13, h), or abstract (13, c). 
 
 2. There are three genders, masculine, feminine, and neuter : two num- 
 bers, singular and plural : six cases, nomiiiative, genitive, dative, accusa- 
 tive, vocative, and ablative : and^tJe declensions. 
 
 3. GENERAL RULES OF GENDER. 
 
 Males, rivers, wincLs, and mountains most we find 
 With months and nations MAsctrLiNE declined ; 
 "RvLt females, cities, countries, trees we name. 
 As Feminine ; most islands, too, the same. 
 Common are such as both the genders take, 
 And Neuter all words undeclined we make. 
 [There are many exceptions from these rules, which must bo learned 
 by observation.] 
 
 First Declension. — {^Genitive- ending se.) 
 
 (618.) 
 
 
 CASE-ENDINGS. 
 
 
 
 
 Nom., Voc. 
 
 Gen. 
 
 Dat. 
 
 Ace. 
 
 Abl. 1 
 
 Sing. 
 Plur. 
 
 a. 
 ee. 
 
 ae. 
 arum. 
 
 aj. 
 
 is. 
 
 &m. 
 ds. 
 
 a. 
 
 is. 
 
 Rem. 1. Quantity. — Final syllables all long but S, 7wm. and voc.; 
 
 am, ace. ; and um, gen. plur. 
 2. Gender. — Nouns of first declension are feminine, except names of 
 
 male beings, &c. 
 
 Second Declension. — {Genitive- ending I.) 
 
 (619.) Masculine nouns of second declension have nominative-ending 
 ns ; neuter nouns, um. 
 
 (a) CASE-ENDINGS, MASCULINES. 
 
 
 Nom. 
 
 Gen. 
 
 Dat. 
 
 Ace. 
 
 Vc.c. 
 
 AbL 
 
 Sing. 
 Plur. 
 
 US. 
 
 i. 
 
 i. 
 orum. 
 
 6. 
 
 Is. 
 
 um. 
 
 OS. 
 
 I. 
 
 6. 
 
 Is. 
 
 
 [b) CASE-ENDINGS, 
 
 NEUTERS. 
 
 
 
 N., A., V. 
 
 Gen. 
 
 Dat., Abl. 
 
 Sing. 
 Plur. 
 
 um. 
 fi. 
 
 I. 
 
 6rum. 
 
 6. 
 
 Is. 
 
NOUN. 
 
 249 
 
 Eem, 1. Quantity. — Short final syllables, us, 6, um, a. 
 Long' " 1, 6, 1 s, 6 s. 
 
 2. Gender. — A few nouns are feminine in us, and a few neuter (see 
 
 62, a. 1). 
 
 3. Stems in r. — (1) All nouns whose stems end in r, reject the ending 
 us in nom. and 6 in voc. ; e. g., field, nom., ag6r (not ag6r-us) ; voc., 
 aggr (not %er-S). (2) Most which have 6 in nom. drop it in the 
 remaining cases ; e.g., nom., ag6r ; gen., Sgri (not ag6r-I). 
 
 4. Exceptions to Case-endings. — (1) Proper names in ius, with 
 filius, genius, mens, have voc. in i ; e. g., Georg-I, fil-i, mi. (2) 
 Deus has voc, deus, nom. plur., dii, dat. and abl. plur., diis. (3) 
 A few take um in gen. plur., instead of orum ; e.g., sestertium. 
 
 Third Declension. — {Genitive-ending Is.) 
 
 (620.) [a) CASE-ENDINGS, MASCULINES AND FEMININES. 
 
 
 Nom., Voc. 1 Gfn. 
 
 Dat. 
 
 Ace. 
 
 Abl. 
 
 Sing. 
 Plar. 
 
 — is. 
 
 es. um (lum). 
 
 ibus. 
 
 em (im). 
 
 63. 
 
 6(1). 
 ibus. 
 
 ■ 
 
 
 {b) CASE-ENDINGS, NEUTERS. 
 
 
 
 N., A., V. 1 Gen. 
 
 Dat. 
 
 Abl. 1 
 
 
 Sing. 
 Plur. 
 
 iO"*)- 
 
 is. 
 
 um (ium). 
 
 I. 
 
 ibus. 
 
 ^ffl: 1 
 
 Rem. 1. Quantity. — Final syllables all short but I and 6 s. 
 
 2. Euphonic Rules. — (a) c-sound +s = x: arc-s = ant ; 1 e g - s = lex. 
 (b) t-sound before s is dropped: laud-s = laus ; mont-s = mons. 
 
 3. RtUes of Gender from the Foi-mation of the Nominative. 
 
 [Learn these from 355.] 
 
 4. Peculiar Case-e7idings. — (1) Ace. inim: (a) commonly bx 
 
 Febris, puppts, pulvis, 
 SScurls, restis, turns : 
 {b) always in 
 
 STtis, tussis. 
 
 Vis, amussis. 
 
 (2) Abl. in I : (a) sometimes in those which take im in ace, with 
 ignis, civis : {b) always in vis ; and in neuters whose nom. ends 
 in &1, &r, or 6. 
 
 (3) Gen. plur. ium: [a) in all which take i in abl. sing.; {b) in 
 monosyllables whose stems end in two consonants {e.g., mont-, 
 
 ^ont-ium) ; (c) in all which insert a vowel before adding s iu 
 nom. (ie. g., nav-i-s, uav-ium). 
 
250 
 
 NOUN. 
 
 Fourth Declension, — {Gcntlive-ending us.) 
 (621.) Masculine nominative-ending us j neuter nominative-ending fl. 
 
 • [a) CASE-ENDINGS, MASCULINES. 
 
 1 Noiij.. Voa 
 
 Gen. 
 
 Dat. 
 
 Ace. 
 
 , Abl. j 
 
 Sing. 
 Plur. 
 
 us. 
 us. 
 
 US. 
 
 uum. 
 
 ui. 
 ibils. 
 
 um. 
 
 us. 
 
 ibus. 1 
 
 
 [b] CASE-ENDINGS, NEUTERS. 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 Norn., Ace, Voc. 
 
 1 Gen. 
 
 
 Dat., Abl. 
 
 Sing. 
 Plur. 
 
 U. 
 
 ua. 
 
 US, or u. 
 
 uum. 
 
 I 
 
 U. 
 ibus. 
 
 Rem. 1. Quantity. — U s long, except in nom. sing., and dat. and abl. 
 Ijlur. ; u and 1 long always. 
 
 2. Genders.— Oidy the following nouns are feminine : 
 
 Acus, manus, tribus, 
 DSmiis, porticus, and Idus. 
 
 3. Peculiar Case-ending. — The following take iibus in dat. and abl. 
 plur., instead of ib u s : 
 
 Avcus, &CUS, portfis, vfii-u, 
 
 Ficus, lacus, artus, 
 Spficus, quercus, also pecu, 
 
 Trfous too, and partus. 
 
 4. Ddmus, house, is thus declined : 
 
 
 Nom., Voc. 
 
 Gen. 
 
 Dat 
 
 Ace. 
 
 Abl. 
 
 Sing. 
 Plur. 
 
 dom-us. 
 dom-us. 
 
 5 -US. 
 
 < -uum. 
 "l -drum. 
 
 -ui. 
 -ibus. 
 
 -um. 
 
 (-OS. 
 
 I -us {rarely). 
 
 -6. 
 
 -ibus. 
 
 Obs. The genitive do ml is used only in the sense oi at home, at my 
 house. 
 
 Fifth Declension. — {Genitive-ending ei.) 
 
 (622.) There are but few nouns of this declension : all feminine except 
 dies, day, and merldies, midday ; and even di6s is feminine in singu- 
 lai' when it means o. fixed day. 
 
 (623.) 
 
 case-endings. 
 
 
 Nom.. Voc. 
 
 Gen. Dat 
 
 Ace. 
 
 Abl. 1 
 
 Sing. 
 Plur. 
 
 es. 
 
 es. 
 
 Si. 61. 
 
 erum. ebus. 
 
 6m. 
 
 es. 
 
 e. 
 ebus. 
 
 Rem. 1. Quantity. — The e in el is long when a vowel stands before 
 
 it, as di-e-i ; short when a consonant, as fid-6-i. 
 2. The genitive, dative, and ablative plural are wanting in all nouns 
 
 of this declension except res, dies, sp6ciS.«?. 
 
§3. ADJECTIVE. 
 
 (624.) The adjective expresses a quality or property belonging to an 
 object; e.g., good, sm-ail, wktte, &c. In Latin, adjectives are divided 
 into three classes, according to their endings. 
 
 1. CLASS I. (us, a, um). • 
 
 (625.) These take the/em«i7«c-endingof fii-st declension of nouns ; mas- 
 culine and neuter endings of the second. 
 
 (1.) CASE-ENDISGS. 
 
 1 
 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 
 .. 
 
 
 FLUEAL. 
 
 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fem. 
 
 Neut. 
 
 
 Mdsc. 
 
 Fein. 
 
 Neut, 
 
 N. 
 
 US. 
 
 a. 
 
 um. 
 
 N. 
 
 1. 
 
 SB. 
 
 a. 
 
 G. 
 
 I. 
 
 89. 
 
 I. 
 
 G. 
 
 orum. 
 
 arum. 
 
 oram. 
 
 D. 
 
 6. 
 
 88. 
 
 6. 
 
 D. 
 
 is. 
 
 IS. 
 
 Is. 
 
 A. 
 
 um. 
 
 am. 
 
 um. 
 
 A. 
 
 OS. 
 
 as. 
 
 a. 
 
 ■V. 
 
 6. 
 
 a. 
 
 fmi. 
 
 V. 
 
 1. 
 
 ae. 
 
 a. 
 
 U^ 
 
 6. 
 
 a. 
 
 6. 
 
 A. 
 
 IS. 
 
 IS. 
 
 IS. 
 
 (2.) Stems in er. — Adjectives whose stem ends in er reject us and e 
 ia uom. and voc. 
 
 (a) Most of them also drop 6 in the nom. in the other cases ; c. g., 
 beautiful, pule her. 
 
 Nom. Pulchfir, pulchra, pulchrum. 
 
 Gen. Pulchri, pulchrssv pulchrl, &c. 
 
 {b) But aspSr, lac6r, llb^r, mis6r, prosper, tfinCr, retain the 6 ; e. g^ 
 Nom. Miser, miserii miseram. 
 
 Gen. Mis6rl, niis6rae, rnlserl, &c. 
 
 (3.) Peculiar Case-endings. — Some adjectives, numerals, and adjec- 
 tive pronouns have gen., lus, and dat, i; e.g., unus, unlfis, unl. 
 [They are unus, totus, solus, nuUus, ullus, alius, alt6r, ilt6r, neutfir, 
 ^nterquS.] 
 
 2. CLASS II. {Two Endings). 
 (626.) Adjectives of the secand class have is in the nominative singular 
 for masculine and femiiune ending, and 6 for neuter. 
 
 (1.) CASE-ENDINGS. 
 
 
 SINGUtAK. j 
 
 
 PLURAL. 1 
 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fem. 
 
 Neut. 
 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fem. 
 
 Neut. 
 
 N.,V. 
 
 is. , 
 
 Is. 
 
 6. 
 
 N.,V. 
 
 es. 
 
 es. 
 
 ia. 
 
 G. 
 
 is. 
 
 IS. 
 
 is. 
 
 G. 
 
 lum. 
 
 mm. 
 
 ium. 
 
 D. 
 
 T. 
 
 i. 
 
 i. 
 
 D. 
 
 ibus. 
 
 ibus. 
 
 Ibus. 
 
 Ace. 
 
 6m. 
 
 6m. 
 
 6. 
 
 Ace. 
 
 6S. 
 
 6s. 
 
 ia. 
 
 Abl. 
 
 i. 
 
 i. 
 
 i. 
 
 Abl. 
 
 ibus. 
 
 ibus. 
 
 ibn.. 1 
 
 (2.) Some adjectives of this qlass take 6 r for the ending of the nom. 
 sing. masc. instead of Is ; c. g., ficer, Sens, Sere. 
 
262 
 
 ADJECTIVE. 
 
 .,1 h« 
 
 more common. 
 
 (3.) The ablative has 6 instead of i in juv6nis, youth; aedilisf, 
 cBciile. The genitive plural has tim instead of ium in c6l6r, 
 swift. 
 
 3. CLASS III. {One Ending). 
 (627.) (1.) Adjectives of the third class have but one ending in the nom- 
 inative for all three genders ; e. g., happy, felix (m., f., n.) ; bold, 
 and ax (m., f., n.). Participles in ns fall under this dags. 
 (2.) The case-endings are those of nouns of third declension (see par- 
 adigm, 108). They have abl. I generally, but 6 in p a u p e r, s e n e x, 
 and a fevp- others (108, R. 1); neut. plur., ia; gen. plur., ium. 
 VSttis has nom. plur., v6t5r-5, gen. plur., v6t6r-um. 
 For participles, abl., 6 
 " adjectives, abl., 
 
 4. COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 
 
 (628.) Comparative-GnAm^, i 6 r ; superlative, i s s i m u s. 
 
 Brave, fort-is, fort-i6r, fort-is simii*. 
 
 Hard, dur-us, dur-i6r, dur-issimus. 
 
 Rem. The comparative is declined (after third declension of nouns) 
 thus : 
 
 Nom. Dun or, dnriSr, durius. 
 
 ^ Gen. Durior-is, durioris, durioris, &c. (See 358.) 
 (629.) Adjectives whose stems end in r have rimus for superlative-enA- 
 ing (instead of issimos) ; e. g., 
 
 Mis6r, mis6r-i 5 r, miser-r im u s. 
 
 Pulchfir, pulchr-idr, pulcher-rJmus. 
 
 (630.) Several adjectives whose stem ends in I have l!ma8 for guperla' 
 <tt;e-ending ; e. g., 
 
 f«cil-x6r, fScil-limiis. 
 
 Facfl-is, 
 They are 
 
 (631.) 
 
 Sinulis, dissimilis, and fitcilis ; 
 Humilis, difficilis, and gracilis. 
 
 5. IRREGULAR COMPARISON. 
 
 Irresrulars. 
 
 Good. 
 
 b6nus. 
 
 m6li6r. 
 
 optunus. 
 
 Bad. 
 
 mSlus. 
 
 pej6r. 
 
 pessimus. 
 
 Great. 
 
 magnus. 
 
 major. 
 
 maximus. 
 
 Much. 
 
 multus. 
 
 (plu's (n. sing.). 
 I plurfis, a (pL). 
 
 plnrimus. 
 
 Small. 
 
 parvus. 
 
 minor. 
 
 minimus. 
 
 Old. 
 
 s6nex. 
 
 s6m6r. 
 
 {wanting.) 
 
 Young. 
 
 juv6nis. 
 
 juniSr. 
 
 {wanting.) 
 
 Outward. 
 
 extenis. 
 
 exterior. 
 
 extremus. 
 
 Below. 
 
 inferiis. 
 
 inferidr. 
 
 ( infimus. 
 ? imiSs. 
 
 Above. 
 
 sup6rus. 
 
 sup6ri6r. 
 
 5 supremus. 
 I summiis. 
 
 Hind. 
 
 postei-us. 
 
 pcstfriSr. 
 
 postremus. 
 
COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 
 
 253 
 
 (632.) Defectives. — {Comparative and Superlative formed from a Prepo' 
 sition, Adverb, or Obsolete Word.] 
 
 (on this side, citra.) 
 (within, intra.) 
 
 {beyond, ultra.) 
 
 (Tiear, pr6pe.) 
 {bad, deter.) 
 
 nearer, cit6n6r. 
 inner, int6ri6r. 
 
 further, ult6ri6r. 
 
 nearer, pr6pi6r. 
 
 worse, deterior. 
 former, prior. 
 swifter, 6ci6r. 
 
 nearest, citimus. 
 inmost, intimus. 
 
 worst, deterrimus. 
 first, primus. 
 swiftest, ocissimus. 
 
 _ „. , , . , i ditior, , ( ditissunus. 
 
 S^. 1. Rv:h, dives -, ru:her, \ ^j^^^^. rzchest, \ divitissimus. 
 
 [Ccesar uses the shorter form.] 
 
 2. Compound adjectives in dicus, ficiis, v6lus, add entidr for tbo 
 comparative and entissimusfor the superlative ; e. g., 
 
 B6n6vol-us, b6ni8v6l-enti6r, b6n6v6l-entissimus, 
 
 3. Adjectives whose stem ends in a vowel prefix to the positive 
 mSgJs, more, for the comparative, and maxim 6, most, for the 
 superlative. 
 
 Pious, pius, 
 
 mSgis pliis, 
 
 Y 
 
 maximd pius. 
 
§ 4. NUMERALS. 
 
 (633.) Numerals are divided into the following classes, of which the 
 first three are adjectives, the fourth adverbs. 
 
 CARDINAL. 
 
 ORDINAL. 
 
 DISTRIBUTIVE. 
 
 ADVERBIAL. 
 
 One, two, SfC. 
 
 First, second, Sfc. 
 
 One by one, 6fC. 
 
 Once, twice, fyc. 
 
 1 
 
 Unus. 
 
 Primus. 
 
 Singuli. 
 
 Semel. 
 
 2 
 
 Duo. 
 
 Secundus. 
 
 Bini, 
 
 Bis. 
 
 3 
 
 Tres. 
 
 Tertius. 
 
 Term. 
 
 Ter. 
 
 4 
 
 Quattwor. 
 
 Quartus. 
 
 Quatemi. 
 
 Quater. 
 
 5 
 
 Quinque. 
 
 Q,uintU8. 
 
 Quini. 
 
 ftuinquies. 
 
 6 
 
 Sex. 
 
 Sextus. 
 
 Seni. 
 
 Sexies. 
 
 7 
 
 Septem. 
 
 Septimus. 
 
 SeptenL 
 
 Septies. 
 
 8 
 
 Octo. 
 
 Octavug, 
 
 Octoni. 
 
 Octiea. 
 
 9 
 
 Novem. 
 
 Nonus. 
 
 NovenL 
 
 Novies. 
 
 10 
 
 Decern. 
 
 Decimus. 
 
 Deni. 
 
 Decies. 
 
 11 
 
 Undecim. 
 
 Undecimtis. 
 
 tindenL 
 
 . undecieg. 
 
 12 
 
 Duodecim. 
 
 Duodecimus. 
 
 Duodeni. 
 
 Duodecies. 
 
 13 
 
 Tredecim. [im. 
 
 Tertius- 
 
 
 Temi- ] 
 
 
 Tredecies. 
 
 14 
 
 Quattuordec- 
 
 Quaitus- 
 
 
 Quatemi- 
 
 
 Quatuordecies. 
 
 15 
 
 Quindecun. 
 
 Quintus- 
 
 
 Qulni- 
 
 
 Quindecies. 
 
 16 
 
 Sexdecim. 
 
 Sextus- 
 
 -decunus. 
 
 Seni- 
 
 •dem. 
 
 Sedecies. 
 
 17 
 
 Septendecim. 
 
 Septimus- 
 
 
 Septenl- 
 
 
 Decies feseptiefl. 
 
 18 
 
 Octodecim. 
 
 Octavus. 
 
 
 Octoni- 
 
 
 Duodevicies. 
 
 19 
 
 Novemdecim. 
 
 Nonus- J 
 
 
 Noveni- 
 
 
 Undevicrea. 
 
 20 
 
 ViginH. 
 
 Vicesimus. 
 
 Viceni. 
 
 Vicies. 
 
 30 
 
 Triginta. 
 Quadraginta. 
 
 Tricesimus. 
 
 Triceni. 
 
 Tricies. 
 
 40 
 
 Qusldragesimus. 
 
 QuSdragenl. 
 
 Quadragiea. 
 
 50 
 
 Quinquaginta. 
 
 Quinquagesimus. 
 
 Quinquageni. 
 
 Quinquagies. 
 
 60 
 
 Sexaginta. 
 
 Sexagesimus. 
 
 Sexagenf. 
 
 Sexagies. 
 
 70 
 
 Septuaginta. 
 
 Septuagesimus. 
 
 Septuageni. 
 
 Septuagies. 
 
 80 
 
 Octoginta. 
 
 Octogesimus. 
 
 Octogeni. 
 
 Octogies. 
 
 90 
 
 Nonaginta. 
 
 Nonagesimus. 
 
 Nonageni. 
 
 Nonagies. 
 
 100 
 
 Centum. 
 
 Centesimus. 
 
 Centeni. 
 
 Centies. 
 
 200 
 
 Ducenti. 
 
 Ducentesimus. 
 
 Ducenteni. 
 
 Ducenties. 
 
 300 
 
 Trecentl. 
 
 Trecenteslmus. 
 
 Trecenteni, 
 
 Trecenties. 
 
 400 
 
 Quadringenti. 
 
 Quadringentesimus. 
 
 Quadringenteni. 
 
 Quadrlngenties. 
 
 500 
 
 Quingenli. 
 
 QuingentesTmus. 
 
 Gluingentem. 
 
 Quingenties. 
 
 600 
 
 SexcenS. 
 
 Sexcenteslmus. 
 
 Sexcenteni. 
 
 Sexcenties. 
 
 700 
 
 Septingenfi. 
 
 Septingentesimus. 
 
 Septangentenl. 
 
 Septingenties. 
 
 800 
 
 Octingenti. 
 
 Octingentesimus. 
 
 OctingentenL 
 
 OctingenKes. 
 
 900 
 
 Noningenti, 
 
 Nongentesimus. 
 
 Nongentenl. 
 
 Nongentaes. 
 
 1000 
 
 Mille. 
 
 Millesimus. 
 
 MIUenL 
 
 Milligs. 
 
 For the declension of unus, duo, and tres, see 194. 
 
 Ducenti, and all the compounds of centi, are declined Uke the plural 
 of bonus. 
 
 Millia, thousands, the plural of mille, is declined like a neuter noun 
 of the third declension. 
 
 Ordinal numbers are declined like bonus. 
 
 Distributives, like the plural of bonus. 
 
 All the rest are undeclinable. 
 
 In the combination of cardinal numbers, from twenty to one hundred, 
 the smaller with et, or the larger without et, precedes ; asquattuoret 
 viginti, or viginti quattuor. Above one hundred the larger number 
 precedes, with or without e t ; as centum et unus, or centum unus. 
 
§ 5. PRONOUN. 
 
 (C34.) The pronoun is a substitute for the noun ; e. g., he, she, it, may 
 be substitutes for man, ■woman, book. 
 
 1. PERSONAL PROIfOUNS. 
 
 (635.) {a) Substantive Personal, so called because used as substantives, 
 not as adjectives. 
 
 8INGULAB. 
 
 PLUKAL. j] 
 
 /. 
 
 N. 
 
 G. 
 
 m6i. 
 
 mihi. 
 
 Ace, AbL 
 
 me. 
 
 We. 
 
 N., A. 
 
 nos. 
 
 Gen. 
 
 nostrum, or 
 
 Dat., Abl. 
 
 n6bis. 
 
 Thou. 
 
 tu. 
 
 tui. 
 
 tib!. 
 
 t§. 
 
 You. 
 
 vos. 
 
 nostd. 
 vestrum, or 
 
 vobls. ! 
 
 Him, I 
 her, it. > 
 
 — 
 
 sui. 
 
 sib!. 
 
 Be. 
 
 Tliem. 
 
 i vestrL | 1 
 (same as sing.) 
 
 {b) Adjective Personal, or Possessive (derived from the above). 
 
 \Mine. 
 
 i Thine. 
 
 \ His, hers, its. 
 
 m6us, a, um (voc., mi), 
 tuus, &, um. 
 siius, a, um. 
 
 Ours. 
 
 Yours. 
 
 Theirs. 
 
 nost^r, nostra, nostrum, 
 vester, vestra, vestrum. 
 suus, sua, siium. 
 
 2. DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 (636.) The demonstrative pronouns are so called because they serve to 
 point out an object ; e. g:, this, that, these, those, &c. 
 
 (1.) Is, 6a, id, this, that (7te, sh^, it), often antecedent of qui; 
 
 »mg. 
 Plur. 
 
 is, 6a, id. 
 ii, 68e, 6a. 
 
 Gen. 
 
 ejus. 
 
 66rum, 6arum, 66rQm. 
 
 Dat 
 
 6i. 
 
 ils, or 6is. 
 
 Aco. 
 
 eum, 6am, id, 
 66s, 6as, 6a. 
 
 Abl. 
 
 66, 6a, 66. 
 
 iis, or 6Is. 
 
 (2.) id 6m, ead6m, id6m, ^^e very same, compounded of is and dem. 
 Declined like is with dem added; thus, ejus dem, eid6m, 
 eund6m (not eumdem), &c. 
 
 (3.) Hie, haec, hoc, this, points out an object present to the speaker, 
 and is called the demonstrative of the ^rst person. (It is also used 
 for he, slie, it.) 
 
 Nora. 
 
 
 Gen. 
 
 
 Dat. 
 
 Ace. 
 
 Abl. 
 
 Sing, hie, hsec, 
 
 hujus. 
 
 
 
 huic. 
 
 hunc, banc, 
 
 hoc, hac, 
 
 h6c. 
 
 
 
 
 
 h6c. 
 
 hoc. 
 
 Plur. hi, has. 
 
 hornm. 
 
 harum. 
 
 ho- 
 
 his. 
 
 hos, has. 
 
 bis. 
 
 haec. 
 
 rum. 
 
 
 
 
 haec. 
 
 
 (4.) 1st 6, ista, istud, this, that, points out an object present to the 
 person spoken to, and is called the demonstrative of second person. 
 
256 PRONOUNS, RELATIVE AND INTERROGATIVE. 
 
 1 
 
 Nom. 
 
 Gen. 
 
 Dat. 
 
 Ace. 
 
 Abl. 
 
 tiins;. 
 
 iste, ista, 
 
 istms. 
 
 isti. 
 
 istum, istam. 
 
 isto, ista, 
 
 
 istud. 
 
 
 
 istud. 
 
 isto. 
 
 Plur. 
 
 isti, istae, 
 
 istorum, istarum, is- 
 
 istis. 
 
 istos, istas, 
 
 istis, istis, 
 
 L. 
 
 ista. 
 
 torum. 
 
 
 ista. 
 
 istis. 
 
 B£#^ Iste is often used to express contempt. 
 (5.) Ille, ilia, illud, points out an object remote from the speaker 
 {that, the former, opposed to hie), and is called demonstrative of 
 third person. (It is often used for he, she, it.) 
 
 5^^ Declined throughout like istS, ista, istud. 
 (6.) Ips6, ipsa, ipsiim, self, is added to other pronouns, me, te, s6, 
 
 &c., and expresses myself, thyself, himself, Slc, accordingly. 
 I^" Declined like istS, except that neuter is ipsum (not ipsud). 
 
 3. RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 (637.) The relative pronoun [who, which, what) is so called l^ecause it 
 commonly refers to some other word called the antecedent. 
 (1.) dui, quae, qu6d, who, which, what. 
 
 Sing. 
 Plur. 
 
 qui, quae, 
 quod. 
 
 qui, quae, 
 quae. 
 
 CUJUS. 
 
 quorum, quarum, 
 quorum. 
 
 quibus. 
 
 qu6m, quam, 
 
 quod, 
 quos, quas, 
 
 quae. 
 
 quo, qua, 
 
 quo. 
 qufl>us. 
 
 (2.) dmcunque, quae cun que, quodcunqu6 {whoever, whichever, 
 whatever), declined like qui, quae, qu6d, with cunque added. 
 
 (3.) Qiyi\s(ixi.\s {whoever, whatever), usediwithout &s-a\iS,tKa\Ave. The 
 following cases only occur, and of these only quisquis and quic- 
 quid commonly. 
 
 Sing. 
 Plur. 
 
 Nom. 
 
 quisquis (m., f.). 
 
 quicquid (n.). 
 quiqiii (m., f.). 
 
 qufbiis qui- 
 bus. 
 
 Ace. 
 
 quemqu6m (m., f ), 
 quidquid (n.). 
 
 qu6qu6, quft- 
 qua, qu6qu6. 
 
 4. INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 f (638.) The interrogative pronmins {who ? which ? what ?) are used in 
 
 asking questions. 
 
 (1.) duis, quae, quid {who? which? what?), is declined precisely 
 like the relative qui, except that in nom. sing. masc. it has qu!s, 
 and in nom. and ace. sing, neut., quid, [dui, quae, qu6d, is also 
 used interrogatively, as an adjective (172).] 
 
 (2.) duisnSm, quaenSm, quidnam, is more emphatic than quls. 
 (Pray, what are you doing ? quidnam Sgia ?) It is declined liko 
 quis, quae, quid. 
 
rUONOUNS, INDEFINITE AND CORRELATIVE. 257 
 
 5. INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 
 
 (639.) The indefinite proTiouns denote an object in a general way, with- 
 out reference to a particular individual {any one, some one, &c.). 
 
 , , ^ , , ( quod dam, used as an adjective, ) 
 
 (1.) duidam, quaedam, < .,. , > a cer- 
 
 ^ ' ^ C quiddam, used as a noun, j . 
 
 tain (one) ; plur., some. Declined like qui ; but takes n generally 
 
 before d instead of in ; e. g., 
 
 duendam, quorundam (not quemdam, quorumdam). 
 
 (2.) duivis, > {any you please). Declined like qui. In neut., 
 
 duilibSt, J qu6dusedas adjective, quid as substantive. 
 
 (3.) duisquam {any, any one; e.g., when it is denied that there 
 
 are any). Neut., quicquam or quidquam. Declined otherwise 
 
 like qui. [This pronoun is used chiefly in negative sentences.] 
 
 ,^ , ^ . „„ „^ ( quod piam, used as o^;., \ somebody, 
 
 (4.) duispiam, quaepiam, ^ ^ • j -- . t^\ 
 
 ( quid piam, used as SMd'sf., ) some.. 
 
 /r\ ti- - vi- V < aliqu6d, as a<i;., ) 
 
 (5.) Ahquis, ahqua, \ ^„^^„^^ ^^ ^^^^^^ \ some one, sometUng. 
 
 tB\ r\ • « w < quodqug, as adj., > , 
 
 (6.) duisquS, qucequfi, ^ ^ . ,^ ' /' \ each. 
 
 ( quidquS, as subst., ) 
 
 TT • ^ ^ < -quodqug, as adj., } , 
 
 Unusquisqu6, -qusequg, ^ ^ .. « r ' f each one 
 
 ( -quidqug, as subst., ) 
 
 (stronger than quisqug). Genitive, uniuscujusquS, &c., 
 
 both unus and quis being declined. 
 
 (7.) EcquJs ? Used interrogatively {does) ; any one, anything. 
 
 T- V ^ { ecqu6d, as adj., ) neut. plural, 
 
 Ecquis, ecquae, or ecqua, < „, /' > ^, 
 
 < ecquid, as subst., ) ecqua. 
 
 O^Ecquis expects the answer none. 
 
 6. CORRELATIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 (640.) Correlative pronouns are such as atiswer to each other; e.g., 
 how great ? so great ; as many, so many, &c. 
 (1.) The following are declined 
 
 {a) Like adjectives of Class I. (625) : 
 Tantus, so great, somtich; quantuscunquS, however great 
 du antus, as great ; aliquantus, somewhat great, 
 
 {b) Like adjectives of Class IL (626) : 
 Talis, such. 
 
 duftlis, as, of what kind. 
 CLn&llscnuqne, of whatever kind. 
 
 (2.) The following are indeclinable : 
 
 T6t, so muny; SllquSt, sovm. 
 
 T6tid6m, ^tfsi so many ; quotqufit, however many, 
 
 Cin6t, as many. 
 
 Y2 
 
§ 6. VERBS. 
 
 (641.) The verb declares something of a person or thing: the eagle 
 flies ; the queen loves her daughter. 
 
 1. CLASSES OF VERBS. 
 
 (642.) Verbs are active, passive, or deponent. 
 
 (1.) Active verbs exprisss action : {a) either transitively, requiring an 
 object ; e. g., the queen loves {whom ?) her daughter ; or (b) intran- 
 sitively, not requiring an object; the eagle ^i'es. 
 (2.) Passive verba express the receiving or suffering of an action ; 
 / am loved ; I was punished. 
 
 Obviously intransitive verbs have no passive form. We cannot 
 say, / am danced, I am slept. 
 (3.) Deponent verbs have the passive forrft, but an active signification. 
 
 2. PARTS OF THE VERB. 
 
 (643.) The verb is divided into, 
 
 (a) The indefinite verb, including certain, parts which do not refer to 
 a definite person or time. 
 
 (b) The finite verb, including the parts which always do so refer. 
 
 Tfidejinite Verb. 
 (644.) {a) The indefinite verb includes, 
 
 (1.) The infinitive, which expresses the action of the verb without 
 relation to a definite person, and partakes also of the nature of a 
 noun ; e. g., to learn ; to love is pleasant. 
 
 (2.) The participle, which expresses the action of the verb under the 
 form of an adjective ; loving, blooming. 
 
 (3.) The gei-und, which expresses the action of the verb under the 
 form of the noun, in all cases but the nominative, and supplies ob- 
 lique cases to the infinitive. 
 
 (4.) The gerundive, which expresses the action of the verb as neces- 
 sary or continued, under the form of an adjective, in all cases and 
 genders. 
 
 (5.) The supine, which also expresses the action of the verb in the 
 form of two cases (ace. and abl.) of the noun. 
 
 Finite Verb. 
 (645.) [I) The finite verb includes those parts which express the 
 fl.) DifPerent varieties of affirmation, viz., the moods. 
 (2.) Different times at which the action of the verb takes place, viz., 
 
 the tenses. 
 (3.) Different relations of the verb to persons or tilings, viz., the nwm- 
 bc2-s and persons. 
 
PART3 OF THE FINITE VERB. 259 
 
 (1.) The Moods. 
 (646.) The verb expresses affirmation ; the moods of the verb are used 
 to vaiy the character of the affinnation. 
 
 (1.) By the indicative, affirmation of a. fact is expressed ; e. g., I write, 
 
 I did not write. 
 (2.) By the subjunctive, affirmation is expressed doubtfully, contin- 
 gently, or indejinitely ; e. g., I may write, if I should write, perhaps 
 some [may] think. 
 (3.) By the imperative, affinnation is expressed as an injunction or 
 request ; e. g., write. • 
 
 (2.) The Tenses. 
 (647.) Time may be past, present, or future, and the verb has therefore 
 three tenses to express these. But action may be represented as going 
 on or as co-mpleted, either in past, present, or future time, and therefore 
 two forms are required for each, making six in all. 
 
 
 Present. 
 
 Past. 
 
 Future. | 
 
 Action gozTig on, 
 or imperfect. 
 
 Action completed, 
 or perfect. 
 
 / love, or am 
 
 loving. 
 I have loved. 
 
 (Perfect.) 
 
 I was laving. 
 
 (Imperfect.) 
 
 / had loved. 
 
 (Pluperfect.) 
 
 I shall love, or be loving. 
 (Future.) 
 
 / shall have loved. (Fu- 
 ture Perfect.) 
 
 Rem. 1. The Latin uses its perfect form in two ways : (1) like the 
 English perfect, to express action complete in present time ; c. g., 
 amavl, / liave loved : (2) like the English imperfect, to express ac- 
 tion indefinitely in past tune ; e. g., Smavi, I loved. This is called 
 the perfect aorist. [The latter use is by far the most common. 
 This distinction should be thoroughly understood.] 
 
 2. The subjunctive mood has no future (it uses the peripln-astic 
 form 661). 
 
 3. The present, perfect, and future are called primary tenses, refer- 
 ring, as they do, either to present or future time ; the imperfect, 
 perfect aorist, and pluperfect are called historical tenses, referring, 
 as they do, to pa.st time. 
 
 (3.) Numbers and Persons. 
 
 (648.) As there may be more than one person engaged in an action, the 
 verb has two mimbers, singular and plural. These persons must be either 
 /, thou, we, ye, or some other person or thing ; therefore the verb has 
 three persons, 1st, 2d, and 3d, which are denoted in Latin by different 
 CTtdings. 
 
 3. CONJUGATION. 
 
 (649.) Conjugation is the inflection (21, R.) of a verb through all its 
 parts. There are in Latin /our conjugetions of verbs, distinguished by the 
 ending of the infinitive ; thus : 
 
 1. s. 3. 4. 
 
 -arft. -6r«. ^rS. -IrS. 
 
260 
 
 PARADIGM OF ESSE, TO BE. 
 
 4 THE AUXILIARY OR SUBSTANTIVE VERB ESSE, tO be. 
 
 (660.) [Before proceeding to the conjugations, we must give the forms 
 of e s s 6, to be, called an auxiliary, because it is used in forming some of 
 the parts of the verb ; and substantive, because it is the verb expressing 
 eimple existence.] 
 
 1. INDICATIVE. 
 
 ACTION INCOMPLETE. 
 
 Present. 
 Imperf. 
 Future. 
 
 sum, 
 
 I am. 
 erSm, 
 
 / teas. 
 
 I shall be. 
 
 6s, 
 
 thou art. 
 eras, 
 
 thouwast. 
 eris, 
 
 thou, Spc. 
 
 est, 
 
 he is. 
 erfit, 
 he was. 
 erit, 
 he, Src. 
 
 sumus, 
 we are. 
 
 eramus, 
 we were. 
 
 erimiis, 
 we, Spc. 
 
 estis, 
 
 ye art. 
 eratis, 
 ye ivere. 
 gritls, 
 ye, ^c. 
 
 sunt, 
 
 they are. 
 erant, 
 they loere. 
 erunt, 
 
 they, SfC. 
 
 ACTION COMPLETED. 
 
 Perfect. 
 
 ful. 
 
 fuisti, Ifilit, 
 
 
 / have 
 
 thouhastl he has 
 
 
 been. 
 
 been. I been. 
 
 Pluperf. 
 
 fugrSm, 
 
 fueras, Ifuerat, 
 
 
 / hadlthou \ lie had 
 
 
 been. 
 
 }iadst,Scc.\ been. 
 
 FutPerf. 
 
 fu6rd, 
 
 fueris, 'fuerit, 
 
 
 / shall 
 
 thmi 'he shall, 
 
 
 have been. 
 
 shait, 4-c.' ^c. 
 
 
 Plural. 
 
 fuimus. 
 
 fuistis, 
 
 ■ we have 
 
 ye have 
 been. 
 
 been. 
 
 fueramus, 
 
 fueratis, 
 
 toe had 
 
 ye had 
 been. 
 
 been. 
 
 fuerimus. 
 
 fueritis. 
 
 we shall. 
 
 ye shall. 
 
 Src. 
 
 Src. 
 
 fiierunt, 
 
 they have 
 
 been. 
 filerant, 
 
 they had 
 
 been. 
 fderint, 
 they shall, 
 
 Src. 
 
 2. SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 INCOMPLETE. 
 
 Present. 
 Imperf. 
 
 sxm, 
 
 / may be. 
 essem, 
 
 / might 
 
 be. 
 
 sis, 
 
 thon, Src. 
 esses, 
 thou, Src. 
 
 sit, 
 
 he, Src- 
 esset, 
 he, SfC. 
 
 simus, 
 
 we, Src. 
 essemus, 
 
 we, ^-c. 
 
 sitis, 
 
 ye. Src. 
 essetis, 
 
 ye, Src. 
 
 sint, 
 
 they, Src. 
 essent, 
 
 they, Src. 
 
 COBIPLETED. 
 
 Perfect. 
 Pluperf. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 fugrim, 
 / may 
 have been. 
 
 fuiss6m, 
 / might 
 have been. 
 
 fueris, 
 tlum, Src. 
 
 fuisses, 
 thou, SfC. 
 
 fuerit, 
 he, <^c. 
 
 fuissSt, 
 he, SfC. 
 
 fuerimus, 
 we, Sj'C. 
 
 fiiissemus, 
 we, Src. 
 
 fueritis, 
 ye, Src. 
 
 fuissetis, 
 ye, Src. 
 
 fuerint, 
 tiiey, <^c. 
 
 fuissent, 
 they, 4rc. 
 
 3. IMPERATIVE. 
 
 2. es, est6, be thou. 
 
 3. esto, let him be. 
 
 2. este, estote, be ye. 
 
 3. suntfi, let them be. 
 
 4. INFINITIVE. 
 
 Esse, to be. fuisse, to have been, futurus, &, iim, esse, to be about to be. 
 
 5. PARTICIPLE. 
 
 Only in compounds ; absens, abserU 
 (from absum) ; praesens, present 
 (from prsesum). 
 
 Futui-us, a, um, one who vjUI be. 
 
PARADIGMS OF REGULAR VERBS. 261 
 
 5. PARADIGMS OF REGULAR VERBS. 
 
 (651.) (1.) Verb-stem. — The stem of any verb is found by striking' off 
 the infinitive-ending ; e. g., of &m-are, m6n-ere, r6g-er6, and aud-irS the 
 stems are &m-, mon-, reg-, aud-, respectively.* 
 
 (2.) Tense-stem. — Each tense has its own tense-stem, consisting of the 
 verbnstem with or without some additions. Thus, in the first conjugation : 
 Pres. tense-stem = verb-stem = am-. 
 lm.perf. tense-stem = verb-stem +ab = am ab-. 
 Perf. tense -stem = verb-stem H-av = amav-. 
 
 [In the annexed paradigms the tens6-stems are shown upon the left- 
 band side. Observe that the perfect tense-stem serves also for the stem 
 of the pluperfect and future perfect tenses.] 
 
 (3.) Tense-ending. — Each tense has its own endings, which, added to 
 the tense-stem, give the person-forms. Thus : 
 
 Imperfect-stem Smab- -l-am= amah am, 1st person. 
 
 amab- -fas = am abas, 2d person,t &c. 
 (4.) The perfect, pluperfect, and future perfect of the passive voice are 
 formed by means of the past participle and forms of e s s 6 ; thus : 
 ftmatus sum, Smatiis eram, amatus ero. 
 
 [No farther explanation of the paradigm is necessary. The student 
 should learn the modes of formation, and the tense-endings for each tense, 
 apart from the stems am-, mon-, &c., and unite them afterward with those 
 or any other stems.] 
 
 * In reality, the crude-forms are ama-, mone-, audi- (the three pure 
 conjugations), and reg- (the consonant conjugation). But the changes of 
 the crude-form in inflection form too great a difficulty for beginners , we 
 therefore present the stem as the language afibrds it to us, without going 
 into a nicer analysis. 
 
 t Farther, the person-ending forms part of the tense-ending. From the 
 paradigm (active), it will be seen that in every tense except the perfect 
 the endings are 
 
 o, or m, s, t, mus, tis, nt. 
 
 These endings are added to the tense-stem, either directly, as am-o, or by 
 means of a connecting-vowel, as reg-i-s, or of a flexion syllable and con- 
 necting-vowel, as amav-er-a-s. 
 
■^ 
 
 262 PARADIGMS FOR THE FOUR CONJUGATIONS. 
 
 PARAPIGMS FOR 
 
 ACTIVE. 
 
 (652.) 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present, I love or am loving, thou art loving, 6fc. 
 
 ftm- 
 mon- 
 reg- 
 aud- 
 
 6. 
 ed. 
 6. 
 id. 
 
 as. 
 
 es. 
 is. 
 is. 
 
 amtts. 
 emus, 
 imus. 
 imus. 
 
 atis. 
 etia. 
 
 itis. 
 Itis. 
 
 ant. 
 eiit. 
 unt. 
 Junt. 
 
 Imperfect, I was loving, advising, ruling, hearing, 6fC. 
 
 &m-ab- 
 mon-eb- 
 r6g-eb- 
 aud-ieb- 
 
 am-ab- 
 m6n-eb- 
 reg- 
 aud-i- 
 
 am-av- 
 mon-u- 
 (reg-s) 
 rex- 
 aud-iv- 
 
 am-av- 
 mon-u- 
 rex- 
 aud-iv- 
 
 fim-av- 
 m6n-u- 
 rex- 
 aud-iv- 
 
 (653.) 
 
 am- 
 mSii- 
 r6g- 
 aad- 
 
 at. 
 
 atj3. 
 
 ant. 
 
 Future, I shall or will love, advise, rule, hear, 6fC. 
 
 6. 
 
 am. 
 
 IS. 
 
 es. 
 
 ICIUS. 
 
 emus. 
 
 It IS. 
 
 etis. 
 
 unt. 
 ent. 
 
 Perfect, / have loved. (Perfect Aorist, I loved.) 
 
 istl. 
 
 it. 
 
 imus. 
 
 erunt, or 
 
 Pluperfect, I had loved, Sfc. 
 
 6ram. 
 
 gras. 
 
 6r5t. 
 
 6ramus. 
 
 gratis. grant;. 
 
 
 
 Future Perfect, I shall have loved, ffC. 
 
 grS. 
 
 6ris. 
 
 grit. 
 
 grimus. 
 
 grltls. 
 
 grint. 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 2d Singular. 
 
 a, at6. 
 e, eta. 
 e, its. 
 I, ltd. 
 
 at6. 
 6t6. 
 it6. 
 it«. 
 
 2d Plural. 
 
 ate, atote. 
 etg, etotg. 
 itg, itotg. 
 Itg, It6te. 
 
 •3d Plural. 
 
 ant6. 
 ent6. 
 nnt6. 
 iuntfl. 
 
PAllADIGiMS FOR THE FOUR CONJUGATIONS. 
 
 263 
 
 THE FOUR CONJUGATIONS. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present, I am loved, ffc. 
 
 Sxa- 
 
 6r. 
 
 mou- 
 
 e6r. 
 
 reg- 
 
 or. 
 
 aad- 
 
 i6r. 
 
 aris. 
 
 are. 
 
 eris. 
 ere. 
 eris. 
 6re. 
 iris, 
 ire. 
 
 atur. 
 etur. 
 itur. 
 itur. 
 
 amur. 
 emur. 
 imur. 
 imur. 
 
 amini. 
 emini. 
 imini. 
 
 T minT. 
 
 sLntiir. 
 entur. 
 untur. 
 iuntur. 
 
 Imperfect, I was loved, ^v. 
 
 ain-ab- 
 niou-eb- 
 r6e:-eb- 
 aud-ieb- 
 
 ( aris. 
 ^are. 
 
 atur. 
 
 ^mirii. 
 
 antur. 
 
 Future, I sJiali be loved, 6fc. 
 
 am-ab- 
 mon-eb- 
 reg- 
 aud-i- 
 
 or. 
 ar. 
 
 itur. 
 etur. 
 
 imur. 
 emur. 
 
 irmni.' 
 emini. 
 
 untur. 
 entur. 
 
 Perfect, I have been loved, SfC. 
 
 amatus.* 
 moiiitus.* 
 rectus.* 
 auditus.* 
 
 ful. 
 
 es, 
 
 or 
 fuisti. 
 
 est. 
 
 or 
 
 fuit. 
 
 sumus, 
 
 or 
 fuTmus. 
 
 estis, 
 
 or 
 
 fuistis. 
 
 sunt, 
 or 
 fuerunt. 
 
 Pluperfect, 7 had been loved, S,-c. 
 
 araatus.'' 
 mSnitus.* 
 rectus.* 
 auditus.* 
 
 gram.t 
 
 Sras. 
 
 erat. 
 
 Future Perfect, 2 shall have been loved, 4«. 
 
 Smatus. 
 m6mtus.* 
 rectus.* 
 auditus."* 
 
 6r84 
 
 6ris. 
 
 6rit. 
 
 6ritis. 
 
 erunt. 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 ani- 
 m6n- 
 r6g- 
 aud- 
 
 arS, at6r. 
 §r§, 6t6r. 
 6r6, itor. 
 ir6, itor. 
 
 ator. 
 etor. 
 itor. 
 it6r. 
 
 2d PluraL 
 
 amiin, aminor. 
 emini, eminor. 
 imini, iminSr. 
 Imini, iminor. 
 
 3d PluraL 
 
 antor. 
 entor. 
 untur. 
 iuntor. 
 
 * The participle must be inflected in gqnder and number to agree witi 
 the subject, 
 t Sometimes fuerarn, ftieras, &c. 
 { Sometimes fuero, fueris, &c. 
 
264 
 
 PARADIGMS FdR THE FOUR CONJUGATIONS. 
 
 (654.) 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 Prksent, I may love, 4<. 
 
 am- 
 mon-e- 
 reg- 
 aud-i- 
 
 em. 
 am. 
 
 6t. 
 fit. 
 
 emus, 
 amus. 
 
 atis. 
 
 ent. 
 
 ant. 
 
 Imperfect, / might love, ifc. 
 
 am-ar- 
 m6n-er- 
 r6g-€r- 
 aud-ir- 
 
 6m. 
 
 es. 
 
 6t. 
 
 emus. 
 
 etis. 
 
 ent. 
 
 Perfect, I may have loved, ifc. 
 
 Sm-av- 
 mon-u- 
 r6x- 
 aad-iv- 
 
 grim. 
 
 eris. 
 
 grit. 
 
 erimus. 
 
 6ritis. 
 
 firint. 
 
 Pluperfect, I might have loved, tfc. 
 
 am-av- 
 mon-u- 
 rex- 
 
 aud-Iv- 
 
 tssSm. 
 
 isses. 
 
 isset. 
 
 issfimus. 
 
 issetis. 
 
 {655.) 
 
 INFINITIVE. 
 
 Present \to love or he loving, 6fc.\. 
 
 Sm-arg, 
 
 mon-erS, 
 
 r6g-6rS, 
 
 aud-irg. 
 
 Perfect [to have loved, 6fc.]. 
 
 amav-iss6, 
 
 3. 
 
 monu-IssS, 
 
 rex-iase, 
 
 audTv-Iss6. 
 
 Future [to be about to love, ifC.]. 
 
 fimaturus ess6, mSnituras essS, recturiis essfi, auditorus essS. 
 
 (656.) 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 Present [loving, advising, ruling, hearing]. 
 
 &m-ans, 
 
 rSg-ens, 
 
 aud-iens. 
 
 Perfect [having loved, advised, ruled, heard]. 
 
 Wanting : supplied by abl. absol., or by quum v^^ith subj. 
 
 FtJTURE [abotU to love, advise, rule, hear]. 
 
 ftmaturils, 
 
 moniturus. 
 
 rectdrus. 
 
 audituras. 
 
 (657.) 
 
 GERUND AND 
 
 Gerunds : amandi, mSnendl, regendl, audiendl. 
 
 (658.) 
 
 Supine in um : fimatum, 
 " u : ftmatu, 
 
 s. 
 monitum, 
 monitO, 
 
 3. 
 
 rectum, 
 rectn, 
 
 audltum. 
 audit*. 
 
PARADIGMS FOR THE FOUR CONJUGATIONS. 
 
 265 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 Pbesent, I maij be loved, 6fc. 
 
 mon-e- 
 
 r6g- 
 
 aud-i- 
 
 ar. 
 
 j ens. 
 { er6. 
 
 < aris. 
 \ ar6. 
 
 etur. 
 atur. 
 
 emur. 
 amur. 
 
 emini. 
 aminl. 
 
 entur. 
 antiir. 
 
 Imperfect, I might he loved, <Vc. 
 
 am-ar- 
 
 ra6n-cr- 
 r6g-6r- 
 aud-ir- 
 
 gr. 
 
 ens. 
 ere. 
 
 etur. 
 
 emini. 
 
 entur. 
 
 Perfect, / may have been loved, ffc. 
 
 amatus. 
 monitus. 
 rectus, 
 auditus. 
 
 Pluperfect, I might have been loved, SfC. 
 
 amatus. 
 mdnitus. 
 rectus, 
 auditus. 
 
 essem.t 
 
 esses. 
 
 esset. 
 
 essetis. 
 
 essent. 
 
 INFINITIVE. 
 
 Present [to be (being) loved, Sfc.]. 
 
 1. 2. 
 
 fim-ari, m6n-erT, 
 
 r6g- 
 
 aud-Iri. 
 
 Perfect [to have been loved, Sfc.]. 
 
 amatus ess6, mOnitus ess6, rectus essS, auditus ess6. 
 
 Future [to be about to be loved, fyc.]. 
 
 1. 2. 
 
 SmStiim iri, mSnitum IrT, 
 
 rectum iri, 
 
 auditum iri. 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 Present ajjd Perfect [loved, being loved, having been loved, ffC.'\. 
 
 amatus, 
 
 mOnitus, 
 
 rectus. 
 
 4. 
 
 auditus. 
 
 t 
 
 
 
 
 gerundive. 
 
 
 1. 
 Gerundive: ainSndus, 
 
 2. 
 
 mftnendiis, 
 
 3. 4. 
 
 rggendfls, audxSndus. 
 
 
 * Sometimes fuerim. 
 
 
 t Sometimes fuissem. 
 
266 
 
 VERBS IN lO AND DEPONENTS. 
 
 6. VERBS IN 16 OF THE THIRD CONJUGATION. 
 
 (659.) Some verbs of the third conjugation assume i before the person- 
 ending in some of the tenses, as shown in the following paradigm of cftp- 
 6 r 6, to take. 
 
 \ ACTIVE. 
 
 j INDICATIVE. 
 
 j Pres. 
 Imperf. 
 Fut. 
 
 cap- 
 
 capi-eb- 
 
 cap-i- 
 
 id. 
 
 ftm. 
 ftm. 
 
 is. 
 as. 
 es. 
 
 it. 
 ftt. 
 et. 
 
 imus. 
 amiSs, 
 emus. 
 
 itls. 
 atis. 
 etis. 
 
 i-unt. 
 
 ant. { 
 ent. 1 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE. j 
 
 1 Pres. 1 cap-1- 
 
 1 am. 
 
 as. 1 ftt. 
 
 amus. 
 
 atis. 
 
 ant. 
 
 
 
 PASSIVE. 
 
 
 
 
 INDICATIVE. j 
 
 Pres. j cftp- 
 Imperf. cap-i-eb- 
 Fut. 1 cftp i- 
 
 i-6r. 
 
 ftr. 
 
 ftr. 
 
 6ris. 
 aris. 
 eiis. 
 
 itur. 
 atur. 
 etur. 
 
 imur. 
 amtir. 
 emur. 
 
 imini. 
 amiui. 
 emini. 
 
 i-untur. 
 
 antur. 
 
 entur. 
 
 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 
 
 
 Pres. 1 cap-i- 
 
 ftr. 
 
 aris. 1 atur. 
 
 amiir. 
 
 amini. 
 
 antilr. 
 
 
 
 IMPERATIVE. 
 
 
 
 
 3d Plnr. Active, 
 
 cftp-i-ur 
 
 td. 
 
 3d Plur. Pass., cftp- 
 
 '-unt6r. 
 
 PARTICIPLES. j 
 
 Pres. Active, cftj 
 
 )-i-ens. 
 
 
 Fut. Pass., cap-i 
 
 -endus. 
 
 
 Geri 
 
 JND, cap i-end-i, 
 
 6, &c. 
 
 
 
 7. DEPONENT VERBS. 
 
 (660.) (1.) Deponent verbs have the passive form with active significa- 
 tion. As the endings are the same as those of the passives (Paradigm, 
 p. 263, 265), we need not repeat them. 
 
 (2.) But deponents have three active participles, while other verbs have 
 but two : thus, 
 
 Pres., exhorting, Peif., Iiaving exliorted, Fut., about to exhort, 
 hort-ans. hort-atus. hortat-urus. 
 
 (3.) Also, all transitive deponents have the verbal adjective in d u s ; 
 e.g., hortandiis, one that should be exhorted: intransitive deponents 
 have it only in the neuter ; e. ^., moriendum est, one must die. 
 
 8. PERIPHRASTIC CONJUGATION. 
 
 (661.) By means of the tenses of ess g, combined with the future parti- 
 ciple in r u s, and the verbal in d u s, the periphrastic conjugation is form- 
 ed ; e. §-., a m a t u r u s s u m, 7 am about to love, I intend to love ; ft m a n - 
 d ii s sum,/ am to be loved, I must be loved, one must love me ; and so 
 through all the tenses and persons. The deponent verbs employ this per- 
 iphrastic conjugation also. 
 
FURMATION OF I'ERFEUT-STEM. 
 
 267 
 
 1. WITH PARTICIPLE IN rus. 
 
 [| INDICATIVE. 
 
 sttbjunctivb:. | 
 
 ('sum, 6s, est, &c. 
 x^«*-->-„ eram, eras, &c. 
 
 ^ ' fueram, fueras, &c. 
 [&r6, eris, &c. 
 
 fsim, sis, sit, <fcc. 
 amaturus, J essem, esses, &c. 
 a, um, } fuSrim. | 
 l^fuissem. i 
 
 INFINITIVE. 1 
 
 Pres., amaturus ess6, to be about (or intending') to love. 
 Perf., amatunis fuissS, to have been about to love. 
 Put., amaturus fore, to intend to love hereafter. 
 
 2. WITH VKRBAL IN dfis. 
 
 indicative. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 I'sum. 
 eram. 
 Smandus, a, um, \ fui. 
 
 fu6ram. 
 lerd. 
 
 ^sTm. 
 Sma„dfe,»,um, h-^- 
 
 l^fuissem. 
 
 INFINITIVE. 
 
 Pres., amandas, a, um, ess6, ought to be loved. 
 Perf., Smandus, a, um, iuins^, ought to have been loved. 
 Put., amandus, S, um, forS, aught to be loved hereafter. 
 
 9. ON THE FORMATION OP THE J»ERFECT-STEM. 
 
 (662.) In the paradigms, the perfect-stems are formed by adding- to the 
 verb-stem in the Istconj. av- (am-av-); in the 2d, u (mon-u-); in the 3d, 
 8 (reg-s); in the 4th, iv- (aud-iv-). But, although most Latin verbs 
 form the perf.-stem thus, many use different endings, which are exhibited 
 in the following classification : 
 
 1. FIRST CONJUGATION. 
 
 (663.) Four ways of forming the perfect-stem : 
 
 I. By adding av to the verb-stem : am-arg — Sm-av-i. 
 
 II. " u " crSp-ar6 — cr6p-u-i. 
 
 III. By reduplicating the first consonaait : darS— dSd-i. 
 
 IV. By lengthening the stem-vowel : juv-flre— juv-I. 
 
 il. SECOND CONJUGATION. 
 
 Five ways : 
 I. By adding u to the verb-stem ; 
 II. " ev 
 
 III. •' s 
 
 rV. By reduplication : 
 
 m6n-6re — mon-ii-I. 
 
 del-erS — del-ev-I. 
 
 alg-er6 — al(g)-s-I. 
 mord-gre — mo-mord-I. 
 
 V. By lengthening the stem-vowel : c5v-6re— cftv-L 
 
268 FORMATION OF PERFECT-STEM. 
 
 III. THIRD CONJUGATION. 
 
 Six ways : 
 
 I. By adding s to tlie verb-stem : scrlb-ere — scrip-s-L 
 11. " u "- al-6re— il-u-L 
 
 III. " V or iv " cern-6r6 — crev-i. 
 
 arcess-6re — arcess-iv-L 
 
 IV. By reduplication : ' curr-ere — cu-curr-i. 
 v. By lengthening the stem-vowel : 6m-6re — em-i. 
 
 VI. By presenting the simple verb-stem : Scu-ere — Scu-i. 
 
 IV. FOURTH CONJUGATION. 
 
 Five ways : 
 
 I. By adding iv to the verb-stem : aud-ir6, aud-iv-i. 
 
 n. " u " aper-lr6, ap6r-u-i. 
 
 III. " s " falc-ire, fal(c)-s-i. 
 
 IV. By lengthening the stem-vowel : ven-ii'S, ven-i. 
 
 V. By presenting the simple verb-stem : comp6r-ir6, comper-i. 
 
 [In the following lists, the verbs are an-anged according to the abovo 
 classification, and the supines also given. When any peculiarity exists 
 in the compounds, it is stated. Of Class I. (which embraces most of the 
 verbs in the language), only one example is given in each conjugation, as 
 the student is familiar with its form ; but under the remaining heads all 
 the verbs in common use are mentioned.] 
 
 10. LIST OF VERBS. 
 
 (664.) FIRST CONJUGATION. 
 
 I. Perfect-stem adds av to the Verb-stem. 
 
 To love, am-6, am-arS, Sm-av-i, am-ft-tum, 
 
 II. Perfect-stem adds u to the Verb-stem. 
 
 To creak, cr6p-o, cr6p-are, cr6p-u-i, crgp-i-tum. 
 
 / ie down, cub-o, cub-ar6, cub-u-I, cub-I-tum. 
 
 8o the compounds ; e. g., accubo, accubar6, acciibuT, accuMtum. 
 Some compounds, however, which take m before b, follow the 3d 
 conj. ; e. g., accumbS, accumberg, accubui, accubitiim. 
 
 To tame, 
 
 dom-o. 
 
 d6m-ar6. 
 
 dom-u-i, 
 
 dom-i-tum. 
 
 To rub. 
 
 frfc-o, 
 
 fric-are, 
 
 fric-u-T, 
 
 C fric-t'um and 
 I fric-a-tum. 
 
 To glitter. 
 
 mic-o. 
 
 mic-ar6, 
 
 mic-u-i. 
 
 
 To gush forth. 
 
 emic-o, 
 
 6mic-ar6, 
 
 emic-u-i, 
 
 6mic-a-tum. 
 
 Tofold, 
 
 plic-o, 
 
 plic-ar6, 
 
 plic-u-I, 
 
 plic-i-tum. 
 
 PUc-fl is used only in composition : supplied, duplTcd, multiplied, have 
 avi, atum ; explicd, to explain, avi, atum ; to unfold, ul, itum. 
 To cut, sSc-o, sec-are, sec-u-i, sec-t-iim. 
 
 To sound, son-o, s6n-arS, s6n-u-i, s6n-i-tani. 
 
 To thunder, t6n-o, ton-ar6, ton-u-i, t6n-i-tiim. 
 
 Toforbid, v6t-o, vet-arS, v6t-u-T, v6t-i-tum. 
 
LIST OF VERBS, SECOND CONJUGATION. 269 
 
 III. Pei-fect-stem reduplicates the first Consonant with e. 
 To give, d-o, d-ar6, ded-I, da-tum. 
 
 So, also, those compounds of whicli the first part is a word of two syl' 
 lables ; e. g., circumdS, circumdare, circumdedi, circumdatum, to sur- 
 round; but the compounds with monosyllables follow the 3d conj. ; 
 e. g., addo, addSre, addidi, addituna, to add. 
 To stand, st-o, st-are, stSt-i, st-atiim. 
 
 The compounds have in the perfect s 1 6 t i^ when the first part is a 
 dissyllable ; e. g., circumsto, circumstfiti ; but s t i t i when it is a 
 monosyllable ; e. g., adst6, adstiti. , 
 
 IV. Perfect-stem lengthens the Stem-vowel. 
 To assist, juv-o, juv-ar6, juv-I, ju-tum. 
 
 lava- turn. 
 To wash, liv-o, lav-ar6, lav-i, ■( lau-tiim. 
 
 ( lava- tun 
 < lau-tiim 
 ( 16-tum. 
 
 (665.) SECOND CONJUGATION. 
 
 I. Perfect-stem adds u to the Verb-stem. 
 To admonish, mon-eo, m6n-erS, mon-ii-i, m6n-T-tum. 
 
 II. Perfect-stem adds 6v to the Verb-stem. 
 
 To blot out, del-eo, del-er6, d6l-ev-T, del-e-tum. 
 
 To weep, fl-eo, fl-ere, fl-ev-I, fl-e-tum. 
 
 To spin, n-eo, n-er6, n-ev-i, n-e-tum. 
 
 To fill up, compl-eo, compl-er6, compl-ev-i, compl-e-tum. 
 
 To abolish, fibol-eo, ab61-er6, ab6l-ev-i, abol-i-tum. 
 
 The primitives 6leo and pleo are obsolete: like compleo are con- 
 jugated impleo, expleo ; like aboleo, adoleo, and exoleo. 
 
 III. Perfect-stem adds s to the Verb-stem. 
 
 Euphonic Rules. 
 
 1. A t-sound before s is dropped; e. g., ar(d)-si = ars-i. 
 2 A c-sound + s = x; e. g., aug-si = aux-i. 
 
 3. But a c-sound after 1 or r, before s, is dropped; e. g., £al{g)-Bl=i 
 fuls-i. 
 
 To shiver > . i , « ( al-s-i 
 
 •^1. 7 J } alg-eo, alg-erS, < , , 
 
 with cold, ) o ' ^ (alg-s-i). 
 
 To burn. ard-eo, ard-SrS, s / j -\ 
 
 I (ard-s-i). 
 
 To increase, aug-eo, aug-erS, < - .< > auc-ttlm. 
 
 To be bright, fiilg-eo, fulg-er6, 
 
 Z2 
 
 (aug-s-I). 
 
 ful-s-i 
 
 (fulg-s-i). 
 
270 
 
 To stick, 
 
 LIST OP VERBS, SECOND CONJUGATION, 
 haer-eo, haer-gre, | (l^'-Li). T*- 
 
 To indulge, indulg-eo, indulg-er6, 
 To command, jub-eo, jnb-erS, 
 
 To remain, 
 
 mSn-eo, 
 
 m4n-er6, 
 
 To assuage, 
 
 mulc-eo, 
 
 mulc-6r6, 
 
 To milk, 
 
 mulg-eo. 
 
 mulg-er6, 
 
 To laugh. 
 
 rid-eo, 
 
 rld-6re. 
 
 To advise, 
 
 suad-eo, 
 
 suad-ere, 
 
 To wipe, 
 
 terg-eo. 
 
 terg-er6. 
 
 To sweU, 
 
 turg-eo, 
 
 turg-6r6, 
 
 To twist, 
 
 torqu-eo, 
 
 torqu-6r6, 
 
 To press. 
 To shine, 
 To mourn, 
 
 urg-eo, 
 luc-eo, 
 Idg-eo, 
 
 urg-er6, 
 lnc-6r6, 
 lug-er6, 
 
 indul-tum. 
 
 inul-sfim. 
 mulc-tuir.. 
 
 indul-s-i 
 
 (jndulgs-i) 
 
 jus-s-i (jub-s-i), jus-sum. 
 
 maii-s-i, man-sum, 
 
 mul-s-I 
 
 (mulc-8-I), 
 
 mul-s-i 
 
 (mulg-s-I), 
 
 ri-s-i (rid-s-I), rl-sum. 
 
 sua-s-i ? _ „ 
 
 , , _. > sua-sui 
 (suad-s-ij, ) 
 
 ter-s-I ? ^ 
 
 > ter-sun 
 (terg-s-i), 5 
 
 tur-s-i 
 
 (turg-s-T). 
 
 tor-s-I 
 
 (torqu-s-i), 
 
 ur-s-i (urg-s-T). 
 
 lux-i (Itic-s-i). 
 
 lux-I (lug-s-I). 
 
 IV. Perfect-stem reduplicates ^rst Consonant and Vowel. 
 
 To bite, mord-eo, mord-er6, mdmord-l, mor-sum. 
 
 To hang, pend-eo, pend-er6, p6pend-i, pen-sum. 
 
 To betroth, spond-eo, spond-er6, sp6pond-i, spon-sum. 
 
 To shear, tond-eo, tond-6r6, totond-i, ton-sum. 
 
 The compounds of these verbs drop the reduplication ; e. g., re-spondl 
 (not re-spopondl). 
 
 V. Perfect-stem lengthens the Stem-vowel. 
 
 tor-tum. 
 
 To fake care. 
 
 cav-eo, 
 
 cav-erS, 
 
 cav-i, 
 
 cau-tum. 
 
 To favour, 
 
 fav-eo. 
 
 fav-er6, 
 
 fav-I, 
 
 fau-tum- 
 
 To cherish. 
 
 f6v-eo. 
 
 fbv-erS, 
 
 fov-I, 
 
 fo-tum. 
 
 To move, 
 
 m6v-eo, 
 
 m6v-er6. 
 
 mov-T, 
 
 mo-tum. 
 
 To dread. 
 
 p5v-eo, 
 
 pav-gr6, 
 
 pav-I. 
 
 
 To sit, 
 
 sed-eo. 
 
 s6d-er6, 
 
 sed-I, 
 
 ses-sum. 
 
 In the same manner are conjugated the compounds with dissyllables ; 
 e. g., circumsfideo, circumsederg, circumsedi, circumsessum, to sit 
 around ; but those with monosyllables change 6 of tlie stem into f ; 
 e g., assideo, assidere, assedl, assessum, to sit by. 
 
 To see, vid-eo, vid-6r6, vid-i, vl-sfim. 
 
 To VO10 v6v-eo, vdv-er6, v6v-i, v6-tflm. 
 
LIST OF VERBS, THIRD CONJUGATION. 
 
 271 
 
 (866.) 
 
 THIRD CONJUGATION. 
 
 I. Perfect-stem adds s to the Verb-stem. 
 Euplwnic Rules. 
 
 1. b before s = p ; e. g., scrib-si = scrip-sT. 
 
 2. c-sound +s = X ; e. g., cing-si = cinx-i. 
 
 [c, g, b, qu, are regarded as c-sounds.] 
 
 3. t-sound (d or t) before s is dropped ; e. g., claud-s-i = claus-T. 
 
 4. m before s is either changed into s, or p is interposed (prem-s-1 aa 
 pres-sl; com-s-i = conip-s-i). 
 
 To write. 
 
 To hind, 
 To carry y 
 To cook, 
 
 To shut. 
 
 scrlb-o, 
 
 cing-o, 
 veh-o, 
 e5qu-o, 
 
 claud-o, 
 
 scrib-ere, 
 
 cing-er5, 
 veh-ere, 
 c6qu-6re, 
 
 claud-6re, 
 
 scrip-tum. 
 
 scnp-s-i 
 (scrib-s-i), 
 
 einxl (cing-s-i), cinc-tum. 
 vexl (vcli-s-i), vec-tum. 
 coxi (coqu-s-T), coc-tum. 
 clau-s-I ? , ^ 
 
 t (claud-s-i), 5 
 
 A u in the compounds is changed into u ; e. g., includo, inclad6rS, in- 
 clusi, incliisum, to shut in. 
 To give way, ced-o, ced-6r6, cessi (ced-s-i), ces-Bum 
 
 To scatter, sparg-o, sparg-6r6, < , ., > spar-sura. 
 
 ( (sparg-s-i), 5 
 
 In the compounds a is changed into e ; e. g., aspergo, aspergSrfe. 
 asper-s-i, aspersum, to besprinkle. 
 To adorn, c6m-o, com-6re, com-ps-i, com-p-titm. 
 
 To press, prSm-o, pr6m-gre, ^ J^ ' .. >pres-sum 
 
 In the compounds 6 is changed into i ; e. g., comprimo, comprimfirft, 
 compressi, compressum, to press together. 
 To carry, g6r-o, g6r-6re, gess-I (g§r-s-I), ges-tum. 
 
 IL Perfect-stem adds u to the Verb-stem. 
 (a) Without change of Verb-stem. 
 To nourish, al-o, fil-erS, 
 
 To till, C61-0, c6l-grS, 
 
 To ask advice, consul-o, consul-6re, 
 
 deps-ere, 
 frem-erS, 
 ggm-6re, 
 m6l-6r6, 
 occul-6r6, 
 pins-6r6, 
 r&p-Sre, 
 
 To knead, 
 To murmur. 
 To groan. 
 To grind. 
 To conceal, 
 To grind. 
 To snatch. 
 To join to- 
 gether 
 
 deps-o, 
 fr6m-o, 
 gSm-o, 
 mSl-o, 
 occul-o. 
 
 pms-o, 
 rip-io, 
 
 ftl-u-T, 
 
 fil-i-tum. 
 
 C61-U-1, 
 
 cul-tum. 
 
 consul-u-i, 
 
 consul-turn. 
 
 deps-u-I, 
 
 deps-tum. 
 
 frem-u-I, 
 
 frem-i-tum. 
 
 gem-u-I, 
 
 gem-i-tilm. 
 
 mol-u-T, 
 
 mol-i-tum. 
 
 occul-u-I, 
 
 occul-tum. 
 
 pins-u-I, 
 
 pins-i-tum. 
 
 rftp-u-T, 
 
 rap-turn. 
 
 sSr-o, 
 
 g6r-6rS, 
 
 Bgr-u-I. 
 
 sertdm. 
 
272 
 
 To weave, 
 To tremble, 
 To vomit, 
 
 To beget, 
 To reap. 
 To place, 
 
 LIST OP VERBS, THIRD CONJUGATION. 
 
 tex-o, tex-Sre, tex-u-I, tex-tfim. 
 
 trgm-o, tr6m-erS, trem-u-I. 
 
 vom-o, v6m-6re, v6m-u-i, v6m-i-tilm. 
 
 (b) With change of Verb-stem, 
 gign-o, gign-erg, ggn-u-T, ggn-i-tum. 
 
 m6t-o, met-ere, mess-u-I, mes-sum. 
 
 p6n-o, pon-ere, p6s-u-i, pos-i-tum. 
 
 [For compounds of cumbSre, see 664, II.] 
 
 111. Perfect-stem adds v or Iv to the Vcrh-stem. 
 (a) Adds V, and lengthens Stem- vowel if short 
 
 cem-Sre, crS-v-I, cre-tum. 
 
 cem-o, 
 
 To separate, 
 perceive, 
 
 The perfect and supine of cemo are found only in the compounds 
 e. g., decemo, decemere, decrevi, decretum, to decree. 
 To grow, cresc-o, cresc-ere, cre-v-I, cre-tum. 
 
 To smear, lin-o, lin-ere, le-v-I, or II-v-i, li-tum. 
 
 To know, nosc-o, nosc-ei-e, no-v-i, no-tum. 
 
 So, also, the compounds inter, ig, per, prse-nosco, have ovT, otiim ; buj 
 cog, ag, praecog, recog-nosco, have ovi, ztum ; e. g., agnosco, agnosc- 
 6rS, agndvi, agnitum, to perceive. 
 To feed, pasc-o, pasc-erg, pa-v-i, pas-tum. 
 
 To rest, quiesc-o, quiesc-6rg, qui6-v-i, ' quie-tum. 
 
 To decide, scisc-o, scisc-ere, scl-v-i, scl-tum. 
 
 To sow, s6r-o, ser-ere, se-v-I, sS-tum, 
 
 The compounds have the supine in itum ; e. g., consero, consgrJ-riS 
 consevi, consitum, to plant. 
 
 To allow. 
 
 sin-o, 
 
 sin-gre. 
 
 sT-v4, 
 
 8i-tum. 
 
 To despise. 
 
 spem-o. 
 
 spem-grg. 
 
 spre-v-i, 
 
 spre-tuio. 
 
 To strew, 
 
 stem-o. 
 
 stem-ere. 
 
 stra-v-i, 
 
 stia-tum. 
 
 To become ) 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 accustom- ; 
 
 > suesc-o, 
 
 suesc-grS, 
 
 suo-v-T, 
 
 sug-tum. 
 
 ed, ] 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 (6) Perfect-stem adds iv. 
 
 
 To summon. 
 
 arcess-o, 
 
 arcessere, 
 
 arcess-iv-T, 
 
 arcess-i-tu 
 
 In the same manner, capesso, facesso, incesso, lacessD. 
 To seek, ^ 
 strive of- > pgt-o, pgt-gre, pgt-iv-I, pSt-i-tilm. 
 
 ter, ) 
 
 To seek, * quser-o, quaer-grS, quass-Iv-i, qusBS-i-tam. 
 
 The compounds change m of the stem into I ; e. g., conqulro, coH" 
 qulrgrg, conquislvi, conqulsitum, to examine. 
 
 To rub, 
 
 tgr-o. 
 
 tgr-grg. 
 
 ( tr-iv-I > . ^^ 
 
LIST OF VERBS, THIRD CONJUGATION. 273 
 
 IV. Perfect-stem, reduplicates tlic first Consonant, 
 
 Some of these present vowel-changes, which must be carefully observed. 
 (a) When the first vowel is i, o, u, the first consonant is reduphcated with 
 that vowel ; {b) in other verbs with e ; (c) the compounds of dare, to give, 
 with i. 
 
 (a) First Vowel i, o, or u. 
 To run, cuiT-o, curr-ere, cu-curr-i, cur-sum. 
 
 Most of the compounds have the perfect both with and without the 
 redupHcation ; e. g-., accurro, accurrere, accurri and accucurri, ac- 
 carsum, to run to. 
 
 To learn, disc-o, disc-Sr6, di-dic I. 
 
 The compounds also reduplicate ; e. g., perdisc8, perdidici, to learn 
 thoroughly/. 
 
 To toeigh, pend-o, pend-er6, p6-pend-z, pen-sum. 
 
 The compounds do not reduplicate ; e. g., append^, appender6, ap 
 pendi, appensum, to hang to. 
 
 To demand, posc-o, posc-6r6, po-posc-L 
 
 The compounds reduplicate ; e. g., reposcferS, rfipoposci, to demaruf 
 hack again. 
 
 To prick, pung-o, pung-6r6, pu-pug-i, punc-tum. 
 
 Compomids have perf p u n x i. 
 To beat, tund-o, tund-6rS, tu-tud-i, tun-sum. 
 
 Compounds have supine tusum; e. g., contundSrS, contusum, to 
 crush. 
 
 (5) Other Verbs reduplicate with c. 
 
 To fall, cdd-o, cad-6r6, cS-cid-i, ca-sum. 
 
 To cut, cosd-o, csed-6rS, cS-cId-i, csB-sum. 
 
 The compounds have cidi, cisum ; e. g., occldfirg, occldi, occlsiim, to 
 kill. 
 To sing, ctoi-o, can-6rg, c6-cln T, can-tum. 
 
 The compounds have cinui ; e. g., succinerg, succinul, to sing to. 
 
 To cheat, fall-o, faU-6rS, fg-fell-I, fal-sum. 
 
 To bargain, pang-o, pang-er6, p6-pig-i, pac-tuni. 
 
 The compounds have pingd, pegi, pactum ; e. g.. comping6r6, compe.^t, 
 comp actum, to fasten together. 
 
 To spare, parc-o, 
 
 parc-ere, 
 
 p6-perc-i. 
 
 par-Slim. 
 
 To bring forth, pftr-io. 
 
 par-6rg, 
 
 pe-p6r-I, 
 
 par-turn. 
 
 To drive, pell-o, 
 
 pell-6r6, 
 
 pg-pul-i, 
 
 pul-stira. 
 
 a"o touch, tango, 
 
 tang-6rg, 
 
 t6-tig-i, 
 
 tac-tum 
 
274 
 
 LIST OP VERBS, THIRD CONJUGATION. 
 
 The compounds have tingo, tingSrg, tigl, tactum; e. g-* attinggr*, 
 attigi, attactum, to reach. 
 
 (c) Compounds oi dUrc, 
 
 To hide, 
 To add, 
 To lay up. 
 To believe, 
 To surrender. 
 To publish. 
 To put in. 
 To oppose. 
 To destroy. 
 To betray. 
 To restore. 
 To deliver, 
 To sell. 
 
 ab-do, 
 
 ad-do, 
 
 con-do, 
 
 ere -do, 
 
 de-do, 
 
 e-do, 
 
 in-do, 
 
 ob-do, 
 
 per-do, 
 
 pro-do, 
 
 red-do, 
 
 tra-do, 
 
 ven-do, 
 
 abd-ere, 
 
 add-ere, 
 
 con-d-erS 
 
 cred-6r6, 
 
 ded-6r6, 
 
 6d-ere, 
 
 ind-erc, 
 
 obd-ere, 
 
 perd-er6, 
 
 prod-er6, 
 
 redd-ere, 
 
 trad-6r6, 
 
 vend-er6, 
 
 reduplicate witJi i. 
 ab-did-i, 
 ad-did-i, 
 con-did-I, 
 cre-did-i, 
 de-did-i, 
 e-did-I, 
 iu-did-i, 
 ob-did-I, 
 per-dld-i, 
 pro-did-i, 
 red-did-i, 
 tra-did-i, 
 ven-dld-I, 
 
 ab-di-66m. 
 
 ad-di-tum. 
 
 cou-di-tum. 
 
 cre-di-tum. 
 
 de-di-tum. 
 
 6-di-tum. 
 
 in-di-tum. 
 
 ob-di-tum. 
 
 per-di-tum 
 
 pro-dl-tum. 
 
 red-di-tum. 
 
 tra-di-tum. 
 
 ven-di-tSm. 
 
 em-i. 
 
 em-tum. 
 
 fod-I, 
 
 fos-sum. 
 
 fug-i, 
 
 fu«^-T-tum. 
 
 fQd-i, 
 
 fu-sum. 
 
 leg-I, 
 
 lec-tum. 
 
 v. Perfect-stem lengtliem the Stem-vowel of the Verb, 
 (a) Without Vowel-changes. 
 To take, 6m-o, em-6r6, 
 
 Compoands, co6mo, adimfi, exiin8. 
 
 To dig, f6d-io, f6d-6re. 
 
 To fly, fng-io, fug-6r6. 
 
 To pour, fund-o, fund-6re. 
 
 To read, leg-o, I6g-6r6, 
 
 Tlie compounds with per, prae, re, and sub retain 6 ; e. g., perlggfirSi 
 perlegi, perlectum, to read through ; but those with col, de, e, se 
 change 6 into i ; e. g., collig^rg, collegi, coUectum, to collect : three, 
 diligo, I love; intelligo, / understand; negligo, I neglect, havo 
 exi, ectum ; e. g., dilig6r6, dilexi, dilectum. 
 
 To leave, linqu-o, linqu-er6, liqu-I, 
 
 To burst, rump-o, rump-er6, rup-I, 
 
 To conquer, vinc-o, viuc-ere, vic-l, 
 
 (b) With Vowel-change. 
 To drive, Sg-o, fig-grS, §g-i. 
 
 Three of the compounds retain &, circnmago, perago, sStfigo : two un- 
 dergo contraction, cogo (con + ago), dego (de + ftgo) : compounds 
 with ab, amb, ad, ex, prod, sub, change a into i; e. g., abig6i-8, 
 abegi, abactum, to drive away. 
 
 To take. 
 
 lic-tum. 
 
 rup-tum. 
 
 vic-tum. 
 
 ac-tum. 
 
 cSp-io, 
 
 cap-6r6, 
 
 cep-i; 
 
 cap-tum. 
 
 All the compounds change a into i, and have supine ceptum; e. g^ 
 accxp-6rg, accepT, acceptnm, to receive. 
 
LIST OF VERBS, THIRD CONJUGATION. 
 
 275 
 
 fac-io, 
 
 fac-6r6, 
 
 fec-i, 
 
 fac-tum. 
 
 To make, ) 
 To do, S 
 
 1. Compounds with verbs retain a ; e. g., Iabefac6r6, labgf eci, labe* 
 factum, to tceaken. 
 
 2. Compounds with prepositions change a into i ; e. g., aiFicSre, aff ecT, 
 affectum, to affect. 
 
 To break, frang-o, frang-6r6, freg-i, frac-tum. 
 
 Compounds change a into i ; e. g., refringere, refregi, refractum, to 
 break open. 
 To cast, jac-io, jac-er6, jfcc-T, jac-tum. 
 
 Compounds ab, ad, de, e, in, ob, re, trans, all change & into I ; e. g^ 
 abjicerfi, abjeci, abjectiSm, to throto away. 
 
 VI. TJie Perfect-stem presents the simple Verb-stem, 
 (a) Steins ending in u or v. 
 
 To refuse. 
 
 abnu-o, 
 
 abnu-er6. 
 
 abnu-!. 
 
 
 To sharpen, 
 
 acu-o. 
 
 acu-erS, 
 
 acu-i,. 
 
 acu-tfim. 
 
 To show, 
 
 argu-o, 
 
 arga-6r6. 
 
 argu-i. 
 
 argu-tflm. 
 
 To agree, 
 
 congru-o. 
 
 . congru-6rS, 
 
 congru-i. 
 
 
 To put off. 
 
 exu-o. 
 
 exu-erg, 
 
 exu-i. 
 
 exu-tum. 
 
 To put on. 
 
 indu-o. 
 
 indu-6re. 
 
 indu-i, 
 
 indu-tum. 
 
 To imbue. 
 
 imbu-o, 
 
 imbu-6r6, 
 
 imbu-i, 
 
 imbfi-tum. 
 
 To pay, 
 
 lu-o. 
 
 lu-6re, 
 
 lu-i. 
 
 lu-tum. 
 
 Tojear, 
 
 m6tu-o, 
 
 mStu-ere, 
 
 mStu-i. 
 
 
 To lessen, 
 
 minu-o. 
 
 minu-erg, 
 
 minu-I, 
 
 minu-tum. 
 
 To rush. 
 
 ru-o, 
 
 ru-6rS, 
 
 ru-I, 
 
 ril-tum. 
 
 To loose, 
 
 solv-o, 
 
 solv-6rg, 
 
 solv-i, 
 
 solu-tilm. 
 
 To spit, 
 
 spu-o, 
 
 spu-er6, 
 
 spu-T, 
 
 spu-tfim. 
 
 To place. 
 
 statu-o. 
 
 statu-6r6, 
 
 statu-i. 
 
 statu-tfim. 
 
 To sneeze, 
 
 stemu-o. 
 
 stemu-ere, 
 
 stemu-i, 
 
 stemu-tum. 
 
 To sew, 
 
 su-o. 
 
 su-6rS, 
 
 su-I, 
 
 su-tum. 
 
 To give, 
 
 tribu-o, 
 
 tribu-6r6. 
 
 tribu-i, 
 
 tribu-tum. 
 
 To roll. 
 
 volv-o, 
 
 volv-6rg. 
 
 volv-I, 
 
 volu-tum. 
 
 
 
 (6) Consonan^stems. 
 
 
 To weigh. 
 
 append-o, 
 
 append-grg, 
 
 append-T, 
 
 appen-sdm. 
 
 So, also, the other compounds of pendo. 
 
 
 To attend. 
 
 attend-o, 
 
 attend-erg, 
 
 attend-T, 
 
 atten-gum. 
 
 So, also, the other compounds of tendo 
 
 
 
 To drink, 
 
 blb-O, 
 
 bib-erg, 
 
 bib-i, 
 
 bibi-tum. 
 
 To forge, 
 
 ciid-o. 
 
 cud-gre. 
 
 Clid-i, 
 
 cu-silm. 
 
 To eat, 
 
 6d-o, 
 
 ed-grc. 
 
 6d-f, 
 
 •-sum. 
 
 To lick. 
 
 lamb-o. 
 
 lamb-gre. 
 
 lamb-T. 
 
 
 To chew. 
 
 mand-o, 
 
 mand-grg. 
 
 mand-i, 
 
 raan-suin. 
 
 To spread. 
 
 pand-o. 
 
 pand-grg. 
 
 pand i, 
 
 pas-si5m. 
 
276 
 
 LIST OF VERBS, FOURTH CONJUGATION. 
 
 To take, prghend-o, prghend-ere, prghend-i, prehen-sum. 
 
 To scratch, scab-o, scab-ere, scab-I. 
 
 To climb, scand-o, scand-ere, scand-L soan-suni. 
 
 Compounds (a, e, de, con, in) change a into e ; e. g., ascendo. 
 To sink down, sid-o, sid-6r6, sid-i. 
 
 The compounds take the perf, and supine from s6de6; e. g., coosH 
 derS, consedi, consessum, to sit together. 
 To hiss, strid-o, etrid-gre, strid-i. 
 
 To turn, vert-p, vert-6r6, vert-i, ver-sum. 
 
 Deverto, proeverto, and r6verto are also used in the passive form as 
 deponents ; e. g., rSvertSr, reverti, reversus sum, / tiir7i back. 
 
 2h brush, verr-o, verr-6rS, verr-i, 
 
 To pluck, vell-o, vell-SrS, vell-i, 
 
 Compounds of cand6 and fendd belong here, viz. 
 
 To burn, 
 To defend, 
 
 (667.) 
 
 incend-o, 
 d§fend-o. 
 
 incend-6rS, 
 d6fend-Sr6, 
 
 incend-i, 
 defend-i. 
 
 ver-sum. 
 ^^ll-sum. 
 
 mcenrsum. 
 dSfen-sum. 
 
 FOURTH CONJUGATION. 
 
 I. Perfect-stem adds iv to the Verb-stem. 
 
 {Obs.) This class contains most of the verbs of the fourth conjugation; 
 the following alone has a peculiar supine : 
 To bury, s5p6l-io, sepel-ir6, sSpSl-iv-i, , s6pul-tum. 
 
 II. Perfect-stem adds u to the Yerb-st-em. 
 To clothe, Smic-io, Smic-ii-e, 
 To open, ap8r-io, SpSr-ire, 
 To cover, 6p6r-io, 6per-ire, 
 To leap, s&l-io, sSl-irS, 
 
 Compounds change a into i ; e. g., desilirS, desilui, desultum, to leap 
 down. 
 
 III. Perfect-stem adds s to iJte Verb-stem. 
 
 amic-u-i, 
 
 amic-tiim. 
 
 ap6r-u-i. 
 
 aper-tum.* 
 
 6p6r-u-I, 
 
 6per-tum. 
 
 sal-u-i, 
 
 sal- turn. 
 
 To cram. 
 
 farc-io. 
 
 farc-ir6, 
 
 < far-s-i 
 
 farc-tum. 
 
 ai-c-s-i), 
 The compounds change a intoe; e. g., confercire, confersi, confertum, 
 
 to Jill up. 
 
 To prop. 
 
 fulc-io. 
 
 fulc-ire, 
 
 To draw. 
 
 haur-io. 
 
 haur-ire, 
 
 To decree. 
 
 sanc-io. 
 
 sanc-ir6, 
 
 ful-s-i 
 
 (fulc-s-i), 
 ( hau-s-i 
 \ (haur-s-i), 
 C sanx-i 
 ( (sanc-s-i),- 
 
 ful-tum. 
 
 haus-tum. 
 
 sanc-i-tum and 
 sanc-tum. 
 
 * The compounds of par-i6 which begin with a vowel have ui, ertum, 
 as in Class IT. ; those beginning with a consonant have i, eitflm, as in 
 Class V. 
 

 ^ST 
 
 OF DEPONENT VERBS. 
 
 JJ75 
 
 To patch, 
 
 sarc-io, 
 
 sarc-TrS, 
 
 sar-s i 
 
 (sarc-s-i), 
 
 >sar-tiSm. 
 
 Tofed, 
 
 sent-io. 
 
 sent-ir6. 
 
 ( sen-s-i 
 
 \ (sent-s-i), 
 
 > sen-sum. 
 
 Instead of assentid) ass'entior, deponent i^ more common, 
 
 To hedge in, sSp-io, sep-ii-g, sip-s-i, sep-tunl. 
 
 To hind, vinc-io, vinc-iru, \, ■ -x > vine- turn. 
 
 ( t^uic-s-i), ) 
 
 IV- Perfect-stem lengthens the Stem-vowel. 
 Contains hut a siiigle einiple verb.. 
 To coTue, ven-io, v^n-ire, ven-i, ven-tiim. 
 
 v. Perfect-stem takes the simple Verb-stem^ 
 To ascertain, comper-io, comp6r-ire, comp6r-i, comper-tum.* 
 
 To discern, rep6r-io, r.6p6r-ire, rep6r-i, i*6per-tum.* 
 
 (668.) • DEPONENT VERBS. 
 
 FIRST CONJUGATION. 
 
 To exhort,- hort-6r, hort^aii, hort-at-us. 
 
 The deponents of the first conjugation are the most numerous, but are 
 formed like liortor, with arl, atiis. 
 
 SECOND CONJUGATION. 
 
 To acknowledge, fat-eor, fat-eri, fas-siis. 
 
 The compounds make f itedr, fessus ; e. g., conf ite6r, confiteri, coa 
 fessus, to confess : difFiteor has no participle. 
 
 To bid. 
 To heal. 
 To deserve, 
 
 lic-e6r, 
 
 mSd-edr, 
 
 m6r-e6r, 
 
 
 lic-Sri, 
 
 m6d-6ri. 
 
 mSr-eri, 
 
 Iic-It-us. 
 m6r-Tt-iis. 
 
 To pity, 
 To think. 
 
 mTsSr-e6r, 
 re or. 
 
 
 misgr-grl, 
 r-eri. 
 
 ( miser-it-us, or 
 \ miser-tus. 
 ra-tus. 
 
 To look upon, 
 Tofear, 
 
 ta-e6r, 
 v6r-e6r, 
 
 
 tu-6rl, 
 ver-eri, 
 
 ( tu-it-us, or 
 I tu-tus. 
 v6r-it-us. 
 
 
 THIRD 
 
 CONJUGATION. 
 
 
 To devise, 
 
 comminisc-6r, 
 
 
 comminisc-i, 
 
 commen-tus 
 
 Il6miniscor, 
 
 to remember, has 
 
 1 no 
 
 perfect. 
 
 
 To obtain, 
 To be weary, 
 
 adipiBc-6r, 
 defetisc-6r, 
 
 
 adipisc-i, 
 defetisc-i. 
 
 adep-tiis. 
 defes-sus. 
 
 
 * See note, p. 276. 
 A A 
 
 
278 
 
 To awake, 
 To enjoy, 
 To perform, 
 
 LIST OF DEPONENT VERBS. 
 
 expergisc-6r, 
 
 fru-6r, 
 
 fung 6r, 
 grid i6r, 
 
 expergisc-i, 
 
 fru-i, 
 
 fung-i, 
 grftd-i, 
 
 experrec-tfia. 
 fruc-tus and 
 fru-it-us. 
 fanc-tus. 
 gres-sus. 
 
 To proceed, 
 
 Compounds change the S into 6 ; e. g., aggrSdi, aggressus, to assaiL 
 
 To be angry, 
 To/all, 
 To speak, 
 To die. 
 To obtain. 
 To be bom, 
 To lean %ipo% 
 
 strive, 
 Toforget, 
 To bargain, 
 Tofeed, 
 
 ,to ) 
 
 irasc-6r, 
 
 lab-6r, 
 
 I6qu-6r, 
 
 m6r-i6r, 
 
 nancisc-6r, 
 
 nasc-6r, 
 
 mt-6r, 
 
 6blivisc-6r, 
 
 pScisc-Or, 
 
 pasc-6r, 
 
 irasc-i. 
 
 lab-i, 
 
 l6qu-i, 
 
 mor-i, 
 
 nancisc-i, 
 
 nasc-i, 
 
 nit-i, 
 
 oblivisc-i, 
 
 pScisc-i, 
 
 pasc-I, 
 
 lap-sus. 
 
 locu-tiia. 
 
 mor-tuus- 
 
 nac-tus. 
 
 na-tus. 
 
 lii-sus, or 
 
 nix-US. 
 
 obll-tus. 
 
 pac-tns. 
 
 pas-tas. 
 
 This verb is the passive of pascSrS, to give food. 
 To svffer, pftt-i6r, pfit-I, pas-sus. 
 
 PerpStiOr, perpessus, to endure, changes & into 6. 
 
 (From plect5, to twine.) 
 
 To embrace, 5 
 
 amplect-6r, 
 
 amplect-i, 
 
 amplex-fis. 
 
 complect-6r. 
 
 complect-I, 
 
 , complex-tis. 
 
 To set out, 
 
 pr6ficisc-6r. 
 
 proficisc-i, 
 
 pr6fec-tus. 
 
 To complain. 
 
 qa6r-6r, 
 
 qu6r-I, 
 
 ques-tus. 
 
 To gnn. 
 
 ring-6r, 
 
 ring-L 
 
 
 TofoUaw, 
 
 s6qu-or. 
 
 s6qu-i, 
 
 sScu-tfts. 
 
 To revenge, 
 
 Tilcisc-6r, 
 
 ulcisc-L 
 
 ul-tus. 
 
 To use. 
 
 flt-or, 
 
 iit-i. 
 
 u-sus. 
 
 
 FOURTH 
 
 CONJUGATION. 
 
 
 To assent, 
 
 assent-i6r, 
 
 assent-M, 
 
 assen-sus. 
 
 To flatter. 
 
 bland-iOr, 
 
 bland-iri, 
 
 bland-it-iis. 
 
 To try. 
 
 exper-ior, 
 
 expgr-iri, 
 
 exper-tus. 
 
 To bestow money, 
 
 larg-i6r, 
 
 larg-iii, 
 
 larg-it-us. 
 
 To lie. 
 
 ment-i6r, 
 
 ment-iri, 
 
 ment-it-us. 
 
 To measure, 
 
 met-ior, 
 
 met-iri. 
 
 men-sus. 
 
 To m/rve a mass. 
 
 mol-ior, 
 
 mol-M, 
 
 mol-it-us. 
 
 To wait for. 
 
 opp&--i6r 
 
 opp6r-iri, 
 
 opper-tiis. 
 
 To begin, 
 
 ord-ior, 
 
 ord-Iri, 
 
 or-sus. 
 
INCHOATIVE AND IRREGULAR VERBS. 
 
 279 
 
 To rise, 
 
 6r-iQr, 
 
 6r-irl, 
 
 or-tas. 
 
 To divide, 
 
 pait-idr, 
 
 part-iri, 
 
 part-it-iis. 
 
 To possess \ 
 myself of, 
 
 p6t-i6r, 
 
 pot-iri, 
 
 p6t-it-us. 
 
 To cast lots, 
 
 sort-ior. 
 
 sort-iri, 
 
 sort-it-US. 
 
 INCHOATIVE VERBS. 
 
 Inchoatives ai-e verbs derived from nouns, adjectives, or other v6rbs, 
 expressing a beginning or becoming of the act or state denoted by the 
 primitive. Their stems always end in sc, and they all follow the form of 
 the 3d conj. ; e. g., 
 
 From puer, boy, we have puerasc-Sre, to become a boy [again). 
 " matur-us, ripe, we have maturesc-6re, to become ripe. 
 " dorm-ire, to sleep, we have obdormisc-6re, to fall asleep, 
 
 (1.) It is enough to observe on those derived from adjectides and nouns 
 
 that they either have no perfect, or else form it in ui. 
 (2.) As to those deriv'ed from verbs, 
 
 (a) Most are from verbs in the second conjugation, and form their 
 perfect-stem by adding u to the stem, rejecting sc; or, in other 
 words, their perf.-stem is the same as that of the simple verb from 
 which they are derived ; e. g., 
 
 To become gray, canesc-erS (caner6), canu-i. 
 To groio sour, acesc-6re (ac6re), acu-i. 
 
 (5) Those derived from verbs of the other conjugations take the per- 
 fects of the simple verbs from which they are derived. 
 
 To grow old, inv6terasc-6r6 {inveterdr8), inveteriv-i, invetera-tum. 
 To come to life, rtivivisc-&r6 [vlvSre), rSvix-i, rSvic-tum. 
 
 To fall asleep, obdormisc-ero (dormlr^], obdonniv-i, obdormi-tum 
 
 11. IRREGULAR VERBS.* 
 
 (670.) INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 Tenses for Incomplete Actiom 
 
 Tenses for Complete Action. 
 
 Present and Imperfect. 
 
 Perfect and Plup^erfect. 
 
 |l. posse, to be able. 
 
 potuisse, to have been able. 
 
 2. velle, to be loiUing. 
 '■^. noils, to be unwilling. 
 
 voluisse, to have been willing. 
 
 noluisse, to have been unwilling. 
 
 4. malle, to be more willing. 
 
 maluisse, to have been more willing. 
 
 ■■,. 6derS, or esse, to eat. 
 
 edisse, to have eaten. 
 
 6. ferre, to bear. 
 
 tulissS, to have borne, or suffered. 
 
 7. iieri, to become. 
 
 factum esse, to have been made, o: 
 
 done. 
 latum ess6, to have been hnnie. 
 
 8, ferri, to be borne. 
 
 * See note, next page. 
 
28a 
 
 IRREGULAR VERBS. 
 
 (671.) 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Pkssent, lam able, fyc. 
 
 Peri'ect, Ifiave been able, SfC. 
 
 1. possum,* 
 
 potgs, potest. 
 
 1. p6tu-i, isti, it, 
 
 possumus, 
 
 potestis, possunt. 
 
 pgtu-imus, istis, grant or erg. 
 
 2. v616, ■ 
 
 vis, vuit, 
 
 2. v61u-i, isti, it. 
 
 voiiimus. 
 
 vultis, volunt. 
 
 volu-imus, istis, erunt or erg. 
 
 3. nolo, 
 
 nonvis, nonvuit, 
 
 3. nolu-i, isti, it. 
 
 nolumus, 
 
 nonvultis, nolunt. 
 
 nolu-Imus, istis, erantorerg. 
 
 4. malO, 
 
 mavis, mavdt, 
 
 4. malu-i, isti, it. 
 
 znalumus, 
 
 mavultis, malunt. 
 
 malu-imiis, istis, erunt or erg. 
 
 5. edd, 
 
 edis ar es, edit or est, 
 
 5. ed-i, isti, it. 
 
 edimus, 
 
 editis orestTs ; edunt. 
 
 ed-imiis, istis, erunt or ere. 
 
 6. f ero, 
 
 fers, fert. 
 
 6. tul-i, isti, it, 
 
 ferimus, 
 
 fertis, ferunt. 
 
 tul-imus, istis, erunt or erg. 
 
 7. fio,t • 
 
 fis, fit, 
 
 7. factus sum, es, est. 
 
 fimus, 
 
 fitis, fiunt. 
 
 facti siimus, estis, sunt. 
 
 8. f eror. 
 
 feiTis or ferre ; fertur, 
 
 8. latus sum, es, est. 
 
 ferimur. 
 
 ferimini, fSrantur. 
 
 lati siimus, estis, sunt. 
 
 Impkbfect, I was able, 6fC. 
 
 Plupebfect, I had been able, 6fC. 
 
 1. pot-erSm, 
 
 6ras, erat, 
 
 1. pota-eram, eras, erat. 
 
 pot-evamuE 
 
 , gratis, grant. 
 
 potu-eramiis, eratis, grant. 
 
 'a. vol-ebam, 
 
 ebas, ebat. 
 
 2. volu-eram, eras, erat, 
 
 vol-ebamus, ebatis, ebant. 
 
 voiu-gramus, eratis, grant. 
 
 3. nol-ebam. 
 
 ebas, ebat; 
 
 3. noia-eram, eras, erat. 
 
 nol-ebamus 
 
 , ebatis, ebant. 
 
 nolu-gramus, gratis, grant. 
 
 4. mal-ebam, 
 
 ebas, ebat, 
 
 4. mala-eram, eras, grit, 
 
 mal-ebainus, ebatis, ebant. 
 
 malu-eramus, eratis, erant. 
 
 5. ed-ebam, 
 
 ebas, ebat. 
 
 5. ed-gram, gras, grat, 
 
 ed-ebamus 
 
 ebatis, §bant. 
 
 ed-gramus, gratis, erant. 
 
 6. f er-ebam. 
 
 ebas, ebat. 
 
 6. tul-gram, griis, erat. 
 
 f6r-ebamu£ 
 
 , ebatis, ebant. 
 
 tul-eramus, eratis, erant. 
 
 7. f i-ebam. 
 
 ebas. ebat. 
 
 7. factus eram, eras, erat. 
 
 fi-ebamus, 
 
 ebatis, ebant. 
 
 facti eramus, eratis, grant. 
 
 8. f er-ebar. 
 
 ebarisorS, ebatur. 
 
 8. latus gram, eras, grat. 
 
 fer-ebamur, ebamiui, ebantui-. 
 
 lati eramus, gratis, grant. 
 
 
 Future, 
 
 f^uTURE Perfect, 
 
 I shall 
 
 or will be able, SfC. 
 
 I shall or will have been able, ffC. 
 
 |1, pot-6r5, 
 
 eris., grit. 
 
 1. p6tu-grd, gris, grit, 
 
 pot-eiimus 
 
 eritis, grant. 
 
 p6tu-erimus, gritis, grint. 
 
 2. vol-am, 
 
 es, et. 
 
 2. volu-erd, eris, erit, 
 
 vol-eimis, 
 
 etis, ent. 
 
 volu-erimus, eritis, erint. 
 
 3. nol-am, 
 
 es, gt. 
 
 3. nolu-ero, gris, erit. 
 
 nol-emus, 
 
 etis, ent 
 
 nolu-erimiis, eritis, grint. 
 
 4. mal-am, 
 
 es, et. 
 
 4. malu-ero, eris, erit. 
 
 mal-emus. 
 
 etis, ent. 
 
 malu-erimiis, eritis, erint. 
 
 5. ed-am. 
 
 es, et. 
 
 5. ed-erd, gris. erit. 
 
 . ed-emus, 
 
 etis, ent. 
 
 ed-erimus, eritis, grint. 
 
 6. f er-am, 
 
 es, ct. 
 
 6. tul-ero, eris, erit, 
 
 fer-emus, 
 
 etis, ent. 
 
 tul-erimus, eritis, grint. 
 
 7. fi-am, 
 
 es, gt. 
 
 7. factus grd, gris, 6rit, 
 
 fi-emus. 
 
 etis, ent. 
 
 facti grimus, eritis, grint. 
 
 8. f 6r-ar, 
 
 erisorerg, etur, 
 
 8. latQs gro, gris, grit, 
 
 fer-emur, 
 
 emini, entur. 
 
 lati ei-imus, eritis, grint. 
 
 * As many of these verbs are nearly related to each other, it seems un- 
 necessary to separate their forms of inflection. The con-espondent num- 
 bers will' be sufficient direction iti tracmg the several tenses of each verb. 
 
 t Via, contrary to the general rale (24, o), has i Ioni>- throngiioat. before* 
 vowels : but before er it is short ; as, fifiri. 
 
IRREGULAR VERBS. 
 
 281 
 
 (672.) IMPERATIVE MOOD. | 
 
 Note. — Possum, volo, malo, have no imperative mood. 
 
 1 
 
 3. noli, or nolito, be thou unwilling. 
 
 7. f i, or f ito, become thou 
 
 • 
 
 nolite, or nolitote, he ye, Spc. 
 
 f ite, or f itote : 3. f iunt6. 1 
 
 5, &de, edito, or es, estd, eat thou. 
 
 8. f en-e, or fertor, be thou borne. || 
 
 edits, editote : 3. eduntd. 
 
 f erimini, or f eriminor 
 
 . 3. ferun- 
 
 6. fer, or fertS, bear thou. 
 
 tor. 
 
 
 fertS, or fertotS : 3. f 6runt6. 
 
 
 
 (673.) SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. j 
 
 Present, I may be able, ^-c. 
 
 Perfect, I may have been able, 6fC. | 
 
 1. poss-Tm, is, it, 
 
 1. potu-erim, eris, 
 
 6rit, 
 
 poss-imiis, itis, int. 
 
 potu-erimiis, eritis. 
 
 erint. 
 
 2. vel-im, is, it, 
 
 2. volu-erim, eris. 
 
 urit,^ 
 
 vel-imus, itis, int. 
 
 volu-erimus, eritis. 
 
 erint. 
 
 3. iiol-im, is, it, 
 
 3. nolu-erim, eris. 
 
 erit. 
 
 nol-imus, itis, int. 
 
 nolu-erimus, eritis. 
 
 6rint. 
 
 4. mal-im, is, it, 
 
 4. malu-erim, eris. 
 
 erit, 
 
 mal-Imus, itis, int. 
 
 malu-6rimus, eritis. 
 
 erint. 
 
 5. ed-am, as, at, 
 
 5. ed-erim, eris, 
 
 erit. 
 
 ed-amus, atis, ant. 
 
 ed-erlmus, gritis. 
 
 eriut. 
 
 6. f er-am, as, St, 
 
 6. tul-erim, eris, 
 
 grit. 
 
 fer-amus, atis, ant. 
 
 tul-6rimus, Sritis, 
 
 ferint. 
 
 7. f i-am, as, at, 
 
 7. faclus sim, sis, 
 
 sit, 
 
 fi-amus, atis, ant. 
 
 fact! simus, sitTs, 
 
 sint. 
 
 8. f er-ar, arTs or are, atur, 
 
 8. latassim, sis. 
 
 sit, 
 
 fer-amur, amini, antur. 
 
 lati simus, sitis. 
 
 sint. 
 
 laiPERFECT, I might be able, SfC. 
 
 Pluperf., I might have been able, fyc. | 
 
 1. Poss-em, es, 6t, 
 
 1. potu-iss6m, isses. 
 
 iss6t, 
 
 poss-emus, etis, ent. 
 
 potu-issemus, issetls, 
 
 is sent. 
 
 2, vell-em, 6s, 6t, 
 
 2. volu-issem, iss?s. 
 
 isset, 
 
 veil-emus, etis, ent. 
 
 volu-issemus, issetis. 
 
 issent. 
 
 3. noll-em, es, 6t, 
 
 3. nolu-issem, isses. 
 
 isset. 
 
 noll-emus, etis, ent. 
 
 nolu-issemus, issetis. 
 
 issent. 
 
 4. mall-6m, es, 6t, 
 
 4. maluissem, isses, 
 
 issfit. 
 
 mall-emus, etis, ent. 
 
 malu-issemus, issetis, 
 
 issent. 
 
 5. eder-Smar essgm ; es, 6t, 
 
 5. ed-iss6m, isses, 
 
 isset, 
 
 eder-emus, etis, ent. 
 
 ed-issemus, issttis. 
 
 issent. 
 
 6. ferr-6m, es, 6t, 
 
 6, tul-issem, isses. 
 
 iss6t, 
 
 ferr-emus, etis, ent. 
 
 tui-issemQs, issetis. 
 
 issent. 
 
 7. f ier-em, 6s, 6t, 
 
 7. factiis ess6m, esses. 
 
 ess6t. 
 
 fiyr-emus, ttas, ent. 
 
 fact! essemiis, essetis. 
 
 essent. 
 
 8.fen--er, grisorere, etur. 
 
 8. latus ess6m, esses, 
 
 ess6t, 
 
 ferr-f'mur, emini, entur. 
 
 lati essemus, essetis, 
 
 essent. 
 
 (674.) GERUNDS. 
 
 , 
 
 2. volendi, volendo, volendum, cf being, in being, to be, willing. 
 
 3. noleudT, nolendo, nolendum, " " " unwiUi?is: 
 
 4. malendi, malendo, malendiim, " " " more willing:. 
 
 5. edendi, gdendo, edeudiira, of eating, -in eating, to eat. 
 
 
 6. ftrendi, f(5rendo, ftreudum, of bearing, in bearing, to bear. [ 
 
 (675.) SUPINES. I 
 
 i Accusative. 5. esum, to eat. 
 
 Ablative. 6sfl, to be eaten, to eat. 1 
 
 \ 6. latum, to bear. 
 
 l&tii, to be borne. \ 
 
 A A 2 
 
282 
 
 DEFECTIVE VERBS. 
 
 (676.) 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 Active. 1. potens, being able. 
 
 2. volens, " willing. 
 
 3. nolens, " 'unwilling. 
 
 4. malens, " more willing. 
 
 5. 6dens, eating. esurus, about to eat. 
 
 6. ferens, bearing. laturus, about to bear. 
 
 7. -faciendus, to be made or done. 
 
 8. f6rendus, to be borne. 
 
 Passive. 7. factus, being or having been m^ade or done. 
 8. latus, being or having been borne or suffered. 
 
 (677.) 
 
 Eo, / go. 
 
 Eft, I go, is conjugated like audio, except in the following tenses : 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 Imp. Tnd. Pres. ed, is, Jt. Imus, itis, eunt. 
 
 Past. IbSm, Ibas, ibat. ibamus, Ibatis, ibant. 
 
 Fut. ib6, ibis, ibit. iblmiis, ibTtls, ibunt. 
 
 Imperative. i, or itd. it6, or itotS. 3. euntd. 
 
 Imp. Pot. Pres. earn, eas, eat. eamfis, eatis, eant. 
 
 Gerunds. eundi, eundo, eandum. 
 
 Particips. Pres. iens [gen. euntis), going. 
 Supines. itum, itu. 
 
 Rem. In like manner, the compounda of eo are formed: also, queo, ro 6c 
 able, and ngqueo, to he unable ; except that these two have no imper- 
 ative mood or gerunds. 
 
 Fut. ituriis, about to go. 
 
 12. DEFECTIVE VERBS 
 
 (678.) Are tbose which have only some particular tenses and moods ; 
 as, aio, / say ; ausTm, / dare ; av©, hail ! &c. 
 
 
 (1.) Aio, I say. 
 
 
 Ind. Pres. 
 Imperfect. 
 Imperative. 
 Subj. Pres, 
 Participle. 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 aio, fiis, &it. 
 
 ai-ebam, ebas, 6b4t. ebimus, ebatis, 
 
 ai. 
 
 aifts, aiat. 
 ftiens. 
 
 aiunt. 
 ebant. 
 
 aiant. 
 
 (2.) AusTm, / dare. 
 
 Ind. Pres. 
 
 ausim, ausis, ausit. 
 
 ansint. 
 
 (3.) Ave, hail! 
 
 Imperative. 
 Infinitive. 
 
 ave, or aveto. avet6, or ftvetote. 
 averS. 
 
 
 (4.) Salve, God save you ! 
 
 Imperative. 
 Inknitive. 
 Ind. Fut. 
 
 salve, or salvetfi. salvetg, or 
 salvgfg. 
 
 salvebTs. 
 
 salvetotS. 
 
IMPERSONAL VERBS. 
 
 283 
 
 1 
 
 (5.) Cedo, give me. 
 
 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 c6d6. 
 
 riural. 
 
 c6ditg. 
 
 
 (6.) F 
 
 axo, or faxim [ior faciam), I will or 
 
 may do it. 
 
 
 Ind. Pres. 
 
 fax-o, or fax-im, is, it. imus, 
 
 itis. 
 
 int. 
 
 (7.) ausesS. I pray. 
 
 Ind. Pres. 
 Infinitive. 
 Participle. 
 
 quaBS-6, is, it. umus. 
 
 quaesere. 
 
 quaesens. 
 
 
 
 (8.) Inquam, or InquiS, / say. , | 
 
 Impf. Ind. Pres. inqu-iS, or am, is, it. imus, 
 Past. inquiebat. 
 Fut. inquies, inquigt. 
 Perf. Ind. Pres. inquisti. 
 Imperative. inqu6, inquitd. 
 Participle. inquiens. 
 
 inquite. 
 
 iunt. 
 inquie- 
 [bant. 
 
 (9.) These verbs, 
 
 Nov-i, / kn/}w ; 
 
 Memin-i, I remember; 
 
 Coep-i, / begin ; 
 
 Od-I, / hate, 
 have the forms of the perfect tenses combined with the meanings of the 
 imperfect. Nosco, the present of novl, is in use, and denotes to learn, 
 whence novl expresses the actual knowledge which is the result of 
 past learning. 
 
 
 
 r i, isti, &c. [Pres.) 
 
 
 Ndv- 
 
 6rfim, 6ras, &c. [Past.) 
 
 
 MemTn- 
 
 6r3, 6ris, &c. [Fut.) 
 6rim, 6ris. &c. [Siibj. Pres.) 
 
 
 Coep- 
 
 
 Od- 
 
 iss6m, isses, &c. [Subj. Past.) 
 , iss6, (Infinitive.) 
 
 
 MementS, mementote. [Imperative.) 
 
 
 Osus, osurtis ; coeptus, coepturus. [Participles.) 
 
 13. IMPERSONAL VERBS 
 (679.) Are those which have no subject, and take the pronoun it before 
 them in English ; e. ^., pluit, it rains. 
 1. Impersonals never used personally. 
 
 libet, libuit, it pleases. 
 Ilc6t, licuit, or > one may, 
 
 llcitum est, 5 *^ ^^ lawful. 
 6port6t, 6portuit, ^ J*/^ ^^- ^'^^ 
 
 bcfiooves. 
 
 '*mis6r6t, one pities. 
 *prggt, it grieves [or 
 
 *poenTtet, pcemtuit, it repents. 
 
 *-j>fi. -j-^ { it shames, 
 *pud6t, puduit, ]^^,i,^,j:^„,,j,_ 
 
 wearies, 
 iisffusts. 
 refert, it concerns. 
 
 *t8Bd6t, pertaesum est, \ * 
 
 * Those marked * take ace. of person and gen. of the thing (or object of 
 the feeUuc). 
 
284 
 
 IMPERSONAL VERBS. 
 
 2. Impersonals sometimes used ersonally in thirc^ person singular oi 
 plural. 
 
 fulminat, } -. ;• i./^„ 
 fulgurat, l^ii^S^i^'' 
 
 grauamat, 
 lucescit, 
 
 it hails. 
 
 it grows light. 
 
 nmgit, tt snovjs. 
 
 iluit, it rains. 
 
 , on4t, it thunders. 
 
 vesperascit, it grows dark. 
 
 3. Personal verbs used 
 gular. 
 
 specially as impersonals in third person sin- 
 
 accidit, 
 
 accedit,* 
 
 apparet, 
 
 attinet, 
 
 couducit, 
 
 constat, 
 
 coutingit, 
 
 conveuit, 
 
 delectat, 
 
 decet, 
 
 dedecet, 
 
 evenit, 
 
 expSdit, 
 
 excidit,} 
 
 it happens. 
 
 it is added. 
 
 it appears. 
 
 it belongs to. 
 
 it is conducive. ■ 
 ^ it is known, 
 "l it is agreed upon. 
 
 it happens. 
 
 it suits, agrees. 
 
 it is deliglitful. 
 
 it is becoming. 
 
 it is unbecoming. 
 
 it turns out. 
 
 it is expedient. 
 
 it has escaped me. 
 
 fit, 
 
 interest, 
 
 juvat, 
 
 latet, 
 
 liquet, 
 
 patet, 
 
 placet, 
 
 prsestat, 
 
 restat, 
 
 solet, 
 
 assolSt, 
 
 Stat, 
 
 sufficit, 
 
 vacat. 
 
 it happens, 
 it concerns, 
 it is pleasant, 
 it is unknown, con- 
 cealed, 
 it is clear. 
 it is plain, open, 
 it pleases [I resolve), 
 it is better, 
 it remains. 
 
 it happens usually. 
 
 it is resolved. 
 
 it suffices. 
 
 {I) have leisure. 
 
 Rem. These may be used in the diflPerent tenses of indie, and subj. 
 moods. 
 
 4. The third person singular of many intransitive vejrbs 'Is used im- 
 personally in the passive; e. g-., curritur, they run (it is run by 
 them); pugnatum est, they fought (it was fought by them). 
 Those which govern the dative, govern it also in the impersonal 
 form ; e. g., I am envied, mlhl invidetiir. 
 
 * Accedit quod(orut)= moreover. 
 
 t /. e., d e m 6 m 6 r i a e x c i d i t = eY has slipped from my memory--is 
 forgotten. 
 
§ 7. ADVERB. 
 
 The adverb qualifies a verb, adjective, or another adverb. 
 
 I. Derivative Adverbs. 
 
 (680.) Derivative adverbs (a) are nearly all formed fix>m adjectives at 
 participles, by adding e or U 6 r to their stems ; 
 
 1. Add e to stem of adjectives in u s, &, um; e. g., 
 
 c 1 a r - u s, illustrious. c 1 ft r - 6, illustriously. 
 
 Rem. B 6 n u s makes b S n 6, well ; and mains {bad) ; m ft 1 6, badly. 
 All others end in 6 {long). 
 
 2. Add itSr to the stem of adjectives of 2d or 3d class ; e. g., 
 
 b r 6 v - i s, brief. br6v-itSr, 
 
 f e r o X (feroc-s), fierce. f 6 r 6 c - i 1 6 r, fiercely. 
 
 Rem. 1- Those which end in ns do not take the connecting vowel 1 ; 
 eg-., 
 
 p r u d e n s, jpruieTi^. "^rxiL^Qn-t^v, 'prudently. 
 
 2. A u d a X, bold, makes a u d a c- 1 S r, boldly. 
 
 (i) A few are formed from nouns, by adding t u s or t i m to the stem 
 by means of a connecting vowel ; e. g., 
 
 c 09 1 - u m, heaven. c oe 1 - i - 1 u s, from heaven. 
 
 f u n d - u s, bottom. f a n d - i - 1 u s,from the bottom, totally. 
 
 grex (greg-s), j^cA;. grSg-a-tim, by flocks. 
 
 (c) Cases of adjectives, especially in the neuter, are often used as ad- 
 verbs ; e. ^., dulc g, sweetly ; f al s b, falsely ^ &c. 
 
 II. Primitive Adverbs. 
 
 . (681.) Primitive adverbs are such as cannot conveniently be classed 
 among the derivatives above mentioned. The most common are arranged 
 in the following lists : 
 
)iiHi 
 
 ADVERBS. 
 
 1. ADVERBS OF PLACE (fivefold). 
 
 (1.) In a Place. 
 
 ubi? 
 jhic, 
 liUic, 
 jistic, 
 lb!, 
 Untus, 
 foris, 
 
 tohere 1 
 
 here. 
 
 there. 
 
 there, where you are. 
 
 there. 
 
 within. 
 
 without. " 
 
 ubiqug, everywhere. 
 nusquSm, nowhere. 
 alicubl, somerchere. 
 alibi, elsewhere. 
 
 Ibidfim, in the same place. 
 
 (2.) ToaPlace—[o,uc). 
 
 quo? 
 hue, 
 iUuc, 
 
 istuc, 
 
 intrd, 
 
 whither! 
 
 hither. 
 
 thither. 
 \ thither, to where you 
 : are. 
 
 to within. 
 
 f 6rfts, to without. 
 eo, to that place. 
 alio, to anottier place. 
 aliquo, to some place. 
 e6(fem, to the same place. 
 
 (3.) Towards a Place. i 
 
 quorsiim, 
 versus, 
 sursum, 
 deorsum, 
 
 whitherward 1 
 towards, 
 upward, 
 downward. 
 
 rStrorsum, backward. 
 dextrorsum, to the right hand. 
 simstrofsum, to the left hand. 
 
 (4.) From a Place— {nc, nde). 
 
 und6? 
 
 hinc, 
 
 illie, 
 
 istinc, 
 
 indg, 
 
 whence ? 
 
 hence. 
 
 thence. 
 ( thence, from where 
 \ you are. 
 
 thence. 
 
 aliunde, from elsewhere. 
 alicundg, frorn some place. 
 sicunde, if from any place. 
 utrinqug, on both sides. 
 supeme, from above. 
 infeme, from below. 
 
 (5.) Through or by a Pla(e. 
 
 qua? 
 hac, 
 
 illic, 
 
 which way 1 
 this way. 
 that way. 
 
 istftc, that way, by you. 
 alia, another way. 
 
ADVERBS. 
 
 287 
 
 2. ADVERBS OF TIME (threefold). 
 
 (1.) Being in time, either, j| 
 
 
 1. Present. 
 
 protinus, instantly. 
 
 nunc. 
 
 nmo. 
 
 illico, straightway. 
 
 h6di6, 
 
 to-day. 
 
 [Remote.) 
 
 
 2 Past 
 
 eras, to-morrow. 
 
 
 \ then, 
 yesterday. 
 
 postridie, the day after. 
 
 
 perendie, ttco days hence. 
 
 h6ri, 
 
 nondum, not yet. 
 
 dudum, 
 prid6m. 
 
 ^ heretofore. 
 
 4. Indefinite. 
 quando ? when ? 
 
 pridie, 
 
 the day before. 
 
 aliquando, "^ 
 
 nuper, 
 
 lately. 
 
 nonnunquam > sometimes. 
 
 
 3. Future. 
 
 interdum, j 
 
 
 
 sempfer, always. 
 
 
 ( Very Near.) 
 
 nunquSm, never. 
 
 jamjam, 
 
 ■^ 'presently. 
 
 SS?et H"'*' «"'»»• 
 
 mox, 
 
 > immediately. 
 
 statim, 
 
 J hy-and-hy. 
 
 quotidie, daily. 
 
 
 (2.) Cqutinui 
 
 xnce of Time. 
 
 quamdiu 1 
 
 how long 1 
 
 jamdiu, "^ 
 
 diu, 
 
 lon^. 
 so long. 
 
 jamdudum, > long ago. 
 
 tamdiu, 
 
 jaxnpridem, j 
 
 
 (3.) Vicissitude, or 
 
 Repetition of Time. 
 
 
 1. Indejinite. 
 
 subinde, immediately after. 
 
 qu6ties ? 
 
 how often 7 
 
 identidem, several times. 
 
 saepS, 
 tSties, 
 
 often, 
 so often. 
 
 2. Definite, or in Number. 
 
 aliquotiSs, 
 
 for several times, 
 "by turns. 
 
 semel, once. 
 
 vicissim, 
 
 bis, twice. 
 
 rursus. 
 
 again. 
 
 tt^r, thrice. 
 
 iterum. 
 
 a second time. 
 
 quatSr, four times. 
 
 3. ADVERBS OF ORDER. 
 
 indg, then. 
 
 deinceps, successively. 
 
 prime,* -um,t first. j 
 
 deindg, thereafter. 
 dehinc, henceforth. 
 
 denuo, anew. 
 
 secundo.t secondly.) 
 
 denique, finally. 
 
 &c. 
 
 porrd, moreover. 
 
 (postr6m6,t lastly. 
 
 
 
 4. ADVERBS OF QUALITY, MANNER, &C. 
 
 
 adeo. 
 
 SO, and therefore. 
 
 nempg, truly. 
 
 
 adraodum 
 
 very, greatly. 
 
 nimium, too much. 
 
 
 an. 
 
 whether 7 or else 7 
 
 non, not. 
 
 
 cur. 
 
 why. 
 
 num ? . whether ? 
 
 
 demum, 
 
 at length. 
 
 omnino, at all, in genei 
 
 al. 
 
 6tiam, 
 
 likewtse, yes. 
 
 parum, little. 
 
 
 fere, 
 
 almost. 
 
 satis, enough. 
 sic, so, thus. 
 
 
 haud. 
 
 not. 
 
 
 immd, 
 
 yes, truly. 
 
 scilicet, namely. 
 videlicit, namely. 
 
 
 its, 
 
 so, thus. 
 
 
 magis. 
 
 more. 
 
 vix, scarcely. 
 
 
 ne, 
 
 not. 
 
 
 
 , _ 
 
 * Primo = at first ; primum •= first, in the first place. 
 t These fall under (680, c). 
 
§ 8. PREPOSITION. 
 
 ^682.) 1. Prepositions governing the occMsojjtJC.' 
 
 Ante, Spud, ftd, adversiis, 
 Circtim, circa, citra, cis, 
 Erga, contra, intfir, extra, 
 Infra, intra, juxta, 6b, 
 Pgnes, pone, post, and prsetgr, 
 Propg, propter, p6r, secundum, 
 Sfipra, versus, ultra, trans. 
 
 [Versus is placed after the noun which it governa.J 
 
 2. Gk)veming the ablative : 
 
 Absque, a, ab, abs, and dS. 
 Coram, clam, cum, ex, and 6. 
 Tenus. Bine, pro, and prae. 
 
 3. Governing both accusative and ablative: 
 
 in, sub, sup6r, cvbtwr 
 
§ 9. CONJUNCTION. 
 
 (683.) Conjunctions connect words and sentences. They may be di. 
 vided into the following classes : 
 
 I. Copulative, which simply unite sentences together {and): they are 
 6t, atqu6 or ac, que, neqa6 or nee, necnon, Stiftm, quo- 
 que, with the adverbials item and ItidSm. 
 
 II. Disjunctive, which connect unlike prepositions [or) : they are aut, 
 v6l, the suffix v6, and sivg or seu; [either — or): aut — aut, vel— 
 V e 1 ; [whether — or) : s i v 6 — s i v 6. 
 
 III. Comparative [as, like, its if, &c.) : they are u t, s i c u t, v 6 1 u t, 
 prout, ceu, quftm, tamquim, quisl, utsT, acsi, together 
 with ac and at que, when they mean as. 
 
 IV. Adversative, expressing opposition of thought [but) : they are s 6 d, 
 autem, verd, &t and its compounds, t a m S n (and its compoimds 
 with a t s e d and v e r u m), and c e t e r u m. 
 
 V. Concessive, expressing something granted [although, even if) : they 
 are etsi, etiamsi, tSmetsi, quamquSm, quamvis, quan- 
 tumvis, quamlibet, ItcSt, with ut and quum, when they 
 mean although. 
 
 VI. Conditional, expressing a condition [if, if only, if but) : they are 
 si, sin, ni or nisi, sim6d6, dummodo, m6done, and some 
 times d u m and m 6 d 6 used alone. 
 
 VII. Conclusive, expressing a conclusion or inference [therefore) : they 
 are ergo, igitur, TtaquS, eo, ide6, idcirco, proindS, prop- 
 tSrea, and the relatives [wherefore) quapropter, quare, qua- 
 mobrem, quocirca, unde. 
 
 Vin. Causal, expressing a cause or reason [for, because) : n & m, 
 namqug, 6nim, 6tenim, quia, qu6d, quoniam, quippS, 
 quum, quando, quandO quidem, siquid6m. 
 
 IX. Final, expressing a purpose or aim [in order that, in order that 
 not): ut or uti, quo, ne, utne, nevS, neu, quin, qudmT- 
 nus. 
 
 X. Temporal, expressing a relation of time [wlien, as soon as, after 
 that, just as): quum, ut, ubi, postquam, antequam, pri- 
 usquam, quando, simul, Simula c, dum, usquS dum, do* 
 n6c, quoad. 
 
 - XI. Interrogative, used in asking questions: niim, utrtlm, an, n8 
 (guffix) 
 
 B b' 
 
§10. INTERJECTION. 
 
 (684.) Interjections are simply signs of emotion. 
 
 ah, ah ! 
 Spage, away ! 
 ecc6, behold ! 
 eccum, see him ! 
 eu, lo ! 
 hei, hetl, alas 1 . 
 
 1 
 
 hem, hem! how! 
 
 i5, huzza ! 
 
 oh, oh ! alas ! 
 
 papsB, O strange ! good ! 
 
 pr5, alas ! 
 
 voe, woe ! 
 
 Vfth, O rare 1 j 
 
 I 
 
PART IV 
 
 SUMMARY OF SYNTAX 
 
SYNTAX. 
 
 INTRODUCTION. 
 
 (685.) A proposition is a thought expressed in words ; e. g., the rose 
 blooms ; the rose is beautiful. 
 
 (686.) A simple sentence consists of a single proposition ; e. g., the mes- 
 senger was sent ; the swift messenger arrived. 
 
 (687.) A compound sentence is one made up of two or more propositions ; 
 e. g; the messenger, who had been sent, arrived. 
 
 (688.) Syntax treats of the use of words in the formation of sentences, 
 and of the relation of sentences to each other. We speak first, 
 
 PART L 
 
 OF SIMPLE SENTENCES. 
 I. SUBJECT AND PUK ^ICATK. 
 
 ^ 1 . Definition of Subject and Predicate. 
 
 (689.) Every sentence (e. g., the eagle flies) consists of two parts, the 
 subject {e. g., eagle) and the predicate {e. g., flies). 
 
 {a) The subject is that of which anything is declared, and is generally (1) 
 a noun, or (2) some word used instead of a noun. 
 
 1. The eagle flies. Here the noun eagle is the subject. 
 
 2. To err is human. Here the infinitive to err is used as a noun, 
 and forms the subject. 
 
 (b) The predicate is that which is declared of the subject, and is gener- 
 ally either (1) a verb, (2) an adjective or participle, or (3) a noun, con- 
 nected with the subject by some form of the verb to he. 
 
 1. The eagle ^ie«. Here the verbj^^ is the predicate. 
 
 2. To err is human. Here the adjective human is the predicate. 
 
 3. John is a man. Here the noun m^n is the predicate. 
 
 (j 2. Agreement. 
 (690.) Rule I. The verb of the predicate agrees with the 
 subject in number and person. 
 
 The trees are green. | Arbores virent. 
 
 Art thou happy 7 1 E s n e tu beatus ? 
 
 Rem. 1. If the subj. consists of two or more singular nouns denoting 
 persons, the verb is generally in the plural. 
 
 B B 2 
 
?n4 SUBJECT AND PREDICATE. 
 
 2 A collective noun sometimes has a plural verb. 
 
 Th^ crowd rushes. \ Turba ruunt. 
 
 [This construction is not used by Cicero, and seldom, if at all, by 
 Caesar.] 
 
 3 A plural verb is sometimes used with uterque and qui s que. 
 Eoch of them leads his army out I Uterque eorum ex castris exercitum 
 
 of the camp. I educunt. 
 
 4. The verb agrees with the first person rather than the second ; the 
 second rather than the third. 
 If yott and Tullia are well, Cicero j Si tu et Tullia valetis, ego et 
 
 and I are well. I Cicero vale mus. 
 
 (C91.) An adjective may stand either 
 
 (1.) As predicate ; e. g., the man is happy ; 
 
 (2.) As modifying the subject ; e. g., the good man is happy ; 
 
 (3.) As modifying the predicate ; e. g., the good man is a happy man. 
 In either case we have 
 
 Rule II. Adjectives agree with the nouns to which they 
 '^/rCer in gender, number, and case. 
 
 [This rule applies to all adjectives, pronouns, and participles.] 
 
 Rem. If there be two or more nouns denoting joersons, the most wor- 
 thy* gender prevails ; if things, the neuter is used. 
 
 My f oilier and mother are dead. I Pater mihi et mater mortui sunt. 
 Labour and enjoyment are united. 1 Labor voluptasque juncta sunt. 
 
 (692.) Rule III. If the predicate be a noun, it takes the 
 case of the subject. 
 Numa was made king. \ Numa rex creabatur. 
 
 ^ 3. Apposition. 
 (693.) A noun may stand 
 (o) In the subject, denoting the same person or thing with the sub- 
 ject-noun ; e. g., the general, a brave man, led the army. 
 {b) In the predicate, denoting the same person or thing with a noun 
 in the predicate ; e. g., vre have sent the consul, a brave man. 
 Nouns thus expressing the same person or thing, whether in the sub 
 ject or predicate, are said to be in apposition with each other ; and in 
 either case we have 
 
 Rule IV. Nouns in apposition with each other agi-ee in 
 case. 
 
 * The masculine is said to be more worthy than the feminine; the fern 
 inine than the neuter. 
 
GENITIVE CASE. 295 
 
 The commander, a brave man, led 
 
 the army. 
 We sent the consul, a brave man. 
 
 Imperator, vir fortis, exerci- 
 
 tum duxit. 
 Consulem, virum fortem, misi- 
 mus. 
 
 Rem. 1. A noun in apposition with two or more nouns is commonly 
 put in the plural. 
 M. Antony and C. Crassus, trib- I M. Antouius, C. Crassus, tribuni 
 unes of the people. | plebis. 
 
 2. A noun in apposition with the name of a town may be put in the 
 ablative, with or without the preposition in. 
 At RoTne, the chief aV^r of Italy. | Romaa, (in) prima urbe Italiae. 
 
 II. USE OF CASES. 
 
 i) 4. Nominative. 
 (694.) Subject-nominative. — The subject of a proposition takes the nom- 
 ^inative case, and is called the subject-nominative. 
 
 (2.) Predicate-nominative. — The predicate-nominative (692) is always 
 connected with the subject by esse, to be, or some verb expressing an 
 incompleve idea. ^ 
 
 Rem. Of tliis class of verbs are to appear, apparere, videri; to 
 become, fieri, evader e, existere; to be named, dici, ap- 
 pellari, nominari ; to be esteemed, existimari, haberi, &c. 
 
 Ariovistus was called king by the 
 senate. 
 
 Ariovistus a senatu rex appel« 
 latus est. 
 
 (j 5. Genitive. 
 (695.) Rule V. The genitive answers the questions whose 1 
 of whom 1 of what 1 e.g., the love of glory, amor gloriae; 
 Cicero's orations, C i c e r o n i s orationes. 
 
 Rem. The genitive is subjective when it denotes that which does 
 something, or to which a thing belongs ; e. g., Ciceronis oratio- 
 nes. It is objective when it denotes that which is affected by the 
 action or feeling spoken of ; e. g., amor gloriee : the taking of the 
 iown, expugnatio urbis. 
 
 (696.) Rule VI. Genitive of Quality. — The genitive (with 
 an adjective, or pronoun of quality, number, &c.) is used to ex- 
 press the quality of a thing. 
 
 A man of great bravery. I Vir magnae virtutis. 
 
 A ditch of ff teen feet. 1 Fossa quindecim pedum. 
 
 Rem. 1. The ablative is also used in the same way (724). 
 2. If the two nouns are connected, not immediately, but by another 
 part of speech, the accusative must be used : fossa quindecim 
 pedes lata. 
 
296 GENITIVE CASE. 
 
 (697.) Rule Vir. Partitive-genitive. — The genitive is used 
 to express the whole of which anything is a part. Hence, 
 
 (a) With comparatives and supei-latives : 
 
 Doctior fratrum duorum. 
 
 Doctissimtis Romanorum. 
 
 The more leariied of the two broth- 
 ers. 
 The most learned of the Romans. 
 
 [b] "With aD words expressing number or quantity, yvhether adjectives, 
 pronouns, numerals, or adverbs ; e. g., many of the soldiers, m u 1 1 i 
 militum; which of you? quia vestrum? the last of tJie Romans, 
 ultimus Romanorum; enough eloquence, satis eloquentiae; 
 iohere (in what part) of the world? ubinam gentium? 
 
 Rem. This rule includes the neuters tantum, quantum, ali- 
 Quantum, quid, aliquid, &c. 
 
 (698.) Rule VIII. Genitive of Mental Affections,— The 
 genitive is used with verbs and adjectives expressing certain 
 operations of the mind or feelings, to denote the ohject thereof. 
 
 (a) Operations of the mhid, 
 
 1. Adjectives oi knowledge and igTwrance, rem,embering and /or- 
 getting, certainty and doubt. 
 
 Mindful of a kindness. 
 He was not ignorant of the re- 
 sult of the v)ar. 
 
 2. Verbs of remembering kdA forgetting (recordor, memini, reminis- 
 cor, obHviscor). 
 
 Beneficii memor. 
 
 E ventus belli non erat ignarus. 
 
 To remember past events. 
 He exhorts the u^duans to for- 
 get their disputes. 
 
 Meminisse prseteritorum. 
 Cohortatur ^duos ut controver- 
 si arum obliviscantur. 
 
 [The thing remembered is often put in the accusative.] 
 (b) Operations of the feelings. 
 
 1. Adjectives expressing desire or aversion, patience or impatiende, 
 appetite or passion. Participles used as adjectives fall under thig 
 rule. 
 
 Desirous of praise. I Avidus 1 a u d i s. 
 
 A lover of (= one loving) virtue. 1 Amans V i r t u t i s. 
 
 2. Verbs. 
 
 (a) Those expressing pity, viz., miseresco, misereor. 
 
 I pity the unfortunate. \ Miseresco infelicium. 
 
 (b) The impersonals pudet, piget, pcenitet, taedet, miseret {shame, 
 disgust, repentance, loathing, pity). 
 
GENITIVE CA&E. 297 
 
 / am not only sorry for my fol- 
 ly, but ashamed of it. 
 I am weary of my life. 
 
 Me non solum pcenitet stulti 
 
 t i OB meae, sed etiam p u d e t. 
 Me taedet vit39. 
 Rem. 1. Observe that the person feeUng is expressed by the accusa 
 
 tive. 
 2. The cause of feeling may be a verb, or part of a sentence, instead 
 of a noun in the genitive. 
 / am not sorry (= it does not re- 1 Non pojnitet me v i x i s s e 
 pent me) that I have lived. | ^ 
 
 (699.) Rule IX. Genitive of Participation. — The genitive 
 is used with adjectives and participles expressing {!) plenty or 
 want, {2) power or weakness, (3) sharing or its opposite, (4) 
 likeness or unlikeness. 
 
 (1.) Full of wrath. ' Plenus irae. 
 
 (2.) Master of one's faculties. Compos mentis. 
 
 (3) He is like his brother. Simihs estfratris. 
 
 (4.) Man is a sharer of reason. Homo particeps est rationis. 
 
 Rem. 1. Those oi plenty dcoAwant take also ablative (716, R. 4). 
 
 2. Those of likeness and unlikeness take also the dative (704, 4). 
 
 (700.) Rule X. Genitive of Value.— The genitive of cer- 
 tain adjectives is used Avith verbs of valuing, esteeming, buying, 
 selling, &c., to denote the price or value. 
 
 The poor man estimates riches at\ Pauper divitias magni sestimat. 
 a great valn£. I 
 
 Rem. 1. Such genitives are magni, permagni, pluris, maximi, 
 
 minor is, and others. 
 2. If the price be a noun, the ablative is used (719). Also, the 
 ablatives magno, permagno, plurimo, parvo, minimo, nihi- 
 lo, are often used. 
 (701.) Rule XI. Genitive of Crime. — The genitive is used 
 with verbs of accusing, condemning, acquitting, &c., to denote 
 the crime or offence charged. 
 
 Proditionis accusare. 
 Praetor reum cri minis absolvit. 
 
 To accuse of treachery. 
 The judge acquitted the prisoner 
 of the crime. 
 
 (702.) Rule XII. Genitive of Property. — The genitive is 
 used with esse to denote (1) that to which something belongs ; 
 (2) that to which something is peculiar. 
 
 (1.) This book belongs to my father. 
 (2.) It is peculiar to the brave to 
 endure pain with fortitude. 
 
 Hie liber est mei patris. 
 Fortium est dolorem fortiter pati 
 
208 
 
 DATIVB CA»B. 
 
 It is - 
 
 • of a wise man = est sapientis. 
 
 Rem. 1. Under this last head come the following constructicmi 
 
 the property 
 peculiarity 
 duty 
 mark 
 
 characteristic 
 &c. 
 
 8. Observe carefully, that instead of the genitive of the personal pro- 
 nouns (mei, tui, &c.), the neuter possessives (meum, tuum, 
 suum, nostrum, vestram) are used; e. g:, it is my duty, &c.; 
 est meum, &c. 
 (703.) Rule XIII. The genitive is used with the impersonal 
 interest {it concerns)^ to express the person concerned. 
 Jt concerns my brother. [Mei fratris interest. 
 
 It coTicerns the state. \ Reipublicae interest. 
 
 Rem. But instead of the genitives of the personal pronouns (mei, 
 tui, &c.), the possessive forms me a, tua, &c., are always used; 
 and with them the impersonal r e f e r t has the same force as i n 
 teresL 
 
 It concerns you. 
 
 It is of great importance to me to 
 see you. 
 
 Tua interest (not tui interest) 
 Magni m e a refert ut te videam 
 
 § 6. Dative. 
 
 (704.) Rule XIV. The dative case is used to express the 
 person or thing to or for whom (or which), to or for whose advan- 
 tage or disadvantage anything is done or tends. 
 
 Ep* Almost every instance in which the dative occurs may be ex- 
 plained by a proper application of this rule. For the sake of fuller 
 illustration, however, we add the following heads : 
 (1.) Dative of Remote Object. — The dative is used to express the remote 
 object, 
 
 [a) With transitive verbs governing also a direct object. 
 
 Mitto tibi librum. 
 
 Pisistratus sibi Megarenses vicit. 
 
 / send you a book. 
 Pisistratus conquered the Mega- 
 renses for himself. 
 Rem. The accusative is often omitted, and the dative alone appears 
 with the verb ; e. g., I persuade you, tibi suadeo ; he told tJie gen- 
 eral, nuntiavit imperatori. 
 [b) With int?-ansitive verbs expressing an action done to or for some 
 person or thing. 
 I have leisure for nhilofophy. | Vico philosophiw. 
 
DATIVE CASE, , SOU 
 
 (2.) On the same principle [advantage or disadvantage), the dative ii 
 ased with verbs of the following meanings, viz. : 
 Envy, 'profit, please, displease, obey, 
 Help, hurt, resist, excel, or disobey, 
 Command, indulge, be angry, Spare, upbraid, 
 Marry, heal, favour, meet, trust, and persuade. 
 Rem. 1. Javo, laedo, delecto, offendo, rego, gubemo, govern the accu- 
 sative. 
 2. Impero, credo, minor, comminor, are also used transitively, with 
 accusative and dative. 
 (3.) Dative with Compound Verbs. — The dative is used with m^st verbs 
 compounded with ad, con, in, inter, ob, pros, sub ; and with many of 
 those compounded with ab, ante, de, e, post, prae, re, super. 
 
 Rem. These verbs govern the dative when they acquire a meaning 
 from the preposition which calls for the dative ; e. g., to join, j u n g e r e, 
 takes accusative; but to join to, adjungere, takes dative also. 
 When they are transitive, they take both accusative and dative ; 
 but when intransitive, the dative only. 
 To prefer unknown men to known, llgnotos notis anteferre. 
 Vices creep upon us. \ Vitia nobis obrepunt. 
 
 (4.) So, also, the dative is used with adjectives expressing advantage, 
 likeness, usefulness, fitness, facility, nearness to, and their opposites. 
 
 Be kind to all. 
 Hurtful to the body. 
 A place fit for ambush. 
 They are neighbours to the Ger- 
 mans. 
 
 Cunctis esto benignus. 
 Corpori pemiciosum. 
 Locus inaidiis aptus. 
 Proximi sunt Germanis. 
 
 Rem. 1. Adjectives of likeness or unlikeness may take the genitive 
 
 (699, 3). 
 2. Those of fitness and unfitness often take the accusative with ad ; 
 
 e. g., locus ad insidias aptus. 
 
 (705.) Rule XV. Dative of Possession. — The dative is used 
 with esse to express the person who has or possesses some- 
 thing. 
 
 / have a book. \ Est mihi liber (= habeo librum). 
 
 Rem. 1. I have a name z=z est mihi noraen ; but if the name be ex- 
 pressed, it may be put either in nominative or dative ; e. g., my 
 name is Lcelius = mihi est nomen L os 1 i u s (or L se 1 i o). 
 
 2. The possessor is expressed by the dative when the mind refers 
 chiefly to the possession [e. g., I have a book = est mihi liber) ; 
 but by the genitive when the mind refers chiefly to the possessor 
 (e. g., this honk is my father's = Iiio lihor est moi patris). 
 
Pausanias venit Atheniensibus 
 auxilio. 
 
 300 ACCUSATIVE CASK. ' 
 
 (706.) Rule XVI. Dativeof the End {Double Dative).— Two 
 dative9 are used with esse, and With verbs of giving, comings 
 sending, imputing ; one to express the person, the other the 
 object or end. 
 
 The Boians were (for) a protection, Boiinovissimis prossidio eranfc 
 
 to the rear. 
 Pausanias came to aid (for an aid 
 to) the Athenians. 
 Rem. The verbs used with double dative are esse, dare, due ere, 
 tribuere, vertere, accipere, relinquere, delig'ere, mit- 
 tercj venire, habere. 
 
 [The dative is used with ge^raidives, for which see 737, b.] 
 ^ 7. Accusative. 
 ^707.) The accusative is the case- of the direct object, and 
 answers the questions whom ? what? to what place? 
 
 ^^ Under this general statement we make three heads : (1) the ac- 
 cusative with verbs ; (2) the accusative with prepositions ; (3) the 
 accusative according to the usage of the language. 
 
 I. Accusative with Verbs. 
 (708.) Rule XVII. Accusative of the Direct Object. — The 
 accusative is used with transitive verbs, to express the direct 
 object. 
 
 CcBsar recalls the lieutenant. | Caesar legatum revocat. 
 
 Item. 1. Some verbs are used both transitively and intransitively; 
 the use of these must be learned by practice. 
 
 2. Some intransitives (especially those of motion), compounded with 
 prepositions, acquire a transitive force easily recognised from their 
 meaning; thus : to go, ire ; to go across, trans ire, which takes 
 the accusative. 
 
 3. Some intransitives take an accusative of a noun from the same 
 root with themselves ; e. g., to live a life, vivere vitam. 
 
 (709.) Rule XVIII. Accusative with Impersonals. — The 
 accusative of the person affected is used with the impersonals 
 pudet, pigot, taedot, miseret, poenitet. 
 J am tired of life. \ Tsedet me vitaa. 
 
 Rem. Decet and its compounds (which admit a personal subject), also 
 juvat and delectat, take the accusative. 
 Anger becomes wild beasts. \ Decet ira f e r a s. 
 
 (710.) Rule XIX. Double Accusative. 
 {a) Two accusatives, one of the person, the other of the 
 
* ACCUSATIVE CASE. 301 
 
 thing, are used with verbs of teachings concealing, askings or 
 entreating, and also with those verbs Whose passives have a 
 double nominative (694^ 2, Jl.). 
 
 (1.) Who taught Epaminondas 
 
 music 1 
 (2.) / conceal nothing from you. 
 (3.) / aslc this of you earnestly. 
 (4.) Avarice renders men blind. 
 
 Ciuis musicam docuit Epami- 
 
 nondam. 
 Nihil tjj celo. 
 
 Hoc te vehemeater roga, . . ' 
 Avaritia hominescseco s reddit. 
 Rem. 1. "With verbs oi asking, demanding^, the ablative with a prep- 
 osition is Tised'instead of one of the accusatives. 
 The ambassadors were as/cwg- hLegati pacem a Ceesare.posce- 
 peace of Gcesar. I bant. 
 
 2. Petere and postulare always take the ablative with ab ; and 
 qaseterp, the ablative with ab, de, or ex. 
 
 (6) Two accusatives are used also with verbs compounded 
 with trans. ' . 
 
 Caeiar led tJte army across ^AelCaesar e:^ercitum Rhemim 
 
 Rhine. \ transduxit. 
 
 The tran's is often repeated; e. g.^ Caesar exercitum trans Rhenum 
 transduxit.. 
 
 Rem. 1. In the passive construction of verbs which take a double ac- 
 cusative, the person takes the nominative, but the thing generally 
 remains in the accusative. 
 1 was ashed my opinion. Ego rogatus sum sententiam. 
 
 The multitude is led across the Multitudo Rhenum transducitur. 
 Rhine, 
 
 2. But with verbs of demanding the ablative with a preposition is 
 generally used. 
 Money is demanded of me. \ Pecimia a m e poscitur. 
 
 II. Accusative with Prepositions. 
 (711.) Rule XX. The accusative is used with the preposi- 
 tions ad, apud, ante, adversus, cig, citra, circa, circum, 
 circiter, contra, erga, extra, infra, inter, intra, juxta, 
 ob, penes, per, pone, post, praeter, prope, propter, se- 
 cundum, supra, trans, versus, ultra. Also, with in and 
 sub, when motion is expressed ; with super, when it means 
 (wer, and with subter nearly always. .,. 
 
 111. Accusative according to the Usage jjf the Language. 
 (712.) Rule XXI. Accusative of Measure. — The accusative 
 is used in answer to the questions hoxofarl hoio deep? how 
 
 Cc 
 
302 . ABLATIVE CASE. 
 
 thick ? how broad 7 how old 1 how long 1 (whether of iimt or 
 distance). 
 
 The city is two miles off. 
 
 The ditch, is ten feet vjide [deep, or 
 
 long). 
 Only one hour. 
 Twenty years old. 
 
 Urbs duo mi Hi a abest. 
 
 Fossa decern pedes lata (alta, 
 
 long-a). 
 Unam modo horam. 
 Viginti annos natus. 
 
 Rem. 1. Hotofar? is sometimes answered by the ablative. 
 
 Six miles from Ccesar's Camp. I Millibus passuum sex a Caesaris 
 I castris. 
 2. For time liow long, the accusative with per is sometimes used, and 
 sometimes the ablative along. 
 Through tJie whole night. I P er totam noctem. 
 
 He was absent six months. \ Sex mensibus abfuit. 
 
 (713.) Rule XXII. Accusative of Direction^ Whither? — 
 The accusative is used with names of towns and small islands^ 
 in answer to the question, whither 1 
 
 To %et out for Athens. \ A t h e n a s proficisci. 
 
 Rem. 1. "With names of countries or large islands the prepositions 
 in, ad, must be msed. 
 He 'crossed into Europe. \ In Europam trajecit. 
 
 2. Domus and rus follow this rule. 
 To go home. I Ire domum. 
 
 I will go into the country. I Rus ibo. 
 
 (714.) Greek Accusative. — The accusative is used to express a special 
 limitation. 
 Naked as to his limbs. I Nudus membra. 
 
 For the most part [men) say so. ) Max imam partem ita dicunt. 
 
 Rem. This is a Greek usage, common in Latin poetry, but not in 
 prose. 
 (715.) Exclamations. — The accusative is used in exclamations, either 
 with or without an interjection. 
 Miserable me! I Me miserum. 
 
 Behold, four altars ! \ En quattuor aras. 
 
 [For the accusative with the infinitive, see 751.] 
 
 ^ 8, Ablative. 
 (716.) Rule XXIII. General Rule. — The ablative is used 
 to express the (1) cause; (2) manner; (3) means, material, or 
 instrument ; (4) supjthj. 
 
ABLATIVE CASE. 3(^ 
 
 1. Cause. — The ablative of cause is used with passive verbs, and with 
 the participles natus, genitus, ortus, contentus. 
 
 The world is illuminated by the 
 
 sun. 
 I am content loith my lot. 
 O thou, bom of a goddess ! 
 
 Sole mundus iUustratur. 
 
 Sorte mea contentus sum. 
 Nate Deal 
 
 1^^ If the cause be a person (or a thing personified), a or ab must be 
 used with passive verbs. 
 The world was built by God. | A D e o mundus cedificatus est. 
 
 2. Manner. — {a) This ablative generally occurs in nouns denoting man- 
 ner ; e.g.,raos, modus, ratio, &c. 
 
 In this way I wrote. \ Hoc modo scripsi. 
 
 (Z») With other nouns, cum is generally used, unless an adjective is 
 
 joined with the noun. 
 He hears with pleasure. I Cum voluptate audit. 
 
 He bears the injury with firmness. |iEquo animo fert injuriam. 
 
 3. Means, Material, Instrument. — Ablative without a preposition. 
 To travel by horse, carriage, ships . Bquo, curru, navibus, vehi. 
 Bulls defend themselves with their Cor nib us tauri se tutantur. 
 
 horns. 
 
 ^^ If the instrument or means be a person, per or propter is 
 used, with the accusative. 
 I was freed by you. | Per te liberatus sum. 
 
 4. Supply. — As supply may be either abundant or defective, the abla- 
 tive is used with verbs and adjectives of abounding, wanting, filling, 
 emptying, &c. ; e.g., abundare, egere, carere, inops, refertus, 
 praeditus, &c. 
 
 Germany abounds in rivers. 
 The mind is endowed ivith per- 
 petual activity. 
 
 Germania fluminibus abundat. 
 Mens est prsedita motu sempi- 
 temo. 
 
 (717.) Rule XXIV. The ablative of the thing needed, and 
 the dative of the person, are used with opus est {there is 
 need). 
 
 We have need of a leader. j D u c e nobis opus est. 
 
 Rem. If opus est be used personally, the thing needed is put in the 
 nominative as subject. 
 Leaders are necessary for us. \ Duces nobis opus sunt. 
 
 (718.) Rule XXV. The ablative is used with the depo- 
 nents utor, fruor, fungor, potior, vescor. 
 
 To make use of advice. I Consilio uti. 
 
 They were enjoying pe^ace. [Pace fniebantur. 
 
304 ABLATIVE CASE. 
 
 Eem. Potior is used also with the genitive. .. < . ■. . 
 
 To obtain possession of all Gaul. | Totius G-allise potiri, 
 
 (719.) Rule XXVI. Ablative of Price. — The ablative is 
 used with verbs of buying, selling, valuing, &c. ; also with 
 the adjectives dignus and in di gnus, to express the jprice or 
 value. 
 
 He sold Ms country/ for gold. 
 Worthy of hatred. 
 That battle east the blood of 
 many. 
 
 ^^ If the price or value be an adjective, it is generally put lo the 
 genitive (7G0). - 
 
 (720.) Rule XXVII. Ablative of Limitation. — The abla- 
 tive is used to denote the limitation generally express^sd in 
 English by as to, in respect of, in regard to. 
 
 Patriam auro vendidit. 
 
 Odio dignus. 
 
 Multorum. sanguine ea victoria 
 
 stetit. 
 
 Older (i. e., greater in age). 
 Skilled in the law. 
 In affection a son. 
 
 Major natu. 
 Jure peritus. 
 P i e t a t e filius. 
 
 (721.) Rule XXVIII. Ablative of Separation.— The abla- 
 tive is used with verbs of removing, freeing, depriving, and the 
 like. 
 
 CtBsar removed his camp from tlie Csesar castra loco movit. 
 
 spot. 
 The trees are stripped of leaves. 
 
 Arbores f o 1 i i s nudantur. 
 
 Rem. Many of these verbs also take the prepositions a, a b, d e, e x. 
 
 (722.) Rule XXIX. Ablative of Quality.— The ablative is 
 used (with an adjective of quality) to express that one thing is 
 a quality or property of another. 
 
 C(zsar was a man of consummate \ Caesar sum mo fuit ingenio. 
 
 talent. \ 
 
 Agesilaus was a man of low stat- i Agesilaus statura fuit humili. 
 
 ure. 1 
 
 Rem. The genitive is also thus used (696). 
 
 (723.) Rule XXX. Ablative of Comparison. — The ablative 
 is used with the comparative degree (quam beuig omitted) to 
 express the object with which another is compared. 
 
 Cicero was more eloquent Man. I Cicero fuit eloquentior Horten- 
 Hortensins. | s i o. 
 
ABLATIVE. 3<^ 
 
 (724.) Rule XXXI. Ablative of Measvf'i.—The ablative of 
 measure is used, 
 
 {a) With comparatives and superlatives, to express the meas- 
 ure of excess or defect. 
 
 (6) To express the measure of time before or after any 
 event. 
 
 Much greater. 
 
 Themistocles lived many years he- 
 fore Demosthenes. 
 
 Multo major. 
 
 Themistocles permultis annis 
 ante fuit quam Demosthenes. 
 
 (725.) Rule XXXII. Ablative of Time When.— The abla- 
 tive is used to express the point of time at which anything 
 occm-s. 
 
 On the sixth day. | Sexto die. 
 
 Rem. The time within which anj-thing occurs is expressed by the ab- 
 lative with or v?-ithout i n or d e. 1 
 
 Within ten years. 
 Within those days. 
 
 Decern annis. 
 In his diebiis/ 
 
 (726.) Rule XXXIII. Ablative of Place, 
 {a) The place ti^^ence is expressed by the ablative. 
 He departed from Corinth. \ Corintho profectus est. 
 
 (6) The place where is expressed by the ablative, if the noun 
 be of the third declension ov plural number. 
 
 Alexander died at Babylon. I Alexander B abylone mortuus est. 
 
 At Athens. 1 A t h e n i s. 
 
 Rem. If the noun be of the 1st or 2d declension sin^lar, the genitive 
 is used. 
 At Rome. At Corinth. jIlomaB. Corinth i. 
 
 (Domi follows this rule.) 
 
 (727.) The ablative is used with the following prepositions. 
 viz.: 
 
 Absque, a, ab, abs, and de. 
 Coram, clam, cum, ex, and e, 
 Tenus, sine, pro, and prse. 
 Also with i n and sub (implying rest, not motion), and super, when it 
 means upon. S u b t e r is sometimes, also, used with ablative, 
 
 (728.) Rule XXXIV. Ablative with Compound Verbs.— 
 The ablative is used with some verljs compounded with a (ab, 
 a b s), d e, e (e x), and s u p e r. 
 
 Cc2 
 
306 
 
 infj;nitive. 
 
 To he absent from the city. Urbe abesse. 
 
 Ccesar resolved to desist from hat- Caesar praelip supersedere sta- 
 tle. tuit. 
 
 Rem. The preposition is sometimes repeated. 
 To depart from life (= to die). \ Exire de vita. 
 
 [For the Ablative Absolute, see 750.] 
 (729.) Verbs followed by genitive, dative, or ablative, where we use no 
 preposition, and should therefore be likely to put the accusative. (Those 
 with asterisks take also an accusative of the thing, though some of them 
 only when the accusative is a neuter pronoun.)* 
 
 obtain, 
 
 pity, 
 
 forget, 
 
 remember, 
 recollect, 
 
 require. 
 
 potior [abl.). 
 misereor. 
 miseresco. 
 obliviscor [ace). 
 'memini {ace). 
 recordor {ace). 
 reminiscor {ace). 
 
 SfdTgeo^-^^-)- 
 
 abuse, 
 revile. 
 
 ayiswer, 
 
 believe, 
 
 command, 
 
 commission, 
 
 charge, 
 
 congratulate, 
 
 displease, 
 
 direct, 
 
 envy. 
 
 favour, 
 
 flatter, 
 
 give, 
 
 help, 
 
 did, 
 
 assist, 
 
 succour, 
 
 heal, 
 cure. 
 
 maledico. 
 
 *suadeo. 
 
 *respondeo. 
 
 credo.- 
 
 > *mando. 
 
 *gratulor. 
 
 displiceo. 
 
 *praecipio. 
 
 *invideo. 
 
 faveo. 
 
 adulor (ace). 
 
 *do. 
 
 f auxilior. 
 C opitulor. 
 
 5 subvenio. 
 "l succurro. 
 
 > medeor. 
 
 hurt, 
 
 indulge, 
 
 marry, 
 
 obey, 
 
 pardon, 
 
 permit, 
 
 persuade, 
 
 please, 
 
 resist, 
 
 oppose, 
 
 rival, 
 
 satisfy, 
 
 spare, 
 
 suit, 
 
 threaten, 
 trust, 
 
 *indulgeo. 
 
 nubo. 
 Tpareo. 
 < obedio. 
 Cobtempero. 
 
 *ignosco. 
 
 ^permitto. 
 
 *persuadeo. 
 
 placeo. 
 ? resisto, 
 > repugno. 
 
 aemulor (ace). 
 
 satisfacio. 
 
 parco. 
 
 convenio. 
 5 *minor. 
 / *minitor. 
 
 lc"nfid„^"«■) 
 
 ABLATIVE. 
 
 abuse, 
 
 discharge, 
 
 perforrn, 
 
 enjoy, 
 
 obtain, 
 
 require, 
 
 need, 
 
 want, 
 
 iise, 
 
 want, 
 
 am witftout. 
 
 abutor. 
 
 fungor. 
 
 fruor. 
 potior {geiu). 
 
 {gen.). 
 
 Cine 
 
 indigeo 
 utor. 
 
 III. USE OF THE INDEFINITE VERB. 
 
 <5 9.- Infinitive. 
 (730.) Rule XXXV. Infinitive as Subject.— The infinitive 
 is used as the subject of a verb, and is then regarded as a neu- 
 ter noun. 
 
 To love {— lowing) is pleasant. \ Jucundum est a m ar e. 
 * Arnold. 
 
PARTICIPLE. 307 
 
 (731.) Rule XXXVI. Infinitive as Complementary Object. 
 — The iiifinitive is used (exactly as in English) to complete the 
 -mperfect idep,s expressed by certain words. 
 
 / wish to learn. I Capio d i s c e r e. 
 
 Worthy to be loved. I Digrnis a m a r i. 
 
 Rem. 1. The cemplementary infinitive occurs after verbs denoting to 
 wish, to be able, to be accustomed, ought (debere), to hasten, Sec. ; 
 after the adjectives dignus, indignus, audax, &c. 
 
 2. Observe that this construction, which occurs after all verbs in 
 English, can only stand in Latin after those expressing imperfect 
 ideas, as above stated. A purpose cannot be expressed in Latin, 
 as in English, by the simple infinitive' ; e. g., he conies to learn == 
 venit ut discat, ngt venit discere. 
 
 (732.) Historical Infinitive. — In animated nai^ative the in- 
 finitive is sometimes used for the indicative. 
 
 The Romans hastened, made ready, I Romani festinare» parare, &c. 
 
 4-c. • 1 
 
 (This construction is quite common in SaUust.) 
 
 [For Accusative with Infinitive, see 751.] 
 
 "^ 10. Participle. 
 
 (733.) Rule XXXVII. The participle agrees with its noun 
 in gender, case, and number, and the active participle governs 
 the same case as its verb. 
 
 The honoured man. 
 The blooming rose. 
 I saw him readin^r a book. 
 
 Vir laudatus. 
 Rosa f lor ens. 
 Eum legentem librum vidi. 
 
 (734.) The participle future active is used to express a pur- 
 pose (where in English we should use to, in order to, with the 
 infinitive). 
 
 Alexander goes to Jupiter Ammon, 
 in order to inquire concerning 
 his descent. 
 
 Alexander ad Jovem Ammonem 
 pergit, consulturus de origine 
 sua. 
 
 (735.) The passive participle is often used to supply tho 
 place of a noun. 
 
 After Tarentum taken (= after 
 
 the taking of Tarentum). 
 From the city built {==■ from the 
 
 building of the city). 
 
 Post Tarentum c a p t u m. 
 Ab urbe c o n d i t a. 
 
 [For Participle in Subordinate Sentences, see 749.] 
 
Scribere est utile. 
 
 Ars scribendi est utilis. 
 
 Charta scribendo est utilis. 
 
 Scribere disco. 
 
 Inter scribendum disco. 
 
 Scribendo discimus. 
 
 308 GERUND AND GERUNDIVE. 
 
 <^ 11. Gerund. 
 
 (736.) Rule XXXVIII. As the infinitive is used as a noun 
 in the nominative or accusative, so the gerund is used in the 
 remaining cases, and geverns the same case as its verb. 
 
 Nom. Writing is useful. 
 Gen. The art of writing is us eful. 
 Dat. Pap>er is nsefnl far loriting. 
 . (I leam writing. 
 
 ' \ I leam during writing. 
 Abl. We leam bi/ writing. 
 
 Rem. 1. With a preposition the gerund in the accusative must be 
 used, not the infinitive: ad (inter, ob) scribendum, not ad 
 ^ (inter, ob) scribere. 
 
 2.' The general rales for the use of cases of nouns (695-7JJ8) apply to 
 the cases of the infinitive and gerund, as above given. 
 
 Special Remark. The gerund is not used in the dative or accusative 
 with an active government ; e. g., we can say scribendi episto- 
 las, ofwritiiig letters, or s c rib e n do epis tolas, by writing letters, 
 but not charta utilis est scribendo {dat.) epistolas, nor charta 
 utilis est ad scribendum literas. In these last cases the ge- 
 rundive must be used (738). 
 
 ^ 12. The Gerundive, or Verbal in dus, da, dum. 
 
 (737.) Rule XXXIX. {a) The gerundive in the nomina' 
 live neuter (dum) is used with the tenses of esse, to denote 
 that an action should or must be done ; and these may govern 
 the case of the verb. 
 
 {One) must write. I Scribendum est. 
 
 (&) The person by whom the action should or must be done 
 is put in the dative. 
 
 I must write. I Scribendum est m i h L 
 
 Caius must write. Scribendum est C aio. 
 
 One must use reason. I Ratione utendum est. 
 
 (738.) Rule XL. {a) The gerundive is used with esse, in 
 all cases and genders, as a verbal adjective, agreeing with the 
 noun, to express necessity or worthiness. 
 
 I am to be loved • sJie is to ^e'Amandussum; amandaes'> 
 
 laved, SfC 1 &c. 
 
 (6) When the person is specified, it must be put in the da 
 tive. 
 
SUFINE. 309 
 
 / must love Tullia. 
 All things were to be chne by Cae- 
 sar at one time. 
 
 Tallia mi hi amanda est. 
 Caesari omnia xvaa tempore 
 erant agenda. 
 
 Bjem. a or ab with ablative is sometimes used instead of the dative. 
 My cause must be managed by the \ A consuli b u s mea causa s u s- 
 consuls. 1 cipienda est. 
 
 (739.) Rule XL I. The gerundive is used {to express con- 
 tinued action) as a verbal adjective, in all genders and cases 
 (but the nominative) agreeing with the noun, instead of the 
 gerund governing the noun ; c. ^., 
 Gen. Of writing a letter. 
 
 Scribendae epistolae, instead of scribendi epistolam. 
 Dat. To or for writing letters. 
 
 Scribendis epistolis, instead of scribendb epistolas. 
 Ace. To write a letter. 
 Ad scribe n dam epistolam, instead of ad scribendum epis» 
 tolam. • 
 
 Abl. By, SfC, writing a letter. 
 Scribenda epistola, instead of scribendo epistolam. 
 
 Rem. As observed in (736), the gerundive must be used for the dative 
 or accusative of the gerund when it has an active government. It 
 may be used for it in any other case, unless the object of the ge- 
 rund is a neuter adjective or pronoun ; e. g., of learning the true = 
 vera discendi, not veromm discendorum ; of hearing this = 
 hoc audiendi, not hujus audiendi. 
 
 § 13. Supines. 
 (740.) Rule XLII. (1.) The supine in um is used with 
 verbs of motion, to express the design of the motion, and gov- 
 erns the same case as its verb. 
 / come to ask you. | Venio te rogatum. 
 
 (2.) The supine in u is used, 
 
 (a) With adjectives, to show in what respect they are 
 used ; e. g., 
 Pleasant as to taste. \ Dulce gustatu. 
 
 (6) With the nouns fas, nefas, opus, in the same sense : 
 fas est dictu. 
 
 PART II. 
 
 or COMPOUND SENTENCES. 
 
 (741.) A compound sentence is one made up of two or more simple sen- 
 tences. The sentences thus comUned are either co-ordinate or subordinate. 
 
810 SENTENCES. 
 
 1. CO-ORDINATE SENTENCES. 
 
 ^ 14. Classes of Co-ordinate Sentences. 
 
 (742.) Co-ordinate sentences are united together, but yet independent 
 of each other :* co-ordination is either, 
 
 (a) Copulative ; e. g., His father has abandoned him, and his friends 
 
 have deserted him, and the son remains. 
 {b) Disjunctive ; e. g., Either his father has abandoned, or his friends 
 
 have deserted him. 
 (c) Adversative ; e. g., His father has abandoned him, but his friends 
 
 have not. 
 {d) Causal; e.g., His friends will abandon him, /or his father has 
 
 done so. 
 (c) Conclusive ; e. g., His father has abandoned him, therefore his 
 
 friends will desert him. 
 
 II. SUBORDINATE SENTENCES. 
 
 ^ 15. Classes of Subordinate Sentences. 
 
 (743.) Subordinate sentences are so united to others (called principal 
 sentences) as to be dependent upon them. 
 
 The rae^sen^QT, who was sent, an- I Nuntius, qui missus est, nun- 
 nounced. I tiavit. 
 
 Here the messenger announced is the principal sentence ; who was sent. 
 the subordinate sentence.* 
 
 {744.) Subordinate sentences are of five classes : 
 
 A. Participial seiitences. 
 
 B. Accusative with infinitive. 
 
 C. Conjunctive sentences, i. e., such as are introduced by a conjunc- 
 
 tion or adverb of time. 
 
 D. Relative sentences, i. e., such as are introduced by a relative 
 
 word. 
 
 E. Interxogative sentences, i. e., such as are introduced by an inter- 
 
 rogative word. 
 We shall treat these in order, premising a few remarks upon the use of 
 tlie moods and tenses, which must be thoroughly understood. 
 
 ^ 16. The Moods. 
 
 (745.) The verb expresses affirmation. The moods of the verb are used 
 to vary the character of the affirmation. 
 
 * It must be obvious that all co-ordinate sentences are, for grammatical 
 •^MT^oses, principal sentences. Moreover, the doctiines and rules applied 
 to simple sentences (Part I.) are applicable to all principal sentences : it is 
 only in subordinate sentences that difficulty is likely to occur. The pupil 
 should, therefore, obtain as accurate a knowledge as possible of the vari- 
 ous kinds of subordinate sentences, and the different modes of affirmatinn 
 which they express, as it is upon these that their sjTitax depends. 
 
PARTICIPIAL SENTENCES. 
 
 311 
 
 1. By the indicative, affirmation of a fact is expressed ; e. g., I write, 
 I did not write* 
 
 2. By the subjunctive, affirmation is expressed doubtfully, contingently, 
 or indefinitely ; e. g., I may write, if / should write, perhaps some 
 (may) think. 
 
 3. By the imperative, affinnation is expressed as an injunction or re- 
 quest ; e. g., write. 
 
 (746.) It must be obvious that in principal sentences the indicative 
 mood chiefly occurs, and in subordinate sentences the subjunctive, as af- 
 firmations of fact ai'e made more frequently in the former than in the lat- 
 ter. But, 
 
 (a) The subjunctive is used (of course), even in principal sentences, 
 when the affirmation is doubtful, contingent, or indefinite (745, 2). 
 
 [b) The indicative is used, even in subordinate sentences, when the af- 
 firmation is positive. 
 
 True friendships are everlasting, 
 because nature cannot be chang- 
 ed. 
 
 Ver89 amicitisB sempitemsB sunt, 
 quia natura mutari non potest. 
 
 (j 17. The Tenses. 
 
 (a) DIVISION. 
 
 The tenses are either primary or historical (647, B;. 3). 
 
 (747 
 
 ( ai 
 
 (a) Primary, 2 ^^ 
 
 I 
 
 (b) Historical,} , 
 
 Present. 
 
 mat, 
 loves. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 bat. 
 
 Future. 
 
 a m a b i t, 
 he will love. 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 amaverat, 
 he had loved. 
 
 Pres. Perf. 
 
 amavit, 
 he has loved. 
 
 PerC Aorist. 
 
 amavit, 
 
 he loved. 
 
 was loving. 
 
 (6) SUCCESSION OP TENSES. 
 
 (748.) Rule XL III. If there be a primary tense in the 
 pi-ipcipal sentence, there must be a primary tense in the sub- 
 ordinate ; if an historical tense in the principal, an historical in 
 the subordinate. 
 
 PrincipaL 
 
 Subordinate. 
 
 Principal. 
 
 Subordinate. 
 
 I kiuyw 
 
 what you are doiitg. 
 
 Sclo, 
 
 quid agas. 
 
 I was ktwwing 
 
 what you were doing. 
 
 S c i e b a m, 
 
 quid age res. 
 
 I have learned 
 
 what you are doing. 
 
 Cognovi, 
 
 quid agas. 
 
 J learned 
 
 what you were doing. 
 
 C o g n V i. 
 
 quid age res 
 
 (A.) (j 18. Participial Sentences. 
 [The participle is used to abridge discourse, instead of a relative, ad- 
 verb, or conjunction with a verb. Thus (1), Tarquin, when he was expelled 
 
 * Of course the action may be either positive or negative, without af- 
 fecting tbo affi,rmMion. 
 
312 ACCUSATIVE WITH INFINITIVE. 
 
 from, Rome = Tarquin, expelled from Rome. (2) Caesar, when tlce work 
 teas finished, departed = Caesar, the work having been finished, departed 
 These are abridged subordinate sentences, (1) being called the con- 
 junctive participial construction, and (2) the ablative absolute.] 
 
 (749.) Conjunctive Participial Construction. — The participle 
 in a subordinate sentence which has for its subject the subject or 
 object of the princiiml sentence^ agrees with this last in gender, 
 immber, and case. 
 
 Aristides, patria pulsus, Lace- 
 daemonem fugit. 
 
 Aristides, when he was expelUd 
 from his country, ^.ed to Lace- 
 dasmon. 
 
 ^^ Observe, in this example, that Aristides is the subject of 
 both thd principal and the subordinate seiitence, and pulsus 
 agrees with Aristides in gender, number, and case. In Eng- 
 lish such sentences are generally expressed by an adverb or 
 conjunction with a verb. 
 
 (750.) Rule XLIV. Ablative Absolute. — If the subordinate 
 sentence contains a noun and participle independent of the sub- 
 ject of the leading sentence, both noun and participle are placed 
 in the ablative. (This construction is called the ablative abso- 
 lute.) 
 
 When Tarquin was reigning; 
 
 Pythagoras came into Italy. 
 All things having been provided, 
 
 they appoint a day. 
 
 Pythagoras, Tarquinio regnan- 
 
 te, in Italiam venit. 
 Omnibus rebus comparatis, 
 
 diem dicunt. 
 
 Eem. Nouns, adjectives, and pronouns are often used in the ablative 
 absolute without a participle. 
 
 Under the guidance of iVai.Mre I Nat ur a due e. 
 
 (=» Nature being guide). 
 In the consulship of Manlius. J Manlio consul e. 
 
 (B.) <5 19. Accusative with Infinitive. 
 
 (751.) Rule XLV. Many subordinate sentences, which in 
 EngUsh are introduced by the conjunction that (especially after 
 verbs of thinking, saying, knowing, &c.), are expressed in 
 Latin by the accusative with the infinitive. 
 
 They said that they did not fear Dicebant non se hostem vereri. 
 
 the enemy. 
 He knpws that Cicero is eloquent. Scit Ciceronem esse ©loquen- 
 
 tern. 
 
SUBJUNCTIVE WITH UT, NE, aUIN, ClUO, aUOMlNUS. 313 
 
 Rem. 1. Observe that the subject of the sentence thus subordinated 
 is put in the accusative, and the predicate in the infinitive. If the 
 predicate contain an adjective, it must agree with the subject. 
 
 J perceive that the water is cold. | Sentio aquam f r i g i d a m esse. 
 
 2. The accusative with infinitive occurs .chiefly, 
 
 (a) After verba sentiendi et dicendi ( thinking, feeling, 
 perceiving, knowing, saying, announcing, wilhng, forbidding, 
 &c.). 
 
 [b) After such expressions as a p p a r e t (z^ is evident), constat 
 [it is known), opus est, oportet, necesse est, justum 
 est {it is necessary, right, just, &c,). In this case the accusative 
 with infinitive becomes the subject of the entu-e sentence. 
 
 It is known to all that the Romans [Constat inter omnes II o m a n o s 
 were very brave. \ fuisse fortissimos. 
 
 ^^ Oportet and necesse est may take the subjunctive, in- 
 stead of the accusative with infinitive. 
 
 We ought ( = it behooves us) ^olOportetnos virtuti studere ; or 
 practice virtue. \ Virtuti stude-amus oportet. 
 
 (C.) (^ 20. Conjunctive Sentences. 
 
 Relation of Conjunctions to the Moods. 
 
 (752.) From what has been said (745, 746), it is obvious, that as the 
 moods express the varieties of aifimiation, and as the conjunctions are 
 used to indicate difiereat relations of thought (as positive, conditional, 
 causal, &c.), there must be a close connexion between the use of the con- 
 junctions and that of the moods. It must be borne in mind, however, that 
 the nat^ire. of the ajjirmation (except, perhaps, in purely idiomatic ex- 
 pressions) decides both the mood and the conjunction that shall be used. 
 It cannot properly be said, therefore, that the conjunctions govern the 
 moods ; but, for convenience' sake, we treat them together. 
 
 GENERAL RULE. 
 
 (753.) The subjunctive is used in all subordinate sentences 
 in which affirmation is expressed as dependent upon some pre- 
 vious affirmation, either as purpose, aim., consequence, condition^ 
 or imaginary comparison. 
 
 SPECIAL RULES. 
 
 1. Final Conjunctions, ut, ne, quin, quo, quominus. 
 (754.) Rule XL VI. The subjunctive is used in sentences 
 .expressing a purpose or a consequence, introduced by the final 
 conjunctions ut, ne, quin, quo, quominus. 
 
314 
 
 SUBJUNCTITE I 1 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 
 
 1. Ut, ne, expressing j9ztr/v7se. 
 I did not write that in » der to 
 
 instruct you. 
 I beseech you Ttot to do thir. 
 
 2. Ut, expressing consequence. 
 
 Tlie soldiers went with sucli vio- 
 lence that the enemy be'( oh 
 themselves to flight. 
 
 (3.) duo is used to express h. purpose, instead of ut, especially when 
 a comparative enters into thf sentence. 
 
 Ea non ut te instituerei 
 
 scripsi. 
 Te obsecro n e hoc facias. 
 
 Eo impetu milites ierunt, ut hostes 
 se fugse mandarent. 
 
 CfiBsar erects forts, that he may 
 the more easily keep off the 
 Helvetians. 
 
 Caesar castella communit, quo fa^ 
 cilius Helvetios prohibere pos. 
 sit. 
 
 (4.) duin is used in the sense ox 'but that" [as not, Ice.) after negor 
 tive sentences, and after non dibito, non dubium est, &c. 
 
 There is no one but thinks. 
 It is not doubtful but that the 
 soldiers will fight bravely. 
 
 NeiDO est quin putet. 
 Non dubium est quin milites for 
 titer pugnaturi sint. 
 (5.) duominus is used (in preference to ne) after verbs g? hinder 
 in'g, preventing, standing in tlie way of, &.c. (It can generally bo 
 rendered in English by " of" or "from" with & participle.) 
 Nothing hinders him/rom doing I Nihil impei'^ quominus hoc fa 
 this. I ciat. 
 
 2. Conditional Conjunctions, si, nisi, dum, dttUKflod \ modo. 
 
 (755.) Rule XLVII. Conditional conjunctions take tho ^n 
 dicative if the condition is expressed as real or cctain , i\ 
 subjunctive, where it is not. 
 
 If he has any money, he will give S i pecuniam h a b e a t, dab^t. 
 it (it is uncertain whether he 
 has any). 
 
 Rem. 1. If the condition is represented, as impossible or unreal, (1) f» 
 imperfect subjunctive must be used for present or future tiip* 
 (2) the pluperfect subjunctive for past time. 
 
 (1) If he had any money, he would S i pecuniam h a b e r e t, daret. 
 give it (but he has none). 
 
 (2) If he had had any money, he 
 would have given it. 
 
 i2em. 2. As dum, dummodo, modo, in the sense oi providt 
 that, can never express a real, existing condition, tliey alwa^ 
 take the subjunctive. 
 
 Si pecuniam habuisset, dedi 
 set. 
 
■^y^vf SUBJUNCTIVE WITH UUUM. 316 
 
 3. Concessive Conjunctions (683, 5). 
 (756.) The concessive conjunction's take the indicative when they intro- 
 duce a definite statement of fact, but the subjunctive when something is 
 expressed as possible, not actual. Etsi, quamquam, and t a m e t s 1 
 are used principally in the former sense ; in the latter, etiamsi more 
 commonly, and licet and q u a m v i s* nearly always. Hence, 
 
 Rule XL VIII. Licet and quaravis {although) are al- 
 ways followed by the subjunctive : etiamsi, generally. 
 
 Veritas licet nullum defensorem 
 
 o b t i n e a t. 
 Sapiens dobrem patienter tolerat, 
 
 quamvis acerbus sit. 
 
 Though truth should obtain no 
 
 defender. 
 The wise man endures pain pa- 
 tiently, even though it be griev- 
 ous. 
 
 Rem. The comparative conjunctions, when used concessively, velut, 
 quasi, acsi, tanquamsi, &c. (meaning as if,as though), al- 
 ways take the subjunctive, for the reason given (75§) for licet and 
 qnamvis. 
 
 Why do I use witnesses, as 
 though the matter were doubt- 
 ful? 
 
 duid testibus utor, quasi res du- 
 bia sit? 
 
 4. Temporal Conjunctions. 
 
 (757.) Temporal conjunctions {when, after that, 05 soon a*, 
 just as, &c.) of course generally take the indicative. 
 
 After CfEsar drew up the line of 
 
 battle. 
 Every animal, as soon as it is 
 
 born. 
 
 Postquam Caesar aciem in- 
 
 s t r u X i t. 
 Omne animal, simulac or turn 
 
 est. 
 
 SPECIAL REMARKS. 
 
 (A.) Quum has two uses : temporal and causal. 
 
 (a) Temporal. 
 
 1. As a pure particle of time, quum takes the indicative. 
 
 2. In historical narrative (especially where the principal clause hM 
 the indicative perfect) quum temporal is followed by the sttft- 
 junctive imperfect or pluperfect. 
 
 When C(ssar had conquered Pom- [ Caesar, quum Pompeium v i c i s 
 pey, he crossed over into Italy. I s e t, in Italiam t r a j e c i t. 
 
 [In many such cases, the action introduced by when is in some sens* 
 the cause of the action in the principal sentence.] 
 
 * Quamvis is used by the later writers in the sense of quamquam, with 
 the indicative. 
 
316 RELATIVE SENTENCES. 
 
 (J) duum causal, expressing the relation of cause and ^ect {since, 
 because, although), obviously requires the subjunctive. 
 Since these things are so. \ Ctuae cum ita sint. 
 
 Hence, 
 
 Rule XLIX. Quum causal is always followed by the 
 subjunctive ; and quum temporal by the imperfect or pluper- 
 fect subjunctive, when the aorist perfect indicative is used in 
 the principal sentence. 
 
 (B.) Antequam and priusquam are used, 
 
 1. To express simple priority of one action to another, and here the 
 indicative is obviously required. 
 
 All these things xoere done before\ Hoec omnia ante facta sunt 
 Verres touched Italy. I q u a m Verres Italiam a 1 1 i g i t. 
 
 2. To express a connexion between one action and another, and here 
 the subjunctive is obviously required. 
 
 Before Ccesar attempted anything, 
 he orders Divitiacus to be sum- 
 moned. 
 
 Cffisar, priusquam quidquam 
 conaretur, Divitiacum ad se 
 vocari jubet. 
 
 3. To introduce a general or indefinite statement, requiring, of course, 
 the subjunctive. 
 The tempest threatens before it I Tempestas minatur, antequam 
 rises. | surgat. 
 
 (C.) Dum, donee, quoad, in the sense oi until, take the 
 tuhjunctive when the affirmation is expressed as possible or 
 future. 
 
 He was unwilling to leave ^Zt^lDum Milo veniret, locum relin-. 
 spot until Milo came. I quere noluit. 
 
 ,[For interrogatives, see $ 22.] 
 
 (D.) ^21. Relative Sentences. 
 (758.) In the compound sentence, "the messenger, icho was sent, an- 
 nounced," the clause "the messenger announced" is the principal sen- 
 tence ; and the clause "wJw %oas sent" the relative sentence. The word 
 " mf,ssenger" is the antecedent of the relative "who." 
 
 1. Agreement. 
 (759.) Rule L. The relative pronoun agrees with its 
 antecedent in gender and number ; but its case depends upon 
 tlie consti'uction of the relative sentence. 
 
 Tlie bridge which was at Geneva I Pontem, qui erat ad Genevam^ 
 he orders to be cut down. I jubet rescindi. 
 
RELATIVE SENTENCES. 317 
 
 Genus hoc e^at pagiiae, quo Ger- 
 mani se exercuerant. 
 
 This was a kind of fighting in 
 rohich the Germans had exer- 
 cised themselves 
 
 Rem. The verb in the relative sentence tak'^s the person, of the ante- 
 cedent. 
 
 We who write. | Nos qui scribimus. 
 
 2 The Moods in Relative Sertences. 
 
 (760.) (a) The indicative mood occurs in the relative sen- 
 tence only when it states a fact distinctlr, with reference to a 
 particular subject. 
 
 TTie messenger who was sent. \ Nuntius qri missus est. 
 
 (6) But qui is used in Latin very comn»only (1) to avoid the 
 use of a conjunction, and (2) to introduce indefinite statements, 
 or the words or opinions of another ; and in such cases is al- 
 ways followed by the subjunctive. 
 
 (761.) Rule LI. The subjunctive is used in relative senten- 
 ces expressing the purpose, result, or grourd of the principal 
 sentence. 
 
 1. Purpose (qui = ut with demonstrative). 
 
 They sent ambassadors to sue for I Misemnt legato*, qui pacem pet* 
 (= who should sue for) peace. | erent (= ut ii pacem peterent). 
 
 2. Result (qui = ut after is, tam, talis, dignus, ita, &c.). 
 Non is sum qui h?^ faciam. 
 
 7" am not the man to do this (= I 
 
 am not such who can do). 
 Pollio is worthy of our love (= 
 
 worthy, whom we may love). 
 
 3. Ground or cause (qui = cur or quod). 
 You err, who think (= because you Erras qui censeas — 
 
 Dignas est Pollio, \j "»*♦!» diliga- 
 mus. 
 
 Hannibal did wrong in wintering Male fecit Hannibal q*^ i Capun 
 (= because he wintered) at Ca- h i e m a r i t. 
 pua. 
 
 (762.) Rule LII. The subjunctive is used in relat've sen- 
 tences containing indefinite statements, especially aft/^v thr 
 words there are, there can he found, there is no one, &c. 
 
 There are those who say. 
 
 I have nothing whereof to accuse 
 
 (= no reason to blame) old age. 
 
 Rem. When the sentence introduced by the relative expresses th9 
 
 D I) 2 
 
 Sunt qui dicant. 
 Nihil habeo quod incusem so- 
 nectutem. 
 
318 INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. 
 
 sentiments of another (rathei* tlmn of the writer), the subjunctiv© If 
 used. 
 
 Helvetii constituerunt ea quaa ad 
 proficiscendam pertinerent 
 comparare. 
 
 The Helvetians determined to get 
 together those things which 
 (they thought) belonged to 
 inarching (were necessary for 
 Betting out). 
 
 ^ 22. Interrogative Sentences. 
 1. Questions, 
 (763.) Cluestions are often expressed in English without any interrog. 
 fttive word ; e. g., Is Caius writing ? but in the Latin, ahnost invaria- 
 bly, an interrogative word is used. These are either (a) interrogative 
 particles, [b) interrogative pronouns, or (c) interrogative adverbs or con- 
 junctions. 
 
 {a) Interrogative Particles : ne, nonne, num, utrum, an. 
 
 (1.) Ne simply asks for information. 
 Is Caius writing 7 jScribitne Caius ? 
 
 (2.) Nonne expects the answer yes. 
 Do you not think the wise man I Nonne putas sapientem beatum 
 happy ? I esse ? 
 
 (3.) Num expects the answer no. 
 Do you think the fool happy ? | N u m putas stultum esse beatom ? 
 
 (4.) Utrum is used in double questions, with a n (whetlter — or). 
 (Whether) is that your fault or I Utrum ea vestra an nostra culpa 
 
 ours ? j est ? 
 
 {b) Interrogative Pronouns: quis, qui, qualis, quantus, ec- 
 
 quis, &c. 
 Who taught Epaminondas mu- t d u i s Epaminondam musicam do- 
 
 sic ? &c. I cuit ? 
 
 (c) Interrogative Adverbs or Conjunctions: quare, cur, quando, 
 
 ubi, quomodo, &c. 
 (764.) Cluestions are either direct or indirect : direct, when they are 
 not dependent on any word or sentence going before ; e. g., Is Caius wri- 
 ting ? Indirect, when they are so dependent ; e. g., Tell me if Caius is 
 writing. 
 
 2. Use of the Moods in Questions, 
 (a) jyirect. 
 (765.) In direct questions the indicative is used when the quescion tl put 
 positively, and the subjunctive when it is put doubtfully ; e. g., 
 (Positive.) What are you doing ? I duid a g i s ? (Indie.) 
 (Doubtful.) What can we do? \ Cluid a g a m u b ? 
 
ORATIO ^LiauA. S19 
 
 (b, indirect. 
 
 (766.) Rule LIII. In indirect questions the subjunctive ia 
 always used. 
 
 I do not know what book you are Nescio quern librmn leg as. 
 
 reading^. 
 Tell me what you are doing. Die, quid agas. 
 
 «J 23. Oratio Obliqua. 
 1. Nature of Oratio Obliqua. 
 (767.) W hen any one relates the words or opinions of another, he may 
 do it ia two ways : 
 
 (a) He may represent him as speaking in the Jlrst person, and giveliis 
 words precisely as they were uttered; e. g., Ariovistus said, " I have 
 crossed tlie Rhine^' — Ariovistus dixit, Bhenum transii. This is 
 called oratio recta, direct discourse, 
 {h) He may state the substance of what the speaker said in narrative 
 form ; e.g., Ariovistus said that lie had crossed the Rhine — Ariovistus 
 dixit se Rhenum transisse. This is called oratio obliqua, 
 indirect discourse, 
 
 2. The Moods in the Oratio Obliqua. 
 (768.) The sentences introduced in the oratio obliqua are either pnrunr 
 pal or subordinate ; e. g., Ariovistus said that he would not wage war on 
 the ^duans if they paid the tribute yearly. Here the sentence that he 
 would not wage war upon the u^duans is a principal sentence, and if 
 they paid the tribute yearly is a subordinate sentence. 
 
 (769.) Rule LIV. {a) Principal sentences inilae oratio ohli- 
 qua are expressed by the accusative with the infinitive ; e. g,, 
 Ariovistus dixit, s e iEduis bellum non esse illaturum. 
 
 Rem. If the principal sentence contains a command or wish, it is ex- 
 pressed by the subjunctive ; e. g., 
 The leader said that the troops I Dux dixit, milites suae saluti con- 
 should consult their own safety. \ sulerent. 
 
 (&) Subordinate sentences in oratio obliqua always take the 
 subjunctive ; e. g., Ariovistus dixit, se JEduis bellum non esse 
 illaturum, si stipendium quotannis penderent {if 
 Oiey paid the tribute yearly) , 
 
tl 
 
APPENDICES 
 
APPENDIX I. 
 
 OF PROSODY. 
 
 ^ 1. Quantity. 
 
 (The rules of quantity in. Lesson XLII. shotild be reviewed, and tibe 
 following additional rules learned.] 
 
 1. Penults. 
 (770.) Dissyllabic supines lengthen the penult; e.g., visum. 
 Rem. The following are short, viz. : 
 
 Datum, rStum, satum, stitum, itum, 
 Cituna, litum, situm, rutum, qtutum. 
 (771c) Reduplicated perfects shorten both penult and antepenult , 
 e.^-., cScIdi, didici. 
 
 Rem. Penult is long in cecidi (csedSre) and pSpfidi (pfidSre). 
 (772.) In ADJECTIVE PENULTS observe the following : 
 
 1. Short Penults : -Sous, -Icus, -idus, imus ; e. g., .ffigyptiftcus, mo- 
 dicus, cupidus, legitimus. 
 
 Exceptions. — Meracus, opflcus, amicus, apricus, anticus, posticus, 
 mendicus, umbilieus, fidus, inf idus, bimus, trimus (of two, three 
 years, &c.), matrimus, opimus, patrimus, imus, primus. 
 
 2. Long Penults: -alis, -anus, ddas, fitns, with all before -rus, 
 -vus, -SUB ; e.g., dotalis, montanus, percrudus, astutus, avfirus, sin- 
 cSrus, delirus, decdrus, octavus, sestivus, famdsns. 
 
 Exc. — InfSri, postSri, barbarus, opiparua. 
 i. Penults sometimes long, sometimes short: -ilis, -inus. 
 (<^ -ilis, fh)m verbs, is short ; fix>m nouns, long; e. g., faciflis {short) ; 
 
 civilis {long). Exilis, subtilis, and the names of months (Aprilis 
 
 &c.), are long. 
 {b) -inus, from nouns denoting time or material, is short; from 
 
 other words, long ; e. g., crastinus, elephantinus {short) ; caninus, 
 
 Latanus {long). 
 
 2. Compound Words. 
 (77o.) Compound words generally retain the quantity of the simple 
 words; e. ^., per+16go = perl6go ; per+l6gi = perl6gi. 
 
324^ 
 
 APPENDIX I. PROSODY. 
 
 Rem. 1. A change of vowels does Jiot aflPect the rule ; e+lego = 
 
 eligo. 
 2. Dejero, pejero (juro) ; maledicus, &c. (dico) ; cognitum, agmtum 
 (nottun), are short, though the simple words are long. 
 (774.) a, e, de, dl, pro, s e, in composition are long, but re is short. 
 ■Exc. — Dirimo, disertus, refert.- Pro is short in Greek words, and in 
 the compounds of cello, fanum, fari, fateor, festus, fugio, fxmdo, 
 nepos, neptis, toi-vus ; also in proficiscor. In prSpago, prdpino, it 
 is doubtful.* 
 (775.) If the first part of a compound word end in a, it is generally long ; 
 if in c, «, or u, generally short ; e. g., traduce, trade (contracted from trans) ; 
 trScenti, agricola, quadrupes. 
 
 <5 2. Rhythm, Arsis, Thesis, Verse, Feet. 
 (776.) (a) By Rhythm we mean a regular alternation of elevations 
 (stress) and depressions of the voice. In poetry this alternation follows 
 certain fixed laws. 
 
 (b) The effort of voice by which stress is laid upon one syllable is called 
 Ictus, or rhythmical accent. A syllable so raised by the ictus stands in 
 the Arsis The syllable or syllables on which the voice rests or sinks 
 are said to be in the Thesis. 
 
 (c) A Foot is formed by the union of arsis and thesis. A combination 
 of feet forms a Verse. 
 
 Thus, in the line vts6rg mantes, the ictus falls on the syllables 
 marked with the accent ; vis and mon, therefore, are in the arsis, 
 s6re and tes in the thesis. The union of arsis and thesis in 
 viserg forms a foot; so also in mon tes. The combination of 
 these two feet forms the verse 
 
 VisSrg montes. 
 fd) A Dactyl is a foot composed of one long syllable (arsis) and two 
 •hort syllables (thesis) ; e.g., vtserg : a Spondee of two long (arsis and 
 thesis) ; c. g'., m6nt6s. 
 
 ij 3. Scanning. 
 (777.) Scanning is the measuring of a verse into the feet which com- 
 pose it. Observe the following points in scanning : 
 
 1 . Syrudcepha cuts off a vowel at the end of a word when the next 
 word begins with a vowel or h ; e. g., instead of r e g i n a a d, we 
 read re gin' ad; instead of atque hinc, atqu' hinc. 
 
 2. Ecthlipsis cuts off m with the vowel before it at the end of a word 
 
 * The following lines contain the exceptions : 
 
 At rape quae fundo, fugio, neptisque, neposque, 
 
 Et cello, fari, fateor, fanumque, festumque ; 
 
 Atque procus, proficiscor, cumque propheta, profecto. 
 
4. 
 
 5. 
 
 6. 
 
 trrepa- 
 
 rdbil6 
 
 tempus. 
 
 b^s r6n&- 
 
 vdr6 d6- 
 
 I6rem. 
 
 APPENDIX I.— PROSODY. 325 
 
 ■when the next begins with a vowel; e. g., instead ofignotum 
 est, we read i g n o t' est. 
 
 3. The last syllable of a word ending with a consonant is always 
 long if the next word begins with a consonant ; e. g., m a n i b u s 
 tremor; here bus (naturally short) is made long. 
 
 4. Synceresis contracts two syllables into one; e. g., aur6a into 
 aurea (pronounced aurya). 
 
 5. DicEresis divides one syllable into two ; e. g., pictse, pictai. 
 
 ^ 4. Hexameter Verse. 
 
 (778.) (a) Hexameter verse is so called because it has six measures, 
 of a foot each. The first /owr feet may be either dactyls or spondees ; the 
 Jiffh is regularly a dactyl, the sixth a spondee. 
 
 11. 1 2. 11 3* 
 Sed fuglt tntere- 4,fugit 
 I infan- |dtijnB.e-l|gjbiaju- 
 
 Rem. 1. Sometimes a spondee is found in the 5th place, especially 
 when anything grave or solemn is expressed. The line is then 
 called spondaic. 
 2. The final syllable of a verse is always reckoned long ; e. g., rem, 
 indolorem. 
 {h) Caesura is the separation, by the end of a word, of syllables enter- 
 ing into a foot. If the feet of a verse be marked off like bars in music, 
 whenever a bar falls in the middle of a word there is a caesura ; e. g., the 
 following hexameter hB.s Jive caesuras : 
 
 nie la- 1 tus nive- ] um mol- ] li ful- | tus, hyi- j cintho. 
 (c) The ccBsural pause in hexameter verse is a pause or rest of the 
 voice on a caesural syllable, designed to give harmony to the entire verse. 
 (1.) The most approved caesural pause {the heroic) falls on the arsis of 
 the third foot, as m the following examples : 
 
 Sed fugit I Intere- I a 11 fiigit I itrepai I rabilS j tempus. 
 ille la- I tus nivS 1 um 1] mol- | li ful | tus hyi- | cintho. 
 
 (2.) Next in excellence is the caesural pause in the thesis of the third 
 foot, or in the arsis of the fourth. Occurring in other places, it 
 mars the hannony of the versp. 
 
 Ee 
 
APPENDIX 11. 
 
 (779.) 
 
 GREEK NOUNa 
 
 {jEne-as, IB, 08, 
 
 Anchis-es, te, ae, 
 
 Pen6l6p-6, es, sb, 
 
 ^Del-OS, i, o, 
 
 I Orph-eus, ei, eo, 
 
 Voo. sometimes d and d 
 
 ,or&&, eu eo. 
 
 oA n 7 J ^^'■if'^ ^^°' ^'■' ^"» *"**">"•' »^"» ^^ ^•^' 
 
 I [or, N. e^, G. eos, D. 6i (ei), Ace. 64 poetical.) 
 [Athos, 6, 6, 6n, or 6, 6s, 6. (In Greek, wf.) 
 Poes-is, isi M, im, Hs, i. | gb, eon. i^wB not found), 
 
 (eos,) 5 (in,) > 
 NerS-is, 
 G. Nereid-is, 
 (6s, 
 Pericl-es, is, )i, em, ) es, ) ^ 
 
 i, > ea, 5 e, > 
 
 .Did-6, us, 6, 6. 6. | (also, onis, &c.) 
 
 Ohs. Neuters in a, gen. fttis, have dat. plur. in atis ; thus : poema, dat. 
 plur. poemfitis, not poematibus. 
 
 Zd DecU 
 
 is, > i, em, 7 (Nerei), 6. \ es, um, ibus, es. > 
 
 3,) S (s,) 5 (to.) i 
 
 (780.) EXAMPLES OF PATRONYMICS 
 
 (or names from a father or ancestor). 
 ^n6as, Anchises, Tyndirus, Theseus, 
 Masc. ^neddes, Anchisiddes, Tyndarides, Thesides* 
 
 Fern, {j^neis,) Anchisias, Tynddris, Theseis, 
 
 Atlas (antis). 
 
 Atlantldes, 
 
 Atlantiades. 
 
 Atlantis, 
 
 Atlantias. 
 
 (781.) 
 
 EXAMPLES OP NAMES 
 (derived from one's town or native country). 
 Masc. Persa, Ores, Tros, Thrax, Laco (Lacon), Phoenix. 
 Fern. Persis, Cressa, Troas, Tkreissa, Laccena, Phcenissa. 
 
 Creth, Thressa. 
 
 RomAnus Clusicns Atheniensis Abderitfis {fern., Abderttis). 
 
 {Roman). {of Chisium). {an Athenian). {ofAbdera). 
 Milesias Arpinas 
 
 {of Miletus). {of Arpinum). 
 
 • For ThesSides. Hence ides oomes from nom. in eus. 
 
APPENDIX III. 
 
 (782.) THE CALENDAR. 
 
 (1.) The Roman months had the same number of days as ours, tmt 
 were diflFerently divided. 
 
 1. The Kalends were the 1st day of the month. 
 
 2. The Nones " 5th or 7th day of the month. 
 
 3. The Ides " XSth or 15^^ day of the month. 
 
 5^* "We make in March, July, October, May, 
 
 The Nones the seventh, the Ides ^e fifteenth day. 
 
 In all the other months the 5th and 13th were used. 
 
 (2.) The names of the months are used as adjectives agreeing witb 
 KalendsB, Nonas, and Idas. 
 
 The Ist of January. 
 
 The 5ih of June. 
 
 The 13th of September. 
 
 Kalendis Januariis. 
 
 Nonis Jnniis. 
 
 Idibns Septembribus. 
 
 (3.) (a) Instead of beginning at the 1st of the month and nTimbering the 
 days regularly 2d, 3d, &c., as we do, the Romans counted them backward 
 from the Kalends, Nones, and Ides. Thus, the 2d of January was called 
 the ith day before the Nones of January, quarto (die ante) Nonas 
 Jannarias; the 3d, tertio Nonas; the 4th, pridie Nonas ; the 
 5th, Nonis. 
 
 (b) From the above cases it will be seen that the day with which the 
 reckoning commences is included (except pridie), i. e., the 2d day before 
 the Nones is tertio Nonas ; the 3d day before, quarto Nonas, &c. 
 
 The 12th of October. Tertio (die ante) Idus Octo 
 
 bres. 
 TheZdofJune. Tertio (die ante) Nonas Ju- 
 
 nias. 
 
 (c) Special care must be taken, in designating any day between the 
 Ides of one month and the Kalends of another, to ensure correctness. 
 Thus, in. (die ante) Kalend. Januar. will be December 30 ; but III. KaL 
 Maias = 29th April, inasmuch as December has 31 days and April but 30. 
 <3o in. Kal. Martias = 27th February. 
 
328 
 
 APPENDIX III.— CALENDAR. 
 
 (4.) The following table, exhibiting the correspondence between the 
 Romaji calendar and ours, can now be readily understood : 
 
 The Days 
 
 March, May, July,'january, August, and 
 
 AprU, June, Septem- 
 ber, and November 
 
 February {has 28, 
 
 of our 
 
 and October (hare 
 
 December ( have 
 
 and iu Leap-years 
 
 Months. 
 
 31 days). 
 
 also 31 days). 
 
 (have 30 days). 
 
 29 days). 
 
 1. 
 
 Kalendis. 
 
 Kalendis. 
 
 Kalendis. 
 
 Kalendis. 
 
 2. 
 
 VI. ^ 
 
 IV. ?ante 
 III. (Nonas. 
 
 IV. ;ante 
 
 IV. ? ante 
 
 3. 
 
 V. 1 ante 
 
 III. 5 Nonas. 
 
 III. 5 Nonas. 
 
 4. 
 
 IV. [Nonas. 
 
 Pridie Nonas. 
 
 Pridie Nonas. 
 
 Pridie Nonas. 
 
 5. 
 
 III. ; 
 
 • Nonis. 
 
 Nonis. 
 
 Nonis. 
 
 6. 
 
 Pridie Nonas. 
 
 VIII. 1 
 
 
 VIII. ^ 
 
 
 VIII. ^ 
 
 
 7. 
 
 Nonis. 
 
 VII. 
 
 
 VII. 
 
 
 VII. 
 
 
 8. 
 
 VIII. > 
 
 
 VI. 
 
 ante 
 
 VI. 
 
 ante 
 
 VI. 
 
 ante 
 
 9. 
 
 VII. 
 
 
 V. 
 
 Idus. 
 
 V. 
 
 Idus. 
 
 V. 
 
 'Idus. 
 
 10. 
 
 VI. 
 
 ante 
 
 IV. 
 
 
 IV. 
 
 
 IV. 
 
 
 11. 
 
 V. 
 
 Idus. 
 
 III. ^ 
 
 
 III. 
 
 
 III. . 
 
 1 
 
 12. 
 
 IV. 
 
 
 Pridie Idus. 
 
 Pridie Idus. , 
 
 Pridie Idus. 11 
 
 13. 
 
 III. J 
 
 
 Idibus, 
 
 Idibus. 
 
 Idibus. 11 
 
 14. 
 
 Pridie Idus. 
 
 XIX. ^ 
 
 
 XVIII. ^ 
 
 
 XVI. -^1 
 
 
 15. 
 
 Idibus. 
 
 XVIII. 
 
 SP 
 
 XVII. 
 
 .1 
 
 XV. 
 
 . 
 
 16. 
 
 XVII.' 
 
 ha - 
 
 XVII. 
 
 .S 
 
 XVI. 
 
 XIV. 
 
 S 
 
 17. 
 
 XVI. 
 
 a 
 
 XVI. 
 
 1 
 
 XV. 
 
 o 
 
 XIII. 
 
 ■-g 
 
 18. 
 
 XV. 
 
 1 
 
 XV. 
 
 XIV. 
 
 % 
 
 XII. 
 
 1 
 
 19. 
 
 XIV. 
 
 1 
 
 XIV. 
 
 e2 
 
 XIII. 
 
 o 
 
 XI. 
 
 20. 
 
 xm. 
 
 c2 
 
 XIII. 
 
 ■2 • 
 
 XII. 
 
 ■B . 
 
 X. 
 
 S 
 
 21. 
 
 XII. 
 
 
 XII. 
 
 <v..a 
 
 XL 
 
 -^1 
 
 IX. 
 
 "§ 
 
 22. 
 
 XI. 
 
 4J J" 
 
 XI. 
 
 .^"S 
 
 X. 
 
 al 9 
 
 VIII. 
 
 -1 
 
 23. 
 
 X. 
 
 ..O,^ 
 
 X. 
 
 'a 
 
 IX. 
 
 us g 
 
 VII. 
 
 ^ 
 
 24. 
 
 IX. 
 
 li 
 
 IX. 
 
 VIII. 
 
 1 
 
 VI. 
 
 o 
 
 25. 
 
 vm. 
 
 VIII. 
 
 (U 
 
 VII. 
 
 13 
 
 V. 
 
 1 
 
 26. 
 
 VII. 
 
 VII. 
 
 ! 
 
 VI. 
 
 t4 
 
 IV. 
 
 27. 
 
 VL 
 
 '3 
 
 VI. 
 
 V. 
 
 o 
 
 III. , 
 
 
 28. 
 
 V. 
 
 V. 
 
 i 
 
 IV. 
 
 d 
 
 Prid. ] 
 
 ?:alendas 
 
 29. 
 
 IV. 
 
 S 
 
 IV. 
 
 III. . 
 
 CS 
 
 Martias. 
 
 30. 
 
 III. 
 
 § 
 
 III. 
 
 
 Prid. Kalendas 
 
 
 31. 
 
 Prid. Kalendas 
 
 Prid. Kalendas (of the foUow- 
 
 
 
 (of the follow- 
 
 (of the follow- ing month). 
 
 
 
 ing month). 
 
 ing month). 
 
 
 (5.) The 5lh day before the Kalends oj April (for instance) may be ex- 
 pressed in three ways : 
 
 (a) Die quinto ante Kalendas Apriles. 
 (&) duinto Kalendas Apriles. 
 
 (c) Ante diem quintum Kalendas A p r 11 e s ; or, abbrevi- 
 ated, a. d. V. KaL Apr. 
 
APPENDIX IV. 
 
 ABBREVIATIONS. 
 
 (783.) The following abbreviations of words occur in Latin authow, 
 
 (a) NAMES. 
 
 A. Aulus. 
 
 M'. 
 
 Manius. 
 
 Sept. Septimius. 
 
 Ap. Appius. 
 
 M. 
 
 Marcus. 
 
 Serv. Servius. 
 
 C. Caius. 
 
 Mam. 
 
 Mamercus. 
 
 Sex. Sextus. 
 
 CI. Claudias. 
 
 M. T, C. Marcus TuUi- | 
 
 Sp. Spurius. 
 
 Cn. CnsBUS. 
 
 
 t us Cicero. 
 
 T. Titus. 
 
 D. Decimus. 
 
 N. 
 
 Numerius. 
 
 Ti-^ Tiberius. 
 
 D. Decius. 
 
 P. 
 
 Publius. 
 
 L. Lucius. 
 
 a 
 
 auintus. 
 
 TuU. TuUius. 
 
 (b) PUBLIC EXPRESSIONS. 
 
 
 ^d. iEdilia. 
 
 Id. 
 
 Idus. 
 
 Pr. Prajtor. 
 
 Aug. Augustus. 
 
 Imp. 
 
 Imperator. 
 
 Praaf. Praefectus. 
 
 ^i'^ ^ Kalends. 
 
 Impp. 
 Non. 
 
 Imperatores. 
 NonsB. 
 
 Pont. Max. Pontifex 
 Maximus. 
 
 Cos. Consul. 
 
 0. M. 
 
 Optimus Maxi- 
 
 Resp. Respublica. 
 
 Coss. Consules. 
 
 
 mus. 
 
 S. Senatas. 
 
 D. Divus. 
 
 P. C. 
 
 Patres Con- 
 
 S. C. Senatus consuJ- 
 
 Des. Designatas. 
 
 
 scripti. 
 
 tum. 
 
 Eq. Rom. Eques Ro- 
 
 PI. 
 
 Plebis. 
 
 S. P. a. R. Senatus po- 
 
 manus. 
 
 Pop. 
 
 Populus. 
 
 pulusque Rom. 
 
 F. Filius. 
 
 P. R. 
 
 Populus Rom. 
 
 Tr. Tribunus. 
 
 (c) OTHER 
 
 ABBREVIATIONS. 
 
 
 A. Anno. 
 
 
 S. S 
 
 alutem. 
 
 A. C. Anno currente. 
 
 
 8. P. D. S 
 
 alutem dicit plurimam. 
 
 A, pr. Anno prseteiito. 
 A. M. Anno mundi. 
 
 
 c. c 
 
 aput. 
 
 
 cf. c 
 
 onfer. 
 
 A. Cbr. Anno Christi. 
 
 
 e. g. e 
 
 xempli gratia. 
 
 A. D. Anno Domini. 
 
 
 i. e. i 
 
 iest. 
 
 A. U. C. Anno urbis conditae. 
 
 
 1. c. 1( 
 
 3co citato 
 
 D. D. Dono dedit. 
 
 
 pag. m. F 
 
 agina mea. 
 
 D. D. D. Dono dedit dicavit. 
 
 
 q. d. q 
 
 uasi dicat. 
 
 D. D. C. q. Dedit dicavit consecra- 
 
 q.l. q 
 
 uantum libet. 
 
 vitque. 
 
 
 q. s. c 
 
 uantum sufBcit. 
 
 D. M. Diis Manibus. 
 
 
 scil. s 
 
 cilicet. 
 
 L. S. Loco sigilli. 
 
 
 seq. s 
 
 equens. 
 
 M. S. Manuscriptus. 
 
 
 V. \ 
 
 -^ersus. 
 
 P. 8. Postscriptum. 
 
 
 V. g. \ 
 
 erbi gratia. 
 
 Q,.D.B.V. auod Deus bene vertat. 
 
 viz. -v 
 
 ndelicet. 
 
 8. V. B. E. E. V. Si vales bene 
 
 est 
 
 vid. \ 
 
 ';^de. 
 
 ego 
 
 valeo. 
 
 
 
 • 
 
 E e2s 
 
WORD-BUILDING 
 
 AND 
 
 READING LESSONS. 
 
 .Il 
 
WORD-BUILDING. 
 
 (784.) 1. Thk generic meaning' of a word is contained in its root ; the 
 specific meaning is generally given by its ending. Thus, in all the words 
 a m - o (/ love), a m - o r (love), a m - a t o r {a lover), a m - i c u s (friend), we 
 find the same generic idea (lave) expressed by the root am ; while the 
 specific meanings, I love (verb), love (noun), lover (noxm), friend (adjective 
 noun), are given by the endings o, or, a t o r, i c u s, respectively. 
 
 2. The meanings of words are farther modified by certain prefixes ; 
 f g., ire (io go), a m b - i r c {io go rouiid). 
 
 3. Again, words may be compounded with each other, and form new 
 words ; e. g., with agr- (the stem of ager, field), and col- (the stem of 
 c o 1 6 r e, to till), we form a g r i c o 1 - a, a tiller of thejield = a farmer. 
 
 Thus there are three modes of forming words : by suffixes, prefixes, and 
 composition. We treat them in order. 
 
 (l.) WORD-BUIIiDING BY SUmXES. 
 
 (A.) Nouns. 
 (785.) First Declension. 
 1. The ending -a, suSixed to verb-stems, expresses an agent or 
 doer. 
 
 s c r i b - a, writer, from s c r i b - 6 r e, to write. 
 p e r f u g - a, deserter, from p e r f u g - 6 r e, to desert. 
 S -i a, - i t i a, with adjective-stems, a disposition or co7idition. 
 
 i g n a V - i a, cowardice, from i g n a v - u s, cowardly. 
 
 prudent-ia, prudence, from pruden(t)-s, prudent. 
 trist-itia, sadness, from trist-is, sad. 
 
 victor-ia, victory, from v i c t - o r, victorious 
 
 3. -ura, with supine-stems, the action or co7idition of the verb, 
 pict-ura, painting; pingere (pict-), to paint. 
 
 prsefect ura, prefectship ; praeficere (p r ae f e c t -), to place over. 
 (786.) Second Declension. 
 
 1. -us, -ius, with verb-stems, form nouns denoting the agent or the 
 action of the verb. 
 
 s e r V - u s. 
 
 slave ; 
 
 s e r V - i r e. 
 
 to serve. 
 
 fluv-ius, 
 
 river ; 
 
 flu(v)-6re, 
 
 to flow. 
 
 ooqu-as, 
 
 cook ; 
 
 coqu-ere, 
 
 to cook. 
 
 lud-us, 
 
 sport ; 
 
 lud-ere, 
 
 to play. 
 
334 WORD-BUILDING. 
 
 2. -um, -ium, with verb-stems, gives a result Oi the action of the 
 verb. 
 
 jug-um, yoke, jung-6re, tojoin. 
 
 V a d - u m, ford ; v a d - 6 r e, to go. 
 
 incend-ium, Jlre ; i n c e n d - e r e, ^o bum. 
 
 3. -ium, with noun-stems, {a) an office, or [h) an assemblage of men 
 exercising an office or function. 
 
 (a) sacerdot-ium> office <?/*sacerdos. 
 
 minister-ium, office o/^minister. 
 
 (J) c o 1 1 e g • i u m, assemblage of coWegm. 
 
 conviv-ium, assemblage of convivae. 
 
 4. .mentum, with verb-stems, the m^ans of doing what the verb 
 expresses. 
 
 teg-u-mentum, covering ; t e g - 6 r e, to cover. 
 adju-mentum^ aid; adjxir -Are, to assist. 
 
 5. -ulum, -bulum, -culum, with verb-stems, means or instru- 
 ment. 
 
 jac-ulum, javelin; jac-gre, to hurl. 
 
 venab-ulum, hunting-spear ; v e n - a r i, to hunt. 
 
 vehiculum, carriage ; v e h - 6 r e, to carry. 
 
 Rem. d u 1 u m also sometimes — the place where ; e. g-., c oe n a - c u 1 u m, 
 
 cubi-culum. 
 
 6. -c r u m, -strum, with verb-stems, place or thing prepared for any 
 purpose. 
 
 lava-crum, bath ; 1 a v - a r e, to wash. 
 
 claus-trum, lock; claud-6re, to shut. 
 
 (787.) Diminutives of First and Second Declensions. 
 
 I us, -la, -Ium, with noun-stems, form diminutive nouns, of mascu- 
 line, feminine, and neuter genders. 
 
 {a) Connecting vowels i, o, u, the latter sometimes with c. 
 
 fili-o-lus, fili-o-la, little son, daughter — (filius) ; frater- 
 culus (frater) ; opus -culum (opus). 
 (b) Sometimes 1 is doubled: lap-illus (lapis); codic-illai 
 (codex, codicis) ; sac-ellum (sacrum). 
 
 (788.) Third Declension. 
 
 1. -tas, -tiis (with or without i as connecting vowel), form, with ad- 
 jective-stems, abstract nonns denoting quality, &c. 
 
 bon-i-tas, goodness; bon-us, good. 
 
 hones-tas, honour; honest-us, honourable. 
 
 fort-i-tndo, bravery; fort -is, brave. 
 
WORD-BUILDING. 335 
 
 •. (a) -or, with verb-stems, the action or condition of the verb, 
 pav-or, fear; pav-6re, to fear, 
 
 am-or, love; am-are, to love, 
 
 (b) -or, with saphie^stems, the agent or doer. 
 
 doct-or, teacher; doc-ere (doct-), to teach. 
 
 mo nit -or, adviser; mon-Sre (monit-), to advise. 
 
 3. -io, with supine-stems, the action of the verb, especially the doing 
 of it. 
 
 act-io, action; ag-ere (act-), to act, do, 
 
 caut-io, caution; cav-6re (caut-), to take care. 
 
 4. -tudo, with adjective-stems, the abstract quality/. 
 
 fort-i-tudo, bravery; fort-is, brave. 
 
 (789.) Fourth Declension. 
 
 Most nouns of the 4th declension are abstracts formed from verb- 
 stems or supine-stems. 
 
 us -us, use; uti (us-), to use, 
 
 mot -us, motion; m6v-ere (mot-), to move. 
 
 (790.) Fifth Declension. 
 
 1. -es, -ies, -ities, with verb or adjective-stems, a property, oper* 
 ation, quality, &c. 
 
 fid-es (fid-6re) ; ser-ies (ser-6re) ; fac-ies (fac-6re) ; dur- 
 ities (dur-us) ; mund-ities(mund-uB). 
 
 2. [Those in -ities coexist with others in -itia (784, 2); e. er. 
 munditia, duritia, &c.] 
 
 (B.) Adjectives. 
 (791.) First Class, us, a, urn. 
 
 1. -us, quality in general (coexisting with verb and noun stems). 
 
 alb-US, white; alb-are, alb-umen. 
 
 curv-us, curved; curv-are, curv-amen. 
 
 dur-us, hard; dur-are, dur-ities. 
 
 viv-us, alive; viv-ere, vit-a. 
 
 8. -Id us and uus, chiefly with stems of intransitive verbs, the 
 quality of the verb, without addition. 
 
 turg-idus, swelling; turg-ere, to swell. 
 
 cal-idus, warm; cal-Sre, to be warm. 
 
 noc-uus, hurtful; noc-ere, to hurt. 
 
 3. -bundus, with verb-stems, force of present participle, intensified. 
 
 hfflsita-bundus, full of hesitation ; ha)s it-are, to hesitate. 
 lacryma-bundus, weeping profusely • lacrym-are, to weep 
 
336 WORD-BUILDING. 
 
 4. -cQudus, same as bundus, generallywith the additional idea of 
 permanency, 
 
 ira-cundus, passionate; ira-sc-i, to be angry 
 
 vere-cundus, bashful; yerS-ri, tofear. 
 
 5. -i c u s, with noun-stems, belonging or relating to a thing. 
 
 class-icus, belonging to a Jleet ; class-is, Jleet. 
 c i V - i c u s, civic ; c i v - i s, citizen. 
 
 6. -e u s, -a c e u s, -i c i u s, with noun-stems, material or origin. 
 
 ferr-eus, of iron; ferr-um, iron. 
 
 chart-aceus, of paper; chart-a, paper. 
 
 7. -i n u s, with noun-stems, similarity, quality, or material. 
 
 &sin-imjLS, Sisimne, like an ass ; asin-us, an ass 
 
 m a r - i n u s, marine ; m a r - e, the sea. 
 
 crystall-inus, crystalline; crystall-um, crystal. 
 
 8. -anus, with names of towns ending in a or ce, a native of such 
 place. 
 
 B/Om-anus, a Roman ; Roma, Rome. 
 
 9. -OS us, -lentus, with noun-stems, fulness, abundance (like the 
 English -ous). 
 
 fam-osus, famous; fam-a, fame. 
 
 vino-lentus, drunken; vin-um, wine. 
 
 (792.) Second Class, is, is, e. 
 
 1. -i s, quality in, general (coexisting commonly with noun and verb 
 forms). 
 
 lev -is, light; lev-are, lev-itas. 
 
 2. -ilis, -bxlis, with verb-stems, the quality of the verb, or the 
 capacity of it, in two senses, (a) active and (J) passive. 
 
 [a) t e r r i - b 1 1 i s, exciting terror ; t e r r - ere, to terrify. 
 (i) doc-ilis, docile; doc-Sre, to teach. 
 
 amab-ilis, amiable ; a m - a r e, to love. 
 
 3. -ilis (i long), with noun-stems, belonging or relating to a thing. 
 
 c i V - 1 1 i s, belonging to a citizen, civil ; c i v - i s, citizen. 
 host-ilis, hostile; hos-tis, enemy. 
 
 [Observe that ilis, with verb-stems, is short ; with noun-'stems, long.} 
 
 4. -alis, -aris, withjioun-stems, of or belonging to. 
 
 conviv-alis, convivial; conviv-a. 
 
 capit-alis, capital; caput, 
 
 consul-aris, consular; consul. 
 
 5. -e n s i s, with names of towns — a native of such town. 
 
 Cann-ensis, an inhabitant of Cannae. 
 Arimin-ensis, an inhabitant o/" Ariminum. 
 
WORD-BUILDIN€, 337 
 
 (793.) Third Class, one ending. 
 -ax, with verb-stems, the tendency of the verb, generally in a bad 
 
 pugn-ax, pugnacious; pugn-are, tofigkt. 
 
 rap-ax, rapacious; rap-6re, to seize, 
 
 (C.) Verbs. 
 (794.) First Conjugation. 
 
 1. -are, generally a transitive ending, with noun-stems. 
 
 numer-are, to count ; numer-us, number. 
 
 nomin-are, to name; nomen (nomin-is), name. 
 
 2. Frequentative verbs, expressing a repetition or increase of the 
 action of the original verb, are formed by the endings -are and 
 -it are ; thus : 
 
 (a) -are, added to supine-stems, 
 c u r s - a r e, to run to and fro ; currfire (c u r s - u m), to run. 
 dormlt-are, to be sleepy ; dormire (dormit-um), to sleep. 
 
 (J) -It are, added to verb-stems, 
 rog-itare, to ask often; rog-ftre, to ask. 
 
 vol-itare, to fly to and fro ; vol-are, to fly. 
 
 3. -ftri, deponent-ending, with noun-stems, is much used for express- 
 ing " to be that which, or of the character that," the noun indicates. 
 
 »^ . . {to attend as com- \ , .^ . x 
 
 comit-ari, < > comes (comit-is), com»a7i^on; 
 
 \ panion ; ) n i- 
 
 domin-ari, to rule as master ; ^.o-min-Tia, master. 
 
 (795.) Second Conjugation. 
 
 -ere, frequently an intransitive ending, with noun and adjective stems. 
 
 alb-ere, to be white; alb-us, white. 
 
 luc-ere, to shine ; lux (luc-is), light. 
 
 (796.) Third Conjugation. 
 Inchoative verbs express the beginning or increase of the action of 
 the verb from which they are derived. They are formed by adding 
 sc to the verb-stem, with the connecting-vowels a, e, or i. Most of 
 them are formed on stems of verbs of second conjugation. 
 
 pallesc-6re, to grow pale ; pall-6re, to be pale. 
 
 labasc-6re, to totter ; lab-are, toicaver. 
 
 (797.) Fourth Conjugation. * 
 
 Desidbrative verbs express a desire of that which is implied in the 
 primitive, and are formed by adding -urire to supine-stems, 
 e s • ii r I r e. to want to eat ; edSre (e s -u m), to eat. 
 
 Ff 
 
338 WORD-BUILDING 
 
 (ll.) WORD-BUILDING BY PREFIXES. 
 
 (798.) Under this head we place only the inseparable prepositions (229), 
 viz., amb-, dis- (di-), re-, se. 
 
 1. Arah- = about, around, on both sides; e. g., amb -Ire, to go 
 round (amb+ire). 
 
 E^^ Before js> the b is dropped; e. 5-., am -p lector: before c-sounds 
 amb is changed into an; e. §•., an-ceps, an-quiro. 
 
 2. Dis {dil) = asunder ; e.^.,dis-jung6re, to disjoin (dis+jungere), 
 ^p" Di is used before d, g, I, m ; e. g., digerere, &c. Before/ the 
 
 s is assimilated; e.g., differre (dis+ferre). 
 
 3. II 6 = back, again, away, un- ; e. g'., r 6 p e 1 1 e r e, drive-back (re+ 
 pellere) ; r e f i c e r e, refit (re+facere). 
 
 j^* Before vowels, d is inserted ; e. g'., red-Ire (re+irey. 
 [Be long occurs only in r e f e r t.] 
 
 4. S 6 = {fside ; e. g., s e d u c § r e, lead asiragj seduce ^s©+dticere) j 
 s €p o n d r e, lay aside (se-fponere). 
 
 (ill.) WORD-BUILDING BY COMPOSITION. 
 
 I. Prepositions in Composition with other Words. 
 (799.) %^ Most prepositions are used to form compound words, and 
 generally modify their meaning in a way easily understood ; e. g-., s t ar e, 
 to stand; praestare, to stand before, to cxcd. We notice here only 
 those which present some peculiarities. 
 
 1. a, ab, abs = atvay, from, (a) a is used before m and v; e.g., 
 a-mittere, to send away, lose; a-vertere, turn away. (5) au is 
 used before f err e andfuggre: auferre, aufugfire. (c) as, be- 
 fore p or s^ ; asperto, aspernor. 
 
 2. ad = fo. (a) Assimilated before consonants, except d,j, v, m ; e.g., 
 arripere, assurggre, adduc6re, &c. (b) d dropped before 
 gn ; e. g*., agnoscere, agnatus, 
 
 3. con (a variation of cum) = with, (a) co before h and vowels ; e. g., 
 co-ortus, co-hibere. {b) com before b, p:* com-bur6re, 
 com-pell6re. (c) Assimilated before /, w, r .• col-lig6re, com- 
 movere, cor-rip6re. 
 
 4. e or eyi = out of. {a) Assimilated before /; e. g., effero (ex+ 
 fero). {b) e before liquids and b, d, g, v. 
 
 5 in, with verbs = mto, on, in, against ; with, adjectives has privative 
 force; e. g., doc t us, learned; indoctus, unlearned. 
 
 (a) Assimilated before I, r, e.g., illatum (in-f-latum) ; irrum 
 " ' p8re (in+rumpere). 
 
 * And sometimes before vowels : comedere. 
 
WORD-BUILDING. 339 
 
 (b) Changed into im before b, p; e.g., imbibSre (in+bibere); 
 imponere (in+ponere). 
 
 6. ob = jxgainst ; e. g., obtrudSre (ob + trudere), thrust against. 
 5^° Assimilated before c, f, p; e.g., oc-cidere (ob+cadere) j 
 of-ferre, op-ponere. 
 
 7. ^ro= forth, forward; e. g., projicSre (pro+jacere), cast forth. 
 1^=" Before vowels, d is inserted ; e. g., prod-esse (pro+esse), 
 
 8. ipr^ — before; e. g., praecedere (prse+cedere), to go before, to 
 surpass. 
 
 9. Bnh=: under, from under; e. g., snhdac&re, to draw from under. 
 (a) Genei-ally assimilated; e.g., suni-;movSre, snp-ponere, &c. 
 {b) Sometimes ans-'; c. g., sns-cipore, sus-tinere, &c. 
 
 10. trans = across, over; e. g., transducers, to lead across. 
 ^p° Tra, instead of trans, occurs in tradere, traducgre, trft- 
 jic6re. 
 
 (800.) II. Adverbs in Composition with other Words. 
 
 \. n§, v6, have a privative force ;, e. g., nefas, wicked (ne+fas) ; 
 
 ve s anus, insane (ve+sanus). 
 8. ben6, well; male, ill; satis, eno^igh; e. g., beneficium, a 
 
 good deed; malieficium, an evil deed; satisfacere, to satisfy 
 
 (= to do enough). 
 3. bis (and other numerals), twice (thrice), &c. : bicorpor, two-bad- 
 
 ied (bis+corp-us). 
 
 (801.) III. Nouns and Adjectives in Camposition with other Words, 
 ^^ When a noun or adjective is compounded with another word, 
 the connecting vowel is always short i. 
 
 agri-cola (agr-+col-), a husbandman. 
 arti-fex (art-+fac-), an artificer. 
 
 (802.) IV. Verbs in Composition with other Words. 
 
 None occur, except in composition with facere ; e.g'., calefacere 
 (calere+facere), to make hot; pate fa cere (patere+facere), to 
 lay open. 
 [ ^^ Observe that the vowel « in facere remains unchanged.] 
 (803.) V. Common Vowel-changes in Composition. 
 
 1. a into i; e.g., arripere (ad+rapere), conficere (con+fa 
 cere), constituere (con+statuere), &c. 
 
 2. a into e (more rarely) ; e. g., ascendere (ad+scandere). 
 
 3. e into i (not always); e. g., colligfire (con+legere), absti 
 nere (abs + tenere), &c. 
 
 4. (B into i; e. g., occidQre (ob+coedere), r6quir6rQ (re-h 
 quaerere). 
 
READING LESSONS. 
 
 I. 
 
 Gallia est omnis divisa^ in partes tres. — Belgae unam inco- 
 lunt f Aquitani alteram ; Celtae tertiam. — Hi, ipsorum* lingua^ 
 Celt as* appellantur ;^ nostra* lingua, Galli.* 
 
 Gallia est omnis divisa in partes tres ; q u a r u m unam inco- 
 lunt Belgae, alteram Aquitani, tertiam qui^ ipsorum lingua 
 Celtae, nostra Galli appellantur. 
 
 Hi omnes inter se differunt J — Lingua, institutis,^ legibus dif- 
 ferunt. — Garumna^ flumen Gallos ab Aquitanis dividit. — Ma- 
 trona flumen Gallos a Belgis dividit. — Horum omnium^" fortis- 
 simi sunt Belgae. — Ab humanitate^^ Provincise longe absunt.^^ — 
 A cultu^^ Provinciae longissime absunt. — Minime ad eos merca- 
 tores^^ commeant. — Quaedam^^ animos effeminant.*^ — Qusedam 
 ad efFeminandos animos pertinent.^^ 
 
 Hi omnes lingua, institutis, legibus, inter se difFerunt. — Gallos 
 ab Aquitanis Garumna flumen, a Belgis Matrona e t Sequana 
 dividit. — Horum omnium fortissimi sunt Belgae, propterea 
 quod a cultu at que humanitate Provinciae longissime ab- 
 sunt, minime q u e ad eos mercatores saepe commeant, a t q u e 
 «ea, quae ad efieminandos animos pertinent,^^ important.** 
 
 Proximi sunt Germanis.^^ — Germani trans Rhenum incolunt. 
 — Belgse cum Germanis continenter^^ bellum gerunt. 
 
 1 435, c— 3 in-fcolere.— 3 716.— 4 694, 2, R.—^ ad+pellare (obsolete), 
 799, 2, a.— 6 167, d, 4.-7.798, f^.—^7BQ, 2, institaere = in+statuere, 
 803, 1.-9 225, a.— 10 697, «.— ^ 788, 1 (humanus), humanitas = refinement. 
 — 12 ab+sum, 799, 1. — 13 cultas (civilization), from colere (cult-), 789.— 
 14 mercator, from mercari (mercat-), 788, 2, b. — 1° Some things. — 16 effeminare 
 (to make effeminate), ex-j-feminare, 799, 4, a : feminare, from femina (wom- 
 an), 794, 1. — 17 tend to make minds effeminate, 739. — is per-|-tenei*e, 803 » 
 3. — 19 in-f-portare, 799, 5, b. — 20 704, 4. — ^21 from continens (con-}-tenere) 
 215, 2, b. 
 
 * Ipsorum and nostra precede lingui, instead of following it, becaose op 
 posed to each other, and therefore emphatic. 
 
READING LESSONS. 341 
 
 Proximi sunt Germanis, qui trans Rhenura incolunt, qui 
 b u s c u m 23 continenter bellum gerunt. 
 
 II. 
 
 Helvetii quoque^ reliquos^ Gallos virtute^ praecedunt.^ — Fere 
 quotidianis prseliis cum Germanis contendunt. — Aut^ suis finibus 
 Germanos prohibent,^ aut ipsi in eorum finibus bellum gerunt. 
 
 Qua'' de causa^ Helvetii quoque reliquos Gallos virtute 
 prsecedunt, q u o d ^ fere quotidianis praeliis cum Germanis con- 
 tendunt, quum aut suis finibus eos prohibent, aut ipsi in eorum 
 finibus beUum gerunt. 
 
 Galli unam partem obtanent.^° — Unam partem Gallos^ ^ obti- 
 nere dictum est.^^ — Ea pars initium capit a flumine Rhodano. 
 — Continetur Garumna flumine,^^ Oceano,^" finibus^^ Belgarum. 
 — Attingit^'' ab Sequanis flumen Rhenum. — Vergit ad Septen- 
 triones. — Belgse ab extremis^^ GaUiae finibus oriuntur. — Perti- 
 nent^^ ad inferiorem partem fluminis Rheni. — Spectant* in 
 Septentriones et orientem^'' solem. 
 
 Eorum una pars, q u a m ^^ Gallos obtinere dictum est, ini- 
 tium capit a flumine Rhodano ; continetur^^ Garumna flumine, 
 Oceano, finibus Belgarum ; attingit etiam ab^o Sequanis et 
 Helvetiis flumen JRhenum ; vergit ad Septentriones. — Belgae 
 ab extremis Gallise finibus oriuntur ; pertinent ad inferiorem 
 partem fluminis Rheni; spectant in Septentriones et orientem 
 solem. 
 
 Aquitania a Garumna flumine ad Pyrengeos montes pertinet. 
 — Una pars Oceani est ad^o Hispaniam. — Aquitania ad eam 
 
 22 125, IL, h. 
 
 1 duo que never begins a sentence.— 2 from relinquere (reliqu-), 791, 1. 
 --3 718, in valour.—'*^ 799, 8.-5 519, R. 4.-6 721.— 7 89, II.— 8 aua de cau- 
 sa =/or which reason. — 9 because. — ^o ob-f-tenere, 803, 3. — n 751. — 12 751^ 
 R. 2.— 13 716.— 14 ad-ftangere, 799, 2, a, 803, 1.— 15 78, IL, Z>.— 16 Pertinent 
 -= they extend, per+tenere. — i^ 438, a. — is 759. — 19 is bounded. — 20 on the 
 side of, or near. 
 
 * Spectant in Septentriones, &c. : they look into the north and the rising grtn^ 
 I. e., Oiaj lie in a N.E. direction. 
 
 F r2 
 
842 READING LESSONS. 
 
 partem Oceani, quae est ad Hispauiam, pertinet.— Spectat inter 
 occasum^^ solis et Septentiiones. 
 
 Aquitania a Garumna flumine ad Pyrenaeos montes, e t e a m 
 partem Oceani, q u se est ad Hispaniam, pertinet ; spectat* in- 
 ter occasmn solis et Septentriones. 
 
 III. 
 
 Orgetorix nobilis fuit. — Apud Helvetios nobUissimus fmt 
 Orgetorix. — Apud Helvetios longe ditissimus^ fuit Orgetorix. — 
 Is regni cupiditate^ inductus conjurationem^ nobilitatis^ fecit. — 
 Is civitati^ persuadet, ut de finibus suis exeant.^ — De finibus suis 
 exeunt. — Perfacile erat totius Gallias imperio'^ potiri. — Perfacilo 
 esse^ (dixit), quum virtute omnibus prsestarent,^ totius Gallise 
 imperio potiri. 
 
 Apud Helvetios longe nobilissimus et ditissimus fuit Orget- 
 orix. — Is, Marco Messala et Marco Pisone consul- 
 ibus,^° regni cupiditate inductus, conjurationem nobilitatis fecit; 
 et civitati persuasit, ut de finibus suis cum omnibus copiis 
 exirent:^^ perfacile esse (dixit), quum vhtute omnibus prsBS- 
 tai-ent, totius Galliee imperio potiri. 
 
 Id facile eis persuadet.^^ — j^ Jjqc facilius eis persuasit — Un- 
 dique natura loci^^ Helvetii continentur. — Una ex parte conti- 
 nentur flumine Rheno latissimo atque altissimo. — Altera ex 
 parte continentur monte Jura altissimo ; tertia ex parte lacu 
 Lemanno et flumine Rhodano. — Flumen Rhenus agrum Hel- 
 vetium a Germanis dividit. — Mens Jura est inter Sequanos et 
 Helvetios. — Flumen Rhodanus provinciam nostram ab Helve- 
 
 tiis dividit. 
 
 • 1 — 
 
 21 789, from occidere, ob+cadere. 
 
 1 371, R. 1.— 2 from cupid-us, by 788, 1.— 3 788, 3, con+jurare.— * 788, 1. 
 
 — 5 704, 2: he persuades the state; i. e., the citizens. — ^ ut exeant = 2;o go 
 
 out of: subj. pres., 754 (ex+ire).— '' abl., 718. — ^ The sentence peifacile 
 
 esse, &c., is in orat. obliqua; 769, a, applies.— 9 799, 8. — 1° 458, 6.— ^ Why 
 
 is exirent in subj. imperf. ? 748. — 12 guadere, to recommend ; persuadere, 
 
 recommeyid thoroughly, i. e., persuade. — ^^ by the nature of the country. 
 
 * It looks between the setting of the sun and the north ; i, e., in a N.W. directimi 
 
READING LESSONS. 343 
 
 .1* Id hoc fiicilius eis peisuadet, quod undique loci natura Hel- 
 retii continentm- ; una ex parte, flumine Rheno latissimo atque 
 ftltissimo, q u i agi-um Helvetium a Germanis dividit ; altera ex 
 parte, monte Jura altissimo, qui est inter Sequanos et Helve- 
 tios; tertia, lacu Lemanno et flumine Rhodano, qui provin- 
 ciam nostram ab Helvetiis dividit. 
 
 Minus late vagantur. — His rebus fit,^* ut minus late vagen- 
 tur.15 — ^Bellum inferunt.^^ — Bellum inferred'' possunt. — Minus 
 facile bellum finitimis^^ inferre possunt.— His rebus fit, ut minus 
 facile bellum finitimis infen-e possent. — Magno dolore afficie- 
 bautur.^^ — BellandJ^o erant cupidi.^^ 
 
 His rebus fiebat, ut e t minus late vagarentur,' e t minus 
 facile finitimis bellum inferre possint. — Qua de causa, homines 
 bellandi cupidi magno dolore afficiebantur. 
 
 IV. 
 
 Pro^ multitudine^ hominum, angustos habebant fines. — Pro 
 gloria^ belli atque fortitudinis,^ angustos habebant fines. — An- 
 gustos se* fines habere arbitrabantur.^ — Hi (i. c, fines) millia 
 passuum ducenta (CC) patebant.^ — Hi in longitudinem^ millia'' 
 passuum ducenta et quadraginta (XL.) patebant. 
 
 Pro multitudine autem^ hominum, et pro gloria belli 
 atque fortitudinis, angustos se fines habere arbitrabantur, qui 
 in longitudinem millia passuum CCXL., in latitudinem 
 centum et octo^ta (CLXXX.) patebant. 
 
 Ducti sunt. — Adducti^ sunt. — Moti sunt. — Permoti^" g^nt. — 
 Auctoritate^^ Orgetorigis adducti et permoti sunt. — Qusedam ad 
 proficiscendum^2 pertinent. — Constituerunt^^ ea comparare.^^ — 
 Constituerunt jumenta et cari-os emere.^^ — Constituerunt se- 
 
 1* By these circumstances it is brought about. — ^^ 754^ 2. — 16 in+ferre. — 
 17 731.— 18 704, 3.— 19 ad+facere, 799, 2 ; 803, 1.— 20 736.^21 cnpere, 791, 2. 
 
 1 For, or, in view of. — 2 mult-us, 788, 4. — 3 reputation for war and cour- 
 age.—* 471.— 5 from arbit-er, by 794, 3.-6 extended— ^ 712.— 8 522, b.— 
 9 Ducti stint=^^e;y were led: adducti isunt=i;^^ were led to, i. e., they 
 were induced. — 1° Moti sunt = tfiey were moved : permoti sunt = they were 
 thoroughly moved, i. e., prevailed upon. — n 788, 1. — ^^ 487. — 13 con-j-stata- 
 ere, 803, 1.— i^ con+parare, 799, 3, 6.— is 731. 
 
344 READING LESSONS. 
 
 mentes magnas faceie,^^ ^^ in itinere copia trumenti suppet- 
 eret.^'' — Cum proximis civitatibus pacem et amicitiam^* con- 
 firmant. 
 
 His rebus adducti, e t auctoritate Orgetorigis permoti, 
 constituerunt, ea, q u ae ^^ ad proficiscendum pertinerent, com- 
 parare ; j umentonim et carrorum quam maximum nu- 
 m e r u m 2" coemere ;2' sementes quam maximas^^ facere, ut 
 in itinere copia frumenti suppeteret ; cum proximis civitatibus 
 pacem et amicitiam confirmare. 
 
 Biennium Helvetiis^^ satis erat. — Biennium sibi^^ Helvetii satis 
 esse duxerunt.^ — Ad eas res conficiendas^^ biennium satis erat. 
 — Profectionem'^s jgge confirmant.^^ — In tertium annum profec- 
 tionem lege confirmant. — Ad eas res conficiendas*^ Orgetorix 
 deligitm'.28 — Is sibi legationem^^ suscepit.^^ — In eo itinere per- 
 suadet Castico. — Casticus Catamantaledis erat filius, Sequanus. 
 — Pater Castici regnum in Sequanis multos annos^° obtinuerat. 
 — Pater Castici a senatu populi Romani amicus appellatus erat. 
 — Orgetorix Castico persuadet, ut regnum in civitate sua occu- 
 paret.3^ 
 
 Ad eas res conficiendas biennium sibi satis esse duxerunt; 
 in tertium annum profectionem lege confirmant. Ad eas res 
 conficiendas Orgetorix deligitur. Is sibi legationem ad civi- 
 tates suscepit. In eo itinere persuadet Csistico, Catamantale- 
 cis filio, Sequano, cujus pater regnum in Sequanis multos 
 annos obtinuerat, eta senatu populi Romani amicus appellatus 
 erat, ut regnum in civitate sua occuparet, q u o d ^^ pater ante 
 habuerat. 
 
 V. 
 Item Dumnorigi persuadet. — Dumnorix erat iEduus. — 
 Dumnorix erat frater Divitiaci. — Dumnorix principatum^ in 
 
 16 to make great sowings, i. e., to sow much land. — i'' Sub+petere, 799, 
 9, a, neuter; suppeteret =w«g'/ii be in store: subjunc. by 754, 1. — is 735, 2. 
 — 19 759, Rem. — ^20 j^g great a number as possible. — 21 con+emere, to buy 
 together, to buy up, 799, 3. — 22 ^5 great sowings as possible. — 23 704.- 
 2* reckoned.—^ 498, d.—'^^ 788, 3.-27 Tliey fix the depaHure by a law 
 « de+legere, 803, 3.-29 799, 9, Z>.— 3° 712.— 3l 754.-32 759. 
 
 1 chief power, from princeps. 
 
READING LESSONS. 345 
 
 civitate obtinebat. — Dumnorix plebi* acceptus' erat. — Dum- 
 norigi, ut idem conaretur persuadet,* eique filiam suam in 
 matrimonium dat. 
 
 Item que Dumnorigi ^duo, fratri Divitiaci, qui eo tern- 
 pore'' priocipatum in civitate obtinebat, ac maxime^ plebi ac 
 ceptus erat, ut idem conaretur persuadet, eique filiam suam in 
 matrimonium dat. 
 
 Perfaci]e factu^ erat conata perficere.''' — Ipse suae civitatis 
 imperium obtenturus erat. — Totius^ GalliaB plurimum Helvetii 
 possunt. — Non est dubium quin plurimum Helvetii possint.9 — 
 Ipse illis regnum conciliaturus'° erat. — Ipse, suis copiis suoque 
 exercitu, illis regnum conciliatm-us erat. 
 
 {Oblique Narration, 769.) " Perfacile factu esse," illis 
 pro bat, "conata perficere, propterea quod ipse suae 
 civitatis imperium obtenturus esset ; non esse dubium, quin 
 totius Gallise plurimum Helvetii possent;" " Se, suis copiis 
 suoque exercitu, illis regna conciliaturum," confirm at. 
 
 Helvetii jam^^ se^^ ad eam rem paratos esse arbitrantur. — 
 Oppida sua omnia, numero ad duodecim,^^ incendunt. — Vices 
 sues ad quadringentos incendunt. — Reliqua^^ privata eedificia^* 
 incendunt. — Frumentum secum portaturi erant. — Frumentum 
 omne comburunt. — Domum^^ reditionis^'' spes sublata^^ est. — 
 Paratiores ad omnia pericula subeunda^^ erant. 
 
 U b i 20 jam se ad eam rem paratos esse arbitrati sunt, oppida 
 sua omnia, numero ad duodecim, vices ad quadringentos, reliqua 
 privata gedificia incendunt ; frumentum omne, praeter quod 
 secum portaturi erant, comburunt, ut, domum reditionis spe^^ 
 sublata,^^ paratiores ad omnia pericula subeunda e s s e n t.^^ 
 
 2 702, was acceptable to the common people (a favourite). — 3 ad+capere, 
 803, 1.— 4 725.-5 376.-6 330. It was a very easy thing to do.—'' to ac- 
 complish, per + facere, 803, 1. — 8 Qf the whole of Gaul, the Helvetians 
 are the most powerful. — "^ 754, 4. — 10 446. — ^ ^axa = at last.—i-^ 751. — 13 in 
 number (amounting) to twelve. — i* relinquere. — i'"' 801, cedes + facere.—^ 
 16 713, Rem. 2.-17 738, 3. — is toll ere. — i^ sub+ire, gerundive, 739.— 
 20 when.-^^ 750.— 22 754, 
 
 * Csesar often uses the historical present, as in this instance, instead of the per- 
 fect aorist. If persuadet, were used really as the present, then conaretur 
 would have to he conetur, hy 748; but, as the historical present, it requires a 
 past tense in the subordinate sentence. 
 
346 READING LESSONS. 
 
 VI. 
 
 Omnes res ad profectionem comparant — Diem dicunt^ qua 
 die omnes conveniant.^ — Is dies erat ante diem quintmn Kalen- 
 das^ Aprilis, Lucio Pisone, Aulo Gabinio consulibus. — Is dies 
 erat a. d. V. Kal. Apr., L. Pisone, A. Gabinio Coss. 
 
 Omnibus rebus^ ad profectionem comparatis, diem dicunt, 
 qua die ad ripam RHodani omnes conveniant : is dies erat 
 ante diem quintum Kalendas Aprilis, Lucio Pisone, Aulo Gabi- 
 nio Consulibus. 
 
 Helvetii per provinciam nostram itei-^ facere conautur. — Id 
 Csesari nuntiatum erat.— Csesari nuntiatum erat, eos per pro- 
 vinciam nostram iter facere^ conari.'^ — Maturat ab urbe profi- 
 cisci,^ et magnis itineribus in Galliam contendit, et ad Genevam 
 pervenit. — De ejus adventu^ Helvetii certiores facti sunt. — 
 Legates ad eum mittimt. — Helvetiis est in animo^ sine ullo 
 maleficio^^ iter per provinciam facere ; aliud iter habent nuilura ; 
 Togant, ut, Caesaris voluntate, id facere liceat.^^ 
 
 Csesari q u u m id nuntiatum esset,^^ eos per provinciam 
 nostram iter facere conari,''^ maturat ab urbe proficisci, et q u a m 
 m a X i m i s potest itineribus, in Galliam u 1 1 e r i o r e m con- 
 tendit, et ad Genevam pervenit. Ubi de ejus adventu Hel- 
 vetii certiores facti sunt, legates ad eum mittunt," qui d i c e - 
 rent,^* '■'■ sihi^'" esse in animo sine ullo maleficio iter per provin- 
 ciam facere,, propterea quod aliud iter haheant nullum ; 
 rogare, ut ejus voluntate id sibi facere liceat.^^ 
 
 Lucius Cassius, consul, ab Helvetiis occisus erat. — Exer- 
 citus^e <:;assii ab Helvetiis pulsus^'' erat, et sub jugum missus. — • 
 Ea Caesar memoria^^ tenebat. — Concedendum^^ non putabat. — 
 Facultas™ per provinciam itineris faciendi^^ non data est. — 
 
 1 Tliei/ appoint. — 2 con+venire ; subj. pres., 766. — 3 78-2, 5. — ^^ 750. — & iter 
 ia.cere=-to make journey •=■ to march. — ^ 731. — '' 751. — » advenire (advent-), 
 789.-^ 468, *.— 10 800, 2.— n 754.— 12 757, A. 2.— 13 historical present. 
 — '4 761* 1. — 15 oblique narration. — 16 exercere, 789. — ^^ pellere. — ^^ me- 
 moria tenebat, held in mevioi-y, i. e., rememhered. — ^9 737 (esse understood, 
 504, a). — ^20 power of marchirig thronc;li, or permission to march through 
 facultas, 788, 1, from facil-is, facio.— 21 496. 
 
READING LESSONS. 347 
 
 Homines inimico^^ animo ab injuria et maleficio non tem- 
 perant. 
 
 Csesar, quod memoria tenebat, L. Cassium consulem occi- 
 5um, exercituraque ejus ab Helvetiis pulsum et sub jugum 
 missum, concedendum non putabat; neque,2=^ homines inim- 
 ico animo, data facultate per provinciam itineris faciendi, tem- 
 peratures ab injuria^* et maleficio, existimabat. 
 
 VII. 
 
 Hujus legationis Divico princeps fuit. — Divico, bello Cassi- 
 ano,^ dux Helvetiorum fuerat.— Is ita cum Csesare egit.^^ — Hel- 
 vetii in earn partem ibunt, atque ibi erunt, ubi Caesar constitu- 
 etrit.^ — Caesar veteris incommodi* reminiscitur.^ — Caesar pristinae 
 virtutis*^ Helvetiorum reminiscitur. 
 
 {Oblique Narration, present time.'') Is ita cum Caesare 
 a git: '■'■ Si pacem populus Romanus cum Helvetiis facial,^ 
 in earn partem ituros^ atque ihi futures^ Helvetios, uhi eos 
 Ccesar constituerit atque esse voluerit ; sin hello per- 
 sequi persevere i,^° r eminisca'tur'^^ et veteris incommodi 
 populi Romani et pristinee virtutis Helvetiorum. 
 
 Hujus legationis Divico princeps fuit, qui bello Cassiano dux 
 Helvetiorum fuerat. Is ita cum Caesare egit (obi. nwcv., past 
 time) : " Si pacem populus Romanus cum Helvetiis fa ceret^ 
 in earn partem ituros, atque ibifuturos Helvetios, uhi Ccesar eos 
 constituisset atque esse voluisset ; sin hello persequi 
 per s ever ar et, reminisc eretur et veteris incommodi 
 populi Romani et pristinee virtutis Helvetiorum.^'' 
 
 23 722. — ssneque existimabat = wor did he think. — 24 outrage. 
 
 1 In the Cassian war, i. e., in which Cassius had been the Roman gen- 
 eral. — 2 Hq treated with Ccesar as foUotos. — ^ 803, 1 ; subj. by 766. — 4 in, 
 conomodum, disaster, in+commodus, 799, 5 ; con+modiis, 799, 3, c ; geni- 
 tive by 698, a, 2. — ^ re+miniscor, stem of memini, meno. — 6 vir, gen., 698, 
 a, 2. — 7 Observe carefully the tenses in this and the following paragraph. 
 — * If the Roman people will mahe peace.— ^ 484, a. — lo 542^ 6.— if -528 b 
 
348 
 
 READING LESSOIVS. 
 
 His Ceesar ila^^ respondet. — Csesari nihil dubitationis^^ datur.** 
 — Legati Helvetii quasdam res commemoraverunt.^^ — Eas res 
 Caesar in raemoiia tenet.^^ — -^qU Caesari minus dubitationis 
 datur, quod eas res, quas legati Helvetii commemoraverunt, in 
 memoria tenet.— Eas res graviter^^ fert.^^ — Eae res non merito^ 
 popuH Romani acciderunt.^^ — Eas res graviter fert, quod non 
 merito populi Romani acciderunt. — Eo^^ gravius fert, quo^ 
 minus merito Populi Romani acciderunt. 
 
 His Caesar ita respond et^^ {oblique narration, present 
 time) : '■'■ Eo sibi minus dubitationis dari, qv^d eas res, quas 
 legati Helvetii commemoraverint, memoria teneat : 
 atque eo gravius ferre, quo minus merito populi Romani 
 acciderint." 
 
 His Caesar ita respondit {oblique narration, past time) : 
 *^ Eo sibi minv£ dubitationis dari, quod eas res, quas legati 
 Helvetii commemorassent, memoria teneret : atque eo 
 gravius ferre, quo minus merito populi Romani acci- 
 dissent.^* 
 
 vni. 
 
 Helvetii postSro die^ castra ex eo loco movent. — Idem^ Caesar 
 facit. — Quas in partes^ hostes iter faciunt 1^ — ^Equitatum^ omnem 
 praemittit.^ — Hi videbunt, quas in partes hostes iter faciant.'^ — 
 Equitatus ex omni Provincia et ^duis atque eorum sociis coac- 
 tus^ erat. — Hunc equitatum praemittit, qui videant,^ quas in 
 partes hostes iter faciant.''' — Hi cupidius^" novissimum^^ agmen 
 insequuntur.^^ — Cum equitatu Helvetiorum prcelium commit- 
 
 13 as follows. — ^3 788, 3, dubitare (dubitat-). — ^^ To Ccesar noiking of 
 doubt is given =C<Bsar has no doubt. — i^ con + memorare (memor). — 
 16 holds in memory, i. e., remembers. — '''' On this account Ceesar has less 
 doubt, because. — '^ 215, 2, a. — 19 ferre graviter =^o bear heavily, to be in- 
 dignant at.—'^ 73 6.— 21 accadere = ad+cadere, 803, 1, to happen.— ^"^ By 
 so much. — 23 l,y how much. — ^24 Observe the moods and tenses carefully in 
 this and the following paragraph of oblique narration. 
 
 1 725.-2 150.— 3 Into what parts (of the country) ?— •* 765.-5 Equitare 
 (equitat-), 789. — 6 795, 8. — ^ 766. — » fiad been collected; cogere = con+ag- 
 ere.— 9 who may see, i. e., to see, 761, 1.— 10 too eagerly, adv., 376.— n novis- 
 simum agmen = the 7iewest rank, i. e., the rear rank. — 12 in+sequi 
 
READING LESSONS. &«d 
 
 tunt. — Alieno^3 Iqco proelium committunt. — Pauci de nostris 
 eadimt. 
 
 Postero die castra ex eo loco movent: idem Caesar facit; 
 equitatumque omnem ad numerum quattuormillium, 
 quern ex omni provincia et ^Eduis atque eorum sociis coactum 
 h a b e b a t, praemittit, qui videant quas in partes hostes iter faci- 
 ant. — Qui, cupidius novissimum agmen insecuti,^^ alieno loco 
 cum equitatu Helvetiorum proelium committunt, et pauci de 
 nostris cadunt. 
 
 Hoc proelio sublati^^ sunt Helvetii. — Quingentis equitibus 
 tantam multitudinem equltum propulerant.^^ — Audacius^'' sub- 
 sistere^^ coeperunt. — Nonnunquam^^ et^ proelio^^ nostros laces- 
 sere coeperunt. • — Caesar sues a proelio continebat.^^ — Hostem 
 rapinis,^ pabulationibusque prohibere^^ volebat. — Hoc satis 
 habebat in praesentia.^ 
 
 Quo proelio sublati Helvetii, quod quingentis equitibus 
 tantam multitudinem equitum propulerant, audacius subsistere, 
 nonnunquam et novissimo agniine proelio nostros lacessere coep- 
 erunt. — Caesar sues a proelio continebat, ac satis habebat in 
 praesentia hostem rapinis pabulationibusque^^ prohibere. 
 
 IX. 
 
 Multa^ antehac tacuSrat^ Liscus. — Haec oratione^ Caesaris 
 adductus proponit^. — Sunt nonnulli,* quorum auctoritas apud 
 plebem plurimum^ valet. — Hi privatim"^ plus possunt^ quam ipsi 
 
 13 In a place not their own, i. e., on disadvantageous ground. — i* 451, c. — 
 15 sub-f-latus, irreg. perf. of tollere : the Helvetians were elated. — 16 tJi^y Jiad 
 driven off, pro-Hpellere. — " 376. — is to halt, sub-f-sistere ; inf., 731.— 19 non 
 +nunquam, not never, i. e., sometimes. — ^20 also. — 21 ly an assault. — 22 to 
 hold together, i. e., to restrain. — 23 721^ from plunder and from foraging 
 parties. — ^24 pro+liabere. — 25 ace. pi. of praesens ; in prsesentia (tempora), 
 for the present. — ^26 517^ a. 
 
 1 Many things, before this, Liscus had kept secret. — 2 tacgre, intrans = 
 to he silent ; trans = to keep secret. — ^ 788, 3, orare (orat). — ^ pro+ponere, 
 to set before, to relate. — ^ nonH-nullus, not none, i. e., some. — 6 plarimum 
 valet = avails very much (has very great weight). — 7 215, 3. — >8 pj^g pog, 
 Bunt = can more, i. e., Itave mxjre power. 
 
 Gg 
 
350 READING LESSONS. 
 
 magistratus.9— Hi seditiosa^o atque improbaV^ oratione multitu- 
 dinem deterrent.^- — Frumentum non conferunt.^^^ — Hi multitu- 
 dinem deterrent, ne frumentum conferant,^^ — Ipsi quidem prin- 
 cipatum Gallige obtinere non possunt. — Satius^^ est Galiorum 
 quam Romanorum imperia perfen-e.^^ 
 
 Si Helvetios superaverint^'' Romani, una^^ cum reliqua Gallia 
 ^duis libertatem eripient.^^ — Dubitare non debent, quin Roma- 
 ni ^duis libertatem sint erepturi.^o — Satius est si jam principa- 
 tum Galliae obtinere non possint, Galiorum quam Romanorum 
 imperia perferre. 
 
 Tum demum Liscus,^^ oratione Caesaiis adductus, quod antea 
 tacuerat proponit. — {Oratio obliqua) : "Esse nonnuUos, quorum 
 auctoritas apud plebem plurimum valeat; qui privatim plus 
 possint quam ipsi magistratus ; hos seditiosa atque improba 
 oratione multitudinem deterrere, ne frumentum conferant, 
 quod prsestare debeant. Si jam principatum Galliae obtinere 
 non possint, Galiorum quam Romanorum imperia perferre 
 satius esse, neque dubitai-e debere, quin si Helvetios super- 
 averint Romani, una cum reliqua Gallia iEduis libertatem sint 
 erepturi." 
 
 X. 
 
 Hac oratione Lisci, Dumnorix, Divitiaci frater, designabatur.^ 
 — Id Ceesar sentiebat.^ — Pluribus prsesentibus^ eas res jactari* 
 nolebat. — Celeriter'^ concilium dimittit ; Liscum retinet. — 
 QuBerit,^ ex solo,^ ea quge in conventu^ dixerat. — Dicit liberius^ 
 atque audacius.^ — Eadem secret©^" ab aliis quserit. — Reperit^^ 
 esse vera. 
 
 9 The magistrates themselves.— ^^^ 791, 9 (seditio).— ii in+probus, 799, 5.— 
 13 de+terrere.— 13 con+ferre, contribute. — '■* ne conferant, that they may 
 not contribute, i. e., deter \!a.Qxa.from contributing, 548, b. — i^ Satius, com- 
 -par. of satis, 376: it is better. — i^ per + ferre, to endure. — ^'' 542, b, 2. — 
 
 18 they will wrest liberty from the ^duans, together with the rest of Gaul. — 
 
 19 e+rapere, 803, 1.— 20 754, 4.— 21 Then, finally (then, and not till then). 
 
 1 was alluded to, de+signare. — ^ was aware of. — 3 750, many being 
 present, i, e., in the presence of many. — "* 794^ 2, a; from j acio (jact-) : 
 iactare = to toss to and fro; hence, to discuss. — ^ 215, 2. — ^ He inquires 
 into. — ■' ex solo =^ of him alone. — 8 789. — 9 376. — ^^ privately. — 11 He finds 
 (the siaienentsj are true. 
 
 i 
 
HEADING LESSONS. 351 
 
 Ipse est Dumnorix/^ summa audacia/^ magna apud plebem 
 propter liberalitatem gratia/'^ cupidus rerum^'^ novarum. — Com- 
 plures aiinos^^ portoria^^ reliquaque omnia ^duorum vectigalia 
 habet.— Hsec vectigalia parvo pretio^^ redemta sunt.^^ — Vecti- 
 galia-o parvo pretio redemta habet, propterea quod, illo^i licente,*^ 
 contra liceri^ audet nemo. — His rebus suam rem familiarem 
 auxit. — His rebus facultates^* ad largiendum^^ magnas compar- 
 avit. — Magnum numerum equitatus suo sumptn^*^ semper alit. — 
 Magnum numerum equitatus semper circum se habet. — Non 
 solum domi,^'^ sed etiam apud finitimas civitates largiter^ potest. 
 
 Caesar hac oratione Lisci Dumnorigem, Divitiaci fratrem, 
 designari sentiebat : sed, quod pluribus praesentibus eas res 
 jactari nolebat, celeriter concilium dimittit, Liscum retinet : 
 quaerit, ex solo, ea quae in conventu dixerat. Dicit liberius 
 atque audacius. Eadem secreto ab aliis quaerit; reperit esse 
 vera : " Ipsum esse Dumnorigem, summa audacia, magna apud 
 plebem propter liberalitatem gratia, cupidujn rerum novarum : 
 complures annos portoria reliquaque omnia iEduorum vectigalia 
 parvo pretio redemta habere, propterea quod illo licente contra 
 liceri audeat nemo. His rebus e t suam rem familiarem aux- 
 isse, et facultates ad largiendum magnas comparasse : magnum 
 numerum equitatus suo sumtu semper alere et circum se 
 habere : n e q u e solum domi, sed etiam apud finitimas civitates 
 iargiter posse." 
 
 XL 
 
 Ad has suspiciones certissimse res^ accedebant. — Dumnorix 
 per fines Sequanorum Helvetios trans duxerat.^ — Obsides inter 
 eos dandos^ curaverat. — Ea omnia jussu* Csesaris fecerat. — Ea 
 
 12 Dumnorix is the very person, (a man) of the highest audacity, Sec. — 
 13 722.— 14 influence.— ^^ 698, i.— 16 712.— i^ transit duties, custom duties. 
 — 18 719. — 19 were contracted for. — so vectigalia . . . habet, he holds the 
 taxes contracted for at a low price; i. e., holds them under a very favour-' 
 able contract. — 21 455, a, tohen he bids. — ^22 Hceor, liceri, to bid. — 2.3 731. 
 — ^24 Means for making largesses. — 25 489.-26 gao sumpta, at his own 
 expense. Samptus, 789, from sumere. — 27 736^ ^.^ ^t home. — 28 Iargiter 
 potest, he can largely, i. e., he has extensive paioer. 
 
 1 certissimae res = most certain for undoubted) facts. — accedebant = 
 were added ; ad+cedere, intransitive.^ — "^ trans-f-ducere. — ^ 504, a. — ^ 789 ; 
 from jubere ( juss-) : by the command, 716. 
 
362 READING LESSONS. 
 
 omnia injussu^ Caesaris et^ civitatis fecerat. — Ea omnia inscien- 
 tibus ipsis'^ fecerat. — Ea omnia non mo do injussu Caesaris et 
 civitatis, sed e tiam^inscientibus ipsis fecerat. — A magistratu^ 
 ^duorum accusabatur. — Satis est caussae,^ quare in eum ani- 
 madvertat.^o — Satis est caussas, quare in eum civitatem animad- 
 vertere jubeat. — Satis erat caussse, quare in eum aut ipse ani- 
 raadverteret, aut civitatem animadvertere juberet. — Satis esse^^ 
 caussae arbitrabatur. 
 
 Quibus rebus cogniti s/^ q u u m ^^ ad has suspiciones 
 certissiraae res accederent — quod per fines Sequanorum Hel- 
 vetios transduxisset^"* — q u o d obsides inter eos dandos curasset 
 — quod ea omnia non modo injussu suo et civitatis, sed etiam 
 inscientibus ipsis, fecisset — q u o d a magistratu jEduorum accu- 
 saretur; satis esse caussae arbitrabatur, quare in eum aut ipse 
 animadverteret, aut civitatem animadvertere juberet. 
 
 His omnibus rebus^^ unum repugnabat.'^s — Divitiaci fratris^' 
 summum in populum Romanum studium^*' cognoverat Caesar. 
 — Divitiaci summam in se voluntatem cognoverat. — Divitiaci 
 egregiam fidem, justitiam,^^ temperantiam,i^ cognoverat. — Dum- 
 norigis supplicio^" Divitiaci animum oflfendet. — Ne^^ Divitiaci 
 aniraum ofFendat, veretur.^ — Ne^^ Divitiaci animum offenderet, 
 verebatur. 
 
 His omnibus rebus unum repugnabat, quod Divitiaci fratris 
 summum in populum Romanum studium, summam in se vol- 
 untatem, egregiam fidem, justitiam, temperantiam cognoverat : 
 nam ne ejus supplicio Divitiaci animum offenderet, verebatur. 
 
 6 without the command ; in+jussu. — ^ The English idiom demands or 
 instead of and : without the command of Ccesar or the state. — "> themselves 
 not knowing- it, i. e., without the knowledge of Ctesar and the ^Eduan 
 government. — ^ Bi/ a magistrate, 93, II., b. — 9 697, b. — 1° in emn animad- 
 vertere, to animadvert upon him, i. e., to punish him. — ii 751, R. 2.— 
 ^2 Q,uibus rebus cognitis =^ Which things being known by inquiry, i. e., 
 after he had inquired into these things. — ^^ Since (seeing that), 757, A, b. 
 — 14 transduxisset, curasset, &c., are subjunctives, because they express, 
 not Caesar's own sentiments or knowledge, but what he had heard from 
 others : certissimtB res accederent. — ^^ 704, To all tliese considerations one 
 (thing) opposed itself. — ^^ re+pugnare. — i'' Of his brother Divitiacus.i. e., 
 the brother of Dumnorix. — is zeal. — 19 785, 2. — ^20 j^^ {fig punishment of 
 Dumnorix he will hurt the feelings of Divitiacus. — 21 veretur ne . . . 4e 
 fears that he shall. — ^22 verebatur ne . . . he feared that he should. 
 
READING LESSONS. 353 
 
 XII. 
 
 Caesar graviter^ in^ Dumnorigem statuet. — Divitiacus CaesS.- 
 
 rem complectitur Divitiacus multis^ cum lacrymis Csesarem. 
 
 complectitur. — Obsecrare incipit ne^ quid gravius^ in^ fratrem 
 statuat. — Scit Divitiacus ilia esse vera. — Nemo ex eo^ plus 
 quam Divitiacus doloris^ capit. — Divitiacus gratia^ plurimum 
 domi atque in reliqua Gallia poterat. — Dumnorix minimum^ 
 propter adolescentiam poterat. — Dumnorix per Divitiacum 
 crevit.^° — His opibus^^ ac nervis^^ ad minuendam'^^ gratiam Divit- 
 iaci Tititur. — His opibus ad perniciem^^ Divitiaci utitm-. — Qui- 
 bus opibus ac nervis non solum ad minuendam gratiam, sed 
 pene ad perniciem Divitiaci utitm-. — Divitiacus tamen et^^ 
 amore fraterno et existimatione^^ vulgi commovetur.^^ — Divit- 
 iacus summum locum amicitiae apud Caesarem tenet. — Nemo 
 existimabit non ejus voluntate factum.'^ — Ex hac re totius Gal- 
 liae animi a Divitiaco avertentur.^^ 
 
 {Direct Narration, Present Time.^) Scit Divitiacus ilia esse 
 vera, nee quisquam ex eo plus quam ipse doloris capit, 
 propterea quod, quum ipse gratia plurimum domi atque 
 in reliqua Gallia, ille minimum propter adolescentiam posset, 
 per se crevit ; quibus opibus ac nervis non solum ad minuendam 
 gratiam, sed pene ad perniciem ipsius utitur. Divitiacus tamen 
 et amore fraterno et existimatione vulgi commovetur, quod, 
 si^^ quid fratri a Caesare acciderit, quum^ ipse 
 t a 1 e m locum amicitiae apud eum teneat, nemo existimabit non 
 
 1 graviter statuet = 7«t7Z decide severely. — ^ against. — ^ 89, II. — ^ 548, a. 
 ^ quid gravius = anything more severe (than usual) : anything at all se- 
 vere. — ^ from him, i. e., Dumnorix. — ^ plus doloris, more pain, 697. — ^ jjy 
 his influence (popularity). — ^ minimum -poterat = had very little poicer. — 
 '0 crescere: grew (in power). — ^i resources. — 12 sinews, abl. by 716.— 
 '3 739, for diminishing the influence of Divitiacus. — i"* 790, 1. — 15 517^ c. 
 —16 existimare, 788, 3 : existimatione vulgi = by tlie opinion of the public. 
 —17 con-f-movere ; commovetur = is strongly moved. — is ]^q one will think 
 it was not done toith his (Divitiacus's) consent. — 19 a+vertere.- the affec' 
 tions of all Gaul will be turned away from him. — 20 Observe '•arefully 
 the moods and tenses in the following paragraphs of direct an. "jblique 
 narration. — 21 ^ anything happen to his brother from Ccesar.- \uum 
 ipse teneat, seeing that he himself holds. 
 
 Gg2 
 
354 BEADING LESSONS. 
 
 ejus ^oluntate factum; qua ex re fiet^^ uti totius Galliae 
 animi ab eo avertantur.^^ 
 
 {Direct Narration, Past Time.) Sciebat Divitiacus ilia esse 
 vera, nee quisquam ex eo plus quam ipse doloris capiebat, prop- 
 ter ea quod, quum ipse gratia plurimum domi atque in reliqua 
 Gallia, ille minimum propter adolescentiam posset, per se crev- 
 erat; quibus opibus ac nervis non solum ad minuendam giati- 
 am, sed paene ad perniciem ipsius utebatur. Divitiacus taraen 
 et amore fraterno et existimatione vulgi commovebatur, quod si 
 quid fratri a Caesare gi"avius accidisset, quum ipse talem locum 
 amicitiae apud eum teneret, nemo erat existimaturus non ejus 
 voluntate factum, qua ex re futurum erat uti totius Galliae 
 animi ab eo averterentur. 
 
 Divitiacus, multis cum lacrymis Caesarem complexus obse- 
 crare incipit {ohlique narration, present time), "Ne quid gravius 
 in fratrem statuat ; scire se, ilia esse vera, nee quemquam ex eo 
 plus quam se doloris capere, propterea quod, quum ipse gratia 
 plurimum domi atque in reliqua Gallia, ille minimum propter 
 adolescentiam posset, per se creverit ; quibus opibus ac nervis 
 non solum ad minuendam gratiam, sed psene ad perniciem suam 
 utatur : sese tamen et amore fraterno et existimatione vulgi 
 commoveri, quod, si quid ei gravius a Caesare accident, quum 
 ipse eum locum amicitias apud eum teneat, neminem existima- 
 turum non sua voluntate factum ; qua ex re futurum uti totius 
 Galliae animi a se avertantur." 
 
 Divitiacus multis cum lacrymis, Caesarem complexus, obse- 
 crare coepit {ohlique narration, past time), " Ne quid gravius in 
 fratrem statueret ; scire se, ilia esse vera, nee quemquam ex 
 eo plus quam se doloris capere, propterea quod, quum ipse 
 gratia plurimum domi atque in reliqua Gallia, ille minimum 
 propter adolescentiam posset, per se crevisset; quibus opibus 
 ac nei-vis non solum ad minuendam gratiam, sed paene ad per- 
 niciem suam uteretur : sese tamen et amore fraterno et exist 
 imatione vulgi commoveri, quod si quid ei a Csesare gravius 
 accidisset, quum ipse eum locum amicitiae apud eum teneret, 
 neminem existimatm*um non sua voluntate factum ; qua ex re 
 futurum, uti totius Galliae animi a se averterentur." 
 
 23 from which thing it will result. — ^24 754, 2. 
 
LATIN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 
 
LATIN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 
 
 ^^ The numbers refer to paragraphs. In verbs, the perfect and su- 
 pme-stems are placed in brackets, immediately after the infinitive end- 
 ings. The declensions of nouns may be known by the genitive endings : 
 the conjugations of verbs by the infinitive endings. 
 
 A, ab, abs, prep, with abl., by, from. 
 Abesse (abfti-, ab+esse), to be away 
 
 from, to he distant, to be absent. 
 Abrog-are (av-, at-), to abrogate. 
 Abstin-ere (abstinu-, abstent-, abs-|- 
 
 tenere), to abstain from, (with 
 
 abl.). 
 Abund-are (av-, at-), to abound (with 
 
 abl.). 
 Ac, conj., and, as well as. 
 Acced-ere (access-, access-, ad+ced- 
 
 ere, 401, 3), to approach. 
 >^ccid-6re (accid-, ad + cadere), to 
 
 happen. 
 Accidit, impers., 583, it happens. 
 Accip-ere (io, accep-, accept-, 666, 
 
 v., b), to receive: acceptus erat, 
 
 he teas popular, or acceptable. 
 Accurr-ere (accurr-, and accucurr-, 
 
 accurs-, ad+currere), to run to, to 
 
 run up to. 
 Accus-are (av-, at-), to accuse. 
 Acer, acris, acre, 105, R. 1, sharp, 
 
 sjnritcd. 
 Acerrime (superl. of acriter), very 
 
 Acies, ei, lin£ of battle. 
 
 Acriter, adv., 217, sharply, spirit- 
 edly. 
 
 Acut-us, % um, sharp, acute. 
 
 Ad, prep, with accus., to, near. 
 
 Add-6re (addid-, addit-, ad + dare, 
 411, c), to add. 
 
 Adduc-gre (addux-, adduct-), to lead 
 
 to, induce. 
 Adeo, adv., to this point, to such a 
 
 degree. 
 Adesse (adfu-, ad-J-esse), to be pres- 
 ent (with dat.). 
 Adhib-ere (adhibu-, adhibit-, ad+ha- 
 
 bere), to apply, employ, admit. 
 Adhort-ari (at-), dep., to exhort. 
 Adjung-ere (adjunx-, adjunct-), *,o 
 
 join to. 
 Adjuv-are (adjuv-, adjut-), to assist. 
 AdmSdum, adv., very. 
 Admon-ere (admonu-, admonit-), to 
 
 advise, admotcish. 
 Adolescens, (adolescent) is, young 
 
 man. 
 Adolescenti-a, as, youth. 
 Ador-are (av-, at-), to adore, tcorship. 
 Advent-us, us, approach. 
 Adversus, or adversum, prep, with 
 
 accus., against, towards. 
 ^dific-are (av-, at-), to build. 
 .^difici-um, i, building. 
 -lEdu-us, i, u^duan (people of Gaul). 
 Egens, (egent) is, 107, poor. 
 jEger, gra, grum, sick. 
 jEgritudo, (osgritudin) is, 339, sor- 
 
 roto, affliction, sickness. 
 iE grot-are (av-, at-), to be sick. 
 iEgyptus, i, f., 25, a, u^gypt. 
 ^quor, (aequor) is, 327, sea. 
 iEstas, (aestat) is, 293, summer. 
 
JI58 
 
 LATIN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY 
 
 ^tas, faetat) is, 293, age, tirg^ of life. 
 ^temitas, (aeteruitat) is, 293, eter 
 
 nity. 
 iEtem-us, a, um, eternal; in oeter 
 
 wvsa, forever. 
 Affectio, (affection) is, 293, affection. 
 AiFerre (attul-, allat-, ad+ferre), to 
 
 bring, bring to, adduce. 
 Affic-ere (affec-, affect-, ad+facei-e), 
 
 to affect, move, influence. 
 Afric-a, ae, Africa. 
 African-US, i, Africanus. 
 Ager, gri, 6i,field. 
 Ag-ere (eg-, act-), to do, act, drive ; 
 
 to treat (as an ambassador). 
 Agmen, (agmin) is, 344, a, army on 
 
 m,arch, or in marcliing order ; no- 
 
 vissimum agmen. the rear. 
 Agn-us, i, lamb. 
 Agricol-a, ae, m., husbandman. 
 Agricultur-a, ae, agriculture. 
 Agripp-a, ae, Agrippa. 
 Aio, 609, / say, say yes, affirm. 
 Al-a, ae, wing. 
 
 Al-6re (alu-, ^It-), to nourish, sup- 
 port, maintain. 
 Alexander, -dri, Alexander. 
 Alien-US, a, um, foreign, belonging 
 
 to another. 
 Aliquando, at some time, some day, 
 
 at last. 
 Aliquant-US, a, um, 184, someichat 
 
 great ; aliquantum agri, a pretty 
 
 large piece of ground. 
 Aliquis, quas, quid (quod), 178, 5, 
 
 some one, something ; aliquid novi, 
 
 something new, 180. 
 Aliter, otJierwise. 
 
 Ali-us, a, ud, gen. alius, &c., 194, R. 1, 
 other, another. [of Gaul. 
 
 Allobroges, um, Allobroges, people 
 Allu-ere (allu-). to wash. 
 Alpes, ium. ^Z/)«, mountains between 
 
 Gaul and Italy. 
 Alter, a, um, gen. ius, 194, R. 1, an- 
 other, the secovd (in a series). 
 
 Alt-US, a, um, high, lofty, deep; al- 
 tum, i, the deep, the sea. 
 
 Amabilis, is, e, 104, amiable. 
 
 Am-are (av-, at-), \o love. 
 
 Ambo, 89, o, both. 
 
 Ambul-are (av-, at-), to walk. 
 
 Amiciti-a, as, friendship. 
 
 Amic-us, i, friend. 
 
 Amitt-ere (amis-, amiss-), to lose. 
 
 Ample, adv., largely. 
 
 Amplius, comp. of ample, more, lar- 
 ger, greater than. 
 
 Aucill-a, ae, maid-servant. 
 
 Angli-a, ae, England. 
 
 Angusti-ae, arum, defiles, 57, B. 
 
 Angust-us, a, um, narrow. 
 
 Animadvert-6re (vert-, vers-), anl- 
 mum+ad+vertere), to turn the 
 mind to, to observe ; with in, t-o 
 punish ; Caesar in Dvmmorigem 
 animadvertit, Ccesar punishes 
 Dumnorix. 
 
 Animal, (animal) is, 325, animal. 
 
 Animans, (animant) is, living ; as 
 noun, a living being. 
 
 Anim-us, i, soul, mind. 
 
 Ann-us, i, year. 
 
 Anser, (anser) is, 319, goose. 
 
 Ante, prep, with accus., before. 
 
 Antebac, adv., before, before this. 
 
 Antepon-ere (posu-, posit-), to place 
 before, to prefer. 
 
 Antonin-us, i, Antonine. 
 
 Antoni-us, i, Antony. 
 
 Aper-Ire (aperu-, apert-, 427, II.). to 
 open. 
 
 Apert-us, a, um, open. 
 
 Apis, (Ap-) is, Apis, Egyptian deity. 
 
 App ell-are (av-, at-), to call, name. 
 
 Aprilis, is (sc. mensis), m., 25, a, 
 April. [proach. 
 
 Appropinqu-are ( av-, at- ), to ap- 
 
 Apud, prep, with accus., am-ong ; 
 apud te, with you (at your house) ; 
 apud Ciceronem, in Cicero {i. e., 
 his writings). 
 
LATIN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 
 
 359 
 
 Aqu-a, ae, water. 
 Aquil-a, 33, eagle. 
 Aquitan-us, i, Aquitanian (people of 
 
 Gaul). 
 Arar, (ArSr) is, the Saone (river of 
 
 Gaul). 
 Ar-are (av-, at-), to plough. 
 Arbitr-ari (at-), dap., to judge, think. 
 Arbor, (arbor) is, f., tree. 
 Arcess-ere (arcesslv-, arcessit-), to 
 
 sendfor. 
 Aretbus-a, se, Arethusa. 
 Argent-um, i, silver. 
 Arid-um, i, the sand (neuter of ari- 
 
 dus, a, um, dry). 
 Ariovist-us, i, Ariovistus, a German 
 
 chieftain. 
 Aristides, (Aristid-) is, Aristides. 
 Anna, orum, arms. 
 Ann-are (av-, at-), to arm. 
 Arrip-6re (arripu-, arrept-, ad-frap- 
 
 ere), to snatch up, to seize. 
 Arroganti-a, ae, haughtiness, obsti- 
 nacy, arrogance. 
 Ars, (art) is, 293, art. 
 Asper, a, um, rough. 
 At, conj., hut. 
 Atbenae, arum, Athens. 
 Atheniensis, is, an Athenian. 
 Atque, conj., and. 
 Atrox, (atr6c) is, 101, fierce. 
 Attent-e, adv., attentively. 
 Attent-us, a, um, attentive. 
 Attic-a, ae, Attica. 
 Atting-ere (attig-, attact-), to touch 
 
 on, border upon. 
 Auctoritas, (auctoritat) is, 293, au- 
 
 tlwrity, influence. 
 Audacius, comp. of audacter, 376, 
 
 more boldly. 
 Audacter, adv., boldly. 
 Aud-ere (ausus sum), to dare. 
 Aud-Ire (audiv-, audit-), to hear. 
 Aug-ere (aux-, auct-), to increase. 
 August-us, i, Augustus. 
 Aur-um, i, gold. 
 
 Aut, conj., or. 
 
 Autem, conj., 315, but, moreover, also. 
 
 Auxili-um, i, assistance ; auxilia, pL, 
 
 auxiliary troops. 
 Avar-US, i, avaricious. 
 Avert-ere (avert-, avers-), to turn 
 
 Avien-us, i, Avienus. 
 Avis, (av) is, 300, bird. 
 
 Barbar-us, a, um, barbarian, jor- 
 eign ; used as a noun, a barba- 
 rian. 
 
 Beat-us, a, um, happy. 
 
 Beat-e, 215, 1, happily. 
 
 Belg-a, ae, a Belgian, people of GauL 
 
 Bell-are (av-, at-), to wage war. 
 
 Bellicos-us, a, um, warlike. 
 
 Bell-um, i, war. 
 
 Bene, adv., well, 215, 1, K. 
 
 Benefici-um, i, good deed, act of 
 kindness. 
 
 Beuign-us, a, um, kind, with dat. 
 
 Besti-a, ae, least, brute. 
 
 Bib-6re (bib-, bibit-), to drink. 
 
 Bieimi-um, i, space of two years 
 
 Bini, ae, a, dist., 189, two apiece, two 
 at a time. 
 
 Bis, 1S9, twice. 
 
 Bonitas, (bonitat) is, 293, goodness. 
 
 Bon-US, a, um, good ; bona, neut. pi., 
 blessings, advantages. 
 
 Bos, bovis, 351, 2, ox or cotv. 
 
 Brevis, is, e, 104, short. 
 
 Britanni-a, se, Britain. 
 
 Britann-us, i, a Briton. 
 
 Brat-US, i, Brutus. 
 
 Cad-ere (cecid-, cas-, 411, b), to fall. 
 
 Cadm-us, i, Cadmus. 
 
 Caduc-us, a, um, frail. 
 
 Caed-ere (cecid-, cees-, 411, b), to fell, 
 
 kill, cut down. 
 Caesar, (Caesar) is, CcBsar 
 
360 
 
 LATIN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 
 
 Caius, i, Cams. 
 
 Calamitas, (calamitat) is, calamity. 
 
 Calcar, (calcSr) is, 325, spur. 
 
 Camp-US, i, field, plain. 
 
 Can-is, (can) is, c, dog. 
 
 Cant-ai-e (av-, at-), to sing. 
 
 Cant-US, us, singing. 
 
 Cap-ere (cep-, capt-), to take. 
 
 Captiv-us, i, captive, prisoner. 
 
 Car-6re (caru-, 398), to want, with 
 abl. 
 
 Carmen, (carmin) is, 344, a, song. 
 
 Caro, (earn) is, 340, "Si., flesh. 
 
 Carthaginiensis, is, a Carthagin- 
 ian. 
 
 Carthago, (Carthagin) is, Carthage. 
 
 Carr-us, i, wagon. 
 
 Car-us, a, um, dear. 
 
 Cassi-us, i, Cassius. 
 
 Castell-um, i, fortress, tower. 
 
 Castic-us, i, Casticus. 
 
 Castra, orum, camp. 
 
 Cas-us, us, accident, chance. 
 
 Catamentales, edis, Catamentales, 
 proper name. 
 
 Catilin-a, m, Catiline, proper name. 
 
 Cato, (Caton) is, Cato. 
 
 Caus-a, se, cause, reason; abl., causa, 
 for tlie sake of, 135, II., b ; salutis 
 causa, /or the sake of safety. 
 
 Caut-us, a, um, cautious. 
 
 Celebr-are (av-, at-), to celebrate. 
 
 Celer, (celer) is, 107, swift. 
 
 Celeriter, adv., 215, 2, b, swiftly. 
 
 Celta, se, a Celt, people of Gaul. 
 
 Centum, indecl., a hundred. 
 
 Cens-ere (censu-, cens-), to think, 
 judge, believe. 
 
 Centurio, (centurion) is, centurion. 
 
 Cem-6re (crev-, cret-), to separate, 
 decide, judge. 
 
 Cert-US, a, um, certain ; certiorem 
 facere, to make more certain, i. e., 
 to inform. 
 
 Cerv-us, i, stag. 
 
 Ceteri, oram, the rest. 
 
 Christ-US, i, Christ. 
 Cicero, (Ciceron) is, Cicero. 
 Cing-ere (cinx-, cinct-), to gird, sur- 
 round. 
 Circa, prep, with ace, about, around. 
 Circiter, prep, with ace, about, near; 
 
 circiter viginti, about twenty. 
 Circum, prep, with accus., about, 
 
 around. 
 Circumst-are [or circumsistSre), cir- 
 
 cumstet-, 391, 1, to surround, to 
 
 stand about 
 Cito, adv., quickly. 
 Cit-us, a, um, quick, swift. 
 Civis, (civ) is, c, citizen. 
 Civitas, (civitat) is, 293, state. 
 Clamor, (clamor) is, 319 noise, clam- 
 our. 
 Clar-us, a, um, illustrious. 
 Classis, (class-) is, 300, fleet. 
 Claud-ere (claus-, claus-), to shut. 
 Cliens, (client) is, m., a dependant. 
 Coel-um, \, firmament, heaven. 
 Coem-6re (coem-, coempt-), to buy 
 
 up (con+emere). 
 Ccen-are (av-, at-), to sup. 
 Coepi, used only in perf. tenses. / 
 
 begin, 611. 
 Cog-6re (coeg-, coact-), to bring to- 
 
 gether, collect, compel. 
 Cogit-are (av-, at-), to think. 
 Cognosc-6re (cognov-, cognit-), to 
 
 learn, find out, know. 
 Cohors, (cohort) is, 293 cohort, the 
 
 tenth part of a legion. 
 Cohort-ari (at-), dep., to encourage. 
 Col-ere (colu-, cult-), to cultivate, 
 
 serve, honour. 
 Collig-6re (colleg-, collect-, con+le- 
 
 gere), to collect. 
 CoUis, (coll) is, m., 302, R., hill. 
 CoUoc-are (av-, at-), to place. 
 CoUoqui-um, i, conference. 
 Color, (color) is, 319, colour. 
 Colamb-a, se, dove. [bum up 
 
 Combur-ere (combuss-, combust-), t^o 
 
LATIN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 
 
 361 
 
 Comies, (comit) is, c, companion. 
 Comme are (av-, at-), to go to, to go 
 
 and return. 
 Commemor-are (av-, at-), to mentiok, 
 
 to call to mind. 
 Committ-6re (coirimis-, commisi?-), to 
 intrust to, with dative ; prselium 
 committere, to join battle. 
 Commov-ere (commOv-, commot-), to 
 
 move greatly, to excite. 
 Commun-ire (iv-. It-), to fortify. 
 Communis, is, e, 104, common. 
 Commut-are (av-, at-), to change. 
 Commutatio, ( commutation ) is, 
 
 change. 
 Compar-are (av-, at-), to get together, 
 
 procure. 
 Compell-6re (compul-, compuls-, con 
 
 4-pellere), to compel, drive on. 
 Comper-Tre (comper-, compart-, 427, 
 
 v.), to find out, discover. 
 Complect-i (complex-), dep., to em- 
 brace. 
 Compl-ere (complev-, complet-, 395, 
 
 II.), to fill up. 
 Complures, ium, 327, very many. 
 Con-ari (at-), to attempt, try. 
 Conat-um, 1, attempt. 
 Conced-ere (concess-, concess-), to 
 
 yield to, to grant, give way. 
 Concess-us, us, grant. 
 Concili-are (av-, at-), to gain (for an- 
 other). 
 Concili-um, i, assembly, council. 
 Concit-are (av-, at-), to stir up, to 
 
 excite. 
 Concupisc-ere (concupiv-), to desire. 
 Concurr-ere (concurr-, concurs), to 
 
 run together. 
 Condemn-are (av-, at-), to condemn, 
 
 348. 
 Conditio, (condition) is, 333, R., con- 
 dition. 
 Condi tor, (conditor) is, builder, found- 
 er, {lead or bring together. 
 Conduc-cre (condux-, conduct-), to 
 
 H 
 
 I Conferre (contul-, collat-), to bring 
 together, contribute. 
 Contic-ere (confec-, confect-), to fin- 
 ish. 
 Confid-6re (confisus sum), to trust 
 
 to, to confide in. 
 Confirm-are (av-, at-), to confirm, es- 
 tablish, affirm, fix. 
 Conflu-6re (conflux-, conflux-), tofiato 
 
 together. 
 Congreg-are (av-, at-), to gather into 
 
 fiocks. 
 Congress-US, us, meeting. 
 Conjic-ere (conjee-, conject-, con-fja- 
 
 cere, 416), to hurl. 
 Conjung-ere (conjunx-, conjunct-), io 
 
 join^ogether, unite. 
 Conjur-are (av-, at-), to conspire, 
 
 plot. 
 Conjuratio, (conjuratidn) is, 333, R., 
 
 conspiracy. 
 Conjux, (conjug) is, c, husband or 
 
 wife. 
 Conscend-gre (conscend-, conscens-, 
 
 con+scandere, 309), to climb up. 
 
 Conscisc-6re (consciv-, conscit-), to 
 
 decree, determine ; mortem sibi 
 
 consciscere, to commit suicide, 
 
 555. 
 
 Consci-us, a, um, conscious, privy to. 
 
 Conscrib-6re (conscrips-, conscript-), 
 
 to enrol, levy. 
 Conseut-ire (consens-, conaens-), to 
 
 agree. 
 Consid-ere (consed-, consess-), to sit 
 
 doion, to encamp. 
 Consili-um, i, plan, judgment, coun- 
 sel, deliberation. 
 Consist-6re (constit-, couBtit-), to 
 
 stand, halt. 
 Conspect-us, us, sight, beholding. 
 Conspic-6re (conspex-, conspect-), to 
 
 see, get sight of. 
 Const-are (stit-, stit- or stat-), to stand 
 
 together, to halt. 
 Constitu-6re (constitu-, constitdt- 
 H 
 
362 
 
 LATIN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 
 
 con+statuere), to place, fix, ap- 
 point 
 
 Consuesc-Sre (consuev-, consuet-), to 
 be accustomed. 
 
 Consuetude, (consuetudin) is, 339, 
 custom, usage. 
 
 Consul, (consul) is, consul, chief ma- 
 gistrate of Rome. 
 
 Consul-gre (consulu-, consult-), to 
 consult. 
 
 Consult-um, i, decree. 
 
 Consum-6re (consumps-, consumpt-, 
 con+sumere), to consume. 
 
 Contemn-6re (contempg-, contempt-), 
 to despise. 
 
 Contempl-ari (at-), dep., to contem- 
 plate. ^ 
 
 Contend-€re (contend-, content-), to 
 contend, strive after, hasten. 
 
 Content-us, a, nm, content, with abl. 
 
 Contin-ere (continu-, content-, con+ 
 tenere), to contain, restrain, hold 
 together. 
 
 Continens, (continent) is, 107, suc- 
 cessive, continiisd. 
 
 Continenter, 215, 2, b, continually. 
 
 Contingit, impers., 580, it happens. 
 
 Continuatio, (continuation) is, 333, 
 R., continuance. 
 
 Contra, prep, with accus., against ; 
 adv., in opposition to. 
 
 Contrah-6re (contrax-, contract-, con 
 4-trahere), to draw together, col- 
 lect. 
 
 Conv6n-ire (conv6n-, convent-, con+ 
 venire), to come together, meet, 
 agree. 
 
 Convent-US, us, meeting, assembly. 
 
 Convert-6re (convert-, convers-), to 
 turn completely round. 
 
 Convoc-are (av-, at-, con+vocare), to 
 call together. 
 
 Coor-iri (coort-), dep., to rise, as a 
 stomx. 
 
 Copi-a, 89, abundance ; pi., copiw, 
 amm, troops, forces. 
 
 Cor, (cord) is, n,, Jieart. 
 
 Corinth-US, i, f., Corinth. 
 
 Comiger, a, um, hoi-ned. 
 
 Com-u, 111, horn, wing of an aj-my, 
 
 Coron-a, 86, crown. 
 
 Corpus, (corpSrI is, 344, b, body. 
 
 Corrig-ere (correx-, correct-, con+ 
 regere), to correct, make straight, 
 
 Corv-us, i, crow. 
 
 Cras, adv., to-morroxo. 
 
 Crass-US, i, Crassus. 
 
 Cre-are (av-, at-), to create. 
 
 Creber, bra, hTam, frequent. 
 
 Cred-ere (credid-, credi^), to believe, 
 intrust, with dat. 
 
 Crep-are (crepu-, crepit-, 387, 11.), 
 to chide, creak (as a door). 
 
 Cresc-Sre (crev-, cret-), to groio. 
 
 Crimen, (crimin) is, 344, a, crime. 
 
 Crus, (crur) is, n., leg. 
 
 Cubicul-um, i, bed-chamber. 
 
 Cubile, (cubil) is, 314, bed, place to 
 lie down. 
 
 Culmen, (culmin) is, 344, a, top, sum- 
 mit. 
 
 Culp-a, tB, fault. 
 
 Cultus, us (from colere), cultivatwUf 
 civilization, refinetnent. 
 
 Cum, prep, with abl., with; cum, 
 conj., same as quum, when. 
 
 Cunct-ari (at-), dep., to delay. 
 
 Cunct-us, a, um, all, the v:hole. 
 
 Cup-ere (io, 199, cupiv-, cupit-), to 
 desire. 
 
 Cupide, adv., with desire, 215, 1 (cu 
 pidus). 
 
 Cupiditas, (cupiditat) is, 293, desire. 
 
 Cupid-US, a, um (with gen.), desi- 
 rous, eager. 
 
 Cur, adv., why. 
 
 Cur-a, 33, care. 
 
 Cur-are (av-, at-), to take care, to set 
 that. 
 
 Curi-a, 09, senate-house. 
 
 Curr-6re (cucurr-, curs , 411, a), U 
 ruK. 
 
LATIN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 
 
 863^ 
 
 Curs-US, 4s, course, running. 
 Gustos, (custod) is, 25, a, 
 
 guardian. 
 Cyrus, i, Cyrus. 
 
 D. 
 
 Danubi-us,i, I>a»»5e (river). 
 
 D-are (ded-, dat-), to give. 
 
 Dari-us, i, Darius, Persian king. 
 
 De, prep, with abl., of, from, con- 
 cerning. De tertia vigilia, in 
 (about, or after) the third watch. 
 
 Deb-ere (debu-, debit-), to owe — 
 ought. 
 
 Deced-6re (decess-, decess-, de+ce- 
 dere), to go away, depart, retire. 
 
 Decern, indecl., ten. 
 
 Decem-Sre (decrev-, decret-, 407), 
 decree, determine. 
 
 Decert-are (av-, at-), to contend, 
 Jlght. 
 
 Decet, impers., 583, decuit, it is he- 
 
 Decim-us, a, um, tenth. 
 
 Ded-6re (dedid-, dedit-), to surren- 
 der. 
 
 Deditio, (dedition) is, 333, 11., sur- 
 render. 
 
 Deduc-ere (dedux-, deduct-), to lead 
 away. 
 
 De-esse (defu-, de+esse), to be want- 
 ing (with dat), to be away. 
 
 Defend-6re (defend-, defens-), to de- 
 fend. 
 
 Defess-us, a, um (part, of defetisci, 
 obsol.), wearied, worn out. 
 
 Defic-6re (defec-, defect-, de + fa- 
 cere), to fail, to be wanting, with 
 dat. 
 
 Delect-are (av-, at-), to delight. 
 
 Del-ere (delev-, delet-), to destroy. 
 
 Deliber-are (av-, at-), to deliberate. 
 
 Delig-gre (delSg-, delect-, de + le- 
 gere), to choose. 
 
 Demetri-us, i, Demetrius (proper 
 name). 
 
 Demum, VidiV., finally, at last. 
 Denique, adv., at last, in short. 
 Dens, (dent) is, m., 295, H. 1 tooth. 
 Dens-US, a, um, thick, dense. 
 Depon-ere (deposu-, deposit-, de-f 
 
 ponere), to lay aside, put down. 
 Deser-ere (deseru-, desert-), to leave, 
 
 desert, 
 Desert-um, i, a desert. 
 Desil-ire (desilu-, desult-, de+salire, 
 
 428), to leap doion. 
 Design-are (av-, at-), to point out, 
 
 allude to. 
 Desper-are (av-, at-, de-f sperare), te 
 
 despair. 
 Desperatio, (desperation) is, despair 
 Deterr-ere (deterru-, deterrit-), to de- 
 ter, frighten from. 
 Deus, i, God, 62, R. 
 Dic-6re (dix-, diet-), to say, tell. 
 Dictio, (diction) is> 333, K,., speak- 
 ing, pleading. 
 Dies, ei, day. 
 Differre (distul-, dilat-, dis+ferre), to 
 
 differ, to put off. 
 Difficilis, is, e (dis+facilis), difficult. 
 Dignitas, (dignitat) is, 293, dignity, 
 
 rank. 
 Dign-us, a, um, worthy, with abl. 
 Diligens, (diligent) is, careful, dili' 
 
 gent. 
 Dihgenter, 215, 2, b, carefully, dili- 
 
 gently. 
 DUig-Sre (dilex-, dilect-, di-f-legere), 
 
 to love (with esteem). 
 Dimitt-ere (dimis-, dimiss-, di-fmit- 
 
 tere), to send aioay, dismiss. 
 Dirip-Sre (diripu-, dirept-, di + ra- 
 
 pere), to plunder. 
 Disced-6re (discess-, discess-, dis+ 
 
 cedere, 401, 3, h), to go away, de- 
 
 part. 
 Disc-6re (didic-, 411, a), to learn. 
 Discess-us, us, departure. 
 Disciplin-a, se, instruction, discipline 
 Discipul-us, i, scholar, pupil. 
 
364 
 
 LATIN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY, 
 
 Disert-us, a, um, Jluent, Hoquent. 
 Displic-ere (displicu-, displicit-, dis 
 
 +placere), to displease, with dat. 
 Dispon-ere (disposu-, disposit-, dis-|- 
 ponere), to place in different di- 
 rections, arrang'e, dispose. 
 Disput-are (av-, at-), to dispute, dis- 
 cuss. 
 Dissent-ire (dissens-, diss ens-, dis-+- 
 sentire, 427, III.), to differ ir\ 
 opinion, dissent. 
 Disser-6re (disseru-, dissert-, 407), to 
 
 treat of, discuss. 
 dissolv-ere (dissolv-, dissolat-, dis+ 
 
 solvere), to dissolve. 
 Dist-are, to be distant, or apai't (di+ 
 
 stare). 
 Distribu-ere (distribu-, distribut), to 
 
 divide or distribute among; 422. 
 Ditissimus, superl. of dives. 
 Diu, adv., lo7ig ; compar., diutius, 
 
 longer. 
 Divers-US, a, um, different. 
 Dives, (divit) is, 371, R. 1, rich. 
 Divico, (Divicon) is, Divico, proper 
 
 name. 
 Divid-ere (divis-, divis-), to divide. 
 Divin-us, a, um, divine. 
 Divitiac-us, i, Divitiacus, proper 
 
 name. 
 Divitiae, arum, 57, R., ricJies, wealth. 
 Doc-ere (docu-, doct-), to teach. 
 Docilis, is, e, 104, docile, teaehalle. 
 Dol-ere (dolu-, dolit-), to grieve. 
 Dolor, (dolor) is, 319, grief, pain. 
 Dol-us, i, fraud, deceit. 
 Dom-are (domu-, domit-, 387, II.), to 
 
 subdue. 
 Domicili-um^ i, dwelling. 
 Domin-us, i, master, of house or 
 
 slaves. 
 Dom-us, i and us, 112, 3, house, 
 home; domi, at home; domuni, to 
 one's house. 
 Dorm-Ire (dormiv-, dormit), to sleep. 
 Draco, (dracon) is, 331, dragon. 
 
 Druides, um, Diuids, priests of ait- 
 cient Britain. 
 
 Dubit-are (av-, at-), to doubt, hcsi' 
 tate. 
 
 Dubitatio, (dubitation) is, 333, II., 
 doubt. 
 
 Dubi-us, a, mti, doubtful. 
 
 Duc-ere (dux-, duct-), to lead. 
 
 Dulcis, is, e, 104, sweet. 
 
 Dum, couj., while, so long as, until. 
 
 Doninorix, (Dumnorig) is, DUmno 
 rix, proper name. 
 
 Duo, two, 194. 
 
 Duodecim, indecl., twelve. 
 
 Duplic-are (av-, at-), to double. 
 
 Dur-are (-av-, at-), intrans., to endure 
 last ; trans., to harden. 
 
 Dur-us, a, um, hard. 
 
 Dux, (due) is, leader, guide, com- 
 mander. 
 
 E. 
 
 E or ex, prep, with abl., out of, 
 
 from. 
 Ecquis, interrog. pron., 178, 7, any 
 
 one? 
 Ed-6re, or esse (ed-, es-, 601), to cat. 
 E due-are (av-, at-), to train, educate. 
 Educ-ere (edux-, educt-), to lead out. 
 Eflfect-us, us, effect. 
 Effemin-are (av-, at-, ex+femina), to 
 
 geminate, make womanish. 
 Ego, I, 120. 
 Egregi-us, a, um, excellent, remark 
 
 able. 
 Elegans, (elegant) is, 107, elegant. 
 Eloquens, (eloquent) is, 107, elo 
 
 quent. 
 Em-Sre (em-, empt-), to buy. 
 Emic-are (emicu-), 387, II., to shint 
 
 or flash forth. 
 Enim, conj.,/c»r, 442, e. 
 Enunti-are (av-, at-), to divulge. 
 Eo, adv., there, to that place, on that 
 
 account, by so much. 
 Eodem, adv., to the same place. 
 
.ATIN-ENG1.1SH VOCA lUI.ARV. 
 
 365 
 
 Epistol-a, £B, leller. 
 
 Eques, (eqait) is, horse soldier. 
 
 Equester, tris, tre, 428, a, belonging 
 
 to cavalry. Equestri projlio, in a 
 
 battle of cavalry. 
 Equit-are (av-, at-), to ride on horse- 
 back. 
 Equitat-us, us, cavalry. 
 Equ-os, i, horse. 
 Erip-ere (eripu-, erept, e+rapere), to 
 
 take aioay from, snatch away 
 Err-are (av-, at-,) to err, wander. 
 Erump-6re (erup-, erupt-), to burst 
 
 forth, sally ont. 
 Esse, to be, 650 ; esse, to eat, see 
 
 edere. 
 Et, conj., and. Et — et, both — and. 
 Etenim, conj., /or. 
 Etiam, conj., also, even. 
 Etsi. conj., although. 
 Europ-a, ae, Europe. 
 Evoc-are (av-, at-, e-|-vocare), to call 
 
 out. 
 Ex, prep, with abl. See E. 
 Exced-6re (excess-, excess-, ex+ce- 
 
 dere), to go away, depart out of. 
 Exclam-are (av-, at-), to cry out. 
 Excip-Sre (excep-, except-, ex+ca- 
 
 pere), to receive. 
 Excit-are (av-, at-), to raise, kindle, 
 
 excite. 
 Bxcusatio, (excusation) is, 333, R., 
 
 excuse. 
 Exe-dere (exed-, exes-, ex+edere), 
 
 to eat up, consume, corrode. 
 Exempl-um, i, example. 
 Exerc-ere (exercu-, exercit-), to ex- 
 ercise, practice. 
 Exercit-us, us, army. 
 Exign-us, a, urn, $mall. 
 Ex-Ire (exiv- and exi-, exit-), to go 
 
 out, depart. 
 Existim-are (av-, at-), to think, judge. 
 Existimatio, (existimation) is, 333, 
 
 R., opinion. 
 Expect-are (av-, at-), lo wait for. 
 
 II 
 
 Expedit, impers., 583, it is cxpedierd. 
 Expeditio, (expedition) is, 333, R., 
 
 military expedition. 
 Expell-ere (expul-, expuls-, ex-j-pel- 
 
 lere), to expel, drive out. 
 Expei's, (expert) is, 107, devoid of, 
 
 with gen. or abl., 336. 
 Expet-6re (expetiv-, expetit-), to 
 
 covet, desire earnestly. 
 Explorator, (explorator) is, 319, scout. 
 Expon-6re (exposu-, exposit-, ex+ 
 
 ponere), to place out, set forth, ex- 
 plain. 
 Expugn-are (av-, at-, ex+pugnare), 
 
 to take by storm. 
 Extra, prep, with accus., outside of, 
 
 without. 
 Extrem-us, a, um, superl. of exterus, 
 
 370, the last, outermost. 
 Exur-6re (exuss-, exust-, ex+urere), 
 
 to burn up. 
 
 Faber, bri, artificer, workman. 
 
 Fabul-a, m, fable, story. 
 
 Fac-ere (io, fee-, fact-), to make, do. 
 
 Facile, adv., easily. 
 
 Facilis, is, e, 104, easy. 
 
 Facultas, (facultat) is, 293, power of 
 
 doing ; hence 'means, resources. 
 Facund-us, a, um, eloquent. 
 Fall-ere (fefell-, fals-), to deceive. 
 Fam-a, se, rumour, fame. 
 Fames, (fam) is, 300, hunger. 
 Famili-a, te, family, gang of slaves. 
 Familiaris, e, belonging to the fami- 
 
 lia. Res familiaris, property. 
 Fat-eri (fass-), dep., to confess. 
 Fat-ura, i, fate. 
 Fav-ere (fiv-, faut-, 395, v.), to f<u 
 
 vour. 
 Felix, (fellc) is, 104, happy. 
 Femin-a, se, v>oman. 
 Fer-a, se, wild otast. 
 Fere, adv., almost. 
 ! Ferre (tul-, lat-, 596), to bear 
 
 n2 
 
566 
 
 LATIN-ENGLIBII VOCABULARY. 
 
 FerotAil-us, a, um, surly. 1 
 
 Ferox, (feroc) is, IQl, fierce. 
 
 Ferr-um, i, iron. 
 
 Festia-are (av-, at-), to hasten. 
 
 Fid-es, ei, faith. 
 
 Fieri (fact), 600, used as pass, of fa- 
 cere ; to be made, to become. 
 
 Figxir-a, go, figure. 
 
 Fili-a, oe, daughter, dat. and abl. pi. 
 filiabus. 
 
 Fili-us, i, son, 62, R., 2. 
 
 Fin-is, (fin) is, m., end, boundary; 
 fines, boundaries, territories. 
 
 Finitim-us, a, um, neighbouring. 
 
 Firm-US, a, um, strong, firm. 
 
 Fit, it happens, pres. indie, of fio, 
 fieri. 
 
 Flagiti-um, i, disgraceful crime, in- 
 famy. 
 
 Flamm-a, ^, flame. 
 
 Fl-ere (flev-, flet-, 395. IT.), to weep. 
 
 Flet-us, us, weeping. 
 
 Flos, (flor) is, 331, b, fiower. 
 
 Pluet-us, us, wave. 
 
 Flumen, (flumin) is, 344, a, river. 
 
 Fluvi-us, i, river. 
 
 Fcedus, (feeder) is, 344, b, treaty, 
 league. 
 
 Foli-um, i, leaf. 
 
 Fons, (font) is, ra., 293, "K., fountain. 
 
 Foris, (for) is, 300, door ; used most- 
 ly in plur., fores. 
 
 Form-a, ae,form. 
 
 Formid-are (av-, at-), to fear, le 
 afraid of. 
 
 Formos-us, a, um, handsome. 
 
 Forsitan, adv., perhaps. 
 
 Forte, adv., by chance. 
 
 Fort-is, is, e, 107, brave. 
 
 Portiter, 215, 2, b, bravely. 
 
 Fortitudo, (fortitudin) is, 339, fotii 
 tude, courage. 
 
 Fortun-a, re, fortune. 
 
 Fortunat-us, a, um, fortunate. 
 
 For-um, \, forum. 
 
 Fossa, oe. ditch. 
 
 Fraen-um, i, bridle, 396; pi., fraenl 
 
 and frsena. 
 Frater, (fratr) is, brother. 
 Fraterorus, a, mvci, fraternal. 
 Fraus, (fraud) is, 293, fraud. 
 FrigTis, (frigor) is, 344, b, cold. 
 Fruct-us, us, fruit. 
 Frument-ari (frumentat-), dep., to 
 
 collect corn. 
 Frument-um, i, com. 
 Frustra, adv.. in vain. 
 Fug-a, ^, flight. 
 Fug-are (av-, at-), to rout, put to 
 
 flight. 
 Fug-ax, (fugac) is, 107, fugitive, 
 
 fleeting. 
 Fug-6re (io, fug-, fngit), to flee. 
 Fulgur, (fulgur) is, 325, lightning. 
 Fund-ere (fud-, fus-),^o pour out, to 
 
 overthroio, discomfit. 
 Funditor, (funditor) is, 319, slinger. 
 Futur-us, a, van, future. 
 
 Q. 
 
 Galb-a, se, Galba. 
 Galli-a, se, Gaul. 
 Gallin-a, gb, hen. 
 Gall-us, i, a Gaul. 
 Garumn-a, ae, Garonne (river). 
 Gaud-ere {gavisus sum), to rejoice. 
 Gaudi-um, i,joy. 
 Gener, i, son-in-law. 
 Gene V- a, jb, Geneva. 
 Gens, (gent) is, 293, nation. 
 Genus, (gener) is, 344, b, race, class. 
 Ger -ere (gess-, gest-), to carry on ; 
 
 gerere bellum, to carry on war. 
 Gemian-us, i, a German. 
 Gladi-us, i, sword. 
 Glori-a, oe, glory. 
 Graec-us, a, um, Greek. 
 Grando, (grandin) is, 339, hail. 
 Grati-a, se, influence, favour, poptir- 
 
 larity. 
 Gratul-ftri (gratulat-), dep., to con 
 
 gratulate. 
 
LATIN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 
 
 S67 
 
 Grat-us, a, um, agreeable. 
 
 Gravis, is, e, heavy, severe. 
 
 Graviter, adv., heavily, disagreea- 
 ble ; graviter fert, he is indignant 
 at. 
 
 Gregatim, adv., in flocks. 
 
 Gubem-fire (av , at-), to steer, direct, 
 govern. 
 
 Gubemator, (gubematdr) is, 319, pi- 
 lot, governor. 
 
 H. 
 
 Hab-ere (habu-, habit-)> to have, hold, 
 
 esteem. 
 Hannibal, (Hannibal) is, Hannibal. 
 Haud, adv., not. 
 Helveti-us, i, a Helvetian. 
 Herb-a, ae, herb. 
 Hercyni-us. a, um, Hercynian; Her- 
 
 cynia sylva, the Hercynian forest. 
 Heri, adv., yesterday. 
 Hibem-a, orum, winter-quarters. 
 Hiberni-a, ae, Ireland. 
 Hie, haec, hoc, this, 156. 
 Hiem-are (av-, at-), to winter. 
 Hiems, (liiem) is, 293, winter. 
 Hirundo, (hirundin) is, 339, swallow. 
 Hispani-a, ae, Spain. 
 Hispan-us, i, a Spaniard. 
 Histori-a, ae, history. 
 Hodie, adv., to-day. 
 Homer-US, i, Homer. 
 Homo, (homin) is, m., man. 
 Honest-e, adv., honourably. 
 Honest-us, a, um, honourable. 
 Honor, (honor) is, 319, honour. 
 Hor-a, ae, hour. 
 Horati-us, i, Horace. 
 Hort-ari (hortat-), to exhort, dap. 
 Hort-us, i, garden. 
 Hospes, (hospit) is, c, guest, host. 
 Hostis, (host) is, c, enemy. 
 Human-us, a, um, human. 
 Humanitas, (humanitat) is, 293, cul 
 
 tivation, refinement, humanity. 
 Humilis, is, e, 107, loic. 
 
 Ibi, adv., there. 
 
 Idem, eadem, idem, the sam£, 150. 
 
 Idone-us, a, \nn,fit, suitable. 
 
 Idus, iduum (4th declen.), the Ides, 
 112, 2. 
 
 Ignavi-a, ae, indolence, cowardicd 
 
 Ignav-us, a, um, indolentf coicardly. 
 
 Ignis, (ign) is, m., 302, 'SL.,fire. 
 
 Ignomini-a, ae, disgrace, ignominy. 
 
 Ignor-are (av-, at-), to be ignorant. 
 
 Ignoratio, (ignoration) is, 333, R., 
 ignorance. 
 
 nie, ilia, illud, this, that, 158. 
 
 Imago, (imagin) is, 339, image. 
 
 Imber, (imbr) is, 320, shower of rain, 
 
 Immemor, (immemor) is, 107, wn- 
 mindful, with gen. 
 
 Immens-us, a, um, immense. 
 
 Immortalis, is, e, 104, immortal. 
 
 Impediment-um, i, hinderance; im- 
 pedimenta, pi., the baggage of an 
 army. 
 
 Imped-ire (iv-, it-), to hinder, im- 
 pede. 
 
 Impend-Sre, to hang over. 
 
 Imper-are (av-, at-), to command, 
 with dat. 
 
 Imperator, (imperator) is, 319, com- 
 mander, general. 
 
 Imperi-um, i, command. 
 
 Impetr-are (av-, at), to accomplish, 
 effect, obtain. 
 
 Impet-us, us, onset, attach ; impetum 
 facere, to make an attack. 
 
 Impie, adv., 215, 1, impiously. 
 
 Impi-us, a, um, impious. 
 
 Impl-ere (implev-, implet-), to fill vp. 
 
 Implor-are (av-, at-), to implore. 
 
 Impon-ere (imposu-, imposit-, in+ 
 ponere, 407), to place in or upon. 
 
 Import-are (jrt-, at-), to bring ir 
 import. 
 
 Improb-us, a, um, wicked, dishone. 
 
 In, prep, with ace., into, agains 
 with abl., in, among. 
 
368 
 
 LATIN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 
 
 Incend-6re (incend-, incens-), to set \ 
 Jire to, to burn. \ 
 
 Incert-us, a, um, doubtful, uncer- 
 tain. 
 
 Incip-ere (io, incep-, incept), to be- 
 gin. 
 
 Incol-a, 8B, inhabitant. 
 
 Incol-Sre (incolu-, incult-), dwell in, 
 inhabit. 
 
 Incommod-um, i, inconvenience. 
 
 Incredibilis, is, e, 104, incredible. 
 
 Increp-are (increpa-, increpit-, 390), 
 to chide. 
 
 Incus-are (av-, at-), io blame. 
 
 Inde, adv., thence. 
 
 Indici-um, i, private infoi-mation. 
 
 Indign-us, a, um, umoorthy. 
 
 Induc-6re (indux-, induct-), to lead 
 to, induce. 
 
 Indulg-ere (induls-, iadult-), with 
 dat., to indulge. 
 
 Ineptioe, arum, 57, Ti., folly. 
 
 Inerti-a, ae, idleness. 
 
 Infans, (infant) is, c, infant; (in+ 
 fari, that cannot speak). 
 
 Inferior, (inferior) is, comp. of infe- 
 rus, 370, inferior, lower. 
 
 Inferre (intul-, illat-, in+ferre), to 
 bring upon; bellum alicui inferre, 
 to wage war upon any one. 
 
 Ingeni-um, i, talent. 
 
 Ingens, (ingent) is, 107, great, enor- 
 mous. 
 
 Inimiciti-a, ?b, enmity. 
 
 Inimic-us, a, um, hostile, unfriendly, 
 with dat. 
 
 Initi-um, i, beginning. 
 
 Injuri-a, ee, injury, outrage. 
 
 Injust us, a, um, unjust. 
 
 Innocens, (innocent) is, 107, in7W- 
 cent. 
 
 Innocenti-a, ae, innocence. 
 
 Innumerabilis, is, e, 104, innumer- 
 able. 
 
 Inops, (inop) is, 107, poor. 
 
 Inquam, / say ; inquit, says he, 610. 
 
 Insciens, (inscient) is, 107, not know- 
 ing. 
 
 Insect-um, i, insect. 
 
 Insequ-i (insecut-), dep., to pursue. 
 
 Insidi-ae, arum, 57, R., snares, am- 
 bush. 
 
 Instig-are (av-^ at-), to instigate. 
 
 Institut-um, i, purpose, plan. 
 
 Instru-ere (instrux-, instruct-, in-| 
 struere), to draw up in battle at 
 ray. 
 
 Insul-a, ae, island. 
 
 Intellig-ere (intellex-, intellect-), t 
 perceive, understand. 
 
 Intent-us, a, um, intent, bent upon. 
 
 Inter, prep, with accus., between 
 among. 
 
 Interced-6re (intercess-, intercess-) 
 to intervene. 
 
 Interdiu, adv., by day. 
 
 Interdum, adv., sometimes. 
 
 Inter-esse (interfa-), to be among, to 
 differ ; nihil interest, it makes n» 
 difference. 
 
 Interfector, ( interfector ) is, 319 
 slayer. 
 
 Interfic-ere (interfec-, interfect-, in- 
 ter+facere), to slay, kill. 
 
 Interim, adv., in the mean while. 
 
 Interitus, us, perishing, destruction, 
 death. 
 
 Interi'egn-um, i, intcrreign. 
 
 InteiTog-are (av-, at-), to ask, inter- 
 rogate. 
 
 Intu-eri (intuit-), dep., to look upon. 
 
 Inven ire (inven-, invent-), to _find, 
 discover. 
 
 Invoc-are (av-, at-), to call upon, in- 
 voke. 
 
 Ipse, a, um, 159, self. 
 
 Ir-a, 36, anger. 
 
 Iracundi-a, ae, wrathfulness, wrath. 
 
 ire (iv-, it-), 605, to go. 
 
 Irramp-6re (irrup-, irrupt-, in+rum 
 pei'e), to break into. 
 
 Is, ea, id, this, that, he, she, it, 153. 
 
LATIN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 
 
 369 
 
 Iste, a, ud, that, 157. 
 Ita, adv., so, thus. 
 Italia, 88, Italy. 
 
 Iter, (itiuer) is, n., journey, way, 
 march. 
 
 Jac-ere ( jec-, jact-), to cast, hurl. 
 
 Jact-are (av-, at-), to disctiss. 
 
 Jacul-um, i, dart. 
 
 Jam, «tlv., noio, already. 
 
 Jan-US, i, Jamis. 
 
 Jub-ere ( juss-, juss-), to order. 
 
 Jucund-us, a, um, pleasant. 
 
 Judex, (judic) is, 306, judge. 
 
 Judic-\ire (av-, at-), to judge. 
 
 Judici-um, i, trial, jxtdgment. 
 
 Jugurth-a, se, Jugurtha, 
 
 Jug-um, i, yoke. 
 
 Jument-uui, i, heast ofhurdLen. 
 
 Jnng-ere ( junx-, junct-), to join. 
 
 Juno, (Junon) is, f., Juno (goddess). 
 
 Jupiter, Jovis, 351, Jupiter. 
 
 Jura, 89, Jura (mountain east of 
 
 Gaul). 
 Jur-are (av-, at-), to swear. 
 Jus, (jur) is, 344, law, right. 
 Juss-us, us, command. 
 Justiti-a, 33, jvstice. 
 Just-us, a, vim,just. 
 Juv-are ( juv-, jut-), to hdp. 
 Juvenis, is, a youth. 
 Juventus, (juventut) is, 293, youth. 
 Juxta, prep, with ace, near. 
 
 K. 
 Kalend-OB, arum. Kalends. 
 
 Labienus, i, Labienus, one of Cne- 
 
 sar's lieutenant-generals. 
 Labor, (labor) is, 319, labour, toil. 
 Labor-are (av-, at-), to labour. 
 Lac, (lact) is, 346, 2, milk. 
 Lacess-6re (iv-, it-, 406, III., b), to 
 
 provoke, harass. 
 Lacrj'm-a, cb, tear 
 
 Lac -us, us, lake. , 
 
 Lapis, (lapid) is, 295, 3, stone. 
 Larg-iri (it-), dep., to give largest, 
 
 to bribe, 515, 
 Larg-iter, adv., 215, 2, b, largely, 
 
 largiter potest, he can largely ^ 
 
 i. e.^ lie is quite powerful. 
 Lat-e, adv., 215, 1, widely- (lat-us, 
 
 wide). 
 Latin-us, a, um, Latin. 
 Latitudo, (latitudin) is, 340, breadth 
 
 (from latus, broad). 
 Latins, adv., more widely (compar 
 
 of late, 376). 
 Latro, (latron) is, 331, a, robber. 
 Lat-us, a, um, broad, wide. 
 Laud-are (av-, at-), to praise. 
 Laus, (laud) is/ 293, praise. 
 Legatio, (legation) is, 333, R., em- 
 
 Legat-us, i, lieutenant, ambassador'. 
 L6g-6re (leg-, lect-, 416, a), to read. 
 Legio, (legion) is, 333, R., legioru 
 Lemann-us, i. Lake Leman, or Ge^ 
 
 neva. 
 Leo, (leon) is, 333, lion. 
 Lepus, (lepor) is, m., 345, 4, hare. 
 Lev-are (av-, at-), to lighten, alio 
 
 viate. 
 Lex, (leg-) is, 293, law. 
 Libenter, adv., willingly, gladly. 
 Liber, libri, 64, book. 
 Liberalitas, (libcralitat) is, 293, lib 
 
 erality. 
 Liber-e, 215, 1, freely (from liber 
 
 free). 
 Liber-i, orum, 65, R-., children. 
 Liber-tas, (libertat) is, 2^2, freedont 
 
 liberty. 
 Libet, 583, libebat, libuit, or libitum 
 
 est, impers., it is agreeable, it 
 
 pleases, it suits. 
 Lic-eri (licit), dep., to bid money, to 
 
 offer a price. 
 Licet, licuit, licitum est, it is allow 
 
 ed, it is lawful, one must, 583. 
 
370 
 
 LATIN-ENGllSH VOCABULARY 
 
 Lili-um, i, lily. 
 
 Lingu-a, oe, language. 
 
 Litter-a, m, a letter (as of the alpha- 
 bet) ; litter-ae, arum (pi.), a letter, 
 i. e., a7i epistle. 
 
 Littus, (littor) is, 344, b, shore. 
 
 Livi-us, i, Livy, a Roman historian. 
 
 Loc-us, i, pL, i and a, 309, place. 
 
 Long-e, adv., 215, 1,/ar, long : (long- 
 us.) 
 
 Longitudo, ( longitudin ) is, 339, 
 length: (longTis.) 
 
 Long-US, a, um, long. 
 
 Loqu-i (locut-), dep., to speak. 
 
 Lubet. Sec libet. 
 
 Luct-us, us, grief. 
 
 Lad-6re (lus-. Ids-, 401, 3, b), to 
 play. 
 
 Lud-Tis, i, sport, game, play. 
 
 Lun-a, 88, moon. 
 
 Lup-us, i, toolf. 
 
 Lux, (luc) is, 293, light. 
 
 M. 
 Macul-are (av-, at-), to stain. 
 Magis, adv., more. 
 Magister, tri (64), master, teacher. 
 Magistrat-us, us, a magistrate. 
 Magnanimus, a, um (magn-us+ani- 
 
 mus ), high-spirited, viagnani- 
 
 m,ous. 
 Magnitudo, (magnitudin) is (340), 
 
 extent, greatness. 
 Magnus, a, um, great ; comp., ma- 
 jor, greater. 
 Male, adv. (215, 1, R.), badly. 
 Maleficium, i (800, 2), evil deed, 
 
 crime.. 
 Malle (592), to be more mlling, to 
 
 prefer; perf, malui. 
 Malum, i, einl, misfort^ine. 
 Man-ere (mans-, mans-), 665, III., 
 
 to remain. 
 Manus, iis (f., 112, 2), hand, band 
 
 of soldiers. 
 Mare, (mar) is (314), sea 
 
 Massilia, se, Marseilles. 
 Mater, (matr) is (f., 25, 2), mother. 
 Matrimonium, i, matrimony. 
 Matrona, ee, the Marne, a river of 
 
 Gaul. 
 Matur-are (av-, at-), to hasten. 
 Maxim-e ( adv., 376 ), most, most 
 
 greatly, in the highest degree. 
 Maxim-US, a, um (sup. of magnus, 
 
 370), greatest. 
 Me [ace. and abl. of ego, /), me; 
 
 mecum, with me (125, IL, b). 
 Medicin-a, ae, medicine. 
 Mediterrane-us, a, um, Mediterra- 
 nean (medi-us+terr-a). 
 Medi-us, a, um, middle. 
 Meli-us, adv. (376), better. 
 Memini (defect., 611), I remember; 
 
 meminisse, to remember. 
 Memori-a, ae, memory ; memoria te- 
 
 nere, to hold in memory, to re- 
 
 member. 
 Mens, (ment) is, f., mind. 
 Mercat6r, (mercator) is (319), m^- 
 
 chant. 
 Meridi-es, ei (m., 115), mid-day, 
 
 noon. 
 Merit-um, i, m^erit, desert. 
 Metall-um, i, metal. 
 Met-ere (messu-, mess-, 666, IL, b), 
 
 to reap. 
 Met-iri (mens-), dep., to measure. 
 Metu-ere (raetu-, 666, VI., a), to fear. 
 Me-us, a, um (122), my, mine. 
 Mic-are (micu-, 664, II.), to glitter, 
 
 shine. 
 Migr-are (av-, at), to migrate. 
 Miles, (milit) is, soldier. 
 Mille (sing, indecl., pi. millia, ium), 
 
 thousand. 
 Minerva, k, Minerva. 
 Minim-us, a, una, least [superl. of 
 
 parvus, 370). 
 Minor (minus), 358, less (compar. of 
 
 parvus, 370). 
 Minu-6re (minu-, minotO, 1o diminish. 
 
LATIN-ENOLISH VOCARULARV 
 
 371 
 
 Mii-abil-is, is, e, wonderful. I 
 
 Mii-ific-us, a, um, causing wonder, \ 
 astonishing (mir-us+facere). 
 
 Miser, a, um (77, b), fniserahle, 
 wretched. 
 
 Miseret (impers., 579, a), one pities ; 
 me.miseret, I pity. 
 
 Mitig-are (av-, at-), to mitigate. 
 
 Mitt-6re (mis-, miss-, 401, 3, b), to 
 send. . 
 
 Mod-US, i, measure, manner. 
 
 Moeaia, ium (used only in pi.), walls. 
 
 Moeror, (moeror) is (319), sadness. 
 
 Moa-6re (monu-, monit-), to advise, 
 warn, remind. 
 
 Monstr-are (av-, at-), to show. 
 
 Mord-ere (momord-, mors-, 395, IV.), 
 to bite, champ. 
 
 Mor-i, and mor-iri (mort-), dep., to 
 die. 
 
 Mortal-is, is, e, mortal. 
 
 Mors, (mort) is, 293, death. 
 
 Mos, (mor) is, 331, ], b, custom, man- 
 ner. 
 
 Mot-US, us, motion, mxrving. 
 
 Mov-ere (mov-, mot-, 395, V.), to 
 inove. 
 
 Miilier, (mulier) is, (f.), woman. 
 
 Multitudo, (multitudin) is, 340, mul- 
 titude. 
 
 Mult-us, a, um, much, mxiny. 
 
 Mund-us, i, world. 
 
 Mua-ire (iv-, it-), to fortify. 
 
 Munitio, (mumtion) is, 333, 'R.., forti- 
 fication. 
 
 Munus, (muner) is, 344, 3, b, office, 
 gift. 
 
 Marus, i, wall. 
 
 Miit-are (av-, at-), to change. 
 
 N. 
 Nam, conj.,/<?r. 
 Nasc-i (nat-), dep., to be born, spring 
 
 from. 
 Nat-are (av-, at), to swim. 
 Naut n, re (ra.), sailor 
 
 Natio, (nation) is, 333, R., natioji. 
 
 Natur-a, 83, nature. 
 
 Naval-e, (naval) is, 314, a dock-yard. 
 
 Navigatio, (navigation) is, 333, B,., 
 navigation, voyage. 
 
 Nav-is, (nav) is, 300, ship. 
 
 Ne, interrogative particle, 135, II., a. 
 
 Ne, adv., not, used imperatively, 
 534, a , conj., that not, 548, b. 
 
 Nee, conj., nor. 
 
 Neg-are (av-, at-), to deny, refuse. 
 
 Neglig-ere (neglex-, neglect-i 666, 
 v., a), to neglect. 
 
 Negligeus, (negligent) is, 107, neg- 
 ligent. 
 
 Negoti-um, i, matter, business. 
 
 Nemo, (nemiu) is, c, no one. 
 
 Neque, conj., neither, nor, 515. 
 
 Nequidem, adv., not even, 217; al- 
 ways separated by the words 
 which have the emphasis ; e. g., 
 ne Socrates quidem, not even SoC' 
 rates. 
 
 Nervi-us, i, a Nervian (people of 
 Gaul). 
 
 Nerv-us, i, a sinew. 
 
 Nesc-ire (Iv-, it-), to be igTiorant, not 
 to knozv (ne-fscire). 
 
 Neuter, tra, trmn, 194, 1, neither of 
 the two. 
 
 Nidific-are (av-, at-), to build a nest 
 (nidus-ffacere). 
 
 Niger, nigra, nigrum, 77, a, black. 
 
 Nihil, n., indecL, nothing. 
 
 Nimi-us, a, um, too much. 
 
 Nit-i (nis- and nix-), dep., to strive. 
 
 Nisi, conj., unless, if not. 
 
 Nobilis, is, e, noble, illustrious. 
 
 Nobilitas, (nobilitat) is, 293, nobil- 
 ity. 
 
 Noc-ere (nocu-, nocit-), to hurt, with 
 dat. 
 
 Noctu, adv., by night. 
 
 Nolle, nolui, to be unwilling, 592. 
 
 Nomen, (nomin) is, 344, a, name. | 
 
 N6n, adv., 7}of. 
 
872 
 
 LATIN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY 
 
 Nonne, interrogative particle (ex- 
 pects answer yes). 
 
 Nonnullus, a, um, some ; nonnuUi, 
 some {persons). 
 
 Nonnunquam, adv^., sometimes. 
 
 Non-US, a, um, ninth. 
 
 Nos, ice, 120. 
 
 Nosc-ere (nov-, not-), to learn, knoro. 
 
 Noster, tra, trum, 122, onr. 
 
 Nov-i (gen. of novus), news, 174 (vo- 
 cab.). 
 
 N6v-i, defective, / know, 611 ; no- 
 visse, to knoiD. 
 
 Novissimus, a, um (superl. of no- 
 vus), newest, latest ; novissimum 
 agmen, the rear-ranh. 
 
 Novitas, (novitat) is, 293, novelty 
 (novus). 
 
 Nov-us, a, um, new. 
 
 Nox, (noct) is, 293, night. 
 
 Nub-es, (nub) is, 300, cloud. 
 
 Nud-us, a, um, naked. 
 
 Nullus, a, um, gen. nullius, dat. 
 nulli, 194, 1, n/) one, none. 
 
 Num (interrog. particle),, whether 
 (expects the answer no, 174). 
 
 Numa, 8B (m.), Numa. 
 
 Numer-us, i, number. 
 
 Nunti-are (av-, at-), to announce. 
 
 Nunti-us, i, a messenger. 
 
 Nunquam, adv., -never. 
 
 Nuptiae, arum, 57, R., a marriage. 
 
 Nutrix, (nutric) is, 293, nurse. 
 
 O. 
 
 Ob (prep, with ace), on account of. 
 Obseratus, a, um, a debtor. 
 Obscur-are (av-, at-), to obscure. 
 Obsecr-are (av-, at-), to beseech. 
 Obses, (obsid) is (c), hostage. 
 Obstring-ere (obstrinx-, obstrict-), to 
 
 bind : ob+stringerc. 
 Obtin-ere (obtinu-, obtent-), to hold, 
 
 maintain : ob+tenere. 
 Occas-us, us, setting, e. g., of the sun ; 
 
 oceasfi solis, sutiset, 118, IT., c. 
 
 Occidens, (Occident) is, m. (sol un. 
 derstood), tcest. 
 
 Occid-ere ( occid-, occas-, ob + ca- 
 dere), to fall, set, die. 
 
 Occld-ere (occid-, occis-, ob + ca9- 
 dere), to slay, kill. 
 
 Occup-are (av-, at-), to seize, take 
 possession of. 
 
 Oceanus, i, ocean. 
 
 Octavus, a, um, eighth. 
 
 Octogiuta (indecl.), eighty. 
 
 Octoni, ae, a, eight each, eight at a 
 time, 197. ' 
 
 Ocul-us, i, eye. 
 
 Odi (defect., Ql\),Ihate; odisse, to 
 hate. 
 
 Odi-um, i, hatred. 
 
 Oifend-ere (offend-, offens-, ob+fen- 
 dere), to offend. 
 
 Olim, adv., once upon a time, for- 
 merly. 
 
 Omnino, adv., altogether, in all. 
 
 Omnis, is, e, all, every, the whole', 
 omnis res, the whole affair. 
 
 Onus, (oner) is, 344, b, burden, load. 
 
 Oper-a, 03, toil, labour. 
 
 Oportet (impers., 583), oportebat, 
 oportuit, it behooves, one oxtght. 
 
 Oppidan-US, a, um, of or belonging 
 to a town, a townsman. 
 
 Oppid-um, i, a town. 
 
 Opprim-ere (oppress-, oppress-, ob 
 +premere), to repress, crush. 
 
 Oppugn-are (av-, at-), to attack, be- 
 siege (ob+pugnare). 
 
 Ops, opis, 293, power ; opes, resour- 
 ces, means. 
 
 Optim-us, a, um, best {superl. of 
 bonus). 
 
 Opulens, (opulent) is, 107, rich, opu- 
 lent. 
 
 Opus, (oper) is, 344, b, work. 
 
 Oracul-um, i, oracle. 
 
 Or-are (av-, at-), to pray, beg, beseech. 
 
 Oratio, (oration) is, 333, R., m-atiov. 
 speech. 
 
LATIN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 
 
 373 
 
 Orator, (orator) is, 319, orator. 
 
 Orb-is, (orb) is (m., 302, R.), orh, cir- 
 cle ; orbis teiTarum, the woi'ld. 
 
 Ordo, (ordin) is (m., 340, exc), order. 
 
 Orgetorix, (Orgetorig) is, OrgetoHx, 
 a Helvetian chieftain. 
 
 Origo, (origin) is, 339, oHgin. 
 
 Or-iri (ort-), dep., to rise. 
 
 Om-are (av-, at-), to adorn. 
 
 Omatus, a, um, adorned, part, of or- 
 nare. 
 
 Ostend-^re (ostend-, ostens-, db+ 
 tendere), to show. 
 
 Ostent-are (av-, at-), to vaunt. 
 
 P. 
 
 Pabulatio, (pabulation) is, 333, R.. 
 
 foddering, foraging. 
 Peene, adv., almost. 
 Pag-us, i, village, canton. 
 Palus, (palud) is, 293, marsh. 
 Par-are (av-, at-), to 'prepare. 
 Parat-us, a, um, prepared, ready 
 
 (part. pass, of parare). 
 Parc-ore (peperc-, pars- and paicit-, 
 
 666, IV., V), to spare, -v^'Vih. dat. 
 Par-6re (paru-), with dat., to obey. 
 Pars, (part) is, 293, part. 
 Parsimoui-a, ee, parsimony, frugal- 
 ity. 
 Parv-us, a, um, small, little. 
 Pastor, (pastor) is, 319, sheplierd. 
 Pater, (patr) is, father ; patres, um, 
 
 patricians of Rome. 
 Pat-ere (patii-), to he open, extend. 
 Pat-i, (pass-), dep., to svffer. 
 Patienter, adv., 215, 2, h, patiently. 
 Patienti-a, a3, patience, endurance. 
 Paucitas, (paucitat) is, ^^Z, fewness. 
 Pauci, E8, di,few. 
 
 PauUisper, adv., for a little zohile 
 Paullo, adv., a little; paullo longius, 
 
 a little too far. 
 Pauper, (pauper) is, 107, poor. 
 Paupertas, (panpertat) is, 293, pov- 
 erty. 
 
 Pax, (pac) is, 293, peace. 
 
 Pecc-are (av-, at-), to sin. 
 
 Peccat-um, i, sin. 
 
 Pecuni-a, se, money. 
 
 Pedes, (pedit) is, ^QQ, foot-soldier. 
 
 Pell-6re (fJepul-, puis-, 411, b), to 
 
 drive, rout, expel, defeat. 
 PeUis, (pell) is, 300, hide, skin. 
 Pend-efe (pepeud-, pens-, 666, IV., 
 
 a)) to tceigh, pay. 
 Pene, adv., almost. 
 Peninsula, se, peninsula (pene+iu- 
 
 Bula). 
 Per {prep, vfiih accus.), through, 
 
 during. 
 Perdives, (perdivit-) is, 107, very 
 
 rich. 
 Perduc-6re (perdux-, perduct-, per-f 
 ducere), to lead through, bring 
 along. 
 Perfacilis, is, e, very easy. 
 Peiferre (pertul-, perlat-, pei4-ferre), 
 
 to convey, bear through. 
 Perfic-ere (perfec-, perfect-, per+fa- 
 cere), to accomplish, finish, bring 
 to pass. 
 Perfring-ere (perfreg-, perfract-, per 
 
 +frangere), to break thi-ough. 
 Pei-fug-a, se, deserter. 
 Perg-ere (perrex-, perrect-), to go 
 
 on, go straight. 
 Pericul-um, i, danger. 
 Per-iro (peri-, perit-, per+ire), to 
 
 perish. 
 Peritus, a, um, skilful, skilled in 
 
 (with geji.). 
 Perm6v-ere (permov-, permot-), to 
 
 move thoroughly, to induce 
 Pemici-es, ei, destruction 
 Perpauci, oe, a, very few. 
 Perpetu-us, a, um, perpetual. 
 PeiTump-ere (perrup-, pernipt-, per 
 
 +rumpere), to break through. 
 Pers-a, se, a Persian. 
 Persequ-i (persecut-, per + sequi). 
 dep., to follow after, pursue. 
 
 Il 
 
374 
 
 J.ATm-ENGlJSH VOCABULARY. 
 
 Persever-are {&v-, at), to persevere. 
 Persolv-ere (persolv-, persolut-j per 
 
 +solvere), to pay up, pay in full ; 
 
 poenas persolvere, to suffer full 
 
 punishment. 
 Perspic-ere (perspex-, perspect-), to 
 
 observe, get sight of, see plainly. 
 Persuad-ere (persuas-, persuas-), to 
 
 persuade, convince. 
 Perterr-ere (perterru-, perterrit-), to 
 
 frighten thoroughly. 
 Perttn-ere (pertina-, per+tenere), to 
 
 reach, belong to, extend to. 
 Perturb-ai-e (av-, at-), to disturb, con- 
 found. 
 Perven-ire (ven-, veut-), to arrive at, 
 
 co7ne to. 
 Pes, (ped) is (m., 295, 3), foot ; pe- 
 
 dem referre, to draw back the 
 
 foot, to retreat. 
 Pet-6re (petiv^ petit-), to seek, aim 
 
 at, strive after. 
 Petr-a, ee, rock. 
 
 Phalanx, (phalang) is, 293, phalanx. 
 Pilars al us, i, Pharsalus, a town in 
 
 Thessaly. 
 Philosoph-ari (at-), dep., to philoso- 
 phize. 
 Piget (impers., 579, a), pigiiit, it 
 
 grieves, pains, disgusts ; I am 
 Pil-um, i, javelin. [grieved at. 
 
 Pisc-is, (pise) is (m., 302, Ii.),fsh. 
 Pius, a, um, pious. 
 Plac-ere (placu-, placTt-), to please 
 
 (with dat.). 
 placet (impers., 584, a), placuit, it 
 pleases ; Cffisaii placuit, Ccesar 
 
 determined. 
 Placid-us, a, um, calm, placid. 
 Plant-a, 83, plant. 
 Plan-us, a, um, level, plain. 
 Plato, (Platoa) is, Plato. 
 Plebs, (pleb) is, 293, common people. 
 Plen-ns, a, nm, full. 
 Plerique, pleroeque, pleraque, most, 
 
 the grenfei- pni *.. 
 
 Plerumque. a.Av.,for the most pari, 
 
 Plum-a, se,featJi€r. 
 
 Plui-im-us, a, um (superl, of multas), 
 
 Tnost, very many. 
 Plurimum, adv., very much, in the 
 
 highest degree. 
 Pocul-um, i, cup. 
 
 Poen-a, te, punishment ; poenas per- 
 solvere, pay the full penalty. 
 Pcenitet (impers., 579), poeuituit, it 
 
 repents ; me poenitet, / repent. 
 Poet-a, oe (m.), poet. 
 Pompeius, i, Pompey. 
 Pon-ere (posu-, posit-), to place, 
 
 castra ponere, to pitch the camp. 
 Pons, (pont) is (m., 295, 1), bridge. 
 Popul-ari (at-), dep., to plunder, lay 
 
 waste. 
 Popul-us, i, people. 
 Port-a, 85, gate. 
 Port-are (av-, at-), to carry. 
 Port-iis, us, harbour. 
 Portori-um, i, tax, customs duty. 
 Posc-ere (poposc-, 411, a), to demand 
 
 (admits two accusatives). 
 Posse, potui, to be able, can, 587. 
 Possessio, (possession) is, 333, R-., 
 
 Possid-ere (possed-, possess-), to 
 
 Post, prep, with ace, after, behind. 
 Postea, adv., afterward. 
 Poster-US, a, um, after ; postero die, 
 on the day after, on the next day. 
 Postquam, adv., after that. 
 Postul are (av-, at-), to demand. 
 Potens, (potent) is, 107, poiverful. 
 Potestas, (potestat) is, 293, poicer. 
 Pot-Iri (it-), dep., with gen. or abl. 
 
 to acquire, get possession of. 
 Prae (prep, with abl.), before. 
 Praeb-ere (praebu-, pra9bit-), to of 
 
 ford. 
 Prasced-ere (cess-, cess-), to go be 
 
 fore, excel. 
 Vrreceps, fnraecipit) is, 107, headlong 
 
LATIN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 
 
 375 
 
 Pi oeceptoi , (proBceptoi') is, a teacher, 
 preceptor. 
 
 Praecept-um, i, -precept. 
 
 Praecip-ere { cep-, cept-, prae + ca- 
 pere), to command, enjoin. 
 
 Prseclar-us, a, una, illustrious. 
 
 Praeco, (praecon) is, herald. 
 
 Praed-a, ae, booty, prey. 
 
 PraeJ-ari (at-), dep., to plunder, gel 
 booty. 
 
 Praedic-are (av-, at-), to declare. 
 
 Praedo, (praedon) is, pirate. 
 
 Praeesse, proefui, to be over, com- 
 mand (pj-ae-fesse), with dat. 
 
 Praeferre (tnl-, lut-), to prefer. 
 
 Praefic-ere (lee-, feet-, prae+faceve), 
 to place over. 
 
 Praemitt-ere (?jqIs-, miss-), to send be- 
 fore. 
 
 PraBmi-um, i, rewai-d. 
 
 Praemuiti-a, or praenuncia, ae, har- 
 binger. 
 
 Praesertim, adv., especially. 
 
 Praesidi-um, i, garrison, defence. 
 
 Praestans, (praestant) is, 107, excel- 
 lent. 
 
 Prasst-are (stit-, stit-), to stand be- 
 fore, excr.l. 
 
 Praeter, prep, with ace, besides, ex- 
 cept. 
 
 Praeter-iro (iv- and i-, it-, praeter-l- 
 ire, 605, 2), to pass by. 
 
 Praetor, (praetor) is, a prcetor (Roman 
 magistrate). 
 
 Preti-um, i, price, reward. 
 
 Prex, (prec) is, 293, prayer. 
 
 Primus, a, um, ^rsf. 
 
 Princeps, (princip) is, 107, chief {used 
 only as a nomi). 
 
 Principat-us, us, chieftainship, chief 
 authority. 
 
 Principi-um, i, beginning, principle. 
 
 Pristin-us, a, um, ancient, former. 
 
 Privatim, adv., privately. 
 
 Privat-us, a, nm, private. 
 
 Pritisquara, adv., before that. 
 
 Pro (prep, with abl), before, for, in 
 
 view of. 
 Prob-are (av-, at-), to prove. 
 Prob-itas, (probitat) is, 293, honesty. 
 Prob-us, a, um, honest. 
 Proced-ere (cess-, cess-, 401, 3, b), to 
 
 advance, go forward. 
 Procell-a, ae, tempest. 
 Procurr-6re '" (curr-, curs-, pro + cur- 
 
 rere), to run foi^ward. 
 Prod-esse (pro-j-esse), to profit, vfx\^ 
 
 dat. _ 
 Proelium, i, battle, fight. 
 Profectio, (profection) is, 333, R., 
 
 setting out, departure. 
 Proficisc-i (profect-), dep., to set out, 
 
 depart. 
 Prohib-ere (prohibu-, prohibit-, pro-(- 
 
 habere), to restrain, keep off. 
 Projic-ere (jec-, ject-, pro+jacere), 
 
 to throio forward, throw. 
 Prope (prep, with ace), near, nigh 
 
 to ; propius, nearer ; proxime, 
 
 nearest. 
 Propell-6re (pul-, puis-, pro + pel- 
 
 lere), drive on, drive away. 
 Proper-are (av-, at-), hasten. 
 Propinquus, a, um, near to, related 
 
 to; propinquus (used as noun), a 
 
 relation. 
 Propius. See prope. 
 Propon-6re (posu-, posit-, pro-f-po- 
 
 nere), to set before, propose. 
 Propter (prep, with accus.), on ac- 
 count of. 
 Propterea, adv., therefore; propte- 
 
 rea quod, because, for the reason 
 
 that. 
 Propuls-are (av-, at-), to ward off, 
 
 avert, repel. 
 Prorsus, adv., straight on, truly, pre- 
 cisely. 
 Prosequi (prosecut-), dep., to pursue. 
 Proverbi-um, i, proverb. 
 Providenti-a, 88, Providence (pro+ 
 
 \ad6re). 
 
376 
 
 LATIN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 
 
 Provinci-a, as, province. 
 
 Proxim-us, a, um (super!., 371), next. 
 
 nearest. 
 Ptolemaeus, i, Ptolemy. 
 Pudet (impers., 579, a), puiduit, it 
 
 shames, one is ashamed. 
 Puell-a, te, girl. 
 Paer, i. boy. 
 
 Pugn-are (av-, at-), iojiglit. 
 Pulvis, (pulver) is, 331, b, dust. 
 Pun-ire (iv-, it-), to punish. 
 Put-are (av-, at-), to suppose, think, 
 
 reckon. 
 Pyrenaei (montes), tlie Pyrenees, 
 
 mountaius between Gaul and 
 
 Spain.. 
 
 Uaadringenti, tB, z.,four hundred. 
 duagr-ere (quaesiv-, quaesit-), to seek, 
 
 ask, inquire into. 
 daalis, is, e, of tohat kind ; talis — 
 
 qualis, such — as, 184. 
 Cluam, conj., than. 
 duamdiu, adv., how long. 
 duamvis, conj., although. 
 duando, adv., when. 
 duantus, a, um, hovj great, 184. 
 duantuscunque, -acunque, -umcun- 
 
 que, horcever great, 184. 
 duasi, adv., as if. 
 duateni-i, ae, Q.,four apiece, four at 
 
 a time, 189. 
 duattuor, indecl.,/o«r. 
 due, conj., and, 517, a. 
 dueo, / am able, 606. 
 duer-i (quest-), to complain. 
 dui, quae, quod, who, which, what, 
 
 164. 
 duia, conj., because. 
 ddid, neut. of quis, used interrog., 
 
 what ? as adv., why ? 
 duicunque, iohosoever, 164, R. 
 duidam, quaedam, quoddam, or quid- 
 dam, a certain one ; plur., some, 
 
 178. 1. 
 
 duidem, adv., indeed. 
 
 duilibet, quoelibet, quodlibet, any 
 one, any you please, 178, 2. 
 
 duin, conj., but that, that not, 558, b 
 
 duindecim, mdecX., fifteen. 
 
 duinge^t-i, oe, %five hundred. 
 
 duinque, indecl.,^z;e. 
 
 duint-us, a, um., fifth. 
 
 duire, to be able, 606. 
 
 duis, quae, quid, interrog., who, 
 which, what 1 170. 
 
 duisnam, qua)nam, quidnam ? pray 
 \ohol what? 171. 
 
 duispiam, quaspiam, quodpiam, quid 
 piam, somebody, some, 178, 4. 
 
 duisquam, quicquam, or quodquam, 
 any, any one, 178, 3. 
 
 duisque, quaeque, quodque, quid- 
 que, each, every one, 178, 6. 
 
 duisquis, whoever, whatever, 637, 3. 
 
 duivis, any one you please, 178, 2. 
 
 duo, adv., whither, in which direc- 
 tion 1 
 
 duo, conj., to the end that, that, so 
 that, 558, a. 
 
 duod, conj., because. 
 
 duod, rel. pron. neut. of qui. 
 
 duomimis, that the less, that not, af- 
 ter verbs of hindering, &.C., 558, c, 
 
 duondam, adv., formerly, at on^ 
 time. 
 
 duoniam, conj., since, because. 
 
 duoque, conj., also. 
 
 duot, so many, how many 1 184. 
 
 duotannis, adv., yearly. 
 
 duotidian-us, a, um, daily. 
 
 duot-us, a, um, what one 1 quota 
 hora, what d clock 1 
 
 duum, conj., when, since, 561 
 
 Rapin-a, oe, rapine, plunder. 
 Ratio, (ration) is, 333, R., reason, 
 
 manner, plan. 
 Rauracus, i, a Ranracian, people of 
 
 Gaul. 
 
LATIN-ENGLISH VOCABLLARY. 
 
 377 
 
 Rebellio, (rebellion) is, 333, R., re- 
 bellion. 
 
 Ileced-6re (cess-, cess-, 401, 3, h), to 
 give way, retreat. 
 
 Recip-ere (cep-, cept-, re+capere, 
 io, 416, c, 199), to receive back, 
 take back ; se recipere, to take 
 one's self back, to go back. 
 
 Rect-e, adv., 215, 1, rightly. 
 
 Redd- ere (reddid-, reddit-, re+dare), 
 666, IV., c), give back, return, re- 
 store. 
 
 Redintegr-are (av-, at-), to renew. 
 
 Redim-ere (redem-, redempt-, re + 
 emere), to buy back, redeem, farm 
 (as revenues). 
 
 Reditio, (redition) is, 333, R., return 
 (redire). 
 
 Reduc-6re (dux-, duct-, re+ducere), 
 to bring, bring back. 
 
 Referre (retul-, relat-,' re+ferre), to 
 bring back, to draw back ; pedem 
 referre, to retreat. 
 
 Refer t, it matters, it concerns, it in- 
 terests, 584, d. 
 
 Refic-ere (fee-, feet-, re+facere), to 
 renew, rebuild, 
 
 Reg-6re (rex-, rect-) to rule. 
 
 Regin-a, ae, queen, 
 
 Regn-are (av-, at-), to reign. 
 
 Regn-um, i, kingdom, royal power. 
 
 Relinqn-6re (reliqu-, relict-), to leave. 
 
 Reliqui ae, arum, 57, R., remains, 
 remnant. 
 
 Reliqu-us, a, um, remaining. 
 
 Reminisc-i (dep.), to remember (with 
 gen). 
 
 Rem6v-ere (remdv-, remot-), to re- 
 move. 
 
 Renunti-are (av-, at-), to bring back 
 word, report. 
 
 Repell-6re (repul-, repuls-, re+pel- 
 lere), to repd, drive back. 
 
 Repente, adv., suddenly. 
 
 Repentin-us, a, uni, sudden; repen- 
 fina res, the sitdden occurrence. 
 
 Reper-Ire (reper-, repert-, 427, V.), 
 to find out, to discover. 
 
 Repet-Sre (repetiv- and repeti-, re- 
 petit-), to demand back, to ash 
 again 
 
 Repugn-are (av-, at-, re+pugnare) 
 io oppose, resist. 
 
 Res, rei, thing ; res novae (pi.), rev 
 olutioTi^; res familiaris, private 
 property. 
 
 Rescind-ere (rescid-, resciss-), to cut 
 down, to cut in pieces. 
 
 Resist-ere (restit-, restit-), 390, in- 
 trans., to halt, stop; with dat., to 
 resist. 
 
 Respond-ere (respond-, respons-, 665, 
 IV.), to answer. 
 
 Respublic-a, reipublicae, 351, 3, re- 
 public, state. ^ . - ■ 
 
 Ret-e, (ret) is, 312, net. 
 
 Retin-ere (retinu-, retent-, re+te- 
 nere), to restrain, hold back, re- 
 tain. 
 
 Revert-ere (revert-, revers-, 422), to 
 turn back, return. 
 
 Revert-i (revers-), dep., to return, 
 
 Revoc-are (av-, at-), to call back, re- 
 call. 
 
 Rex, (reg) is (m.), king 
 
 Rhen-us, i, Rhine (river). 
 
 Rhetoric-a, ae, rhetoric. 
 
 Rhodau-us, i, Rhone (river). 
 
 Rid-ere (ris-, ris-), to laugh. 
 
 Rip-a, ae, bank of a river. 
 
 Ris-us, us, laughter. 
 
 Robur, (robor) is, 344, a, strength. 
 
 Rog-are (av-, at-), to ask. 
 
 Roman-US, a, um, Roman; Roma 
 nus (used as noun), a Roman. 
 
 Romul-us, i, Romulus. ' 
 
 Ros-a, ae, a rose. 
 
 Rot-a, ae, tvheel. 
 
 Ruber, bra, brum, 77, a, red. 
 
 Rumor, (rumor) is, 319, rumour, re» 
 port. 
 
 Rursus, adv., backward, again. 
 
 i2 
 
378 
 
 LATIN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 
 
 S. 
 Sacer, era, cram, 77, a, sacred,. Mons 
 
 Sacer, the Sacred Mount; sacra, 
 
 oi-um, sacred rites. 
 Saepe, adv., oftcTt,. 
 SsBviti-a, oe, cruelty. 
 Sagittari-us, i, archer. 
 Sagunt-um, i, Saguntum, & town in 
 
 Spain. 
 Salt-are (av-, at-), to dance. 
 Salus, (salut) is, 293, safety^ 
 Salv-us, a, um, saje. 
 San-are (av-, at:), to heal, cure. 
 Sanct-us, a, um, sacred. 
 Sanguis, (sanguin) is (m.), blood. 
 Sapiens, (sapient) is, 107, wise, a 
 
 wise man. 
 Sapienter, 215, 2, b, wisely. 
 Sapienti-a, », wisdom. 
 Satis, adv., enough. 
 Satius, comp. of satis ; satius est, it 
 
 is better. 
 Scliol-a, as, school. 
 Scienti-a, se, science, knoicledge. 
 Scind-6re (scid-, sciss-), to cut, cut 
 
 down. 
 Scipio, (Scipion) is, Scipio. 
 Sc-ire (sciv-, scit-), to k?tow. 
 Scrib-ere (scrips-, script-), to write. 
 Scriptor, (scriptor) is, 319, writer. 
 Se, ace. of sui, 142. 
 Seced-6re (secess-, secess-), to se- 
 cede. 
 Secreto, adv., secretly, privately. 
 Secund-us, a, um, second, following. 
 Sed, but. 
 Sed-ere (sed-, sess-, 394, V.), to sit, 
 
 sit down. 
 Seditios-us, a, um, seditious. 
 Semel, adv., once ; semel atque ite- 
 
 ram, once and again. 
 Sementis> (sement) is, a sowing (of 
 
 com). 
 Semper, adv., always. 
 Bempitern-us, a, um, eternal. 
 8euat-us, us, senate. 
 
 Senex, (sen) is, 107, old, old man. 
 Senectus, (senectut) is, 293, old age 
 Sen-i, ae, a, six each, six at a time, 
 
 distiib., 189. 
 Sententi-a, as, opinion. 
 Sent-ire (sens-, sens-), to feel, think, 
 
 perceive. 
 Separ-are (av-, at-), to separate. 
 Septem, indecl., seven. 
 September, bris (m.), September. 
 Septentrion-es, um, the north, the 
 
 seven stars composing Ursa Major. 
 Septim-us, a, um, seventh. 
 Septuaginta, indecl., seventy. 
 Sequan-a, se, Seine (river). 
 Sequan-us, i, Sequanian (people of 
 
 Gaul). 
 Sequ-i (secut-), dep., to follow. 
 Ser-6re (sev-, sit-), to sow, plant. 
 Sermo, (sermon) is, 331, sjjeech. 
 Sei-v-are (av-, at-), to keep, preserve. 
 Serv-us, i, slave. 
 Severitas, (severitat) is. 293, sever- 
 
 ity. 
 Sex, indecl., six. 
 Sext-us, a, um, sixth. 
 Si, conj., if. 
 Sic, adv., so, thus. 
 Sicut, conj., so as, just ais. 
 Sidus, (sider) is, 344, b, star, coi^ 
 
 stellation. 
 Sigu-um; i, standard, signal. 
 Simil-is, is, e, 104, like (with gen. or 
 
 dat.). 
 Simul, adv., together, at the same 
 
 time; simulac, simulatque, as soon 
 
 as. 
 Sin, conj., but if. 
 Sine, prep, with abl., witJiout. 
 Sitis, (sit) is, 300, thirst. 
 Socer, i, 65, "R., father-in-law. 
 Societas, (societat) is, 293, society, 
 
 fellowship. 
 Soci-us, i, companion, ally. 
 Socrates, (Socrat) is, Socrates. 
 Sol, (Sol) is, the Sun. 
 
I.ATIN-ENGLISll VOCABULARY. 
 
 379 
 
 So/um, adv., only; non solum — sed 
 etiam, not only — hut also. 
 
 Sol-US, a, um, gen. solius, 194, R. 1, 
 alone. 
 
 Somn-us, i, sleep. 
 
 Sordid-US, a, um, sordid, mean. 
 
 Soror, (soror) is, sister. 
 
 Sors, (sort) is, 293, lot. 
 
 Spati-um, i, space, opportunity ; spa- 
 tium arma capiendi. time for ta- 
 king up arms, 492, a. 
 
 Speci-es, ei, appearance. 
 
 Spect-are (av-, at-), to look, look at. 
 
 Spes, ei, hope. 
 
 Splendid-US, a, um, brilliant, .splen- 
 did. 
 
 Splendor, (splendor) is, 319, sjtlen- 
 dour, glare. 
 
 St-are (stet-, stSt-, 387, III.), to stand. 
 
 Statim, adv., immediately. 
 
 Statio, (station) is, 333, R., station, 
 post. 
 
 Statu-6re (statu-, statut-), to appoint, 
 fix, decide. 
 
 Stell-a, te, star. 
 
 Stipendi-um, i, tribute, tax. 
 
 Stipendiari-us, a, um, tributary. 
 
 Stoicus, i, a Stoic. 
 
 String-6re (strinx-, strict-), to draw 
 -. (as a sword). 
 
 Studios©, 215, 1, zealously, studi- 
 ously. 
 
 Studi-um, i, zeal, study, desire. 
 
 Stultiti-a, ae, folly. 
 
 Stult-us, a, um, foolish ; stultus, a 
 fool. 
 
 Suad-ere (suas-, suas-), to advise, to 
 persuade. 
 
 Suav-is, is, e, 104, sweet. 
 
 Sub, prep, with ace., up to, under; 
 with abl., under. 
 
 Subesse (sub+esse), to be ttnder, to 
 be near. 
 
 Subig-ere ( subeg-,- subact-, sub + 
 agere), to subdue. 
 
 8ub-ire (iv-, it-), to go under, to un- 
 
 dergo ; ad pericula subeunda,/or 
 
 undergoing perils. 
 Subito, adv., suddenly. 
 Subjic-^efe (subjec-, subject-, sub + 
 
 jacere), to throto under, to throw 
 
 up. 
 Sublatus, a, um, part, of toUere, ela- 
 ted, puffed up, taken away. 
 Subsist-6re (substit-), to stand still, 
 
 to halt. 
 Subsidi-um, i, assistance, a reserve 
 
 of troops. 
 Suev-us, i, a Suevian (people of 
 
 Germany). 
 Sufferre (sustul-, sublat-, sub+ferre^ 
 
 to bear, sustain. 
 Sui, reflex, pron., 142, himself, h-er- 
 
 self, &c. 
 Sum, I am. (See esse.) 
 Sum-ere (Sumps-, sumpt-, 401, 4, b), 
 
 to take. 
 Summ-us, a, um (superl. of superus, 
 
 370), highest, top of a thing ; in 
 
 summo monte, on the top of the 
 
 mountain. 
 Sumpt-us, us, expense ; sumptu suo, 
 
 at his own expense. 
 Super-are (av-, at-), to overcome. 
 Superior, oris (compar. of superus, 
 
 370), higher. 
 Suppet-6re (suppetiv- and suppeti-, 
 
 suppetit), to be at hand, to be in 
 
 store. 
 Supplici-um, i, punishment. 
 Suscip-6re (susoep-, suscept-, sub+ 
 
 capere), to undertake. 
 Suspicio, (suspicion) is, 333, R., sms- 
 
 picion. 
 Sustin-ere (sustinu-, sustent-, sub-4* 
 
 tenere), to sustain. 
 Suus, a, um, one's own, 143. 
 
 T. 
 
 Tac-ere (tacu-, tacit-), intrans,, to bo 
 
 silent ; trans., to keep secret. 
 Toedet, pertaesum est (impcrs., 576), 
 
380 
 
 LATIN-frNGLISH VOCABULARY. 
 
 it wearies, it disgusts ; me tsedet, 
 r am disgusted. 
 
 Talis, is, e, 184, such. 
 
 Tarn, adv., so. 
 
 Tameii, conj., nevertheless. 
 
 Tang-6re { tetig-, tact-, 411 ), to 
 touch. 
 
 Tanquam, adv., as, like. 
 
 Tantum, so much (neut. of tantus) ; 
 taiitum aari, so much gold, 186. 
 
 Tant-us, a, um, 184, so great. 
 
 Tard-are (av-, at-), to delay.. 
 
 Taur-us, i, bull. 
 
 Tel-um, i, weajyon, dart. 
 
 Temere, adv., rashly. 
 
 Temeritas, (temeritat) is, 293, rash- 
 ness. 
 
 Temper-are ( av-, at- ), to refrain 
 from ; ab injuria temperare, to 
 refrain from outrage. 
 
 Temperanti-a, ae, temperance. 
 
 Tempestas, (tempestat) is,2QZ,storm, 
 tempest. 
 
 Templ-um, i, temple; templum de 
 marmcre, temple of marble, mar- 
 ble temple. 
 
 Tempus, (temper) is, 344, h, time. 
 
 Tenax, (tenajs) is, 107, tenacious, 
 firm,. 
 
 Tener, a, um, 77, b, tender. 
 
 Ten-ere (tenu-, tent-), to hold. 
 
 Terg-um, i, bach. 
 
 Terni, ae, a (distrib., 189), three apiece, 
 three at a time. 
 
 Terr-a, ae, earth ; terra marique, by 
 land and sea. 
 
 Terr-ere (terru-, territ-), to terrify. 
 
 Terti-us, a, um, third. 
 
 Tiberi-us, i, Tiberius. 
 
 Themistocles, (Themistocl) is, J^he- 
 inistocles. 
 
 Tigurinus pagus, The canton of Zu- 
 rich. 
 
 Tim-ere (timu-), to fear. 
 
 Timid-US, a, um, timid. 
 
 Timor, (timor) is, 319, /mr. 
 
 Tiro, (tiron) is, 107, inexperienced,, 
 
 raio. 
 Toler-are (av-, at-), to endure. 
 ToU-ere (sustul-, sublat-), to lift up^ 
 
 take away. 
 Tot, so many, 184. 
 Tot-US, a, um, gen. lus, 194, R. 1, 
 
 whole, all. 
 Trabs, (trab) is, beam, 293. 
 Trad-6re (tradid-, tradit-), to surren^ 
 
 der. 
 Tragul-a, se, a dart (used by the 
 
 Gauls). 
 Trah-ere (trax-, tract-, 401, 2), to 
 
 draw. 
 Trajic-6re (trajec-, ti'aject-), transit, 
 
 to throto or convey over ; intrans., 
 
 to cross over. 
 Tranquill-iter, adv., calmly, tran- 
 quilly (215, 2, tranquillus, tran- 
 quil). 
 Tra.nsduc-6re (transdux-, transduct-) 
 
 to lead across. 
 Trans-ire (iv-, it-), to cross or pass 
 
 over. 
 Transn-are (av-, at-), to swim across, 
 Tredecim, indecl., thirteen. 
 Tres, tria, 194, three. 
 Tribuu-us, i, tribune. 
 Triginta, thirty. 
 Triplex, (triplic) is, 107, triple, th fe« 
 
 fold. 
 Tripartite, adv., in three divisions. 
 Tristiti-a, ae, sadness. 
 Tu, thou, 130. 
 
 Tullus Hostilius, Tullus Hostilius. 
 Turn, adv., then. 
 Turbo, (turbin) is (m., 340), whirl 
 
 wind. 
 Turp-is, is, e, 104, base. 
 Turpiter, adv., 215, 2, a, basely. 
 Tun-is, (turr) is, 302, tower. 
 Tut-us, a, um, safe. 
 Tu-us, a, um, thy, thine, 134. 
 
 i 
 
LATIN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 
 
 381 
 
 u. . 
 
 Ubi, adv., wJiere, wfien. 
 Ubinam? whe7-e in the world? 297, d. 
 UU-us, a, um, gen. ius, 194, 1, any. 
 Ulterior, ius (compar. of ultra, 371), 
 
 farther. 
 Ultro, adv., of one's own accord. 
 Ulysses, (Ulyss) is, Ulysses. 
 Umbr-a, ae, shade, shadow. 
 Una, adv., together. 
 Uiide, adv., whence. 
 Undecim, indecl., eleven. 
 Undique, 2A\.tfrom all sides. 
 Univers-us, a, um, universal, the 
 
 whole. 
 Unquaru, adv., ever. 
 Un-us, a, um, gen. unlus, 194, one. 
 Unusquisque, 178, 6, each one. 
 Urbs, (urb) is, 293, city. 
 Usque, adv., as far as ; usque ad, 
 
 even up to. 
 Ut, or uti, conj., that, 546. 
 Uter, utra, utram, 194, which of the 
 
 two. 
 Ut-i (us-), dep. (with abl., 316, R.), to 
 
 use, employ 
 Util-is, is, e, 104, useful. 
 Utinam, conj., would that, O that, 
 
 528. 
 Utrum, conj., zvhether ; utrum — an, 
 
 whether — or. 
 Uxor, (uxor) is (f.), wife. 
 
 Vac-are (av-, at-j, to be empty, to re- 
 main unoccupied. 
 
 Vag-ari (vagat-), dep., to wander. 
 
 Val-ere (valu-), to avail; plurimum 
 valet, is most powerful. 
 
 Valid-us, a, um, strong. 
 
 Valde, adv., greatly, very much. 
 
 Valetudo, (valetudin) is, 339, health. 
 
 Vall-um, i, rampart. 
 
 Vast-are (av-, at-), to lay waste. 
 
 Vast-US, a, um, vast. [ute. 
 
 Vectigal, (vectigal) is, 325, fax, trih- 
 
 Veh-6re (vex-, vect-), to carry, drive 
 Vehementer, adv., vehemently, 215, 
 
 %h. 
 Vel, conj., or, 519, 2. 
 Velle, volui, 592, to wish, to be able. 
 Velox, (veloc) is. 107, swift. 
 Venator, (venator) is, hunter. 
 Vener-ari (at-), dep.^ to^ revere, to 
 
 venerate. , . * 
 
 Venetus, a, um, Venetiaru ' - 
 Veni-a, sd, pardon. 
 V6n-ire (ven-, vent-, 426, IV.), to 
 
 come. 
 Vent-us, i, wiiid. 
 Ver, (ver) is, n., 325, spring 
 Verber-ai-e (av-, at-), to flog 
 Verb-um, i, word. 
 Ver-eri (verit-), dep., tofeoft 
 Verg-ere (vers-), ta incline, tend. 
 Vero, conj., but, truly, certainly, 173. 
 Verres, (Verr) is, Verres. 
 Vert-ere (vert-, vers-, 421, b), to turn. 
 Ver-us, a, um, true. 
 Versus, prep, with ace, towards. 
 Vester, tra, trum, your, 134. 
 Veteran-US, a, um., veteran. 
 Vetus, (veter) is, 108, B,. 2, old. 
 Vexill-um, i, standard. 
 Vi-a, 86, way ; Via Sacra, the Sacred^ 
 
 Way, a street in Rome. 
 Victori-a, 8B, victory. 
 Vic-us, i, village. 
 Vid-ere (vid-, vis-, 394, V.), to see; 
 
 videri, pass., to seem, appear. 
 VigUanti-a, as, vigilance. 
 Vigil-are (av-, at-), to watch. 
 Vigili-a, se, watch ; de tertia vigilia, 
 
 about or after the third watch. 
 Viginti, indecl., twenty. 
 Vil-is, is, e, 104, cheap, vile. 
 Vinc-Sre (vie-, vict-), to conquer. 
 Vincul-um, i, bond. 
 Vindex, (vindic) is, avenger. 
 Vin-um, i, wine. 
 
 Viol-are (av-, at-), to violate, lay wasH 
 Vir, i, man. 
 
382 
 
 LATIN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 
 
 Virgili-us, i, Virgil. 
 Virgo, (virgin) is, 33&, virgin. 
 Viriliter, adv., maTily, courageously. 
 Virtus, (virtut) is, 293, valour, ifir- 
 • tue. 
 Vis, vim, vi, 301, 2, strength, force ; 
 
 pi.-, vires, ium. 
 Vit-a, ae, life. 
 
 Vit-are (av-, at-), to shun, avoid. 
 Viti-iHn, i, vice. 
 Viv-ere (vix-, vict-)l to live, 
 Vix, adv., scarcely : 
 
 Voc-ftre (av-, at-), o call. 
 
 Vol-are (av-, at-), tajly.j 
 
 Yo\o, I wish. (/SeeveUe.) 
 
 Voluntas, ( voluntat ) is, 293, will^ 
 wish. 
 
 Voluptas, (voluptat) is, 293, pleas- 
 ure. 
 
 Volv-6re (volv-, volut-), to roll 
 
 Vos, you^ 130. 
 
 Vox, (voc) is, 293, voice. 
 
 Vulg-us, i, n., 62, R. 1, the common 
 people. 
 
 Vulner-are (av-, at-), to wound. 
 
 Vulnus, (vulner) is, 344, b, wound. 
 
 
 m 
 
ENGLISH-LATIN VOCABULARY. 
 
 "^ 
 
-^ 
 
 
 '■^ If 
 
 
 ^- 
 
 i 
 
 ,,0^'- 
 
ENGLISH-LATIN VOCABULARY 
 
 Ability, facultas, (facultat) is, 293. 
 
 Able (to be), posse, quire (queo). 
 
 Abode, domiciliiun, i. 
 
 Abound, abundare. 
 
 About, circiter (concerning) ; de, abl. 
 
 Abrogate, abrogare. 
 
 Absent (to be), abesse. 
 
 Abstain from, abstingre (abstinu-, 
 abstent-). 
 
 Accuse, incusare. 
 
 Accustomed ( to be ), consuesc^re 
 (suev-, suet-). 
 
 Acquit, absolvere, 421, a. 
 
 Act, agere. 
 
 Act of kindness, beneficium, i. 
 
 Add, addere, 411, c. 
 
 Admire, mirari, admirftri (dep.). 
 
 Admonish, monere. 
 
 Adore, adorare. 
 
 Adorn, ornare. 
 
 Advice, consilium, i. 
 
 Advise, monere, admon6re. 
 
 ^duan, ^duuB, i. 
 
 Affair, res, 117. 
 
 Affection, affectio, 333, B, 
 
 Affirm, confirmare. 
 
 Affoi-d, proebSre, 527. 
 
 After, post (with accus.) ; de (with 
 abl.). 
 
 After that, postquam. 
 
 Again, rursus ; itenim, adv. 
 
 Against, contra ; adversus (with ac- 
 cus.) ; against Cicero, in Cicero- 
 nem. 
 
 Age (time of life), aetas, (aetat) is, 293. 
 
 Agree, consentire, 427, III. 
 
 Agreeable, gratus a, um (with dat.) ; 
 it is agreeable, libet, or lubet, 583. 
 
 K 
 
 Aid, auxilium, i; to aid, adjuvar». 
 
 390. 
 Alarm, perturbflre. 
 All, omnis, e ; cuncttiS, a, um ; in all 
 
 adv., omnino. 
 Allowed (it is), licet, 583. 
 Ally, socius, i. 
 Almost, fere ; pene, advr. 
 Alone, solus, 194, R. 1 ; onus. 
 Already, jam, adv. 
 Also, etiam, adv. 
 Altogether, omnino, adv. 
 Although, quamvis, conj. 
 Always, semper. 
 Ambassador, legatus, i. 
 Ambush, insidioe, 57, R. 
 Amiable, amabilis, e, 104. 
 Among, inter (with ace). 
 Ancients (the), veteres ; pi. of vetus, 
 
 old. 
 And, et, que, ac, atque ; and not, 
 
 neque. 
 Anger, ira, ob. 
 Animal, animal, 320. 
 Announce, nuntiare. 
 Answer, respondSre. 
 Antony, Antonius, i. 
 Any, uUus, a, um, 194, K. 1 ; any 
 
 one, any you please, &c. See 178. 
 Apart (to be), distare. 
 Apiece, use the distrib. numerals, 1S9. 
 Apply, adhibere (u-, it-). 
 Appoint, constituere, 421, a. 
 Approach, adventus, us ; to ajh 
 
 proach, appropinquSre : accedgru. 
 Archer, Sagittarius, i. 
 Arise (as a stonn), cooriri (coort-), 
 
 dep. 
 Arm, armai'e. 
 
38G 
 
 ENGLISH-LATIN VOCABULARY. 
 
 Arms, arma, orum. 
 
 Army, exercitus, us. 
 
 AiTange, disponere, 406, b. 
 
 Arrival, adventus, us. 
 
 Arrive at, pervenire, 427, IV. 
 
 Art, ars, (art) is, 293. 
 
 Artificer, faber, fabri, 77, a. 
 
 As, conj., ut ; as, of what kind, qua- 
 ils, lfe4 ; as far as to, usque ; as 
 soon as, simulatque. 
 
 Ashamed (one is), pudet, 579. , 
 
 Ask, rogare, postulare. 
 
 Assemble, convenire, 427, IV; 
 
 Assist, adjuvare, 390. 
 
 Assistance, auxilium, i. 
 
 Association, societas, (societat) is. 
 
 Assure, confii-mare. [293. 
 
 At, ad, apud ; at hortte, domi j ai 
 length, deraum. 
 
 Athenian, Atheniensis, is. 
 
 Athens, Athenae, arum. 
 
 Attack (noun), impetus, us; (verb), 
 oppugnare. 
 
 Austerity, severitas, (severitat) is, 
 293. 
 
 AiLxiliaries, auxilia, orum. 
 
 Avail, valere. 
 
 Avaricious, avarus, i. 
 
 Avoid, vitare. 
 
 Await, expectare. 
 
 B. 
 
 Back, tergum, i. 
 
 Badly, male, adv., 215, R. 
 
 Band (of men), manus, us. 
 
 Barbarian, barbarus, i. 
 
 Base, turpis, e, 104 ; basely, tui-pi- 
 
 ter, 215, 2, a. 
 Battle, proelium, i. 
 Be, esse ; be among, interesse, 174 ; 
 
 he over, prseesse ; be wanting, de- 
 
 esse, with dat. 
 Beam, trabs, (trab) is, 293. 
 Bear (verb), fen'e, 596. 
 Beast, bestia, ae ; beast of burden, 
 
 junientum, i 
 
 Beautiful, pulcher, chra, cliru Di, 77, a. 
 Because, conj., quod, quia, propterea 
 
 quod. 
 Becoming (it is), decet, 583. 
 Bed, cubrle, (cubil) is, 312 , bed 
 
 chamber, cubiculum, i. 
 Before, prep., ante (ace.) ; adv., an- 
 
 tea ; befoi'e that, antequam. 
 Beg, rogare, orare. 
 Begin, incipere, 416, c; I begin, 
 
 ccepi, 611. 
 Beginning, initium, i. 
 Behold, spectare. 
 Behooves (it), oportet, 583. 
 Belgian, Belga, se. 
 Believe, cred6re, 411, c. 
 Belong, pertinere, 394, I. 
 Benevolent, benevolus, a, um. 
 Benevolence, benevolentia, as. 
 Beseech, obsecrare. 
 Besiege, oppugnare. 
 Best, optimus, a, um, 370. 
 Betake on^s self, se recipere, 418, a 
 Better^ melior, 370. 
 Between, inter. 
 Bind, obstringere. 
 Bird, avis (avis), 300. 
 Bit, fraenum, i; pi., i and a, 396. 
 Bite, mordere, 395, IV. 
 Black, niger, gra, §mra, 77, a 
 Blame, incusare, vituperare. 
 Blood, sanguis, (sanguin) is (m.). 
 Blooming, florens, (florent) is, 107 
 Boast, praedicare. 
 Body, corpus, (coi-por) is, 344 
 Bond, vinculum, i. 
 Book, liber, bri. 
 Booty, preeda, ae. 
 Born (to be), nasci (nat), dep. 
 Boundary, finis, (fin) is (m.). 
 Boy, puer, i. 
 Brave, fortis, e ; bravely, fortitsr 
 
 215, 2. 
 Bravery, virtus, (virtut) is, 293. 
 Break through, perfriugere (page 
 
 275) ; perrumpere, 666, V., a. 
 
ENGLISH-LATIN VOCABULARY. 
 
 387 
 
 Bridge, pons, (poat) is, 295, R. 1. 
 Bring, ducere, ag^re ; bring back, re- 
 
 duc6re ; bring back word, renun- 
 
 tiare ; b7-ing to pass, perficSre ; 
 
 bring together, cogere, 416, b. 
 Britain, Britannia, ae ; Briton, Bri- 
 
 taunus, i. 
 Broad, latus, a, um. 
 Brother, frater, (fratr) is. 
 Build, sedificare ; buUd a nest, nidi- 
 
 ficare. 
 Bull, taui'us, i. 
 Burn, incendSre ; burn up, exurgre, 
 
 545. 
 Burden, onus, (oner) is, 344. 
 Burst into, irrump6re, 666, V., a. 
 Business, negotium, i. 
 But, sed, autem. 
 Buy, emere ; buy up, coemSre. 
 By, prep, with abl., a or ab, 93, 2. 
 By night, noctu, adv. 
 
 Ccesar, Caesar, (Caesar) is. 
 
 Call, vocare ; to name, appellare ; 
 to be called, nominari, appellari. 
 
 Call together, convocare. 
 
 Call-upon, invocare. 
 
 Camp, castra, cram. 
 
 Can (to be able), posse, 587 ; / can- 
 not, non possum, nequeo. 
 
 Captive, captivus, i. 
 
 Care (noun), cura, se; (verb), curare. 
 
 Carefully, diligenter, studiose. 
 
 Carry, portare, veh6re ; carry on, 
 gerere, 401, 4, a. 
 
 Carthage, Carthago, (Carthagin) is. 
 
 Cassius, Cassius, i. 
 
 Casticus, Casticus, i. 
 
 Catiline, Catilina, ae. 
 
 Cause, causa, ae. 
 
 Cautious, cautus, a, um. 
 
 Cavalry, equitatus, us ; belonging 
 to cavalry, equestris, e, 104. 
 
 Celebrate, celebrarc. 
 
 Celt, Celta, ae. 
 
 Censure, incusare. 
 
 Centurion, centurio, (centurion) is. 
 
 Certain, cei'tus, a, um ; a certain 
 one, quidam, 178. 
 
 Certainly, adv., certe : profecto, vero. 
 
 Chain, vinculum, i. 
 
 Change (noun), commutatio, (com- 
 mutation) is ; (verb), mutare, com 
 mutare. 
 
 Champ, mordere, 395, IV. 
 
 Chide, increpare, 390. 
 
 Chief, princeps, (princip) is, 107. 
 
 Child, infans, (infant) is, 107; chil- 
 dren, liberi, orum. 
 
 Choose, deligere, 666, V., a. 
 
 Christ, Christus, i. 
 
 Cicero, Cicero, (Ciceron) is. 
 
 Citadel, arx, (arc) is, 293. 
 
 Citizen, civis, (civ) is, c, 25, a. 
 
 City, urbs, (urb) is, 293. 
 
 Cloud, nubes, (nub) is, 300 ; clond, 
 of dust, vis pulveris. 
 
 Cohort, cohors, (cohort) is, 293. 
 
 Cold, frigidus, a, um ; (noun), frigus, 
 (frigor) is, 344. 
 
 Collect, coUigere (leg-, lect-) ; co- 
 gere (coeg-, coact-) ; collect corn, 
 fnimentari, dep. ; collect into a 
 flock, congregare. 
 
 Colour, color, (color) is, 319. 
 
 Come, venire, 427, IV. ; come tiear, 
 appropinquare ; come to, pei-ve- 
 nlre ; come together, convenlre. 
 
 Coming, adventus, us. 
 
 Command, imperare, with dat. 
 
 Commander, imperator, (imperator) 
 is, 319. 
 
 Commit, committ6re ; commit svi' 
 aide, mortem sibi conscisc6re. 
 
 Comm,on, communis, e, 104. 
 
 Common-people, plebs, (pleb) is, 293. 
 
 Companion, socius, i; comes, (co 
 mit) is. 
 
 Compel, poggre, 416, h. 
 
 Complain, queri (quest), dep 
 
 Complete, conficSre. 
 
388 
 
 ENGLISH-LATIN VOCABULARY. 
 
 Concerning (prep, with abl.), de* 
 
 Concerns (it), interest, refert, 584. d. 
 
 Condemn, daxonai-e, condemnare, 
 348. 
 
 Conference, colloquium, i. 
 
 Confess, fateri, dep. 
 
 Canjines, fines, pi. o/" finis. 
 
 Conflict, congressus, us. 
 
 Confirm, confirmare. 
 
 Confound, perturbsirte. 
 
 Congratulate, gratulari, dep. 
 
 Conquer, vincere (vie-, vict-) ; supe- 
 rare. 
 
 Conqueror, victor, (victOr) is, 319. 
 
 Conspiracy, conjuratio, (conjuration) 
 is, 333, R. 
 
 Consul, consul, (consul) is. 
 
 Consult, consulSre (consulu-, con- 
 sult-). 
 
 Contemplate, contemplari, dep. 
 
 Contend, contendere. 
 
 Content, contentus, a, urn (with abl.). 
 
 Continuous, continens, (continent) 
 is, 107. 
 
 Continuance, continuatio, (continua- 
 tion) is. 
 
 Corn, frumentum, i. 
 
 Council, concilium, i. 
 
 Counsel, consilium, i. 
 
 Course, cursus, us. 
 
 Covetous, cupidus, a, um. 
 
 Cow, vacca, ae. 
 
 Cowardice, ignavia, ae. 
 
 Creak, crepare, 390. 
 
 Create, creftre. 
 
 Crime, crimen, (crimin) is, 344, a. 
 
 Cross over, transire, trajicfire. 
 
 Croto, corvus, i. 
 
 Crown, corona, ce. 
 
 Cry out, exclamare. 
 
 Cultivation, cultus, us ; humanitas. 
 
 Ctip, poculum, i. 
 
 Cure, sanare. 
 
 Custom, mos, (mor) is, 331,. Z*. 
 
 Cut dozon, rescindgre (rescid-, re- 
 sciss-). 
 
 Cut to pieces, caedere, 411. b. 
 Cy7-us, Cyrus, i. 
 
 B. 
 
 Daily, adj., quotidianus, a, um ; adv^ 
 quotidie. 
 
 Dance, saltare. 
 
 Danger, periculom, i. 
 
 Danube, Danubius, i. 
 
 Dare, audere (ausus sum). 
 
 Dart, telum, i ; pilum, i. 
 
 Daughter, filia, a;. 
 
 Day, dies, ei, 116, R,., by day; in- 
 terdiu, adv. ; to-day, hodie, a6v 
 
 Dragon, draco, (dracon) is. 
 
 Dead, mortuus, a, um. 
 
 Dear, carus, a, um. 
 
 Death, mors, (mort) is, 293. 
 
 Deceive, fall6re (fefell-, fals-). 
 
 Decide on, statuSre. 
 
 Decree (verb), decemSre (decrev-, 
 decret-) ; (noun), decretuni, i ; de- 
 cree of the senate, senatus consul- 
 turn. 
 
 Deep, altus, a, um. 
 
 Defeat, pell6re, 411, b. 
 
 Defend, defendere, 421, c 
 
 Defence, munitio, 333. 
 
 Defender, vindex, (vindic) is, 306. 
 
 Defiles, angustiae, arum, 57, B. 
 
 Delay, cunctari (dep.) ; active, tar- 
 dare (to retard). 
 
 Deliberate, deliberai-e. 
 
 Delight, delectare. 
 
 Delight (with), libenter, adv. 
 
 Demand, posc6re, 411, a; postulare, 
 imperare, 390; demand back, re- 
 petSre. 
 
 Deny, negare. 
 
 Depart, discedSre, 401, 3, b. 
 
 Depart out of, excedgre. 
 
 Departure, discessus, us. 
 
 Dependant, cliens, (client) is, c 
 
 Descend, descendere. 
 
 Desert, desergre, 406, a; a desert, 
 desertum, i. 
 
ENGLISH-LATIN VOCABULARY. 
 
 3Sg 
 
 Deserter, perfuga, as. 
 
 Desire, cupiditas, ( cupiditat ) is , 
 (verb), cupere (io) : studium, L 
 
 Desirous, cupidus, a, um. 
 
 Despair (verb), desperare ; (noun), 
 desperatio, 333, R. 
 
 Despise, spem6re, 406, III., a: con- 
 temnSre. 
 
 Destroy, delere, 394, II. 
 
 Destruction, interitus, us. 
 
 Determi?ie, constituSre, statuSre. 
 
 Devoid, expers, 336. 
 
 Die, moriri, or morl (mortu-), dep. 
 
 Difference (it makes no), nihil inter- 
 est, nihil refert. 
 
 Differerd, diversus, a, um ; alius, 194, 
 11.1. 
 
 Difficult, difficilis, e, 104. 
 
 Dignity, dignitas, (dignitat) is, 293. 
 
 Diligence, dihgentia, se. 
 
 Diligent, diligens, (diligent) is. 107 ; 
 diligently, adv., diligenter. 
 
 Diminish, minuere, diminu6re. 
 
 Direct (of a ship), gubemare. 
 
 Disagree, dissentire, 427, III. 
 
 Discipline, disciplina, m. 
 
 Discomfit, fagare. 
 
 Discover, invenire, 427, IV. 
 
 Discourse, disserere (disseru-, dis- 
 sert-). 
 
 Discretion, consilium, i. 
 
 Dismiss, dimittere (mis-, miss-). 
 
 Displease, displicere (displicu-, dis- 
 plicit-), with dat., 161, R. 
 
 Dispute, disputare. 
 
 Dissolve, dissolvere, 421, a. 
 
 Distant (to be), distare. 
 
 Distribute, distribuere, 406, a; ar- 
 range, dispongre. 
 
 District, pagus, i. 
 
 Divide, dividere, 401, 3, a ; divide 
 
 among, distribuere, 423, c. 
 Divulge, enuntiare. 
 Do, agere, fac6re. 
 Dock-yard, navale, (naval) is, 312. 
 Doer, canis, (can) is. 
 
 K 
 
 Door, foris, (for) is, 300. 
 
 Double, duplicare. 
 
 Doubt, dubitare. 
 
 Doubtful, incertus, a, um ; dubiua, 
 a, um. 
 
 Dove, columba, a;. 
 
 Draw, trah^re (trax-, tract-) ; du- 
 cere (dux-, duct-) ; draio up, in- 
 struSre, 401, 2 ; draw as a sword, 
 stringere, 401 ; draw out, educSre. 
 
 Dread, formidare. 
 
 Drive, ag6re ; drive back, repellere j 
 drive on, or together, compell6re. 
 
 Druids, Druides, um, pi. 
 
 Duty, munus, (muner) is, 344. 
 
 E. 
 Each, quisque, 178 ; omnis, e ; each 
 
 of the two, uterque. 
 Eagle, aquila, se. 
 Earth, terra, aj. 
 Easily, facile (adv.). 
 East, Oriens. 
 
 Easy, facilis, e ; very ms5^,perfacilis. 
 Educate, educare. 
 Egypt, Egyptus, i (f.). 
 Eighty, octoginta. 
 Eloquent, facundus, a, um ; disertuB, 
 
 a, um ; eloquens, 107. 
 Embark (upon), conscendSre, 309 
 Embrace, amplecti (amplex-), dep. 
 Emperor, imperator, (imperator) is, 
 
 319. 
 Employ, uti (us-), dep., with abl. 
 
 adhibere. 
 End, finis, (fin) is (m.). 
 Endeavour, conari (conat-), dep. 
 Endure, durare ; to bear, tolerftre. 
 Enemy, hostis, (host) is, a 
 Enjoin upon, proecip6re 
 Enmity, inimicitia, se. 
 Enough, satis, adv. 
 Enrol, conscribere. 
 Entreat, rogare. 
 Equanimity (with), aequo animo. 
 Erect, communire. 
 K 2 
 
?^0 
 
 ENGLISH-LATIN VOCABULARY. 
 
 Err, errare. 
 
 Especially, adv , prsesertim. 
 
 Establish, confinxiare. 
 
 Eternity, aeternitas,(aetemitat) is, 293 
 
 Even up to, usque ad. 
 
 Ever, unquam. 
 
 Everlasting, sempitemus, a, um. 
 
 Every, omnis, e, 104. 
 
 Evil, malum, i. 
 
 Evil-deed, maleficium, i. 
 
 Example, exemplum, i. 
 
 Excel, prsBstare (praestit-), with dat. 
 
 Excellent, jjraBclarus, a, um; prses- 
 
 tans, 107. 
 Excite, excitare. 
 Excuse, excusatio, 333, IL 
 Exercise, exercere. 
 Exhort, hortari, dep. 
 Expedient (it is), expedit, 583. 
 Expel, expellers. 
 Expense, sumptus, us; at his own 
 
 expense, sumptu suo. 
 Eye, oculus, i. 
 
 F. 
 Fahle, fabula, ee. 
 Faith, fides, ei. 
 Fail, deficere. 
 Fall, oadere, 411, b. 
 Fame, fama, aa. 
 Family of slaves, familia, 09. 
 Far, longe, adv. 
 Farm (as revenues), redim6re. 
 Farmer, agricola. 
 Father, pater, (patr) is. 
 Father-in-laio, socer, i. 
 Fault, culpa, se; peccatum, i;Jlnd 
 
 fault with, culpare, incusare. 
 Favour, venia, 83 ; (verb), favere, 
 
 395, V. 
 Fear, timor, (timor) is, 319 ; (verb), 
 
 timere, metuere. 
 Feather, pluma, as. 
 Fell (cut down), casdere, 413, I^^. 
 Few, pauci, 8e, a ; very feto^ per- 
 
 pauci. 
 
 Fidelity, fides, ei. 
 
 Field, ager, gri. 
 
 Fierce, ferox, (feroc) is, 107: atrox, 
 
 107. 
 Fifth, quintus, a, um. 
 Fight, pugnare. 
 Figure, figura, se. 
 Fill, implere ; Jill up, complere 
 
 395, IL 
 Finally, denique, adv. 
 Find, invenire, 427, IV.; find out, 
 
 reperire, 427, V. 
 Find fault with, incusare. 
 Finish, conficere. 
 Fire, ignis, (ign) is (m.). 
 Firmament, coelum, i. 
 First, primus, a, um. 
 Fish, piscis, (pise) is (m.). 
 Fit for, idoneus, a, um, with dat. 
 Five, quinque ; five at a time, quini 
 
 189. 
 Flag, vexillum, i. 
 Flame, flamma, se. 
 FUe, fugere (io), 416, c. 
 Fleet, classis, (class) is, 300. 
 Flesh, caro, (cam) is (f.). 
 Flight, fuga, oe. 
 Flock, grex, (greg) is (m.) ; in flocks, 
 
 gregatim, adv. 
 Flog, verberare. 
 Flow, • finer e; flow together, conflu- 
 
 ere, 401, 2, 422. 
 Flower, flos, (flor) is, 331, b. 
 Fly, volare. 
 
 Folloio sequi (secut-), dep. 
 Folly, stultitia, se ; ineptiaa, anim, 
 
 57, H. 
 Fool, stultus, i; foolish, stultus, a. 
 
 um. 
 Foot, pes, (ped) is (m.). 
 Foot-soldier, pedes, (pedit) is. 
 For, conj., enim, etenim; for my 
 
 sake, mea causa. 
 Force, vis, vim, vi, 301, 1 ; forces 
 
 (troops), copise, arum, 57, a. 
 Foreign, alienua, a, um. 
 
ENGLISH-LATIN VOCABULARY. 
 
 391 
 
 Forest, sylva, ae. 
 
 Forever, in aetemum. 
 
 Forget, oblivisci, with gen. 
 
 Form, fonna, ae. 
 
 Fortification, munltio, (munition) is. 
 
 Fortify, munire. 
 
 Fortunate, fortunatas, a, um. 
 
 Fortune, fortixna, £b. 
 
 Forum, foram, i. 
 
 Four, quattuor ; four apiece, 189. - 
 
 Founder, conditor, 319. 
 
 Fountain, fons, (font) is (m.). 
 
 Frail, fragilis, e, 104. 
 
 Free from (to be), cargre, 348. 
 
 Friend, amicus, i. 
 
 Friendship, amicitia, sb. 
 
 Frighten, terrere ; frighten com- 
 pletely, perterrere. 
 
 From, a, de ; from every side, undi- 
 que, adv. ; from my boyhood, a 
 puero. 
 
 Frugality, parsimonia, ae. 
 Fruit, fructus, us. 
 Full, plenus, a, um, 348, b. 
 Future, futurua, a, van. 
 
 G. 
 
 Galba, Galba, se. 
 
 Gain, potiri, 209; gain for another, 
 
 conciliate. 
 Game, ludus, i. 
 Garden, hortus, i. 
 Garrison, prsesidium, i. 
 Gate, porta, se. 
 Gather, colligSre, 416, b. 
 Gaul, Gallia, oe; the Gauls, Qalli, 
 
 orum. 
 General, imperator, 319. 
 German, Germanus, a, um. 
 Get sight of, conspicfire (conspex-, 
 
 conspect-). 
 Gift, donum, i. 
 Girl, puella, ae. 
 Give, dare, 387, III. 
 Give largess, largiri (It-), dep. 
 Glare, splendor, 319. 
 
 Glory, gloria, ae. 
 
 Go, ii-e, 605; go straight, perg-gre; 
 go away, discedere, 401, 3, b ; go 
 fonoard, procedere ; go forth^ or 
 out, exire. 
 
 Goad, concitare. 
 
 God, Deus, i, 62, R. 3. 
 
 Gold, aurum, i. 
 
 Good, bonus, a, um ; good deed, ben- 
 eficium ; good-unll, voluntas, 293. 
 
 Govern, gubemare. 
 
 Grant (verb), concedere, 401, 3, b , 
 dare : (noun), concessus, us. 
 
 Great, magnus, a, um; comp., ma- 
 jor; superl., maximus. 
 
 Greatly, valde. 
 
 Greatness, magnitudo, 339. 
 
 Greek, Graecus, a, um. 
 
 Grief, mosror, 319 ; luctus, us, 113, N. 
 
 Grieve, dolere , it grieves one, piget. 
 579. 
 
 Guardian, custos, (custod) is, c, 
 25, a. 
 
 Guest, hospes, (hospit) is, c, 25, a. 
 
 Guide, dux, (due) is. 
 
 H. 
 
 Hail, grando, (grandin) is, 339 
 
 Halt, 
 
 Hand, manus, us (£). 
 
 Hannibal, Hannibal, (Hannibal) is. 
 
 Happen, accidSre ; it happens, ac- 
 
 cidit, 580. 
 Happily, beate. 
 
 Happy, beatus, a, tim ; felix, 107 
 Harass, lacessSre, 406, III., b. 
 Harbinger, praenuntia, oe. 
 Harbour, portus, us. 
 Hard, durus, a, um. 
 Hasten, festinare, contendere. 
 Hate (to), odisse, 611. 
 Hatred, odium, 1. 
 Have, habere (habu-, habit-). I have 
 
 a book, est mihi liber, 125. 
 He, is, hie, iUe. 
 Headlong, -j^rsice^B, (praecipifc) is 107 
 
392 
 
 ENaLISH-LATIN VOCABULARY. 
 
 Heal, sanare. 
 
 Health, valetudo, 339. 
 
 Hear, audire. 
 
 Heart, cor, (cord) is (n.). 
 
 Heaven, coBlum, i. 
 
 Heavy, gravis, e, 104. 
 
 Help, auxilium, i. 
 
 Helvetian, Helvetius, a, um. 
 
 Herald, praeco, (praacon) is. 
 
 Herb, herba, oe. 
 
 Hesitate, dubitare. 
 
 High, altus, a, um ; higher^ superior, 
 
 comp. of superus, 370. 
 HiU, coUis, is (m.). 
 Hillock, tumulus, i. 
 Hinder, impedire, prohibere. 
 His, suus, a, um: ejus. 
 History, bistoria, se. 
 Hold, tenere, obtin6re : hold bach, 
 
 retinere. 
 Home (at), domi, gen. of domus. 
 Honest, probus, a, um. 
 Honour, honor, 319 ; (verb), colfire 
 
 (colu-, cult-)- 
 Honourable, honestus, a, um. 
 Hove, spes, ei. 
 Htfrn, comu, 112: 
 Homed, comiger, a, um, 77, b. 
 Horse, equus, i. 
 Morse-soldier, eques, (equit) is. 
 Hostage, obses, (obsid) is, c, 25, a. 
 Hour, bora, ae. 
 
 House, domus, i and us (f.), 112, 3. 
 Household, familia, 88. 
 How great, how many? quantus, 
 
 186, obs. ; however great, quan- 
 
 tuscunque, 184 ; how long, quam- 
 
 diu, adv. 
 Humanity, humanitas, (humanitat) 
 
 is, 293. 
 Hunger, fames, (fam) is, 300. 
 Hurl, conjicere, 416, c (conjee-, con- 
 
 ject-). 
 Hurt, nocero. 
 
 /, ego, 120. 
 
 Ides, Idus, iduum (f.). 
 
 If» si. 
 
 Ignorance, ignoratio, 339. 
 
 Ignorant, ignarus, a, um; to be ig^ 
 
 norant of, ignorare, nescire. 
 Illustrious, clarus, a, um ; pmscla' 
 
 rus, a, um. 
 Image, imago, 339. 
 Immediately, statim. 
 Immense, immeusus, a, um. 
 Immortal, immortalis, e, 104. 
 Impious, impius, a, um. 
 Implore, implorare. 
 In, prep., in, with abl. 
 Incessant, continens, (continent) is, 
 
 107. 
 Increase, augere (aux-, auct-). 
 Incredible, incredibilis, e, 104. 
 Indeed, quidem. 
 
 Indolence, inertia, ae ; ignavia, 89. 
 Indolent, ignavus, a, um. 
 Induce, inducfire, adducSre 
 Indulge, indulgSre, dat. 
 Infant, infans, (infant) is, c. 
 Influence, auctoritas. 
 Inform any one, aliquem certiorenB 
 
 facere. 
 Inhabitant, incola, ae. 
 Injure, violare. 
 
 Injury, injuria, ae ; incommodum, i 
 Innocence, innocentia, m. 
 Insect, insectum, i. 
 Instead of, pro (prep, with abl.). 
 Instigate, instigare. 
 In the mean time, interea. 
 It interests, interest. 
 Intrust, committere (with dat]. 
 Invoke, invocare. 
 Ireland, Hibernia, ee. 
 Iron, ferrum, i. 
 Island, insula, CB. 
 Italy, Italia, m. 
 Itself, 159. 
 
UNQWSH-LATIN VOCABULARY. 
 
 393 
 
 Javdin, telum, i ; tragula, ae. 
 
 Join, jungere ( junx-, junct-) ; join 
 
 together, conjungere. 
 JouTTiey, iter, (itiner) is (n.). 
 Junior, junior, 370. 
 Jupiter, 351. 
 Just, Justus, a, um ; just so many, 
 
 totidem. 
 Justice, justitia, se. 
 
 K. 
 
 Keep, tenere, servftre. 
 
 Kind, benignus, a, um, with dat. : 
 
 Buavis, e, 335. 
 Kiridle, excitare. 
 King, rex, (rag) is. 
 Kingdom, regnum, i. 
 Kill, occidere, interficSre, 390. 
 Know, scire, noscfire, 525 ; cognos- 
 
 cSre : not to know, nescire. 
 Knowledge, scientia, ae. 
 
 Labour (noun), labor, 319 ; (verb), 
 
 laborare. 
 Lamb, agnua, 1. 
 Land, terra ; by land and sea, terra 
 
 marique. 
 Language, lingua, «: sermo, 331. 
 Large, magnus, a, um. 
 Last (to), durare. 
 Latin, Latinus, a, um. 
 Laugh, ridere ; laughter, risus, iis. 
 Law, jus, ( jur) is (n.). 
 Lawful (it is), licet. 
 Lay aside, depongre, 406, b. 
 Lay waste, populari (at-), dep. 
 Ijead, ducere ( dux-, duct- ) ; lead 
 
 back, reduc6re ; lead out, edu- 
 
 c6re ; lead together, conducSre ; 
 
 lead over or across, transducSre, 
 
 113, II. 
 Leader, dux, (due) is. 
 Leaf, folium, i. 
 Ijeagtie, foedus, (feeder) is, 344. 
 
 Leap down, desilire, 428. 
 
 Learn, discere, 411, a: cognoscSre. 
 
 Leave, relinquere. 
 
 Legion, legio, (legion) is, 333, R. 
 
 Letter, epistola, oe ; litterae, arum, 
 
 58, N. 
 Level, planus, a, um ; aequus, a, um. 
 Levy, conscribere. 
 Lieutenant, legatas, i. 
 Lightning, fulgur, (fulgur) is, 325. 
 Life, vita, sa. 
 
 Like, similis, e, 104 (vyith dat.). 
 Line of battle, acies, ei. 
 Lion, leo, (leon) is. 
 Literature, litterse, arum, 57, R. 
 Little, parvus, a, um. 
 Live, vivgre. 
 Living - being, animans, ( animant \ 
 
 is. 
 Lofty, altus, a, um. 
 Long, longus, a, um ; adv., longe ; a 
 
 long time, diu. 
 Look at, intu6ri, dep. 
 Lose, amittgre, perdSre. 
 Lot, sors, (sort) is, 293. 
 Love (verb), amare, diligSre ; (noun), 
 
 amor, 319. 
 Low, humilis, e, 104. 
 Lycurgus, Lycurgus. 
 
 M. 
 Magnanimous, magnanimus, a, um. 
 Maid-servant, ancilla, ae. 
 Maintain, alfire. 
 Make, fac6re, 199; make war, bel- 
 
 lare ; make war upon, bellum in- 
 
 ferre, with dat. ; make an attack, 
 
 imp e turn facere. 
 Maker, faber, bri. 
 Maltreat, violare. 
 Man, homo, vir. 
 Many, multus, a, um. 
 Marble, marmor, 325. 
 Master (of school), magister, tri ; ((rf 
 
 slaves), heras, dominus. 
 Matters \\t), interest, rrfert, 583. 
 
394 
 
 ENGLISH-LATIN VOCABULARY 
 
 Measure, metiri, 206. 
 Medicine, medicina, 83. 
 Mediterranean, Mediterraneus, a, 
 
 um. 
 Meet, convenire. 
 
 Memory, memoria, ob. 
 
 Merchant, mercator, 319. 
 
 Messenger, nmitius, i. 
 
 Metal, metallum, i. 
 
 Mid-day, meridies, ei. 
 
 Middle, medius, a, um. 
 
 Migrate, migrare. 
 
 Mile, millia (passaum), 191, b. 
 
 Military command, imperium, i. 
 
 Milk, lac, (lact) is (n.). 
 
 Mind, mens, (ment) is (f.) ; ani- 
 mus, i. 
 
 Mine, mens, a, um. 
 
 Minei-va, Minerva, ae. 
 
 Miserable, miser, a, um, 77, b. 
 
 Mitigate, mitigare. 
 
 Moderation, modus, 1. 
 
 Money, pecunia, ob. 
 
 Moon, luna, ae. 
 
 More, plus, pluris ; adv., magls. 
 
 Mortal, mortalis, e, 104. 
 
 Most, plurimus, a, um; most men, 
 plerique, 195. 
 
 Mountain, mons, (mont) is (m.). 
 
 Move, movere. 
 
 Much, multus, a, um; much money, 
 magna pecunia. 
 
 Multitude, multitude, 339. 
 
 My, mens, a, um. 
 
 N. 
 Naked, nudus, a, um. 
 Name, nomen, (nomin) ia, 344, a ; 
 
 to name, nominare. 
 Narrotv, angustus, a, um. 
 Natioji, natio, 333, R. ; gens, 293. 
 Nature, natura, se. 
 Navigation, navigatio, 333, R. 
 Near, prope, juxta ; nearest to, prox- 
 
 imus, a, um. 
 Neglect, negligfire. 
 
 Neighbouring, finitimus, a, umj 
 proximus, a, um. 
 
 Neither, conj. — nor, nee — neque ; 
 neither (of two), neuter, tra, tmm, 
 194, R. 1. 
 
 Net, rete, (ret) is. 
 
 Never, nunquam (adv.). 
 
 Nevertheless, tamen, conj. 
 
 New, novus, a, um. 
 
 Next, posterus, a, um, 118; proxi- 
 mus, 371. 
 
 Night, nox, (noct) is, 293. 
 
 Nine, novem. 
 
 Ninth, nonus, a, um. 
 
 Nobility, nobilitas, (nobilitat) is 293. 
 
 Noble, nobilis, e, 104. 
 
 Nobody, nemo, (nemin) is, c. 
 
 Noise, clamor, 319. 
 
 No one, nuUus, a, um, 194, R. 1 
 
 Not, non ; with imper., nS. 
 
 Nothing, nihil. 
 
 Notice, (see) conspic6re. 
 
 Nourish, alSre. 
 
 Novelty, novitas, (novitat) is, 293. 
 
 November, November, bris. 
 
 Nurse, nutrix, (nutric) is, 293 
 
 O. 
 
 Oath, jusjurandum, 351, 4. 
 
 Obey, parere (with dat.). 
 
 Obscure, obscurare. 
 
 Obtain booty, proedari (dep.) 
 
 Obviously, prorsus. 
 
 Ocean, oceanus, i. 
 
 Of, de. 
 
 Of one's own accord, ultro. 
 
 Old, vetus, (veter) is, 107. 
 
 Old man, senex. 
 
 Old age, seuectus, 293. 
 
 On the other side of, trans (ace.) ; on 
 
 account of, ob, with ace. 
 Owe, unus, a, um, 194, 1. 
 Ope7i, apertus, a, um ; to open, ape- 
 
 rire. 
 Opinion, opinio, 333, R. ; senten. 
 
 tia, e. 
 
ENGLISH-LATIN VOCABULARY. 
 
 395 
 
 Opportunity of (with gerund in 
 gen.), spatium, i. 
 
 Oracle, oraculum, L 
 
 Oration, oratio, 333, R. 
 
 Orator, orator. 319. 
 
 Order, ordo, (ordin) is (m.) ; to or- 
 der, jubere. 
 
 Orgetorix, Orgetorix, (Orgetorig) is. 
 
 Origin, origo, 339. 
 
 Other, alius, a, ud, 194, R. 1 . 
 
 Otherwise, aliter. 
 
 Ought (one), oportet, 583 
 
 Our, noster, tra, tram. 
 
 Out of, e, or ex (abl.). 
 
 Overcome, snperare. 
 
 Ox, bos, 351, 2. 
 
 P. 
 
 Pain, dolor, 319. 
 
 Paltry, vilis, e, 104, 
 
 Pardon, venia, ae. 
 
 Parents, parentes, inm. 
 
 Part, pars, (part) is. 
 
 Pass, iter facere, 210. 
 
 Passage, iter, (itiner) is (n.). 
 
 Patience, patientia, ae. 
 
 Patiently, patienter, adv. 
 
 Pay, pendere. 
 
 Peace, pax, (pac) is, 293. 
 
 Peninsula, peninsula, ae. 
 
 People, populus, i. 
 
 Perceive, animadvertfire. 
 
 Perchance, forsitan, forte, adv. 
 
 Persian, Persa, se. 
 
 Persuade, suadere, persuadere. 
 
 Phalanx, pbalanx, (phalang) is. 
 
 Philosopher, philosophus, i. 
 
 Philosophize, phUosophari, dep. 
 
 Pilot, gubemator, 319. 
 
 Pious, pius, a, um. 
 
 Pirate, prsedo, 335. 
 
 Pity, miserere ; I pity, me miserSt, 
 
 579. 
 Place, locus, i ; pi., i and a : to place, 
 
 pon6re. 
 Place into, imponSre 
 
 Placid, placidus, a, um. 
 
 Plain, planus, a, um; sequus, a, um: 
 
 a plain, aequor, 327. 
 Plan, consUiam, i. 
 Plant, planta, se ; to plant, ser6re. 
 Plato, Plato, 334. 
 Pleading, dictio, 333, R. 
 Pleasant, jucundus, a, um. 
 Please, placere (with dat.) ; it pleas- 
 es, placet, 583. 
 Pleasure, voluptas, (tat) is, 293. 
 Plough, arare. 
 
 Plunder, diripere: priBdari,dep.,491 
 Poet, poeta, ae (m.). 
 Pompey, Pompeius, i. 
 Poor, egens, inops, pauper, 107. 
 Port, portus, us. 
 Post, statio, 333, R. 
 Possess one's self of, potiri (with 
 
 gen. or abl.). 
 Power, vis, vim, vi, 301, 1 ; potestas, 
 
 (tat) is, 293. 
 Powerful, potens, (potent) is, 107. 
 Praise, laus, (laud) is, 293 ; to praise, 
 
 laudare. 
 Prayers, preces, um, pi. of prex. 
 Precept, praeceptum, i. 
 Preceptor, proeceptor, 319. 
 Precious, carus, a, um. 
 Prefer, antepongre. 
 Prepare, p arare. 
 Present (to be), adesse ; interesse, 
 
 267. 
 Preserve, servare; preserve modera' 
 
 tion, modum habere. 
 Preside over, praeesse. 
 Prevail upon, permovere. 
 Prevent, prohibere, obstare. 
 Principle, principium, i. 
 Prisoner, captivus, i. 
 Private information, indicium, L 
 Proceed, pergSre, 447. 
 Proclaimer, praeco, 331, a. 
 Procure, comparare. 
 Promise, fides, ei ; to promise, spon- 
 
 dSre, 395, IV. 
 
d9G 
 
 ENGLISH-LATIN VOCABULARY. 
 
 Property, res fainiliaris : familia, se. 
 
 Providence, Providentia, 83. 
 
 Province, provincia, ee. 
 
 Prudence, prudentia, ee. 
 
 Prudent, prudens, (prudent) is, 107. 
 
 Ptolemy, PtvAlemaeus, i. 
 
 Punish, punire. 
 
 Punishment, poena, as : supplici- 
 
 um, i. 
 Pursue, perseqni (dep.)- 
 Put-to-Jiight, ftigare : d4re in fugam. 
 Pyrenees, Pyrenaei (montes). 
 Pythagoras, Pythagoras, ae. 
 
 Queen, regina, ea. 
 Quickly, cito, adv. 
 
 Race, genus, (gener) is, 344; gens, 
 
 (gent) is. 
 Rain, imber, bris. 
 Raise, tollgre : excitflre. 
 Rank, ordo, (ordin) is (m.). 
 Rapidly, celeriter, adv. 
 Rashly, temere. 
 Rashness, temeritas, (temeritat) is, 
 
 293. 
 Reach, pervenire. 
 Read, leggre. 
 Reap, met6re. 
 Reason, ratio, 333, R. 
 Rebellion, rebellio, 333, B,. 
 Recall, revocare. 
 Receive, accipfire; receive back, re- 
 
 cipgre. 
 Reckon, ducgre- 
 Recollection, memoria, ae. 
 Red, raber, bra, brum, 77, a. 
 Refrain, temperare. 
 Refuse, recusare. 
 
 Reign, regnum, i ; to reign, regnfire. 
 ftejotce, gaudere. 
 Relate, narrare : commemorare. 
 Relieve, levare. 
 Religion, religio, 333, R. 
 
 Remmn, man6re. 
 
 Remains, reliquiae, arum, 57, H. 
 
 Remove, removere. 
 
 Renew, renovare : redintegrare. 
 
 Repair, reficere. 
 
 Repel, propulsare (ward ofF). 
 
 Repent, poenitere ; / repent, me pea 
 
 nitet, 579. 
 Repress, opprimere. 
 Reprove, increpare. 
 Republic, respublica, 351, 3. 
 Resist, resistere, with dat. 
 Restrain, retinere. 
 Retreat, recedere. 
 Return (restore), reddgre ; (go back), 
 
 revertere, or reverti. 
 Revenue, vectigal, (vectigal) is. 
 Revere, venerare. 
 Revoke, revocare, abrogare. 
 Revjard, praemium, i. 
 Rhine, Rhenus, i. 
 Rhetoric, rhetorica, ae. 
 Rich, dives, (divit) is, 107. 
 RicJies, divitisB, arum, 57, R. 
 Ride (on horseback), equitare. 
 Right, jus, (jur) is; rightly, juro 
 
 (abl. of jus) : recte, adv. 
 Rise, oriri, dep. 
 
 River, fluvius, i; flumen, (flumin) is 
 Robber, latro, 331, a. 
 Rock, petra, aa. 
 Roll, volvere. 
 Roman, Romanus, a, una. 
 Rome, Roma, ee. 
 Rose, rosa, ae. 
 Rotise up, excitare. 
 Rout, fugare, pellere : fundere, 416, a. 
 Royal-power, regnum, i. 
 Rule, reg6re : imperare, with dat. 
 Run, curr6re. 
 
 Sacred, sanctus, a, um: sacer, era, 
 cram; sacred rites, sacra, orum; 
 Sacred Way, Via Sacra ; Sacred 
 Mount, Mons Sacer. 
 
ENGLISH-LATIN VOCABULARY. 
 
 39'7 
 
 Sadness, tristitia, ae : moeror, 319. 
 
 Safe, salvus, a, um; tutus, a, um. 
 
 Safety, salus, (salut) is, 293. 
 
 Sailor, nauta, ae. 
 
 Sake— for the sake of, causa, abl., 
 135, II., b. 
 
 Same, is, ea, id ; the very same, 
 idem, 150. 
 
 Sand, aridum, i. 
 
 Say, dicere ; / say, aio, inquam. 
 
 Scarcely, vix. 
 
 Scatter, spargere. 
 
 Scholar, discipulus, i. 
 
 School, schola, ae. 
 
 Scout, explorator, 319. 
 
 Sea, mare, 312; sequor, 325. 
 
 Secede, secedere. 
 
 Second, secundus, a, um. 
 
 Sedition, seditio, 333, B,. 
 
 See, videre ; (notice), conspicere. 
 
 Seek, quaerere. 
 
 Seize, occupare ; seize up, arripfire. 
 
 Self, ipse. 
 
 Senate, senatus, us. 
 
 Senate-house, curia, ae. 
 
 Senator, senator, 319. 
 
 Send, mittere ; send away, dimit- 
 
 t6re ; send for, arcessere. 
 Senior, senior, (senior) is, 107 (comp. 
 
 of senex), 370. 
 Separate, separare : dividSre. 
 Sepulchre, sepulchrum, i. 
 Sequanian, Sequanus, i. 
 Serve (worship), colere. 
 Set (as heavenly bodies), occidfire. 
 Set out, proficisci ; set forth, expo- 
 
 nere ; set up, proponSre. 
 Setting (of heavenly bodies), occa- 
 
 sus, us. 
 Seven, septem ; seventh, Septimus, 
 
 a, um. 
 Seventy, septuaginta. 
 Severe, gravis, e, 104. 
 Severity, severitas, (severitat) is, 
 
 293. 
 Shadow, umbra, aa. 
 
 Sharp, acutus, a, um. 
 
 Sharply, acriter, adv. 
 
 Shine, micare, 389, 1^=" ; shine forth 
 emicare. 
 
 Ship, navis, 300. 
 
 Shore, littus, (littor) is, 344. 
 
 Shoi-t, brevis, e, 104. 
 
 Show, monstrare, ostendere ; (noun) 
 species, ei. 
 
 Shower, imber, bris. 
 
 Shun, vitare. 
 
 Shut, claudgre. 
 
 Sick, ceger, gra, grum. 
 
 Sign, signum, i. 
 
 Sight, conspectus, us; in sight of 
 conspectu. 
 
 Silent (to be), tacere. 
 
 Silver, argentum, i. 
 
 Similar to, similis (dat.). 
 
 Sin, peccatum, i ; to sin, peccare. 
 
 Since, quum, quoniam. 
 
 Sing, cantare. 
 
 Singing, cantus, us. 
 
 Sister, soror, (sor6r) is (f.). 
 
 ;S^f^, sedere, 394, V. 
 
 Six, sex ; sixth, sextus, a, um. 
 
 Slave, servus, i. 
 
 Slay, occidgre, interficfire. 
 
 Slayer, interfector, 319. 
 
 Sleep, somnus, i ; to sleep, dormire 
 
 Slinger, funditor, 319. 
 
 Small, parvus, a, um. 
 
 Snatch up, arripSre. 
 
 So, ita, tam ; so great, tantus ; so 
 
 long, tamdiu ; so many, tot. 
 Socrates, Socrates, is. 
 Soldier, miles, (milit) is. 
 Some (persons), nonnulli. 
 Somebody, some, 178 ; some one, ali. 
 
 quis. 
 Sometimes, interdum, nonnunquai» 
 Sometvhat great, aliquantus, 184 
 Son, filius, i. 
 Son-in-laio, gener, i. 
 Song, carmen, 344, a. 
 Soul, animus, i. 
 
898 
 
 ENGLISH-LATIN VOCADULARY. 
 
 Spain, Hispania, se. 
 
 Spaniard, Hispanus, i. 
 
 Spare, parc6re (dat.). 
 
 Sparta, Sparta, ae. 
 
 Speak, dicere, loqui. 
 
 Speech, sermo, 331. 
 
 Spend, consumere. 
 
 Spiritedly, acriter. 
 
 Splendid, splendidas, a, um. 
 
 Spoil, praeda, ae. 
 
 Spur, calcar, 325. 
 
 Stag, cervus, i. 
 
 Stain, maculare. 
 
 Stand, stare ; stand in the way, ob- 
 stare. 
 
 Standard, signum, i. 
 
 Star, sidus, (sider) is, 344; Stel- 
 la, ae. 
 
 State, civitas, (civitat) is ; respubli- 
 ca, 351, 3. 
 
 Station, static, 333, R; to station. 
 constituere, collocftre. 
 
 Stimulate, induc6re. 
 
 Stir up, instigare. 
 
 Stoic, Stoicus, i. 
 
 Stone, lapis, (lapid) is (m.). 
 
 Stormy, turbidas, a, unif 
 
 Strange, novus, a, um. 
 
 Strength, vis, 301 ; robur, 344. 
 
 .Strengthen, confinnare. 
 
 Strive after, persequi, 206. 
 
 Strong, validus, a, um. 
 
 Strong desire, cupiditas, 293. 
 
 Study, studium, i. 
 
 Subdue, subigere. 
 
 Succour, subsidium, i. 
 
 Such, talis, e, 184. 
 
 Sudden, repentinus, a, um. 
 
 Suddenly, subito, adv. 
 
 Sufficiently, satis. 
 
 Sum of money, pecunia, ob. 
 
 Summer, aestas, (aestat) is, 293. 
 
 Sun, sol, (sol) is (m.). 
 
 Sup, caenare. 
 
 Superior, superior, oris. 
 
 Support, al6re. 
 
 Surrender, deditio, 333, R. 
 Surround, circumvenire ; circum- 
 
 stare, 391 ; cingere, 401, 2. 
 Sure, certus, a, um. 
 Suspicion, suspicio, 333, R. 
 Sustain, sustinere. 
 Swallow, hirundo, 339. 
 Sweet, dulcis, e, 104. 
 Swift, celer, velox, 107. 
 Swiftly, celeriter, 217. 
 Swim, natare ; swim across, trans- 
 
 nare. 
 SiDord, gladius, i. 
 Syracuse, Syracusse, arum. 
 
 Take, sum6re ; take away, eripgre ; 
 take back, recipere ; take captive. 
 cap6re ; take care of, curare ; take 
 by storm, expugnare ; take pos- 
 session of, occupare. 
 
 Talent, ingenium, i. 
 
 Tame, domare. 
 
 Teach, docSre. 
 
 Teacher, magister, tri. 
 
 Tear, lacryma, ae. 
 
 Tell, dicere, nuntiare. 
 
 Tempest, procella, ae : tempesfcas. 
 
 Temple, templum, i. 
 
 Tenaciotcs, tenax, (tenac) is, 107 
 
 Tender, tener, a, um. 
 
 Tent, pellis, 322. 
 
 Tenth, decimus, a, um. 
 
 Terrify, terrere. 
 
 Territory, finis (m.). 
 
 Than, quam. 
 
 That (pron.), ille, is, iste. 
 
 That, conj., in order that, ut ; that 
 not, ne. 
 
 Themselves, sui, 142. 
 
 Then, tum, adv. 
 
 There, ibi. 
 
 Thick, densus, a, um. 
 
 Thine, tuus, a, um. 
 
 Thing, res, rei; this thing, hoc; 
 these things, haeo. 
 
ENGLISH-LATIN VOCABULARY. 
 
 399 
 
 TUtik, putare, cogitare, existimftre, 
 
 sentire, censSre. 
 Third, tertius, a, um. 
 Thirst, sitis, 300. 
 Thirteen, tredecim. 
 Thirty, triginta. 
 This, hie, hsec, hoc 
 rhitlier, eo. 
 Chree, tres, ia. 
 
 Chrough, per (prep, with ace.). , 
 Throw, jac6re ; throw before, pro- 
 
 jicere. 
 Thunder (verb), tonftre. 
 Thus, ita. 
 Thy, tuus, a, um. 
 Tiber, Tiberis, is. 
 Time, tempus, (teinp6r) is, 344. 
 2Hmid, timidus, a, um. 
 To, ad (prep, with ace.). 
 To-day, hodie. 
 Together, una (adv.). 
 Toil, labor, 319 : opera, 88. 
 To-morrow, eras (adv.). 
 Tongue, lingua, te. 
 Too much, nimius, a, um. 
 Tooth, dens, (dent) is (m.). 
 Top of, summus, 297, a. 
 Touch, tangere; touch upon, attin- 
 
 gere. 
 Toioer, turris, 300 : castellum, i. 
 Town, oppidum, i. 
 Townsman, oppidanus, i. 
 Treaty, foedus, (feeder) is, 344. 
 Tree, arbor, (arbor) is (f.). 
 Trial, judicium, i. 
 Tribune, tribunus, i. 
 Tributary, stipendiarius, a, um. 
 Tribute, stipendium, i. 
 Time, verus, a, um. 
 Truce, indatiae, aram, 57, B,. 
 Trust to, credere (with dat.). 
 Turbid, turbidus, a, um. 
 Turn, vertere. 
 Twenty, viginti. 
 Two-a-piece, bini, 189. 
 
 U. 
 
 Ulysses, Ulysses, is. 
 Uncertain, incertus, a, um. 
 Under, sub, prep., 323. 
 Understand, intelligere. 
 Undertake, suscipere. 
 Unfriendly, inimicus, a, um. 
 Unjust, injustus, a, um. 
 Unless, nisi (conj.). 
 Unmindful of, immemor ( with 
 
 gen.). 
 Until, donee, dum (conj.). 
 Use, us us, us ; to use, uti, dep. abl., 
 
 316, b. 
 Useful, utilis, e, 104. 
 
 Vacant (to be), vacare. 
 Vain — in vain, frustra (adv.). 
 Valour, virtus, (virtut) is, 293. 
 Value, pretium, i; to value, aesti- 
 
 mare. 
 Vast, vastus, a, um. 
 Vaunt, ostentare. 
 Vehemently, vehementer (adv.) 
 Venetian, Venetus, i. 
 Very, valde, admodum; very easy. 
 
 perfacilis, e; very few, perpauci: 
 
 very near, proximus. 
 Vice, vitium, i. 
 Victory, victoria, se. 
 Vile, vUis, e, 104. 
 Village, vicus, i. 
 Violate, violare. 
 Virgin, virgo, 339. 
 Virtue, virtus, (virtut) is, 293 
 Virtuous, probus, a, um. 
 Voice, vox, (v6c) is, 293. 
 Voio, spondere, 395, IV. 
 
 Wage (e. g., icar), gerere: bellum 
 
 inferre. 
 Wagon, carrus, i. 
 Wait for, expectare. 
 
400 
 
 ENGLISH-LATIN VOCABULARy. 
 
 Walk, ambulare. 
 
 Wall, mums, i ; walls, moania, um. 
 
 Wander, vagari, errare. 
 
 Want, carere, 348. 
 
 Wanting (to be), deesse, 267, b. 
 
 War, bellum, i. 
 
 Warlike, bellicosus, a, um. 
 
 Warn, monere. 
 
 Wash, allu6re. 
 
 Watch, watching, vigilia, se ; to 
 
 watch, vigilare. 
 Water, aqua, 83. 
 Wave, fluctus, us. 
 Way, via, ae ; to make (their) way, 
 
 iter facere. 
 Wearied, defessus, a, um. 
 Weary of, taedet, 579, 
 Weep, flere. 
 Well (to be), valere. 
 West, Occidens. 
 Whai (in number) ? quotus 1 what 
 
 is the difference ? quid interest ? 
 When, quum (conj.). 
 Whence, unde (adv.). 
 Whether, num, 174 : utrum. 
 Where, ubi (adv.). 
 Which of the two, uter, 194, R. 1. 
 Whirlwind, turbo, (turbin) is (m.). 
 Who, qui, quae, quod ; who ? quis, 
 
 quae, quid ? 
 Whole, omms, e ; universus, a, um ; 
 
 totus, a, um ; cunctus, 441. 
 Why? cur? 
 
 Wicked, improbus, a, um. 
 Wide, latus, a, um ; widely, lat5 ; 
 
 more widely, latius. 
 Wild beast, fera, ag. 
 Wind, ventus, i. 
 Willingly, libenter. 
 Wine, vinum, i. 
 Wing, ala, s. 
 Winter, hyems, (byem) is, 293; to 
 
 winter, hiemare ; winter-quarters, 
 
 hibema, orum (pL). 
 Wisdom, sapientia, ae. 
 
 Wise, sapiens, (sapient) is, 107 j 
 
 wisely, sapienter. 
 Wish, velle, cup6re. 
 With, cum (prep., abl.). 
 Without, sine (prep., abl.); to be 
 
 without, carere. 
 Withstand, resist6re, 390. 
 Wolf, lupus, i. 
 
 Woman, femina, oe ; mulier, is (f.). 
 Wonder at, admirari, dep. 
 Wonderful, mirabilis, e, 104, 
 Wood (a), sylva, ae. 
 Word, verbum, i ; word is brought, 
 
 nuntiatum est. 
 Work, opus, (oper) is, 344. 
 World, mundus, i : orbis terrarum. 
 Worse, pejus, adv. ; worst, pessi- 
 
 mus, 370, 
 Worship, col6re, adorare. 
 Worthy, dignus, a, um (with abl.), 
 Would-that, utinam, 526. 
 Wound, vulnus, (vulner) is, 344 ; to 
 
 wound, vulnerare. 
 Wretched, miser, 77, b. 
 Write, scribgre. 
 Writer, scriptor, 319. 
 
 X. 
 
 JCenophon, Xenopbon, (Xenopbont) 
 
 is. 
 
 Y. 
 Year, annus, adv. 
 Yearly, quotannis, i. 
 Yes, immo. 
 Yesterday, heri. 
 Yet, tamen. 
 Yoke, jugum, i. 
 Young-man, juvenis, is (ni.) : ado. 
 
 lescens. 
 You, vos {sing., tu). 
 Your, vester, tra, tram, 134. 
 Youth, juventus, ( juventut) is, 293 
 
 a youth. See young man. 
 
 Z. 
 
 Zeal, studium, i. 
 
EXAMINATION QUESTIONS. 
 
 What is a monosyllable 7 a dissyllable 7 a polysyliable 7 (8.) — ^What is 
 injtection7 — What is the inflection of nowres called ? oi verbs 7 (21, 2 R.) — 
 Name the vowels : the liquids : the c-sounds : p-sounds : t-sounds : double 
 consonants : diphthongs, (23.) — Repeat the general rules of quantity, (24.) 
 — Repeat the general ruks of gender, (25, a.) 
 
 Has the Latin any article 7 (27.) — ^What is the stem of a noun ? (30.) — 
 How many cases of nouns are there ? (31.) — What is the use of the n,omi- 
 native ? the vocative 7 the genitive 7 (33.) — How many declensions 7 — How 
 distinguished ? (34.) — Give nom., voc, and gen. endings of 1st decl. (nom. 
 and voc, a short ; abl., a long). — What is the gender of 1st decl. ? (36, c.) 
 
 Where do you put the unemphatic gen. ? {After its noun, 38, a.) — The 
 emphatic ? {Before its noun, 38, b.) 
 
 What is the subject of a sentence ? the predicate ? (41.) — ^What is an 
 active verb ? transitive 7 intransitive 7 (42.) — ^What does the infinitive 
 express 1 the indicative 7 (43.) — ^What does the present tense express ? 
 the imperfect 7 the future 7 (44.) — What is the infinitive-ending of 1st 
 conj. ? — How do you find the stem of a verb ? (45.) — Give the 3d person 
 endings of the indicative, (46.) — Are the personal pronouns necessarily 
 used in Latin ? (47, R.) — Where do you put the subject nominative in a 
 sentence ? (48, 11.) 
 
 What is the case of the direct object 7 (51.) — Give the accusative-end 
 ings of 1st decl. (52.) — Rule of position for the object accusative 7 (53, II.) 
 
 What does the dative express ? (54) : the ablative ? (55.) — Give th*» 
 case-endings complete, 1st decl. (618) : quantity of final syllables (618, R: 
 1) : gender (618, R. 2) : rule of position for remote object (58, II., a) : for 
 preposition and its noun (58, II., b.) 
 
 Case-endings, 2d decl., masc. (61.) — Name the feminine nouns of 2d decl. 
 (alvns, c6lus, humus, vannus). — ^What nouns have i for vocative-ending? 
 (62, R. 2.) — When to implies motion, how do you render it in Latin? 
 (63, &^.) 
 
 What ?W?SPt PC 2d deol. reject the endings tis and S ? (64-) — ^Which of 
 
402 EXAMINATION aUESTIONS. 
 
 these retain the 6 in the oblique cases ? (65, R.) — "What case is used with 
 words of abounding and wanting 1 (66, II., a) 
 
 Case-endings, 2d dec!., neut. (68.) -Short final syllables in 2d decl. (us, 
 6, una, a). — Long final syllables (i, 6, is, 6s). — What is the infinitive-end- 
 ing' of verbs, 2d conj. ? (70.) — Give the 3d person endings, indie, present: 
 imperfect: future, (71.) 
 
 Give the endings of adjectives of Class I. (76.) — What adjectives reject 
 the endings u s and e ? (77.) — Where do you put the unemphatic adjective 
 in a sentence ? (78, II., a.) — WTiere do you put the adjective belonging to 
 a noun which governs another in the genitive ? {Before the genitive, 78 
 II., b.) 
 
 Give the 3d pers. endings of e s s e, indie. (79) : rule of syntax for predi- 
 cate noun (80, a) : for predicate adjective, (81, b.) 
 
 Infinitive-ending, 3d conj. (83.) — Indie, 3d pers. endings, present : im- 
 perfect: future, (84.) — Infinitive-ending, 4th conj. (86.) — Indie, 3d pers., 
 present : imperfect : future, (87.) — Where do you put the adjective be- 
 longing to a noun governed by a preposition ? (89, II.) 
 
 What syllable forms the 3d pers. pass, ending, indie. ? (90.) — In putting 
 an active sentence into the passive form, what changes occur 1 (93, II.) — 
 WTien is the preposition omitted ? (93, II., R.) 
 
 Case-endings, 3d decL (98.) — ^What is the gender of most nouns which 
 add s to form the nom. ? (99.) — Decline sermo: urbs: lex. 
 
 What is the gender of nouns in al, ar, e ? (102, R. 2.) — Endings of ad- 
 jectives of 2d class? (104.) — Decline brSvis. (105.) — What adjectives 
 take 6 instead of i in abl. ? (105, R. 2.) — What case is used with adjec- 
 tives of advantage or disadvantage ? of likeness or unliketiess 1 (106, 
 XL, c.) 
 
 Whafadjectives'lonn Class ni.? (107.)— Decline felix. (108.)— Which 
 ending do participles in n s take in abl. sing., 6 or i ? (108, R. 1, b.) 
 
 I 
 
 What nouns belong to 4tb decl. ? (110.) — Give the case-endings, masc. 
 (Ill) : neut. (Ill) : quantity of final syllables, 4th decl. (621, II. 1) : fem. 
 nouns of 4th decl. (621, R. 2.)— What nouns take ubus in abl. plur. ? (621, 
 R. 3.)— Decline dSmiis, (112, 3.)— What does d6mi mean? (112, 4.)— 
 Rule of sjTitax for verbs compounded with trans, (113, 11., a.) — Is trans 
 ever repeated ? 
 
 WTiat nouns belong to 5th decl. 7 (114.)— Case-endings, 5th decl. ? (116.) 
 -When is the e in ei long 7 when short ? (116. R.)— What nouns of 5th 
 
EXAMINATION aUESTIONS. 403 
 
 decl. have plur. complete ? (117, R.) — Time when is put in what case ? 
 (118, IL, c.) 
 
 Decline ego, (120.) — vVhat is the adj. personal pron. of 1st pers. sing. ? 
 of 1st pers. plur. ? (122.) — Give 1st pers. endings, 1st conj., act. indie, pres- 
 ent : imperfect : ful^ire. — Also, pass, present : imperfect : future. (123.) — 
 What case is used with esse to denote the possessor ? (125, II., a.) — Is 
 cum prefixed or suflSxed to the personal pronouns ? (125, IL, b.) 
 
 What are the 1st person endings, act. and pass., for 2d conj., indie, 
 present ? imperfect ? fature ? (126.) — The same for 3d conj. (127.) — 
 Fourth, (128.) 
 
 Decline tu, (130.) — What are the 2d pers. tiidings, 1st conj., act. and 
 pass., indie, present ? imperfect ? future ? (131.) — The same for 2d conj. 
 (133.) — ^What are the possessive pronouns of 2d pers. ? (134.) — How is nS 
 used ? (135, n., a.) — ^Where is causa placed in a sentence ? (135, IL, b.) 
 
 What are the 2d pers. endings of verbs, 3d conj., act. and pass., indie, 
 pres. ? imperfect ? future ? (136.)— The same for 4th conj. (137.) 
 
 Decline the reflexive pronoun sui, (142.) — What is the adjective-personal 
 pronoun of 3d pers. ? (143.) — What case does imperare govern ? (147.) 
 
 Why are demonstrative pronouns so called? (149.) — ^Decline is, e a, id, 
 (150.) — Inflect esse, pres., imperf, and fut. indie. (151.) — Distinguish 
 Buus and ejus, (153.) — ^What is the demonstrative of the 1st person? 
 (156) : of 2d ? (157) : of 3d ? (158.) 
 
 Decline qui, (164.) — Syntax of the relative, (167, b.) 
 
 Decline quis, (170.) — How is the answer ^es given ? (173.) — What an- 
 swer does num expect ? (175, b.) 
 
 Name the seven indefinite pronouns, (178.) — How are indef. pronouns 
 used with a genitive ? (180, a.) 
 
 Name the correlative pronouns, (184.) — Give the Latin for much gold 
 '186, a) : for much money (186, a). — Distinguish tantum and tantus, 
 (186, obs.) 
 
 Hepeat the first twelve numerals in all four classes, (189.) — Give the 
 j«ule for accus. of time or space, (191.) 
 
 Decline anas, dao, and tres, (194.) — WTiat words are decUned like 
 anus 1 (194, R. 1.) — Is the penult of unius long or short? 
 
404 EXAMINATION QUESTIONS. 
 
 Inflect capSi-e in pres., imperf., and fut. indie. (199.) 
 
 What are deponent verbs ? (206.) — ^How are they conjugated? (Ans., 
 like passives.) 
 
 How do you form deHvative adverbs from adjectives of Class I. ? (215, 
 1) : of Class II. ? (215, 2.) — What is the general position of the adverb in 
 a sentence 1 (218, a.) — Where is fere placed 1 (218, b.) — How is nequi- 
 de mused? (218, c.) 
 
 What prepositions govern the accus. or ablat. ? (223.) — Give the rule of 
 apposition, (225, a.) 
 
 Give the person-endings, pres. indie, act. : tense-stem : connecting- 
 vowel : 1st eonj.: 2d: 3d: 4th, (234.) 
 
 Imperfect tense, person -endings : tense-stem, four conj's. : connecting- 
 vowel, (237.) — Future tense, 1st and 2d conj., person-endings : tense- 
 stems : connecting-vowels (238) : 3d and 4th conj., fut., person-ending : 
 tense-stem: connecting-vowel, (240.) 
 
 Passive-endings, (243.)^- Apparent irregularities, viz., 1st pers. pres. 
 indie. : 3d conj., 2d pers. sing. pres. : 1st and 2d conj., fut., 2d pers. sing. 
 (244.) 
 
 Rules of Quantity. — Monosyllables ending in a vowel (247, a.) : excep- 
 tions, — Monosyllables ending in a consonant: exceptions, (247, b.) — 
 auantity of a final (248) : e final (249) : of i final (250) : of o final (251) : 
 of u final, (252.) — Final syllables ending in a consonant, (253.) — Final as, 
 es, OS : exceptions, (254.) — Final is and us : exceptions, (255.) — Increase 
 of nouns (257) : of verbs, (258.) — Penults of perf. tense, (259.) — Adjectives 
 in idus, icus : in inus : in ilis, bills, (260.) 
 
 What are the tenses for action completed ? (262) : their endings ? (263.) 
 — Give the perf., pluperf., and fut. perf. of esse, (264.) — Distinguish perf. 
 pres. from perf aorist, (265.) — What case do the compounds of esse with 
 prepositions govern ? (267, b.) 
 
 How is perf. stem formed in most verbs of 1st conj. ? of 2d ? of 4th t 
 (270.) — Give perf. of amare, monere, audire, (271.) 
 
 How is perf. stem formed of most verbs of 3d conj. ? (276.) — Euphonic 
 rules : (1) k-soand before s : (2) b before s : (3) t-sound before s, (277.)— 
 What answer does nonne expect? (280.) — How is the pluperf. formed? 
 the fut. perf. ? (283.) 
 
EXAMINATION aUESTIONS. 405 
 
 Name the six classes of nouns of 3d decl. (291.)— Euphonic rales, (S92.) 
 -How do you express "on the top of the mountain" in Latin ? (297.) 
 
 Decline Jupiter : Bos: Respublica: Jusjurandum, (351.) 
 
 Repeat the rules of gender, 3d decl., from nominative formation, with 
 the exceptions under each, (355.) 
 
 Comparison of Adjectives. — ^What is the compar. ending ? (357.) — If the 
 stem ends in a vowel, how is the compar. formed ? (357, R.) — Syntax of 
 compar., when quam is omitted, (360, c.) 
 
 Superl. ending, (363.)— Stems in er add what ending? (364.)— Stems 
 in 1, what ending 7 (365.)— What case is used with superlatives ? (367, h.) 
 
 Compare bonus, malus, magnus, multus, parvus, senex, juve- 
 nis, extern s, inferus, superus, posterus, (370.)— Comp. dives, 
 benevolus. 
 
 Are adverbs ccMoapared ?— How ? (376.) 
 
 What is the supine ? (377.) — Form supine-stem, 1st conj. : 2d : 3d : 4th, 
 (378.)— How is supine in um used? (379.)— How is supine in u used? 
 (380.) — Name the supines in u which are in common use, (381.) — What 
 case answers the question whither 7 (383.) 
 
 What are the four ways of forming perf. stem, 1st conj. ? (387.)— How 
 many verbs does each class contain ? (387.)— How do you form perf., 
 pluperf., or fut. perf. of these verbs ? (388.) 
 
 What are the Jive ways of forming the perf. stem, 2d conj. ? (394.) — 
 How many verbs does each class contain ? (395.)— What rules of euphonv 
 are to be applied here ? (395, III., a, b, c.) 
 
 Name the six ways of forming the perf. stem, 3d conj. (400.)— What 
 rules of euphony are to be applied in forming perf. stems of verbs of 1st 
 class ? (401, 1, &c.) 
 
 How do verbs of 2d class form perf. stem ? (406) : verbs of 3d class ? — 
 In what sense is ad often used by Caesar? (408, c.) 
 
 How do verbs of 4th class form perf. stem ? (411.) — What vowel chan- 
 ges must be observed here ? (411, a, h, c.) — Give the rule for verbs of de- 
 manding (413, 1): for verbs of sparing ' i\Z^ 4.) — What is the perf. of 
 cad6r6? ofcoedgrft? (413, ^p".) 
 
406 EXAMINATION aUESTIONS. 
 
 How do verbs of 5th class form perf stem ? (416.)— Form the perf. 
 Items of the io verbs in (416, c), — What is said of the prcenomen 1 (418, c.) 
 
 How do verbs of 6th class form perf. stem 1 (421.) — What cases are 
 osed after distribuSre ? (423, c.) 
 
 What are the Jive ways of forming the perf. stem in 4th conj. ? (426.) — 
 How many verbs does each class contain ? (427.) — How is the manner of 
 an action expressed in Latin? (428, a.) 
 
 How are the passive tenses for completed action formed ? (431.) — How 
 is the perf. part, formed ? (432, b.) — How is it inflected ? (432, a.) — Inflect 
 the perf, plnperf, and fut. perf pass, of a mar 6, (433.) — How is the perf. 
 pass. part, sometimes used with est? (435, c.) 
 
 How many participles are there in Latin, act. and pass.? (438.) — Give 
 the endings of the present part. act. in the four conjugations, (439, a.) — 
 How is it declined? (440.) — Has the Latin any active part, to express 
 compile action ? (None, excepting in deponent verbs, 440, a, i.) — What 
 is the use of the part, in discourse ? (442, c) — Give the words in which 
 cannot stand first in a clause or sentence, (442, c.) 
 
 How is the fut. part. act. formed ? (445.) — Inflect the periphrastic pres., 
 past, and fut. of amarS, (446.) — Give the rule for the use of the fut. part, 
 with verbs of motion, (448.) 
 
 How is the perf. pass. part, formed ? (451, a.) — How is it inflected ? 
 (451, J.) — How do deponent verbs use the perf. part, form ? (451, c.) — What 
 is the case of the place tohere 1 (453, a) : of the place tohence 7 (453, b] : of 
 the place whither 1 (453, c.) 
 
 When is the part, used in the ablative with a noun ? (456.) — How ia 
 the want of a perf. act. part, supplied in Latin? (457.) — Can a noun be 
 used in the ablative absolute with another noun ? (Yes : 458.) 
 
 How does the infin. express action ? (465.) — Give the infin. forms, aet 
 and pass., in all the conjugations, (466.) — Give the rule for the comple- 
 mentary infin. (468, a.) 
 
 Name the classes of verbs which take after them the accns. and infin. 
 ^471.) — Give the method of changing English sentences commencing with 
 hcd into the Latin accus. and infin. (472, 1, 2, 3.) 
 
 Give the formation of the perf. infin. pass. (478.) — ^When the accus. ia 
 dged with this infin., with what does its pait. agi-ee ? (478.) 
 
 How is the infin. fut. act. formed ? (482) : the infin. fut. pass. ? (483.) 
 
EXAMINATION aUESTlCNS. 407 
 
 Under what form does the gerund express the action of the verb ? (487 
 a.) — How is the genind-stem formed? (487, b.) — How the cases of the ge- 
 rund ? (487, c.) — What rules apply to the cases of the infin. and gerund 7 
 (489.) — Is the infin. or the accus. ger. used with a preposition ? (489, R.)— 
 What case does the ger. govern ? (490.) 
 
 How does the gerundive express the action of a verb ? (495, a.) — How 
 are its cases formed ? (495, b.) — How is it used ? (496.) — When must the 
 gerundive be used instead of the gerund ? — When mai/ it be so used ? 
 (496, R.) — After what verbs does the gerundive express a purpose or ob- 
 ject ? (498, |^=.) 
 
 What does the gerandive in the nom. neut. with esse express ? (501, 
 a.) — What does it express when used with esse as a verbal adjective 7 
 (502.) — ^What is the case of the person in both these consti'uctions ? 
 (The dative.) 
 
 How does imper. mood express the action of the verb ? (507.) — ^What is 
 not with the imper. ? (510, Rule.) 
 
 When is a sentence compound ? (513, a.) — Give an example of a prin- 
 cipal sentence : of a subordinate sentence, (513, c.) — Give some of the 
 classes of subordinate sentences, (514, a, &c.) 
 
 Repeat the copulative conjunctions, (515.) — How are et and qu e used ? 
 (517, a): ac? (517, b) — What does et followed by another et mean? 
 (517, c.) — What is the Latin for again and again 7 for not only — but 
 also 7 (517, d.) 
 
 Name the disjunctive conjunctions, (519.) — ^What does aut indicate ? 
 vel? (519, R. 1 and 2.)— How is ve used? (519, R. 3.)— What do these 
 conj. mean when repeated ? (519, R. 4.) — Give the adversatives, (520.) — 
 What does sed express ? (522, a): aut em? (522, b.) 
 
 How does the subjunc. mood express affirmation ? (524.) — Inflect subjunc. 
 pres. of esse, (525.) — Inflect subjunc. pres. act. and pass, of amarS, 
 m6ner6, rSgSre, audire, (526, b.) — How may a wish be expressed in 
 Latin? (528, a.) — How may a softened command be expressed ? (528, b.) — 
 How do you express a direct question when doubt is implied ? (528, c.) 
 
 Inflect subjunc. perf. of e s s e, (531,)— How do regular verbs form subjunc. 
 perf. act. 1 (532, 1) : subjunc. perf pass. ? (532, 2.)— Inflect the subjunc. 
 perf. act. and pass, of amarS, m6n6r6, r6g6r6, audirS, (532,3.) — How 
 is the subjunc. perf used imperatively ? (534, a.) — How may a supposed 
 case be expressed ? (534, b.) — How may a softened assertion be express- 
 ed ? (534, c.)— What interrogative sentences take the subjunc. ? (534, e.) 
 
408 EXAMINATION QUESTIONS. 
 
 How is the subjunc. imperf. formed? (537.) — Repeat the paradigm 
 ^38.) — How is the subjunc. pluperf. act. aud pass, formed ? (539, a and h.) 
 — Give the paradigm, (539, c) — Repeat the conditional conjunctions, (540, 
 c.) — What is a conditional sentence ? (540, i.) — In conditional sentences 
 how do yoa express a real condition ? a possible condition ? an unreal or 
 impossible in present time ? an unreal or impossible condition in past 
 time ? (542, b, Rule.) — Can the perf. or pluperf. indie, ever be used with 
 %\1 (No.) 
 
 Inflect posse in subjunc. pres. : imperf. : perf. : pluperf (545.) — State 
 the composition of posse. — Repeat the final conjunctions, (546.) — How is 
 purpose or aim expressed in English ? how in Latin ? (548, a.) — How is an 
 object to be provided against introduced in English? how in Latin ? (548, 
 0.) — Can a purpose or aim be expressed in Latin by an infin. ? (No.) 
 
 Give the primary tenses of the Latin verb : the historical, (551, 2, a, b.) 
 — What is the rule for the succession of tenses ? (551, 3.) — How is a result 
 expressed in English? how in Latin? (553, a.) — ^What is the rule for ut 
 signifying that 7 (553, b.) 
 
 How is the want of a fut. subjunc. supplied in Latin ? (556.) — Give the 
 pkradigm, periph. conj. subjunc. (556.) — When does quo express a pur- 
 pose instead of ut ? (558, a.) — In what sense is quin used ? (1) after neg- 
 ative sentences? (2) after non dubito, &c. ? (558, b.) — When is quo- 
 minus used in preference to ne ? (558, c.) 
 
 What are the two uses of quum ? (561.) — What is the first use called ? 
 the second? (561.) — When is quum followed by the indie? (563, a.) — 
 When is quum temporal followed by the imperf. or pluperf. subjunc? 
 (563, i.)— What is the rule for quum causal ? (563, c.^ 
 
 When is the rel. pronoun followed by the subjunc. ? (566.) — Give the 
 rule for the use of subjunc. in a rel. sentence, (568, d.) — Is the rel. to ex- 
 press a purpose very common in Caesar? (Yes.) 
 
 In what two ways may we relate the words of another ? (571.) — What 
 is each method called ? (571.) — What kinds of sentences are introduced in 
 oratio obliqua? (Either principal or suboi'dinate.) — What mood is 
 used in principal sentences in oratio obliqua? (574, a): in subordinate 
 sentences ? (574, b.) 
 
 What are impersonal verbs? (577.) — Give the classes of impersonala 
 (578.) — What impersonals are followed by the accus. of the person and 
 the gen. of the cause ? (579, a.) 
 
EXAMINATION aUESTlONS. 409 
 
 Give the rale for oportet and decet (584, a) : for placet (584, b) * 
 for Ixcet andlibet (584, c) : for interest and refert (584, d). 
 
 State the composition of possum, and repeat the paradigm, (587.) 
 
 Give the composition of nolo and malo, and repeat the paradigms 
 (592.) — Give the three rules for velle, nolle, and mall e, in (594). 
 
 Hepeat the paradigm of irregular forms of ferre, (596.) — How are the 
 remaining tenses formed? (596, b.) — What is the meaning of fSrunt? 
 (598, b.) 
 
 Of what verb does fieri form the pass.? (600.) — How are the tenses 
 formed ? (600.) — Give the paradigm. — What is the quantity of i in fieri ? 
 (600, U.) — ^What forms of edere are similar to those of esse ? (601.) — 
 Give the paradigm. — What is the quantity of e s, from esse? of e s, from 
 edere? (601,11.) 
 
 What conjugation does ire follow ? (605.) — Give the paradigm. — What 
 is said of the compounds ? (605, 1, 2.) — How are queo and nequeo con- 
 jugated ? (606.) 
 
 Inflect aio (609) : inquam (610) : novi (611). — How do you distinguish 
 between the use of aio and of inquam? (613, b, ^T-) — What fonn of 
 COB pi is used with a pass, infin.? (613, c ^^.) 
 M M 
 
 THE END 
 
PROF. M'CLINTOCK AND CROOKS'S 
 
 Series of QElementarg 
 
 GREEK AND LATIN BOOKS. 
 
 PUBLISHED AND IN JOURSE OF PUBLICATION 
 
 By Harper and Brothers, New 7ork. 
 
 DESIGNED FOR THE USE OF SCHOOLS AND COLLEGES. 
 
 ICP At the request of many teachers, the plan of the Series has been altered for the 
 purpose of introducing a Latin Reader as the " Second Book in Latin." The First 
 and Second Books in Latin and Greek will thus afford all that is necessary in pre- 
 paratory training, before beginning the regular reading of the classic authors. The 
 " Introduction to Writing Latin" will form the -work heretofore announced as the "Sec 
 ond Book in Latin," which has been long in careful preparation, 
 
 iFirst iSook in Catin. 
 
 Containing Grammar, Exercises, and Vocabularies, on the Method o< 
 constant Imitation and Repetition. With Summaries of Etymol- 
 ogy and Syntax. 12mo, Sheep extra, 75 cents. {Fifth Edition.) 
 
 Quonh Book in £atin. 
 
 Being a siifficient Latin Reader, in Extracts from Cassar and Cicero, 
 with Notes and full Vocabulary. 12mo. (Soon.) 
 
 SixQt Book in C^reek. 
 
 Containing a full View of the Forms of Words, with Vocabularies 
 and copious Exercises, on the Method of constant Imitation and 
 Repetition. 12mo, Sheep extra, 75 cents. {Second Edition.) 
 
 Bccorib Book in (3xtck, 
 
 Containing a Syntax, with Reading Lessons in Prose; Prosody and 
 Reading Lessons in Verse. Forming a sufficient Greek Reader, 
 with Notes and copious Vocabulary. 12mo. {Nearly ready.) 
 
 Sntrobuction to toriting Catin. 
 
 Containing a full Syntax, on the Basis of Kiihner, with Loci Memo- 
 riales selected from Cicero, and copious Exercises for Imitation 
 and Repetition. 12mo. 
 
 Intended for higher classes in schools and lower classes in colleges. 
 
 Practical Introbnction to £atin Stgle. 
 
 Principally translated from Grysar's " Theorie des lateinischen 
 
 Stiles." 
 
 This work will supply a want which has long been felt in our high schools and col- 
 leges. 
 
 Testimonials to the First Books in Latin and Greek. 
 
 The " First Book in Latin," by Professors M'Clintock and Crooks, I prefer, on many 
 accounts, to any other of the elementary Latin grammars now used in our schools ; 
 and I have no doubt that its philosophical and eminently prac^ica/ character will se- 
 cure for it great popularity, both among- teachers and pupils. — Rev. J. F. Schro.eder, 
 Rector of St. Ann's Hall, New Yoik. 
 
 If the rest of the series are equal to the " First Book in Greek," they form the best 
 introduction to the classical tongues with which we are acquainted. — Prof. Hart, 
 Principal of the Central High School, Philadelphia. 
 
 The authors have been very happy in the distribution and arrangement of the sub- 
 jects, so as to introduce the beginner gradually to the difficulties, and yet carry him 
 forward rapidly to an acquaintance with the essential forms and principles of Greek 
 grammar. There is also a perspicuity, definiteness, and conciseness in the languago 
 with which I am exceedingly pleased — Prof. W. S. TvLER, Amherst Coihge, Mass 
 
4 Testimonials to the First Books in Latin <xnd Greek 
 
 A pretty careful examination convinces me of its great value as an introducv •« 
 book, and its decided superiority to every other I have seen. L ippesii's to me j »• 
 have greatly improved upon Arnold, and been eminently successsful in e gradual and 
 not too rapid unfolding of grammatical principles.— Prof. Stukges, Hanover College, 
 Indianna. 
 
 I had tried all sorts of books, from Adams's and Ross's down to Andrews and Stod 
 dard's, Wells's, Krebs's, Cleveland's, and lastly Arnold's, and think the " First 
 Book" is incomparably superior as a practical work to any other in use. — C. W. 
 Blake, Principal of Prune Street Classical Academy, Philadelphia, 
 
 1 have given the classical books of Professors M'Ulintock and Crooks a thorough 
 examination, and am highly pleased with them. I have introduced both the First 
 Latin and First Greek into my school, and am convinced that they elicit and keep up 
 a greater interest in the study of those languages than any I have yet used. — Rev. 
 Charles Reynolds, A.M., Rector of Williamsburgh Grammar School. 
 
 I have examined with much attention the "First Book in Latin" of Professors 
 M'Clintock and Crooks, and am happy to bear testimony to the practical i.act and sound 
 scholarship which they have shown in the preparation of the work. The arrange- 
 ment is simple and lucid, and the gradual steps by which the youthful student is in- 
 troduced to the grammatical laws of the language, both as it regards etymology and 
 syntax, are such as, in my estimation, to render the book deserving of the patronage 
 of every instructor. I most heartily wish it the extensive circulation it so eminently 
 deserves. — John J. Owen, Principal of the Cornelius Institute. 
 
 I have examined and used in my school M'Clintock and Crooks's First Books in 
 Latin and Greek, and fully approve of the design of the works. I think they are cal- 
 culated to awaken greatly the interest of the scholar in lessons that have generally 
 been considered tedious, at the same time that they convey a thorough knowledge of 
 elementary principles. — Aaron Rand, Collegiate and Mercantile School, New York 
 
 I regard the " First Book in Latin" as the best yet published in our country.-- 
 Prof. Lewis, Woodward College, Ohio. 
 
 The writers have added valuable improvements to the excellent works of Kiihuer 
 and Arnold. The analysis of the Third Declension is more satisfactory and philo- 
 sophical than any thing of the kind that I have met with. The rules of syntax are 
 more clearly and briefly expressed than those of any grammar within my knowledge. 
 -Prof. Stafford, University of Alabama. 
 
 I think the " First Book in Latin" better calculated than any work I know to in- 
 duce students, from the beginning, to study Latin critically. We have made it one 
 of the works required as preparatory to college. — Prof. H. B. Lane, Wesleyan Uni- 
 versity, Middletown, Conn. 
 
 \ "e have introduced the " First Book in Latin," and find it far superior to any other 
 el* jentary work. — Prof. Wheeler, Indiana Asbury University. 
 
 1 ne solid, well-arranged, and perspicuous " First Book in Latin," completely sup 
 plies the want I have long felt, as a teacher of Latin, of a liook for beginners. The 
 unusual progess my pupils make in accurate knowledge of the language — knowledge 
 which they can apply without error or difficulty — is the best proof I possess of the 
 practical value of the book. — Rev. J. H. Dashiell, Principal of tho Light Street In 
 stitute, Baltimore. 
 
 The most thorough, practical, and philosophical method of teaching Greek that we 
 have ever seen. — Savannah Republican. 
 
 The best introduction to the classical tongues with which we are acquainted. The 
 " First Book in Greek" is " Greek made easy," not by leaving out all the hard parts, 
 but by presenting the difficulties one at a time, and in the order most consonant to 
 nature and reason. It does equal credit to the scholarship and the practical good 
 lense of its authors. We have seen no school book for many a long year that has 
 given us more unmingled and entire satisfaction.— Sartain's Union Magazine. 
 ' The " First Book in Latin" combines all the advantages of recently-improved meth- 
 ods, and contains many decided improvements. A more philosophical and practical 
 system of teaching Latin we have never seen. — Prof. Salkeld, Naugatuck, Conn. 
 
 The grammatical part of the work is very complete, although condensed into a 
 wonderfully short compass. — Philadelphia Inquirer. 
 
 Among many other advantages, it contains i)recisely such remarks and explanationa 
 as a student wishes to have in the early part of his course, but which, in common 
 grammars, are strangely omitted.— J. A. Devinney, High School, Carlisle, Penn. 
 
 M'Clintock and Crooks's First Books in Latin and Greek are incomparable, and 
 certainly the best books for beginners ever published, and I am convinced will meet 
 with the heartiest commendation from teachers throughout the country.— W. C. S 
 Rich ARBsoa, Professor of Languages, Tuscaloosa. 
 
 The lessons in the " Fi-rst Book in Greek" are so easy, natural, and interestinf , ■ 
 that they must win every boy to the study of the language. I shall -reaommend it tc 
 every teacher.— Proft Martin, Hamj^n Si/dney CcHhgs. 
 
^^ta^^-^. 
 
> 
 
 > 
 
 iJf^lt:^ 
 
YB 3625 
 
 924208 
 
 THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA UBRARY